Canon IR ADV C5255 ServiceManual E R11

Rev. 1.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 Series
Service Manual
Product Overvew
Technology
Periodical Service
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation
1
Appendix
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory,
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the
inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections
of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this
Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual.
consent of Canon Inc.
CANON INC. 2012
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Symbols
Explanation
Check.
Symbols
Explanation
Remove the claw.
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.

In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
Check visually.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Insert the claw.
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
Check the noise.
Use the bundled part.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Disconnect the connector.
Push the part.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
Connect the connector.
Plug the power cable.
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
Remove the cable/wire

from the cable guide or wire
saddle.
Set the cable/wire to the

cable guide or wire saddle.
Remove the screw.
Tighten the screw.
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Turn on the power.
Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
in the machine.
Contents
0 Safety Precautions
2 Technology
CDRH Act------------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-3
Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-4
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-4
About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-4

Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------- 0-4
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-5

Notes Before it Works Serving----------------------------------------------0-5
Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-5
1 Product Overvew
Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2
Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2

Option---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
Controller System -------------------------------------------------------------2-5

Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-5
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-30
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-31

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-31
Various Controls--------------------------------------------------------------------2-33
Service Works----------------------------------------------------------------------2-43
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-44
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-44
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Service work------------------------------------------------------------------------2-80
Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-81
Feature---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-5
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-81
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-84
Service work------------------------------------------------------------------------2-91
Specification---------------------------------------------------------------------1-6
Pickup Feed System-------------------------------------------------------- 2-93
Product feature---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5

Features at servicing--------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
Specification-------------------------------------------------------------------------Weight / Size------------------------------------------------------------------------Productivity (Print speed)--------------------------------------------------------Paper type----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
Name of Parts-------------------------------------------------------------------1-9
External View------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9

Cross Sectional View-------------------------------------------------------------1-10
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
Power Switch----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
Description of Control Panel----------------------------------------------------1-12
Service Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-93
Various Controls--------------------------------------------------------------------2-98
Service Works-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-108
External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 2-109
Various Controls------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-109

Service Operations-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-120
MEAP------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-121
Changes---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-121
Preparation for Using SSO-H------------------------------------------------- 2-122
Preparation for Using SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-124
Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-132
Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-134

MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-138
MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-140
Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-149
System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-161
Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-164
MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-167
MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-169
Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-170
Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-171
MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log
Management---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-171
Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-174
Formatting and Replacing the HDD----------------------------------------- 2-178
Reference material-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-198
Option for exclusive individual measure----------------------------------- 2-200
Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-203
Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-203

Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-204
Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-205
E-RDS Setup---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-206
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-214
Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-216
Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-220
Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-222
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-222
Installing MEAP Application/System Option------------------------------- 2-224
Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-227
Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-229
System Management Operations-------------------------------------------- 2-237
Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-244
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-245
DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-249
DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-249
3 Periodical Service
Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts-------3-2
Cleaning Parts------------------------------------------------------------------3-8
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
List of Cover-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2

List of Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
Clutch / Solenoid-------------------------------------------------------------------4-10
Switch---------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13
Motor----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-16
Fan------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
Sensor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
Heater / Other-----------------------------------------------------------------------4-33
PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36
Conector-----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-42
Main Controller--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-63
Removing the HDD----------------------------------------------------------------4-63

Removing the Main Controller PCB 1----------------------------------------4-66
Removing the Main Controller PCB 2----------------------------------------4-67
Opening the Controller Box-----------------------------------------------------4-71
Removing the DC Controller PCB---------------------------------------------4-72
Removing the Main Power Unit------------------------------------------------4-73
Removing the AC Driver---------------------------------------------------------4-75
Removing the Control Panel----------------------------------------------------4-76
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 4-78

Cleaning the Dust-blocking Glass---------------------------------------------4-78
Removing the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning Pad-------------------------4-78
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------------------4-79
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 4-86
Removing the Toner Filter-------------------------------------------------------4-86

Removing the ITB Unit-----------------------------------------------------------4-86
Cleaning the Patch Sensor------------------------------------------------------4-89
Remove the Patch Sensor (front,center,rear)------------------------------4-90
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit-----------------------------------------------4-91
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit--------------------------------------4-92

Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit----------------------------------------4-93
Removing the ITB------------------------------------------------------------------4-95
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)---------------------------------4-99
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y)-------------------------- 4-101
Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller-------------------------- 4-105
Reinstalling the ITB-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-108
Removing the Recycle Toner Bottle----------------------------------------- 4-113
Pulling Out the Process Unit-------------------------------------------------- 4-113
Removing the Process Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-114
Reinstalling the Process Unit------------------------------------------------- 4-115
Removing the Drum Unit------------------------------------------------------- 4-117
Reinstalling the Drum Unit----------------------------------------------------- 4-118
Removing the Developing Assembly---------------------------------------- 4-120
Installing a new Developing Assembly------------------------------------- 4-122
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit-------------------------------------- 4-124
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary
Transfer Separation Guide Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-126
Reinstalling the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary
Transfer Separation Guide Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-128
Removing the Toner Bottle manually--------------------------------------- 4-129
Removing the Main Drive Unit------------------------------------------------ 4-132
Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover----------------------- 4-136
Removing the Hopper (M)----------------------------------------------------- 4-138
Removing the Hopper (Y)------------------------------------------------------ 4-140
Removing the Hopper (C)----------------------------------------------------- 4-143
Removing the Hopper (Bk)---------------------------------------------------- 4-146
Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-149
Removing the Fixing Assembly----------------------------------------------- 4-149

Removing the Film Unit-------------------------------------------------------- 4-150
Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide-------------------------------------- 4-153
Cleaning the Shutter Cover--------------------------------------------------- 4-154
Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing--------- 4-155
Pickup Feed System------------------------------------------------------ 4-157

Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide----------------------------------- 4-157
Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide----------------------------------- 4-157
Cleaning the Registration Roller--------------------------------------------- 4-158

Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Assembly--------------------------- 4-158
Cleaning the Transparency Sensor----------------------------------------- 4-159
Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet--------- 4-159
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly---------------------------- 4-161
Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller----------------------------------------------- 4-161
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller------------------------------------------ 4-162
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel------------------------- 4-162
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Lower Roller, Wheel------------------------- 4-163
Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis,
and the First, Second and Third Delivery Rollers------------------------ 4-163
Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit--------------------------- 4-164
Removing the First Delivery Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-166
Removing the Duplex Unit----------------------------------------------------- 4-168
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller------------------------- 4-169
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller------------------- 4-170
Removing the Pickup Roller--------------------------------------------------- 4-173
Removing the Feed Roller----------------------------------------------------- 4-173
Removing the Separation Roller--------------------------------------------- 4-174
Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear------------------------------- 4-174
Removing the Right Lower Cover------------------------------------------- 4-175
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit-------------------------------------- 4-178
Removing the Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path Sensor----- 4-179
Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover------------------------------- 4-181
Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit-------------------------------------- 4-182
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit------------------------------ 4-183
Option------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-184
Removing the Reader ADF Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-184
Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board ---- 4-187
The kind of data to handle----------------------------------------------------- 4-187
5 Adjustment
Main Controller-----------------------------------------------------------------5-2
HDD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2
Main controller PCB 1------------------------------------------------------------- 5-3
Main controller PCB 2------------------------------------------------------------- 5-3
DC controller PCB------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4

TPM PCB----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4
Image Formation System----------------------------------------------------5-5

Developing Assembly-------------------------------------------------------------Patch sensor------------------------------------------------------------------------ITB Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------------ITB-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Secondary Transfer Inner Roller-----------------------------------------------Secondary Transfer Outer Roller----------------------------------------------Hopper Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-7
Pickup Feed System----------------------------------------------------------5-8
Geometric Characteristics Adjustment---------------------------------------- 5-8

aMethod of Setting 8K and 16K (Chinese Paper)------------------------- 5-11
Method of Setting Special Paper----------------------------------------------- 5-11
6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check---------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
Initial check items list-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-3
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-3
Steps to select the test print TYPE--------------------------------------------- 6-3
How to use the test print---------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Troubleshooting items--------------------------------------------------------6-7
Troubleshooting items list--------------------------------------------------------- 6-7

Image Faults------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-7
Operation Error---------------------------------------------------------------------6-14
Version upgrade-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-17
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-17
Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-23
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device-------------------6-38
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-53
Version Upgrade via CDS-------------------------------------------------------6-54
Error Code---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-83
Controller Self Diagnosis------------------------------------------------- 6-102
Controller Self Diagnosis------------------------------------------------------- 6-102

Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs----------------------------6-111
Debug log---------------------------------------------------------------------6-113
Scope of Application------------------------------------------------------------ 6-113

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-113
Collecting System Information------------------------------------------------ 6-114
Network Packet Capture------------------------------------------------------- 6-118
7 Error Code
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
Error Code Details------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-4
Jam Code---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-94

image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235--------------7-94
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 / Color Image Reader Unit-F1-7-95
Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1-------------------------------------7-97
Inner Finisher-E1-------------------------------------------------------------------7-98
Alarm Code------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-100
Alarm Code------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-100
8 Service Mode
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Note on useing service mode---------------------------------------------------Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------Service mode item explanations-----------------------------------------------I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description-----------------------------COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------Security features-------------------------------------------------------------------Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------Language switch-------------------------------------------------------------------Back-up of service mode---------------------------------------------------------The data output of the service data print-------------------------------------
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-7
COPIER------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-10
DISPLAY-----------------------------------------------------------------------------8-10
IO--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-59
ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-83
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-139
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-159
TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-237
COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-241
FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-255
DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-255
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-255
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-257
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-259
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-259
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-263
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-264
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-266
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-266
9 Installation
How to Check this Installation Procedure--------------------------------9-2
When Using the Parts Included in the Package---------------------------- 9-2
Symbols in the Illustration-------------------------------------------------------- 9-2
Things to do Before Installation--------------------------------------------9-2
Selecting an Installing Location------------------------------------------------- 9-2
Points to Note Before Installation------------------------------------------9-4

Combination Table of Accessory Installation----------------------------9-4
Combination of the Options installing to the Right Side of the Host
Machine------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-4
Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------9-5

Unpacking------------------------------------------------------------------------9-8
Installation Procedure------------------------------------------------------- 9-12
Installing the Scanner-------------------------------------------------------------9-12

Installing the Drum Unit----------------------------------------------------------9-12
Fixing the Machine in Place-----------------------------------------------------9-20
Setting the Environment Heater Switch--------------------------------------9-21
Turning the Main Power ON / Setting the Toner Container-------------9-22
Turning OFF the Main Power Switch-----------------------------------------9-24
Setting for K Paper (China only)-----------------------------------------------9-24
Cassette Setting--------------------------------------------------------------------9-25
Checking after the Installation--------------------------------------------------9-26

Auto Adjust Gradation------------------------------------------------------------9-27
Adjusting Image Position---------------------------------------------------------9-28
Installing Other Parts--------------------------------------------------------------9-32
Checking Network Connection-------------------------------------------------9-35
Troubleshooting of Network-----------------------------------------------------9-36
Platen Cover Type S-------------------------------------------------------- 9-38
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-38

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-38
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-38
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-39
Printer Cover-C2------------------------------------------------------------- 9-47

Points to Note before Installation----------------------------------------------9-48
Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-48
Turning Off the Host Machine---------------------------------------------------9-48
Removing the Color Image Reader Unit-------------------------------------9-48
Installation Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------9-53
Reader Heater Unit-J1------------------------------------------------------ 9-61

Cassette Heater Unit-37---------------------------------------------------- 9-65
Checking the Contents (ASIA only)-------------------------------------------9-65

Checking After the Installation--------------------------------------------------9-67
Utility Tray-A2----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-69

When installing the Keyboard---------------------------------------------------9-70
Key Switch Unit-A2---------------------------------------------------------- 9-71
Checking the Content-------------------------------------------------------------9-71

Checking after installation-------------------------------------------------------9-75
Voice Operation Kit C2----------------------------------------------------- 9-76

Setting Check-----------------------------------------------------------------------9-83
Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-83
Voice Guidance Kit-F2------------------------------------------------------ 9-84

Checking after installation-------------------------------------------------------9-91
Operation Check ------------------------------------------------------------------9-91
Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------------------------------ 9-92
Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-92

Setting After Installation-------------------------------------------------------- 9-100
Copy Tray-J1---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-101
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-101

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-101
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-101
Installation procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-102
Setting after installation-------------------------------------------------------- 9-102
Inner 2-way Tray-F1------------------------------------------------------- 9-103
Turning Off the Main Power Switch----------------------------------------- 9-103

Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-104
Setting after installation-------------------------------------------------------- 9-105
Additional Memory Type D (512MB)---------------------------------- 9-106

Pre-Check------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-106
Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-108
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1-------------------------------------------- 9-109
Points to Note Before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-109

Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1--------------9-113
Points to Note Before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-113

Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1----------------------------------------------9-119

Checking Bundled Components--------------------------------------------- 9-119
Product Name-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-119
USB Device Port-E1/E2-------------------------------------------------- 9-126

Points to Note before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-126
Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E1]--------------------------- 9-127
Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E2---------------------------- 9-129
Checking the Contents [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2]---------------- 9-131

[In case of Printer Cover Unit]----------------------------------------------- 9-131
[In case of DADF]---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-141
Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2]------------------------ 9-154
Relocating the Machine-------------------------------------------------- 9-157

Combination of HDD Options------------------------------------------- 9-158
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export--------------------- 9-158
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)--------------------- 9-159
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings---------------------- 9-159
Backup of MEAP Application-------------------------------------------------- 9-160
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled
License Files and Uninstallation--------------------------------------------- 9-160
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H
(Single Sign-ON H)-------------------------------------------------------------- 9-160
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data------------ 9-160
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------- 9-162

[TYPE-1]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-163
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-166
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-166
[TYPE-2]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-167

[TYPE-3]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-180

[TYPE-4]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-193
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-193
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-195

Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when
installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------- 9-207
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-207
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data
Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-208
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work
(Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)--------- 9-208
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD
Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)--------------------------------------------- 9-208
[TYPE-5]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-209
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-209
[TYPE-6]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-226
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-226

Installing the LED Board------------------------------------------------------- 9-231
Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-237
Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-237
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-237
[TYPE-7]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-238
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-238
[TYPE-8]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-253
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-253
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when
installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------- 9-273

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD
Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)--------------------------------------------- 9-274
[TYPE-9]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-275
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-275
[TYPE-10]-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-295
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-295
Installing the Encryption Board----------------------------------------------- 9-308
[TYPE-11]-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-314
been Installed--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-314
Installing the Removable HDD Kit------------------------------------------- 9-321
Appendix
Service Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Special Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Solvents and Oils--------------------------------------------------------------------- IV
General Timing Chart----------------------------------------------------------- V
General Timing Chart-----------------------------------------------------------------V
General Circuit Diagram Signal Input/Output List---------------------- VII

General Circuit Diagram -----------------------------------------------------XIII
General Circuit Diagram (1/16)-------------------------------------------------- XIII

General Circuit Diagram (2/16)-------------------------------------------------- XIV
General Circuit Diagram (3/16)---------------------------------------------------XV
General Circuit Diagram (4/16)-------------------------------------------------- XVI
General Circuit Diagram (5/16)------------------------------------------------- XVII
General Circuit Diagram (6/16)------------------------------------------------ XVIII
General Circuit Diagram (7/16)-------------------------------------------------- XIX
General Circuit Diagram (8/16)---------------------------------------------------XX
General Circuit Diagram (9/16)-------------------------------------------------- XXI
General Circuit Diagram (10/16)----------------------------------------------- XXII
General Circuit Diagram (11/16)---------------------------------------------- XXIII
General Circuit Diagram (12/16)---------------------------------------------- XXIV
General Circuit Diagram (13/16)-----------------------------------------------XXV
General Circuit Diagram (14/16)---------------------------------------------- XXVI

General Circuit Diagram (15/16)--------------------------------------------- XXVII
General Circuit Diagram (16/16)-------------------------------------------- XXVIII
List of User Mode----------------------------------------------------------- XXIX
Environment Settings------------------------------------------------------------ XXIX

Adjustment/Maintenance---------------------------------------------------- XXXVIII
Function Settings--------------------------------------------------------------- XXXIX
Set Destination------------------------------------------------------------------------- L
Management Settings--------------------------------------------------------------- LI
Backup Data----------------------------------------------------------------------LV
Detail of HDD partition--------------------------------------------------------LXI
Soft counter specifications--------------------------------------------------LXII
Soft counter specifications------------------------------------------------------- LXII
Removal---------------------------------------------------------------------- LXVIII
Removal----------------------------------------------------------------------------LXVIII
Safety Precautions
Act
CDRH
Safety
Laser
of Laser System
Handling
power switch ON
Turn
of Toner
Safety
When Handling a
Notes
Lithium Battery
Before it Works
Notes
Serving
to Note at Cleaning
Points
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5255/5250/5240/5235
Series
CDRH Act
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put
Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on
into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply
the machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser
to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products
beam from leaking to the outside. The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as
not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here
users operate the machine normally
indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are soled in the United States.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
Sicherheit des Lasers
Laserstrahlen knnen fr den menschlichen Krper gefhrlich sein. Aus diesem Grund ist
das optische Lasersystem mit einem Schutzgehuse und einer Auenabdeckung dicht
verschlossen und hat eine Struktur, die keine Laserstrahlen nach auen dringen lsst. Unter
der Voraussetzung, dass der Benutzer dieses Gert normal bedient, ist ein Austritt von
Laserstrahlen daher ausgeschlossen.
F-0-1
A different description may be used for a different product.
Handling of Laser System

When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
- Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
- Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam,
possibly hitting the eye.)
The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label
(Figure). If you must detach a cover showing the label, be sure to take extra caution during
the work.
Handhabung des Laserteils
Bei servicearbeiten am oder in der Nhe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgert abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gert durchgefhrt werden mssen,
auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmanahmen beachten.
Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder hnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den
Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und hnliche Gegenstnde abnehmen. (Reflektierte
Laserstrahlen knnten sonst in die Augen geraten.)
Abdeckungen, die mglicherweise Laserstrahlen reflektieren, haben in der auf dem Bild
gezeigten Position einen Aufkleber. Bei Servicearbeiten auf der Innenseite von Abdeckungen
mit Aufkleber ist besondere Vorsicht erforderlich.
F-0-2
Turn power switch ON
Safety of Toner
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power
switch.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power
mode, sleep mode).
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which
access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
Toner on Clothing or Skin

If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it
off with water.
Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
Tonner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
F-0-3
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery
Notes Before it Works Serving
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and
disconnect the power plug.
CAUTION:
Points to Note at Cleaning
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Gebrauchte Batterien gem der Anleitung beseitigen.
CAUTION:
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.
F-0-4
Product Overvew
Product Overvew
Lineup
Product
Feature
Specification
of Parts
Name
Operation
Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Host machine > Model type
Product Lineup
1-2
Host machine configuration
Host machine configuration
Printer only
Host machine
T-1-1
Model type
C5255
C5250
C5240
Print Speed (BW /

55 / 51ppm
50 / 45ppm
40 / 35ppm
Color)
Positioning
High-speed / high-quality Middle-Office model
C5235
35 / 30ppm
T-1-2
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C52 55

A B
A: Product category (5X : Office model)
B: Print speed (unit is ppm : print per minutes)
F-1-2
F-1-1
Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Host machine > Model type
1-2
Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Option > Pickup delivery / image reading options
Option
1-3
No.
Pickup delivery / image reading options

6
4
8
9
7
2
17
Brand name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1

Inner Finisher-E1
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1
Reader Heater Kit-J1
Color Image Reader Unit-F1
Printer Cover-C2
Copy Tray-J1
Cassette Heater Unit-C1
Paper Deck Unit-B2
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1
FL Cassette-AG1
FL Cassette-AH1
Cassette Heater Unit-37
15
16
17
18
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD2

Buffer Pass Unit-G1
Inner 2Way Tray-F1
External 2 Hole Puncher-B2
19 Booklet Finisher-J1
20 Staple Finisher-J1
10
Remarks and condition

Built-in finisher
1 Path Duplex Type DADF + Reader
Reverse Duplex Type DADF + Reader
Copyboard + Reader
Deck Heater for Paper Deck Unit-B2.
Cassette Attachment for envelope
Cassette Heater for host machine, 2-Cassette
Pedestal-AD2
For host machine delivery additional tray
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B2(USA,CAN,CLA),
External 2/4 Hole Puncher-B2(EUR,FRA,CA),
External 4 Hole Puncher-B2(EUR)
Buffer Path Unit G1 is required
Buffer Path Unit G1 is required
T-1-3
11
16
15
20
12
18
19
14
13
F-1-3
Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Option > Pickup delivery / image reading options
1-3
Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Option > Function expanding option
1-4
Function expanding option
No.
12
13
14
15
16
[6]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[3]
[8]
[2]
[1]
Voice
Operation
Unit
17 Signal Interface Kit-A1

18 Serial Interface Kit-K1
19 PCL Printer Kit-AR1
Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS)-H1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Universal Send Digital User Signature
Kit-C1
Remote Operators Software Kit-B1
Remote Fax Kit-A1
PS Printer Kit-AR1
Secure Watermark-B1
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1
ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Kit-B1
Web Access Software-H1
iR-ADV Security Kit-C1 for IEEE 2600.1
Common Criteria Certification
[9]
Voice
Operation
PCB
[19]
[10]
[11]
[18]
[12]
[17]
Brand name
Additional Memory Type D (512MB)
Image Data Analyzer Board-B1
Super G3 FAX Board-AE2
Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AE1
Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AE1

1-line FAX board is required
1-line FAX board + additional 2nd line FAX Board
is required (A European region is excluded. )
USA,ERU:standard, Other:option
-
T-1-4
[13]
[15]
[16]
[14]
F-1-4
No.
1
Brand name
Voice Operation Kit-C1

Voice Guidance Kit-F1
2 Removable HDD Kit-AC1
3 2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1
2.5inch/1TB HDD-H1
4 Copy Card Reader-F1
Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3
6 Utility Tray-A2
7 Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
8 USB Device Port-E1
9 Key Switch Unit-A2
10 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1
11 imagePASS-B2 / ColorPASS-GX400

Only for Japan
Only for out of Japan
Only when Mirroring Kit is extended
USB device port-E1 is required

-
Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Option > Function expanding option
1-4
Product Overvew > Feature > Features at servicing > New type connector is adopted
Feature
1-5
Features at servicing
Improvement on upgrade operation
Product feature
It is possible to upgrade options through the host machine.
Product feature
Same as conventional way, use SST (service support tool) to upgrade.
New type connector is adopted

Fixing Assembly
Color on-demand fixing
method is adopted.
Toner Container
New toner is adopted.
High-speed support
High image quality

Y
Developing Assembly
ACR control is adopted.
Developing Assembly/Drum
Unit are separated.
Highly-durable drum is
adopted(BK only).
High image quality
Low running cost
Main Controller
Next generation controller
is adopted.
Bk
ITB
Primary Transfer Roller
detaching control is
adopted.
Low running cost
Laser Scanner Unit

Twin Laser Scanner Unit
Capable of 1200 dpi
High image quality
High-speed support
High image quality
To prevent the communication error due to following factors, new type connector is adopted.
High-speed support
Loose connector / disconnection due to vibration during transportation

Imperfect connection of connector at service operation
F-1-5
Product Overvew > Feature > Features at servicing > New type connector is adopted
1-5
Product Overvew > Specification > Specification
Specification
Paper size (upper cassette)
Specification
Host machine installation
method
Photosensitive medium
Exposure method
Charging method
Developing method
Transfer method
Separation method
Pickup method
Fixing method
Delivery method
Drum cleaning method
Transfer cleaning method
Toner type
Toner supply method
Toner level detection function
Leading edge image margin
Left edge image margin
Leading edge blank width
Left edge blank width
Warm-up time
First print time
Image gradation
Print resolution
Maximum image guaranteed
area
Maximum printable area
Paper type (cassette)
1-6
Desktop type
Phi 30 OPC
Laser exposure
Roller charging
Dry type 2-component jumping development
Intermediate belt transfer
(Primary transfer: roller transfer, secondary transfer: roller transfer)
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Separation retard
On demand fixing (Ceramic nitride heater + Phi 30 elastic film)
Facedown (inner delivery)
Cleaning blade
Cleaning blade
Non-magnetic negative toner
Toner container method
Yes
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.5+/-1.5mm
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.5+/-1.5mm
At power-ON, 38 sec or less
image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250 Series B/W :4.0sec
Color : 6.5sec
image RUNNER ADVANCE C5240/C5235 Series B/W :5.5sec
Color : 8.9sec
256 gradation
1200 x 1200dpi
300 x 450.5mm
B4,A4,A4R,B5,B5R,A5R,LGL,LTRR,LTR,EXEC,Custom size (Min

139.7mm x 182mm to Max 304.8mm x 390mm),K8,K16,K16R
Paper size (lower cassette)
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 1218(305mm457mm), 11 x
17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, Custom size (Min 139.7mm
x 182mm to Max 304.8mm x 457.2mm), K8, K16, K16R, Envelope
(COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-B5, ISO-C5)
Paper size (multi-purpose tray A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5,A5R,1218(305mm457mm),1117,
pickup)
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC, K8, K16, K16R, FLS,
305457, 320450(SRA3), Custom size (Min 99mm x 139.7mm to
Max 320 mm x 457.2mm),Postcard, Envelope (COM10, Monarch,
DL, ISO-B5, ISO-C5)
Pickup capacity
Cassette: 550 sheet (80g/m2), multi-purpose tray pickup: 100 sheet
(80g/m2)
Duplexing method
Through path duplexing
Memory capacity
Main controller PCB: 1 GB
Main controller PCB2: 1GB/1.5GB (differs depending on destination
and model)
Note:
Option (additional memory 512MB) can be extended to main
controller PCB 2.
HDD capacity
160GB (Option 160GB C1/ 1TB D1)
Operation noise
75dB or less (during printing)
Ozone amount
Maximum: 0.01 ppm or less
Power rating
AC120V/20A (image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250 Series)
AC120V/15A (image RUNNER ADVANCE C5240/C5235 Series)
AC220-240V/10A
Maximum power consumption image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250 Series: 1.8kW or less
image RUNNER ADVANCE C5240/C5235 Series: 1.3kW or less
Power consumption during
120V:1.1KW or less
copy
220V-240:1.3KW or less
Power consumption during
120V: 120W or less
standby
220V-240: 150W or less
Dimension (W x D x H)
620mm x735mmx 800mm (printer only)
Grammage
Approx. 130kg (printer only)
T-1-5
305 x 450.5mm
Thin paper (52 to 63g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 81g/m2), Color
paper, Pre-Punched paper, Bond paper, Plain paper (64 to 105g/
m2), Heavy paper (106 to 209g/m2), Textured paper, Transparency
film, Tab paper, Envelope
Paper type (multi-purpose tray) Thin paper (52 to 63g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 81g/m2), Color
paper, Pre-Punched paper, Bond paper, Plain paper (64 to 105g/
m2), Heavy paper (106 to 256g/m2), Textured paper, Tracking
paper, Coater paper,Labels paper, Washi paper,Transparency film,
Tab
Product Overvew > Specification > Specification
1-6
Product Overvew > Specification > Productivity (Print speed)
1-7
Weight / Size
Product name
iR ADVANCE C5255/C5250
iR ADVANCE C5240/C5235
Paper Deck Unit-B1
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1
Inner Finisher-E1
Staple Finisher-J1
Booklet Finisher-J1
Buffer Pass Unit-G1
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
Height
(mm)
WeightApprox.
(Kg)
620
620
620
620
620
620
372
439
865
559
671
489
107
756
735
735
545
542
530
700
603
307
541
646
646
493
623
656
800
800
219
201
99
248
473
81
234
1097
1097
184
908
1071
130
130
23
17
10
27.5
37
1.2
11.5
46
75
4
7.2
76
Size
Mode
Paper
basis
Paper type
weight(g/
m2)
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A3 / LDR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
211-256
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
211-256
Productivity (Print speed)
Size
Mode
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A4 / LTR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
221-256
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
221-256
Size
Mode
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5255
C5250
MultiMultiCassette purpose Cassette purpose
tray
tray
Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W
51.0/55.0
40.0
25.5
20.0
51.0/55.0
40.0
25.5
20.0
-
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
10.0
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
-
45.0/50.0
40.0
25.5
20.0
45.0/50.0
40.0
25.5
20.0
-
25.5/27.5
20.0
12.5
10.0
25.5/27.5
20.0
12.5
10.0
-
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
6.5
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
-
25.5/27.5
20.0
12.5
10.0
25.5/27.5
20.0
12.5
10.0
-
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
6.5
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
T-1-7
T-1-6
Paper
basis
Paper type
weight(g/
m2)
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5255
C5250
tray
tray
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
10.0
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
-
Paper
basis
Paper type
weight(g/
m2)
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A4 / LTR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A3 / LDR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
211-256
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
211-256
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
211-256
52-81
82-105
106-163
164-220
221-256
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5240
C5235
tray
tray
35.0/40.0
35.0/40.0
17.0
17.0
35.0/40.0
35.0/40.0
17.0
17.0
17.5/20.0
17.5/20.0
8.5
8.5
17.5/20.0
17.5/20.0
8.5
8.5
-
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
6.5
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
-
30.0/35.0
30.0/35.0
17.0
17.0
30.0/35.0
30.0/35.0
17.0
17.0
17.5/20.0
17.5/20.0
8.5
8.5
17.5/20.0
17.5/20.0
8.5
8.5
-
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
6.5
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
T-1-8
Product Overvew > Specification > Productivity (Print speed)
1-7
Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup
1-8
Paper type
Pickup
Usable paper types are shown on the next page and later.
Paper type(g/
m2)
For irregular-sized paper, refer to the table below.

Type
Feeding direction (mm)
Width direction (mm)
Irregular size 1-1

Irregular size 1-2
Irregular size 1-3
Irregular size 2-1
Irregular size 2-2
Irregular size 2-3
Irregular size 3-1
Irregular size 3-2
Irregular size 3-3
Irregular size 4-1
Irregular size 4-2
Irregular size 4-3
Irregular size 5
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 390.0
390.1 to 457.2
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 390.0
390.1 to 457.2
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 390.0
390.1 to 457.2
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 390.0
390.1 to 457.2
457.3 to 1200
99 to 139.6
Plain 1 (52 to
81)
Thin, Recycled,
Pre-Punched,
Color
139.7 to 210.0
Plain 2 (82 to
105)
Bond
210.1 to 304.8
304.9 to 320.0
99.0 to 320.0
T-1-9
Heavy 1 (106
to 163)
Textured
Heavy 2 (164
to 220)
Labels, Tab
OHP
Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup
Size
A4, LTR
B4, A4R, B5,
B5R, A5R, LGL,
LTRR, STMTR,
EXEC, 8K, 16K,
Irregular size 2-2,
Irregular size 3-2
A3, LDR,
12No18,
Irregular size 2-3,
Irregular size 3-3
A5, STMT, ARA3,
Irregular size 1-1,
Irregular size 1-2,
Irregular size 1-3,
Irregular size 2-1,
Irregular size 3-1,
Irregular size 4-1,
Irregular size 4-2,
Irregular size 4-3,
Irregular size 5
OFFICIO,
E-OFFICIO,
B-OFFICIO,
M-OFFICIO,
A-OFFICIO,
A-LTR, A-LTRR,
GLTR-R, GLTR,
GLGL, AFLS,
FLS, 16KR, F4A
A4, LTR
MultiCassette Cassette
Cassette Cassette
purpose
Feeding Feeding
1
2
tray
Unit 1
Unit 2
Paper
Deck
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1-8
Product Overvew > Name of Parts > External View
Paper type(g/
m2)
Size
Special paper A3, B4, A4R, A4,

Tracing, Coated, B5, B5R, LDR,
Washi
LGL, LTR, LTRR,
STMT, STMTR,
Heavy 3 (221 SRA3, 12No18,
to 256)
EXEC, 8K, 16K,
Irregular size 1-1,
Irregular size 1-2,
Irregular size 1-3,
Irregular size 2-1,
Irregular size 2-2,
Irregular size 2-3,
Irregular size 3-1,
Irregular size 3-2,
Irregular size 3-3,
Irregular size 4-1,
Irregular size 4-2,
Irregular size 4-3
Postcard
A6 irregular
Envelope
COM10,
Monarch, ISO-C5,
DL
1-9
MultiCassette Cassette
Cassette Cassette
purpose
Feeding Feeding
1
2
tray
Unit 1
Unit 2
Yes
No
No
No
No
Paper
Deck
Name of Parts
External View
No
11
10
9
8
Yes
Yes
No
No
* When Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 is installed
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
7
6
5
4
12
13
T-1-10
11
F-1-6
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
DADF
Main Power Switch
Stack Bypass Tray
Paper Drawer4
Paper Drawer3
Paper Drawer2
Paper Drawer1
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
Front Cover
Front Upper Cover
Output Tray
Control Panel
Rear Cover
Rear Rower Cover
Breaker
* : Be sure to perform the following procedure for checking the breaker.

1) Turn OFF the main power switch and check that the Control Panel LED is off.
2) Using a pen point, press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine.
3) Check that the breaker switch is OFF (O side).
4) Return the breaker switch to ON (I side).
5) Turn ON the main power switch.
Product Overvew > Name of Parts > External View
1-9
Product Overvew > Name of Parts > Cross Sectional View
1-10
Cross Sectional View
[1] Reversal roller

[2] 2-side delivery / delivery
unit
[3] Secondary delivery roller
[4] Second delivery entrance
flapper
[5] Second delivery flapper
[1]
[6] Third delivery roller
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[45]
[44]
[43]
[42]
[41]
Bk
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18] Film unit

[19] ITB unit
[20] Registration roller
[21] 2-side delivery lower
roller
[22] Registration roller
[7] Second / third delivery

entrance roller
[8] 2-side entrance roller
[23]
[9] Primary delivery roller
[24]
[10] Primary delivery flapper
[25]
[31] Cassette 2 feeding roller

[32] Cassette 2 separation
roller
[33] Casset 2 pick-up roller
[34] Casset pick-up unit
[35] Laser scanner unit (BK /
C)
[36] Laser scanner unit (M / Y)
[37] Developing unit (Bk) +

Drum unit (Bk)
Bypass feeding roller
[38] Developing unit (C) +
Drum unit (C)
Bypass pick-up roller
[39] Developing unit (M) +
Drum unit (M)
Bypass separration roller [40] Developing unit (Y) +
Drum unit (Y)
Vertical path roller 1
[41] ITB cleaning unit
[11] Fixing inner delivery

[26]
opposed roller
[12] Fixing inner delivery roller [27] Cassette 1 feeding roller
[13] Fixing unit
[28] Cassette 1 separation
roller
[14] Post-fixing roller
[29] Casset 1 pick-up roller
[15] 2-side delivery upper
[30] Vertical path roller 2
rollerr
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[40]
[16] Fixing separration guide

[17] Pressure roller
[42] Hopper unit (Y)

[43] Hopper unit (M)
[44] Hopper unit (C)
[45] Hopper unit (BK)
[24]
[39]
[38]
[37]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[36]
[35]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
F-1-7
Product Overvew > Name of Parts > Cross Sectional View
1-10
Product Overvew > Operation > Power Switch > How to turn ON / OFF the power and points to note
Operation
1-11
How to turn ON / OFF the power and points to note
While progress bar is kept displayed at power-on, HDD access is processing; thus, never
Power Switch
turn OFF the Main Power Switch.

To turn off the power, turn off the Main Power Switch. (Conventional shutdown sequence
Types of power switch

Environmnet
Heater Switch
operation is not required.)

After power-OFF (after the Main Power Switch is turned OFF), do not reactivate the Main
Control Panel
Power Switch
Power Switch until a screen disappears.

Do not turn OFF the power while download is processing.
CAUTION: Points to Note on Completion Process at Problem Occurrence

When a problem occurs, the normal shutdown screen may not be displayed regardless
of turning OFF the main power switch.
In such a case, the power is turned OFF in 110 seconds at a maximum, so do not turn
ON the power again during this time.
Main Power Switch
F-1-8
This machine is equipped with the Main Power Switch, Control Panel Power Switch and
Environment Heater Switch.
[1] Main Power Switch
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine.
[2] Control Panel Power Switch
This switch is to shift the machine to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
[3] Environment Heater Switch
Environment Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and
Reader Heater.
Product Overvew > Operation > Power Switch > How to turn ON / OFF the power and points to note
1-11
Product Overvew > Operation > Description of Control Panel > Main Menu
1-12
Description of Control Panel
Main Menu
iR ADVANCE C5051 / 5045 / 5035 / 5030 Series
Control Panel
1
15
14
Scan and Send
3
4
Fax / I-Fax
Inbox
9
13
12
11
10
5
F-1-9
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Control Panel Power Switch

USB Insertion Slot
Settings / Registration Key
Counter Check Key
Operation Pen
Main Power Lamp
Error Lamp
Execution / Memory Lamp
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
ID (authentication) Key
Touch Panel Display
Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial
FAX Volume Adjustment Key
Status Check / Stop Key
Custom Menu Key
Main Menu Key
Product Overvew > Operation > Description of Control Panel > Main Menu
F-1-10
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Store
Access Stored Files
Fax / I-Fax Inbox
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Secured Print
Scanner
Set / Regi. Short Cut
Tutorial
1-12
Product Overvew > Operation > Description of Control Panel > Difference of Settings / Registration menu
Difference of main menu

iRC 3380 / 2880 Series
Copy
Send
Mail BOX
Menu Change Key

Print Job
Scan
----(Help)
1-13
Settings / Registration menu

iR ADVANCE
C5151/5045/5035/5030 Series
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Store
Access Stored Files
Fax / I-Fax Inbox
----Secured Print
Scanner
Set / Regi. Short Cut
Tutorial
Settings/Registration
Select an item to set
TOP
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
T-1-11
Set Destination
1/1
Management Settings
4
5
OK
Log in
F-1-11
[1]
[2]
[3]
Preferences
Adjustment / Maintenance
Function Settings
[4]
[5]
Set Destination
Management Settings
Difference of Settings / Registration menu

iRC 3380 / 2880 Series
Common Settings
Timer Settings
Adjustment / Cleaning
System Settings
Report Settings
Copy Settings
Communication Settings
Mail Box Settings
Printer Settings
Address Book Settings
iR ADVANCE
C5151/5045/5035/5030 Series
Preferences
Adjustment / Maintenance
Set Destination
Function Settings
Management Settings
T-1-12
Product Overvew > Operation > Description of Control Panel > Difference of Settings / Registration menu
1-13
Product Overvew > Operation > Service Mode > Description display of service mode item
Service Mode
1-14
Description display of service mode item
It is possible to browse the usage method of service mode items in service mode.
Following is the changed and added items compared to a conventional machine.
Enables to display the description of initial screen, large category, middle category and small
category.
Select any from initial screen > large category > middle category > small category, and press [i]
(information button) so that the description of selected item (hereinafter called service mode
Service mode menu

In the stanbay condition, press in this order: key -> 2+8 key -> key, and the
screen will switch as on the below:
contents) is displayed.
e.g.) COPIER > DISPLAY > Version screen
TOP screen
1) Press [i]
4) A detailed explanation on the
item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
2) Minor item titles
are displayed.
F-1-12
[MODELIST] :
This mode is newly added from this machine.
This mode has the function to browse the usage method of service mode items etc.
New functions described later are available in MODELIST mode.
[MODELIST CLASSIC] :
This is the same mode with a conventional machine.
New functions described later are not available in MODELIST CLASSIC mode.
When [MODELIST] or [MODELIST CLASSIC] is pressed, initial screen of each mode is
displayed.
3) Select the desired

minor item and
press [i]
F-1-13
Service mode contents can be displayed in J / E / F / I / G / S.

Alike other system software, service mode contents can be upgrade with SST.
Product Overvew > Operation > Service Mode > Description display of service mode item
1-14
Product Overvew > Operation > Service Mode > Enhancement of I/O information
1-15
Enhancement of I/O information
Device classification
This mode is to check the signal input / output status of used electrical parts (sensor / motor /
fan etc.).
Searchability for target electrical parts has been improved in COPIER > I / O.
In addition, it is possible to check the signal input / output status on a screen.
Electrical parts
classification
1) Press the button.

Which button to press, will depend on which
electrical parts intended and its device
classification. For instance, if the host
machine uses paper pass detection sensor,
then press the button on the "COPIER" and
"P-Sensor" position.
2) Then the selected electrical

parts classification's mark,
name, port number and 0/1
content will appear.
3) If the "i" button is pressed,

the screen displaying the
electrical parts array will appear.
F-1-14
Product Overvew > Operation > Service Mode > Enhancement of I/O information
1-15
Product Overvew > Operation > Service Mode > Screen display switch (level1 <-> level2)
Subdivide COPIER > OPTION > BODY items

COPIER
DISPLAY
COPIER
I/O
FEEDER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
DISPLAY
FNC-SW
I/O
DSPLY-SW
ADJUST
NETWORK
FUNCTION
SOUND
OPTION
ENV-SET
TEST
TEST
CLEANING
COUNTER
COUNTER
FEED-SW
SORTER
ADJUST
BOARD
FUNCTION
OPTION
BODY
ING-SPD
ING-RDR
ING-MCON
ING-LSR
ING-DEV
ING-TR
ING-FIX
CUSTOM
F-1-15
With current machines, it is quite difficult to find out the target item since there are large
number of items in COPER > OPTION > BODY (related to host machine specification).
With this machine, all items in BODY are classified into 15 categories by usage to reach a
target item.
Middle category classification
Middle
category name
Feeding (pickup / delivery)
FEED-SW
Noise reduction
Network
Individual measure
SOUND
NETWORK
CUSTOM
Details
Stack performance, motor speed fine-adjustment,
delivery function etc.
Noise related
Network setting, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS etc.
For individual measure
T-1-13
Security measure
To prevent illegal access to service mode, a password can be specified.
Related service mode
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (level 1)
Password type setting when entering the service mode
<Setting range>
0: No password [Default]
1: Service engineer
2: System administrator + Service engineer
Screen display switch (level1 <-> level2)

Screen can be switched between level 1 screen and level 2 screen.
Middle category classification
Middle
category name
Function switch
FNC-SW
Display switch / display timing

Image related (fixing)
Image related (transfer)
Image related (development)
Image related (laser / latent)
Image related (reader / ADF)
Image related (controller,
others)
Image quality / copy speed
Cleaning
DSPLY-SW
IMG-FIX
IMG-TR
IMG-DEV
IMG-LSR
IMG-RDR
IMG-MCON
IMG-SPD
CLEANING
Environment settings
ENV-SET
1-16
Details
When the level 1 screen is displayed and <Level 1> on the upper right screen is pressed, a
screen is switched to level 2 screen.
Language, cassette, paper type, NAVI / DA

connection, count up specification, original size
detection, dust detection level
UI display related
Fixing related
Primary transfer, secondary transfer, ITB
Development related
Laser, latent image related
Reader, ADF image related
MN-CON image related and image related items
other than above
Down sequence
Cleaning of Charging Assembly / Drum / Transfer
Roller / ITB etc.
Temperature / Humidity, Environment Heater / due
condensation / log acquisition
1-16
Display
I/O
<VERSION >
Adjust
Function
<1/ 8>
DC-CON
43.44
R-CON
00.52
PANEL
4C.50
FEEDER
44.46
SORTER
54.53
NIB
42.4E
DECK
--.--
MN-CONT
4E.4D
Option
< READY >
Test
1-17
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
i
Display
I/O
<VERSION >
Adjust
Function
<1/ 2>
LANG-CS
53.43
LANG-DA
41.44
LANG-EL
4C.45
LANG-ES
53.45
LANG-ET
54.45
LANG-FI
49.46
LANG-HU
55.48
LANG-KO
4F.4B
Option
< READY >
Test
Counter
<LEVEL 2 >
i
F-1-16
1-17
Technology
Technology
Configuration
Basic
System
Controller
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
System
Fixing
Feed System
Pickup
Auxiliary System
External
MEAP
RDS
Embedded
Updater
DCM
Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration > Basic sequence
Basic Configuration
2-2
Basic sequence
Sequence at Power-On
Functional Configuration
Reader
Main power switch ON
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document
exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image
SREADY
formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Reader Motor
Scanning Lamp
Document exposure system

Reader controller
Backwarding
Optical unit position
HP (Shading position)
Controller system
Option
board
Printer Unit
Power ON
Fixing
system Fixing
Target temperature
Image formation system

ITB
Laser exposure system

Laser scanner
unit1
Laser scanner
unit2
Cassette1
Transfer
WMUP
Fixing heater:
100 degree C
WMUPR
PSTBY
Fixing heater:
160 degree C(51/45ppm machine)
Engage
Fixing motor(M21)
Fixing heater(H3)
Pickup
Auto adjustment
Pickup/
feed
system
Cassette2
F-2-1
HP (Shading position)
F-2-2
Duplexing
feed
DC
controller
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Laser beam
Shift shading
Fixing shading
White plate dust
detection control
Shading correction
Gain correction
Offset correction
Delivery
Main
controller
1/2
HDD
Backwarding
HP Sensor
Exposure lamp
CCD
SSTBY
Forwarding
Forwarding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Secondary transfer ATVC

Patch sensor correction control
Discharge current correction
Drum thickness detection
Primary transfer ATVC
Color displacement correction control
ARCDAT control
ATR control
Secondary transfer clearning control
F-2-3
2-2
Period Definition
2-3
Print sequence
Definition
SREADY
(Scanner Ready)
An interval in which the shading correction is executed after the Start

key is pressed.
SSTBY
(Scanner Standby)
An interval between the completion of the shading correction and

switching the Start key ON / turning the main power OFF.
WMUP
(Warm-up)
An interval in which the drive system stops, and it ends when the
completion requirements of the fixing assembly startup is fulfilled.
WMUPR
(Warm-up Rotation)
An interval in which the drive system starts, and the bias adjustment
is executed.
PSTBY
(Printer Standby)
An interval in which the copy/print request signal can be accepted.

T-2-1
Reader
Start Key ON
Reader Motor
SSTBY
SREADY
SCRW
Forwarding Backwarding Backwarding
Scanning Lamp
HP Sensor
Optical unit position
SCFW
SSTBY
Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding
Backwarding Forwarding
Backwarding
ON
HP (Shading)
ON
End of the image
Stream reading position
HP (Shading)
F-2-4
Printer
Start key ON
PSTBY
Target temperature
Fixing motor(M21)
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Fixing heater:
disengage
Fixing heater(H3)
Auto adjustment
The following adjustments to work, depending on the status of the product.
[1] Discharge current corrections
[2] Patch sensor correction control
[3] ATR control
[4] Primary transfer ATVC control
[5] Secondary transfer ATVC control
[6] Secondary transfer clearning
[7] D-max control
[8] ARCDAT control
[9] D-Half control
[10] Color displacement correction control
F-2-5
2-3
Period Definition
2-4
Definition
SREADY
(Scanner Ready)
An interval in which the shading correction is executed after the Start key
is pressed.
SSTBY
(Scanner Standby)
An interval between the completion of the shading correction and

switching the Start key ON / turning the main power OFF.
PSTBY
(Print Standby State)
An interval in which the copy / print request signal can be accepted.
PRINTR
(Printer Intial Rotation)
An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state
the image signal is sent.
PRINT
An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper, and the paper is
delivered.
LSTR
(Last Rotation)
An interval between the completion of the paper delivery and the stop of
all drives.
T-2-2
2-4
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications / configuration
Controller System
2-5
Specifications / configuration
PCBs
Overview
Features
Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high
functionality.
Main Controller PCB 1
Riser PCB
Image processing sub PCB
F-2-8
F-2-6
Main controller PCB 1 controls the entire system. Main controller PCB 2 mainly controls
image processing.
Main controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the riser PCB.
This configuration improves installability / removability of the main controller PCBs.
(Slot-in / out)
F-2-7
2-5
2
Parts name
2-6
Memory
Function, specifications, features
Main controller
PCB 1
CPU: 1.2GHz, Control of the entire system

Various controls (memory, control panel, electric power, voice), I/Fs (PCI, USB
(host), RTC
Flash PCB
Boot program
TPM PCB
To generate and save encryption key
Available only when TPM settings is ON: Management Settings > Data
Management > TPM Settings (default: OFF)
Not available with China models
Main controller
CPU: 400 MHz, Image control
PCB 2
Various image processing (color space conversion, enlarge, reduction,
rotation, composition, compression, rasterizing, resolution conversion, image
binarization), delay memory control between drums, HDD control, I/Fs (reader,
FAX, USB (device))
Image Processing Image processing
Sub PCB
Bypass PCB
Internal bus connection
Remove this PCB when using ColorPASS-GX300 (server type) or
imagePASS-B1 (to be attached to the main unit) and install the open I/F PCB.
Riser PCB
I/F (main controller 1 - 2, main controller - HDD, main controller - DC controller)
HDD
2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 160 GB (80G usable area)
Up to 2 HDDs can be mounted in the case of mirroring configuration.
BOX data, Address book, security information (password, certificate)
Op.: 2.5 inch / 160GB HDD-C1, 2.5 inch / 1 TB HDD-D1
T-2-3
Main controller PCB 1

SDRAM
BAT
F-2-9
Parts name
SDRAM
1GB (standard)
Clock frequency: 333 MHz
Used for saving image, program data
Lithium battery (BAT1)) For RTC
Life: approx. 10 years
T-2-4
2-6
2-7
I/F, connector

Voice
DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
J1002
J6
Mini-USB
External I/F
Internal I/F
UI
J13
J4
J15
Fan
DDR2-SDRAM(M1)
DDR2-SDRAM(P)
LAN
J7
USB(H)
J5
BAT
J1022
TPM
J11
Flash
F-2-10
Parts name
CC-VI
J21
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
1 GB (standard) / clock frequency: 200MHz

Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
DDR2-SDRAM (M0)
512 MB (standard / Op.*) / clock frequency: 200MHz
Product name: Additional Memory Type D (512MB)
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
To be used when using the following options:
PS Printer Kit-AR1, Direct Print Kit (for PDF / XPS)-H1, imagePASS-B2,
ColorPASS-GX400
DDR2-SDRAM (P)
512 MB (standard) / clock frequency: 200MHz
Print image processing, delay processing between drums
SRAM
16 Mbit
To save data in Settings / Registration Mode / Service Mode and image
data management information in HDD
Lithium battery (BAT1) For SRAM backup, Life: approx. 10 years
PCI
J1025
F-2-11
No.
Function, specifications
J1002 Voice I/F (Op.)

J4
Control panel I/F
J6
J15
J7
T-2-5
* The capacity differs according to the location or model
Coin
J20
Riser
J17
J17
No.
J11
J5
Flash PCB I/F

USB I/F (Host) *1
For MEAP, For USB keyboard (Op.)
J1022 TPM PCB I/F
Mini-USB I/F (Op.)

Connect USB Device Port-B1
Fan I/F
J1025 PCI expansion PCB I/F (Op.)
LAN I/F
J21
I/F for control interface kit (Op.)
1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
Also to be used as I/F for imagePASS-B1 J20
I/F for card reader, I/F for serial interface
/ ColorPASS-GX400 (Op.)
kit, I/F for coin manager (all Op.)
Riser PCB I/F
T-2-6
*1: There is 1 port on the control panel as well
2-7
2-8
Function expansion options

J1010
Bypass I/F
/ open I/F
Main controller PCB1

J1020
Image Processing PCB
Reader
J3003
Voice Operation/
Voice Guidance PCB
External I/F
Internal I/F
J1000
Image analysis I/F
Riser
J14
USB (D)
J15
FAX (1 line)
J17
FAX (2-4 line)
J16
F-2-12
Jack No.
J14
J16
J17
Riser PCB I/F
Mini-USB I/F for 2 to 4-lines FAX
FAX-USB I/F for 1-line FAX
Product name: Advanced G3 FAX Board-AE1
Image analysis PCB I/F
Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Bypass PCB I/F
Mount the open I/F PCB when using ColorPASS-GX300 / imagePASS-B1
Reader I/F
Image processing sub PCB
J1000
J1010
J3003
J1020
Voice Operation/
Voice Guidance PCB
F-2-13
Name
T-2-7
Voice Recognition PCB Voice Operation Kit, Voice Guidance Kit (for non-Japanese models only)
Voice Guidance PCB
IPSec PCB
Excluded from the option configuration because it has been installed on the
Main Controller PCB as standard.
T-2-8
2-8
Technology > Controller System > Overview > HDD
2-9
HDD

Open I/F PCB
The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.
User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 23GB and Advanced Box area is 9GB.
Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Image Analysis PCB
Image Analysis PCB
Open I/F PCB
Universal data (temporary file)

For PDL spooling
FAX data
Address book, filter
MEAP application
Universal data
MEAP saving data
System log
Text management table
PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
Job archiving (chasing)
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-15
F-2-14
Name
Image data (User Box)
Open I/F PCB

F link PCB (main)
F link PCB (sub)
Image analysis PCB
imagePASS-B1 / ColorPASS-GX300
Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1

Scan protection for output original (Copy / SEND / BOX)
T-2-9
Technology > Controller System > Overview > HDD
2-9
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence
2-10
Boot sequence
Related Error Codes (major error codes):

Error
Code
[ ]: program storage location
E602
0001
- Initialization process of hardware

- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
0002
0006
E604
1024
E613
1024
1536
E748
2010
2011
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
- Starting system software for main/sub CPU

[HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]
[Main controller PCB 2]
Error description
Error in HDD
Failure in recognizing HDD
Boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup.
There is no system software for the main CPU.
There is no system software for the sub CPU.
Failure in memory (main controller PCB 1)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (1GB required)
Failure in memory (main controller PCB 2)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1GB required)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1.5GB required)
Error in board (Flash PCB)
IPL (Initial Program Loader) is not found.
OS is not found.
T-2-10
- Starting application
Standby screen display

F-2-16
NOTE :
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence
2-10
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence
2-11
Shutdown sequence
Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion
processing (to prevent damage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed
toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical
reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is
called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding
down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects
this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts / executes automatically.
In addition, hardware shutdown sequence exists. If shutdown sequence is not executed
normally due to occurrence of software trouble, the machine is shut down in 110 seconds at a
maximum by the timer in the AC Driver PCB. If it is not shut down within 110 seconds, failure
of the AC Driver PCB is suspected.
.
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence
2-11
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Flow of Image Data
2-12
Controls
SEND
Flow of Image Data

Network
Copy
HDD
Reader
To DC Controller
HDD
HDD
writing/reading
Reader
HDD
writing/reading
I/F
Print type image

processing
Extension processing
Tile raster conversion
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
F-2-19
F-2-17
To DC Controller
HDD
FAX
Print
Network
To DC Controller
I/F
HDD
writing/reading
HDD
Print type image

processing
Extension
processing
raster conversion
Tile
Rendering
I/F
Image data buffer

(memory)
Box
Main Controller
PCB 2
Riser PCB
LAN
Controller
Image processing
R
esolution conversion,
I
mage rotation,
JPEG
compression/extension
Image data buffer

(memory)
Data conversion
Tile raster conversion
JPEG encode
Image processing
Resolution
conversion,
Image
rotation,
JPEG
compression/extension
HDD
writing/reading
Image data buffer
(memory)
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
Image data buffer

(memory)
Image processing
Color space conversion,
Image 2 level cell,
Image multi level cell,
Image composition,
Resolution conversion,
Image rotation,
Pixel skipping with 7x7 filter
F-2-20
LAN
Controller
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
F-2-18
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Flow of Image Data
2-12
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password
2-13
Configuration of Security Information

The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
Protection)
This machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
Overview
information flow in each setting.
The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named TPM PCB. TPM
stands for Trusted Platform Module, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating
and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.
- When the TPM setting is ON

TPM Key
Main Controller PCB1
TPM PCB
(Temporarily stored in HDD)
TPM PCB
Public Key
Backup Key
for TPM failure
USB flash drive
Backup
Common
Key
Backup for
Common Key
Password
Password
SRAM
HDD
F-2-22
F-2-21
The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys)
stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored
data other than security information.
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information. The
TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security
information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions.
When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and
installed in the MFP with the different serial number (the model information held in the TPM
PCB is specific to the machine originally enabled the TPM setting)
When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.
The security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure above).
Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is
activated only when data in all the layers are linked.
For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared
for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).
This key can be backed up using the USB flash drive. Once backed up, the backup key is
When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network
deleted from the HDD.
Enable this function in Setting / Registration mode.
stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default)
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key
MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in
the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the
2-13
security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because
the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute Initialize All
Data / Settings in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password
information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized.
Preparation before Installing TPM

Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.
Follow the steps below to back up data.
1) From Remote UI, execute Setting / Registration > Management Setting > Data
Management > Import / Export. The following data types should be backed up.
- When the TPM setting is OFF:

Common
Key
2-14
Address book (see *1)

Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) (see *2)
Backup
Setting / Registration
Printer settings can be exported
Backup of
Common Key
Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) (see *3)
Password
Password
SRAM
*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
HDD
settings, this step can be disregarded.

F-2-23
*2 Among settings in the main menu, only Frequently-used Setting under Scan and
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is
Send can be backed up.
protected only by the common key.
*3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations.
Under this setting, the security information held in this machine is protected at the level
equivalent to the conventional machines.
The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple
2) Select Export from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up Custom Menu Setting
Information.
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.

When the TPM setting is set to OFF, the security information is protected by the common key
and multiple passwords stored in SRAM and HDD.
3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote
UI. Then, execute Export to back up User Information of Advanced Box.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common
key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or
after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore
the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after
servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored
in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password
information is maintained in the SRAM.
TPM Setting for Security Information
The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM
settings in Setting / Registration mode.
When the TPM setting is ON
The security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key, public key, common key and
password).
When the TPM setting is OFF
The security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key and password).
2-14
Works before / after introduction

Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (TPM setting is OFF by default).
1. Enable the feature
2. Backup the TPM key
3. Restore the TPM key
4. Disable the feature
2-15
1. Enable Functionality
MEMO: Setup of System Management PIN
It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN
before installing TPM. The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to ON.
However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless the key is properly backed up,
users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks
effectively, the system management PIN should be set.
The works above are basically done by users.

1)Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to ON.
CAUTION:
When the TPM setting is set to ON, advice users on the following:
Setting / Registration
Back up the TPM key swiftly after the setting is ON

Keep the password used at backup securely
Never lose the USB flash drive with the backup TPM key file saved
The TPM key should be restored after the TPM PCB is replaced due to failures or the
like.
(TPM key restoration is enabled only at TPM PCB replacement.)
Unless the key is restored, the security information (passwords, encryption key, and
certificates) cannot be used.
When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others, Initialize All
Data / Settings should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality. The security may
be undermined if the old Setting / Registration data are maintained as it is.
F-2-24
2) Click Yes, and restart the machine.
F-2-25
This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted.
2-15
2.TPM Key Backup
2-16
3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for
The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system:
confirmation.
FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.
F-2-26
1) Insert the USB flash drive to the machine.

The USB I/F (host) is found at the side of the control panel as well as the main
controller PCB.
CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is
shown to notify that the backup is failed.
MEMO:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup
files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive.
F-2-28
4) Click [OK] to initiate TPM key backup.
2)Click [Back up TPM Key] in Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting.
F-2-27
F-2-29
5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.
2-16
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup.

If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to
recover this.
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
2-17
3. Restore of TPM key

Procedure is about the same as the backup work.
Difference between restore work and backup work:
Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore
work.
2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
1) Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.
The USB flash drive has insufficient free memory space
2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and
The USB flash drive is write-protected
click [Restore TPM key].
No key is found
CAUTION: The USB flash drive should be securely stored.

Give advice users on the following points.
The USB flash drive should be securely stored
Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive, never save the
backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users.
MEMO: Name of TPM key backup file

The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name.
F-2-30
3) Enter the password set in the backup process.

4) Click [OK] on Start Restoration Screen. The restoration process is started.
5) Click [OK] on Restoration Completion Screen. Remove the USB flash drive and turn
OFF/ ON the main power switch.
2-17
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration.

If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for
recovery.
2-18
4. Disable the feature

To set OFF for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine

2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
The USB flash drive is security-protected
No TPM key is saved in the USB flash drive
The TPM key saved in the USB flash drive is not for the machine
The wrong password is entered
After the TPM key was backed up, [Initialize All Systems/ Settings] was executed
SRAM (the main controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed
F-2-31
CAUTION: Points to note when disabling functionality

To disable the use of TPM, all data and settings should be initialized. If this is executed,
user information saved in the HDD/ SRAM is totally cleared. Ensure to back up the data
before disabling TPM settings.
List of data to be cleared

Data saved in BOX/ Advanced Box
Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box)
Destination data registered in Address Book
Read mode registered using Send function
Mode memory registered using Copy/ Box function
MEAP applications and their license files
Data saved using MEAP applications
Password for MEAP SMS (Service Management Service)
(The password is returned to default if any change is made.)
User authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H)
Unsent documents (documents for scheduled transmission and reserved transmission)
Job logs
Contents set in Setting / Registration
Image-composite registration form
Registered transfer settings
2-18
Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) >
[Device Management] > [Certificate Settings]
Overview of Actions taken against Troubles
Audit log
Location
with failure
Steps of data restoration after recovery
TPM PCB
To restore data, select the following on UI: Settings/Registration > Management Settings >
Data Management > Import > Import of Settings/Registration.
The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again.
Environment Settings
Paper settings
Display settings in the destination to save
HDD
Time fine-adjustment for timer/ power settings

Date/ time settings (excluding time zone and daylight-saving settings)
User settings for SNMPv3
Context settings
Firewall settings (excluding MAC address filter)
Function Settings
Image-composite form for the common print operation
Printer settings
Transfer settings for the common receipt/ transfer settings
Inbox settings
Frequently-used Copy settings
Registered short-cuts in Other Functions
Frequently-used Send settings
Frequently-used settings for saving/ using files
Address Settings
Address Book
Management Settings
Sheet counts in Department ID Management
Settings for device information distribution
2-19
Main
Controller
PCB 2
(SRAM)
TPM Setting = ON
TPM Setting = OFF
1. Check the TPM PCB connection

2. Replace the TPM PCBs
3. Turn OFF/ ON the power
4. See the section of Restoring TPM
Key to restore the TPM key.
5. Turn OFF/ ON the main power for
recovery
N/A (TPM PCB is

not in use when the
TPM setting is set to
OFF.)
Relevant Error Code
Initially E746-0031 is
shown on the screen.
When the power is turned
OFF/ON after the TPM
PCB is replaced, E7460032 is shown (only when
the TPM setting is set to
ON).
1.Replace the HDDs.
1. Replace the
Initially E602-xxxx is shown
2.Format the HDD.
HDDs.
(the different extension is
3.Download the system software.
2. Format the HDD. shown depends on cases).
4.See the section of Disabling
3. Download the
After the system software
Functionality to execute Initialize
system software. is reinstalled, E746-0033 is
All Data/ Settings.
4. Restore the
shown.
5.Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM
password
setting is automatically set to OFF.
information stored
6.Set the TPM setting to ON (the
in the HDD.
public key and the common key
are automatically set).
1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx (the different
2. The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. extension is shown
depends on cases).
HDD will be automatically restored 2. The common
in the SRAM.
key backed up
3. The TPM setting on the control
in the HDD will
panel is reset to OFF. Manually
be automatically
set the TPM setting to ON (the
restored in the
machine is operated in the TPM
SRAM.
setting ON).
3. Restore the
password
4. Restore the password information
stored in the SRAM (see *1).
information stored
in the SRAM (see
*1).
T-2-11
*1 If No is indicated in the field of Backup Column in the table of Security Information

Storage Location, the relevant information should be set manually again.
Certificate settings
License registration
Remote operation settings
Box backup/ restoration
TPM Settings
Setting of audit log collection
2-19
Related Error Code

Error
Code
Security Information Storage Location

Storage
Data Type
Location
Error description, Assumed cause, remedy
E746
Error in encryption
0031 Error in hardware
Assumed cause
The TPM PCB is not mounted; the TPM PCB for the other machine is
mounted; the TPM chip is crashed.
Remedy
Mount the TPM PCB for the machine; replace with the new TPM PCB
0032 Error occurred but the system is recoverable
Assumed cause
Keys are unmatched
Remedy
Restore the TPM key
0033 Error occurred and the system is unrecoverable
Assumed cause
Security information cannot be found in the HDD/ SRAM
Remedy
Execute Initialize All Data/ Settings
0035 TPM version error Install the supported TPM.
T-2-12
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
2-20
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Certificate/
Secret Key
Certificate/
Secret Key
Others
Function
Name of Data
BOX
BOX Password
Yes
BOX
Password for Fax BOX
Yes
SEND
Password for a file destination of Address Book
Yes
MEAP
Authentication information registered by local device Yes

authentication via SSO-H
Device key pair (SSL, AMS)
No
SSL,AMS
Signature User key pair

SEND
User
Key information linked to user (password)
setting
information
Password/ BOX
Password for encryption at BOX backup
PIN
Password/ BOX
Password for SMS server at BOX backup
PIN
Password/ Advanced Password for Advanced BOX backup
PIN
BOX
Password/ Advanced Password for SMS server at Advanced BOX backup
PIN
BOX
Password/ SEND
Password for LDAP server
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for POP3 server
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for time-stamped PDF
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for Adobe ES Rights Management Server
PIN
Password/ SEND
PIN for destination list (in destination setting)
PIN
Password/ UI
Password for service mode
PIN
Password/ Network
Password for IPP authentication
PIN
Password/ Network
Password for FTP authentication
PIN
Password/ Network
User name and password for client in Proxy
PIN
authentication
Password/ Network
Login password for Netware print server
PIN
Backup
Availability
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-20
Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option)
Storage
Data Type
Location
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Encryption
key
Function
Name of Data
2-21
Backup
Availability
Network
Policy common key for IPSec
Yes
The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 inch / 1TB
Network
User name and password for PEAP/TTLS

authentication
Password for FAX receipt
Yes
large amounts of data with Advanced Box.
Department management data (including System

Manager password)
Authentication and encryption keys for SNMPv3
Yes
No
SMS login password
Yes
Others
Others
MIB
Password/ MEAP
PIN
HDD-H1 (option) makes 1TB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in the case of saving
Yes
Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box.

15GB: in the case of 160GB HDD capacity
629GB: in the case of 1TB HDD capacity
T-2-13
Security Information Storage Location (data managed under the

mechanism other than TPM management)
Storage
Data Type
Location
HDD
High capacity HDD (Option)
Function
Password/ Advanced
PIN
BOX
Name of Data
User information in Advanced BOX
Backup
Availability
Yes
T-2-14
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Image data (Box, etc.)

Universal data (temporary file)
For PDL spooling
FAX data
Address book, filter
MEAP application
Universal data
MEAP saving data
System log
Text management table
PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
Job archiving (chasing)
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-32
Although simple calculation says: 1TB - 160GB = 840GB, it requires 20% of snapshot area
and the data area to be used for internal processing in the system. Therefore, 629GB can be
actually used for text storage area.
Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option)
2-21
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-22
Works before using this functionality (installation)
Overview
Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB

for HDD1
This option enables HDD data mirroring (RAID1).

When one HDD is crashed, the other HDD backs up the operation. This minimizes the
Slot.2 (HDD2)
downtime due to crash, thus enhancing the reliability as the document server.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Mirroring is performed in the following 2 ways depending on HDD capacities (160GB or 1TB).
CH B
The mirroring PCB controls the reading / writing timing of HDD data.
CH A
The LED PCB indicates HDD operation statuses by LED.

Turn ON the main power
Master (HDD1)
160 GB
Standard
HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the

mirroring PCB
HDD Mirroring Kit

Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
Turn ON the mirroring feature
LED PCB
Ch B
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

> W/RAID ---> 1
This Service Mode needs to be specified
before installing the 2nd HDD.
Turn OFF the main power
160 GB
Option
Install HDD2
2.5inch/160 GB HDD -G1
HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the

mirroring PCB.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Master (HDD1)
1 TB
Option
2.5inch/ 1 T B HDD - H1
HDD Mirroring Kit
CH B
Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
CH A
LED PCB
Ch B
Turn ON the main power
1 TB
Option
Start Rebuild
2.5inch/ 1 T B HDD - H1
The storage data of the 1st HDD is

automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this
operation is called Rebuild.
F-2-33
Complete Rebuild
Time needed:
80 GB HDD --- Approx. 20 minutes
1TB HDD ---Approx. 240 minutes
F-2-34
Rebuild progress is shown as messages on the status line of the control panel.
Copying data to HDD. xx%
2-22
2-23
List of operation status (LED)
MEMO:
This machine can be used even during rebuild process (operation is performed with
HDD1)
The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during rebuild process.
Rebuild is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This does not apply in
the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during rebuild process
HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB.
The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates
any failures.
HDD reading / writing operation

At reading:
Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD)
only
Mirroring PCB
Ch B
(HDD2)
Ch A
(HDD1)
At writing:
The same data is written to each HDD at
the same timing
F-2-36
The table below lists HDD statuses indicated by each LED.
Mirroring PCB
For example, when HDD1 is in access, the green LED on the side of HDD1 (ChA) blinks in a
high speed.
HDD 1 (Ch A)
HDD 2 (Ch B)
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED
Status
HDD
1
HDD
2
HDD
1
Normal (standby)
Accessing to HDD1
Accessing to HDD2
HDD1 failed
HDD
2
--A (*1)
-----
------A
----A (*1)
---
---------
---
---
---
Name of
Mode
Mirror mode
is performed properly.
Copying data to HDD1 (Rebuild)
--- / A
--- / A
---
In the case of failure:
Copying data to HDD2 (Rebuild)
--- / A
---
--- / A
Degrade
mode
Degrade
mode
Rebuild
mode
Halt mode
The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is
Both HDDs failed or Master HDD

failed
--- (*2)
--- (*2)
Halt mode
F-2-35
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up / blinking if reading / writing to each HDD
continued by the other HDD.
HDD2 is faulty
If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation.
T-2-15
--- : Not lit
A : Lit
B : Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
*1: The LED is blinking in a high speed

*2: The green LED may be lit
2-23
2-24
Description of Modes
Mode Flow at Start-up
The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes.
Turn ON Main Power Switch
The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses.

The status flows among the modes below during operation.
Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion
The table below lists descriptions of modes and operational overview.

Halt Mode
Name of Mode
Mirror Mode
Description
Both HDDs are normally

operated
Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in
the backup HDD suspends
mirroring operation. The
machine can be used under this
condition, however, the backup
HDD should be replaced at the
earliest convenience.
Rebuild mode The data of the master HDD is
copied (rebuilt) to the backup
HDD. The machine can be
used under this condition.
Halt mode
Both HDDs are in trouble (see
*1)
Master HDD Status
Degrade Mode
Mirror Mode
Rebuild Mode
Backup HDD Status
In normal operation
In normal operation
In normal operation
With troubles (HDD not

installed/ HDD in trouble)
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Trouble
Both HDDs
In which HDD?
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
Trouble
Backup HDD
In which HDD?
Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
In normal operation
In trouble (HDD not

installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD
disconnected while the
mirroring board is in
operation)
In recovery from the

trouble (Copying data of
Master HDD)
With troubles (HDD not
installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD
disconnected while the
mirroring board is in
operation)
Degrade Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
See Overview of Trouble Recovery
Mirror Mode
T-2-16
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.
F-2-37
2-24
2-25
Overview of Trouble Recovery
Mode Flow during Operation
When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to
each mode.
Mirror Mode
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
Trouble
green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
In which HDD?
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is
Either HDD
accessed firstly.
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
Degrade Mode
Both HDDs
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
In which HDD?
Name of
Mode
Master HDD
Backup HDD
Halt Mode
Rebuild Mode
Trouble
Unable to detect
Master HDD
Halt Mode
HDD Status?
Unable to detect
Backup HDD
When successfully
Rebuilt
Degrade Mode
Unable to detect Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
F-2-38
Status
Action for Recovery
Mirror Mode Normal (at standby)

Degrade
HDD1 in trouble
Mode (see*1)
Under normal operation

1. Check the connection between HDD1 and
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2. When the trouble is not recovered,
replace the HDD1.
HDD2 in trouble
1. Check the connection between HDD2 and
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
replace HDD2.
Rebuild mode Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild)
(Rebuild)
Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild)
(Rebuild)
Halt mode
Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD (see
*2)
replace the two HDDs (format the
replaced HDD and download the system
software).
HDD1 HDD2
(ChA) (ChB)
Red
Red
LED LED
--A
-----
---
---
---
T-2-17
---: Not lit
A: Lit
B: Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
*1: This mode shows the message, Need to replace hard disks (contact your service
engineer), on the control panel. In addition, 310006 is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log
in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2).
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to
the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to
reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.
2-25
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option)
Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality

1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended
not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD
removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and
Backup HDDs may be switched.
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes
2-26
Removable HDD (option)
This option enables easier HDD mounting (slot-out/ in) at power-OFF (see *1). In addition, the
HDD slot can be locked.
Potential use case: To enhance information securities in government offices or enterprises
Remove the HDD after business hours to store in a safe box.
Mount the HDD before business hours. Lock the slot during operation.
*1: The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
- Removable HDD is extended
- Either HDD is in trouble
the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched
even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel
the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after
power-on.
3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct
them not to change the removable HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed.
4. The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
Removable HDD is extended
Removable HDD Kit-AC1
Either HDD is in trouble
F-2-39
MEMO:
CAUTION:
Be sure to use a new HDD when replacing the HDD.
To use this option, no setting is required with the software.

The user needs to prepare a key because there is no key with this kit.
5. Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing. Upgrading in
Degrade or Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you
take any actions.
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option)
2-26
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)

This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the encryption board and to encrypt
the whole HDD including the system software. Encryption allows leaks of confidential data,
even when the HDD is stolen, including image data (temporarily generated at Copy or Print
jobs) and user data stored in BOX/ Advanced BOX. In addition, the data written into the two
hard disks are also encrypted when the HDD mirroring functionality is enabled. The following
descriptions focus on the HDD encryption function. See the previous section for the mirroring
functionality.
2-27
Compatibility among Device, Encryption Board and HDD
E602-2000 error may occur if the unmatched authentication information is found between the
controller and the HDD encryption board and the encryption board is mounted.
The device, the encryption board and HDD can be connected in 4 use cases.
The following shows the statuses for each use case.
Case 1: Normally operated
Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other
than E602-2000 error)
Case 3: E602-2000 is triggered by failure in mutual authentication
HDD Encryption Functionality
Case 4: Unable to decode properly due to unmatched key for the encryption board
Encryption
The HDD of the host machine holds temporary image data including scanned images or PDL
data as well as user data in BOX and Advanced BOX. Such images or user file information
are saved in the HDD only with system information cleared. Under this condition, the data
or images can be restored by accessing directly to the stolen HDD using the access editor
Correct
controller
Correct
encryption
board
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
two-way authentication
and the like. To counter such threats against securities, data written to the disk should be
always encrypted to protect them from illegal restoration of image data or others. This product
employs an unconventional approach to achieve HDD encryption and mirroring functionality
with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two
functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
Data Encryption Mechanism

The encryption board receives signals transmitted from the controller board, and encrypts
and saves them in the HDD.
The encryption board receives the encrypted data saved in the HDD to decode and send
them to the controller.
The encryption board can be configured with a HDD and an encryption/ mirroring board, or
Correct
controller
Correct HDD
It is not possible to decode.

Correct
Controller
encryption
not authorized
board
It is not possible two-way authentication
Encryption board
not authorized
Encryption
Correct HDD
Correct HDD
It is not possible to decode.

F-2-40
with 2 HDDs and an encryption/ mirroring board.
Conditions for Encryption Board Operation

The encryption board has the function to recognize and authenticate the host machine. An
error is triggered if a second-hand HDD encryption/ mirroring board is installed to the other
machine.
2-27
Actions against Troubles Overview

Servicing
HDD
replacement
Encryption
board
replacement
User data
<Points to Note in Initialization using USB>
Recovery
cleared
Replace HDDs
cleared
Install HDD encryption

Kit
Main controller cleared

2 replacement
(SRAM)
Clear the key for HDD

data encryption kit
Main controller not cleared

N/A
1 replacement
Main controller Information
After MN-CON clear
clear
held in SRAM process is done
cleared
2-28
The screen below is shown on the control panel when E602-2000 occurred and the machine
Action
1) Format the HDD
2) Install the system software
1) Replace encryption board
2) Initialize Encryption Board (see *1)
3) Format the HDD
4) Install the system
1) Initialize the encryption board (see *1)
2) Format the HDD
3) Install the system
N/A
MN-CON clear does not clear
authentication information; no work is
required specifically for HDD encryption kit
T-2-18
is started in safe mode using the USB flash memory with system data stored.
The message as shown in the figure below is displayed.
Select 0 when you are ready to initialize the encryption board.
Encryption board
error occurred.
Check connection
of the board.
Initialize
the board.
All data is deleted
at initialization.
[0]=Initialization
[other key]=exit
F-2-42
The figure below shows the final screen in initializing the encryption board.
The message as shown in the figure below is shown on the screen.
*1: How to Initialize Encryption Board
Select 2 when you initialize the encryption board.
1. Initialize the encryption board via SST.

This step makes the disk unformatted (E602-0001 is triggered if the unformatted disk is
We recommend checking the board connection before starting initialization
started).
2. Format the HDD and reinstall SYSTEM via SST.
When you start the HDD formatting, the message is automatically shown to confirm
whether to initialize the encryption board (Key Clear).
Key Clear will disable accesses to HDD data permanently. Cautions should be taken in Key
Clear execution.
Attention!
Once initialization
is started,you
cannot cancel it.
is that OK?
[2]= Yes
[other keys]=No
<Points to Note in Initialization via SST>

The screen below is shown when you gain access to SST in safe mode due to E602-2000.
F-2-43
Poor board connection also causes this error. Check the board connection to seek error
recovery. Initialization of the encryption board will disable accesses to HDD data permanently.
Cautions should be taken in initialization.
F-2-41
2-28
Relevant Error Codes
E610 and detailed codes
E602 and detailed codes

E code
E602
-2000
Description
Authentication Error
2-29
Cause
Detection
Timing
Error in authentication Start-up

between the host
machine and the
encryption board
Failure in Encryption
Board
Error in recognition of
the encryption board
Device Error
Failure in the
encryption board
E code
Actions
Detailed
Code
E610
Check connections between

the encryption board and
the HDD and between the
encryption board and the main
controller 2. This error may be
triggered after replacement
of the encryption board or the
main controller 2. At any rate,
this error disables accesses to
HDD data. When no problem
is found in connections, use
SST to execute Key Clear >
Format > Install System.
0001
0002
0101
0102
0201
T-2-19
Cause (Detected Error)

Failure in the HDD encryption key
(Error in hardware configuration). No
encryption board is installed.
(Error in hardware configuration).
The memory space is insufficient for
encryption operation.
Failure in the HDD encryption key (Error
in initialization). Failed to initialize the
memory space where the key is stored.
in initialization). Failed to initialize the
encryption processing unit.
Failure in the HDD encryption key.
Error in the encryption processing unit.
0202
Failure in the HDD encryption key.

Error in the encryption processing unit.
0301

in the encryption key). Failed to create
the encryption key.
in the encryption key). Detected the
failure in the encryption key.
0302
0303

in the encryption key). Detected the
failure in the encryption key.
0401

in the encryption processing). Error is
detected during the encryption process.
0402

in the encryption processing). Error is
detected during the decoding process.
Actions
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Turn OFF/ON the power. If the error is

not recovered, this may be caused by
hardware-related factors.
not recovered, this may be caused by a
hardware-related factor (SRAM). Note
that this error initializes the HDD.
hardware-related factor (SRAM). Note
that this error initializes the HDD.
hardware-related factor (the encryption
board).
hardware-related factor (the encryption
board).
T-2-20
2-29
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Points to note at servicing
2-30
Service Operations
When Replacing Parts
Parts name
Remedy
Reference
HDD
Backup of the set/registered data

HDD format
Downloading system software
Restoring the backup data
Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)
Main Controller PCB 1 Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
Main Controller PCB 2 Backup of the set/registered data
Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
Restoring the backup data
TPM PCB
When TPM setting is ON:Restoring the TPM key
T-2-21
Consumables
N/A
Points to note at servicing

N/A
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Points to note at servicing
2-30
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
2-31
Laser Exposure System
Laser Scanner Unit 1
Overview
Imaging Lens
Overview
Reflection Mirror
To realize the high-speed printing, this machine adopts the 2 Laser Scanner Units and the
Laser Driver of each color executes laser scanning with 4-beam.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 / C5250 employs 4 beam and C5240 / 5235 employs 2
beam.
Skew Correction Motor Bk (M34)
Imaging Lens
Skew Correction Motor C (M33)
Reflection Mirror
Scanner
Mirror
Skew Correction Motor Y (M31)

C
Imaging Lens
Skew Correction
Motor M (M32)
Laser
Driver
(M)
Bk
Y
Scanner
Mirror
Laser Driver PCB C (UN15)

Laser Driver PCB Bk (UN14)
BD Sensor (Y, M)
Laser A
Laser B
Laser C
Laser D
Laser
Driver
(Bk)
Laser
Driver
(C)
BD Sensor (C, Bk)
Scanner
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(Y)
Laser Driver PCB Y (UN13)

Laser Driver PCB M (UN12)
F-2-44
This machine emits the laser to the image area on the drum negatively-charged.
Reflection
Mirror
Bk
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging
Lens
Imaging
Lens
Reflection
Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(M)
Scanner
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(Y)
Laser
Driver
(Bk)
Scanner
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(C)
F-2-46
Image area
Non-image area
Non-image area
Laser ON
Enlarged view
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
F-2-45
2-31
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Specification
2-32
Specification
Item
Description
Wavelength
Laser type
Laser output
Number of laser scanner unit
Number of laser light
775 to 800nm
Red color laser (non-visible light)
10mW
2
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 / C5240: 4 beam for each color
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240 / C5235: 2 beam for each color
Resolution
1200dpi
Motor type
Brushless motor
Number of motor rotation
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 / C5240: Approx. 29100rpm
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240 / C5235: Approx. 37800rpm
Number of scanner mirror facet 6 facet (phi 40)
Control list
Laser ON / OFF control
Horizontal scanning synchronous control
Vertical scanning synchronous control
APC control
Laser scanner motor control
BD correction control
Laser shutter control
Image tilt correction control
T-2-22
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Specification
2-32
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Overview
2-33
Various Controls
DC Controller (UN1)
Overview
Item
Horizontal scanning
synchronous control
Vertical scanning synchronous
control
APC control
Laser Scanner Motor Control
Laser Driver PCB
Laser ON/OFF control
Operation description
Laser Driver PCB
Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of

laser control signal
To align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction.
Horizontal scanning
synchronous control
Scanner Motor
To align the writing start position in vertical scanning direction.

To make the laser light per 1 line consistent amount.
To rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed.
To correct the gap BD timing gap due to the angle variation of
Scanner Mirror.
To prevent the laser light from being emitted to the machine inside.
To correct the image tilt in vertical scanning direction (this control
is operated based on the result of color displacement correction
control).
Vertical scanning
synchronous control
APC control
Main
Controller

Laser Driver PCB
T-2-23
Laser Driver PCB

Scanner Motor

F-2-47
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Overview
2-33
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Horizontal scanning synchronous control
Horizontal scanning synchronous control
Purpose
Purpose
Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of laser control signals.
This is to align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction.
Execution timing
Execution timing
After the power ON
Per 1 line
Control detail
Execution time
DC Controller switches the 4 modes (forcible OFF mode, APC mode, Print mode and standby
Approx. 7.5s
2-34
mode) according to the laser control signal.
Control detail
1) DC Controller forcibly emits the laser diode on M-laser driver PCB by setting the laser
Laser control signal
control signal of M -laser to APC mode. Also, DC controller forcibly emits the laser diode of
Laser Driver
PCB
DC Controller (UN1)
Video signal
Scanner mirror
Laser beam
Bk laser driver PCB by setting the Bk laser control signal to APC mode.
2) Concerning the laser beam of M laser, there is a BD sensor (Y, M) on the scanning light
path and the laser bean is emitted to the BD sensor (Y, M). Regarding the laser beam of Bk
laser, there is a BD sensor (C, Bk) on the scanning light path and the laser beam is emitted
F-2-48
Mode
Laser status
Forcible OFF mode

APC mode
Print mode
Standby mode
OFF
ON
ON / OFF
OFF
Remark
it to the DC controller.
Light intensity setting decided on APC is cleared.

Laser light intensity adjustment
Laser is emitted according to the video signal.
Host machine is in standby status.
4) DC Controller executes synchronous control based on this signal and sends the standard
BD signal to Main Controller as a horizontal scanning synchronous signal (BD) per 1 line.
5) When Main Controller receives those signals, it outputs the video signal (VDO_Y, VDO_
T-2-24
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
At 1st line (APC)
LaserA
At 2nd line (APC)
LaserB
At 3rd line (APC)
LaserC
At 4th line (APC)
LaserD
Mode
name
M, VOD_C, VDO_Bk) to DC Controller. As a result of this, the Laser Driver emits the laser
beam from the specified position for each line.
Image formation
Print
instruction ready timing
PSTBY
to the BD sensor (C, Bk) as well.

3) Two BD sensors detect the laser beam, create the BD signal (BD_YM, BD_CBk) and send
Standby
mode
APC mode
APC mode / Print mode
Forcible
Standby
mode
OFF mode
F-2-49
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Horizontal scanning synchronous control
2-34
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control
Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control

VDO_Y
BD_YM
Y Laser
Purpose
This is to align the writing start position in vertical scanning direction.
BD Sensor (Y, M)
Execution timing
VDO_M
M Laser Driver
PCB
DC
Controller (UN1)
Main Controller
Y Laser Driver
PCB
2-35
M Laser
Per printing
Execution time
VDO_C
BD_CBk
C Laser Driver
PCB
500ms
C Laser
Control detail
BD Sensor (C, Bk)
1) When DC Controller receives the print instruction, it detects the reference signal.
Based on this signal, it creates the vertical scanning synchronous signal (PVREQ) and
VDO_Bk
Bk Laser Driver
PCB
sends to Main Controller.
Bk Laser
2) Main Controller is synchronized with PVREQ signal and sends VDO signal to DC Cotnroller.
3) DC Controller creates the laser drive signal based on VDO signal and sends it to the Laser
F-2-50
Scanner Unit. The Laser Scanner Unit conform the image leading edge with the paper
leading edge by emitting the laser in this timing.
Reference DB
PVREQ
VDO_Y
VDO_M
VDO_C
VDO_Bk
Print
instruction
VDO
DC Controller
(UN1)
Main
Controller2
VDO
Laser
Laser
Laser
Laser
VDO
VDO
2)
VDO
F-2-51
1)
Reference
Signal
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control
Laser drive signal
3)
F-2-52
2-35
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > APC (Auto Power Control) control
APC (Auto Power Control) control
Print instruction
Purpose
Reference
signal
This is to make the laser light for 1 line consistent amount.
Video request signal

(PVREQ)
Video signal
(VDO)
2-36
Execution timing
T1
About15ms
Per each line (before image writing)
Execution time
T2
About15ms
Y
Approx. 2 s
Bk
F-2-53
Control details
1) DC Controller outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC on the Laser Driver
PCB.
2) APC mode is specified to the Laser Driver IC and it forcibly emits the laser diode of each
color. At the same time, each laser driver IC monitors the laser diode (LD) on the photo
diode (PD) and adjusts the output of laser diode until the light intensity becomes consistent
amount.
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > APC (Auto Power Control) control
2-36
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser scanner motor control
Y laser control signal
Purpose
Y Laser
Y Laser Driver
PCB
2-37
PD
This is to rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed.
LD
Execution timing
At power-ON, per printing
M laser control signal
M Laser
M Laser Driver
PCB
PD
Execution time
LD
Approx. 3s (at power-ON), approx. 1s (at printing)
Control detail
DC Controller
(UN1)
1) DC Controller forcibly rotates the motors in the two Laser Scanner Units.
2) It detects the speed detection signal (FG1 to 2, BD_YM, BD_CBk) and compares the signal
C laser control signal
Bk laser control signal
C Laser
C Laser Driver
PCB
PD
with the standard signal in DC Controller and then, controls the acceleration signal (ACC1
LD
to 2) and the deceleration signal (DEC1 to 2) to make the specified speed.
Bk Laser
Bk Laser Driver
PCB
PD
LD
F-2-54
2-37

ACC1
DEC1
Related error code

E100-0100: BD error (laser scanner unit 1)
When the Laser Scanner Unit 1 (YM laser) is started or print operation is processing, if the BD
signal cannot be detected after the specified time.
Scanner Motor
(Y, M)
FG1
BD_YM
E100-0300: BD error (laser scanner unit 2)

When the Laser Scanner Unit 2 (CBk laser) is started or print operation is processing, if the BD
signal cannot be detected after the specified time.
E100-B000: BD error (laser scanner unit 1/2)
When the Laser Scanner Unit 1/2 is started or print operation is processing, if the BD cycle
cannot be detected after the specified time.
BD Sensor (Y, M)
Y Laser Driver
PCB
DC Controller
(UN1)
M Laser Driver
PCB
E102-0100: EEPROM error (laser scanner unit 1)

Reading error of EEPROM on Laser Driver (Y) occurs.
E102-0300: EEPROM error (laser scanner unit 2)
Reading error of EEPROM on Laser Driver (C) occurs.

ACC2
DEC2
2-38
Scanner Motor
(C, Bk)
FG2
BD_CBk
BD Sensor (C, Bk)

C Laser Driver
PCB
Bk Laser Driver
PCB
F-2-55
2-38
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > BD correction control
2-39
START
Purpose
This is to correct the displacement of writing start position of each color laser due to the angle
variation of scanner mirror facet.
Execution timing
At power-ON, per printing
Scanner motor
control finish
(Constant-speed
rotation detection)
BD interval
measurement
Execution time
Within approx. 0.5s or less
Control detail
Writing start correction

value calculation
Constant interval
Constant interval
Constant interval
Narrow interval
BD1
Scanner Motor is completed.

3) Based on the foregoing correction value, image writing position is corrected.
BD1
Writing start position
correction
BD3
BD4
BD3
BD4
1) DC Controller measures the BD interval after the constant-speed rotation control of

2) DC Controller calculates the correction value according to the gap of BD interval.
BD2
BD2
BD1 VDO BD2
VDO BD3 VDO BD4 VDO
END
F-2-56
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > BD correction control
2-39
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser shutter control
2-40

Purpose
This is to prevent the residue toner from sticking to the dust-prevention glass. Or to prevent
Bk Laser Shutter
Color Laser Shutter
Bk Shutter Lever
the laser light from emitting to the machine inside when the front cover / right cover is opened.
Color
Shutter Lever
Execution timing
After power-ON
Execution time
Approx. 3s (at power-ON), approx. 1s (when scanner motor is started or cover is opened)
Control detail
While the Laser Scanner Motor is operating, the Laser Shutter is opened. During other period,
the laser shutter is closed.
Bk Shutter Cam
Drive Shaft
Laser Shutter Motor (M28)
Color Shutter Cam

Laser Shutter Sensor (PS29)
Sensor Lever
Front Cover Sensor (PS26)
Also, the Front Cover Sensor (PS18) or the Right Cover Sensor (PS20) works together and
it stops the output signal of laser driver. At the same time, if the Front Cover or Right Cover is
opened, the Shutter is closed and the laser light path is forcibly blocked.
DC Controller (UN1)
Right Cover Sensor (PS26)
F-2-57
Those operations are controlled by the DC Controller.
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser shutter control
2-40
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Image tilt correction control
Laser shutter position

For color
For Bk
Relation of shutter lever and cam

For Bk
For color
Sensor lever position
Close
Shutter
Lever
Purpose
Execution timing
Sensor
Lever
At power-ON, per total 360 sheets printing
Shutter Cam
Laser
Shutter
Open

This is to prevent the gap of laser emission.
(PS29)
Close
2-41
Execution time
Approx. 3 sec
Close
Control detail
1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color on the ITB.
2) DC Controller compares the patch pattern with the standard value backed up in the
DC Controller by reading this patch pattern at the Patch Sensor and detects the color
displacement amount.
Open
3) Based on the foregoing detection result, the laser emission position (tilt degree) of Laser
Open
Scanner Unit is changed.
F-2-58
Related error code

E0112-0000: Laser shutter motor error (not in home position)
If the Laser Shutter Sensor (PS29) is not in the home position at initial operation.
E0112-0001: Laser shutter motor error (operation failure at shutter close)
If the Laser Shutter Sensor (PS29) is not in the home position after approx. 10 sec from the
shutter close operation.
E0112-0002: Laser shutter motor error (operation failure at shutter open)
If the Laser Shutter Sensor (PS29) is still in the home position after approx. 10 sec from the
shutter open operation.
2-41
Photosensitive Drum
2-42
Imaging Lens
Cam
Skew
Correction
Motor
Arm
Position relation of
imaging lens and arm
Imaging Lens
Skew Correction Motor
Before correction
Imaging Lens
Arm Cam
Imaging Lens
Cam
Photosensitive Drum
Cam
Arm
Skew
Correction
Motor
Arm
Position relation of
imaging lens and arm
Imaging Lens
After correction
Arm Cam
F-2-59
Imaging Lens
Cam
Skew
Correction
Motor
Scanner Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Arm
F-2-60
2-42
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Service Works > Points to note at servicing
2-43
Service Works
Periodically replaced parts
There is no periodically replaced part.
Consumables
No.
Parts Name
Parts Number
Qty
Estimated Life
Dust-blocking Glass cleaning pad
FL2-9476
150k
T-2-25
Periodical service list

Parts name: Dust-blocking Glass
Expected life: per 50K sheet
Operation: Clean it with the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning tool stored in the machine.
Dust-blocking glass
cleaning tool
F-2-61
Operation at parts replacement

N/A

Do not install a used Laser Scanner Unit 2 (C/Bk laser) to the position where a Laser Scanner
Unit 1 (Y/M laser) should be installed.
With this machine, yellow laser is used as a reference to control other colors. This means
that the reference will be changed if the Laser Scanner Unit for YM side and that for CBk side
are replaced with each other. As a result of this, color displacement will occur and may not
be solved. Even if the units are returned after they were replaced with each other once, the
reference was changed when they were replaced, therefore color displacement will not be
solved.
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Service Works > Points to note at servicing
2-43
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-44
Image Formation System
Specifications
Item
Photosensitive Material
Drum
O/D of drum
Cleaning
Process speed
Overview
Overview
Image formation system of this machine uses the magnetic 2-component jumping developing
method for developing and the intermediate transfer method for transfer to create toner
Drum heater
image.
Developing
assembly
To increase life of the image formation unit, this machine uses the primary transfer
disengagement method as a new technology.
Following shows major improved points compared to the previous iRC3880/2880 series.
Purpose :
Lower running cost
Improved life of drum unit
Improved life of developing assembly
Improved productivity
Primary transfer roller
ITB cleaner unit
Primary
charging
Improved points :
Separating developing assembly from drum unit
Introducing Bk drum (highly-durable type)
Introducing ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) technology
Separating the laser scanner unit into 2 units
(4-beam for each laser driver) (see Note)
Secondary transfer
inner roller
ITB belt
Post-secondary
transfer static eliminator
Secondary transfer
outer roller
ITB unit
Y
Toner
container
Bk
Patch sensor
Developing
assembly
Laser
Laser
Laser
Laser
Developing
cylinder
Charging Photosensitive
drum
roller
drum unit
Laser scanner unit 1
Laser scanner unit 2

F-2-62
Note :
4-beam for iR ADVANCE 5255/5250, 2-beam for iR ADVANCE 5240/5235
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
Developing cylinder
Developing method
Toner
Toner level detection
O/D of cylinder
Charging method
O/D of roller
Cleaning
Toner amount (the life value
is based on A4 size with 5%
image ratio)
Detection of toner container

(presence)
Availability to replace a toner
container (during continuous
print)
Transfer method
ITB unit
Material
Circumferential length
Cleaning
Belt displacement correction
Primary
Transfer method
transfer
Disengagement mechanism
O/D of roller
Secondary
Transfer method
transfer
Disengagement mechanism
Cleaning
O/D of secondary transfer inner
roller
O/D of secondary transfer outer
roller
Separating method
Patch sensor
Function/Method
OPC
30mm
Cleaning blade
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051=246mm/s,
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5045=246mm/s,
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/5030=160mm/s
Mounted with Bk drum as a standard.
Assigned as an option for color drums.
1pc (single developing)
Dry, 2-component jumping
Non-magnetic negative toner
Not available
20mm
Roller charging
14mm
Brush roller
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/5045
Bk: approx. 940g (Life: approx. 40k)
Color: approx. 590g (Life: approx. 30k)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/5030
Not Available
Available
Intermediate Transfer (ITB)

PI (Polyimide)
893mm
Cleaning blade
Available (photosensitive sensor)
Transfer roller
Available
16mm
Transfer roller
Not available
Electrostatic cleaning
16mm
24mm
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Yes
T-2-26
2-44
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print process
2-45
Parts configuration
Print process
Major Parts
Delivery
Toner container
M
Y
Toner supply
assembly
Bk
Transfer block
Transfer
assembly
9. ITB cleaning
ITB
5. Primary transfer
Bk
5. Primary transfer
5. Primary transfer
5. Primary transfer
7. Separation
6. Secondary transfer
4. Developing
Developing block
Waste toner case

Laser scanner unit
Fixing block
8. Fixing
ITB cleaning block
10. Drum cleaning

1.Pre-exposure M
Y
3. Laser exposure Photosensitive
Photosensitive
drum
drum
Developing assembly
+ Drum unit
F-2-63
2. Primary charging
Static latent image
formation block
Drum
cleaning
block
C
Photosensitive
drum
Bk
Photosensitive
drum
Registration
Pickup
Flow of print paper
Rotating direction of ITB, photosensitive drum
F-2-64
Overview
Static latent
1 Pre-exposure
image
formation block 2 Primary charging
Developing
block
Transfer block
To remove residual charge on the surface of photosensitive

drum by exposure of pre-exposure LED light
To charge the surface of photosensitive drum to be
uniformed negative potential
3 Laser exposure
To create static latent image on the surface of
photosensitive drum by emitting laser light (image exposure:
laser exposure area becomes image area)
4 Developing
To attach negatively-charged toner from the developing
cylinder to the photosensitive drum by non-negative
2-component jumping developing method.
5 Primary transfer
To apply positively-charged potential from the back surface
of ITB to transfer toner on the surface of photosensitive
drum to ITB.
6 Secondary transfer To apply positively-charged potential to the secondary
transfer outer roller to transfer toner on the ITB to the paper.
7 Separation
To separate paper from the ITB by curvature separation
method. In the case of thin paper which has low elastic
force, the static eliminator reduces potential on the surface
of paper to separate thin paper more easily.
8 Fixing
To fix toner on the paper with heat and pressure.
9 ITB cleaning
To remove residual toner on the ITB by the cleaning blade.
Fixing block
ITB cleaning
block
Drum cleaning 10 Drum cleaning
block
To remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum by the

cleaning blade.
T-2-27
2-45
2-46
Bias Types
There are the following 8 types biases used on this machine.
Bias name
Bias type
Primary charging bias (DC)

Primary charging bias (AC)
Flying toner blocking bias (DC)
Developing bias (DC)
Developing bias (AC)
Primary transfer bias
Secondary transfer bias
Secondary transfer cleaning bias
DC
AC
DC
DC
AC
DC
DC
DC
Bias value
(Reference value)
Approx. 600V
Approx. 1.5kVpp
Approx. -1.3kV
Approx. -400V
Approx. 1.6kVpp
Approx. 1.5kV
Approx. 3kV
Approx. -1.0kV
Application destination
Primary Charging Roller
Toner Blocking Terminal Plate
Developing Cylinder
Primary Transfer Roller
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
T-2-28
Aforementioned biases are created by 3 HVT and are supplied to the loads used in the
printing process.
Developing Developing Developing Developing
subhigh
subhigh
subhigh
subhigh
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
PCB Y
PCB M
PCB C
PCB Bk
(UN43)
(UN44)
(UN45)
(UN46)
Photosensitive
drum
Toner-blocking
electrode plate
Developing
cylinder
Secondary
transfer
Secondary outer roller
transfer
inner roller
Primary
transfer
roller
M
M
Y
Y
Primary
charging
roller
C
C
Bk
Bk
Developing AC
monitoring signal
Primary transfer DC
Developing AC+DC
Charging AC+DC
HVT2
(UN17)
monitoring signal
Secondary transfer DC
HVT3
(UN18)
Charging AC+DC
Developing AC+DC
HVT1
(UN16)
DC controller
(UN1)
F-2-65
2-46
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Pre-exposure
2-47
Controls
Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure control
Overview
Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure control
Primary charging
Primary charging bias control
Discharge current control
Primary charging cleaning control
Developing/drum
Developing bias control
ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) control
Toner-blocking bias control
Drum (presence) detection
New/old detection of drum unit
Drum life detection
Drum heater control
Drum Drum rotation speed control
Removing residual potential on the photosensitive drum before executing the primary
Image stabilization control

Drum film thickness detection
D-max control
D-half control
ARCDAT control
PASCAL control
ATVC control
charging prevents drum ghost during continuous print.

According to the command from the DC controller PCB, the pre-exposure unit exposes (emits)
LED when the photosensitive drum is rotated.
Emitting LED light through the light guide removes residual potential on the photosensitive
drum.
To make up for the lack of LEDs light intensity, two (2) pre-exposure LEDs are used in total:
Toner supply
Toner cap automatic opening control
Toner level detection/toner supply control
one at the front of the main unit, and the other at the rear of the main unit.
Pre-exposure LED (rear)
(UN24 / 26 /28 / 30)
Waste toner feeding

Waste toner full level detection
Waste toner case (presence) detection
Transfer/separation
Primary transfer disengagement control
Primary transfer bias control
Secondary transfer bias control
ITB displacement correction control
ITB cleaning control
Secondary transfer outer roller cleaning
control
Drum cleaning
Drum cleaning control
T-2-29
Light guide
Photosensitive drum
Charging roller cleaning brush
DC controller
(UN1)
Pre-exposure LED (front)

(UN23 / 25 /27 / 29)
Primary charging roller
F-2-66
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Pre-exposure
2-47
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary charging
Primary charging
2-48
Primary charging bias control
To charge the surface of photosensitive drum to be uniform negatively-charged potential
Overview
The primary charging bias (AC+DC negative), generated by HVT1/2 PCB, is applied to the
This machine uses the roller charging method for primary transfer.
To prevent image fault (white spot/missing image) caused by residual toner, the cleaning
primary charging roller.

DC controller(UN1)
brush roller is added to clean the primary charging roller.

Photosensitive
drum
Cleaning brush
roller
Drum
cleaner
HVT1 /2(UN16/17)
AC + DC negative
Photosensitive
drum
Primary charging
roller
F-2-67
Cleaning brush roller Primary charging roller

F-2-68
Discharge current control

To apply optimal primary charging bias according to the environmental change or use
condition of photosensitive drum
Execution timing
1) When the power is turned ON, at sleep recovery
2) At last rotation after printing 125 accumulated sheets, or at paper interval after printing 250
accumulated sheets (see Note1)
Note1: The number of accumulated sheets is counted by the counter common for color mode
and Bk mode.
Detection description
To detect the current monitoring value of the primary charging AC bias
2-48
2-49
Primary charging cleaning control
Execution time
Approx. 4 seconds
This machine may not be able to collect residual toner on the drum because this machine
uses fine-grain toner, which possibly results in image fault (image soiling) due to residual
Operation of the main unit
toner attached on the primary charging roller.
1) Current monitoring value of the primary charging AC bias is detected
To prevent this symptom, the cleaning brush roller is added to forcibly remove residual toner
2) Optimal primary charging current value is determined according to the result of the
attached on the primary charging roller.
environment sensor (UN22) and the current monitoring value
The drive of the brush roller is engaged with the primary charging roller.
3) The primary charging AC bias is determined to apply to the primary charging roller
Primary charging AC
Current monitoring signal
Bk
Photosensitive
drum
Drum
cleaner
HVT1
(UN16)
DC controller
(UN1)
Primary charging AC
HVT2
(UN17)

F-2-69
Related error codes:

E061-0X01: Abnormal current run to the Drum (small current level or no drum is found)
E061-0XE0: The change in current level for Drum film thickness detection is too much
compared to the previous time.
E061-0XF0: Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Drum film thickness
(large current level)
E061-0XF1: Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Drum film thickness
(small current level)
Cleaning brush
roller
Primary charging
roller
F-2-70
x indicates the corresponding color. (0=Y, 1=M, 2=C, 3=Bk)
2-49
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum
2-50
Developing/drum
Developing bias control

To create toner image on the photosensitive drum after the toner has been attached on the
Developing overview
photosensitive drum
Toner-blocking
electrode plate
Control description
Developing
cylinder
The developing bias (AC, DC negative) generated by HVT1/2 (UN16/17) is applied to the
developing cylinder
Developing DC bias: bias for generating potential difference from the photosensitive drum
Bias value is determined based on detection result of the drum film thickness
Toner feeding screw B
Developing AC bias: bias for improving image quality

DC controller(UN1)
HVT1/2(UN16/17)
Developing motor M5 M8
AC+DC
Developing
cylinder
ATR sensor
(TS5 TS8)
Toner feeding screw A
Waste toner delivery
discharge outlet
F-2-71
Parts name
Developing assembly
Developing cylinder
Toner feeding screw A/B
Toner-blocking electrode
plate
Function
To develop toner fed from the hopper unit on the photosensitive drum
To develop toner in the developing assembly on the photosensitive drum
To stir developer (toner and carrier) in the toner container to supply to
the developing cylinder
To apply DC bias to the electrode plate to increase retention strength of
toner on the developing cylinder
T-2-30
Drive configuration
Parts name
M5 to M8
Developing motor
TS5 to TS8 ATR sensor
F-2-72
Function
To rotate the developing cylinder and the toner feeding screw
To detect the ratio of developer (toner + carrier) in the developing
assembly
T-2-31
2-50
2-51
ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) control
Toner-blocking bias control
This machine introduced a method to supply developer (toner + carrier) to improve life (longer
This control prevents scattering of toner on the developing cylinder due to deterioration of the
life) of the developing assembly.
developing assembly.
This is a control to supply developer to the developing assembly and also discharge
Developing AC bias which has been generated by HVT1 (UN16) is generated to be negative
developer to keep optimal developer amount in the developing assembly.
DC bias on the developing sub high voltage PCB (UN43 to 46).
This control prevents deterioration of carrier, which had been occurred due to reuse of
The generated bias is applied to the toner-blocking electrode plate. This improves retention
developer in the developing assembly.
strength of toner on the developing cylinder.
The Toner Feed Screw A & B drive when the Developing Motor (M5 to 8) drives so that the
DC controller(UN1)
developer will be exhausted. The developer is supplied at the right time based on the ATR
control result.
Flow of toner
HVT1/2 (UN16/17)
Return screw
Toner discharge outlet
Toner supply inlet
ATR sensor Toner feeding screw C
Developing sub high voltage PCB Y/M/C/Bk (UN43 46)

DC
Toner-blocking
electrode plate
Developing
cylinder
Toner supply inlet

Return screw
Toner feeding screw C
Toner discharge outlet

F-2-73

F-2-74
2-51
2-52
Drum overview
Drive configuration
Drum motor
Pre-exposure LED light guide
Photosensitive drum
Drum encoder sensor 2

(UN32 / 34 / 36 / 38)

(UN31 / 33 / 35 / 37)
M1 M4
Pre-exposure LED
light guide
Photosensitive
drum
Waste toner screw

Waste toner screw
Drum cleaning blade
Cleaning brush roller
Drum cleaning blade

F-2-76
F-2-75
Parts name
Parts name
Function
Drum unit
To create toner image by the toner from the developing cylinder after the
static latent image has been created on the photosensitive drum.
Light guide
To expose pre-exposure LED light on the photosensitive drum
Photosensitive drum
To create toner image on the photosensitive drum
Primary charging roller To make the surface of photosensitive drum to be evenly-charged potential
Charging cleaning
To remove residual toner on the primary charging roller
brush roller
Drum cleaning blade To remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum
Waste toner screw
To feed residual toner
Function
M1 to M4
Drum motor
To rotate the photosensitive drum, the waste toner screw
UN31 to UN38 Drum rotation sensor 1/2 To detect rotation of the photosensitive drum
T-2-33
T-2-32
2-52
2-53
Detection of drum (presence)
Old/new detection of drum unit
To detect if the drum unit is installed or not
To detect whether the drum unit is new or old
Execution timing
Detection timing
1) When the power is turned ON
When the power is turned ON
2) At recovery from sleep mode

To check state of the fuse that is attached to each drum unit
It is determined by the current monitor value of the primary charging AC bias at discharge
There is a fuse: new drum
current control.
Fuse is blown: used drum
In case that current monitor value is less than the specified value (1mA): no Drum Unit
In case that current monitor value is the specified value (1mA) or more: Drum Unit present

1) The main unit checks presence of the fuse attached to each drum (the fuse detection signal
Execution timing
is monitored)
Approx. 4 seconds
2) If there is a fuse, the main unit clears the drum film thickness detection data of the
3) The main unit cuts the fuse (to make the fuse cut signal H)
applicable drum unit, which is kept in SRAM (IC2).

Operation of the main unit is stopped while No drum unit is shown on the control panel.
Primary charging AC
Bk
Drum unit
HVT1
(UN16)
DC controller
(UN1)
DC controller
(UN1)
Primary charging AC
+24V
HVT2
(UN17)
SRAM
(IC2)
Fuse detection signal

Fuse cut signal
F-2-77
Fuse
F-2-78
2-53
MEMO:
Fuse cut operation is executed when the power is turned ON after a new Drum Unit is
installed.
Thus, if replacing a Drum Unit to another one (new one) to identify a cause of failure at
a field, fuse is blown and the drum thickness data is cleared.
As a result, even though the original Drum Unit is installed to the host machine again,
the host machine identifies it as like-new one and correct print image may not be output.
With consideration to above matter, do not use a new Drum Unit when identifying a
cause of failure.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF (fuse cut extend on new drum unit)
This is to disable the Drum Unit initialization to be executed when a new Drum Unit is
inserted. Also, fuse meltdown after Drum Unit initialization will not be executed.
This is used when replacing a Drum Unit temporarily and checking the image to identify
a cause of a trouble etc.
0: Initialization is executed when a new one is installed. Fuse meltdown is executed.
[Default]
1: Initialization is not executed when a new one is installed. Fuse melt down is not
executed.
Make sure to set this service mode to 1 only when it is necessary at servicing. Be sure
to reset this service mode to 0 when service works are completed.
2-54
Drum life detection
To detect life of the Photosensitive Drum.
The life data is stored in the SRAM (IC2) of the DC Controller.
The drum life value can be checked from the service mode.
Target drum
Color drum
(YMC)
Bk drum
Detection items
Data storage
location
Primary Charging DC Bias

SRAM (IC2)
Monitor value (For details,
of the DC
refer to "Drum film thickness Controller
detection".)
Drum rotation time + Primary
charging AC bias applying
time
Reference service mode
Unit
Drum counter life display

%
(COPIER > COUNTER >
LF > Y-DRM-LF, M-DRM-LF,
C-DRM-LF)
Drum counter life display
%
(COPIER > COUNTER > LF >
K-DRM-LF)
T-2-34
*1: The life data varies according to the image type, paper type, use environment, etc.
For this reason, the value written in the service mode (drum counter life display) is for
reference, so this is not the accurate value.
Because of detection sequence, display in service mode may not be changed from 0% for
a while (approx. 2,000 sheets) when using a new drum. After feeding approx. 2000 sheets,
approximate number can be displayed.
2-54
2-55
Drum heater control
Drum rotation speed control
The drum heater is attached below the photosensitive drum to keep stabilized charging and
This control is performed to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy
exposure according to the environmental change in the machine.
of the image position (color displacement).
This heater is controlled to keep constant internal temperature. Basically, when the
Environment Switch is ON, the heater is ON regardless of ON/OFF of the main power except
Execution timing
for during printing. (Excluding the case where the internal temperature is high).
1) The drum rotates, driven by the drum motors (M1 to M4).
It also controls the Cassette Heater in the same manner. (For details, refer to Cassette Heater
2) There is an encoder on the drum shaft, of which rotation is monitored by the two sensors (Y:
Control in Pickup Feed System.)
UN31/32, M: UN33/34, C: UN35/36, Bk: UN37/38,).

3) This sensor counts the drum count based on a pulse, and feeds back the drum rotation
speed to the drum DC controller to perform speed control.
Photosensitive
drum
Drum motor
(M1~M4)
Photosensitive drum
Drum heater
(UN32 / 34 / 36 / 38)
(UN31 / 33 / 35 / 37)
F-2-79
DC controller (UN1)
F-2-80
2-55
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/separation
2-56
Transfer/separation
Drive configuration
Overview
ITB motor
M13
Post-secondary transfer
static eliminator
Drive roller
(steering roller)
ITB scraper
ITB Cleaning
blade
Drive roller
(steering roller)
Waste toner
feeding screw
Tension roller
Primary transfer
auxiliary roller
Primary transfer Secondary transfer
Primary transfer
outer roller
Primary transfer
Primary transfer
roller
roller
roller
roller
(Bk)
(M)
(C)
(Y)
Waste toner
feeding screw
ITB cleaning
blade
Primary
transfer
auxiliary roller
Tension roller
Primary transfer
roller(Y)
F-2-81
Toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred on paper

Parts name
Function
ITB unit
ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
Primary Transfer Auxiliary Roller
To transfer toner on the photosensitive drum to the paper

To transfer toner on the photosensitive drum
To attract toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB
Make the contact surface of the ITB and the drum horizontal in
color mode.
To drive ITB. To correct the displacement of ITB.
To scrape toner inside the ITB
To keep appropriate tension of the ITB
To scrape toner on the ITB
To feed residual toner inside the ITB cleaner unit
To transfer toner on the ITB to the paper
To attract toner on the ITB to the paper and feed the paper
To eliminate electric charge on the paper after secondary
transfer
Static eliminator
ITB scraper
Tension roller
Cleaning blade
Waste toner feeding screw
Secondary transfer unit
Secondary transfer outer roller
Static eliminator
T-2-35
M14 ITB displacement control motor
ITB steering
position sensor(PS24)
ITB displacement
sensor 1 to 5 (PS25 28,PS58)
Primary transfer
disengagement sensor 2(PS23)
ITB scraper
Primary transfer
Idol roller
disengagement sensor 1(PS22)
Secondary transfer
outer roller
Primary transfer
roller(C)
Patch sensor
Primary transfer
Primary transfer
(Front/Center/Rear)
roller(M)
roller(Bk)
(UN47 / UN48 / UN49)
M15 Primary transfer disengagement motor
F-2-82
Parts name
M13
M14
ITB motor
ITB displacement
control motor
M15
Primary transfer
disengagement motor
PS24
ITB steering position
sensor
PS22
Primary transfer
detachment sensor 1
PS23
Primary transfer
detachment sensor 2
PS25 to 28, ITB displacement
PS58
sensor
UN47 to 48 Patch Sensor (front/
rear)
UN49
Patch Sensor (center)
Function
To rotate the ITB and the waste toner screw
To move the drive roller (steering roller)
To make the Primary Transfer Auxiliary Roller and the primary
transfer roller (Y/M/C) engaged/disengaged
To detect position of the drive roller (steering roller)
To detect whether the Tension Roller and Primary Transfer
Roller (Y/M/C) are pressurized condition.
To detect whether the Tension Roller and the Primary Transfer
Roller (Y/M/C) is disengaged condition.
To detect position of the ITB
To detect color displacement level (amount)
To detect patch density for image stabilization control (D-max,
D-half, etc.) and to detect the color displacement amount
T-2-36
2-56
2-57
Primary transfer disengagement control

The primary transfer roller for color is engaged or disengaged to keep longer life of the image
formation parts (photosensitive drum, ITB)
Primary transfer
auxiliary roller
Execution timing
Roller to be engaged: when making color prints (If 2 and more sheets of Bk continues
Support arm
within a job at Color + Bk mix printing, disengage the Primary Transfer Roller when printing
Cam
Drive shaft
color)
Roller to be disengaged: anytime other than the above timing
Sensor flag
Control description
1) Drive of the primary transfer disengagement motor (M15) rotates the cam.
Primary transfer
roller(M)
2) Rotation of the cam moves the support arm up/down, which separates (disengages) the
color primary transfer roller from the ITB.
3) Position of the primary transfer roller is detected by the Primary transfer detachment sensor
(PS22/23).
Primary transfer
disengagement
motor(M15)
Primary transfer
roller(Y)
MEMO:
At standby, the colors primary transfer roller is disengaged.
ITB
Support arm
Primary transfer
disengagement
sensor 1(PS22)
Primary transfer
disengagement
sensor 2(PS23)
Drive shaft
Primary transfer
roller(C)
F-2-83
Related error code

E074-0001: Error in ITB disengagement operation
E074-0002: Error in ITB engagement operation
E074-0003: Breakdown of Primary Transfer Pressure Sensor and Primary Transfer Disengage
Sensor.
2-57
2-58
Primary transfer bias control
Secondary transfer bias control
This control transfers toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
This control transfers toner on the ITB to the paper.
The primary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by HVT2 (UN17), is applied to the
The secondary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by HVY3 (UN18), is applied to
primary transfer roller.
the secondary transfer outer roller.
Bias value is determined by the measurement value of environment sensor 1 (UN22)
Bias value is determined by the measurement value of environment sensor 2 (UN50) and the
paper type.
DC controller(UN1)
DC controller(UN1)
HVT2 (UN17)
DC
DC
DC
HVT3 (UN18)
DC
Drive roller
(steering roller)
DC

Primary transfer
roller(Y)
Primary transfer
roller(M)
Primary transfer
roller(C)
Primary transfer
roller(Bk)
F-2-85
F-2-84
2-58
2-59
ITB displacement correction control
Related Error Codes

E075-0002: failure in ITB steering position sensor
E075-0003: failure in ITB displacement control (full displacement to the rear)
E075-0004: failure in ITB displacement sensor
E075-0005: Error/failure in searching ITB steering HP
E075-0103: failure in ITB displacement control (full displacement to the front)
This control prevents damage on the ITB due to displacement of the ITB.
Execution timing
When the ITB is rotated
Control description
1) The ITB displacement sensors (PS25 to 28, PS58) detect displacement of the ITB.
MEMO:
Following table shows detection result of the ITB displacement sensor and operation of
the main unit.
2) Drive of the ITB displacement control motor (M14) rotates the cam.
The cam position is detected by the steering position sensor (PS24).
3) Rotation of the cam moves the drive shaft up/down to tilt the steering roller.
4) Tilt of the steering roller generates tension difference of the ITB to move the ITB to the front
or rear.
5) Repeating steps 1) through 4) corrects displacement of the ITB.
Full displacement to the rear

(approx. 5.8mm or more)
Displacement to the rear
(approx. 4.0mm to 5.7mm)
Displacement to the rear
(approx. 2.1mm to 3.9mm)
ITB steering
position sensor(PS24)
ITB displacement control
motor(M14)
Drive shaft
ITB displacement
sensor1(PS25)
ITB displacement
sensor2(PS26)
Cam
Reference position
Displacement to the front
(approx.2.1mm to 3.9mm)
Displacement to the front
(approx.4.0mm to 5.7mm)
Full displacement to the front
(approx.5.8mm or more)
ITB
Sensor flag
Drive roller
(steering roller)
ITB displacement
sensor3(PS27)
State of ITB displacement sensor

PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Operation of main unit

Error code (E075-0003) stops
the main unit.
Steering roller (rear) is moved
down.
Steering roller (rear) is moved

up.
Error Code (E075-0103) stops

the main unit.
T-2-37
The ON state of the sensors above indicates that the light is blocked
ITB displacement
sensor5(PS58)
Support arm
Edge state of ITB belt
ITB displacement
sensor4(PS28)
F-2-86
2-59
2-60
ITB cleaning control
Secondary transfer outer roller cleaning control
To remove residual toner on the ITB
To prevent soil on the back of the sheet caused by soil on the secondary transfer outer roller
Control description
Execution timing
1) The ITB cleaning blade scrapes toner on the ITB.
1) At warm-up rotation (fixing temperature is less than 50 deg C, jam recovery)
2) Scraped toner is fed to the waste toner case by the waste toner feeding screw.
2) At the post-rotation
3) After executing image stabilization control (creating patch image on the ITB)
ITB motor
M13
Control description
The secondary transfer bias (see Note 1), which has been generated by HVT3 (UN18), is
applied to the secondary transfer outer roller.
Residual toner on the secondary transfer outer roller is attached to the ITB, and then collected
by the ITB cleaning unit.
Caution:
Waste toner
feeding screw
Both positive bias and negative bias are applied:

ITB cleaning blade
Drive roller
(steering roller)
F-2-87
Because of polarized-charged (positive and negative) residual toner, both types of

residual toner need to be removed.
Therefore, positively-charged bias is applied on the 1st cycle of ITB while negativelycharged bias is applied on the 2nd cycle of ITB.
ITB cleaning blade
Waste toner
feeding screw
Cleaning bias2
Drive roller
(steering roller)
Secondary transfer
outer roller
F-2-88
Related Service Mode

Forced execution of the secondary transfer outer roller cleaning
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > 2TR-CLN
2-60
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum cleaning
2-61
Drum cleaning
Separation
Paper is separated from the ITB due to papers elastic force.
In the case of thin paper which has low elastic force, the static eliminator reduces potential on
the back surface of paper. This reduces electrostatic adsorption of paper so that thin paper is
separated from the ITB more easily.
Post-secondary transfer
static eliminator
Secondary transfer
inner roller
Overview
To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum
Residual toner on the drum is scraped by the drum cleaning blade.
Then, rotation of the waste toner screw feeds the residual toner to the waste toner case.
Photosensitive drum
Secondary transfer
outer roller
Waste toner screw
Drum cleaning blade
F-2-89
MEMO:
On this machine, by reducing the diameter of Secondary Transfer Inner Roller, contact
surface of the paper with the ITB is reduced. This prevents the thin paper from sticking
onto the ITB.

F-2-90
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum cleaning
2-61
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control
2-62
Image stabilization control

Overview
To prevent image fault due to environmental change or deterioration of photosensitive drum
to make stable print image
DC controller(UN1)
ATVC control
Main controller 2
ATR control
PASCAL control
Toner
Toner
Toner
Toner
C
Bk
Patch sensor
(Front/Center/Rear)
(UN47 / UN48 / UN49) Color displacement
correction control
D-half control
D-max control
Laser scanner unit
Drum film thickness

detection
ARCDAT control
F-2-91
Control timing
Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment or the
condition of image-formation parts.
Following shows the control items to be executed by each sequence as well as the downtime
(estimation).
2-62
2-63
Control types
ATR control (patch
detection)
Secondary transfer
ATVC
Secondary transfer
cleaning
D-Max control
ARCDAT control
D-Half control
Color displacement
correction control
At normal condition
H/H environment
At recovery
8 or more hours in sleep mode
from sleep
8 or more hours in sleep state (in H/H
mode
environment)
At initial
At normal time
rotation
At environment change
Every 500 sheets
At paper
Every 100 sheets during printing
interval
Every 360 sheets (Model A) or every 240 sheets
(Model B) during printing
Every 1000% of accumulated image ratio or
every 200 sheets during printing
At last rotation After printing of every 25 sheets
After printing of every 125 sheets
After printing of every 180 sheets (Model A) or
every 120 sheets (Model B)
After printing of every 500% of accumulated
image ratio or every 100 sheets
After printing of every 1000 sheets (500 sheets
in an H/H environment)
After printing of every 5000 sheets
Drum thickness
detection
At power-on
Discharge current
correction
Execution condition
Startup correction (*1)
Execution
timing
Model A: approx 20.9 Model B: approx 29.5

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Required time (sec)

T-2-38
Model A: imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/5045

Model B: imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/5030
*1: ITB dirt correction, patch sensor correction etc.
COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING>OHP-PTH(setting of the number of sheet to execute ITB
cleaning sequence after transparency feed)
COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING>ITBB-TMG (setting of ITB cleaning interval)
2-63
2-64
Drum film thickness detection

To detect use condition of the photosensitive drum
Execution timing
1) At power-on
3) At last rotation on a specified print basis
Control description
1) The drum count value is calculated by the monitor signal of the primary charging AC bias.
2) The count value calculated in step 1) above is added to the drum count value that has been
kept in SRAM.
3) The latest count value determined in step 2) above is classified to be one of the 10 levels
as the drum film thickness detection data.
4) The determined data is compared to the existing drum film thickness detection data kept in
the other area in SRAM. If there is any difference between both data, the newly-determined
data is overwritten on SRAM as the latest drum film thickness detection data. If there is no
difference in both data, the newly-determined data is not overwritten, but disposed.
DC controller
(UN1)
SRAM(IC2)
Drum count
data
Y
Photosensitive
drum
Primary charging
roller
Bk
Monitor signal
Primary charging
AC bias
drive signal
HVT1
(UN16)
Drum film
thickness data
Y
C
F-2-92
MEMO:
Bk Drum for highly-durable type, the drum is no shave.
Therefore, Bk drum is not the thickness detection.
The result of drum thickness detection is reflected to the following data.

Developing bias
Primary transfer bias
ATR patch detection result
Laser output
2-64
2-65
D-max control
Start
This control determines optimal developing DC bias, primary charging DC bias, laser power
output.
DC controller(UN1)
Execution timing
Patch pattern is created
1) When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly.

2) At every post-rotation after the total reaches 1000 prints.
3) Power ON (High temperature and humidity)and corrects the each color developing DC
Patch sensor(Center)(UN49)
bias, primary charging DC bias, laser power output to realize the target density.
(Y)D-max correction table
Patch scanning
Detection details
Density
1) DC controller creates the patch pattern in corresponding color on the ITB.

2) DC Controller measures the patch density with the Patch Sensor (center) (UN49)
Y10
Target
ITB
Y2
Y1
Photosensitive
drum
D-max correction table is created(Y,M,C,Bk)
Vdc
DC controller(UN1)
Developing DC bias,
Primary charging DC bias,
Laser Power output is determined
Laser Power output
F-2-94
Primary charging DC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing
cylinder
Primary
charging roller
Y3
DC controller(UN1)
HVT1(UN16)
Patch sensor
(Center)
(UN49)
HVT2
(UN17)
Laser scanner
unit 1/2
Patch image date
D-max control
DC controller(UN1)
F-2-93
2-65
PASCAL control
This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics of the image
This control is executed when selecting [Auto gradation correction > Full correction] in
User Mode.
Density characteristics of the patch pattern made by test print is scanned by the reader to
create the image density correction table. Using this table corrects image gradation density
2-66
MEMO:
This control creates 4 types of patch patterns as follows:

Patch pattern for copy (64 patches for each color)

Patch pattern for text (64 patches for each color)
Patch pattern for photo (64 patches for each color)
Patch pattern for D-max (64 patches for each color)
characteristics, which vary according to the environmental change or deterioration of

photosensitive drum.
Main Controller 2
PASCAL
1st Sheet
(D-maxPASCAL)
Reader
ITB
DC Controller (UN1)
PG
Patch image date
PS49
Vdc
Target
Density
Patch Sensor (Center)
Printer
Reader
PASCAL control
PG
Paper
2nd4th Sheet
(Gradation
PASCAL)
F-2-96
Reader
LUT
PG
Paper
Standard data
for D-half
PG
Target
density value
Standard data
for ARCDAT
PS49
PG
Target
density value
- 10 Patch
- 3 Screen x 4 color
PS49
- 3 Patch
- 3 Screen x 4 color

F-2-95
Execution timing
When executing calibration (during execution of [Auto gradation correction > Full
correction] in User Mode)
Control description
1) When the specified conditions are satisfied, the main controller prints 4 types of memorized
test prints (patch pattern).
2) Set the test print on the reader.
3) The reader scans gradation density of patch pattern from the test prints.
4) Main controller 2 creates the image gradation density correction table from the gradation
density data scanned by the reader.
2-66
2-67
D-half control
Start
This control determines optimal image gradation

Main controller2
Execution timing
Output of patch pattern data
1) At replacement of the Drum Unit and Developing Assembly

2) At last rotation on a specified print basis
DC controller(UN1)
3) At power-on (H/H environment)
Control details
1) The Main Controller 2 outputs the patch data of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) to the DC
Controller.
Patch patterns (4 types)

are printed on paper
2) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB based on this
data.
3) DC Controller measures the patch pattern with the Patch Sensor (center) (UN49) and
Printed test patterns

are scanned by the reader
(Y)PASCAL correction table
Actual gradation
characteristics
100
Y63Y64
returns the result to the Main Controller 2.
Patch scanning
DC controller(UN1)
Density dataD-CON
Output of density data
Ideal gradation
Y2 characteristics
Y1
0
100
Main controller2
PASCAL correction table is
created(Y,M,C,Bk)
Data outputM-CON
100
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Density dataD-CON
Actual gradation
characteristics
100
Data outputM-CON
F-2-97
2-67
2-68
4) The Main Controller 2 executes the gradation correction to realize the ideal halftone image
Start
based on this data.

Also, this control creates the standard patch used at ARCDAT control and stores the
Main controller2
standard data for ARCDAT according to the measurement result of UN49. (refer to MEMO.)
Output of patch pattern data
ITB
DC controller(UN1)
(Y)D-half correction table
Actual gradation
characteristics
Density dataD-CON
Laser Power output
100
Patch sensor
(center)
(UN49)
Laser scanner unit 1/2
Density dataD-CON
Patch image date

DC controller(UN1)
Density data
D-half Control
Main controller2
Patch scanning
DC controller(UN1)
Output of density data
Y2 Ideal gradation
characteristics
Y1
100
Main controller2
D-half correction table is
createdY,M,C,Bk
Data outputV-CON
100
Video data
Y9 Y10
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Actual gradation
characteristics
100
Data outputV-CON
F-2-98
F-2-99
MEMO:
Following 4 types of patch patterns are created on this control.

Copy pattern (10 patch per each color)

Letter priority pattern (10 patch per each color)
Photo priority pattern (10 patch per each color)
Standard pattern for ARCDAT control (3 patch per each color)
2-68
ARCDAT control
Correction value calculation flow for ARCDAT control
This control obtains ideal gradation characteristics while reducing down time
Start
Execution timing
DC controller(UN1)
1) When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly
Reference patch pattern for

ARCDAT is created(3Patch)
example)Reference
data for
ARCDAT of copy pattern
2) At post-rotation every time the total reaches 25 prints (when continuously making prints,
printing is interrupted for every 100 prints to execute this control)
Patch sensor(center)(UN49)
Control details
Patch scanning
Density data(D-CON)
100
1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB.
(3 patterns per each color, total 12 patterns)
DC controller(UN1)
2) DC Controller measures the patch pattern with the Patch Sensor (center) (UN49) and
Output of density data (INT)
returns the result to the Main Controller 2.

3) The Main Controller 2 compares the actual measured data with the backed up standard
INT
40
2-69
data for ARCDAT control. Difference after comparison is reflected to D-half result as offset
20
value.
10
40
100
Data output(D-CON)
Main controller2
Saved as reference
data for ARCDAT
F-2-100
2-69
2-70
ITB
Start
DC controller(UN1)
Patch pattern formation
Patch sensor(center)(UN49)
Patch scanning
DC controller(UN1)
Measurement data (SIN) transmission
Patch sensor
(center)
(UN49)
Main controller2
Density data(D-CON)
Laser scanner unit 1/2
Video data
Patch image date
Comparison of measurement data (SIN)

and reference data (INT)
INT
40
20
SIN
10
40
Data output(D-CON)
Main controller2
Offset value (alpha) determination
(i.e., difference between SIN and INT)
DC controller(UN1)
Main controller2
Density data
Main controller2
F-2-101
Density data(D-CON)
ARCDAT Control
100
Current gradation
characteristics
Inclusion of result in
D-half correction table
60 Gradation characteristics
after correction
40
20
40
Data output(V-CON)
F-2-102
2-70
2-71
Control detail
This control corrects uneven exposure of the laser scanner unit or color displacement caused
by uneven rotation of the drum or ITB
1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color on the ITB.

2) DC Controller compares those patterns with the standard value backed up in the DC
Controller by reading the patch sensor (front, center, rear) (UN47 to 49) and detects the
ITB belt
color displacement amount.

3) Based on the detected result as above, the DC Controller executes correction depending
on the color displace amount.
Control type
Registration sensor
(rear)
(UN48)
Patch sensor
(Center)
(UN49)
Patch sensor
(front)
(UN47)
Correction in
sub scanning
direction
DC controller(UN1)
F-2-103
Correction in Write-start
main scanning correction
direction
Correction
of overall
magnification ratio
Correction of odd
magnification ratio
Write-start
correction
Correction of
skewed image
Timing to start
During During
print print
At
for
for
power every every
ON
360
100
prints prints
in total in total
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Control description
Change write-start timing in main

scanning direction
Increase/reduce the number of pixels in
main scanning direction (at both edges
of image)
Increase/reduce the number of pixels
in main scanning direction (at center of
image)
Change write-start timing in sub
scanning direction
Change position of laser exposure by
the laser scanner unit
T-2-39
2-71
ATR control
This control supplies developer to the developing assembly to keep ideal ratio of developer in
the developing assembly
Timing to start
When replacing with a new drum unit (ATR sensor)
At every print (Developing Assembly Toner Supply Count, ATR sensor)
In the case of post-rotation every time the total reaches 150 prints or continuous print, the job
is interrupted when the total reaches 250 prints to execute this control (patch sensor)
Control description
Developer is supplied to the drum unit while the supplying amount of the developer for
each color is calculated by the above-mentioned start timing. The DC controller determines
supplying amount of toner by 3 types of data as follows.
Developing Assembly Toner Supply Count
ATR sensor
2-72
Related Error Codes
E020-001x: Error in patch sensor of developing assembly (at initial state) (more than the upper
limit)
E020-002x: Error in patch sensor of developing assembly (at initial state) (less than the lower
limit)
E020-010x: Error in patch sensor (more than the upper limit)
E020-020x: Error in patch sensor (less than the lower limit)
E020-0x30: Error in ATR sensor (less than the lower limit, at initial state)
E020-0x31: Error in ATR sensor (less than the upper limit, at initial state)
E020-0x40: Error in ATR sensor (the control voltage less than the lower limit, at initial state)
E020-0x41: Error in ATR sensor (the control voltage less than the upper limit, at initial state)
E020-0x90: Error in ATR sensor (less than the lower limit)
E020-0x91: Error in ATR sensor (more than the upper limit)
E020-0xB0: Error in developer ratio when making prints (less than the lower limit)
E020-0xB1: Error in developer ration when making prints (more than the upper limit)
x indicates the target color (1=Y, 2=M, 3=C, 4=Bk)
Patch sensor
When the DC controller determines that it is necessary to supply toner, the developing motors
(M5 to M8) and the toner supply clutches (CL2 to CL5) are turned ON. This operation rotates
the toner feeding screw A/B so that the specified amount of developer is supplied to the
developing assembly.
Hopper assembly
Developing Toner supply
motor
clutch
M5~M8
Toner feeding
screw
Developing assembly
CL2~CL5
Developing cylinder
Toner supply levelsensor

(PS1~PS4)
DC controller(UN1)
Developing assembly toner supply Count
ATR sensor Result
Patch sensor Result
Toner feeding
screwA/B
ATR sensor
(TS5TS8)
Patch sensor
(center)(UN49)
F-2-104
2-72
ATVC control
This control prevents transfer failure due to environmental change or deterioration of the
primary transfer roller or the secondary transfer roller
Execution timing
2) When replacing with a new drum unit
2-73
Secondary transfer ATVC
Execution timing
At every print job
Control description
1) Monitoring current value of the secondary transfer DC bias is detected
2) Optimal primary charging current value is determined based on the temperature/
humidity data of environment sensor 2.
3) The secondary transfer DC bias is determined to apply to the secondary transfer roller
4) At paper interval on a specified print basis or at initial rotation
Primary transfer DC Bias
5) When the environment is changed
Current monitoring
signal
Catuion:
Secondary transfer
outer roller
The total print is counted separately between the color mode and the Bk mode. This
control is executed when the counter of either mode reaches the specified number.
Current monitoring
signal
Secondary transfer
DC Bias
Control description
1) Monitoring current value of the primary transfer DC bias is detected
2) Optimal primary charging current value is determined based on the temperature/
humidity data of Environment sensor 1.
3) The primary transfer DC bias is determined to apply to the primary transfer roller
Primary transfer
roller
DC controller(UN1)
Environment
sensor1
(UN22)
Environment
sensor2
(UN50)
F-2-105
2-73
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner supply assembly
2-74
Toner supply assembly
Toner cap automatic opening control

This control automatically opens/closes the cap of toner container
Overview
Toner container driver motor

M9~M12
To supply toner in the toner container to the developing assembly

Cap drive
link holder
Cap release
holder
Toner supply drive unit
Cap release holder
Toner container
Cap drive
link holder Toner cap
Toner container
Toner cap
position sensor Toner container
(PS9 PS12) cam HP sensor
(PS5 PS8)
Toner stirring plateA
Hopper unit
F-2-107
Execution timing
Toner stirring plateB
When replacing a toner container

Control description (e.g.: release of toner cap)
Developing assembly
1) Toner cap position sensor and Toner container cam HP sensor (PS5 to 12) detect the state
Toner supply screw
of toner cap.
F-2-106
Parts name
Cap drive link holder
Cap release holder
Hopper unit
Toner stirring plate A, B
Toner supply screw
2) Operation of the toner container drive motors (M9 to 12) moves the cap drive link holder
and the cap release holder to the right (toner container side).
Function
3) The toner cap is secured with the cap drive link holder.
To supply toner in the toner container to the hopper unit

To open/close the toner cap and rotate the toner container
To release the toner cap
To supply toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly
To stir toner in the hopper unit
To supply toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly
<Hold the toner cap>

4) Operation of the toner container drive motors (M9 to 12) moves the cap drive link holder to
the left. <Release the toner cap>
T-2-40
2-74
Toner supply control/toner level detection
Related Error Codes

E025-0100: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (Y)
E025-0200: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (M)
E025-0300: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (C)
E025-0400: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (Bk)
E025-0110: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for Y toner container)
E025-0210: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for M toner container)
E025-0310: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for C toner container)
E025-0410: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for Bk toner container)
Supplies the toner in the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly. At the same time, it
detects the toner level inside the Hopper Unit.
Toner container driver motor
Released
In motion(released sealed)
Sealed
In motion(sealed released)
Toner cap position sensor

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
M9~M12
Toner container
CCW
Toner stirring plateA
MEMO:
Following shows detection result of toner cap position sensor and the operational
relationship with the main unit.
State of toner cap
2-75
DC controller(UN1)
Toner container cam HP

sensor
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Developing
supply count
ATR control
Piezo sensor
(TS1 TS4)
Hopper unit
Toner supply
Developing motor
clutch
CL2~CL5
Toner stirring plateB

Toner supply
level sensor
(PS1PS4)
M5~M8
Developing assembly
Toner feeding
screw
T-2-41
F-2-108
Toner supply control

Title
Supply to
hopper
Description
To supply developer in
the toner container to
the hopper unit
Supply to
To supply developer in
developing the hopper unit to the
assembly developing assembly
Timing to supply
Operation of main unit
When the output result of

piezo sensors (TS1 to 4) is
changed from H to L
Toner supply is determined
to be necessary by the result
of ATR control
The toner container drive motors

(M9 to 12) are driven for 2
seconds (*1)
The developing motors (M5 to8)
and the toner supply clutches
(CL2 to 5) are driven for the
specified period.
T-2-42
*1: If the output result of piezo sensors TS1 to 4 keeps L despite drive of M9 to 12, make M9
to 12 driven for 2 seconds and then stopped for 2 seconds and repeat this procedure up
to 20 times. Due to this operation, when performing continuous printing with high image
ratio, "Preparing toner..." may be displayed on the UI screen. In that case, wait for up to 80
seconds until the machine is recovered.
2-75
2-76
Toner level detection

Detection timing
Empty toner warning When the sensor output

(Level of toner in the
result is changed from H to
Hopper Unit is approx. L
100%.)
Empty toner (Level of
toner in the Hopper
Unit is approx. 0%.)
Detecting
to (location)
Message
(machine
operation)
Whether Toner
Container can
be removed
Piezo
sensor
The toner
Enabled
container can
be replaced
(continuous print
is available)
After approx. 1000 sheets
Developing Please replace a Enabled
are printed from the
Assembly
toner container
point that the Developing
supply count (the main
Assembly toner supply count *1
unit stops the
is started after the empty
operation)
toner warning (in case of A4
and dot ratio at 5% image
for each color)
Related Error Codes

E025-0100: Error in toner container drive motor (Y)
E025-0200: Error in toner container drive motor (M)
E025-0300: Error in toner container drive motor (C)
E025-0400: Error in toner container drive motor (K)
E027-0100: Error in supply to developing assembly (Y)
E027-0200: Error in supply to developing assembly (M)
E027-0300: Error in supply to developing assembly (C)
E027-0400: Error in supply to developing assembly (K)
T-2-43
*1: Developing Assembly supply count shows the level of toner supplied from the Hopper Unit
to the Developing Assembly.
Transition of Toner Level
The following table shows the transition of toner level (Toner Container, Hopper Unit)
according to each detection item.
Detection state
Toner level
Toner Container
Hopper Unit
Empty toner warning
0% remaing
100% remaing
Empty toner
0% remaing
0% remaing
F-2-109
When replacing to a new Toner Container after "empty toner warning", this machine
recognizes that the container was replaced by opening and closing the Toner Replacement
Cover. Then, the machine starts the toner supply operation and judges that the container
was replaced to a new one from the Piezo Sensor detection result in the Hopper Unit. (When
replacing to a new Toner Container, the detection result of Piezo Sensor is changed from L to
H.)
2-76
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste toner feeding assembly
Waste toner feeding assembly
2-77
Waste toner case full level detection
To detect toner level accumulated in the waste toner case
Overview
ITB cleaner
unit
To feed waste toner of the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit to the waste toner
case
ITB cleaner unit
ITB unit
ITB unit
Drum
unit
Drum unit
Waste
toner
M26 stirring
motor
Waste toner
screw1
Developing
assembly
Waste toner screw1
Waste toner
feeding screw
UN21
Waste toner
Waste toner case
Waste toner
case sensor
Waste toner screw2
[There is not
waste toner case : Sensor ON]
Waste toner
Waste toner case
DC controller
(UN1)
Developing
assembly
Waste
toner
case
detect
signal
[There is
waste toner case : Sensor OFF]
Waste toner screw2

F-2-110
Parts name
Waste toner feeding unit
Waste toner case
Waste toner screw 1, 2
Function
To feed waste toner in each unit to the waste toner case
To feed waste toner from the drum cleaning unit
To keep waste toner
To stir toner in the waste toner case
T-2-44
F-2-111
Detection
description
Waste toner full level
warning (approx. 7%
until the waste toner
level is full)
Waste toner full level
warning (approx. 0%
until the waste toner
level is full)
Detection timing
Detection
source
Message
(operation of main unit)
When the output result of sensor is

changed from H to L
Waste toner
full level
sensor
Please prepare a waste

toner case (continuous
print is available)
After the Developing Assembly toner

supply count is started from full alert,
when a total of approx. 1000 sheets
is printed (in case of image on A4,
dot ratio of each color is 5%)
Developing
Assembly
toner supply
count
Please replace a waste

toner case (the main unit
stops the operation)
T-2-45
2-77
Related Error Code

E013-0001: error in lock of waste toner feeding path
2-78
In order to prevent the toner leakage at removal of Waste Toner Case, the Shutter is
prepared.
This Shutter has a mechanical mechanism, so when the Waste Toner Case is installed/
removed, the Shutter is opened/closed.
Detection of waste toner case
Waste Toner Ejection Mouth Shutter of the main body is linked with the Waste Toner Case
To detect if the waste toner case is installed
Shutter, so when the Waste Toner Case is installed/removed, this Ejection Mouth Shutter is
Execution timing
also opened/closed simultaneously.

2) When opening/closing the Front Cover
The waste toner case sensor (UN21) detects the presence of waste toner case.
ON: there is a waste toner case
OFF: there is no waste toner case (user message is displayed)
ITB cleaner
unit
ITB unit
Drum
unit
Waste
toner
DC controller
(UN1)
Developing
assembly
M26 stirring
motor
Waste toner
screw1
Waste toner
feeding screw
UN21
Waste toner
Waste toner case
Waste toner screw2
[There is not
waste toner case : Sensor ON]
Waste toner
case sensor
Waste
toner
case
detect
signal
[There is
waste toner case : Sensor OFF]
F-2-112
2-78
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Other controls
2-79
Other controls
Sequence for color band
Special control
Making prints with low image ratio can deteriorate toner and reduces developing performance.
Following sequences are assigned as special sequence with this machine

ITB cleaning blade
Solid black band
ITB cleaning blade

Solid black band
ITB
ITB cleaning blade
To prevent this symptom, average image ratio for each color is calculated by ATR control and
Solid color band
(Y/M/C/Bk)
ITB
appropriate amount of toner (width = A4, length = solid color band appropriate for deteriorated
toner amount) determined by the calculation is transferred to the ITB.
ITB
Execution timing
When the average image ratio per sheet is the specified value or lower
F-2-113
Sequence for black band

In the case of continuous prints while no toner is fed to the ITB cleaning blade, the ITB
cleaning blade can be removed. Therefore, toner (width = full width of ITB, length = 1mm
solid black band) is transferred on the ITB to supply toner to the ITB cleaning blade.
Execution timing
At post-rotation after the total reaches 100 prints
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > ITBB-TMG (Setting of drum/ITB cleaning band
interval)
Sequence for transparency black band

When resistance adjustment agent on the transparency is attached on the ITB, it reduces
transfer efficiency on the attached area. If considerable amount of resistance adjustment
agent is attached on the ITB, it can cause fusion in the ITB cleaning assembly. To prevent this
symptom, toner (width = full width of ITB, length = 80mm solid black band) is supplied to the
ITB cleaning blade.
Execution timing
Sheet-to-sheet interval after 15 sheets of transparency are printed continuously
At post-rotation after 7 sheets are printed continuously since the last execution
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > OHP-PTH (Setting of the number of transparency
to execute ITB cleaning)
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Other controls
2-79
Technology > Image Formation System > Service work > Points to note at servicing
2-80
Service work
Not applicable
Consumable parts
No.
Parts name
Parts number Qty Estimated life
1 ITB
FC0-0255
500k
2 Primary transfer roller
FC0-0257
500k
3 Secondary transfer inner roller FC8-4402
500k
4 Secondary transfer outer roller FC0-4878
500k
5 ITB cleaning blade
FM4-7246
150k
6 Transfer separation guide unit FM3-8893
500k
7 Developing assembly (Y)

Developing assembly (M)
Developing assembly (C)
Developing assembly (Bk)
1
1
1
1
500k
500k
500k
500k
FM4-8351
FM4-8352
FM4-8353
FM4-8354
Remarks
Compatible with iR-ADV
C5051 series
C5051 series
C5051 series
C5051 series
C5051 series
C5051 series
Possible to install to iRADV C5051 series.
iR-ADV C5051/C5045 ->
iR-ADV C5255 series: OK
iR-ADV C5035/C5030 ->
iR-ADV C5255 series: not
compatible
T-2-46
List of periodical service works

No.
Parts name
Execution timing
1 Secondary transfer guide

2 Feeding contact guide
3 Patch sensor
50k
50k
50k
Work
Remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
Inspection
T-2-47

Consumable parts in the ITB Unit are compatible with those of iR-ADV C5051 series.
However, there is no compatibility between the ITB Unit of this machine and that of iR-ADV
C5051 series. Therefore, it is not interchangeable.
Technology > Image Formation System > Service work > Points to note at servicing
2-80
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Features
2-81
Fixing System
1. Saving energy
Fast warm-up reduces standby electric power thanks to low heat capacity.
Overview
2. High speed
B&W 55ppm/ color 51ppm is enabled by introducing a new toner and the film capable of
Features
high heat transfer.
This machine introduces the on-demand fixing method.

Separation guide
3. Supported media
Fixing delivery roller
Feeding 52g/m2 paper is available due to the modification of film path and Separation
Guide, and image quality has been improved as well.
Fixing film
Inner delivery
roller
Fixing heater
Pressure roller
Fixing inlet guide
F-2-114
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Features
2-81
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration
2-82
Specifications
Item
Function/method
Fixing method
Fixing speed
Heater
Control temperature
Temperature
detection
Protection feature
Major parts configuration
On-demand fixing
55 / 50ppm 246 mm/s (1/1-speed, plain paper)
machine
123 mm/s (1/2-speed, thick paper)
82 mm/s (1/3-speed, coated paper, transparency)
40 / 35ppm 160 mm/s (1/1-speed, plain paper)
machine
80 mm/s (1/2-speed, thick paper, coated paper, transparency)
Ceramic heater
Individual drive of Main Heater (heat-generation distribution: high in center) /
Sub Heater (heat-generation distribution: high in edges).
Purpose: to control temperature rise at the edge
Target temperature at printing (plain paper 1 (64 to 81 g/m2))
55 / 50 ppm machine: 169~180 deg C
40 / 35 ppm machine: 150~163 deg C
By the main thermistors (2pc) and the sub thermistors (2pc)
Pressure roller
Film unit
F-2-115
Thermistors
To block power supply to the fixing heater when a failure is detected
Temperature fuse
Rated operation temperature: 228 +0/-6 deg C
T-2-48
Fixing shutter HP
sensor (PS31)
Main
thermistor 1
(TH1)
Fixing heater
(H1)
Fixing heater (H1)
Main
thermistor 2
(TH1)
Fixing pressure
sensor (PS30)
Inner delivery
sensor (PS37)
Sub thermistor 2
(TH1)
Fixing shutter position
sensor (PS32)
Temperature fuse
(TP1)
Main thermistor 2
(TH1)
Main thermistor 1
(TH1)
Sub thermistor 1
(TH1)
F-2-116
2-82
2-83
Shutter
Fixing cooling fan (front)
(FM5)
M27
Fixing shutter
motor
sensor (PS32)
Fixing shutter HP
sensor (PS31)
Fixing cooling fan (rear)
(FM6)
F-2-117
Parts name
Function / method
---
Film unit
---
Pressure roller
Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed
(fused).
Fixing heater
Ceramic heater
H1
TH1
Main thermistor 1
To be in contact with the heater

Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise
Main thermistor 2
To be in contact with the film
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise
Sub thermistor 1
To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise,
temperature detection / cooling control on the edge
Sub thermistor 2
To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise,
temperature detection / cooling control on the edge
TP1 Temperature fuse
Noncontact type with the heater
To block AC electric power supply when a failure is detected.
PS30 Fixing pressure sensor Detection of engagement / disengagement of the film unit
PS31 Shutter HP sensor
Detection of shutters home position
PS32 Shutter position sensor Detection of shutters position

PS37 Internal delivery sensor Jam detection
T-2-49
2-83
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Standby temperature control
2-84
Controls
Standby temperature control
Fixing temperature control: overview
Fixing
temperature
STBY
Fixing
temperature
STBY
INTR
Flying start
control
temperature
Startup
(warm-up
rotation)
control
temperature
PRNT
During-print
control
temperature
INTR
PRNT
Flaying start
control
temperature
Sheet-t
o-sheet
control
temperature
15 sec
Time
Command for
flying start
Command for
print start
Time
Command for
flying start
F-2-119
F-2-118
Standby temperature control

To preheat the fixing assembly to reduce time for starting print
Flying start temperature control
Flying start temperature control

Purpose:
to reduce print time (FPOT) of the 1st sheet
Starting conditions:
When pressing the numeric key on the control panel
Print temperature control

To increase temperature to meet the fixing target temperature and keep the target
temperature during printing
Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control
Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
When pressing the button / key on the touch panel

When opening / closing the cassette
At recovery from sleep mode to standby mode
Control description:
Temperature rises to a certain point (150 degrees Centigrade: Main Thermistor 2).
This operation takes for 15 seconds after the last operation.
Down sequence control

To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature.
This control causes reduced through-put.
Down sequence when feeding small size paper
Down sequence when switching paper size
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Standby temperature control
2-84
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control

(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX> FLYING
(To enable/disable Flying start (pre-mature start)
2-85
Fixing
temperature
<Setting value>
0: Enable Flying start [default]
1: Disable Flying start
STBY
INTR
Startup
(warm-up
rotation)
control
temperature
PRNT
During print
control
temperature
Sheet-to
-sheet
control
temperature
Time
Command for
Flying start
Command for
print start
F-2-120
Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control

To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing once the print-start command is
received.
To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the
specified target temperature during printing
A. Setting target temperature see the table on the next page
Target temperature is specified depending on the paper type, environment
(temperature), fixing speed, elapsed time since the last control of fixing temperature
and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
B. Temperature control during printing
Temperature is controlled according to the detection result of main thermistors 1 and 2.
2-85
Sheet-to-sheet distance temperature control
2-86
Target temperature during printing
If the distance between sheets is longer than usual*1, temperature between sheets is
reduced to prevent temperature rise.
Temperature between sheets = target temperature during printing (30 to 50 deg C)*2
*1:At down sequence
Between the 1st side and the 2nd side when making 2-sided print
When controls are executed (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control)
*2:To be determined according to the elapsed time since the last control of fixing temperature
(including standby control) and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control
Model
Paper type
() : paper weight g / m2
Speed
55 / 50 Plain 1(64~81) / Color (64~81) / Recycled (64~81) /

1 / 1-speed
ppm
Pre-Punched / Tracing paper / Japanese paper (93)
246 mm /
machine Thin (52~63)
sec.
Plain 2 (82~105) / Bond (80~90)
Heavy 1 (106~163) / Label (151~180)
1 / 2-speed
123 mm /
Heavy 2 (164~209) / Embossed(150) / Postcard, 4 on 1
sec.
postcard(190) / Tab
Envelope
Heavy 3(210~256)
1 / 3-speed
82 mm / sec.
Coated 1(106~163)
Coated 2 (164~209)
Transparency (151~180)
40 / 35 Plain 1(64~81) / Color (64~81) / Recycled (64~81) /
1 / 1-speed
ppm
Pre-Punched / Tracing paper / Japanese paper (93)
160 mm /
sec.
Plain 2 (82~105) / Bond (80~90)
Heavy 1 (106~163) / Label (151~180)
1 / 2-speed
Heavy 2 (164~209) / Embossed(150) / Postcard, 4 on 1 80 mm / sec.
postcard(190) / Tab
Heavy 3(210~256)
Coated 1(106~163)
Coated 2 (164~209)
Envelope
Target
temperature
(deg C)
169~194
163~178
181~197
162~179
166~179
140~149
160~172
165
170
134~159
150~166
143~163
165~185
150~167
155~170
160~172
165
170
134~159
130~149
T-2-50
2-86
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control
Display of thermistor detection temperature
(Lv.1) COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
2-87
Down sequence control
Down sequence when feeding small size paper
Purpose:
> FIX-C (detected temperature of main thermistor 2)

> FIX-E (detected temperature of main thermistor 1)
> FIX-E2 (detected temperature of sub thermistor 1)
> FIX-E3 (detected temperature of sub thermistor 2)
To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print

of small size paper (less than A4R of length in width direction), fixing offset or
deterioration of fixing film.
Offset of fixing control temperature
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

> TEMP-TBL (plain paper 1)
> TMP-TBL2 (thick paper 1)
> TMP-TBL5 (thin paper)
> TMP-TBL6 (envelope)
> TMP-TBL7 (plain paper 2)
> TMP-TBL8 (transparency)
> TMP-TBL9 (coated paper 1)
> TMP-TB10 (coated paper 2)
<Setting value>
-2:
-1:
0:
+1:
+2:
-10 deg C
-5 deg C
0 deg C [default]
+5 deg C
+10 deg C
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 reaches the specified

temperature or higher (250 to 260 deg C) during printing
Operation:
Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance to control the
temperature at slightly lower than the target temperature for normal print.
Model
Paper type () : paper weight g / m2
55 / 50 Plain 1 (64~81) / Color (64~81) / Recycled (64~81) / Pre-Punched /

ppm Tracing paper / Japanese paper (93)
Plain 2 (82~105) / Bond (80~90)
Heavy 1 (106~163) / Label (151~180)
Heavy 2 (164~209) / Embossed (150) / Postcard, 4 on 1 postcard
(190) / Tab (160~203)
Envelope
Coated 1(106~163)
Coated 2 (164~209)
Heavy 3 (210~256)
40 / 35 Plain 1(64~81) / Color (64~81) / Recycled (64~81) / Pre-Punched /
ppm Tracing paper / Japanese paper (93)
Plain 2 (82~105) / Bond (80~90)
Coated 1 (106~163)
Coated 2 (164~209)
Heavy 1 (106~163) / Label (151~180)
Heavy 2 (164~209) / Embossed (150) / Postcard, 4 on 1 postcard
(190) / Tab (160~203)
Heavy 3 (210~256)
Envelope
Target
Print
temperature speed
(deg C)
(ppm)
165~194
159~178
177~197
158~179
162~179
136~149
161~165
166~170
156~172
133~159
146~166
139~163
161~185
161~165
166~170
146~167
151~170
12~4
9~3
6~2
12~4
6~2
156~172
133~159
126~149
T-2-51
2-87
Setting for down sequence start temperature when feeding small size paper
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > FX-D-TMP
If the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 exceeds the specified temperature

(250~260 deg C) when switching to the paper which has longer width than the
preceding paper.
<Setting value>
-3:
-2:
-1:
0:
+1:
+2:
+3:
+4:
2-88
Operation:
-15 deg C
-10 deg C
-5 deg C
0 deg C [Default]
+5 deg C
+10 deg C
+15 deg C
+20 deg C
Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as
well.
Completion conditions:
This down sequence is completed if any of the following conditions is satisfied:
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 reaches the specified
temperature or less.
When the specified period of time*1 has passed since the preceding paper went
through the fixing nip.
*1: Specified period of time differs whether the fan has cooled the preceding paper or not.
Down sequence when switching paper size
If the preceding paper is A4R or larger and A3 or smaller (the fan has cooled the
Purpose:
paper)
This down sequence prevents temperature rise of non-feeding area: there can be
15 seconds
possible fixing offset or wrinkle of the succeeding paper due to increased temperature
of non-feeding area of the preceding paper when continuously making prints or
If the preceding paper is smaller than A4R (the fan has not cooled the paper)
30 seconds
feeding wider length of paper than the preceding paper.
Non-feeding area
Film
A4R
A4
Non-feeding area
F-2-121
2-88
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Detection of fixing assembly
2-89
Fixing film edge cooling control
Detection of fixing assembly
Temperature at the edge of the film is increased when continuously making prints. Excessive
The thermistor connection signal, which is input to the DC controller, detects presence of
temperature rise can deteriorate the film. When small size paper (A4R or shorter size in width
fixing assembly at warm-up rotation (when the power is turned ON, the cover is open).
direction) is printed, the mode changes to the down sequence.
An error code E004-0000 is displayed to stop the operation if no fixing assembly is detected.
When making prints with paper that is A4R or longer and A3 or shorter in width direction while
the film temperature exceeds the specified temperature (sub thermistor 1,2), the fan attached
near the fixing assembly sends air and cools the film to control temperature rise. Unlike down
sequence, this control will not reduce the through-put because this control is executed while
Signal
Thermistor connection signal (THRM_CNNT)
Detection result
High: No fixing assembly is found.
Low: There is a fixing assembly.
T-2-52
printing is continued.
Shutter

(FM5)
M27
Fixing shutter
motor
sensor (PS32)
Fixing shutter HP
sensor (PS31)
(FM6)
Fixing shutter HP
sensor (PS31)
Shutter
Direction of movement

sensor (PS32)
M27
Fixing shutter
motor
A4-RLTR-R B4 EXE 8K LTRA4
F-2-122
There is a shutter at the air vent, which moves (opens) in 7 levels according to the size of
feeding paper. This feature enables to send air to optimal area on the film.
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Detection of fixing assembly
2-89
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection features
2-90
Film unit engagement / disengagement control
Protection features
To prevent deformation of the fixing film / pressure roller caused by heat and pressure when
the drive of pressure roller is stopped, and also to improve jam recovering performance, the
film unit is disengaged from the pressure roller under the following conditions:
Fixing pressure sensor (PS30)
Sensor flag
Fixing pressure sensor (PS30)

Cam
Fixing Motor
Fixing Motor
M21
M21
Cam
Sensor flag
Film unit
Film unit
Pressure
plate
Pressure
plate
Engaged
Pressure roller
Disengaged
Pressure roller
F-2-123
Execution conditions / timing

The film unit is disengaged when the power is
turned ON
At recovery from sleep mode
At recovery from jam removal
When the front cover/right cover is closed.
Execution conditions / timing

When the power is turned OFF
At jam detection when the power is turned ON
When the mode is shifted to sleep mode (when
the power switch on the control panel is OFF,
when the specified period of time has passed
since the mode has shifted to sleep mode)
Code
Description
Error
Clear
E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature

0000 When main thermistor 1/2 detects 255 deg C or more for 0.2 sec.
Clear
0001 When sub thermistor 1/2 detects 275 deg C or more for 0.2 sec
Clear
0003 When the thermistor detects temperature beyond the upper value:
Clear
Main thermistor 2 = 265 deg C
Main thermistor 1 = 264 deg C
Sub thermistor 1 = 280 deg C
Sub thermistor 2 = 280 deg C
E003 Detection of low temperature
0000 When main thermistor 1/sub thermistor 1/sub thermistor2 detects 21
Clear
to 50 deg C for 3 sec.
0001 When main thermistor 1 detects (target temperature 70 deg C) or
Clear
less for 5 sec.
0002 When the thermistor detects disconnection (any thermistor detects 20
Clear
deg C or less for 3 sec)
0003 When the control fails to be completed 60 sec after the start of warmClear
up rotation.
E004 Detection of abnormal fixing heater drive circuit
0000 When disconnection of the thermistor is detected.
Unnecessary
E808 Detection of abnormal fixing drive circuit/power supply
0000 Zero-cross error (faulty low voltage circuit)
Unnecessary
T-2-53
When a jam occurs

When an error occurs
Related Error Codes
E009 (Error in engagement/disengagement of film unit)
0000 Error in engagement
0001 Error in disengagement
0002 Error in engagement (it is highly possible that grease is scattered on the surface of the
cam.)
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection features
2-90
Technology > Fixing System > Service work > When replacing parts
2-91
Service work
List of periodical service works

No parts are assigned to be replaced periodically.
Parts name
1 Film unit
2 Pressure roller
3 Fixing bearing
FM3-5949
FM3-5950
FM3-5951
FC8-4906
XG9-0172
Parts
number
Qty
Estimated
life (print)
Remarks
1 Fixing Separation Cuide

2 Shutter Cover
FC8-4906
XG9-0172
1
1
300,000
300,000
Replace the Film Unit at the same time

Replace the Film Unit at the same time
T-2-55
Consumable parts
Parts
number
Parts name
Estimated life
Qty
(print)
Counter
(DRBL-2)
When replacing parts

Adjustment
1
300,000
FX-UP-FR N.A. *
1
2
300,000
300,000
FX-LW-RL N.A. *1
FX-LW-BR N.A.
The parts mentioned above are in common with those of iR-ADV C5051 series.
Remarks
100V
120V
230V
Film unit, pressure roller

Check that the fixing nip width is within the specified range.
Paper to be used: A4 / LTR size (plain paper, 80 to 105 g/m2)

T-2-54
*1: Be sure to check if nip width is appropriate after replacement.

1) Set paper on the manual feed pickup tray.
2) Execute output of fixing nip paper in Service Mode:
Bearing
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > NIP-CHK

Paper is picked up to make 2-sided print.
1st side: solid image in Magenta, 2nd side: no image (blank)
The paper is stopped at the nip area when fixing is performed on the 2nd side, and then
Pressure Roller
delivered outside the machine approx. 15 sec later.

3) Measure the nip width and check that the measured value is within the specified range.
Bearing
Film Unit (100V)

(120V)
(230V)
F-2-124
2-91
2-92
Specified value (range):

Center: 9.0 -/+ 1.0mm
Edge (145mm from the center of feeding paper): 9.0 -/+ 1.0mm
Edge
145 mm
Center
Feeding direction
145 mm
Edge
F-2-125
If measured value is out of the specified range, reinstall the replaced parts (film unit or
pressure roller) and then measure the nip width again.
MEMO:
Fixing nip width cannot be adjusted in the field
2-92
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Specification
Pickup Feed System
2-93
Specification
Item
Overview
Features
Improvement of productivity (33 sheets / min 51 sheets / min)
The number of circulation sheets is changed to 5 in 1 set at 2-sided feeding. As a
result, although the motor speed is slowed down reducing the motor loads and noise,
productivity is improved.
Increase of supported paper size and types for printing
The curve of feed path is made gentler and the curl occurrence is reduced by
changing the fixing temperature depending on the paper grammage. As a result, it is
realized to feed the paper with 52g / m2 to 256g / m2.
Auto paper size identification in cassette
By using the 2 size switches and the guide plate, auto size identification is realized.
Users do not have to configure the size setting.
Increase of Multi-Purpose Tray pickup capacity (50 sheets 100 sheets)
Simple retard method is applied for the pickup method. The tray is lifted up and down
at paper pickup, so stack capacity of the tray is increased from 50 sheets to 100
sheets.
Description
Paper storage method

Pickup method
Cassette 1, 2
Multi-purpose tray
Paper stack capacity Cassette 1, 2
Multi-purpose tray
Paper feed reference
Paper size
Cassette 1
Front loading method

Separation retard method
Simple retard method
550 sheets (80g / m2 paper), 650 sheets (64g / m2 paper)
100 sheets (80g / m2 paper, 100 sheets (64g / m2 paper)
Center reference
Standard (universal) B4, A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXE, A4R,
B5R, LTRR, A5R, STMTR, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
Cassette 2
Standard (universal) A3, B4, A4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR,
A4R, B5R, LTRR, EXE, A5R, STMTR, 12 x 18, 8K,
16K, 16KR,
Envelope (when an option is installed.)
Multi-purpose tray A3, B4, A4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, A4R, B5R, LTRR, EXE,
A5R, STMTR, 12x18, SRA3, 8K, 16K, 16KR, postcard,
envelope, non-standard size (99mm x 140mm to 320mm
x 457.2mm)
Paper grammage
Cassette 1, 2
52 to 209g / m2
Multi-purpose tray 52 to 256g / m2, For 210g / m2 or more, multi-purpose
tray 1-sided only.
Paper size switch
Cassette 1, 2
Size auto detection
Multi-purpose tray Input from the operation panel by uses
2-sided print method
Through path method
Paper level display
Yes (displayed in 3 levels on LCD panel)
OHP detection
Yes
Lead edge margin
4.0mm 1 ~ + 1.5mm
Right edge margin
2.5mm 1.5 ~ +1.5mm
T-2-56
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Specification
2-93
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-94
Parts Configuration
Roller Layout Drawing
[1] [2]
[3]
[23]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Reverse Roller
Second Delivery Roller
Third Delivery Roller
Duplex Inlet Roller
Duplex Feed Upper Roller
Duplex Feed Lower Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup / Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller
Vertical Path Roller 2
Cassette 2 Feed Roller
Cassette 2 Separation Roller
Cassette 2 Pickup Roller
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
Cassette 1 Separation Roller

Cassette 1 Feed Roller
Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
Vertical Path Roller 1
Registration Roller
Secondary Transfer Roller
Pressure roller
Post-Fixing Roller
Fixing Inner Delivery Roller
First Delivery Roller
Second / Third Delivery Inlet Roller
[4]
[22]
[21]
[5]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[16]
[15]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[14] [13]
[12]
F-2-126
2-94
2-95
Sensor / Switch Layout Drawing
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS36
PS37
PS38
PS39
PS40
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
PS45
PS47
PS49
[PS39]
[PS45]
[PS42]
[PS44]
[PS40]
[PS43]
[PS41]
[PS37]
Registration sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Loop Sensor 1
Fixing Loop Sensor 2
Inner Delivery Sensor
Duplex Paper Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Duplex Inlet Sensor
First Delivery Sensor
Second Delivery Sensor
Third Delivery Sensor
First Delivery Tray Full Sensor
Second Delivery Tray Full Sensor
Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor
Cassette 1 Paper Presence Sensor
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS53
PS54
PS55
PS56
PS57
UN51
UN52
UN53
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
Cassette 2 Paper Presence Sensor

Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A
Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B
Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A
Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B
Cassette 1 Pre-Registration Sensor
Cassette 2 Pre-Registration Sensor
Pre-reverse Sensor
OHP Sensor
Multi-purpose tray size sensor
Vertical Path Sensor
Cassette 1 Size Switch A
Cassette 1 Size Switch B
Cassette 2 Size Switch A
Cassette 2 Size Switch B
[PS34][PS35] [PS36]
[UN52]
[PS38]
[PS47]
[PS33]
[UN51]
[UN53]
[SW7]
[PS49]
[PS52] [PS51]
[PS55]
[SW6]
[SW9]
[PS50]
[PS54][PS53]
[PS56]
[SW8]
F-2-127
2-95
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Paper Path
2-96
Paper Path
Load Driving Drawing

M24
SL6
SL7
R40
Reverse mouth
Third delivery
M25
Second delivery
First delivery
M23
Meandering
is reduced
SL5
M20
Multi-purpose
tray pickup
M21
R40
M19
CL1
M18
SL4
Cassette 1 pickup
SL2
M16
SL3
Cassette 2 pickup
M17
Option Cassette pickup

F-2-129
F-2-128
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M23
M24
M25
Cassette 1 Pickup Motor

Multi-Purpose Tray Motor
Registration Motor
2-Sided Feed Motor
Fixing Motor
First / Second Delivery Motor
Reverse Roller Motor
Third Delivery Motor
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL7
CL1
Side deck
pickup
Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid

Multi-purpose tray lifting solenoid
First Delivery Flapper Solenoid
Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid
Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid
Multi-Purpose Pickup Clutch
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Paper Path
To support the heavy paper feeding, the feed path at Duplex Feed Assembly is made a gentle
curve and damage on the paper is reduced.
2-96
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Interval Speed Up
2-97
Interval Speed Up
Reverse sensor [PS39]
246mm/sec
(C5051,C5045) 400mm/sec
(C5035,C5030) 300mm/sec
(C5051,C5045) 340mm/sec
(C5035,C5030) 300mm/sec
Delivery speed up position
Inner delivery sensor [PS37]
Duplex paper
sensor [PS38]
Duplex re-pickup position
Registration position
Pre-registration sensor [PS33]

Vertical path sensor [UN53]
Cassette 2 pre-registration
sensor [PS56]
Pre-registration position
Pre-registration
position
F-2-130
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Interval Speed Up
2-97
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly
Various Controls
2-98
Cassette Pickup Assembly
Overview
Overview
Parts Configuration
Cassette 1 Pre-registration sensor
Duplex / Delivery
Assembly
Cassette 1
paper presence sensor
Cassette 2
Pre-registration sensor
Cassette 1 feed roller
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
Cassette 1
detachment roller
Cassette 1
paper level sensor A
Cassette 2 feed roller
Cassette 1
paper level sensor B
Fixing / Registration A ssembly
Multi-Purpose Pickup
Assembly
Pickup assembly
Cassette 2
Cassette 2
Idler gear
paper level sensor B pickup solenoid
Cassette 2
paper level sensor A
Cassette 2
detachment roller
Cassette 2
paper presence sensor
F-2-132
Cassette 1 size switch B
Cassette Pickup
Assembly
Cassette 1 size switch A
F-2-131
Area
Detection, Control
Cassette Pickup Assembly
Paper Level / Presence Detection

Paper Size / Cassette Presence Detection
Pre-Registration Control
Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly Paper Presence Detection
Paper Size Detection
Fixing / Registration Assembly OHP Control
Registration Control
Fixing Arch Control
Duplex / Delivery Assembly
Duplex Feed Control
Duplex Wait Control
JAM Detection
JAM Detection

T-2-57
F-2-133
2-98
Drive Configuration
2-99
Detection
Vertical path Roller1
Pickup Roller1
Feed Roller1
Detachment Roller1
Lifter
SL2
M16
Pickup Roller2
Feed Roller2
Detachment Roller2
Lifter
SL3
Vertical path Roller2
Paper Level / Presence Detection

There are 3 sensors to detect the paper level and paper presence in the cassette.
Paper level is displayed on the operation panel.
If the paper is full
Cassette paper level sensor A
Cassette paper level sensor B
Paper
M17
F-2-134
M16
M17
SL2
SL3

OFFOFF
If the paper is approx. half
Paper
OFFON
If the paper is a little
Paper
ON ON
If the paper is absent
Cassette paper Presence sensor

Fulg
Paper tray
F-2-135
2-99
Display Remaining Level

100% to approx. 50% of capacity
Approx. 50% of capacity to
approx. 50 sheets
Approx. 50 sheets or less
No paper
Sensor
A
OFF
Sensor
B
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
-
ON
-
OFF
ON
2-100
Paper Presence
Sensor
OFF
Cassette size
switch A
Rear detection
rink
Rear guide plate
F-2-136
Paper Size Detection / Cassette Presence Detection

Paper size of the cassette can be automatically detected by adjusting the position of the
guide plate.
Concavo-convex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two
Size Switches on a printer are switched. Length and width are detected according to the ON
/ OFF combination of switches. As long as standard paper, both AB type and inch type can
Cassette size
switch B
be used. However, size should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of
Detection dial
A5-Rand STMT-R or the combination of B5-R and EXEC.
Side guide plate

Detection dial
F-2-137
2-100
Width
B5
EXEC
16K
A5-R
A4
STMT-R
LTR
B5-R
LTR-R
A4-R
LGL
B4
8K
A3
LDR
12x18
Length
257
267
270
148.5
297
139.7
279.4
182
215.9
210
215.9
257
270
297
279.4
304.8
182
184
195
210
210
215.9
215.9
257
279.4
297
355.6
364
390
420
431.8
457.2
1
0
0
0
ON
0
ON
0
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Width detection
2
3
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
0
ON
0
0
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
0
0
0
Multi-purpose tray pickup 1 sheet feed list
Length detection
2
3
0
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
0
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
ON
0
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
T-2-58
Also, the cassette presence is detected when the size switch is pushed. (If no switch is
moisture absorption) and paper trimming state when setting the paper.
Basis weight/name
Overall
Overall
Overall
Overall
216 g/m3
216 g/m3
T-2-60
Paper that requires extra caution at setting

Paper type
Basis weight/name
Envelope
Overall
Washi
Overall
Caution
Let out the air of envelope and disperse the glued tabs
Since there are size variations, non-image area appears in
case of full copy. Handle this by free size setting.
T-2-61
.Method of Setting 8K and 16K (Chinese Paper)
Basis weight/name etc

Overall
Overall
Overall
Overall
Overall
Especially thin paper, 52 gsm
etc.
Overall
Especially heavy paper 220/250
gsm etc.
Especially heavy paper 160 gsm
etc.
(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW = 1

3) Change the setting of Cassette 1 from EXEC to 16K.
(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-K-SW = 1
This ""separation"" can avoid troubles.
OK Prince Joshitsu
Paper type
Glossy paper (coated paper)
Tracing paper
Washi
Extra long paper (up to 1200mm) Pickup can be enabled at service setting.
HAMMERMILL
Mohawk
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODEL-SZ = 0
It is recommended to separate the following paper depending on the paper status (especially
Canon Europe Canon Recycled 80

(Vision Classic White)
Canon Europe Canon High Grade
(Mondi Business Paper)
Canon Digital Office Colour
(Stora Enso MultiCopy Special Colour Laser)
If fails to set the paper sheet-by-sheet, it may cause troubles.
2) Enable detection and display of Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K and 16K).
Separation paper list
Paper type
Be sure to set the following paper sheet-by-sheet to the Multi-purpose Tray.
1) Set the original detection size to AB configuration.r
pushed, it is determined as no cassette.)
Carbonless paper
Transparency
Labels
Tub paper
Pre-punched paper
2-101
Main area
JPN
4) (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW >MODELSZ2 = 0.

5) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
EUR
EUR
EUR
T-2-59
2-101
2-102
Method of Setting Special Paper
Pre-Registration Control
Service mode
To correct the feed variation at pickup and to perform the stabilized paper feed, pre-
COPIER > OPTION > CST > CSTX-UY > Setting number
registration control is executed.
X: Cassette number, Y: Size category (X: 1 to 4, Y: 1 to 4)
When the paper leading edge is detected at the Pre-Registration Sensor (at Vertical Path
Sensor on cassette 1 only) on each cassette, the machine determines whether to stop the
Size category
pre-registration or not.
Size category
U1
U2
U3
U4
Pre-registration stop is determined when the following conditions are true.
Size
There is preceding paper.
FLSC, A-FLS, OFI, E-OFI, A-LTRR, A-LGL, G-LGL, A-OFI, M-OFI, FA4
K-LGLR, G-LTRR
K-LGL, A-LTR, G-LTR
B-OFI
The preceding paper has not reached the Registration Sensor.

Time until the Registration Sensor of preceding paper is turned OFF > / = time until the
T-2-62
Setting No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
42
Registration Sensor of succeeding paper is turned ON
Cassette Heater Control
Size
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
A-OFI
M-OFI
FA4
This heater is controlled to keep constant internal temperature. Basically, when the
Environment Switch is ON, the heater is ON regardless of ON/OFF of the main power except
for during printing. (Excluding the case where the internal temperature is high)
T-2-63
Example: When setting G-LTR to Cassette 2

COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST2-U3> 3
2-102
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly
Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly
2-103
Drive Configuration
Overview
Parts Configuration
Multi-purpose tray
Multi-purpose tray
pickup clutch (CL1)
Multi-purpose tray
size sensor (UN52)
Multi-purpose tray
motor (M18)
Multi-purpose
tray motor
M18
CL1
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid
SL4
Multi-purpose tray
pickup clutch
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid (SL4)
Multi-Purpose Tray
Detachment Roller
Multi-purpose pickup / feed roller
F-2-139
Detection
Multi-purpose tray
paper sensor (PS47)
Paper Presence Detection

F-2-138
The paper presence is detected by the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor.
When the paper absence is detected, if there is the same size & same type paper exists in
other cassette, auto cassette change is executed.
Paper Size Detection
The paper width is detected according to output value from the variable resistor that works in
conjunction with the side guide. Since the length cannot be detected, users have to specify
the setting.
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly
2-103
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Fixing / Registration Assembly
Fixing / Registration Assembly
2-104
OHP Detection
Overview
Transparency detection is performed as a measure for the case where paper other than
Parts / Drive Configuration
transparency is fed with transparency mode. Detection is performed using the Transparency
Sensor and Registration Sensor. Presence of transparency is detected when the
Transparency Sensor does not detect presence of paper and the Registration Sensor detects
presence of paper.
Registration motor(M19)
To make the paper straight-enter the transfer assembly, registration control is executed.
In iR-ADV C5051 series, detection of registration position is performed using the Registration
Sensor. However, with this machine, the Transparency Sensor is used to perform registration
control. To realize faster paper feed, the Transparency Sensor which can perform the
Registration roller
Registration sensor
(PS33)
detection faster is used.

After the paper passes through the Registration Sensor, the drive of the Pickup Motor (Multi-
Registration sensor flug
Purpose Tray Pickup Motor, Duplex Pickup Motor) is turned OFF to stop the paper by the
Cassette 1 pre-registration
sensor(PS55)
distance from the Registration Sensor to the Registration Roller with arch amount added. To
alleviate the noise generated by entry of paper to the Registration Roller, the paper feeding
Pre-registration sensor flug

Transparency sensor(UN51)
speed is reduced when the Transparency Sensor turns ON.

Vertical path sensor(UN53)
Vertical path roller
Fixing Arch Control

To always feed the paper to the Fixing Unit in optimal status, this control is to monitor the
paper slack (arch) condition and to switch the feed speed at the Fixing Motor according to the
F-2-140
status.
This is executed between the Secondary Transfer Unit and the Fixing Unit. When the
Pressure Roller of the Fixing Unit expands with heat, circumference of roller is also increased.
Thus, even though the number of rotation is consistent, the feed speed at the fixing side is
faster than the feed speed at the secondary transfer side. To fix this, change the speed of the
Fixing Motor according to the arch condition using the Fixing Arch Sensor 1&2.
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Fixing / Registration Assembly
2-104
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Duplex / Delivery Assembly
2-105
Duplex / Delivery Assembly
Overview
Big arch detection
Parts / Drive Configuration

Reverse roller
M24 Second delivery roller

SL6
SL7
Third delivery roller
Fixing inlet sensor On

Fixing arch sensor 2
M25
Fixing motor feed speed up
Duplex inlet roller
M23
Second & third

delivery Inlet roller
First delivery roller

SL5
Duplex feed upper roller

M20
Fixing inlet sensor
Small arch detection
Duplex paper sensor
Fixing motor feed speed down
Duplex feed lower roller
F-2-142
M20
M23
M24
M25
Duplex Feed Motor

First / Second Delivery Motor
Reverse Motor
Third Delivery Motor
SL5
SL6
SL7
First Delivery Flapper Solenoid

Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid
Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid
F-2-141
2-105
Duplex Control
2-106
Duplex Wait Control
To realize 5-sheet circulation, there are 2 duplex wait positions. Following is the duplex wait
Duplex Feed Control

On this machine, the paper is revered outside the machine with using the reverse mouth.
position for small paper.
After that, feed operation is performed by 340mm / sec on imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051
/ C5045 (300mm / sec on imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 / C5030).The paper fed to the
duplex path is transferred to the duplex re-pickup position unless there is paper on the path
at the downstream side. If there is paper on the downstream path, it is delivered from the
reverse path or it stops at the duplex upstream.
In case of output to the First / Second Delivery Mouth, 5-sheet circulation is used for small
Duplex inlet wait position
size (LTR or smaller); however, 3-sheet circulation is used for large size (larger than A4R).
This is because 2 sheets of paper cannot wait on the duplex feed path.
In case of output to third delivery mouth, 3-sheet circulation is used for middle size (A4R
42.4mm
or smaller); however, 1-sheet circulation is used for large size (larger then A4R) since the
succeeding paper enters the reverse path before the preceding paper goes through the
reverse path and jam will occur.
Following is the each duplex reverse position and the number of sheet circulation by size.
Small size (LTR or smaller)
Middle size (A4R or smaller)
Large size (larger than A4R)
First / Second Delivery
Third Delivery
5
3
3
3
3
1
T-2-64
Compared to the conventional model (imageRUNNER C3380), feed speed at the duplex feed
assembly is slowed down. This is to get the precise feed, to reduce the noise and the motor
loads. However, by changing the circulation algorism, the speed is accelerated when printing
a number of sheets and bk 55 sheets / min, CL 51 sheets / min speed is achieved.
50mm
Duplex wait position
F-2-143
Since the curve of duplex path shape gets steeper at the leading end, as duplex wait position
gets closer to the registration, curl tends to occur frequently. For the paper smaller than A3,
the duplex wait position is 50mm away from the Registration Sensor toward upstream in due
consideration with the productivity. In case of A3 paper or larger, the sheet interval is wide
enough to satisfy the productivity, so the position which avoids curl occurrence and is 85mm
away from the Registration Sensor on the upstream side is to be the duplex wait position.
2-106
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > JAM Detection
2-107
JAM Detection
At the cassette pickup assembly, since the feed speed is increased, detection cannot catch
up with it. Thus, delay and stationary jam detection are not executed at the Cassette 1 PreRegistration Sensor. Instead of it, the Vertical Path Sensor executes the delay and stationary
jam detection. Since the residual jam should be detected on each cassette, the Cassette 1
Pre-Registration Sensor detects it. Because the Vertical Path Sensor is too close and it is
unnecessary to execute detection, the Vertical Path Sensor does not execute residual jam
detection.
Sensor
85mm
Duplex wait position

F-2-144
Jam
code
Name
XX01
XX02
XX13
XX05
XX06
XX07
XX08
XX09
XX0A
XX0B
XX0C
XX03
XX04
Cassette 1 pre-registration sensor

Vertical path sensor
Registration sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Inner delivery sensor
First delivery sensor
Second delivery sensor
Reverse sensor
Third delivery sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Cassette 3 pre-registration sensor*1
Cassette 4 pre-registration sensor*1
XX
02: Stationary 03: Residual
01: Delay jam
jam
jam
Code C5051 C5035 C5051 C5035 C5051 C5035
/
/
/
/
/
/
C5045 C5030 C5045 C5030 C5045 C5030
PS55
PS56
UN53
PS33
PS34
PS37
PS41
PS42
PS39
PS43
PS40
PS8
PS9
*1: When the Cassette Pedestal is installed
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
T-2-65
Y: Detected
N: Not detected
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > JAM Detection
2-107
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Service Works > Periodical service
2-108
Service Works
Periodically replacement parts
N/A
Consumables
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Parts Name
Cassette Feed Roller
Cassette Detachment Roller
Multi-Purpose Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Detachment
Roller
Pickup Assembly Idler Gear
Parts
Number of used Replacement
Remarks
Number
part
timing
FC6-7083
FC6-6661
FB1-8581
FC6-6661
2
2
1
1
150K
150K
150K
150K
FU0-0043
150K
For
Chinese
model only
T-2-66
The parts mentioned above are in common with those of iR-ADV C5051 series.
Periodical service
No.
Parts Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Registration roller
Pre-registration guide
Transparency sensor
Fixing delivery guide
Post-fixing roller
Second delivery roller
Lightproof sheet
Execution
timing
Work
Remarks
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
150k
150k
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Inspection
Inspection
Cleaning
Cleaning
T-2-67
Technology > Pickup Feed System > Service Works > Periodical service
2-108
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Various Controls > Fan
2-109
External Auxiliary System
Fan
Overview
Various Controls
Fan Layout
Software Counter
Controller fan 2(FM13)

HDD cooling fan(FM14)
Count-up timing differs depending on the following conditions.
Controller fan 1(FM11)
Print mode (1-sided / 2nd side of 2-sided, 1st side of 2-sided)

Delivery position (built-in tray, finisher)
Delivery position
1 Host machine First delivery tray
Second delivery tray
Third delivery tray
2 In case finisher is installed.
Fixing heat exhaust fan 2(FM2)
Print mode
1-side / 2nd side of 1-sided
1st side of 2-sided
Count-up timing
First Delivery Sensor (PS41)
Second Delivery Sensor (PS42)
Third Delivery Sensor (PS43)
Finisher Delivery Sensor
Duplex Paper Sensor

(PS38)
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1(FM1)
Power supply cooling fan(FM3)
Delivery fan 1 (FM7)

Delivery fan 2(FM9)
T-2-68
Fixing cooling
fan (rear)(FM6)
Secondary transfer
exhaust fan(FM8)
Fixing cooling fan (front)(FM5)
Process cartridge fan (rear)(FM4)
Process cartridge
fan (front)(FM10)
F-2-145
2-109
2
No.
Name
Function
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
Fixing Exhaust Fan 1

Power Cooling Fan
Process Cartridge Fan (rear)
Fixing Cooling Fan (front)
Fixing Cooling Fan (rear)
Delivery Fan 1
Secondary Transfer Delivery Fan
FM9
FM10
FM11
FM13
FM14
Delivery Fan 2
Process Cartridge Fan (front)
Controller Fan 1
Controller Fan 2
HDD Cooling Fan
Heat exhaustion around Fixing Assembly

Heat exhaustion around Fixing Assembly
Cooling down of Power Supply Assembly
Heat exhaustion around Process Cartridge
Cooling down of Fixing Assembly
Cooling down of Fixing Assembly
Preventing delivery paper adhesion
Heat exhaustion around Secondary Transfer
Unit
Preventing delivery paper adhesion
Heat exhaustion around Process Cartridge
Cooling down of Controller
Cooling down of Controller
Cooling down of HDD
2-110
Error code
E805-0000
E805-0001
E804
E807-0000
Air Flow
Air flow around the Main Controller and the Power Supply
E806-0000
E806-0002
E806-0001
E807-0001
E880-0003
E880-0001
E880-0002
T-2-69
Toner Filter is installed at the Ventilation Hole of the Process Cartridge Fan (rear) (FM4).
F-2-146
2-110
Air flow of fixing system
Air flow around the operation system
F-2-147
2-111
F-2-148
2-111
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Various Controls > Power Supply Control
2-speed control
Among the fans installed in this machine, the Power Cooling Fan (FM3) and the Delivery Fan
1 (FM7) perform the 2-speed control. Rotation speed is switched when the Voltage switching
PCB of Fan switches the voltage.
2-112
Power Supply Control
Power supply inside the printer
By turning ON the Main Switch, a signal is output from the Main Controller PCB 1 so that
power supply starts.
Operation Sequence
Fan name
Process Cartridge Fan
(front)
Process Cartridge Fan
(rear)
Pre
Initial
Stand Copy/pint
Post
Jam
rotation rotation by
rotation error
12sided sided
Reader Low Sleep

power

Fixing Cooling Fan (front)
Fixing Cooling Fan (rear)
Secondary Transfer
Exhaust Fan
Delivery Fan 1
Delivery Fan 2
Power Cooling fan
Controller Fan 1
Controller Control
Controller Fan 2
Controller Control
HDD Cooling Fan
Controller Control
: Full speed
: Half speed
F-2-149
2-112
2-113
Main Power Supply SW
All-night
Circuit
All-night Power
Supply PCB
24V
Leakage Breaker
Finisher
Feed Driver
Cassette Feed Driver
12V
Drum Driver
AC
Interlock
SW
Fixing Heater
HVT
Environment SW
Right
SW
Fuse
Relay PCB
AC Driver PCB
Drum Heater Bk
Drum Heater CL
Reader Heater
Cassette Heater
Pedestal Heater
Deck Heater
Front
SW
DC/DC
(Interlock)
5VIL
3.3V
DC/DC
(Non-interlock)
5V
24V Remote Signal
DC Controller PCB
Laser 1
Laser 2
UI
Reader Controller
PCB
Relay
F-2-150
2-113
Power supply of Reader Unit
Power connection with each option

24V
24V
5V
24V
Printer
12V
Reader
Controller
PCB
2-114
Reader / ADFUnit
Motor
Fan
Sensor
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
Reader
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
DADF
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
5V
Staple FinisherC1
Paper Deck UnitB1
Built-in wiring
DADF driver PCB

F-2-151
Cassette Feeding UnitAD1

F-2-152
Connector inside the cover is used for the connection with DADF Unit and the 2-Cassette
Pedestal. External Cable is used for the connection with the Side Paper Deck and the
Finisher.
2-114
Power save function
Sleep 1 (DC Controller PCB, Reader Controller PCB: OFF)

Power is not supplied to the DC Controller PCB and the Reader Controller PCB. (Power is
Standby
Control panel switch is turned off
or
time is elapsed
supplied to the Main Controller PCB 1 and 2.)

When the value of service mode > COPIER > OPTION >USER > SLEEP1SW is "0" and the
machine is not in limited functions mode, the machine moves to this mode.
Control panel switch is turned on
Sleep mode
Sleep 1 (DC Controller PCB, Reader Controller PCB: ON)
Sleep Standby
Sleep1
Fixing Heater is OFF, and the Control Panel is OFF.
Case
Case
Job
Job
DC Controller PCB OFF

Reader Controller PCB OFF
2-115
In the case of
Deep Sleep
Other power supply states are the same as those in the standby mode.
When the value of service mode > COPIER > OPTION >USER > SLEEP1SW is "1" and the
machine is in limited functions mode, the machine moves to this mode.
If a job is submitted while the machine is in Deep Sleep, the machine moves to this mode.
Sleep1
Job
DC Controller PCB ON
Reader Controller PCB ON
Deep Sleep
The state that only 3V on the All-night Power Supply PCB is supplied.
When a print job is submitted: The machine moves to Sleep Standby mode/Sleep 1 mode
Send Job
In the case of Deep Sleep
(DC Controller PCB, Reader Controller PCB: ON).
In the case of Deep Sleep
Deep Sleep
F-2-153
Condition 1: Service mode "SLEEP1SW" = "0", and not in limited functions mode.
Meet the conditions not to move to Deep Sleep.
Condition 2: Service mode "SLEEP1SW" = "1", and in limited functions mode.
Meet the conditions not to move to Deep Sleep.
Standby
The mode that the machine is running or is ready to start operation. All power is supplied in
NOTE:
When [Sleep Mode Energy Use] is set to [Low] at the time of using NetSpot Device
Installer (NSDI), there is a condition that causes startup from sleep mode to fail.
Condition: No IP address is specified.
Example: When the IP address is "0.0.0.0" and DHCP is set to OFF, the above
condition is satisfied; therefore, the machine fails to start up from sleep mode even if
connection is attempted from the network.
Remedy: Specify a static IP or set DHCP to ON.
this mode.
Sleep mode
Energy saving mode Depending on the active controller, it is classified into the following 4
modes:
Sleep Standby
The Control Panel is OFF.
Other power supply states are the same as those in the standby mode.
2-115
2-116
Conditions not to move to Deep Sleep

When the following conditions are met, the machine does not move to Deep Sleep.
System Performance Status
Software status
Common
User Mode > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use is set to "High".
User Mode > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings is set (and
not blank).
Network
User Mode > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > BMLinkS Settings > Use BMLinkS
is set to "ON".
User Mode > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > IPSec Settings > Use IPSec is set
to "ON".
User Mode > Preferences > Network > SMB Server Settings >Use SMB Server is set to "ON".
User Mode > Preferences > Network > NetWare Settings > Use NetWare is set to "ON".
User Mode > Preferences > Network > AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk is set to "ON".
User Mode > Preferences > Network > Ethernet Driver Settings > Auto Detect is set to "OFF"
and "1000 Base-T" is set for "Ethernet Type".
User Mode > Preferences > Network > IEEE802.1X Settings > Use IEEE802.1X is set to
"ON".
Fax
User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Selecting Reception
Mode is not set to "Auto RX".
User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Auto Reception Switching
is set to "ON".
User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Remote Reception is set
to "ON".
User Mode > Function Settings > Send > Fax Settings > Set Line > Modem Dial in Settings >
Line 1 or Line 2 is set to "ON".
User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Number Display Settings
> Line 1 or Line 2 is set to "ON".
network application is communicating.

A
A print job is being processed or waiting.
A scan job is being processed or waiting.
A fax communication is in progress.
A phone communication is in progress.
An IFAX communication is in progress.
A job is being processed.
A report job is being processed.
A forward send job is in progress.
A forward receive job is in progress.
A SEND job is being processed.
The delivery of device information is in progress.
RUI is being exported.
RUI is being imported.
A VNC connection is in progress.
A MEAP Application is being executed. (However, when the MEAP Application is scheduling
Timer Service Task within the time condition (within 12 minutes) of the Alarm Service not
entering DEEP SLEEP, the machine may enter DEEP SLEEP.)
The Resource Downloader is executing a task (such as downloading a font data and creating
a backup).
The Inbox is being backed up.
A file in the Super BOX is being opened (reading or writing). (*Common with WebDAV and
SMB)
The printer is in a limited operation.
The scanner is in a limited operation.
A store job is being processed. (As with SEND, this include the storage process to Advanced
Box or other storage after the scanning is completed.)
T-2-72
T-2-70
Hardware status

The Serial Coin Vendor is connected.

The EFI (Video Option Board) is installed.
The G4 Fax Board is installed.
The iSlot Extension Card is connected.
The IPSec Board is connected and User Mode > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings >
IPSec Settings > Use IPSec is set to "ON".
The host machine (such as a PC) is connected to the USB Device.
The HID is connected to the USB host.
The storage is connected to the USB host.
The Device Port (Multimedia Card Reader with a card) is connected to the USB host.
A device (general USB devices such as the IC Card Reader not used by host machine's
functions) used by MEAP is connected to the USB host.
T-2-71
2-116
2-117
Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub
System Performance Status

The Alarm Service is set to within 12 minutes.
* When one of the following is being executed, the Alarm Service (Time) is set.
- Time setting for ON/OFF of the Memory Lock
User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Fax/I-Fax
Inbox > Memory Lock Start Time
User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Fax/I-Fax
Inbox > Memory Lock End Time
- Output of the scheduled report
User Mode > Function Settings > Send > Common Settings > Communication
Management Report > Specify Print Time (when not set to "Off")
User Mode > Function Settings > Send > Fax Settings > Fax Activity Report > Specify
Print Time (when not set to "Off")
User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management > Device Information Delivery
Settings > Communication Log > Specify Print Time (when not set to "Off")
- Scheduled Transmission Setting (Fax, Send)
- POP settings
User Mode > Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Network Settings > Next
> POP Issue Interval (when not set to "0")
- DHCP Setting (The interval is specified by the server)
- E-RDS Setting (The interval is specified by the server)
- SNTP Setting (The interval is specified by the server)
- Auto delivery of device information
- Scheduled specified printing of web browser
- Time specified backup of Inbox document
The auto sleep timer is running (and for the time set by User Mode > Preferences >
Timer/Energy Settings > Weekly Timer Settings).
The sleep mode exit timer is running (for 15 seconds after exiting DEEP SLEEP)."
The network timer is running (and for the number of seconds set by Service Mode (Level 2)
> COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > WUEN-LIV.)
The wake up timer is running (for 10 minutes after receiving a wake up packet).
The hard disk drive protection timer is running (for 12 minutes after exiting from DEEP
SLEEP and the HDD is powered ON. However, after a printing, scanning, and fax job is
completed, this timer is disabled.)
The after linkup timer is running (for 1 minute after the machine is powered ON and the
communication with the network is started).
The sleep notification timer is running (for 10 minutes after notifying the network module
of entering DEEP SLEEP. However, when the network module responds, this timer is
disabled).
If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer
might be decreased. In order to prevent this symptom, some hubs have the function called
spanning tree. If this function is enabled, the device newly connected to the hub can make
data communication with network 10 to 50 seconds (time changes due to the conditions)
after the connection. When the machine enters Deep sleep mode and restores from the sleep
mode, the machine electrically disconnects with the network once. Therefore, if the machine
connects with the spanning tree-installed hub, the machine cannot communicate with network
for approximately 1 minute at a maximum after restoring from the Deep sleep mode.
For this reason, right after restoring from the Deep sleep mode, the following symptoms might
occur: Device status cannot be collected, printing cannot be made, and login using a login
application cannot be made. If such symptoms become any problems, perform the following
operations.
Using user mode, set not to enter the Deep sleep mode.
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
Disable the spanning tree function of hub.
Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree
Protocol (RSTP) that resolved such problems.
T-2-73
2-117
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Various Controls > Quick Startup
2-118
Quick Startup
possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive
To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to
the All-night Power Supply PCB. Thereby, the main menu can be displayed after 30 seconds
from turning ON the Main Power Supply Switch.
Although when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following
PCBs.
material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause
damage on it.
The following illustration is used at the place where attention needs. When the following label
is affixed, be sure to disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker.
Quick Start
AC Driver PCB
All-night Power Supply PCB
Relay PCB
Image of
existing power supply
Main SW
By turning OFF the Main Switch,

all power turns OFF
F-2-155
All-night
Power Supply
Breaker
Relay
AC Driver PCB
NOT All-night
Power Supply
Plug Off
All-night
Circuit
Relay
PCB
In addition, quick startup is not performed under the following conditions.
Main Controller
PCB 1
Energized area when

the Main Switch is OFF
Image of
power supply for iR-ADV C5255
Power is supplied to the All-night Power Supply

even if the Main Switch is turned OFF
All-night
Power Supply
Breaker
Relay
NOT All-night
Power Supply
AC
Driver PCB
All-night
Circuit
Relay
PCB
At first startup after the AC Power Plug is connected to the outlet

Under the following conditions (settings), the machine always starts up normally (even quick startup
is ON).
When any of the following devices is connected.
EFI Controller
Serial Interface Coin Vendor
Wireless LAN
When any of the following network settings is set to "ON".
RARP
BOOTP
IPsec
IPv6
NetWare
AppleTalk
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main SW
F-2-154
Disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker when performing work with the
2-118
2-119
As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts
up normally (even quick startup is ON).
FAX
There is a fax transmission reservation.
Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from disconnection of a fax line
Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from non-detection of reception from a fax
line
Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from putting down the fax sub device or
handset
MEAP
During execution of MEAP application which prohibits moving to Deep Sleep
A scheduled processing is reserved on MEAP.
Job processing
During print/scan job processing
During SEND job processing
During I-Fax communication/job processing
During report job processing
During forwarding transmission job/reception job processing
During processing of data storage to Advanced Box
During fax communication/phone communication
During distribution of device information
During Box backup
During export/import by RUI
During opening/reading/writing file of Advanced Box (common with SMR/WebDAV)
During rebuilding with the HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring Board installed
Others
When the machine state remains unchanged for more than 110 hours after turning ON the
power as quick startup or turning OFF the power.
-> At the time of shutdown, it will be normal shutdown.
* This is to prevent a risk of UI freeze caused by memory leak.
Within a specified period of time (20 seconds) from turning OFF the Main Power Supply
Switch
-> In such a case, the machine reboots and then starts up normally at startup. Therefore, it will
take a few more seconds compared with the normal startup.
* This is for starting up the machine normally at the time of failure (UI freeze, etc.).
After moving to the Settings/Registration screen of service mode or RUI
After changing the user mode that requires restart
The machine is shut down from RUI
When an error occurs
When resource downloader is active
In printer/scanner limited functions mode
When a login application is switched by SMS
A license has been registered.
Startup by pressing the Control Panel Key
T-2-74
2-119
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Service Operations > Points to note at servicing
2-120
Service Operations
When Replacing Parts
N/A
Consumables
No.
1
Parts Name
Toner filter
Parts number
FC6-9817
Qty
1
Execution timing
Remark
100k(B / W)
25k(CL)
T-2-75

N/A
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Service Operations > Points to note at servicing
2-120
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
MEAP
2-121
An example of the LDAP server management screen
Changes
LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
LDAP authentication has been added to the server authentication method using Single SignOn H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H).
LDAP authentication is a user authentication performed by using an LDAP server on the
network linked with the device.
iR Device
LDAP Server
F-2-158
Local user
An example of the screen for adding an LDAP server
Remote user
F-2-156
Accordingly, the following item and setting screens have been added to the SSO-H
management screen of the remote UI.
Drop-down list for selecting the LDAP server as the authentication server
The LDAP server management screen (when [LDAP Server] is selected from the foregoing
drop-down list)
The screen for adding an LDAP server
An example of the screen showing the drop-down list for selecting LDAP Server
F-2-159
For details, refer to "Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)" in this chapter.
F-2-157
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
2-121
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-122
Preparation for Using SSO-H
Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen

A user setting screen has been added to the integrated authentication function which allows
the authentication information used for logging into the machine to be shared between MEAP
Outline
applications.
When using Single Sign-On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H) for the login service,
From a security standpoint, the setting screen for disabling the function to allow authentication
authentication.
required system environments are different in server authentication or local device
information (Volatile Credential), whose registered information is discarded at the time of

logout or shutdown of the device, to be used has conventionally been included in service
mode.
In addition to this service mode, a screen that allows even users to make the setting has
been added to the remote UI.
This screen can be also used to disable the integrated authentication function for each
authentication protocol.
For details, refer to "Integrated Authentication Function" in this chapter.
See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
Server authentication management

The system requirements necessary when using server authentication by SSO-H vary
depending on the authentication server.
The system requirements for using each authentication server are shown below.
Active Directory authentication

In order to use Active Directory authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments
are required.
1) Authentication server (Active Directory : Windows server )
Active Directory and Domain Name System (DNS) should be installed.
A group named "Canon Peripheral Admins" should be created on the Active Directory.
The OS should be one of the followings.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
* 64-bit version is not supported.
2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server)
F-2-160
The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory.
The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low
line), and % (percent).
Note:
The difference in time setting between the authentication server (Active Directory) and
the machine (and the computer for login) should be within 5 minutes. (If the difference in
time setting is 5 minutes or longer, an error will occur at the time of login for the server
authentication.)
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-122
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
Note:
As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User
logon name (pre-Windows 2000)" in the Active Directory.
An example of the user registration screen (Windows Server 2003)
2-123
PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users

The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC
on the network.
OS of the PC and Other Environments

Classification
Client OS
Operating System
Supported browser Java Runtime Environment
Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7

Internet Explorer 8
Windows Vista SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows 7 SP1
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
F-2-161
Server OS
LDAP authentication
When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied.
Windows Server 2003 SP2

Internet Explorer 7
Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Internet Explorer 8
Windows Server 2008 SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Explorer 8
1) LDAP server
Internet Explorer 9
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows

Lotus Domino V8.5 for Windows
2) OS where the LDAP server runs
Mac OS
Mac OS X v10.5
Mac OS X v10.6
It should comply with the specifications of the LDAP server product.

Operation check has been conducted for the following OS.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
Note:
When an LDAP server other than the server shown above is used, SSO-H may not
work properly.
Windows Active Directory works also as an LDAP server, but is not supported.
Mac OS X v10.7
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Safari 5.1
Java Runtime Environment 1.5

or later *1 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
Java 2 Standard Edition 5.0 *1
*3
JRE : Java Runtime Environment
T-2-76
J2SE : Java 2 Platform Standard Edition

Note:
*1 Excluding JRE6 update4/5
*2 In order to use JRE1.6 with Internet Explorer 9, JRE1.6.0.24 or later is required.
*3 Refer to the website of JAVA (http://java.com/) for how to obtain the Java
environment.
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
2-123
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-124
Preparation for Using SMS
Note:
The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer.

In Internet Explorer, if [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is disabled in [Internet Options]
> [Security] > [Custom level...], a warning message that JRE has not yet been installed is
displayed.
JavaScript should be enabled in all the browsers.
In the case of an IP v6 environment, JRE1.5 or later is required.
When using Windows XP in an IP v6 environment, IP v6 may need to be installed
manually in some cases.
To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings
need to be set up on the device.
Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS

Checking of operation environment
In order to access SMS using password authentication, the PC and browser need to comply
with the following system environment.
Network ports used

Port No.
Connecting
Listening
53
88
1-65535
( default:389)
10000 - 10100
Combination of the Browser and the OS

Application
Communication with DNS server (fixed)

Kerberos authentication with KDC (Key Distribution Center)
Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389,
may be changed to any port on LDAP service side)
T-2-77
Operating System
Windows XP Professional SP3
Windows Vista SP2
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X v10.5
Mac OS X v10.6
Mac OS X Lion
Supported browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Safari 5.1
T-2-78
In order to access SMS using RLS authentication, the environment should comply with the
environment for using SSO-H as the login service. (For details, refer to "PC Environment of
Administrator Users and General Users".)
PC and Browser Settings

The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions.
The supported browser language should be the same with the language of the OS.
Java Script should be enabled.
The supported screen size should be 800 x 600 or larger (recommended size: 1024 x 768).
Session cookie should be enabled.
Only alphanumeric characters and some of the symbols ("-" or ".") should be used as the
machine domain name and host name.
If an invalid character string such as a low line ("_") is included in the host name, cookies
cannot be enabled.
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-124
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
Settings on the Device Side

Network configuration process
In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings
need to be made from the touch panel of the machine. (this setting is [ON] by default).
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Use HTTP] and press [On] button.
2-125
Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management
Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button.
(This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
also applied to the touch panel.)
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button
for this message.
F-2-164
2) Press [OK] button to return to Main Menu screen.

3) Restart this device.
CAUTION:
F-2-162
Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by
default, so Network and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Return to the top screen, press Login button at the lower left of the screen, login as
the system manager, and configure the settings.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is 7654321, and the password is
7654321.
The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the
device.
You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use,
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
devices touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
F-2-163
When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the iR device.
2-125
Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL

Communication
2-126
2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key
and Certificate Settings ].
To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as
the key to be used.
Since a key (default key) that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as
standard on the device, advance setting of the key pair and server certificate is not required.
In order to use an encryption key other than the default key, follow the procedure "Generating
a key pair" shown below to make settings for the key pair and server certificate necessary for
encrypted SSL communication.
Note:
MFP has a server certificate registered as standard.

For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security].
As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed
regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings]
(Settings/Registration) > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF.
F-2-166
Generating a key pair

1) From a PC on the same network as the device, use a web browser to access the remote
3) Click [ Generate Key... ] button.
UI's portal page. Then, select [ Settings/Registration ] from the menu on the right side of
the screen.
URL to access: http://<device's IP address>:8000/
F-2-167
4) Click [ Network Communication ]
F-2-168
F-2-165
2-126
5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button.
2-127
6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ].
F-2-170
Default Key Settings

1) Click [ Preferences ] > [ Network Settings ] > [TCP/IP Settings ] > [ SSL Settings ].
F-2-169
Input example
Item name
Type
Key Settings
Key Name
Signature Algorithm
Key Algorithm
Certificate Settings
Validity Start Date
Validity End Date
Country/Region
State
City
Organization
Organization Unit
Common Name
Content
Entry
Compulsory An arbitrary character string

Default Key
Compulsory Selected from:SHA1/SHA256/SHA384/SHA512 RSA
Compulsory Selected from:512/1024/2048/4096
512
Compulsory
Compulsory
Compulsory
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Date
Date
Country or region name
State name
City name
Organization name
Organization unit
Common Name*
15/4/2012
15/4/2036
US
-
F-2-171
T-2-79
Note:
When the IP address of the device has been entered in the [Common Name] entry
field, if you install a server certificate to the browser ( see "Installing a server certificate
(reference information)" ), the message "Certificate Error" that usually appears when
access is made from Internet Explorer 7 or later will not be displayed.
2-127
2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button.
2-128
Installing a server certificate (reference information)
When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key
for SSL, "Certificate Error" appears if the version of Internet Explorer (IE) is Version 7 or later.
Error display example
F-2-175
To disable display of "Certificate Error", use the following procedure (for IE8) to set the key
generated in "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication" (i.e.
the key with the IP address of the device specified as the shared name) as an SSL key.
1) Access SMS from the browser, and then click "Certificate Error" in the URL entry field.
F-2-172
3) Select the generated key, and then click the [ Default Key Settings ] button.
F-2-176
2) Click [ View certificates ].
F-2-173
4) Check that [ SSL ] is displayed in the [ Key Usage ] entry field.

F-2-177
F-2-174
5) Log out from the remote UI, and then restart the device.
2-128
3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab.
2-129
5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and
then click the [ Browse ] button.
F-2-178
4) [ Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-180
6) In [ Select Certificate Store ], select [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ], and then click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-181
F-2-179
2-129
7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification
Authorities" appears in [ Certificate ], and then click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-182
8) [ Completing the Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Finish ] button.
2-130
9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing
the same certificate again.)
F-2-184
10)
A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-185
F-2-183
2-130
Network Port Settings
2-131
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the
is displayed), and press [OK] button.
servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443. In the case that these
ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP
application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
as the existing system.
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.
F-2-188
Note:
A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535. To avoid port numbers that are
frequently used, do not use any integer from 0 to 1023.
Server
HTTP Server
HTTPS Server
Setting value
Default value / Value after RAM clear
1024 to 65535
1024 to 65535
8000
8443
T-2-80
F-2-186
3) To set up the HTTP server port, select [ MEAP-PN ]. To set up the HTTPS server port,
select [MEAP-SSL ].
Note:
If PS Print Server Unit is connected, do not specify port 8080.
If port 8080 is specified, it is not possible to access the remote UI of the device where
the MEAP authentication application is running. (Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS
Print Server Unit to redirect to the iR device.)
5) Restart the device if the port number is set.
F-2-187
F-2-189
2-131
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
2-132
Login to SMS
How to Check the Serial Number

When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some
cases.
Outline
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
Examples of where the serial number is necessary
to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
When initializing SMS login password (obtaining a switch license)

When obtaining a MEAP application license from LMS
SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
When obtaining a transfer license of MEAP application

When obtaining a special license for reinstalling MEAP application
If a problem occurs in the MEAP device and you want to contact the support department of
the sales company, you need to provide the serial number. Perform the following procedure to
get the serial number.
Checking from the PC browser

The serial number of the device is displayed on the SMS login screen, SMS screen, and
remote UI portal screen.
F-2-192
F-2-190
Checking from the device's Touch Panel

You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the machine.
Login method
Authentication
method
Authentication service name
Users who may log in
Password
authentication
Password
authentication
SMS Installer Service (Password Users who know the SMS

Authentication)
login password
RLS login
SSO-H
SMS Installer Service (Remote

Login Service Authentication)
Users registered as
administrators with SSO-H
T-2-81
Note:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, RLS
Authentication is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if RLS Authentication is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot
be changed.
F-2-191
2-132
2-133
When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
If login is not possible due to exclusive control

Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already
If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)

After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot
log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password
back to the default value "MeapSmsLogin".
logged into the SMS of the same iR device.

An example of the exclusive control message
Note that there is no special password for service.

1) Obtain a switch license file for password initialization.
Contact the person in charge of support at the sales company, give the device's serial
number, and have a switch license file for password initialization issued.
2) Load the switch license file.
With nothing entered, click the [ Log in ] button to display the area for specifying a switch
license file for password initialization.
F-2-194
If you cannot log in due to exclusive control, you need to ask the other user to log out before
you can try again.
Note:
If you close the browser without logging out, the session remains active. In that case,
you cannot log in again.
If this problem occurs, you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected.
Or, you can restart the device to force the session to disconnect.
F-2-193
3) Specify the switch license file.

Click the [ Browse ] button and specify the switch license file.
4) Initialize the login password.
Click the [ Initialize ] button to display an initialization confirmation page, and click the [ OK
] button.
Note:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.)
If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
2-133
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set

If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS
(https://<device's IP address>:8443/sms/). In that case, perform the following procedure.
1) Go to http://<device's IP address>:8000/sms/, and check to see that "HTTP 500 Internal
Server Error" appears.
2) If it appears, perform the procedure "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted
2-134
Installing an MEAP Application

Outline
From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well
as the license file.
SSL Communication" in this chapter.

Note:
In the case of SMS, by setting the key to be used, encrypted SSL communication
is always executed regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] >
Management Settings > License/Other > MEAP Settings > [Use SSL] > ON/
OFF.
How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the

Time of Access
When accessing from the browser to SMS, a message "Certificate Error" appears in
some cases. In that case, perform the procedure "Installing a server certificate (reference
information)" in this chapter.
F-2-195
Before installing the MEAP application, be sure to check the following items.
Device compatibility with the MEAP application

To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application, check the devices
supported by the MEAP application. Depending on the application, the device's firmware may
require version upgrade.
Resources availability (remaining amount)

The necessary resources (free storage space and free memory available) must be secured
for an MEAP application to run; otherwise, you cannot install the MEAP application.
To check the resource information, see "Device's resources" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
2-134
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
Procedure to install applications
2-135
CAUTION:
1) Long on to SMS.
You cannot install only the license.
2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu.
You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
If you are adding a license to an existing application, see "Procedure adding a
license file".
If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.
F-2-196
3) Check [ Install MEAP Application/License ]page appears.

4) Click [ Browse.. ] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application;
then, click [ Install ] button.
Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which
device to install with the license file.
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file.
Sample file
License File ID
Note:
Application File: identified by the extension jar.
License File: identified by the extension lic.
Application ID
Serial Number
Validated Period
Counter informations
F-2-198
F-2-197
2-135
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button.
2-136
Note:
There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install
using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI.
Screen example
F-2-199
6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
click [ OK ].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.
F-2-203
[Register/Update Software] provides two types of installations. One is [Manual

Installation] where you specify a jar file and a license file and then install. The other is
[Delivered Installation] where you enter a license access number.
For details of the procedures, please refer to the e-Manual.
F-2-200
8) Upon installation completed, click [ To MEAP Application Management ] button shown on

the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-201
Note:
As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use
the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] button to change the status to [Started].
F-2-202
2-136
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
Resource Information
2-137
Device's resources
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
Outline
Application Management page shows [ resource information ] for information of the whole
device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used.
This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional
application. Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the
top of each application, which declares the resources required in the application. Therefore,
the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use.
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS.
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger
value than the following values.
List of Available Resources
The following resource information is shown:
Product Name
Storage
Memory
Thread
Socket
File Descriptor
If the hard disk does not have enough free space for the application, the application cannot
be installed.
iR-ADV C5051 series

iR-ADV C9075 series
iR-ADV 6075 series
iR-ADV 8105 PRO series
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Flash model
HDD model
iR-ADV 4045 series
iR-ADV C5255 series
Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description

1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
220MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
32MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
256
256
256
256
162
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
128
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
128
256
256
256
T-2-82
Moreover, if the free space of any of the resources (Memory, Thread, Socket, and File
Descriptor) is insufficient, the application cannot be started.
Note:
Among the resources, the free space of Storage is checked when installing an application.
For other resources, the free space is checked when the application is started.
Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the
Users Guide that comes with the individual applications.
Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
application is not included in this number.
The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication
application is not included in this number.)
The following procedure shows how to check the resource information.

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ].
3) Check [ Resource Information ] for information of the whole device resources.
CAUTION:
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.

http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
F-2-204
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
2-137
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
MEAP Specifications
Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable
in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP
What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the
application rejects installation of such an application.
MEAP Specifications for each model
function.
Product Name
About Name
The displayed name for Meap Specifications differs depending on the screen or the location
where the name is displayed.
iR-ADV C5051
iR-ADV C5045
iR-ADV C5035
iR-ADV C5030
In this document, it is referred to as "Meap Specifications".

The location where the name is displayed/shown
2-138
T-2-83
Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2
information below:
iR-ADV C9075
iR-ADV C9070
iR-ADV C9065
iR-ADV C9060
iR-ADV C7065
iR-ADV C7055
Device Specification ID
MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number,
thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service
Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform
machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects
installation of such an application.
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device
Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always
have the same version.
Remarks
Ver.37.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
Displayed name
Platform Information : SMS > [ System Management] > [ System Information MEAP Specifications
] > [ Platform Information]
System Information Print : Local UI [ Settings/Registration ] > [ Management
Settings ] > [ License/Other ] > [ MEAP Settings ] > [ System Information
Print]
Manifest file of the MEAP application
MeapSpecVersion
SDK documents
Initial MEAP SpecVer

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45
Ver.50.xx or later
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,27,29,
30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,44,45
,46,47,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.37.xx or later
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
Ver.50.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
iR-ADV 6075
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later
iR-ADV 6065
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
iR-ADV 6055
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49
39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,
55, 56, 57, 58, 59
iR-ADV 8105 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later
iR-ADV 8095 PRO 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 1,
iR-ADV 8085 PRO 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 , 41, 44, 45,
40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49
46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution.
2-138
2
Product Name
iR-ADV C2030
iR-ADV C2025
iR-ADV C2020
iR-ADV 4045
iR-ADV 4035
iR-ADV 4025
iR-ADV C5255
iR-ADV C5250
iR-ADV C5240
iR-ADV C5235
Initial MEAP SpecVer

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
58, 59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69,
70, 71, 72, 74, 78, 80
Remarks
Ver
Ver.10.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53
-
MEAP Specifications List

Ver
9
10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
21
25
26
27
29
30
31
Description
MEAP basic function
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL
Reserved
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF (Text Searchable) + USB Host
(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer)
Reserved
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host (Exception + Clear Feature + Set Feature+ Hot
Plug) + WINS address acquisition using MIB Agent + Timer Service + SSL client authentication
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth
PDF + CTK2.0
Device signature PDF
IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) , IPv6, Extended encryption function (AES/RC4)
Acquiring images of JBIG format
Parsing XML documents (XML parser)
Enhancement of IMI function (IMI Version1.2 series)
Reserved
API to access the HID/Mass Storage class devices.
MEAP driver preference function
Symbols that can be used with MibAgent added. (symbols for IPv6 address acquisition)
IMI API added (IMI version 1.2.1 enabled)
Extended address book function. (e-mail/group/i-FAX/file)
Integrated ERS function
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
T-2-84
1
2
5
6
7
32
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
68
69
70
71
2-139
Description
Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible

signature)
Extended function for imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE series (API for address book/ CTK/
TopMenu)
Extended IMI Box function (v1.3.0)
Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print
server unit status)
Reserved
CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added
imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges supported
MEAP Specifications added according to Jcrypto API Specification Change
ImagingAPI (Creation API of Visible Signature PDF) added
Reserved
Reserved
imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX
Supported
Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status
Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver
Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption
PDF document
ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series
Reserved
SecurityOptionalPackage
IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later
(iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL
communication setting (On/Off) for each URL
Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu
Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode.
System account release function
MEAP User Preference Service
MEAP Application Configuration Service
MEAP Application Log Service
Reserved
Integrated authentication service
SFP basic functions
AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP
SIS (Lightweight System Interface Service) for LBP
LDT
IMI customization
Extension of MEAP User Preference Service (Ver56) (preference shared among applications)
Reserved
Addition of Office Open XML's Word creation API
Extension of the encryption PDF function (AES 128-bit/256-bit)
Addition of 3 formats (uncompressed searchable PDF, XPS, and linearized searchable PDF)
Reserved
2-139
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
MEAP Application Management
Ver
Description
72 Reserved
73 IMI: API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original
74
75
76
77
78
80
2-140
Outline
image
SSL: Support for addition of the CN validation function
Reserved
Addition of the SFP ExtendedTextInputView class
You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks
of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

T-2-85
Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application

1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to "Login to SMS" in this manual.)
2) Click [ Application List ]. (If the Application List is already being displayed, this operation is
not necessary.)
3) Click [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped.
F-2-205
2-140
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [
Stopped ].
2-141
5) Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, check that the following conditions are met.
The MEAP application has stopped.
The license has been disabled or deleted. (The status is "Not Installed".)
F-2-207
For information on the procedure to stop the MEAP application, see the previous section
"Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application".
For information on the procedure to delete the license file, see the following section
"Managing the License File".
F-2-206
If the MEAP application cannot be started
Note:
When a user tries to uninstall an application before deleting the license, the following
message is shown.
If the conditions to start the MEAP application are not satisfied, the MEAP application cannot
be started.
If the MEAP application cannot be started, check the following items.
Is a valid license installed?
If the license has expired, you cannot start the application. If the license has already expired,
obtain a new license and then update the license. ( See "Managing the License File" in this
manual.)
F-2-208
If the license file of the selected application cannot be deleted, the [Uninstall] button is
grayed out and therefore the application cannot be uninstalled.
Are the necessary resources available?

If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient, the
application also cannot be started.
CAUTION:
Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources.
If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message
will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be
available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.
If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions, contact the
support department of the sales company.
2-141
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu.

2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has
been disabled. (The status is "Not Installed".)
2-142
Managing the License File
Outline
The license file management functions allow you to perform the following operations related
to the license file necessary for the MEAP application to run.
Update the license which has already expired.
Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application.
These license management functions can be performed from the [ MEAP Application
Management ] screen.
F-2-209
3) Click [ Uninstall ] button for the application to be uninstalled.
The main license management functions are as follows:

Adding a license
When the license has expired, you can add a license file.
Disabling a License File
Before uninstalling the MEAP application, the license needs to be deleted. In that case, you
must first disable the license file because a license file which has not been disabled cannot
be downloaded or deleted.
Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File
Before uninstalling the MEAP application, you need to delete its license file which has already
been disabled.
By downloading the license file to your PC before it is deleted, you can use it when installing
the application again to the same device.
F-2-210
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [ Yes ] button.
WARNING:
After deleting the license file which has been disabled, you can no longer download the
Upon [ Yes ] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.
license file.
F-2-211
2-142
Procedure adding a license file
2-143
4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
1) Log on to SMS.
2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to
add a license file.
F-2-214
5) Click [ Install ] button.

F-2-212
3) In [ Application / License Information ] page shown on the screen, click [ License

Management ] button.
F-2-215
F-2-213
6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [ OK ] button.
2-143
Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)
2-144
2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.
CAUTION:
Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the
application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
Once suspended, the status of the license will be Not Installed, and its application
will no longer be available for use.
You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the
same iR, the device with the same device serial number.
If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, use the transfer license
during the replacement. (See "License for forwarding")
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-217
3) On Application/ License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-218
F-2-216
2-144
2-145
Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button.
Note:
The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device
(with the same device serial number).
1) Login to SMS.
2) Application List page appears. On MEAP Application Management page , click the name of
the application you want.
F-2-219
5) Click [ Yes ].
F-2-221
3) Check Application/ License Information page appears.

F-2-220
4) On Application / License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-222
2-145
5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button.
2-146
7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button.
F-2-224
F-2-223
6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by
following the instructions on the screen.
8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.
F-2-225
WARNING:
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.
2-146
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
Other License File Management Functions
2-147
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
Reusable license
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, Disabling a
License File . and see Chapter 0, Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File. in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications.
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
F-2-227
3) Specify the application to be forwarded.
License for forwarding

If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, you can transfer the license
information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage. Service
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see Chapter 0, Starting and Stopping
a MEAP Application. in this manual).
F-2-228
4) Click [ Disable ] button on the [ Disable License File ].
F-2-226
F-2-229
2-147
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ].
2-148
8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ].
F-2-233
F-2-230
6) When [Download] button on the [ Download / Delete Transfer License File ] becomes
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation
screen and click [ Yes ] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
effective, click [Download] button.
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-2-234
10)
Log out of SMS.
11)
Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,
it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to
the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new
license for installation in the new device.
F-2-231
7) The dialogue [ File Download ] is displayed. Click [ Save ].
Note:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12)
Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
F-2-232
2-148
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
Enhanced System Application Management
2-149
About Login Service

The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is
Outline
[ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging
in to devices.
Installing and uninstalling Enhanced System Application Management (login services, etc.)
Switching login services (switching the method to log in to devices)
Checking installation status of other System Applications
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System
Management ] page.
The preinstalled login applications are Default Authentication and Single Sign On-H, and
Default Authentication is enabled by default.
CAUTION:
This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent.
Default Authentication overview

This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
Remote UI.
SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
F-2-235
The following three authentication methods may be selected from.

Server authentication
Server authentication and local authentication
Local device authentication
Active Directory or LDAP can be used as the server for server authentication.
It is not necessary to prepare a server for Security Agent (SA). (In the case of SSO, SA is
necessary.)
2-149
Environment confirmation
Differences from conventional SSO

Domain B
Domain C
DC
2-150
Domain B
DC
DC
DC
Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements
Domain C
needed in each login service.

DC
Specification of SSO-H
DC
Item
SA
Device
Domain A
SSO
No. of local device users
Up to 5000
Maximum number of domains
Active Directory : 200 domains (this device not included)
IPv6
Authentication provided in IPv6 supports AD/KDC/DNS of

Windows Server 2008 only)
Resource used
Memory : 3584KB
Storage : 25000KB
File Description : 27
Thread : 33
Socket : 33
Device
Domain A
SSO-H
F-2-236
Network ports
used
CAUTION:
When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be
used.
When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default
Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization).
To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the
device are used.
The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management
is required.
Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local
device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However,
application settings information cannot be ported.
Specification
Connecting
88 KDC
53 DNS
1 - 65535 ( Default : 389) : LDAP
Listening
10000 - 10100
Supported authentication server Active Directory

Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1 * /
Windows Server 2003 R2 * / Windows 2008 Server *
*64-bit OS is not supported.
LDAP
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
Lotus Domino V8.5 for Window
Supported Active Directory
Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1/Windows

Server 2003 R2/ Windows 2008 Server(64BitOS not supported)
Availability of Department
Management Linkage
Available only in local authentication

T-2-86
SSO/SDL handling
This model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.
2-150
2-151
Setting the Authentication Method
Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used
In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods.
Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen. (For details, refer to
e-Manual > MEAP > Menu for Administrators > Setting the SSO-H > "Setting the User
Usage Conditions
Authentication System".)
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following

conditions need to be satisfied.
Only "Local Device Authentication" can be used as the user authentication method.
The department ID and password have been already set for the SSO-H login user before
enabling department ID management.
The information (the department ID and password) set for the login user coincides with the
information registered in Department ID Management.
Setting Procedure
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
F-2-237
Note:
The default settings are shown below.
User authentication method : "Server Authentication + Local Device Authentication"

Type of authentication : "Active Directory"
procedure needs to be performed to enable the setting.

1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
CAUTION:
To ensure the security, it is recommended to change the password and the user
name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of
shipment immediately after you have started using SSO-H.
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device
has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the
Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used

SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting
F-2-238
Manager, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Access

Management Plug-in, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management
Console Accounting Management Plug-in.
For details on the combination, refer to the User's Manual or Service Manual of the product.
2-151
2) Restart the device.
2-152
Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
3) Disable Depart ID Management.
6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Department ID Management.
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department

ID Management].
SSO-H user registration information edition screen

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-239
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.

Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS". )
F-2-241
F-2-240
2-152
SSO-H user registration information import screen
2-153
8) Check that the device can be logged in.
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information] or
Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
(https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
F-2-244
F-2-242
7) Enable Depart ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Note:
In the case of conventional SSO, department management can be conducted also
when server authentication is used provided that iWAM/iW EMC account management
is used, which is not supported by SSO-H.

Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication

When using Server Authentication, the user who satisfies the specified conditions (user
attribute and its match criteria) becomes the administrator (the device administrator and the
SSO-H administrator).
The default user attribute and whether the setting value can be changed or not are shown
below.
Item
Search Criteria:
User Attribute:
Character String:
Default value
Active Directory
LDAP
Exact Match
memberOf
Canon Peripheral Admins
Not Available
Not Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI > T-2-87
Single
Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet)
F-2-243
F-2-245
2-153
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to

SystemManagers)
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter SA) to
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
2-154
Local device authentication

It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an iR device on a
stand-alone basis.
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this
iR device
function.
Local user
Remote user
F-2-246
Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device.

User management can be performed from the User Management screen (http://device's IP
address:8000/sso/) or imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. The login destination is
[This device].
User Management screen
F-2-247
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
2-154
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-155
CAUTION:
Outline
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory
environment. It is a user authentication where the user is authenticated by the domain on the
network when the user logs into the device. In addition to users belonging to the domain that
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has
become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
includes the iR device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable relationship with the
domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of the login destination
can be selected by the users themselves upon login.
Using one of the options (Net Spot Accountant, imageWARE Accounting Manager, or
imageWARE EMC Accounting Management Plug-in) makes it possible to analyze/manage
the iR device usage.
Dmain A
Domain B
Domain controller
Active Directory
With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Access Active Directory within same site only.
Domain controller
Active Directory
Trusting
Access Mode in Sites
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
relationship
authentication error.
Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
external to the site will be accessed.
If all attempts to access Active Directory fail, there will be an authentication error.
Available
Domain A user
iR Device
Domain B user
The operating specifications of the site internal access mode are as described below.
F-2-248
The protocol used is as follows.
When first logging in to the login service after booting iR, the domain controller (DC) is
obtained from the site list.
Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS
However, upon the first login, even if the site functionality is active, connection to DC is
NTLMV2:WLS(Web Service Login Service)
random. (This is because, if connection to DC should fail, the site to which the device belongs
User information acquisition is done by LDAP, so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be
cannot be ascertained.)
made accessible. If LDAP connection fails, the authentication will end in error.
If the device IP address or the domain name are changed, the site settings are acquired once
No. of supported domains: 200 (unchanged from SSO) Site access supported.
more.
CAUTION:
In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)
In the case of using Server Authentication (Active Directory authentication), it is

necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the
machine (and the PC for login). If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer,
an error will occur at the time of login. (The setting of the allowable difference in time
can be changed.)
LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.
From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this
becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved
from DNS)
2-155
2-156
Settings for access mode in sites
Note:

The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed.
Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories
belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
the address list was obtained.
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as
detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)
Site list acquisition
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that
DNS Server A
records:
AD 192.168.1.2
AD 172.24.12.2
AD 172.24.35.2
AD 211.111.1.30
SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90
SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No.
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
Active Directory will be accessed.
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
4.Access Active
Directory of same
site
DC-Tokyo/DNS
172.24.12.2
n
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be
Domain X
io
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login.
at
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
Sample of Processing Access Mode in Sites
lic
needs to be accessed in LDAP, so SASL-Kerberos-Bind is used by the login user account. If
pl
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
F-2-249
The figure below shows a sample of processing Access Mode in Sites.
Re
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
2.Get Active
Directory list
N
WA3. Access Active
Directory of same
subnet
DC-Osaka/DNS
172.168.1.2
Site:Tokyo::
172.24.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Repllic
ation
1. When making initial

settings, obtain site list
and ascertain which
site the device
belongs to.
SSO-Tokyo
172.24.12.80 WAN
Site:Tokyo
172.12.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Site:Osaka::
192.168.1.0/24
Site:Hakata::
211.111.1.0/24
DC-Hakata/DNS
211.111.1.30
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.
Site:Osaka
192.168.1.0/24
SSO-Tokyo
192.168.1.90
SSO-Tokyo
Site:Hakata
211.111.1.0/24
211.111.1.3
F-2-250
2-156
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories.

Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the
order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active
Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW
2-157
Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)

It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with the LDAP Server on the network in an LDAP environment.
settings, etc.).
iR Device
LDAP Server
[Site subnet list]

Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24
Local user
Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24

Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24
As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged
as belonging to site Tokyo.
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set
Remote user
in the device.
[Active Directory]
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are
172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2.
Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2.
Therefore, this one will be accessed.
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2,
will be accessed.
5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the
order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is
an optional operation.
Logging into other domains at multi-domain
At multi-domain, if another domain is logged into, based on the site/ subnet information
retrieved in the home domain, the Active Directories of the login destination domain/ KDC
address list are computed. In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other
domains are outside of the site access range, and only the domain controller within the site
is programmed for access, an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site
information is incorrect.
F-2-251
LDAP server authentication can be used for devices that support MEAP User Preference
Service (MEAP Specification Ver.56) and MEAP Application Setting Information Management
(MEAP Specification Ver.57).
As for models that do not support MEAP User Preference Service and MEAP Application
Setting Information Management , [LDAP Server] cannot be selected as the type of the
authentication server on the SSO-H Configuration page. Moreover, it is not possible to access
the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen.
Simple bind (a method where the password is not encrypted) is used as the bind
(authentication) between SSO-H and LDAP server. It is therefore strongly recommended to
always use SSL connection from a security standpoint.
As for the version of LDAP, only Ver.3 is supported.
ON/OFF of SSL connection can be changed on the LDAP Server Management page.
The time-out value of connection is 60 seconds.
In the case of using LDAP server authentication, the characters entered as the user name are
not case-sensitive, but the characters entered as the password are case-sensitive.
In the case of SSO-H, authentication is not allowed when the user name includes "* (asterisk)".
If authentication is performed with "* (asterisk)" used in the user name, an authentication error
occurs.
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
2-157
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
Server authentication and local device authentication
2-158
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication" function and
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used.
the "local device authentication" function.

It is possible to use server authentication to authenticate the users registered on the
authentication server under normal conditions and use local device authentication when a
user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated.
If a trouble occurs in the authentication server, local device authentication can be used as an
emergency measure until recovery from the trouble.
Local user
Server authentication
Local
device authentication
F-2-254
Remote user
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
F-2-252
device.
Steps to Change Login Services

1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management ].
F-2-255
F-2-253
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
2-158
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-159
Login Service Installation Procedure
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
Follow the procedure show below to install login services.

1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-256
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
F-2-257
2) Click the [Browse] button, and specify the enhanced system application file and license file.
F-2-258
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-159
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-160
Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
3) Click [ Install] button.
Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services.

In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status).
Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped.
1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-259
F-2-260
2) Click the [Uninstall] button of the login service you want to uninstall.
F-2-261
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-160
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
System Application Management

This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS.
There are two login methods: one is "password authentication" where you enter the password
2-161
Note:
If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list
of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.
for SMS on the SMS login screen and log in, and the other is "RLS authentication" where you
do not use the SMS login screen but enter the user ID and password on the RLS (Remote
Login Service) screen for authentication.
F-2-263
Password authentication
Enter the password on the SMS login screen for authentication. Only one password can be
set for SMS.
The login procedure is shown below.
Note:
If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the
system administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.
1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The URL
is as follows.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen
was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when
accessing with URL (non-SSL) before.
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.)
F-2-264
F-2-262
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
2-161
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
RLS Authentication
Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for
authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name
and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication.
The login procedures are as follows.
2-162
Note:
Only the following users may us SMS via RLS.
For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority.
In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon
Peripheral Admins) specified as the device administrator on the SSO-H Configuration
screen.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
F-2-266
F-2-265
Note:
When the device authentication method used is server authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click
Log In.
If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In button.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
2-162
Note:
SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI.

Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to
gain access to SMS.
When only the password authentication is enabled, the password authentication screen is
shown.
When only the RLS authentication is enabled, no further authentication is needed to
access SMS. This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote
UI.
2-163
CAUTION:
method.
F-2-268
Authentication.
F-2-267
2-163
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-164
Setting the method to login to SMS
Setting for login by Password Authentication

The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
Outline
1) Access SMS login screen by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network
The method to log into SMS can be specified by one of the following methods.
If you want to change the password authentication settings: Use RLS authentication
to log in, and change the settings.
If you want to change the RLS authentication settings: Use password authentication
to log in, and change the settings.

Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the user name and the password of the user registered as an administrator, select
The following table shows the start/stop combinations of the two login methods.
the login destination, and then click the [Log In] button.
Combination of Login Methods

Start RLS Authentication
as the MEAP device.
Stop RLS Authentication
Start Password Authentication
Login available with either method
Login available only with
Stop Password Authentication
Login available only with RLS

Authentication
Setting unavailable
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
T-2-88
CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
Authentication server is down
Network problem, no communication with authentication server
In the event of either of these cases, try the following.
1. If local device authentication is active, try logging in with local device
authentication.
F-2-269
3) Select [System Application Management]
2. If only server authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.
F-2-270
2-164
2-165
4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password
Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
Setting for login by RLS Authentication

The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
1) Access the SMS login screen using the normal method (password authentication). The
URL is shown below.
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is "MeapSmsLogin". (Case sensitive)
Login screen by Password Authentication
F-2-271
5) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
authentication screen.
Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen
F-2-273
3) Select [System Application Management] on System Management menu.
F-2-272
F-2-274
2-165
2-166
4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
CAUTION:
method.
F-2-275
5) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window.
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the
password authentication screen.
F-2-277
Authentication.
RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen
F-2-276
2-166
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
MEAP Application System Information
Initial Display Languages of SMS

SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the
drop down list on a login page.
information.
Start
No
Refer to the setting of the
Accept-Language header,
which a browser sends out.
Checking the System Information
Refer to the value of

portalLang stored in
Cookie.
Yes
Outline
You can check the device's platform information and the MEAP application's system
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting.
Logged in by RLS
authentication.
2-167
System information that can be checked from the screen

MEAP Specifications version (MEAP Spec Ver)
Remote UI display English or Japanese

setup language
MEAP Contents version

Java Virtual Machine version
System application information
Except English or Japanese
The name of the installed system application
English or Japanese
Language
priority setting of a
browser
Refer to the setting of a language
displaying in registration/initial
setting [Additional Function].
English or Japanese
Display setting
of a device
The installation date of the installed system application

Application ID of the installed system application
The status of the installed system application
The checking procedure is shown below.

Display in English.
Display in the
language configured.
F-2-278
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [System Information] on System Management menu.
When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication)

It is referred in order of the language priority (setting of the Accept-Language header which a
browser sends out) and the display-language setting in the "user mode". When the language
setup is other than English or Japanese, it is displayed in English.
When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service

Authentication).
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above.
F-2-279
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
2-167
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
Display of System Information Details
2-168
Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information
MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.
all at the same time: platform information, system application information, information on the
Note:
The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous
section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is
output.
installed MEAP applications, etc.

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Info] on System Management menu.
3) Click [Display Details] button.
Follow the steps below when confirming information:

1) Select [ Settings/ Registration] > [ Management Settings] > [ License/ Other] > [MEAP
Settings] > [ Print System Information] .
Note:
When System Manager ID and PIN are set, go to Top screen and log in as System
Manager to continue jobs.
2) Press[ Yes] button.
F-2-280
4) System information of each application (including system applications) is shown in an

additional window. Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as
text information. This function is useful to check status information of each application.
F-2-282
Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However,
the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling iR
devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).
F-2-281
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
2-168
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
MEAP Application Information
Content of MEAP system information

Application System Information
Outline
Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP

Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5
Application Version: 1.0.0
Status: Resolved
Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003
Vendor : Canon Inc.
License Status : Installed
Maximum Memory Usage : 1024
Registered Service :
item
2-169
You can check the MEAP application installed on the device.

The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen.
Application Information

Application Name
Version
Application ID
Installed on
Description
Manufacturer
Resources Used (Storage, Memory, Threads, Sockets, File Descriptors)
content
Application Name
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application

program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application ID/System Application ID (application-id) items which are declared on the declaration
Application Name
statement in the application program are printed.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement
within the application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically,
Installed: the application has been installed.
Active: the application is being in use.
Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name
(bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program.
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of
the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is
Usage
the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the
application program, and is expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the
MEAP framework.Some services may not have printable data.
License Information
Status
Expires after
Serial Number
Type of Counter
Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Information] on System Management
menu.
F-2-283
T-2-89
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
2-169
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the
information of the target application.
2-170
Check License
Outline
You can check the contents of the license file.
Procedure to Check the License File

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Check License] on System Management menu.
F-2-285
3) Click the [Browse..] button, specify a license file, and click the [Check] button.
F-2-284
F-2-286
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
2-170
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
Changing SMS Login Password
2-171
MEAP Application Setting Information Management

and Log Management
Outline
Outline
You can change the password for logging into SMS.

If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default
value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"
in this chapter.
The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log
Management page provide menu related to "MEAP Application Configuration Service" for
managing MEAP application setting information and menu related to "MEAP Application Log
Service" for managing log information respectively.
Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Chage Password] on System Management menu.
F-2-289
MEAP Application Configuration Service

This service is used to manage the MEAP application setting information. It has functions
F-2-287
3) Enter the current password and a new password, and then click the [Change] button.
such as saving setting information to the MEAP area. Ver 57 of MEAP Specifications supports
this service.
MEAP Application Log Service

This service is used to collect MEAP application logs (debug logs and authentication logs).
Ver 58 of MEAP Specifications supports this service.
The collected logs can be downloaded or deleted in user mode.
The settings such as the log level to be saved cannot be made from SMS.
F-2-288
These settings depend on the MEAP application. For detailed information, refer to the manual
for the application.
Note:
The [Reset] button on the [Change Password] screen is used to clear the value entered
in the text field. It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the
default value.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
2-171
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
Advantages Obtained When Using the Services
2-172
MEAP Application Setting Information Management
By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log
The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively
Application Setting Information Management can be deleted. The procedure is shown below.
perform data management tasks.

1) Log in to SMS.
Devices and MEAP applications which do not support new functions

App1
Dedicated management tool
App2
Dedicated management tool
Setting and reference
App1
App2
Config data
(App1 format)
Pref data
(App1 format)
Log data
(App1 format)
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] on

System Management menu.
Device
Config data
(App2 format)
Pref data
(App2 format)
Log data
(App2 format)
F-2-290
As for devices and MEAP applications that do not support the service, the setting information
and log data are managed on an application-by-application basis.
F-2-292
3) Select an application you want to delete, and click the [Delete] button.
Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions

General-purpose management tool
App1
Configuration
management service
App2
Preference
management service
Device
Log
management service
Config data
Preference data
Log data
(common format)
(common format)
(common format)
Platform
F-2-293
F-2-291
As for devices and MEAP applications that support the service, information can be collectively
managed.
Note:
If a MEAP application that contains setting data which can be shared (not dedicated
to the application) is installed, the application name [Shared Setting Information of
Applications] is displayed.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
2-172
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
MEAP Application Log Management
2-173
4) To download the logs
The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file.
Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted. The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Log Management] on System
Management menu.
F-2-296
5) To delete the logs

The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the logs. Click the [Yes] button
to delete the logs.
F-2-294
3) Select [Download Application Logs] or [Delete Application Logs].
F-2-297
F-2-295
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
2-173
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
Maintenance
Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the
Backup Data Using SST
Outline
2-174
Backup Item Automatically Copied

The following data are backed up using SST:
The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.
MEAP applications.
Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not
be saved for MEAP applications using BOX function).
When replacing or formatting the HDD, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be
User information data registered for local device authentication in SSO-H
temporarily saved to your PC.
SMS password
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
recovering the backup data.
CAUTION:
In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the HDD.

In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.
The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the iR device has the same serial number.
WARNING:
F-2-298
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has
been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings
and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to
observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data.
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
2-174
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-175
Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices

In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the
following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).
1) Switching Login Service / Backup of Login User Information

If SSO-H is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing
Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and
up the user information. Although SST will back up local device user information, it is
Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, ).
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
Favorite settings
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
Default settings
login page opens with the URL "https://<device IP address>:8443/sso/").
Settings of option shortcuts

Previous settings
CAUTION:
Settings of quick menu
If a HDD of a system that uses SSO-H is formatted without changing the login
service to the default authentication, the error message The login service must be
set again with SMS appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to
restart the system after formatting.
Button size information

Wallpaper settings
Quick menu button information
Restrict quick menu use
If this problem occurs, change the login service to SSO-H with SMS. If you cannot
access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system
with FIXIP mode -hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on.
The IP address 172.16.1.100 will be automatically assigned for the device. Then
log in to SMS specifying the address.
Requirements for Backup Using the SST

The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
1) Device Firmware Version
Device Firmware Version for SST (Ver4.2x)
Boot ROM
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
series other than iR-ADV
C2030/C2020 series
System
2) Starting the device in Download Mode
SST
Boot ROM is not

equipped.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
The version supporting

the corresponding
devices.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
The version supporting

the corresponding
devices.
T-2-90
Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
only in Download Mode.
3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
start SST on the PC.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at
maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.
2-175
4) Connecting the device using SST
2-176
6) Saving backup data
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button.
Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.
F-2-301
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.
F-2-299
5) Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC (uploading)

Click [Upload Data] button of SST and select Meapback.bin as the item to be backed up
to click [ Start ] button.
F-2-302
F-2-300
2-176
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-177
Procedures to Restore Backup Data
CAUTION:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
1) Connecting to the device

Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Restoring backup file
Click [Download Data] button and select the data backed up in the previous step (Meapback.
bin) to click [Start Restoring Data]. Note that the data backed up in a different version
cannot be restored.
F-2-303
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data.
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST.
F-2-304
3) Transferring Data
When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
F-2-305
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
MEAP applications are surely restored.
5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local
device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-177
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline
Formatting and Replacing the HDD

Outline
2-178
Formatting the HDD
Procedure to format the hard disk
Follow the following procedure to format the HDD.
If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the
MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced.
When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be
lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP
application and the license files need to be reinstalled.
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the
conventional counter.
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP
1) Connecting to the device

Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of "Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST".
2) Formatting the HDD
Select Format HDD from SST menu to format the HDD.
Note:
HDD can be formatted also by starting Download mode using the USB memory and
executing formatting from the displayed menu.
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-178
2-179
HDD replacement procedure
If the MEAP application area can be backed up
Outline
If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD,
The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally
so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
or not.
1) Preparation for replacement
If the MEAP application area cannot be backed up
If the HDD does not function correctly due to failure or for other reason, the MEAP application
area cannot be backed up. It is therefore necessary to reinstall the application after replacing
the HDD. The procedure is shown below.
1) Preparation for replacement
Copy a set of license files for reinstalling the MEAP application (special licenses and
reusable licenses) to a laptop for service operation.
Register a set of system files of a target product to SST. Or, prepare USB thumb drive of
the System file transfer settlement.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Reinstalling the MEAP application
When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
2-179
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-180
3) Press
or
button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
Outline
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It
will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default
files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
When you have made changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF'
in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause
the trouble.
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid;
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
F-2-307
4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
button.
the login service as necessary.
Starting in Safe Mode

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
F-2-308
5) Check that the notation MPSF has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.
F-2-306
F-2-309
2-180
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title
bar of the browser.
2-181
How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
An example of the title bar displayed at the time of startup in MEAP SAFE mode
Service Management Service : <Device Name>:<Product Name>: Safe Mode
F-2-310
CAUTION:
F-2-312
If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode, all the MEAP applications stop
and the status becomes "Installed".
3) Press
or
button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is canceled and the
device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after
normal startup and start the MEAP application.
F-2-313
F-2-311
2-181
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK]
button.
2-182
Collection of MEAP Console Logs

Overview
When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal
software and service mode.
What to Prepare
PC connected with the same network as the device
Commercially available terminal software
Note:
In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used
as the terminal software.
F-2-314
5) Start service mode again after rebooting the device, and check that the displayed setting
value has changed to "0" and that [MPSF] is no longer displayed at the upper left of the
Work Procedure
screen.
Device Setting Procedure

1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1.
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.
F-2-315
F-2-316
2-182
3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button.
2-183
PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)

1) Install the terminal software on the PC.
2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button.
F-2-317
4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value
F-2-320
input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.
Connection
Host
Service
TCP port#
: Select [TCP/IP] (Default)

: Device Host Name or IP Address
: Select "Telnet"
: Enter 19001
3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal] from the [Setup] menu.
F-2-318
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-321
F-2-319
2-183
4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the
2-184
6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save
"OK" button.
destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.
F-2-322
Terminal ID
New-line Receive
: VT100
: LF
F-2-324
7) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
5) Select [Log...] from the [File] menu.
F-2-325
8) Click the [Close] button in the log dialog.
F-2-323
F-2-326
Note:
To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.
2-184
2-185
9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu.
Comment to Log... :
You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in
the log file.
F-2-330
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
CAUTION:
F-2-327
Show Log dialog... :

The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed.
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
F-2-328
Change directory... :
The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.
F-2-329
2-185
PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used)
2-186
4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.
1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that
appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.
F-2-334
5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for
[Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.
F-2-331
2) Set [TCP/IP(Winsock)] for [Connect using].

F-2-335
6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the
menu.
F-2-332
3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port
number].
F-2-336
7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save
destination.
F-2-337
F-2-333
2-186
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-187
Using USB Devices
8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as system driver) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
other driver cannot be used.
USB driver setting (iR-ADV series):
System driver is active by default in iR-ADV series.
F-2-338
9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu.
The driver can be changed in Settings/Registration (user mode).

Usually, It is not necessary to change the setting because it is specified in the MEAP
application side.
Only in the case of a special MEAP application, it is necessary to change the USB driver
setting.
For details, refer to specifications of MEAP application side.
F-2-339
10) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
F-2-340
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
F-2-341
CAUTION:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
2-187
Operating mode
Conventional USB
settings [Use MEAP
keyboard enabled MEAP
driver as USB input
application
device]
ON
* MEAP driver
(conventional
compatibility mode)
OFF (*default)
* Native driver
Can use USB keyboard.

Can work only on the
conventional applications
that support the MEAP
application driver.
Cannot use USB
keyboards. (Device cannot
be detected.)
Software keyboard
application
(System Driver/
MEAP Driver)
System driver
supported MEAP
application
Cannot use USB

keyboards. (Device
cannot be detected.)
Cannot use USB

keyboards.
Can use USB

keyboards.
Can use USB

keyboards. Via software
keyboards only.
2-188
Note:
You can display/check the used driver setting at USB device report print described
below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
API.
Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
plugged to iR device
T-2-91
Note:
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted.
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference registration)
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP
application driver cannot use the USB input device.
Therefore, for the USB drivers used by USB devices/MEAP applications, there is setting
function (MEAP driver preference registration) to give priority to the MEAP driver.
If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function, the USB device can use the
MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings.
Using this function requires the conditions below:
Supported MEAP SpecVer: 26
Describe the idVendeor(VID) and idProdutc(PID) of USB device in the manifest or activate/
deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications.
The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing.
Registration
status of
USB device
A
Not
registered
Registered
restarted.
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
T-2-92
NO: USB device not available
Storage) plugged to iR device

Setting to use
MEAP application
Registration
System
System driver
Application
MEAP driver
status of
USB
Native
driver
not supported with VID/PID
(Additional
USB device
device application
supported / conventional
declared in
Functions
B
application
application
Manifest for B
mode)
Registered
Not
registered
Not used
(Native driver to
be used)
To be used
Not used
(Native driver to
be used)
To be used
YES: USB device available
YES
NO
NO
NO
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is

The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
YES: USB device available
When registering from a manifest file.

restarted.
When the HID keyboard is

MEAP application
installed > USB Settings:
Application
[Use MEAP Driver for USB
System System driver with VID/
Input Device]
Native
driver
not supported/
PID
When the Mass Storage is application
supported conventional declared
installed > USB Settings:
application application in Manifest
[Use MEAP Driver for
for x
External USB Device]
B
C
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
C
B
C
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
B
C
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO: USB device not available
T-2-93
2-188
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards

Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible).
When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be
remembered.
The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
2-189
Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration
When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
Steps to initialize preference use registration
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > buttons.
be entered from the software keyboard.

Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
When USB device is attached to iR device, iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode.
Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
F-2-342
3) Press
or
button for several times until [USBM-CLR] is shown on the screen.
Press [USBM-CLR] button.
guaranteed.)
Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings.
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)
F-2-343
2-189
4) Press [OK] button to restart this device.
2-190
3) Press
or
button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT]
button.
F-2-346
4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field.

F-2-344
USB Device report print

To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device
by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot
report print.
Steps to output the USB Device report print
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [MISC-P] > buttons.
F-2-347
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.
F-2-345
F-2-348
2-190
Example of output result
2-191
C : Configure
The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is
********************************
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
active.
I : Interface
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
USB device information
can be recognized.
T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=03 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0

D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
P: Vendor=066f ProdID=4210 Rev=10.02
S: Manifacturer=SigmaTel, Inc.
S: Product=STIr42xx
S: SerialNumber=0002F0F7261287A5
C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA
I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=fe(app.) Sub=02 Prot=00 Driver=irda-usb
E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
The value and the content of Driver are as follows.

Labeling
It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
connected.
usb-storage
It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are

connected.
irda-usb IrDA
It is displayed when the dongle is connected.
hub
It is displayed when HUB is connected.
gpusb
It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned
to the input device connected.
gpusbex
It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and
the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
F-2-349
USB device information Content

Display the information of the USB device, which the device recognized.
If not displayed, there may be some fault occurred.
Some of standard optional devices are not displayed on a report.
The details of each item are as follows.
T : Topology
Internal hierarchical structure, which a USB device is connected, is shown. The number of
Content
usbhid
T-2-94
E:Endpoint
The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.
Right or wrong of report output
Connecting device
a connected bus, the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated.
HID
D : Device
Storage
Information of USB devices is shown.
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized
here.
S : String
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a
product name can be recognized here.
Report printing
Available
Yes
Available
Yes
Not available
No
IrDA
Not available
Yes
Multimedia Card Reader
Not available
Yes
Not available
Yes
FAX
USB Device Port
P : Product
User installation
IC Card Reader
Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Not available
No
Hub
Internal Hub*
Not available
No
External Hub
Available
Yes
* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
T-2-95
2-191
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function
The content of MEAP preferred device information

Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
MEAP application.
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the
status using a specific USB device.
2-192
Integrated Authentication Function

Sharing the Authentication Information
Separately managing the authentication information at login and the authentication
information for MEAP applications creates inconveniences such as that the authentication
process is executed many times.
In order to solve this problem, the device has an integrated authentication function. This
AppID : Application ID
function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a
VID : Vendor ID
MEAP environment.
PID : Product ID
The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver.59, which needs to be supported by
Note:
By starting, stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application, the driver settings of the
USB device may be changed. If the device needs to be restarted following this setting
change, a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed.
both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function.
There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared: Volatile Credential whose
registered information is discarded at the time of logout or shutdown of the device and
Persistent Credential whose registered information is not discarded at the time of logout.
Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used in cases where the authentication information is shared between
applications which use the same security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by the login application, therefore the applications which
access the security domain that was used for authentication by the login application can use
the credential.
Persistent Credential
Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when accessing a
different security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by general MEAP applications, and the authentication
information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.
F-2-350
2-192
Comparison of Functions
Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button.
Volatile Credential
Registered
Character strings and arbitrary
information
Java objects
Lifetime Registration At login (the login application), and
at any timing of registration by an
application
Deletion
Can be used until logout/shutdown.
Encryption of
credential data
Store (Save) to
2-193
Persistent Credential
Character strings only User ID/Password/
Domain/Arbitrary character strings
At any timing of registration by an
application
Not supported
Can be used until deletion by the

application or management tool.
Data retained on the HDD is encrypted.
Memory in the device
HDD in the device

T-2-96
Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function

If you do not want Volatile Credential to be used from a security standpoint, the function can
be disabled.
F-2-352
[Disable integrated authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled
The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode.
regardless of the authentication method.
Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.

On the setting screen of remote UI, the function can be disabled on a protocol-by-protocol
[Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local device authentication]: The
integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication.
basis.
[Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server authentication]:

Remote UI
The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of LDAP server
You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as
authentication.
shown below.
Service mode
The location of the service mode setting for disabling integrated authentication:
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled
F-2-351
F-2-353
2-193
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for

Main Power] Setting
2-194
In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours"

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay
execution".
If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device, the following problems will occur.
If execution is delayed for some reason, the delay time is ignored.
The [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] setting cannot be

enabled.
only once.
If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep mode is running,
Problem: If 24 hours have passed since the last execution of the task, the task is executed
=> The task may be executed at a timing other than the time the user expects it to be
executed.
31/Dec
even when the setting of [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), the device
1/Jan
2/Jan
3/Jan
4/Jan
5/Jan
starts normally instead of quick startup.

In that case, it does not affect the behavior of the MEAP application.
Changes made in the settings of a MEAP application are not

reflected.
Starting
Stopped
(Quick startup standby)
If the startup setting [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), even when the
The timing the task is expected to be executed

The timing the task was actually executed
Main Power Supply Switch of the machine is turned OFF, a shutdown process is not executed
internally.
F-2-354
Therefore, in the case of a MEAP application where changes in settings are enabled when
the device is restarted, changes in settings are not reflected just by changing the settings.
Follow either of the restart procedures shown below to enable the changes made in the
settings.
Execute restart from remote UI.
Turn OFF the Main Switch, and then turn it ON within 20 seconds.
In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task at 00:00 every day"

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-rate
execution".
If execution was delayed for some reason, two or more tasks are continuously executed to
"make up for the delay".
Problem: The tasks of Jan. 1, Jan. 2, and Jan. 3 are executed after quick startup.
After recovery from quick startup, MEAP applications do not work

properly.
MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work
properly after recovery from quick restart.
Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing
may occur.
Problems may occur in the following two cases.
31/Dec
1/Jan
2/Jan
3/Jan
4/Jan
5/Jan
Starting
Stopped
(Quick startup standby)
The timing the task is expected to be executed
The timing the task was actually executed
F-2-355
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
2-194
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become
2-195
Note :
Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H
do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID
Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Unable to Be Logged in
Overview
System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management

Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.
Department ID Management and SSO-H (Local Device Authentication) manage user

information separately. Therefore, in order to allow coexistence of Department ID
Management and SSO-H, it is necessary that the information of SSO-H and the information
of Department ID Management are the same.
The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID
Management in the following cases:
(1)
User name
Password
(2)
(6)
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Department ID Management was enabled before changing the department ID and
7654321
1111
2222
password registered in SSO-H to match with the information of Department ID

Management.
(3)
Privilege
elevation
(5)
SSO-H user management information

User name
SSO-H
7654321
1111
2222
7654321
1111
2222
Dept. ID Management info
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Dept. ID Password
Mismatch
1111
2222
3333
(4)
Dept. ID Management Info

Dept. ID Password
Password
Administrator Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Dept. ID Management
O K
when Department ID Management was enabled.
Dept. ID Password
7654321
1111
2222
ID : 1111
Password : 1111
CANONTARO pass
User : CANONTARO CMJTARO
Makuhari
Password : pass
Authentication
The user information of SSO-H was different from that of Department ID Management
1111
2222
3333
F-2-357
Only one of information was updated, resulting in mismatch.
Verification
Only the department ID and password registered in SSO-H or those in Department ID

Management were changed.

F-2-356
1) The user enters the ID and password of SSO-H to a device where both SSO-H and
Department ID Management are enabled.
User name
Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
password to the department ID management function.

4) The department ID management function checks the department ID and password sent
from SSO-H with the user information table.
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Dept. ID Password
Match
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Only the SSO-H user

information was updated
2) SSO-H checks the entered ID and password with the SSO-H user information table.
3) SSO-H sends the department ID and password which correspond to the entered ID and
Dept. ID Password

USer name
Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
1234567
9999
8888
5) The user is elevated to the corresponding privilege.

6) The user is authenticated.
1234567
9999
8888
Dept. ID Password
Mismatch
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
F-2-358
If the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not
coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management,
the authentication ends in failure and the user can no longer log in to the device.
2-195
Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch.

Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function",
2-196
Procedure
1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
resulting in mismatch. (The SSO-H user information cannot be changed in Import All
Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Function.)
Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
Device A

Dept. ID Password
1111
2222
3333
Device B
Import All Function (Only the Department

ID Management information was updated.)

User name
PAssword
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
1111
2222
3333

Dept. ID Password
1234567
9999
8888
1234567
9999
8888
Dept. ID PAssword
Mismatch
1111
2222
3333
1111
2222
3333
F-2-359
Remedy
If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password,
perform the following remedy.
Note :
Since the device can be logged in if all of the following conditions are satisfied,
performing only the step 6 of this section can clear the mismatch of the department ID/
password.
System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management
Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.
F-2-360

3) Disable Depart ID Management.
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department
ID Management].
F-2-361
2-196
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.
2-197
SSO-H user registration information edition screen:
Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-362

6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
Department ID Management.
F-2-363
SSO-H user registration information import screen:

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
F-2-364
2-197
Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary
2-198
7) Enable Depart ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
F-2-365
8) Check that the device can be logged in.

Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
Reference material
Glossary
Terms & Acronyms
A program unit to provide users with solutions.
Application ID
An identifier assigned to each application.

A unique ID is assigned to each MEAP application.
Applet (Applet Type

Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java.

This type of applications show buttons on the touch panel display.
Code Sign
Information to check if an application is genuine. An application marketed

in the normal procedure has a code sign assigned by LMS. MEAP platform
rejects applications without Canon code signs for being installed or
executed on the device.
CPCA
(Common Peripheral
Controlling
Architecture)
Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object

model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or
modifying objects in the device.
CPCA Java CL
(Class Library)
CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
device.
Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
-Department ID
authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
Management
turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification
ID
ID allocated to each device type. This represents CPCA API specification

and the version number to use MFP generic functions or obtain information
including maximum allowable copies.
Esplet
(Esplet Type
Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications do

not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined
word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let]
derived from Applet/Service.
File Description
An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a

program. A program descriptor includes an identifier and information such
as a file name and size, which helps OS to judge the file to be edited.
HID class
HID stands for Human Interface Device, representing man-machine

interfaces of PC components and peripheral devices. HID class means
USB class classified as HID.
iR Native application
The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy,

Universal Send and Mailbox.
ISV
(Independent
Software Vendor)
Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or

sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers
application developer in this document.
F-2-366
Definitions and Explanations
Application
2-198
Terms & Acronyms
J2ME
Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular
Edition)
phones and PDA.
J2RE
(Java 2 Runtime
Environment)
A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming

language of Java2. This set includes Java virtual machine providing
runtime environment for Java applications among others. Java applets do
not require J2RE since these are executed on Web browsers using Java
runtime environment provided on browsers. However, standalone Java
applications require Java runtime environment such as J2RE for execution.
Runtime environments can be downloaded for free of charge from the Web
site of Sun Microsystems, the Java developer.
Java
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A.

Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking
advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses
Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java.
JavaScript
A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A.,

runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as
animated buttons and display of timetables.
2-199
Terms & Acronyms
MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
MEAP-enabled iR
device
imageRUNNER (iR) devices with built-in MEAP platform.
MFP
(Multi Function
Peripheral)
Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
OSGi
(Open Service
Gateway Initiative)
Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".
Portal Service
The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
Protocol
A set of rules applied to data transmission procedures over network. Major

communication protocols include:
FTP: File Transfer Protocol. This is a communication protocol or
protocolimplemented commands to provide file transfer between a host
and clients over TCP/IP network.
DHCP: An upward compatible protocol of BOOTP. This communication
protocol allocates a dynamic IP address to each client machine upon
communication startup on TCP/IP network and collects the allocated IP
address when communication is completed. The server allocates one of
multiple IP addresses and notifies the setup information to a client.
BOOTP: A communication protocol to automatically load setup
information including IP address and a domain name from the server to a
client on TCP/IP network.
RARP: A communication protocol to request IP address information via
the network adaptor address (MAC address) of a client.
IPP: A communication protocol to execute remote printing between the
print server and clients via Internet.
TCP/IP: A standard communication protocol required to access to
Internet and other large-scale network.
Proxy Server
Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a

user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored
in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access
the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access
services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the
file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the
requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of
the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file
in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next
request.
Java VM
JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native
instruction set.
License Access
Number
A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires
entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers
Licensae File
A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the

license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with
the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application.
LMS
The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled
(License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license
System)
access numbers.
Login Service
Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user

names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device
- Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple
Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On).
Mass Storage class
Mass Storage means a storage device with large capacity, generally

secondary storage devices. Mass Storage class means USB class
classified in the secondary storage device group.
MEAP (Multifunction
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java
Platform)
platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for
MEAP.
MEAP Contents
Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device.
Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.
2-199
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
Terms & Acronyms
2-200
Option for exclusive individual measure
SDK
(Software
Development Kit)
The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
Service
A functional unit or an application program working on MEAP platform.

[Applications] are generally termed [Services] in Java world.
Servlet
(Servlet Type
Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications is

designed to show user interface on the Web browser.
Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)

Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.
This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.
Default value
1: display
SMS
The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle
(Service Management management.
Service)
Socket
A virtual interface of an application for network communication. A user

only needs to specify a socket as a unit of an address and a port from an
application. This establishes the network connection for data transmission,
eliminating complication related to detailed communication procedures.
SSO-H (Single SignOn H)
Login service providing features of both local device authentication

and domain authentication. The former is the method that iR device
independently authorizes users; whereas the latter is that iR device links to
the domain controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to
authorize users.
Thread
A unit for program execution. A multi-task system allowing multiple

programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources
independently to each program, providing users with a feel as if only a
program is running. At least one thread is generated upon a program
generated.
URL
(Uniform Resource
Locator)
The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html].
[http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web
page on the Internet.
USB
Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus. This is the interface standard to link

between information devices.
USB system driver
The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
Setting range, item

0: hide 1: display
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-367
3) Press [UI-COPY] button.
T-2-97
F-2-368
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
2-200
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is
displayed), and press [OK] button.
2-201
Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM

screen (level 2)
In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/
JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there
will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.
Note:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
F-2-369
Default value
1: No activation of warning display
Setting range, item
0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-370
2-201
2-202
3) Press [ANIM-SW] button.
F-2-371
4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the
numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-2-372
2-202
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
Embedded RDS
2-203
Features and benefits
E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview
of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware

equipment.
Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the
host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine,
information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance
server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).
Major Functions
Service Call Button
If a user touches Service call button when corrupt image, paper jam, or/ and other problems
has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW.
Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request
Service Browser
The following device information/ status can be monitored.

Billing counts
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is
Parts counter
used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected to UGW.
Firmware info
In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the
Service call error log
service browser is changed from disabled (0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser
Jam log
information to the UGW.
Alarm log
Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Service mode menu Transmission
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.
E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
When the setting is changed in service mode
The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service
Communication with UGW using HTTPS / SOAP
mode menu:
Transmission timing
Internet
UGW
This machine
Alarm codes for transmission:

0x060002,// Fixing
0x060004 - 0x069999,// Fixing
0x090005 - 0x099999,// Dram
0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099,
0x100101 - 9900,// Development
0x300001 - 0x309999// High voltage
Firewall
Proxy Server
DNS Server
When the following alarm is detected.
Intranet
The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system using E-RDS

F-2-373
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
Transmitting data
COPIER
Display
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2-203
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
Transmission timing
Transmitting data
When the following service call error is detected. COPIER
Display
Error codes for transmission:

E000 - E00F,// Fixing
E020,// Development ATR
E060 - E06F// High voltage
When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust]

subordinates Service mode menu.
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of
setting)
COPIER
When the first communication test is done.

(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the
execution)
COPIER
Adjust
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
Yes
2-204
Limitations
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
1) At the time of transmission when an alarm/ service call error is detected, even if the alarm
log or service call log detected is the target code for service mode menu transmission,
transmission of service mode menu data is not performed in the following cases.
An alarm log or service call log which has been detected by E-RDS as an unsent log
at the time of power-on
An alarm log or service call log waiting for retry after its transmission failed
When service mode menu transmission (when an alarm log or service call error was
detected) failed
Service mode menu data of which processing for acquisition has been already
performed when an alarm or service call error subject to service mode menu
Display
transmission occurred
ANALOG Yes
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2) When an alarm/ service call error occurred continuously AND when time correction/
change was performed to this machine during the target log transmission processing, a link
number may be applied to the old log although it should be applied to the new log.
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
Adjust
T-2-98
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
NOTE:
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2-204
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
Service cautions
1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS
setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
2-205
NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits)
appears on the local UI.
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
URL setting of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR]
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
3) If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn
OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS : 0).
4) This machine supports communication tests in user mode*. When conducting a
communication test in user mode, pay attention on the following points:
During a communication test in user mode, do not take any actions such as pressing
a key. Actions are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are
ignored).
When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or user mode,
do not conduct a communication test from the other. These operations are not
guaranteed.
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
2-205
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
E-RDS Setup
Confirmation and preparation in advance
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
2-206
(3) Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this
machine network related settings.
See Users Guide for detailed procedures.
CAUTION:
(1) Advance confirmation

Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot
this machine.
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.
(2) Advance preparations

The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system
administrator in advance.
Information item 1
IP address settings
Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
Primary DNS server address
Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
Proxy server address
Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
User name and password required for proxy authentication
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-206
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
Steps to E-RDS settings
2-207
(2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings".
F-2-375
"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When "NG!" is displayed, see the
section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of the
CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.
F-2-374
3. Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot this machine.
Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI.
Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate
in the factory setting is automatically installed.
CAUTION:
After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only
the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered.
It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance.
F-2-376
(3) Reboot this machine.

(1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 2.
CAUTION:
If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other than
E-RDS, it is necessary to register again from SST or Remote UI.
2-207
2-208
CAUTION:
5. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS].
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
F-2-377
6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
7. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].

NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
NOTE:
This operation enables the communication function with UGW.
F-2-378
F-2-379
2-208
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed.
2-209
Steps to Service Call button settings
Steps for settings to display the service call button
In the case of supporting a service by the service call button, follow the instructions described
below to display the service call button.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALL-SW].
F-2-380
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COMLOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
F-2-381
3. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
F-2-382
2-209
NOTE:
When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring
Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter
screen.
2-210
Steps for settings of service call completion
When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as
described below to execute the service call completion work.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].
F-2-383
3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1
or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-384
NOTE:
In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless
of whether 0 or 1 is set.
2-210
Steps for service call request
2-211
4. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button.
Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call.
1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to
UGW.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.
F-2-385
3. Touch the [New Request] button on the Service Call screen.
F-2-387
5. If the service call request is successful, "The service call request has been sent."
is displayed. If "Could not send the service call request." appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "The service call request has been sent." is displayed.
F-2-386
CAUTION:
When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent.
The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service technician needs to
perform processing for service call completion.
F-2-388
2-211
Steps for service call cancellation
2-212
4. "The request has been canceled." is displayed.
To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below.

1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.
F-2-391
F-2-389
3. Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-390
2-212
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
Steps to Service Browser settings
2-213
3. Reboot this machine.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [BRWS-ACT] and then touch [OK].
4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS].
NOTE:
When the status of the function is changed from disabled to enabled, E-RDS sends the
browser information to the UGW.
F-2-394
5. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.
F-2-392
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed. When "NG!" is
displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established
with UGW.
F-2-395
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled (BRWS-STS : 1), it cannot be disabled
(BRWS-STS : 0) again*. To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
* The function is disabled (BRWS-STS: 2) by executing BRWS-ACT again.
F-2-393
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-213
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-214
FAQ
Initializing E-RDS settings

It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the
default value.
No.1
Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.
Initialization procedure
1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
halted.
2. Network cable is blocked off.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK].
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.

No.2
Q: I want to know the interval of data transmitting from E-RDS to the UGW, and what data
size is sent to the UGW?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The timing is once per 16 hours by default, and counter data volume could be maximum
250 bytes.
No.3
Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent?
A: Data shown below will be resent.
Jam log
F-2-396
Setting values and data to be initialized

The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Service call log

Alarm log
Service mode menu
The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode.
Browser information
It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled.
Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of
communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it
is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.
CAUTION:
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
status is not returned to the factory default.
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory
default CA certificate file.
No.4
Q: How many log-data can be stored?
A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128
characters.
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".
2-214
2-215
No.5
No.10
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed.
Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA?

A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft
transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
transmission?
ISA (as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to
A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
"Basic" authentication on the server.
transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".
No.6
No.11
Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system
Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?

A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
operation?
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time.
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment such
as HUB is made prolonged OFF.
No.7
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what?
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately
after error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does
not take a time from the controller of this machine to NIC though, the data will be saved on
the RAM.
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted.
No.8
Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode?
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of data
transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again.
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition to
sleep wont be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
Transmission timing
Detailed procedure
When the service browser 1) Specify the service browser

is enabled from the
setting in the service mode
disabled state [OFF]
menu.
2) Send browser information to
UGW.
3) Once obtaining OK
response from UGW, enable
the service browser mode
[ACTIVE].
(To use the setting, it is
necessary to reboot this
machine)
Transmission
information
Error occurs
Service browser mode: Retransmission

[Register]
is not performed.
WEB browser option: ("Disabling
[ON] or [OFF] according [OFF]" continues
to the license status
to be set.)
T-2-99
No.12
Q: Can I make another service call request when I have already requested a service call?
A: No, you cannot make another service call request if you have already made a service call
request.
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call which youd made. Or the service
technician performs a service call completion process.
No.13
No.9
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter?
A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter.
Q: Is the "Requesting" status cancelled when this machine is rebooted?

A: The requesting status is not cancelled even if the device is rebooted. The information of
the notified service call request (the time that the request was made, the service call request
description) is also retained during the "Requesting" status.
2-215
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-216
Troubleshooting
No.14
Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/ IP Settings, when the device is connected
with a PS server unit. How the authentication information such as CA certificate is dealt
A: The certificate-related items are displayed. Even when the device is connected with a PS
Server Unit, E-RDS functions.
No.1
Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON?
No.15
Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this
machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of
this machine is turned ON?
A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the
power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already
YES: Proceed to Step 2).

NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )
Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings]
> [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch the [Start] button.
passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately.

The following shows data send according to the status of this machine.
Send types
Scheduled send
Immediate send
(Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)
Power ON
Sent
Sent
Status of this machine

Power OFF
Not sent*1
-
Sent*2
Sent*2
Sleep
T-2-100
*1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on.
*2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode.
F-2-397
Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.)
NO: There is a possibility that this machines network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more.
2-216
2-217
(b) Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-398
F-2-400
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.

Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network.
Does this machine respond?
(c) Select [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS
server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.

NO: Confirm the details of this machines IP address and subnet mask settings.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?

YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
4) Confirm DNS connection

(a) Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP
Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary
and secondary addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button.
NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address,
and then touch the [Start] button.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the users system administrator.
F-2-399
2-217
2-218
Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication log (COM-LOG)

1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
3) When each line is selected, the communication log detailed screen is displayed as shown
in the figure below. (Example: No. 05)
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the
right side. The communication log list screen is displayed.
F-2-402
NOTE:
A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
Touch the [OK] button to return to the log screen.
4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and
strings".
No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
F-2-401
E-RDS have been changed.

Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
NOTE:
Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication log list screen.
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method
name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
2) Check the E-RDS setting values.

Check the communication log from COM-LOG.
Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGWPORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions".
2-218
2-219
No.3
No.8
Symptom: Registration information of the E-RDS machine was deleted from the device
Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is
information on Web Portal, and then registered again. After that, if a communication test is
grayed out.
left unperformed, the device setting in the UGW becomes invalid.

Cause: When the registration information of the E-RDS machine is deleted, information
related to E-RDS is also deleted.
Therefore, when 7 days have passed without performing a communication test after
registering the E-RDS machine again, the device setting becomes invalid.
Remedy: Perform a communication test before the device setting becomes invalid.
No.4
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Device is not ready, try later" in error details of COMLOG list.
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check networking conditions and connections.
2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60
seconds later.
F-2-403
Cause: There has been already a service call request.

Remedy: Perform either of the following remedy works:
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call request that has been made.
No.5
Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done
successfully.
Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty.
Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status
with a network and UGW administrator.
A service technician performs a complete processing for the service call request that has
been made.
No.9
Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!
Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.
Remedy: Initialize the HDD.
No.6
Symptom: Enabling Service Browser (BRWS-ACT) results NG!
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
successfully.
No.10
Symptom: A service call request is failed, and a message "Could not send the service call
request" is displayed.
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
No.7
Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the
successfully.
service browser fails to be activated.

Cause: The main power switch of this machine has not been turned OFF and then ON. ON/
OFF of the service browser is enabled after reboot.
Remedy: Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
2-219
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-220
Error code and strings
No.
The following error information is output in the communication error log details display screen.
(Here, "server" means UGW.)
Code
The error information are displayed in the following form.

[*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW]
NOTE:
* is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test
(method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
11
No.
1
Code
Error strings
0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode

changed.
0500 0003 SUSPEND:
Communication test
is not performed.
0xxx 0003
0xxx 0003
84xx 0003
8600 0002
8600 0003
8600 0101
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
8700 0306 SRAM version
unmatch!
Remedy
Initialize the E-RDS setting
(ERDS-DAT).
Perform a communication test
(COM-TEST).
Rebooting the device while

the communication test had
not been performed although
E-RDS is enabled.
Server schedule is Blank schedule data have
Perform and complete a
not exist
been received from UGW.
communication test (COMTEST).
Communication test Communication test has not Perform and complete a
is not performed
completed.
E-RDS switch is
A communication test has
Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS)
setted OFF
been attempted with the
to 1, and then perform a
E-RDS switch being OFF.
Event Registration Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON.
is Failed
within the device has failed.
If the error persists, replace
the device system software.
(Upgrade)
8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS

version unmatch!
Cause
Unmatched Operation Mode
Improper value is written

in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of E-RDS.
Improper value is written
in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of Ae-RDS.
Turn the device OFF/ ON.
Error strings
8xxx 0004 Operation is not

supported
10 8xxx 0101 Server response
error (NULL)
8xxx 0201
8xxx 0202
8xxx 0203
8xxx 0204
8xxx 0206
Cause
Method which E-RDS is not

supporting attempted.
Communication with UGW has
been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented
UGW from responding.
When (Null) is displayed
at the end of the message,
this indicates that there has
been an error in the HTTPS
communication method.
Server schedule is During the communication
invalid
test, there has been some
kind of error in the schedule
values passed from UGW.
Remedy
Contact help desk
When the error occurs, report

the details to the support
section.
After the UGW side
has responded, try the
communication test again.
12 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the
8xxx 0208 broken
inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST).
13 8xxx 0221 Server specified list Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported
is too big
number of elements of the list by UGW.
specified by the server is over
restriction value.
14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list Alarm filtering error: Unjust
Alert filtering is not supported
is wrong
value is included in the
by UGW.
element of the list specified by
the server.
15 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try The semaphore consumption Try again a communication test
later
error at the time of a
after a period of time.
communication test.
16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact
match
TrackingID notified by Updater the support department of the
differs from the thing of UGW sales company.
designates.
17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error
Some other kind of
communication error has
communication test (COMoccurred.
TEST).
18 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme
The header of the URL of the Check that the value of URL of
error(not https)
registered UGW is not in https UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
format.
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
19 8xxx 2002 URL server
A URL different to that
Check that the value of URL of
specified is illegal specified by the UGW has
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
been set.
agentif010.
2-220
2
No.
Code
Error strings
Cause
20 8xxx 2003 Network is not

ready, try later
Communication attempted
without confirming network
connection, just after booting
up a device in which the
network preparations are not
ready.

error
([Hexadecimal])
[Error detailed in
UGW]*1
22 8xxx 200A Server connection
error
Communication with UGW has

been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented
UGW from responding.
23 8xxx 200B Server address

resolution error
24 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection

error
25 8xxx 2015
26 8xxx 201E
27 8xxx 2028
28 8xxx 2029
TCP/IP communication fault

The IP address of device is
not set.
Server address name
resolution has failed.
2-221
Remedy
Check the network

connection, as per the initial
procedures described in the
troubleshooting.
(COM-TEST) about 60 seconds
later, after turn on the device.
Try again after a period of time.
Check detailed error code
(Hexadecimal) and [Error
details in UGW] from UGW
displayed after the message.
Check the network
connection, as per the initial
procedures described in the
troubleshooting.
agentif010.
Check proxy server address
and re-enter as needed.
Could not connect to proxy

server due to improper
address.
Proxy address
Could not connect to proxy
Check that the proxy server
resolution error
server due to name resolution name is correct. If the proxy
error of proxy address.
server name is correct, check
the DNS connection, as per the
initial procedures described in
the troubleshooting.
Proxy
Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and
authentication error
password required in order to
login to the proxy, and re-enter
as needed.
Server certificate
No route certificate installed Install the latest device system
error
in device.
software. (Upgrade)
Certificate other than
that initially registered
in the user's operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
Server certificate
The server certificate
verify error
verification error occurred.
agentif010.
No.
Code
Error strings
29 8xxx 2046 Server certificate

expired

time out
31 8xxx 2048 Service not found
Cause
The route certificate
registered with the device
has expired.
Certificate other than
that initially registered
in the users operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
The device time and date
is outside of the certificated
period.
Due to network congestion,
etc., the response from UGW
does not come within the
specified time. (HTTPS level
time out)
There is a mistake in the
UGW URL, and UGW cannot
be accessed. (Path is wrong)
32 8xxx 2052 URL error
The data which is not URL is

inputted into URL field.
33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error
SOAP Client fails to obtain

SOAP Response.
Possibility of a problem in
UGW or of a temporary
problem in the network load.
SOAP communication error
has occurred.
34 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault
35 xxxx xxxx Device internal

error
36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND:

Initialize Failure!
Remedy
Check that the device time and
date are correctly set.
If the device time and date are
correct, upgrade to the latest
system software.
If this error occurs when the

communication test is being run
or Service Browser is being set,
try again after a period of time.
agentif010.
agentif010.
Check that the value of port

number of UGW (RGW-PORT)
is 443.
An internal error, such as
memory unavailable, etc.,
Or replace the device system
has occurred during a device software. (Upgrade)
internal error phase.
Internal error occurred at the Turn the device OFF/ ON.
initiating E-RDS.
T-2-101
*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.

[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
2-221
Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline
2-222
Updater
a.
UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-Remote Update)
If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting
are registered on UGW in advance, full remote firmware update is available on an
Overview
imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device. Upon downloaded from CDS, the firmware is

updated on the device.
Outline
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System
(hereinafter CDS) or Local CDS to install firmware, MEAP applications and system options.
3) Give a firmware distribution

command to e-ROS.
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
UGW
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
Firmware Installation
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS or Local CDS via
Internet. Particularly on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices,
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
firmware can be updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services.
4) Download
firmware
CDS
Updater
MEAP Application/System Option Installation

By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to
manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,
regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in
Firmware Upload
Firmware
Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is

ADVANCE
automatically started upon
download completed.
F-2-404
devices.
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update)

If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in
Installing Firmware
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
methods.
advance, firmware can be distributed to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device before

a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to
update the firmware manually immediately after completing device inspection.
Distribution Method
Download
Downloadable Firmware Versions
Update
Previous
Current
Newer
Commanded
Timing
Ver
Ver
Ver
by:
a. UGW-linked Download / Update

UGW
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download
UGW
(Remote Distribution / Update)
c. Manual Download / Update
Local UI
(On-site Update via Service mode)
d. Local CDS Download and Update
iW EMC +
(iW EMC + DFU Plug-in*3)
DFU Plug-in
*3
e. Update by the SST
SST
Auto
No
Yes*1
Yes*2
Manual
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
Auto
Manual
Auto
No
Yes
No
Yes*1
Yes*1
No
Yes*2
Yes
Yes*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1: Do not execute distribution of updated module only.

*2: Only the versions for which remote update is allowed can be selected.
*3: Device Firmware Update Plug-in
UGW
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
Updater
T-2-102
3) Give a firmware distribution

command to e-ROS.
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
Service
Technician
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
5) Writing process is started by

manually executing Updater.
F-2-405
2-222
2-223
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update via Service Mode)
e. SST update
If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device has connection with the external network,
In the cases of devices other than imageRUNNER ADVANCE series and devices of
a service technician can gain access to CDS via Service mode to download and update
imageRUNNER ADVANCE series that are not connected with external network, the foregoing
firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the
three methods cannot be used to distribute firmware. Firmware released in the future will be
customer site even without PCs.
distributed via CDS instead of distribution using a master CD. In the field, these firmware can
1) Manually execute
Updater.
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
be downloaded from CDS using a PC web browser.
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
Updater function available machine

CDS
Service
2) Firmware distribution
Technician
Firmware
F-2-406
2) Download firmware to PC
3) Update via SST
iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in) and register the firmware in the
local CDS. In service mode of the host machine, make preparations to allow reception of
Canon Inc.
Update function impossible machine
NOTE:
External network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
d. As preparation for distribution, obtain firmware from the update CDS using
1) Firmware Update
The service technician downloads

the firmware from CDS in advance
and executes update using SST.
Sales Company
Service Technician
firmware distributed from the local CDS. The firmware can be updated on the user's intranet
by executing the task from Device Firmware Update Plug-in on iW EMC.
F-2-408
NOTE:
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.
Download
Distribution Method Commanded
by
F-2-407
Manual download/
update via Local UI
Manual download/
upload via Remote UI
Special download/
upload via Remote UI
Local CDS Download
and Update
(iW EMC + DFU Plugin*3)
Local UI
Remote UI
Update
Timing
Auto
Manual
Auto
Manual
Remote UI
Firmware
update
process Plugin
Auto
Downloadable Firmware Versions

Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Specific version only
(Obtain it separately)
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
*1: Only the latest version of Remote update-enabled version is downloadable.
2-223
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-224
Installing MEAP Application/System Option
LAN
The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled
LAN
Sales
Company
LMS
by applying CDS.
User
5) Manuals, etc.
a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation

If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or
LAN
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
or a system option.
3) Create LF
Manual
Upload
Application
Installing MEAP Application

LAN
User
4) Transmit LF
LAN
Sales
Company
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
LMS
If a customer enters LAN
purchased from the sales company
to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, a LF can be installed.
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
MEAP
Application
Manual
Upload
3) Create LF
LAN: License Access Number

LF: License File
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
F-2-410
Application
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
4) Transmit MEAP
Application/LF
If a customer enters LAN

purchased from the sales company
to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, MEAP application/LF
can be installed.
Canon Inc.
LAN: License Access Number

LF: License File
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
F-2-409
Installing System Option
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-224
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions
System Configuration
2-225
List of Functions
The figure below schematically shows the system configuration.
The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater.

Category
CDS
Dealer
Manual
Readme
License
Access No.
LMS
Internet
User
Application/License
Updater
MEAP application
Manual
Firmware
eRDS
Sales
Company
CDS
Application
Firmware
Business
Group
Firmware
UGW
Service
Technician
Command for Firmware Distribution
QA
Canon Inc.
F-2-411
Local CDS
MEAP application/
system option
System
Management
Internal system
error notification
Function
Checking firmware compatibility
Checking special firmware
Checking latest firmware
version
Registering/deleting firmware
distribution schedule
Confirming and downloading
firmware
Updating downloaded firmware
Cancelling downloaded
firmware
Acquiring firmware distribution
information registered from
UGW
Notifying firmware version
information
Inquiring license for MEAP
application/system option
Installing MEAP application /
system option
Settings
Testing communications
Displaying update logs
Displaying system logs
Notifying internal system error
occurrence to distribution server
Service
Mode
User
Mode
Remote
UI
UGWlinked
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-103
F-2-412
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions
2-225
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow
Distribution Flow
Local CDS
Category
MEAP application/
system option
Internal system
error notification
Firmware Installation Flow
Function
Firmware
System
Management
2-226
Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods.
Checking latest firmware version

Registering/deleting firmware distribution schedule
Confirming and downloading firmware
Updating downloaded firmware
Inquiring license for MEAP application/system option
Installing MEAP application / system option
Settings
Testing communications
Displaying update logs
Displaying system logs
Notifying internal system error occurrence to distribution server
xxxxx
a: UGW-linked download and update

b: UGW-linked download
c: Manual download and update
d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in)
e: Update via SST
: Operator of each company
T-2-104
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Automatic update
e
b
c
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1
Automatic download
Firmware acquisition
Register the
firmware in the LCDS
Distribution setting &

Download
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled download

Download
Via User mode
(Local UI)

Download
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Download via SST
Executing the task

from Device
Firmware Update
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Update via SST
Automatic update
F-2-413
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow
2-226
Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2-227
MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow

MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided.
Be sure to use the user mode to install.
: User operation
Limitations and Cautions

Limitations
Changing Date/Time on Device
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
scheduled.
Application
Market Release
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
Change of Setting from Service mode

Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.
Cautions
Device Serial No.
Acquisition
(from the device)
Concurrent use of Updater functions

Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with
Remote UI.
License Key
Acquisition
(from LMS)
License File
Acquisition
(from LMS)
Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools

Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions
from Remote UI.
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Install distributed
application
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
System Option
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
System Option
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
MEAP Application
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
F-2-414
Using Updater function from Remote UI

Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for
certain duration.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of
Remote Login Service via SMS
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use
Remote Login Service via SMS.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI]
button.
Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function
Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
This is the Updater-specific specification.
2-227
2
Job/Function
type
COPY
PRINT
FAX
I-FAX Receipt
Report Print
SEND
Receiving
Wait for EOJ
(end of job)
Wait for EOJ
Cancel
processing to
trigger update *
-
Printing
Queued print
jobs
2-228
Sending
Queued send
jobs
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

-
Wait for EOJ

-
Cancel
Cancel
processing to processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
T-2-105
*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.
Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
completed.
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
on the execution modes).
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
2-228
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Companys HQ
2-229
Preparation
For Install of Application
Overview of Preparation
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
For updating of firmware
CDSUGW
CDS-FIRM
Enabling
Setting
[Update
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Companys Settings UGW Link
Button of User
HQ
Mode
LOCLFIRM
LCDSFLG
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enabling
[Local CDS]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Default Setting of Sales

Company's HQ
US
US/SG
SG
Setting of Sales Company's

HQ after Change
CA
LA
HK
T-2-108
Yes
Yes
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
Enabling
[Manual
Update]
Button of
User Mode
(Remote UI)
Yes
Yes
Enabling [Install Application/

Options] Button of User Mode
Setting Sales Companys HQ
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
CDS-CTL
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via
Local CDS
Network Settings
T-2-107
COPIER >
FUNCTION
Service Mode > INSTALL
Installation
Method
Installation Method
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.

Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode

(Level 1)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-2-106
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Companys HQ
2-229
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings
2-230
Network Settings
[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ]

CDS-FIRM
Connecting to External Network

The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
LCDSFLG
NOTE:
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
CDS-UGW
CDS Local
CDS
1
1
To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user

(administrator).
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater can be activated from the user
mode.
0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Whether to display or hide the screen for setting the server to be
0
connected
0: Hide
1: Display
To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. 1
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
T-2-109
Connection to the local CDS

When updating firmware using iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in),
start service mode and enable the following setting.
[COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-FIRM]
Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] > [ LCDSFLG]
2. Press [Updater] button.
Then, disable the following setting.

[COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-UGW]
F-2-415
F-2-416
2-230
2-231
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
5.
Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside
the [Delivery Server URL] button.

If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
Delivery Server CDS
F-2-417
4. Press [Settings] button.
F-2-419
Delivery Server Local CDS
F-2-418
F-2-420
2-231
2-232
3.
Note:
Press [Software Management Settings] button.
For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in
L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port
number.
To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service mode.
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
Note:
CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all
means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS.
F-2-422
4. Press [Test Communication] button.

F-2-423
F-2-421
2-232
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link
2-233
Enabling UGW Link
5. Press [Yes] button.
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW

(0 -> 1)
In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not

distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ
Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
F-2-424
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
See imageWARE Remote Operators Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation

Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
[Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW
WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware
Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-425
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link
2-233
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
2-234
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be
To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation
set to ON for users in advance.
should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician

(Level 1)
Service
Technician
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM

(0 -> 1)
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):
F-2-428
F-2-426
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-MEAP(1)):
F-2-427
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
F-2-429
2-234
Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode
Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)

To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of
firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician
2-235
Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode
Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-LVUP

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):
F-2-430
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (LOCLFIRM (1)):

F-2-432
F-2-431
Note:
In order to use manual update of the remote UI, firmware for manual update is required.
Since firmware update is not supposed to be done by users at this point, we have no
plan to provide dedicated firmware. Just in case it becomes necessary to support such
update on the host machine side, the default value of LOCLFIRM in service mode is set
to "1". On the RUI, the setting of manual update can be made in the following location.
RUI > Settings/Registration > License/Other > Register/Update Software > Update
Firmware > Manual Update
F-2-433
2-235
2-236
F-2-434
F-2-435
2-236
Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting
System Management Operations
2-237
Various Setting
Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.
F-2-437
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
[Delivery Server URL]:
Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif"
F-2-436
F-2-438
2-237
2-238
Setting Log Level
[Delivery Server Local CDS]
This section describes how to set system log levels.

F-2-439
Note:
number.
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service
mode.
The URL setting of the local CDS server can be made through the following 2 methods:
- Manual input on this screen
- Distribute the setting information from Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in),
and remotely make the setting.
F-2-440
set.
F-2-441
2-238
Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-239
Displaying Logs
5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list.
Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
F-2-442
[Log Level]:

Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].

See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Level
Trace
Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
0
1
2
3
4
Log Output
Important Message Ordinary Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
System Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-110
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output
Trace
Information
Important Message
Ordinary Error
System Error
Description
Detailed logs for debug
Logs related to operations done on the system
Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Logs for ordinary errors
Logs for internal system errors
F-2-443
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.
2-239
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
2-240
6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
F-2-444
5. Press [Display Update Logs] button.
F-2-446
F-2-445
2-240
System Logs
2-241
5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.

F-2-449
6. Updater internal logs are displayed.

F-2-447
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
F-2-450
F-2-448
2-241
Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test
NOTE:
See the section of "Debug Logs" under Version Upgrade via CDS, Version Upgrade
of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for more detailed information.
2-242
Communication Test
F-2-451
4.
Press [Test Communication] button.
2-242
2-243
F-2-452
F-2-454

Caution:
Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS.
F-2-453
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
2-243
Technology > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices
Maintenance
Upgrading Updater
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See
the section of Version upgrade , Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for how to
update firmware.
The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded
version.
2-244
How to Replace Controller Boards
The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced.
Main Controller Board PCB 1
No steps follow.
Main Controller Board PCB 2 (including SRAM)
The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See
"Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.
Formatting Hard Disk

Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP
Service Manual for further information.
How to Replace Devices

All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Preparation" in chapter 2
of this manual for details.
The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See "Preparation" in

chapter 2 of this manual for details.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.
Technology > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices
2-244
Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-245
FAQ
No.4
Q: In the course of UGW-linked download, what will happen if the user downloads the
FAQ on Installing Firmware
firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW-linked
download before?
No.1
A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW-linked download will be
Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?
overridden by the subsequently downloaded one.
A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below.
This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
If download and update are performed consecutively, firmware cant be downgraded.

Distribution Method
The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode-linked download and UGWlinked download can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
Downgrade Possibility
UGW-linked Download and Update

UGW-linked Download
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual)
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic)
cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service technician.
No
Yes
Yes
No
No.5
Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
T-2-111
schedule has been set in manual download and update?

A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing
No.2
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in manual download and update
compared to update via SST?
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.
schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
valid.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in manual download and
update compared to update via SST (It depend on network environment.).
No.6
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, manual download and update
Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?
takes less time compared to update via SST because updating the firmware to multiple
A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
devices can be executed simultaneously.
service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after UGW-linked download
and update done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as
No.7
Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
firmware version?
A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion.
technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See "Troubleshooting on
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find
Firmware Installation" in chapter 6 of this manual for details.
the distribution status per device as shown in the search result.

No.8
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware
again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail.
The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.
Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-245
Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
2-246
FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
No.9
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
FAQ on the Number of Devices That Can Be Managed
A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown.
Q: How many devices can be managed by 1 set of DFU Plug-in + Local CSD?
A: Up to 1000 devices can be registered. However, only up to 5 updaters can access the
local CSD at a time.
FAQ on Firmware Distribution Task

Q: If the version of the firmware on the local CDS is the same with or older
than the firmware on the device, what will occur when firmware update is
performed? (Will an error occur because firmware to be distributed does not
exist?)
A: The firmware will not be updated, and the result will be "normally completed".
FAQ on Firmware Update Process

Q: Won't timer shutdown occur during a firmware update process?
A: Updater deactivates the timer shutdown function at the start of a firmware update
process. Therefore shutdown will not occur during update.
F-2-455
No.10
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
such a notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with ,
(comma) or ; (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
Operation during Firmware Update

Q: Can the following operations be performed during device firmware update?
Automatic timer shutdown
Shutdown from the local UI
Reboot from the remote UI
Switching between authentication applications from SMS
A: Updater deactivates the following functions during device firmware update.
Timer shutdown
Shutdown from the local UI
No.11
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
Reboot from the remote UI

Access to SMS
on the network environment.
Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
2-246
Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-247
FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
FAQ on General Matters of Updater
No.1
No.1
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free
Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?

A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
space?
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the
For updating firmware
required space against free space to judge installation availability.

No.2
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application?
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.
COPIER >
FUNCTION

CDSUGW
CDS-CTL
No.3
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled?
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via
Local CDS
CDS-FIRM
Enabling
Setting
[Update
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Button of User
HQ
Mode
LOCLFIRM
LCDSFLG
Enabling
[Manual
Update]
Button of
User Mode
(Remote UI)
Enabling
[Local CDS]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-112
2-247
2-248
For install Application

Installation Method
Network Settings

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-113
No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode.
Masking Firmware Installation
Setting Device Service Mode
(Level 1)
(Level 1)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM

(1 -> 0)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
(1 -> 0)
Masking Application Installation

(Level 1)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP

(1 -> 0)
No.3
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
A: Yes. During the communication test, Cancel button is displayed.
2-248
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
DCM
2-249
1) Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier.
2) Reboot the Host machine.
3) Import the DCM data of the user mode.
DCM
As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export
Overview
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the setting values (of user
mode and service mode). In terms of the description in the Users Guide, it is synonymous
with "Import/Export All". Service mode setting values can be backed up/restored from the top
screen of service mode.
and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it
ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
Data to which no password is set when exporting service mode cannot be loaded
from collective import from RUI. When assuming to perform collective import from RUI,
password must be set to data to be exported.
Following limitations are applied to password for DCM data:
By the conventional method for backing up SRAM of the Main Controller 2, data could be
Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
backed up/restored only for the same machine. DCM supports the following 3 patterns.
No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency)
No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
set is allowed only for service mode.)

A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple
machines when replacing a host machine)
A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model)
Where data is stored

Store the backup data in the following location.
User > PC (RUI)
Password is case sensitive.

At the time of following setting, Host matchine does not recognize USB memory.The DCM
function is not usable, too.
Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP
Driver for External USB Device = On
Service > USB memory device/HDD of the machine (top screen of service mode)
Restrictions about import/export
Setting values that can be backed up
An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed;
The values changed by the user under [Settings/Registration] and those specified in service
mode can be backed up.
Only setting values are backed up. Image data such as scanned image cannot be backed up.
Setting values under [Settings/Registration]
Service mode setting values
Send job,
Forwarding job,
FAX reception job,
IFAX reception job
If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as;
UI is locked, or a print job is cleared by reboot after import. So it requires careful operation.
General limitations on DCM
A device rejects an import/ export request during shut-down.
With iR-ADV C52xx series, service mode for FAX cannot be migrated.
If this function is executed with device information distribution or RUI import/ export
With DCM, stored data, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated.
A .dcm file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted.
Only 2 files at a maximum are stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the old
.dcm files are deleted from the oldest.
Continuous import is not guaranteed. After importing a file, the machine must be restarted.
If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not imported.
When importing DCM file in service mode and user mode separately, perform it in the
following procedures.
(conventional function) simultaneously, the first coming job takes priority and they are
controlled exclusively.
If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS Updater simultaneously, a
firmware update process takes priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by reboot.
When error code is issued, this function ends with error.
If the display language differs between export and import, a setting value of a text corrupts
in some cases. The character corruption can be solved by changing the display language
to the appropriate one.
2-249
2-250
Import/Export All from remote UI

The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case
Settings/Registration Basic Information
Box Settings
Department ID Management Settings
Main Menu Settings
Note:
Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the
setting in the following service mode.
Service mode L1 > Copier > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide the service mode settings. (Def.)
[1]: Display the service mode settings.
Favorite Settings
Address Book
Forwarding Settings
Quick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting Information
Collective Import Using Data Collectively Exported from RUI
Paper Type Management Settings
For the reason of security, it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from
User Access Control for Advanced Space
service mode without user's permission. Because of that, it cannot be exported due to the
Web Access Settings

Service Mode Settings(Display/hide of the service mode settings on the export screen)
specification However, it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from
RUI.
Preparation
PC and web browser
USB memory device to store the data of reference machine
Overall flow
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine.
2. Export the data of reference machine including service mode from RUI.
3. Copy the data to the root of the USB memory device using a PC.
4. Connect the USB memory device to the copy destination machine.
5. Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode.
F-2-456
2-250
2-251
The following cases may be possible for the Import All function.
Setting Information
Case A:Importing all to your machine (Restoring the settings information to your machine for
Case A Case B Case C

IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
Yes
Yes
Yes
IP Address
Yes
No
No
C5250/C5250i/C5240i/C5235i)
Subnet Mask
Yes
Yes
Yes
Case C:Importing all to the different model machine that supports the Import All function
Gateway Address
Yes
Yes
Yes
DHCP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
RARP
Yes
Yes
Yes
BOOTP
Yes
Yes
Yes
DHCP Option Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use IPv6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Stateless Address
Yes
Settings
Manual Address Settings Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Use DHCPv6
Yes
Yes
Yes
DNS Server Address

Yes
Settings
DNS Host/Domain Name Yes
Settings
DNS Dynamic Update
Yes
Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
backups)
IP Address Settings
Case B:Importing all to the same model machine (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5255i/
Setting Information
Preferences
Paper Settings
Paper Settings
Yes
Register Custom Size
Yes
Yes
No
Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)
Timer/Energy
Settings
Network
Copy Screen Display Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Fax Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Store Location Display Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message
Yes
Yes
Yes
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Paper Screen Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
mm/Inch Entry Switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Remaining Toner Error Message
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Format
Yes
Yes
Yes
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Reset Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Function After Auto Reset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Shutdown Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Sleep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes Yes
Yes
Yes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv6 Settings
DNS Settings
WINS Settings
Yes
Yes
LPD Print Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
RAW Print Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
SNTP Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
FTP Print Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
WSD Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use HTTP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use WebDAV Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Proxy Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
NetWare Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
AppleTalk Settings
Yes
No
No
SMB Server Settings
Yes
No
No
SNMP Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dedicated Port Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Spool Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Startup Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ethernet Driver Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-251
Setting Information
2-252
Firewall Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
External Interface USB Settings
Yes
Yes
Accessibility
Key Repetition Settings
Yes
Reversed Display (Color)
Yes
Function
Settings
Common
Copy

Auto Collate
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Orientation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Color Settings for Copy
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Common Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjust Image
Quality
Setting Information
Send
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
Correct Density
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Unit Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Full Color Printing Vividness Settings
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fine Adjust Zoom
Yes
No
No
Communication SMTP RX
Settings
POP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Paper Feed Settings
Yes
Yes
No
SMTP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
E-Mail Address
Yes
No
No
POP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
POP Login Name
Yes
No
No
POP Password
Yes
No
No
POP Interval
Print Settings
Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to
Black
Output Report Default Settings
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Superimpose Image Quality Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Characters for Page No./

Watermark
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scan Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Streak Prevention
Yes
Yes
No
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Yes
Yes
Yes
Feeder Black Scan Speed/Image Qlty.

Priority
LTRR/STMT Original Selection
Yes
Yes
No
Default Subject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Yes
Yes
No
Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Online
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Offline
Yes
Yes
Yes
High Compression Image Quality Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Compact PDF Settings for Text Original
Yes
Yes
Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Generate File
Yes
Authent./Encryption
Full Mode TX Timeout
Yes
Yes
Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Send via Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow MDN Not via Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OOXML Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail

Addresses
Fax Settings
Include Background Images in Word File
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default Screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
Specify Minimum PDF Version
Yes
Yes
Yes
Change Default Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Format PDF to PDF/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Options Shortcuts
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optimize PDF for Web
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Sender Name (TTI)
Yes
Yes
Yes
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Yes
Yes
Yes
ECM TX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set Authentication Method
Yes
Yes
Set Pause Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Redial
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-252
Setting Information
Secure Print
Yes
Yes
Device Information Delivery Settings
Fax TX Report
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Destinations
Yes
Yes
No
Fax Activity Report
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set Auto Delivery
Yes
Yes
No
Set Line
Yes
Line 1 to Line 2
Yes
Yes
Restrict Receiving Device Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Unit Telephone Yes

Number
Register Unit Name
Yes
No
No
Restrict Receiving for Each Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Report Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Line Type
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Job Status Before Authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select TX Line
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Log
Yes
Yes
Yes
TX Start Speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Audit Log Retrieval
R-Key Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Fax TX Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Fax Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mail Box Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Advanced Space Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Network Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memory Media Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Simple Authentication Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Change Default Display of Address Book
Yes
Yes
Yes
Address Book PIN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manage Address Book Access Numbers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register LDAP Server
Yes
Yes
No
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions
Yes
Yes
No
Acquire Remote Acquire Address Book

Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Communication Timeout
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Make Remote
Make Address Book Open
Add. Book Open
Management Device
Device Information Settings
Settings
Management
Yes
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs

Set
Destination
Setting Information
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Receive/Forward Common Settings

Store/Access
Files
2-253
License/Other
Data
Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2 Yes
Yes
Yes
Message Board/Support Link
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Operation Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Back Up/Restore Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
HDD Data Complete Deletion
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Store/Access
Mail Box Settings
Yes
Files
Mail Box (Print) Color Balance (Options) Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Advanced Space Custom (Scan Size)

(Scan)
User
System Manager
Management
Information Settings
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Box Settings Function Settings Receive/ForwardCommon Settings
Access Stored
Files
Scan and Store
Department ID Management
Management Settings
Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Main Menu
Settings
Main Menu
Settings
Setting File
Register PIN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Favorite
Settings
Copy
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Yes
Yes
No
Send
Yes
Yes
No
Register Options Shortcuts (Regular Copy) Yes
Yes
No
Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Yes
Yes
No
Common Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Store/Access
Common Settings
Files
Copy Basic
Color Balance (Options)
Features Screen
2-253
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
Setting Information
Address Book Set Destination

Yes
Yes
Yes
Rename Address List
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register One-Touch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Forwarding
Settings
Function Settings Receive/ForwardCommon Settings
Quick Menu
Settings
Quick Menu
Settings
MEAP
Application
Setting
Information
iW Function Flow Flow Data File
Button File
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-254
Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
Compatibility level (Lv)
Description
Not supported.
Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only.

Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.
No
Yes
Can import to a device of a same model.
Can import to a device of a different model also.

T-2-115
Operation Setting File
Paper Type
Management
Settings
User Access
Control for
Advanced
Space
Web Access
Settings
MEAP User
Data
Setting
Information
MEAP Application Data
Setting
Information
Preferences
Paper Settings
Yes
Yes
DCM list for Service Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJ-X
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJ-S
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y-DF
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
STRD-POS
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJ-X-MG
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJY-DF2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y-MG
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
W-PLT-X
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
W-PLT-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
W-PLT-Z
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
SH-TRGT
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
100-RG
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
100-GB
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTAR-R
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTAR-G
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTAR-B
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M4
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M5
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M6
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M7
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M8
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M9
Yes
Paper Type Management Yes

Settings
Integrated Authentication Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Authentication/Operation Log Management Yes
Yes
Yes
Favorites
Yes
Yes
Yes
Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-114
Small
Import
User Access
User List
Control for
Advanced Space
Web Access
Settings
Yes
Lev1
Lev2
Lev3
2-254
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-255
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Lev3
Import
Lev1
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-B10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-G2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-G10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S4
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S5
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M11
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S6
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-M12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S7
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S8
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S11
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S9
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF2-S12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
100DF2GB
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
100DF2RG
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M11
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2R2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2R10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2B2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S11
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2B10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2G2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2K2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2G10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH2K10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
CCD-CHNG
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-K2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-K10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTAR-BW
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTBK-G
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M4
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTBK-B
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M5
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTBK-R
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M6
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
CCD-CHG2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M7
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFTBK-BW
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M8
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-H-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-M9
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-H-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-H-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-HS-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-HS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S4
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-HS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S5
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-V-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S6
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-V-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S7
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-V-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S8
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-H-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
MTF-S9
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-V-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-R2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
REG-HS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-R10
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
MAG-H
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CCD
DFCH-B2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
IMG-REG
MAG-V
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-255
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-256
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SGNL-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
BLANK
BLANK-R
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SGNL-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
BLANK
BLANK-B
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SGNL-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VCONT-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
REF-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VCONT-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
REF-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VCONT-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
REF-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VCONT-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SIGG-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VBACK-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SIGG-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VBACK-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SIGG-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VBACK-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SIGG-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
VBACK-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
SGNL-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
PT-VCT-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
T-SPLY-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
PT-VCT-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
T-SPLY-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
PT-VCT-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
T-SPLY-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
V-CONT
PT-VCT-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
T-SPLY-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
PASCAL
OFST-P-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMAX-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
PASCAL
OFST-P-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMAX-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
PASCAL
OFST-P-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMAX-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
PASCAL
OFST-P-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
P-TG-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
ADJ-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
P-TG-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
ADJ-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
P-TG-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
ADJ-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
P-TG-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
ADJ-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMAX-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
OFST-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
P-ALPHA
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
OFST-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
REF-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
OFST-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-HY
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
OFST-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-HM
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
LD-OFS-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-HC
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
LD-OFS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-HK
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
LD-OFS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-LY
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
LD-OFS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-LM
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
MD-OFS-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-LC
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
MD-OFS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
DMLMT-LK
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
MD-OFS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
CONT-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
MD-OFS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
CONT-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
HD-OFS-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
CONT-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
HD-OFS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
DENS
CONT-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
HD-OFS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
BLANK
BLANK-T
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
HD-OFS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
BLANK
BLANK-L
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PL-OFS-Y
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
2-256
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-257
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Lev3
Import
Lev1
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PL-OFS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-N12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PL-OFS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-N22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PL-OFS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-H12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PM-OFS-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-H22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PM-OFS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-UH12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PM-OFS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-UH22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PM-OFS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-P12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PH-OFS-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-P22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PH-OFS-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-N13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PH-OFS-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-N23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
COLOR
PH-OFS-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-H13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGY
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-H23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGM
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-UH13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGC
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-UH23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGK
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-P13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGY2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-P23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGM2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-O1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGC2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-O12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
DIS-TGK2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-O13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTAC-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-HN2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTAC-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGKT
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTAC-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-T1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTAC-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-T2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTACY2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-T12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTACM2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-T22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTACC2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-T13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-PRI
OFSTACK2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-T23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGY
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-R1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGM
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-R2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGC
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-R12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGK1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-R22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-N1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-R13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-N2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-R23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-P1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-HN1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-P2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-HN12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-H1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-HN22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-H2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-HN13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-UH1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-HN23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-UH2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-SH1
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-257
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-258
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
Lev3
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-SH2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
LP-FEED1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-SH12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
LP-MULT1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-SH22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
LP-DUP1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-SH13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
REG-SPD
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-E1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CST-ADJ
MF-A4R
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-E2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CST-ADJ
MF-A6R
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-E12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
CST-ADJ
MF-A4
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-E22
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
SEG-ADJ
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-E13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
K-ADJ
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-E23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-ADJ
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-SH23
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-EN
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
2TR-OFF
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-CNT
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGY2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-EN2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGM2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-CNT2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGC2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
REOS-PG
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TK12
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
SEG-ADJ3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGY3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
K-ADJ3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGM3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-ADJ3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TGC3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-EN3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TK13
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
ACS-CNT3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TK42
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
SH-ADJ
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
HV-TR
1TR-TK43
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
MISC
SH-ADJ2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
REGIST
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
EXP-LED
PR-EXP-Y
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
EXP-LED
PR-EXP-M
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C2
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
EXP-LED
PR-EXP-C
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C3
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
EXP-LED
PR-EXP-K
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C4
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION INSTALL
KEY
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-MF
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION INSTALL
E-RDS
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-DK
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION INSTALL
RGW-PORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1RE
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION INSTALL
RGW-ADR
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C2RE
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION INSTALL
CDS-CTL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C3RE
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION INSTALL
BIT-SVC
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C4RE
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION SYSTEM
DEBUG-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-DKRE
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION MISC-R
1PCLBUDR
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
ADJ-MFRE
Yes
COPIER
FUNCTION MISC-R
1PCLBOVR
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
REG-THCK
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
REG-OHT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SCANSLCT
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
REG-DUP1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
DH-SW
Yes
COPIER
ADJUST
FEED-ADJ
REG-DUP2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SENS-CNF
Yes
2-258
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-259
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
Lev3
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
CONFIG
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
WEBV-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
W/SCNR
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
COMP-PRT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
INTROT-1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ARCDT-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
INTROT-2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SJOB-CL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
INTROT-T
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
USB-RCNT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
DMAX-SW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MIBCOUNT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
BK-4CSW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MEAP-PRI
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MODELSZ2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
PSWD-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
DELV-FAN
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SM-PSWD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
FXWRNLVL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
RPT2SIDE
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
PT-W-SET
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
CDS-FIRM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
DELV-FN2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
CDS-MEAP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
UNLMTBND
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
CDS-UGW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
PSCL-MS
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
LOCLFIRM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
DMX-DISP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
RSHDW-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
T-DLV-BK
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MC-FANSW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
JM-ERR-D
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
BXNUPLOG
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
JM-ERR-R
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ORG-LGL
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ORG-LTR
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
JLK-PWSC
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ORG-LTRR
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
FAX-INT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ORG-LDR
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
CDS-LVUP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ORG-B5
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
AMSOFFSW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
BASE-SW
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
UA-OFFSW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
KSIZE-SW
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
LCDSFLG
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
ORG-A4R
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
BXSHIFT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
CARD-RNG
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
HOME-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
W/RAID
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
NO-LGOUT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
STND-PNL
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
T-LW-LVL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
INVALPDL
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
T-CRG-SW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
IMGCNTPR
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
DRM-CNTR
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
PDL-Z-LG
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
CNTCNFSW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MIB-NVTA
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
MEAP-DSP
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
MIB-EXT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-COPY
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SVC-RUI
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-BOX
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
BUSI-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SDLMTWRN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SVMD-ENT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-SEND
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
PDF-RDCT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-FAX
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
REBOOTSW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
NWERR-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FNC-SW
SJB-UNW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UISW-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-259
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-260
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
Lev3
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
FXMSG-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
WUEV-INT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
ANIM-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
WUEV-POT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-PRINT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
WUEV-RTR
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
IMGC-ADJ
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
WUEN-LIV
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-RSCAN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
DHCP-12
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-EPRNT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
DHCP-81
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-WEB
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IFX-CHIG
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-HOLD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
DNSTRANS
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
TNR-WARN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
PROXYRES
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
RMT-CNSL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
WOLTRANS
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-SBOX
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
802XTOUT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-MEM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IKERETRY
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-NAVI
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
SPDALDEL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
FCOT-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NCONF-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
UI-CUSTM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IKEINTVL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
SCT-BTN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IPSDEBLV
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
USER-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
SP-LINK
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
SDTM-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
AFS-JOB
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
DSPLY-SW
SDWK-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
AFC-EVNT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
RAW-DATA
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
ILOGMODE
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IFAX-LIM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
ILOGKEEP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
SMTPTXPN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IPTBROAD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
SMTPRXPN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
PFWFTPRT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
POP3PN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
IPMTU
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
FTPTXPN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
DDNSINTV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
STS-PORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ENV-SET
ENVP-INT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
CMD-PORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
EVLP-SPD
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NS-CMD5
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
EVLP-FS
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NS-GSAPI
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-K2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NS-NTLM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-N3
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NS-PLNWS
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-Y3
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NS-PLN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-MO
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
NS-LGN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-10
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
MEAP-PN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-DL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
CHNG-STS
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
MFENV-C5
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
CHNG-CMD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
TFL-RTC
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
MEAP-SSL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
FEED-SW
USZ-FEED
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
LPD-PORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-SPD
FX-D-TMP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
NETWORK
WUEV-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-SPD
FIX-ROT
Yes
Yes
2-260
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-SPD
COPIER
OPTION
COPIER
OPTION
COPIER
Lev1
Lev2
2-261
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
ARC-INT1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
PCHINT-1
Yes
IMG-SPD
ARC-INT2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
PCHINT-V
Yes
IMG-RDR
DFDST-L1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DELV-THY
Yes
OPTION
IMG-RDR
DFDST-L2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DELV-THC
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-RDR
DF2DSTL1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DELV-THM
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-RDR
DF2DSTL2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DELV-THK
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
PASCAL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
ADJ-VPP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
TMC-SLCT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
PAP-W-EN
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
DH-MODE
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
PTN-LVL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
DH-TMG
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DMX-OF-Y
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
REDU-CNT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DMX-OF-M
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
VP-ART
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DMX-OF-C
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
VP-TXT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DMX-OF-K
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
P-ALPHA
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DRM-IDL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
AST-SEL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-TR
2TR-RVON
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
REGM-SEL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-TR
ITB-TYPE
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
ERS-SEL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FX-S-TMP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
SCR-SW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
ERS-SEL1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL3
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
ERS-SEL2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL4
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
PSCL-TBL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL5
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
BGE-OFS
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL6
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
SCR-SLCT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
PRN-FLG
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP3
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
SCN-FLG
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP4
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
TMIC-BK
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP5
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
MIX-FLG
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP6
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
REPORT-Z
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXST2-N2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
IFXEML-Z
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXST2-UH
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
BMLNKS-Z
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FN-ENTMP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-MCON
PASCL-TY
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FLYING
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DEVL-VTH
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL7
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
INTPPR-1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL8
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DVTGT-K
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL9
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DVTGT-Y
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TB10
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DVTGT-M
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP7
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DVTGT-C
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP8
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
DEVL-PTH
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TM10
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-DEV
AUTO-DH
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TMP9
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Lev3
Yes
2-261
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-262
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
Lev3
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
THIN-LP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER1
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TMP-TB11
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER2
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXS-TM11
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER3
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
FXTBL-SW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER4
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
PLN-LP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER5
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
IMG-FIX
TRC-LP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER6
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
TEMP-TBL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DATE-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
MF-LG-ST
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CNT-DISP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP3
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
NW-SCAN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP4
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
HDCR-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP5
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JOB-INVL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP6
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
LGSW-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP7
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PR-PSESW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DEV-SP8
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CPRT-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
USEUPTNR
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PCL-COPY
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
DFEJCLED
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CNT-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
SC-L-CNT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
TAB-ACC
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
SCANTYPE
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
BCNT-AST
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CUSTOM
ABK-TOOL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SIZE-DET
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PRJOB-CP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DFLT-CPY
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
MB-CCV
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DFLT-BOX
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CONTROL
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DOC-REM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
TRY-STP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DPT-ID-7
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
P-CRG-LF
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
RUI-RJT
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
FREE-DSP
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COPY-LIM
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
B4-L-CNT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
FREG-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COPY-JOB
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
IFAX-SZL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
OP-SZ-DT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
IFAX-PGD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
TAB-ROT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
TRAY-FLL
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
IDPRN-SW
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PRNT-POS
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
MEAPSAFE
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
AFN-PSWD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PDL-NCSW
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PTJAM-RC
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SLP-SLCT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
PS-MODE
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SNMP-COA
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CNCT-RLZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
STPL-MAX
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER7
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CS-ACC
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SLEEP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SND-RATE
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CTM-S06
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
COUNTER8
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
2C-CT-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-262
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
2-263
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Lev3
Small
Import
Lev1
Lev2
Lev3
COPIER
OPTION
USER
LDAP-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
FAXSTREN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
FROM-OF
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CST
U1-NAME
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DOM-ADD
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CST
U2-NAME
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
FILE-OF
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CST
U3-NAME
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
MAIL-OF
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
CST
U4-NAME
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
IFAX-OF
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
COIN
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
LDAP-DEF
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
DK-P
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
TNRB-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
CARD-SW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CLR-TIM
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
SC-TYPE
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
HDCR-DSW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
CC-SPSW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
BWCL-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
UNIT-PRC
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SCALL-SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
MIN-PRC
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SCALLCMP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
MAX-PRC
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
USBH-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
MIC-TUN
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
USBM-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
SRL-SPSW
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
USBI-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
PDL-THR
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CTCHKDSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
DA-PUCT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
USBB-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
CR-TYPE
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
USBR-DSP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
ACC
STPL-LMT
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
POL-SCAN
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
INT-FACE
IMG-CONT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-SBOX
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
INT-FACE
AP-OPT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-DFAX
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
INT-FACE
AP-ACCNT
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-REP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
INT-FACE
AP-CODE
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-FREP
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
INT-FACE
NWCT-TM
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-BOX
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
DOCST
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-FORM
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
LA-SPEED
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-PREV
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
DOCST2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-PULL
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
LA-SPD2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-PDLB
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
ADJMSCN1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-JOBK
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
ADJMSCN2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-JDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
ADJSSCN1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-RUI
Yes
Yes
Yes
FEEDER
ADJUST
ADJSSCN2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
JA-WEB
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
PNCH-HLE
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
EXP-CRYP
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-F1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SLEEP1SW
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-F2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
CNCL-ATH
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-R1
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
EZY-SCRP
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-R2
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
DMN-MTCH
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-2P
Yes
COPIER
OPTION
USER
SNDSTREN
Yes
Yes
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
SDL-STP
Yes
Yes
2-263
2
Initial screen
Large
Middle
Small
Import
Lev1
SORTER
ADJUST
SDL-ALG
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
ST-ALG1
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
ST-ALG2
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-F3
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-F4
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-R3
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-R4
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
SW-UP-RL
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
PUN-V-RG
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
PRCS-RET
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
UP-CL
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
DW-CL
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
THC-CL
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
THC-PUSH
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
OFST-STC
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
THN-STC
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-P-CH
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
TRY-NIS
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
TRY-SU
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
FIN-NIS
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
1SHT-SHF
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
SDL-SWCH
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
SDL-ALM
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
SFT-AMT1
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
SFT-AMT2
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
STP-NTN
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
INSTP-F1
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
INSTP-R1
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
THN-STCL
Yes
SORTER
ADJUST
DSTP-F1
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
BLNK-SW
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
MD-SPRTN
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
BUFF-SW
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
PRCS-SP1
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
STCR-DWN
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
PRCS-SP3
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
NSRT-STC
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
THN-TRSW
Yes
SORTER
OPTION
SWGUP-SW
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
T-2-116
2-264
2-264
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
Import/export by service mode (external)
2-265
2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP.
The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting
values in service mode. With export by which data is collected from the machine, service
mode setting values can be backed up. With import, data backed up from service mode and
that backed up from remote UI can be restored.
The save destination of backup data can be selected from either a USB memory device or
HDD of the machine.
Export
Preparation
F-2-458
USB memory device
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
* Required when exporting to an external USB memory device.

It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
Overall flow
Select the save destination between the internal HDD or external USB memory device
depending on the use case.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Register password
3. Export to external USB memory device
4. Remove USB memory device
Exporting data to an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device and check that it has been mounted. (When using the
external USB memory device)
F-2-459
4. When saving to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
F-2-457
2-265
2-266
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password

No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
7. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
F-2-460
5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-463
8. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-.
F-2-461
6. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.
F-2-464
9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
F-2-462
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
2-266
2-267
5. Remove USB memory device
6. Specification of export file name
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device. (When using the external USB memory device)
2. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model
Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
S/N
Main controller
firm ware version
DCM File format
F-2-466
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
DCM Job
management number
F-2-465
Import
Preparation
USB memory device
* Required when importing from an external USB memory device.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance.
Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB memory device.
Do not change the extension from .dcm. (only .dcm files can be recognized.)
It is desirable to connect the USB memory device before entering service mode.
Overall flow
F-2-467
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed
4. Import from external USB memory device
2-267
4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
F-2-468
5. The names of .dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed.
2-268
6. Select SELECT.
F-2-470
7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press
OK.
F-2-471
F-2-469
2-268
2-269
8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-474
F-2-472
Note:
Specification of file selection display
Note:
"*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
USB memory device: Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen.
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
10. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-475
F-2-473
2-269
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-270
Press <-.
Import/export by service mode (internal)

When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen
of service mode, service mode settings can be saved. Setting values of Main Controller
2, Reader Controller, DC Controller, etc. can be collectively saved. It can be used when
recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for
troubleshooting, etc.
Note:
DCM must not be used when replacing a PCB.
Be sure to use a method such as backup of SRAM of the Main Controller 2/service
mode backup of DCON/RCON.
DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values. There is still necessary
information other than setting values when replacing a PCB.
SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values.
F-2-476
12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
Export
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for exporting data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Procedure for backing up data to the HDD of the machine

F-2-477
F-2-478
2-270
2-271
F-2-481
F-2-479
3. When saving to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
F-2-482
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password
4. The names of .dcm files saved in the internal HDD are displayed. F-2-480

No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set
is allowed only for service mode.)
2-271
2-272
Import
6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Import from the internal HDD
F-2-483
1. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
Press <-.
F-2-486
2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-484
Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model
Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
S/N
Main controller
firm ware version
DCM File format
DCM Job
management number
F-2-487
F-2-485
2-272
3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
2-273
5. Select PASSWD.
F-2-490
6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected.
F-2-488
4. The names of .dcm files referred to in the internal HDD are displayed.
F-2-491
F-2-489
2-273
2-274
7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-494
F-2-492
Note:
Note:
" *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
HDD : Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen.
F-2-493
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
9. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-495
2-274
2-275
Press <-.
OK
F-2-496
2-275
Periodical Service
Periodical Service
Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning

Consumable
Parts
Parts
Cleaning
Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts
3-2
Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts

: Replacement : Cleaning : Inspection
9
10
11
12
Part Name
Body
Image Formation
System
Dust-blocking glass
Dust-blocking glass cleaning pad
Developing unit (Y)
Developing unit (M)
Developing unit (C)
Developing unit (Bk)
Primary transfer roller (Color)
Primary transfer roller (Bk)
FL2-9476
FM4-8351
FM4-8352
FM4-8353
FM4-8354
FC0-0257
FC0-0257
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Secondary transfer inner roller
FC8-4402

Transfer separation guide unit
ITB (intermediary transfer belt)
13
Patch sensor
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ITB cleaning blade

Film unit (100V)
Film unit (120V)
Film unit (230V)
Pressure roller
Fixing bearing
Shutter cover
Fixing separation guide
Fixing System
Part No
Counter
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DV-UNT-Y
DV-UNT-M
DV-UNT-C
DV-UNT-K
TR-ROLC
TR-ROLK
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC0-4878
FM3-8893
FC0-0255
1
1
1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
2TR-ROLL
T/S-UNIT
TR-BLT
Yes
Yes
FM4-7246
FM3-5949
FM3-5950
FM3-5951
FC8-4906
XG9-0172
-
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
PRDC-1
T-CLN-BD
FX-UP-FR
FX-UP-FR
FX-UP-FR
FX-LW-RL
FX-LW-BR
Yes
-
Remark
Reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Category
500K
300K
150K
100K
50K
20K
At installation
Number
No.
Adjustment (Yes/
No)
Interval
Cleaning with Dust-blocking glass Cleaning tool

Replacing when replace ITB cleaning blade
Possible to install to iR-ADV C5051 series.
Replacing when replace secondary transfer outer

roller
Cleaning when replace intermediary transfer belt (ITB)

Clean with lint-free paper moistened with water 3
times in one direction
For 100V
For 120V
For 230V
Cleaning when replace Film Unit

Cleaning when replace Film Unit
3-2
3-3
Part Name
Part No
Counter
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cassette 1 feeding roller

Cassette 2 feeding roller
Cassette 1 separation roller
Cassette 2 separation roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller
FC6-7083
FC6-7083
FC6-6661
FC6-6661
FB1-8581
FC6-6661
1
1
1
1
1
1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
C1-FD-RL
C2-FD-RL
C1-SP-RL
C2-SP-RL
M-PU-RL
M-SP-RL
28
Pickup assembly idler gear
FU0-0043
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

Registration roller
Pre-registration guide
Transparency sensor
Post-fixing roller
Secondary transfer guide
Feeding contact guide
Lightproof Sheet
Toner filter
RH7-7129
-
FC6-9817
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DRBL-1
TN-FIL1
Recycle toner container
FM4-8400
DRBL-1
WSR-TNR
45
Pickup/
Feeding System
Filter
-
FK2-6470
Remark
Reference
Category
500K
300K
150K
100K
50K
20K
At installation
Number
No.
Adjustment (Yes/
No)
Interval
For Chinese model only. Replacing when replace

feeding roller and separation roller.
If necessary cleaning with alcohol
If necessary cleaning with lint-free paper
Cleaning with lint-free paper
If necessary cleaning with lint-free paper
User maintenance. Reference in A4 size, image ratio
5%
T-3-1
Consumable parts in the ITB Unit are compatible with those of iR-ADV C5051 series. However, there is no compatibility between the ITB Unit itself of this machine and that of iR-ADV C5051 series.
Therefore, it is not interchangeable.
3-3
3-4
Toner filter
Recycle toner bottle

Dust-blocking glass cleaning pad
F-3-1
3-4
3-5
Developing unit(Bk)
Developing unit(C)
Developing unit(M)
Developing unit(Y)
Transfer Separation guide unit
ITB
Secondary transfer inner roller

ITB cleaning blade

F-3-2
3-5
3-6
Fixing bearing
Roller pressure
Fixing bearing
Film unit(100V)
(120V)
(230V)
F-3-3
3-6
3-7
Multi-Purpose Tray
Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray
Separation Roller
Cassette feeding 1 roller
Pickup idler gear
Cassette feeding 2 roller
Cassette separation 1 roller
Cassette separation 2 roller

Pickup idler gear
F-3-4
3-7
Periodical Service > Cleaning Parts
3-8
Cleaning Parts
[1]
[2]
[3]
[19]
[4]
[5]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[15]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[13]
[13]
Periodical Service > Cleaning Parts
[13]
[13]
[12]
[1]
Second Delivery Roller
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
Third Delivery Roller

Second/Third Delivery Inlet Roller
Fixing Inner Delivery Roller
Duplex Feed Upper Roller
Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly
Duplex Feed Lower Roller
Registration Roller
Pre-registration Guide Assembly
Lightproof Sheet
Transparency Sensor
Dust-blocking Glass
Secondary Transfar Guide Assembly
Feed Contact Point Guide Assembly
Shutter cover
Fixing separation guide
Post-Fixing Roller
First Delivery Roller
[11]
3-8
of Parts
List
Controller
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
System
Fixing
Feed System
Pickup
Option
to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption

Data
Board
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Cover
List of Parts
4-2
No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
List of Cover
[21]
[20]
[1]
[19]
[2]
[3]
[18]
[4]
[5]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[7]
[15]
[8]
Name
Glass retainer (Right)
Reader front cover
Control panel under cover
Control panel upper cover
Control panel side cover 1
Control panel side cover 2
Front right cover
Front upper cover
Toner replacement cover
Front cover
Left grip cover
Left duct cover
Left lower cover
Left upper cover
Inner bottom cover
Reader left cover
Glass retainer (Left)
DF base left cover
Glass retainer (Center)
Reader PCB cover
DF base right cover
Service Parts No.
Refarence
FC8-7842
FC8-7818
FC8-7819
FC8-7820
FM3-6104
FM3-6096
FC8-4111
FC8-4123
FC8-4143
FC8-4140
FC8-4138
FC8-4139
FC8-4149
FC8-6115
FC8-6114
T-4-1
[14]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[11]
F-4-1
4-2
No.
[51]
[50]
[49]
[22]
[48]
[23]
[47]
[24]
[46]
[25]
[45]
[44]
[26]
[43]
[42]
[27]
[41]
[40]
[28]
[39]
[29]
[38]
[37]
4-3
[36]
[30]
[35]
[31]
[34]
[33]
[32]
F-4-2
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]
[44]
[45]
[46]
[47]
[48]
[49]
[50]
[51]
Name
Reader rear cover
Reader rear under cover
Left rear sub cover
Left rear cover
Rear cover
Rear lower cover
Filter cover
Right rear cover 1
Conector cover
Right rear cover 2
Heater switch cover
Right rear cover 3
Right lower sub cover 2
Right lower cover
casset right upper sub cover 2
Casset grip
casset right upper cover 2
Right front cover 3
Stack bypass tray sub cover
Right front cover 2
Stack bypass tray
Right front cover 1
Grip
Right output frame cover
Right upper cover
Reader right cover
Service Parts No.
Refarence
FC8-4142
FL3-3167
FL3-3166
FM3-6105
FC8-4130
FC8-5377
FC8-5200
FC0-4877
FC8-4137
FC8-4135
FC8-5298
FC8-5335
FC8-4875
FC8-4922
FC8-4861
FC8-4134
FC8-5105
FC8-4921
FC8-5100
FC8-4153
FC8-4835
FL3-1186
T-4-2
4-3
4-4
[61]
[60]
[52]
[59]
[58]
[57]
[53]
[56]
[54]
[55]
F-4-3
No.
[52]
[53]
[54]
[55]
[56]
[57]
[58]
[59]
[60]
[61]
Name
Inner output cover
Inner right cover
Output tray
Output tray guide
Output stopper
Output frame
Inner rear cover 3
Inner rear cover 2
Inner rear cover 1
Inner output sensor cover
Service Parts No.
Refarence
FC8-4144
FC8-4766
FC8-5363
FC8-4917
FC8-4145
FC8-4915
FC8-4916
T-4-3
4-4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout
4-5
List of Main Unit

Unit Layout
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-4
4-5
4-6
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[19],[20]
[15]
[12]
[16]
[13]
[17]
[18]
F-4-5
4-6
4-7
[21]
[22]
[24]
[26]
[23]
[25]
[27]
[28]
[29]
F-4-6
4-7
4-8
[30]
4-8
No.
[1]
Name
Control Panel
Service Parts No.
4-9
Refarence
FM3-7992
[2]
Recycle toner container
FM4-8400
[3]
Hopper Unit
NPN
[4]
ITB Cleaning Unit
FM3-5932
[5]
ITB Unit
NPN
[6]
Toner container(Bk)
NPN
[7]
Toner container(C)
NPN
[8]
Toner container(M)
NPN
NPN
Not compatible with iR-ADV C5051 series
[9]
Toner container(Y)
[10]
Drum Unit (Bk)
Compatible with iR-ADV C5051 series
[11]
Drum Unit (C)
[12]
Drum Unit (M)
[13]
Drum Unit (Y)
[14]
Developing Assembly (Bk) (C5051/C5045)
FM3-8939
[15]
Developing Assembly (C) (C5051/C5045)
FM3-8979
[16]
Developing Assembly (M) (C5051/C5045)
FM3-8978
[17]
Developing Assembly (Y) (C5051/C5045)
FM3-8977
NPN

iR-ADV C5051/C5045 is compatible with iR-ADV
C5255/C5250.
iR-ADV C5035/C5030 is compatible with iR-ADV
C5240/C5230.
No compatibility with other models.
[18]
Process Unit
[19]
Laser Scanner Unit (C5051/C5045)
FM0-1021
[20]
Laser Scanner Unit (C5035/C5030)
FM3-5425
[21]
Second and Third Delivery Unit
FM3-5999
[22]
Multi-purpose Delivery Unit
FM3-6013
[23]
Right Door Unit
FM3-6006
[24]
First Delivery Unit
FM3-5977
[25]
Fixing Assembly
NPN
[26]
Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
FM3-5935
[27]
Cassette 2 Pickup Unit
FM3-9230
[28]
Cassette 1
NPN
[29]
Cassette 2
NPN
[30]
Main Drive Unit
NPN
T-4-4
4-9
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Clutch / Solenoid
4-10
Clutch / Solenoid
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
F-4-7
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
No.
SL7
SL6
SL5
SL3
SL2
Name
Third delivery flapper solenoid
Second delivery flapper solenoid
First delivery flapper solenoid
Main Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Service Parts No.

FL3-1169
FL3-1169
FL3-4274
FK2-0408
FK2-0408
T-4-5
4-10
4-11
[6]
[7]
[8]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
F-4-8
F-4-9
4-11
INDEX No.
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
No.
CL1
SL1
SL4
CL2
CL3
CL4
CL5
Name
Multi-purpose tray pickup clutch
Registration shutter solenoid
Toner supply clutch (Y)
Toner supply clutch (M)
Toner supply clutch (C)
Toner supply clutch (Bk)
4-12
Main Unit
Device Parts (rear)
Device Parts (rear)
Device Parts (rear)
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Service parts No.

FH6-5076
FK2-6871
FK2-7310
FK2-7285
FK2-7285
FK2-7285
FK2-7285
T-4-6
4-12
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switch
4-13
Switch
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-4-10
4-13
4-14
[8]
[9]
F-4-11
4-14
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
No.
SW5
SW3
SW4
SW9
SW8
SW6
SW7
SW1
SW2
Name
AC interlock switch
DC interlock switch 1
Main power supply switch
Environment switch
4-15
Main Unit
Device Parts (rear)
Device Parts (front)
Device Parts (front)
Cassette
Cassette
Cassette
Cassette
Electric
Electric
Service parts No.

FM3-7800
FM3-7808
FM3-7808
FM3-5933
FM3-5933
FM3-5933
FM3-5933
FM3-7799
FM3-7792
T-4-7
4-15
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor
4-16
Motor
[9]
[10]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[11]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[12]
F-4-12
F-4-13
4-16
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
No.
M20
M16
M17
M18
M19
M9
M10
M11
M12
M21
M27
M28
Name
Duplex feed motor
Cassette 1 pickup motor
Multi-purpose tray motor
Registration motor
Toner container motor (Y)
Toner container motor (M
Toner container motor (C)
Toner container motor (Bk)
Fixing motor
Fixing shutter motor
Laser shutter motor
4-17
Main Unit
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (center)
Service parts No.

FK2-7326
FK2-7326
FK2-7326
FK2-7304
FK2-7327
FK2-7895
FK2-7895
FK2-7895
FK2-7895
FK2-7302
FK2-2069
FK3-2028
T-4-8
4-17
4-18
[13]
[18]
[17]
[15]
[16]
[14]
[25]
[19]
[24]
[23]
[22]
[20]
[21]
F-4-14
4-18
INDEX No.
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
No.
M15
M13
M14
M23
M24
M25
M26
M30
M29
M32
M31
M34
M33
Name
Primary transfer disengagement motor
ITB motor
ITB displacement control motor
First & Second delivery motor
Reverse roller motor
Third delivery motor
Waste toner stirring motor
CBk Scanner Motor (High/Low)
YM Scanner Motor (High/Low)
Image skew correction motor (M
Image skew correction motor (Y)
Image skew correction motor (Bk)
Image skew correction motor (C)
4-19
Main Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
Process Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Service parts No.

FK2-7365
FK2-7300
FK2-7365
FK2-7304
FK2-7304
FK2-7304
FK2-7328
T-4-9
4-19
4-20
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[33]
[32]
[31]
[30]
4-20
INDEX No.
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
No.
M4
M3
M2
M1
M5
M6
M7
M8
4-21
Name
Drum motor (Bk)
Drum motor (C)
Drum motor (M)
Drum motor (Y)
Developing motor (Y)
Developing motor (M)
Developing motor (C)
Developing motor (Bk)
Main Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Service parts No.

FK2-7298
FK2-7298
FK2-7298
FK2-7298
FK2-7303
FK2-7303
FK2-7303
FK2-7303
T-4-10
4-21
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fan
4-22
Fan
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[6]
F-4-15
F-4-16
4-22
4-23
[11]
[12]
[10]
[13]
F-4-17
4-23
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
No.
FM1
FM2
FM9
FM7
FM5
FM10
FM4
FM6
FM8
FM13
FM14
FM11
FM3
Name
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1
Delivery fan 2
Delivery fan 1
Process cartridge fan (front)
Process cartridge fan (rear)
Secondary transfer exhaust fan
Controller fan 2
HDD cooling fan
Controller fan 1
Power supply cooling fan
4-24
Main Unit
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (front)
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Service parts No.

FK3-2013
FK2-3679
FK2-7291
FK3-2016
FK3-2014
FK2-3679
FK2-0360
FK3-2014
FK2-7290
FK2-8372
FK2-7363
FK2-8372
FK2-7286
T-4-11
4-24
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor
4-25
Sensor
[1]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[10]
[3]
[2]
[9]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[11]
[15]
[12]
[14]
[13]
F-4-18
4-25
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
No.
PS43
PS39
PS40
PS57
PS42
PS45
PS30
PS37
PS32
PS31
PS58
PS28
PS26
PS25
PS27
PS24
PS22
PS23
Name
Reverse sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Pre-reverse sensor
Second delivery tray full sensor
Fixing pressure sensor
Fixing shutter position sensor
Fixing shutter HP sensor
ITB displacement sensor 5
ITB steering sensor
Primary transfer disengagement sensor 1
4-26
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
Service parts No.

WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
T-4-12
4-26
[19]
[34]
[30]
[31]
[32]
4-27
[33]
[20]
[29]
[21]
[28]
[43]
[22]
[27]
[24]
[44]
[23]
[35]
[45]
[36]
[25]
[46]
[37]
[38]
[26]
[39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[47]
[48]
[49]
[50]
F-4-19
4-27
INDEX No.
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]
[44]
[45]
[46]
[47]
[48]
[49]
[50]
No.
PS8
TS4
PS4
TS3
PS3
TS2
PS2
PS1
TS1
PS5
PS9
PS10
PS6
PS11
PS7
PS12
UN38
UN37
UN36
UN35
UN34
UN33
UN32
UN31
UN59
UN58
UN57
UN56
TS8
TS7
TS6
TS5
Name
Toner container cam HP sensor (Bk)
Piezo sensor (Bk)
Toner supply sensor (Bk)
Piezo sensor (C)
Toner supply sensor (C)
Piezo sensor (M)
Toner supply sensor (M)
Toner supply sensor (Y)
Piezo sensor (Y)
Toner container cam HP sensor (Y)
Toner cap position sensor (Y)
Toner cap position sensor (M)
Toner container cam HP sensor (M)
Toner cap position sensor (C)
Toner container cam HP sensor (C)
Toner cap position sensor (Bk)
Bk drum encoder sensor 2
C drum encoder sensor 2
M drum encoder sensor 2
Y drum encoder sensor 2
New/old detection fuse (Bk)
New/old detection fuse (C)
New/old detection fuse (M)
New/old detection fuse (Y)
ATR sensor (Bk)
ATR sensor (C)
ATR sensor (M)
ATR sensor (Y)
4-28
Main Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Service Parts No.

WG8-5848
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5848
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5848
WG8-5783
WG8-5848
WG8-5783
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
FM4-9399
T-4-13
4-28
4-29
[52]
[54]
[51]
[53]
[55]
[56]
[57]
[63]
[62]
[66]
[61]
[65]
[67]
[60]
[59]
[58]
[64]
[68]
[69]
[70]
[71]
[72]
F-4-20
4-29
INDEX No.
[51]
[52]
[53]
[54]
[55]
[56]
[57]
[58]
[59]
[60]
[61]
[62]
[63]
[64]
[65]
[66]
[67]
[68]
[69]
[70]
[71]
[72]
No.
PS44
PS20
PS41
PS21
PS34
PS35
PS36
UN47
UN53
UN51
UN49
UN48
PS33
UN50
PS29
UN22
PS17
PS18
PS16
PS15
PS14
PS13
Name
First delivery tray full sensor
Right door sensor
Second & third delivery door sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Patch sensor (front)
Transparency sensor
Patch sensor (center)
Patch sensor (rear)
Registration sensor
Environment sensor 2
Laser shutter sensor
Toner container outer cover sensor
Front door sensor
Toner container inner cover sensor (Bk)
Toner container inner cover sensor (C)
Toner container inner cover sensor (M)
Toner container inner cover sensor (Y)
4-30
Main Unit
Device Parts(center)
2-side Unit
2-side Unit
2-side Unit
Electric
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Service Parts No.

WG8-5783
WG8-5848
WG8-5783
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
FK2-7315
FK2-6470
FK2-7315
WG8-5848
FM3-6049
WG8-5783
FM3-7941
WG8-5848
WG8-5848
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
WG8-5783
T-4-14
4-30
4-31
[75]
[73]
[74]
[76]
[84]
[83]
[77]
[82]
[81]
[78]
[79]
[80]
F-4-21
4-31
INDEX No.
[73]
[74]
[75]
[76]
[77]
[78]
[79]
[80]
[81]
[82]
[83]
[84]
No.
PS19
PS38
UN52
PS47
PS56
PS50
PS53
PS54
PS52
PS51
PS49
PS55
Name
Right lower door sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Multi-purpose tray paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper level sensor A
Cassette 2 paper level sensor B
4-32
Main Unit
2-side Unit
2-side Unit
Service Parts No.

WG8-5848
WG8-5848
FH7-7600
WG8-5783
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
FK2-0149
T-4-15
4-32
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Heater / Other
4-33
Heater / Other
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
F-4-22
4-33
4-34
[8]
[9]
F-4-23
4-34
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
No.
H1
TH1
TP1
TH1
TH1
TH1
H2
SP1
ELCB1
4-35
Name
Fixing heater
Sub thermistor 2
Temperature fuse
Main thermistor 2
Main thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 1
Drum heater (Bk)
Speaker
Leakage breaker
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Process Unit
Electric
Electric
Service Parts No.

FK2-7295 (100/120V) / 7296 (230V)
FK2-0428
FH7-7626 (100/120V) / 7625 (230V)
T-4-16
4-35
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB
4-36
PCB
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[7]
[2]
[1]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
F-4-24
4-36
4
INDEX No.
No.
[1]
UN39
[2]
UN40
[3]
UN41
[4]
UN42
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
C5051/C5045
[11]
UN15
[12]
UN14
[13]
UN13
[14]
UN12
C5035/C5030
[11]
UN15
[12]
UN14
[13]
UN13
[14]
UN12
4-37
Name
Main Unit
Service parts No.
Toner sensor relay PCB (Y)

Toner sensor relay PCB (M)
Toner sensor relay PCB (C)
Toner sensor relay PCB (Bk)
Hub PCB
Ten key PCB
Inverter PCB
CPU PCB
Volume PCB
Sub key PCB
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
FM3-7948
FM3-7948
FM3-7948
FM3-7948
-
Laser driver PCB (C)

Laser driver PCB (Bk)
Laser driver PCB (Y)
Laser driver PCB (M)
Laser Scanner Unit

Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
FM0-1021
FM0-1021
FM0-1021
FM0-1021

Laser Scanner Unit

Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
FM3-5425
FM3-5425
FM3-5425
FM3-5425
T-4-17
4-37
4-38
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[22]
[21]
[20]
[19]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
F-4-25
4-38
INDEX No.
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
No.
UN43
UN44
UN45
UN46
UN24
UN26
UN28
UN30
UN19
UN29
UN21
UN27
UN20
UN25
UN23
Name
Developing sub bias PCB (Y)
Developing sub bias PCB (M)
Developing sub bias PCB (C)
Developing sub bias PCB (Bk)
Y pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
M pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
C pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
Drum unit new/old detection PCB
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
Recycle toner sensor PCB
C pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
Process unit relay PCB
M pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
Y pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
4-39
Main Unit
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Service parts No.

FM3-7945
FM3-7945
FM3-7945
FM3-7945
FM3-7940
FM3-7945
FM3-7949
FM3-7945
FM3-7938
FM3-7945
FM3-7945
T-4-18
4-39
4-40
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[45]
[34]
[44]
[39]
[35]
[36]
[43]
[37]
[38]
[42]
[41]
[40]
F-4-26
4-40
INDEX No.
No.
4-41
Name
Main Unit
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[41]
UN1
UN17
UN3
UN5
UN4
UN10
UN16
UN11
UN9
HDD
Riser PCB
DC controller PCB
HVT 2 PCB
Cassette feed driver PCB
Relay PCB
Drum driver PCB
24V power supply PCB 2
HVT 1 PCB
12V power supply PCB
All-night power supply PCB
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
[42]
UN6
AC driver PCB
Electric
[43]
[44]
[45]
UN2
UN18
-
Feed driver PCB

HVT 3 PCB
Electric
Electric
Electric
Service parts No.

Fk2-8418
FM4-0795
FM4-9390
FM4-0780
FK3-2002
FM4-9392
FM4-9393
FM3-7934
FK3-2001
FK2-6324 (100/120V)
FK2-6325 (230V)
FM4-9394 (C5051/C5045:100V)
FM4-9397 (C5051/C5045:120V)
FM4-9395 (C5051/C5045/C5035/
C5030:100V)
FM4-9396 (C5035/C5030:100V)
FM4-9398 (C5035/C5030:120V)
FM4-9391
FK2-7350
FM4-3830 (C5051)
FM4-3831 (C5045)
FM4-3832 (C5035)
FM4-3833 (C5030)
T-4-19
4-41
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector
4-42
Conector
22
10
21
23
23
1
24
16
12
9
2
23
23
13
4
15
8
6
18
26
17
25
14
28
27
19
20
11
F-4-27
4-42
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
J102
J103
J104
J104
J104
J106
J107
J107
J109
J110
J110
J111
J111
J112
J112
J112
J112
J112
J114
J114
J114
J114
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
4-43
Intermediate Connector
J5066
J5026
J5026
J5026
J5026
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5012
J5012
J5012
J5012
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
J822
J253
J1300
J810
J3002
J271
J251
J311
J313
J654
J653
J656
J655
J42
J42
J42
J42
J657
J863
J864
J853
J854
UN2
UN22
UN50
UN3
UN2
UN4
UN4
UN16
UN16
UN17
UN17
TH1
TH1
TH1
TH1
UN18
UN14
UN15
UN12
UN13
ECO-ID
Feed driver PCB
Cassette feeding Unit-AD1
Feed driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
Main thermistor 1
Main thermistor 2
Sub thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 2
HVT 3 PCB
T-4-20
4-43
1
3
17
4-44
19
18
2
8
4
20
21
16
15
12
13
11
10
14
F-4-28
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
J118
J118
J119
J119
J121
J122
J125
J126
J126
J127
J127
J132
J132
J132
J136
J136
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
J825
J825
J823
J823
J5037
J998
J998
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
J102
J203
J102
J203
J401
J2001
J252
J815
J816
J809
J813
J5042
J5061
J999
J2111
J2111
UN13
UN12
UN15
UN14
UN5
UN6
UN2
SW1
SW1
SW3
SW4

Relay PCB
AC driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Buffer Pass Unit
Inner Finisher
Finisher
Paper Deck Unit-B1
Key Switch Unit
T-4-21
4-44
4-45
32
31
30
29
28
26
25
27
23
12
18
17
15 13
11
20
8
19
14
16
22
24
21
9
10
F-4-29
4-45
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
J254
J254
J254
J254
J254
J255
J255
J255
J255
J255
J255
J255
J255
J256
J256
J256
J257
J257
J257
J258
J258
J258
J258
J258
J258
J258
J258
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Feed driver PCB

Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
4-46
J5051
J5051
J5051
J5051
J5051
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5046
J5046
J5046
J755
J755
J755
J755
J755
J5062
J5062
J5062
J5062
J5086
J5086
J5086
J6056
J6057
J601
J601
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J900
J901
J600
J6111
J6110
J5067
J6032
J6031
J6030
J6029
J6028
J6027
J6026
J6108
J6107
J6106
J6093
J6095
J6094
J6082
J6083
J6072
J6157
J6158
J6066
J6067
J5004
UN19
UN19
UN20
M26
UN21
PS23
PS22
PS58
PS28
PS27
PS26
PS25
PS24
UN49
UN48
UN47
UN51
PS33
UN53
CL1
M18
SL4
M19
M20
FM1
FM2
PS20

Waste toner sensor PCB
ITB steering sensor
Patch sensor (rear)
Registration sensor
Transparency sensor
Multi-purpose tray motor
Bypass tray lifter solenoid
Registration motor
Duplex feed motor
Right door sensor
T-4-22
4-46
4-47
13
20
19
21
22
23
17
27
18
12
31
30
14
16
15
11
25
32
24
29
7
8
10
28
26
34
33
3
6
F-4-30
4-47
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
J260
J260
J260
J260
J261
J262
J262
J262
J262
J262
J262
J262
J262
J262
J263
J263
J263
J264
J264
J264
J264
J264
J264
J264
J265
J265
J265
J265
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Feed driver PCB

Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
Feed driver PCB
4-48
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5031
J5031
J5031
J5012
J5012
J5012
J5012
J5097
J5097
J5106
J5106
J5106
J5110
J5076
J5060
J5060
J5083
J5083
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
J6103
J6102
J6104
J6101
J6084
J6076
J6075
J6074
J6073
J6065
J6089
J6090
J6092
J6078
J6140
J6141
J6142
J6071
J6069
J6068
J6061
J6059
J6091
J6088
J6099
J6062
J6064
J6096
PS31
PS32
PS30
PS37
M21
PS40
PS43
SL7
SL6
SL5
PS42
PS39
PS45
PS57
M25
M24
M23
FM8
FM6
FM5
FM7
M27
PS44
PS41
PS21
FM9
SL1
PS18

Fixing motor
Duplex inlet sensor
Reverse sensor
Pre-reverse sensor
Delivery fan 1
Delivery fan 2
Registration shutter solenoid
Front door sensor
T-4-23
4-48
4-49
29
21
8
11
18
22
19
30
20
12
14
15
10
16
13
17
25
27
23
26
24
31
28
F-4-31
4-49
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
J273
J273
J273
J274
J274
J274
J274
J275
J275
J275
J275
J275
J275
J275
J275
J275
J275
J276
J276
J277
J277
J277
J277
J277
J277
J277
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3

4-50
J5073
J5073
J5074
J5074
J5065
J5065
J5065
J5065
J5065
J5064
J5064
J5064
J5064
J5064
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5068
J5068
J5068
J5054
J5099
J5099
J6080
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
J6060
J6123
J6097
J6127
J6128
J6125
J6126
J6138
J6137
J6136
J6135
J6134
J6133
J6132
J6131
J6130
J6129
J6155
J6156
J6087
J6086
J6085
J6077
J6081
J6171
J5100
M28
FM10
PS29
SW9
SW8
SW7
SW6
SL3
PS56
PS54
PS53
PS50
SL2
PS55
PS52
PS51
PS49
M16
M17
PS34
PS36
PS35
PS38
UN52
PS47
PS19
Laser shutter motor

Fixing inlet sensor
Duplex paper sensor
T-4-24
4-50
4-51
43
44
45
42
41
40
37
39
14
38
34
15
36
35
16
33
27
26
30
25
24
28
23
31
10
22
21
7
9
11
29
12
13
17
32
18
19
3
6
20
4
F-4-32
4-51
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
J303
J303
J303
J303
J304
J304
J304
J305
J305
J305
J305
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J307
J308
J308
J308
J309
J309
J309
J309
J309
J310
J310
J310
J310
J312
J312
J312
J312
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
Drum driver PCB

Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
J5070
J5070
J5070
J5030
J5030
J5030
J5030
J5015
J5018
J5021
J5024
J1180
J1181
J1182
J1184
J5016
J5019
J5022
J5025
4-52
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
J6008
J6007
J6006
J6005
J6004
J6003
J6025
J6011
J6012
J6013
J6015
J6024
J6023
J6022
J6021
J6020
J6019
J6018
J6017
J6010
J6009
J6014
J6016
J6053
J6052
J6050
J6048
J6046
J5017
J5020
J5023
J5035
J2
J5
J4
J3
CL5
CL4
CL3
CL2
M15
M14
M13
M8
M7
M6
M5
UN31
UN32
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN36
UN37
UN38
M1
M4
M3
M2
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
UN39
UN40
UN41
UN42
M9
M12
M11
M10
Toner supply clutch (Bk)

Toner supply clutch (C)
Toner supply clutch (M)
Primary transfer disengagement motor
ITB motor
Drum motor (Y)
Drum motor (Bk)
Drum motor (C)
Drum motor (M)
Toner container motor (Bk)
Toner container motor (M)
T-4-25
4-52
4-53
27
17
23
24
7
13
16
12
6 11
18
9
10
19
21
20
25
15
22
26
14
F-4-33
4-53
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
10
11
11
11
12
13
13
J411
J412
J413
J421
J422
J423
J423
J424
J424
J425
J425
J425
J426
J427
J427
J428
J428
J428
J431
J432
J432
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
4-54
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
14
15
16
18
19
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
J835
J834
J691
J808
J129
J259
J272
J301
J302
J650
J651
J652
J5101
J801
J802
J804
J805
J803
J2001
J6122
J6124
UN11
UN10
UN9
UN1
UN2
UN3
UN4
UN4
UN16
UN17
UN18
UN6
FM3
FM4

24V power supply PCB2
Reader controll PCB
DC controller PCB
Feed driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
HVT 3 PCB
Reader controll PCB
CPU PCB
USB Device Port
Inner Finisher
Cassette feeding Unit
Finisher
AC driver PCB
Power supply cooling fan
Process cartridge fan (rear)
T-4-26
4-54
4-55
19
18
16
15
20
3
9
13
12
22
11
1
6
10
8
21
F-4-34
4-55
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J1001
J1002
J1002
J1003
J1004
J1004
J1005
J1005
J1006
J1006
J1007
J1008
J1009
J1012
J1014
J2001
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
SW5
SW5
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC interlock switch
AC interlock switch
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
4-56
J5099
J5099
J5038
J5006
J5087
J5012
J5007
J5006
J5006
J5087
J5010
J5012
J5007
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
J866
J833
J1102
J1101
J5088
J5039
J5013
J5014
J5102
J5005
J681
J431
SW5
UN10
UN11
H3
H2
H1
H1
TP1
SW1
H4
SW2
UN9
UN5
AC in cable
GND
GND
AC interlock switch
24V power supply PCB2
Drum heater (YMC)
Drum heater (Bk)
Fixing heater
Fixing heater
Temperature fuse
Reader controll PCB
Cassette heater
Environment switch
Cassette heater unit-31/32
Relay PCB
T-4-27
4-56
4-57
13
14
12
10
9
5
8
2
11
4
F-4-35
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
2
3
4
5
5
6
J202
J204
J204
J205
J202
J204
J204
J205
UN12
UN12
UN12
UN12
UN14
UN14
UN14
UN14

KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J103
J6159
J6160
J6161
J103
J6166
J6165
J6167
UN13
M32
M31
M29
UN15
M33
M34
M30

Image skew correction motor (M
Image skew correction motor (Y)
YM Scanner Motor (High/Low)
Image skew correction motor (C)
Image skew correction motor (Bk)
CBk Scanner Motor (High/Low)
T-4-28
4-57
4-58
21
20
17
16
14
13
12
11
10
15
18
19
22
F-4-36
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
9
10
J902
J902
J903
J903
J904
J904
J905
J905
J601
J602
J602
J603
J604
J605
J605
J606
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20

J5093
J5094
J5095
J5096
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
J6114
J5093
J6116
J5094
J6118
J5095
J6120
J5096
J6115
J6147
J6148
J6117
J6119
J6149
J6150
J6121
TS5
UN43
TS6
UN44
TS7
UN45
TS8
UN46
UN23
UN24
UN26
UN25
UN27
UN28
UN30
UN29
ATR sensor (Y)

ATR sensor (M)
ATR sensor (C)
ATR sensor (Bk)
Y pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
Y pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
M pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
M pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
C pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
C pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
T-4-29
4-58
4-59
18
17
14
13
10
9
6
5
4
2
20
3
16
12
8
19
15
11
F-4-37
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
J658
J658
J658
J658
J659
J659
J659
J659
J660
J660
J660
J660
J661
J661
J661
J661
UN39
UN39
UN39
UN39
UN40
UN40
UN40
UN40
UN41
UN41
UN41
UN41
UN42
UN42
UN42
UN42

KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J6154
J6035
J6034
J6033
J6151
J6038
J6037
J6036
J6152
J6041
J6040
J6039
J6153
J6044
J6043
J6042
PS5
PS9
PS1
TS1
PS6
PS10
PS2
TS2
PS7
PS11
PS3
TS3
PS8
PS12
PS4
TS4

Piezo sensor (Y)
Piezo sensor (M)
Piezo sensor (C)
Piezo sensor (Bk)
T-4-30
4-59
30
27
3
1
8
4
26
36
23
2
5
12
11
6
4-60
35
24
25
22
10
16
13
33
28
32
20
31
29
34
18
15
21
14
17
19
F-4-38
4-60
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J11
J13
J13
J15
J17
J19
J20
J20
J21
J1025
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
J18
J23
J24
J1000
J1010
J1010
J1020
J3003
J102
J104
J105
J107
J109
J110
J111

Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
4-61
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
33
34
35
36
-
J103
J101
J7544
J7115
-
FM11
UN1
FM13
FM14
-
UI
USB(H)
USB Device Port
TPM
FLASH PCB
Voice Operation (Option A)
Voice Guidance (Option B)
Controller fan 1
Riser PCB
CPLD WR
Serial Interface Kit
Copu Card Reader Attachment
Signal interface Kit
Additional Memory
Riser PCB
USB(D)
IN
Debug SERIAL
Debu PCB
Image Data Analyzer Board
Bypass PCB
EFI controller (option)
Image Proccesing Sub PCB
Reader controller PCB
DC controller PCB
HDD
HDD
Controller fan 2
HDD cooling fan
T-4-31
4-61
4-62
3
10
F-4-39
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J1001
J1002
J1003
J1004
J1005
J1006
J1007
J1008
J1009
-
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Sub key PCB
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
10
J4001
J2
J1
J3002
J3001
J5001
Mein Controller PCB 1

Mein Controller PCB 1
Sub key PCB
TTP
LCD
LCD
Ten key PCB
Ten key PCB
Volume PCB
T-4-32
4-62
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the HDD > Procedure
Main Controller
4-63
Procedure
1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.
Removing the HDD

Actions before Replacement
Backup the Settings/Registration data.
2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.

1 screw (RS tight; M4)
2 screws (TP; M3)
1 claw
1) Select the following so that the service mode setting values can be exported on remote UI.
Service mode (Lv1) > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT > [1]
x3
2) Execute the collective export on remote UI.

Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All >
Export
Select "Select All", and enter the encryption password. Execute "Start Exporting" to create
a backup file (DCM file).
CAUTION:
Collective export cannot be executed in the following cases.
Job is being executed, or job is being waited for (various functions set by
transmission, forwarding, fax reception, I-FAX reception, report print and timer)
Individual import/export is being executed
The address book is being remotely referenced by another imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
Claw
F-4-40
3) Open the HDD Lid.

1 screw
Device information is being distributed

An error has occurred
Box is being backed up
F-4-41
4-63
4) Disconnect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable from HDD, and move them to
the hole side of the Controller Box.
x2
4-64
6) Remove the plate.

2 screws
x2
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Wire Saddle
F-4-44
F-4-42
5) Remove the HDD Unit.
7) Remove the HDD.

4 screws
2 screws
1 grounding plate
4 spacers
4 vibration-prevention dumpers
x2
HDD
x4
HDD Fixing Plate

F-4-43
F-4-45
4-64
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the HDD > Actions after Replacement
Actions after Replacement
4-65
When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager

1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of the
1) HDD format
1-1) Start the machine in safe mode (turn ON the main power switch while simultaneously
pressing 2+8 keys).
1-2) Execute Formatting All Partitions using SST.
2) Download the system software (refer to Upgrade).
3) Initialize the key/certificate/CA certificate.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4) Turn OFF and then ON the power.
5) Restore the backup data.
Use the remote UI. Follow the steps below to specify the DCM file stored earlier.
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All >
Import
Enter the encryption password entered at exporting, and select "Start Importing". Turn OFF
and then ON the power after importing.
6) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate,
request the user to generate them again.
7) Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust) Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/
Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
leading card which is used for Department ID.

Then, press OK button. (e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter
1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations from
Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings>IP Address
Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information Settings>
System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then, turn OFF and
ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration to device
cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card ID is
displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager.
Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.
Points to Note when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the HDD which
was installed the system software of the other machine (different serial number), be sure to
format the HDD after the installation.
If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
Points to note when using an HDD with system software already installed
Use of an HDD in which the system software of another machine (a machine of a
different serial number) is installed for a troubleshooting is possible if it is an HDD of a
model of iR-ADV C5255 series and later. However, be sure to format it after installing it.
Operation is not guaranteed if it is continued to be used as is.
In addition, an HDD used in iR-ADV C5255 series and later cannot be accessed from a
PC due to enhanced security.
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the HDD > Actions after Replacement
4-65
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Procedure
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
4-66
2) Remove the USB cable and the control panel communication cable.
Preparations
x2
USB Cable

2 screws (TP; M3)
1 claw
Control Panel
Communication Cable
x3
F-4-48
3) Remove the 2 screws and lift the grip.
x2
Claw
Procedure
F-4-46
1) If the Reader is installed, remove the Reader Power Cable.

2 connectors
2 wire saddles
1 cable guide
Grips
F-4-49
4) Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 1.
Reader
power cable
x2
x2
Cable guide
Wire saddles
F-4-50
Connectors
F-4-47
4-66
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Actions before Replacement
4-67
Removing the Main Controller PCB 2
NOTE:
If option PCB is installed, remove it.

Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory device or
CAUTION:
an HDD from download mode.
At installation, lift the grip, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops, then tilt the
grip and install it with 2 screws.
* However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not possible. It is
therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory device.
Temporarily backing up SRAM data to a USB memory device

(recommended)
x2
USB memory device where the system software for this machine has been registered using
the SST
Or, USB memory device formatted as FAT32 which has been checked that it can be
recognized by the host machine
In order to let the USB memory device recognized in service mode, create an empty folder on
Grips
the USB memory device and name the folder with the same name used when registering the
F-4-51
system software for this machine using the SST.

E.g.: iAC5255
1) Service mode (Lv1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK
NOTE:
If the Reader Unit is installed, handle the reader power cable from the connector side,
make the cable slack in the upper area and install it.
Connect the USB memory device where system software of the model to be connected is
stored.
2) The download Mode (USB) will appear on the touch panel. Press the [5] key on the Control
x2
Panel.
Reader power cable
x2
3) The Backup Menu (USB) will appear. Press the [7] key.
Cable guide
Wire saddles
Connectors
Make sure that the Main Controller PCB 1 is fixed to the device.
F-4-52
[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
[7]: SRAM(USB)
[C]: Return to Main Menu
F-4-53
4) Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is stored in the USB memory device.
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Actions before Replacement
4-67
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Preparations
4-68
Preparations
5) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD).

6) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host machine.
Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
CAUTION:
2 rubber caps
If mismatch between the box management information included in the SRAM data and
box data on the HDD occurs, which is caused by starting the machine normally without
restoring SRAM data after replacing the Main Controller 2 PCB, the box management
information is initialized. As a result, box documents on the HDD are deleted.
2 screws
5 claws
Rubber cap
x2
Therefore, be sure to back up the box documents on remote UI.
Claws
Temporarily backing up SRAM data to an HDD (only when the HDD

Data Encryption Kit is not installed)
x5
Rubber cap
2) When the download Menu (HDD) appears, press the [5] key on the Control Panel.
3) When the Backup Menu (HDD) appears, press the [6] key on the Control Panel.
F-4-55
[[[[[ Backup Menu (HDD) ]]]]]]

------------------------------------
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
F-4-54
4) Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is stored in the internal HDD.
CAUTION:
If mismatch between the box management information included in the SRAM data and
box data on the HDD occurs, which is caused by starting the machine normally without
restoring SRAM data after replacing the Main Controller 2 PCB, the box management
information is initialized. As a result, box documents on the HDD are deleted.
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Preparations
4-68
4-69
Procedure
2) If the Reader Unit is installed, remove the reader signal cable.

1 connector
1) If the FAX Unit is installed, remove the connector of communication cable.
F-4-58
F-4-56
3) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.

2 screws
1 screw
1 hook
x2
Hook
Grip
F-4-59
NOTE:
When the option PCB is installed, remove it.
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-4-57
4-69
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Actions after Replacement
4-70
device.
CAUTION:
7) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (USB).
At installation, avoid the harness, hold the grip in raised condition, put the Main
Controller PCB 2 all the way in, tilt the grip, and install it.
When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an HDD

1) After replacing the PCB, start the machine by 2+8 startup.
x2
2) When the download Menu (HDD) appears, press the [8] key on the Control Panel.
3) When the download Menu 2nd (HDD) appears, press the [2] key on the Control Panel.
[[[[[ download Menu 2nd (HDD) ]]]]]]

------------------------------------
Grip
[2]: Restore
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit is installed, install the connector.

Make sure that the Main Controller PCB 2 is fixed to the device.
F-4-61
4) Press the [0] key for confirmation.

5) When the Restore Menu (HDD) appears, press the [2] key on the Control Panel.
[[[[[ Restore Menu (HDD) ]]]]]]
When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an USB memory

device
------------------------------------
[2]: SRAM(HDD)

2) Connect the USB memory device to USB I/F (Host) of the machine.
When the download Menu (USB) appears, press the [8] key on the Control Panel.
3) The download Menu 2nd (USB) will appear. Press the [2] key.
F-4-62
[[[[[ download Menu 2nd (USB) ]]]]]]

------------------------------------
[1]: Service Mode Password Clear

[2]: Restore
6) Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is restored from the internal HDD.
CAUTION:
Do not transfer the following parts to another machine (a machine of a different serial
number.).
F-4-60
The machine will not start up normally, and may become unrecoverable in some cases.
4) Press the [0] key for confirmation.
Main Controller PCB 2 (with the Memory PCB unremoved)
5) The Restore Menu (USB) will appear. Press the [2] key.
Memory PCB
6) Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is restored from the USB memory
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Actions after Replacement
4-70
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Opening the Controller Box > Procedure
Opening the Controller Box
4-71
Procedure
1) When the Reader is installed, remove the reader power cable.
Preparations
2 connectors
2 wire saddles
1 cable guide
3) Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover.
4) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
x2
2 screws
Reader
power cable
1 claw
x2
x2
Cable guide
Wire saddles
Rubber caps
Connectors
Claw
F-4-64
NOTE:
If the Fax Unit is not installed, refer to step 2-1).

If the Fax Unit is installed, refer to step 2-2).
Rear cover
F-4-63
2-1) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box.

2 screws
x2
F-4-65
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Opening the Controller Box > Procedure
4-71
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure
4-72
Removing the DC Controller PCB
2-2) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit.
3 screws

When replacing the DC Controller PCB, execute the following Service Mode to backup the
DC Controller PCB SRAM.
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2).
x3
After ACTIVE is displayed for approx. 2 minutes, OK! is displayed.

After the above execution is completed, turn OFF the main power supply.
Preparations
F-4-66
CAUTION:
Close the Controller Box while pressing the cable with afinger. Check that the cable is
stored when closeing the box.
5) Open the Controller Box.
Procedure
1) Remove the DC Controller PCB
Cable
22 connectors
7 screws
DC Controller PCB
x22
Connectors
x7
F-4-67
F-4-68
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure
4-72
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Power Unit > Preparations
4-73
Removing the Main Power Unit
CAUTION:
There is a connector on the backside of the DC Controller PCB. When removing the DC
Controller PCB, be careful about the connecter.
Connector
Preparations
Remove the Rear Lower Cover.

5) Remove the Connector Cover.
1 screw
CAUTION:
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use the DC
Controller PCB which was used with another machine.
F-4-69
6) When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

1 Reuse Band
6 harness guides
5 connectors
Connectors
Turn ON the main power supply and restore the DC Controller PCB SRAM.
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2).
After the above execution, ACTIVE is displayed for approx. 2 minutes, then OK! is
Connectors
x7
displayed. Restoration is completed now.
Reuse Band
x5
Harness Guides
F-4-70
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Power Unit > Preparations
4-73
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Power Unit > Procedure
4-74
Procedure
7) Remove the Rear Lower Cover.

2 rubber caps
1) Open the Drum Driver Unit.
2 screws
1 screw
2 claws
2 hooks
Drum Driver Unit
x2
Claw
x2
Screw
Claw
Hook
F-4-72
2) Remove the FIN Lattice Connector Unit.

1 wire saddle
Hook
2 connectors
2 screws
1 Protrusion
Wire Saddle
F-4-71
x2
Finisher
Lafficeconnector Unit
Connectors
x2
Protrusion
F-4-73
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Power Unit > Procedure
4-74
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the AC Driver > Procedure
4-75
Removing the AC Driver
3) Pull out the Main Power Unit.

3 connectors
Preparations
3 screws
Connector

Main Power Unit
x3

x3
Procedure
1) Remove all the connector on the PCB and remove the AC Driver.
6 wire saddles
13 connectors (12 pieces for Not Japanese model)
Screw
3 screws
Screw
Wire saddles AC Driver
F-4-74
4) Remove the Main Power Unit.
Screw
x6
13 connectors
4 wire saddles
x13
Screw
x13
x3
Connector
13 Connectors
Wire saddles
12 Connectors
Screw
F-4-76
x4
Wire saddles
Wire saddles
Main power unit

F-4-75
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the AC Driver > Procedure
4-75
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Control Panel > Procedure
Removing the Control Panel
4-76
3) Stand the Control Panel as indicated.
Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Control Panel when pulling it out.
1) Pull out the Control Panel and remove the mold.
x2
Mold
Claws
4) Remove the cover.
Control Panel
F-4-77
2) Remove the stopper.
F-4-79
1 screw
2 Claws
2 screws
Claw
Cover
x2
x2
Stopper
F-4-80
F-4-78
4-76
4-77
5) Remove the cable.

Harness Guide [A]
1 wire saddle
2 connectors
x2
Connectors
[A]
x2
Wire Saddle
F-4-81
4-77
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning Pad > Procedure
Laser Exposure System
4-78
2) Clean the Dust-blocking Glass from the 4 holes of the Waste Toner Container.
Cleaning the Dust-blocking Glass
Dust-blocking glass
cleaning tool
Preparations
1) Open the Front Cover.
F-4-84
Removing the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning Pad

Preparations
Procedure
F-4-82
Procedure
1) Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool.
1) Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool.
F-4-85
F-4-83
2) Remove the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning Pad.
F-4-86
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning Pad > Procedure
4-78
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparations
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
4-79
Remove the ITB Unit

3) Check that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark.
Preparations
(If it is not aligned, adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark.)
1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.
Triangle mark
Triangle mark
ITB sub pressure

release lever
ITB sub pressure

release lever
F-4-89
F-4-87
4) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction until the protrusion of grip is
2) Remove the ITB Cover.
aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure.
2 screws (loosen)
CAUTION:
Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever, check that the Right Lower Cover is
open.
F-4-88
CAUTION:
Do not touch the ITB surface.
ITB pressure release lever
When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is
insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover, which may cause the
damage of the sensor.
F-4-90
4-79
5) Remove the 2 connectors.
4-80
CAUTION:
When pulling out the ITB Unit, it may drop because it does not click at stop position if
pulled out while lifting it. Thus, be careful of pulling it out.
x2
F-4-91
CAUTION:
When pulling out the ITB Unit, be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt. If the ITB Unit is pulled out while
the lever is lowered, the ITB is scraped by the Plate and this may cause to make
scratches on the ITB surface.
6) Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly.
2 screws
Stop label position
ITB pressure
release lever
x2
Click position
Not to lower the ITB Pressure Releace Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt.
F-4-92
4-80
7) Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure, and remove in the direction of the arrow.
4-81
8) Pull out the Process Unit until it stops.

2 screws
x2
F-4-95
F-4-93
CAUTION:
9) Remove the 4 stepped screws fixed on the right and left rails.
When installing the ITB Unit, align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of
rail.
x4
Rails
F-4-96
ITB unit
10) Hold the front and rear of Process Unit and remove it flatly.
F-4-94
Removing the Process Unit

CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Process Unit, do not remove the Waste Toner Container.
F-4-97
4-81
11) Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light.
4-82
Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover.
Paper
2 rubber caps
2 screws
5 claws
Rubber cap
x2
Claws
x5
F-4-98
12) Take the 2 rails of Process Unit back to the host machine.
Rubber cap
F-4-100
1 connector
F-4-99
NOTE:
When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 (Y/M laser), Refer to procedure 13), 14), 15)
F-4-101
4-82
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-83
Procedure

1 screw
1 hook
CAUTION:
Hook
When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit

When removing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check the serial numbers affixed on
both units and installation position of the units before operation.
Before installing the units, be sure to see the foregoing serial numbers and install each
unit to the original position.
If the unit is installed reversely, the image displacement might occur.
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-4-102
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removal of Bk,C Laser Scanner Unit. Go through the
same procedure for removing the M,Y Laser Scanner Unit.
1) Remove the Drum Heater.

1 screw
Drum heater
Screw
F-4-103
4-83
2) Remove the Image Formation Suction Duct.
4) Remove the Left Duct Unit.
1 screw
1 connector
1 claw
2 screws
Image formation suction duct
4-84
Connector
Screw
x2
Claw
Left Duct Unit
F-4-104
NOTE:
When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 (Y/M laser), Refer to procedure 3), 4), 5)
F-4-106
5) Remove the Scanner Fixing Spring.

1 screw
3) Remove the Left Upper Cover.
5 rubber caps
5 screws
x5
Left upper cover
Fixing spring
Screw
F-4-107
Rubber caps
F-4-105
4-84
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Actions after Replacement
6) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.
CAUTION:
4 connectors
Connectors
4-85
At installation, pass the harness through the Sheet Guide and install it.
Laser scanner unit

Connectors
x2
x2
Sheet guide
Sheet guide
F-4-108
CAUTION:
Since the Laser Scanner Unit needs adjustment, do not disassemble it.

CAUTION:
Execute the following in user mode: (Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
At installation, push the protrusion of Laser Scanner Unit into the hole of rear plate and
adjust the front boss with the plate hole and install it.
Protrusion
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation).
Laser scanner unit
Hole
Protrusion
Boss
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Actions after Replacement
4-85
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Preparations
4-86
Removing the ITB Unit

Preparations
Removing the Toner Filter
Procedure
1) Remove the Toner Filter Cover.
1 claw
Claw
F-4-111

2 screws (loosen)
F-4-109
2) Remove the Fan Protection Plate and the Toner Filter.
Toner filter
Fan protection plate
F-4-112
CAUTION:
Do not touch the ITB surface.
F-4-110
When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is
insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover, which may cause the
damage of the sensor.
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Preparations
4-86
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
Procedure
4-87
3) Remove the 2 connectors.
1) Check that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark.
x2
(If it is not aligned, adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark.)
Triangle mark
Triangle mark
F-4-115
ITB sub pressure

release lever
ITB sub pressure

release lever
F-4-113
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the arrow direction until the protrusion of grip is
aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure.

F-4-114
CAUTION:
Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever, check that the Right Lower Cover is
open.
4-87
4-88
4) Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly.
CAUTION:
2 screws
When pulling out the ITB Unit, be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt. If the ITB Unit is pulled out while the lever
is lowered, the ITB is scraped by the Plate and this may cause to make scratches on
the ITB surface.
Stop label position
x2
ITB pressure
release lever
Click position
Not to lower the ITB Pressure Releace Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt.
F-4-116
5) Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure, and remove in the direction of the arrow.
When pulling out the ITB Unit, it may drop because it does not click at stop position if
pulled out while lifting it. Thus, be careful of pulling it out.
F-4-117
4-88
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor > Procedure
4-89
Cleaning the Patch Sensor
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make mistakes when installing since there is no compatibility
between the ITB Unit of iR-ADV-C52XX series and that of iR-ADV-C50XX series.
When installing the ITB Unit, align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge
of rail.
Rails
Preparations
3) Remove the ITB Unit.
Procedure
1) While pushing the shutter, clean the surface of Patch Sensor with a cotton swab moistened
with water and tightly wrung by wiping it in one direction. After cleaning, make sure that
there is no toner contamination on the sensor surface.
CAUTION:
ITB unit
Do not use the alcohol since it melts the sensor window and causes while turbidity.
Do not dry-wipe it since the sensor window is charged and attracts the toner.

Patch sensor
Be sure to execute the following procedure after replacing the ITB.

1) After installing the ITB Unit, put the machine into a standby state.
2) When the machine is in a standby state, execute the following in user mode: (Settings/
Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation).
Patch sensor shutter
F-4-118
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor > Procedure
4-89
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Patch Sensor (front,center,rear) > Procedure
Remove the Patch Sensor (front,center,rear)
4-90
2) Remove the Pre-secondary Transfer Guide. Be sure not to put too much force on the Presecondary Transfer Guide when removing it.
Preparations
2 screws
Grounding Cable
x2

4) Remove the Process Unit.
Procedure
1) Release the hook and remove the Shutter of the sensor.
2 Claws
Secondary Transfer Guide
Shutter
F-4-120
3) Remove the Patch Sensor unit.

4 screws
4 bosses
Claw
x4
Hook
Boss
F-4-119
F-4-121
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Patch Sensor (front,center,rear) > Procedure
4-90
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
4) Remove the Wire Saddle, and Edge Saddle to make the Sensor Assembly moving freely.
3 Wire Saddles
4-91
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit

Preparations
1 Edge Saddle
x4
Procedure
CAUTION:
When removing/installing it, do not contact the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB.
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
F-4-122
5) Pull out the Patch Sensor Unit, and Remove the sensor desired to be replaced. (Patch
Sensor (Rear) as an example)
2 Screws
1 Connector
x2
NOTE: Moving the ITB away from the ITB Cleaning Unit will generate a clearance,
making work easier.
Connector
F-4-123

When replace the Patch Senosor (center),Initialization of Patch sensor (center) is necessary.
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-ALPHA Input Patch Sensor alpha value
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
F-4-124
4-91
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
1) Hold the left and right grip and remove the ITB Cleaning Unit in the direction of the arrow.
2 screws
4-92
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit

Preparations
x2

4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit.
Procedure
F-4-125
2) Place the removed ITB Cleaning Unit on the paper.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the ITB Cleaning Blade.
F-4-126

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-92
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-93
Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit and put it on the paper.
1 Stepped Screw
Preparations
1 Wave Washer
NOTE:
Hold the screw area of 2 screws on the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit so that it is easy to
remove.
5) Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit.
Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the ITB Cleaning Blade.
F-4-127
1) Insert an A4 size paper between the Blade Unit installation position of the ITB Cleaning
Unit and the sheet.
4-93
4-94
3) While paying attention not to bend the Protection Sheet, lift the sheet using a screwdriver.
After that, check that the sheet that is being lifted is above the pad.
Paper
Sheet
2) Check that the Blade Alignment Plate is installed, and then install the ITB Cleaning
F-4-128 Blade
Unit.At this time, be sure to move the paper inserted in step 1 toward the direction shown in
the figure to prevent the sheet from flipping before the installation.
ITB Cleaning
Blade
Paper
Boss
Sheet
F-4-130
F-4-129
4-94
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply tospearl on the whole area
indicated in the figure below.
4-95
Removing the ITB

Preparations
CAUTION:
Do not tough the surface of ITB. (If needed, hold the ITB within 10mm from both edge
of the belt.)
F-4-131
CAUTION:
Procedure
1) Turn over the ITB Unit.
When applying tospearl, be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller
and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
2) Remove the Push Slider.

1 stop ring
If it is scattered on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller, wipe it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by
hand. At this time, turn the motor counterclockwise and do not turn it clockwise.

F-4-132
4-95
3) Pull the ITB Pressure Release Lever to the front.
4-96
6) Lift the ITB and stand it on the ITB Cover.
4) Remove the harness.

CAUTION:
3 wire saddles
1 edge saddle
Make sure that it is removed from the front and rear hooks.
Make sure to align the claw of the ITB Cover with the cut-off of protection sheet.
In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged, be sure to place a sheet of paper
between the ITB Unit and the ITB Cover as needed.
x4
2 claws
x2
F-4-133
5) Remove the rear pin.
Hooks
1 screw
ITB cover
Claw
Paper
F-4-134
Claws Paper
F-4-135
NOTE:
Place the ITB cover upside down on the place where the ITB Unit will be stood.
4-96
7) Pull out the front pin.
4-97
9) Insert papers as shown in the figure to prevent the ITB getting damage by the plate when
removing the ITB.
NOTE:
To lock the pressure, pull out the pin while holding the ITB Unit with hand.
1 screw
F-4-138
10) Hold the ITB within 10mm from the edge and remove it upward.
F-4-136
10mm
8) Bend the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit by 90 degree and reinstall it with the pin
removed in step 7).
10mm
F-4-139
F-4-137
4-97
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Actions after Replacement
4-98
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of ITB Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and
Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.
1) Turn ON the power of the host machine.

2) When the machine is in standby condition, execute the following in user mode: (Settings/
CAUTION:
When replacing ITB with a new one, affix the label to the specific position after the ITB
Unit is installed.
When affixing the new label, be sure to remove the old label and replace with the new
one on the same position.
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Actions after Replacement
4-98
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) > Procedure
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)

Preparations
4-99
1) Pull out the pin, and make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight.
2) Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position.
5) Remove the ITB.
Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary
Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.
F-4-140
3) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper in the position where
the roller is placed upside.
2 claws
ITB unit
x2
Claws
ITB cover
Paper
4) While holding the front bushing, pinch the claw and remove the Disengagement/
F-4-141
Engagement Arm.
Stopper
Bushing
F-4-142
4-99
5) Remove the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk).
4-100
CAUTION:
1 Shaft Support (Front)

1 spring
When the parts (Shaft support (front), Shaft support (rear), Spring) configuring the
Primary Transfer Roller of each color(Bk/C/M/Y) are mixed, be sure to refer to the list in
the figure below.
Primary transfer roller (Bk)
name
shape
feature
Shaft support
(front)
(Bk,C,Y)
Bushing
Num
White.
3
Common with BkCY.
1 rib.
Shape at the back
side is [C].
Spring
[C]
front side
F-4-143
NOTE:
There is no particular direction for the Primary Transfer Roller installation.
back side
Black
3
Common with BkCY.
1 rib.
Shape at the back
side is [C].
Shaft support
(rear)
(Bk,C,Y)
[C]
front side
CAUTION:
Wind paper on the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) and without touching the surface of the
roller.
Do not touch the roller surface.
Grease is applied on the shaft [A] of the Primary Transfer Roller. When touching it, be
careful not to accidentally put grease to other parts.
Shaft support
(front)
(M)
back side
[B]
front side
Primary transfer roller (BK)
Black
2 ribs.
Shape at the back
side is [B].
M mark on the rear
side.
back side
Shaft support
(rear)
(M)
Paper
White.
2 ribs.
Shape at the back
side is [B].
M mark on the rear
side.
[B]
[A]
front side
back side
T-4-33
4-100
4
name
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Procedure
shape
Spring (Bk)
feature
Num
Blue marking on the 2

side.
Shorter compared to
the springs for YMC.
The edge of the
spring is bent.
Spring (C,M,Y)
Blue marking on the

side.
Longer compared to
the springs for Bk.
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y)

Preparations
5) Remove the ITB.
Procedure
T-4-34
CAUTION:
4-101
NOTE:
This procedure describes the steps for Primary Transfer Roller (C). Go through the
same procedure for M and Y.
CAUTION:
Hold the stopper with finger lightly after installation to check that the claw is surely
installed.

2) When the machine is in standby condition, execute the Auto gradation correction.
4-101
4-102
5) While holding down the Shaft Support (Front), remove the Engagement/Disengagement
2) Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position
Arm from the boss by tilting it.
3) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper.
F-4-144
2 claws
ITB unit
x2
Shaft Support Disengagement/
Engagement Arm
(Front)
Claws
F-4-147
ITB cover
6) While holding down the Shaft Support (Front), remove the stopper from the boss.
Paper
Boss
F-4-145
4) Turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y)
Stopper
lifted.
Primary transfer roller(C)
Primary transfer roller(M)
Primary transferr oller(Y)
Shaft Support
(Front)
F-4-148
ITB sub pressure release lever
F-4-146
4-102
7) Remove the Primary Transfer Roller (C).
4-103
CAUTION:
1 Shaft Support (Front)

1 spring
When the parts (Shaft support (front), Shaft support (rear), Spring) configuring the
Primary Transfer Roller of each color(Bk/C/M/Y) are mixed, be sure to refer to the list in
the figure below.
Shaft Support
(Front)
Spring
Transfer roller (C)
name
shape
feature
Shaft support
(front)
(Bk,C,Y)
Num
White.
3
Common with BkCY.
1 rib.
Shape at the back
side is [C].
[C]
front side
F-4-149
NOTE:
There is no particular direction for the Primary Transfer Roller installation.
back side
Black
3
Common with BkCY.
1 rib.
Shape at the back
side is [C].
Shaft support
(rear)
(Bk,C,Y)
CAUTION:
[C]
Wind paper on the Primary Transfer Roller (C) and without touching the surface of the
roller.
Do not touch the roller surface.
Grease is applied on the shaft [A] of the Primary Transfer Roller. When touching it, be
careful not to accidentally put grease to other parts.
front side
back side
Shaft support
(front)
(M)
[B]
front side
[A]
Black
2 ribs.
Shape at the back
side is [B].
M mark on the rear
side.
back side
Shaft support
(rear)
(M)
Paper
Primary transfer roller (C)
White.
2 ribs.
Shape at the back
side is [B].
M mark on the rear
side.
[B]
front side
back side
T-4-35
4-103
4
name
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Actions after Replacement
shape
feature
Spring (Bk)
Num
Blue marking on the 2

side.
Shorter compared to
the springs for YMC.
The edge of the
spring is bent.
Spring (C,M,Y)
Blue marking on the

side.
Longer compared to
the springs for Bk.
4-104

T-4-36
CAUTION:
After installing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y), turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release
Lever to make sure that the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) moves up and down.
After checking, be sure to make the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) lowered position.
Primary Transfer Roller (M)
Primary Transfer Roller (Y)
Primary Transfer Roller (C)
ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Actions after Replacement
4-104
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
4-105
Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

Preparations
5) Remove the ITB.
Procedure
F-4-151
CAUTION:
3) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper in the position where
the roller side faces up.

2 claws
ITB unit
x2
Claws
ITB cover
Paper
4) Remove the Grounding Plate and the Secondary Transfer Bearing Holder.
F-4-150
F-4-152
1 screw
2) Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position
Grounding plate
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
Secondary transfer
bearing holder
4-105
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Actions after Replacement
4-106
F-4-153
5) Remove the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction when installing the Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller.
F-4-154
6) Apply 1 rice-grain sized grease (FY9-6006: Super Lube) to the edge of

the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.

2) When the machine is in standby condition, Execute the following in user mode: (Settings/
3) Execute the ITB equilibrium position detection in service mode.
F-4-155
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-INIT
This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
4) After executing the above, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITB-POS
and ITB-POS2 are within the range from -350 to 350.
4-106
4-107
If not, execute the following adjustment.
When the values are above 350
1) Open the ITB Cover.
Moving it by 1 mm changes the values of ITB-POS and ITB-POS2 by approx. 200.
Move the ITB Motor Support Plate up.

After adjustment, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITB-POS and ITB-
2) Remove the ITB Motor [1].
POS2 are within the range from -350 to 350.
4 Screws [3]
1 Connector [2]
[3]
[1]
Loosen
x4
[2]
F-4-158
[3]
When the values are below -350

F-4-156
3) Put markings as shown in the figure below to use as the reference when correcting the
position.
Move the ITB Motor Support Plate down.

After adjustment, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITB-POS and ITBPOS2 are within the range from -350 to 350.
Mark
Loosen
Mark
F-4-157
F-4-159
4-107
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Procedure
Reinstalling the ITB
4-108
NOTE:
Cover the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package as shown in the
figure. (Place the slant area to the ITB Motor side.) The framed area is the area where
the ITB is easily damaged, so be sure that the area is covered with the ITB Installation
Auxiliary Sheet. After installing the ITB, remove the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet.
Preparations
Slant Area

5) Remove the ITB.
Procedure
Mold is covered
with the sheet
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make mistakes when installing since there is no compatibility between
the ITB Unit of iR-ADV-C52XX series and that of iR-ADV-C50XX series.
1) Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is in the below position.
F-4-162
ITB sub pressure release lever

F-4-160
2) Stand the ITB Unit on the ITB Cover.

2 claws
x2
ITB cover
Claw
Claws
F-4-161
4-108
3) Place papers on the ITB Cover to prevent bending of the ITB because pressure is applied
to a point when installing the ITB.
4-109
6) Put the ITB under the Belt Retainer Sheet (on the left side of the figure), bring the ITB
Displacement Sensor Flag into contact with the ITB edge (at the center of the figure), and
4) Hold within 10mm from the edge of the ITB and temporarily place the ITB using the
then, align the marking line (on the right side of the figure) with the position of the ITB.
marking line as a guide.

Belt Retainer Sheet
CAUTION:
ITB Displacement Sensor Flag
Be careful not to bend ITB when bringing it down fully.
Marking Line
10mm
F-4-165
CAUTION:
10mm
Marking line
When installing the ITB, be sure that the Sheet on the ITB Unit is inside of the ITB.
Paper
F-4-163
5) Remove the pin, and move the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit toward the 2 direction
to take up the slack of the belt. (To stretch the ITB fro approx. 90%.)
F-4-164
4-109
7) Return the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit to straight, and then install the pin
4-110
9) Install the rear pin.
removed.
1 screw
1 screw
F-4-166
8) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover, hook it on the 2 hooks, and then install it to the
plate.
F-4-168
10) Push the ITB Pressure Release Lever and install the Bush Slider to the boss.
1 stop ring
2 claws
Boss
x2
Claws
Hooks
F-4-167
F-4-169
4-110
11) PuII the ITB Pressure Release Lever and Install the harness.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
4-111
CAUTION:
Make sure that the shaft is fixed to the fixing member.
x4
F-4-170
CAUTION:
Make sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever and the Plate.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the hook is fixed to the plate.
Space
12) Turn over the ITB Unit.

13) Install the ITB Cleaning Unit.
4-111
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Actions after Replacement
CAUTION:
4-112
CAUTION:
When replacing ITB with a new one, after installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB
Unit, apply tospearl on the whole area indicated in the figure below.
When replacing ITB with a new one, affix the label to the specific position near the
Waste Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Cleaning Unit after the ITB Unit is installed.
When affixing the new label, be sure to remove the old label and replace with the new
one on the same position.
When applying tospearl, be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB, the Drive
Roller and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
If it is scattered on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller, wipe it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by
hand. At this time, turn the motor counterclockwise and do not turn it clockwise.

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Actions after Replacement
4-112
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling Out the Process Unit > Procedure
Removing the Recycle Toner Bottle
4-113
Pulling Out the Process Unit
Preparations
Preparations
1) Open theRight Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.

Procedure
Procedure
1) Release the Recycle Toner Bottle Lock Lever.
1) Make sure that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle
mark of the plate.
(If it is not aligned, align the arrow of lever with the triangle mark of plate.)
Triangle mark
Triangle mark
F-4-171
2) Remove the Recycle Toner Bottle.
ITB sub pressure

release lever
ITB sub pressure

release lever
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction and release the pressure.
F-4-173
CAUTION:
When releasing the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever, make sure that the
protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark of plate.
F-4-172
CAUTION:
Do not tilt the Recycle Toner Bottle.
(Because it may cause misdetection on the Full Detection Sensor.)
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling Out the Process Unit > Procedure
4-113
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit > Procedure
4-114
Removing the Process Unit

2 screws
Preparations
x2

4) Pull out the Process Unit.
Procedure
F-4-174
Paper
CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Process Unit, do not remove the Recycle Toner Bottle.
1) Remove the 4 stepped screws fixed on the right and left rails.
x4
F-4-175
F-4-176
2) Hold the front and rear of Process Unit and remove it flatly.
F-4-177
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit > Procedure
4-114
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Process Unit > Procedure
Paper
4-115
Reinstalling the Process Unit

Preparations
Procedure
F-4-178
1) Pull out the 2 rails of Process Unit from the host machine.
4) Take the 2 rails of Process Unit back to the host machine.
F-4-180
F-4-179
NOTE:
When installing the Process Unit, if the Dustproof Shutter is opened and blocks to install
the unit, turn ON and then OFF the power. Be sure to check that the Dustproof Shutter
is closed before installation.
2) Align the 4 protrusions of Process Unit with the positioning pin of rail and install it.
Protrusions of process unit
Positioning pins
Protrusions of process unit
Positioning pins
F-4-181
4-115
3) Install the right and left rails and the Process Unit with 4 stepped screws.
4-116
4) Slowly take the Process Unit back to the host machine and fix it with 2 screws.
x4
x2
F-4-184
F-4-182
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Make sure that there is no gap [A] between the host machine and the Process Unit and
fix it with the screw.
[A]
After closing the Process Unit, hold the edge of each Drum Unit from above as
described below. If the Drum Unit is not secured, it may cause the color displacement.
[A]
F-4-183
F-4-185
4-116
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure
4-117
Removing the Drum Unit
5) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the left direction to apply the pressure.
Preparations
CAUTION:
When applying the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever, make sure that the
protrusion of grip is aligned with the lower triangle mark of plate.

Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the drum surface.
1)Hold the grip with both hands, and pull it out vertically.
CAUTION:
F-4-186
When removing the Drum Unit, do not pull it out from one handle.
6) Install the ITB Cover and tighten the 2 loosened screws.
F-4-187
7) Close the Front Cover.
F-4-188
8) Close the Right Upper Cover.

9) Close the Right Lower Cover.
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure
4-117
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Drum Unit > Procedure
4-118
Reinstalling the Drum Unit

Preparations
Grips
5) Remove the Drum Unit.
F-4-189
Procedure
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to cover the removed Drum Unit with paper, etc. to block light.
Do not touch the drum surface.

Be sure to refer to the following NOTE when installing the Bk Drum.
CAUTION:
When installing it at an angle, the shutter may be damaged. Thus, make sure to install it
from directly above.
Paper
F-4-190
F-4-191
4-118
1) Hold the grip and install it from the top vertically.
4-119
NOTE:
When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine, perform the following
procedures.
2-1) Place the half fold paper included in the packaging box on the Developing Assembly
(Bk).Be sure to set the edge of half fold paper over the Toner Collecting Sheet of the
Developing Assembly.
Grips
F-4-192
2) Align the guide of Process Unit with the guide of Drum Unit and install the Drum Unit.
Guide of
drum unit
Guide of
process unit
Guide of
drum unit
Guide of process unit
F-4-193
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the shutter slides along the rail and is located in the correct
position as shown in the figure below to prevent the rail from being damaged.
Toner Collecting Sheet
Shutter
Shutter
F-4-195
Rail
Rail
F-4-194
4-119
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-120
Removing the Developing Assembly
NOTE:
2-2) While the paper is set, install the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine.
Drum Unit (BK)
Preparations
5) Remove the Drum Unit.
6) Remove the Recycle Toner Bottle.
Procedure
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removal of Bk Developing Assembly. Go through the
same procedure for removing the Y,M,C Developing Assembly.
F-4-196
2-3) Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction of arrow.
CAUTION:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Developing Sleeve.
3) Hold the grip part (8 places) with finger lightly and make sure that the Drum Unit is securely
installed.
CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Developing Assembly, be sure to remove the Recycle
Toner Bottle.
F-4-197

4-120
1) Remove the harness from the 2 harness guides and remove the connector.
4-121
CAUTION:
Fit the 2 pins of the Developing Assembly into the holes of the Process Unit, and insert
the 2 pins of the stopper in the holes of the Developing Assembly when assembling.
x2
Pins of the Developing Assembly
Harness
Connector
Harness guides
F-4-198
2) Remove the stepped screw.
Holes of the Process Unit

Developing Assembly
Holes of the Developing Assembly
F-4-199
3) While pulling out the stopper, remove the Developing Assembly upward.
Developing assembly
Stopper
Pins of the stopper

F-4-201
F-4-200
4-121
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing a new Developing Assembly > Procedure

Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs
depending on the color.
If 4 colors are replaced simultaneously, execute INISET-4.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y Initialization of Y Developing Assembly (toner
ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M Initialization of M Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C Initialization of C Developing Assembly (toner
ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-4 Initialization of 4-colors Developing
Assembly (toner ratio and patch)
4-122
Installing a new Developing Assembly

Preparations
2) Opening the Front Cover.
3) Removing the ITB Cover.
4) Pulling out the Process Unit.
5) Removing the Drum Unit.
6) Removing the Waste Toner Container.
Procedure
1) Install the Developing Assembly to the Process Unit in the reverse procedure of Removing
the Developing Assembly.
2) Hold down the Developing Assembly, hold the grip of the Developing Assembly Seal, and
pull out the Developing Assembly Seal.
Perform this procedure for each color.
F-4-202
4-122
CAUTION:
4-123
CAUTION:
When removing the Seal on the Developing Assembly, be sure to lift it slowly and
vertically. If lifting it in an oblique direction, the Seal on the Developing Assembly is
stressed, and may cause tear of the seal.
If the Seal on the Developing Assembly is torn, remove the torn seal by pulling the end
of it in the direction of the arrow. At that time, be careful not to leave the torn sheet in
the Developing Assembly.
Rear side
Seal
Seal
Front side
F-4-203
F-4-204
3) By following installing the Drum Unit, install the each color Drum Unit.
4) Be sure to hold the upper side of each Developing Assembly when removing the seal.
Otherwise the cover will be off from its position.
F-4-205
4-123
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit > Preparations

Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs
depending on the color.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y Initialization of Y Developing Assembly (toner
ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M Initialization of M Developing Assembly
4-124
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit

Preparations
2) Removing the ITB Cover.
3) Pulling out the Process Unit.
4) Removing the Drum Unit.
5) Removing the Waste Toner Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C Initialization of C Developing Assembly (toner
ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit > Preparations
4-124
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit > Procedure
Procedure
4-125
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the PCB.

3 Wire Saddles
1) Remove the Process Unit Right Front Cover.
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws
3 Harness Guides
x2
Connectors
x4
Process Unit Right Front Cover
Wire saddle
Connector
x7
Cable guide
Wire saddle Cable guides Edge saddle
F-4-206
2) Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit Upper Cover.

4 Screws
x4
F-4-208
F-4-207
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit > Procedure
4-125
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure
4-126
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and

Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit
4) Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit.

6 Screws
NOTE:
To make the work easier, remove the leftmost screw first (see the callout on the upper
left of the figure).
Preparations
Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
x6
F-4-210
F-4-209
4-126
4-127
1) Place the paper to put the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit.
4) Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit.
2) Remove the rear stopper.
1 bushing
1 claw
2 springs
Spring
Spring
Bushing
F-4-211
3) Pinch the claws on both sides of bearing holder and remove the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller Unit.
Secondary transfer
separation guide unit
4 claws
F-4-213
5) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.

2 bearing holders
x4
2 bearings
Bearing
Bearing holder
Bearing
F-4-212
Bearing holder
Secondary transfer
outer roller
F-4-214
4-127
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure
4-128
Reinstalling the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and

Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit
2) Fit the protrusion with the groove of the guide and install the bushing.
3) Install the spring onto both side of protrusion.
Spring
Preparations
2) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide
Unit.
Procedure
CAUTION:
Protrusion
F-4-216
Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.

1) Fit the side with longer shaft to the hole of Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit and
install the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
Shorter shaft
CAUTION:
Make sure that the spring on the Duplex Unit side is not skewed.
Longer shaft
Hole
F-4-215
F-4-217
CAUTION:
After installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, make sure that the bearing holder
can rotate.
4-128
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle manually > Preparations
4) Fit the spring on the Duplex Unit to the protrusion on the bearing holder of Secondary
Transfer Outer Roller Unit and install it one after other.
4-129
Removing the Toner Bottle manually

Preparations
2 screws (TP; M3)
1 claw
x3
F-4-218
5) Reinstall the rear stopper.

When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, execute the service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TNR-COAT
Claw
F-4-219
Remove the Left Rear Cover, Left Rear Sub Cover.

2 rubber caps
2 screws
5 claws
Rubber cap
x2
Claws
b
x5
Rubber cap
F-4-220
4-129
1 connector
3 rubber caps
4-130
3 screws
1 claw
x2
Rubber caps
Claw
F-4-221
Rear cover

1 screw
F-4-223
Open the Controller Box
1 hook
7) When the Reader is installed, remove the reader power cable.

Hook
2 connectors
2 wire saddles
1 cable guide
x2
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-4-222
Reader
power cable
x2
Cable guide
Wire saddles
Connectors
F-4-224
4-130
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle manually > Procedure
4-131
Procedure
NOTE:
If the Fax Unit is not installed, refer to step 8-1).

If the Fax Unit is installed, refer to step 8-2).
NOTE:
This procedure describes the procedure of Toner Bottle (Bk). Go through the same
procedure for Toner Bottle (C,M,Y).
8-1) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box.

2 screws
1) Open the Toner Replacement Cover.

2) Remove the handle.
1 screw
x2
Handle
F-4-225
8-2) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit.
3 screws
x3
F-4-227
3) Install the handle to the shaft.

4) Turn the handle like ratchet and open the small cover.
F-4-226
F-4-228
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle manually > Procedure
4-131
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Preparations
4-132
Removing the Main Drive Unit
5) Pull out the toner container.
Preparations
1 screw
F-4-229
CAUTION:
At installation, make sure to insert the Toner Container all the way in and close the
small cover.
F-4-231
5) When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

1 reuse band
6 harness guides
5 connectors
Connectors
Connectors
x7
F-4-230
Reuse Band
x5
Harness Guides
F-4-232
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Preparations
4-132
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4-133
Procedure

2 rubber caps
1) Remove the Left Upper Cover.
2 screws
5 rubber caps
2 claws
5 screws
2 hooks
x5
x2
Left upper cover
Claw
x2
Claw
Hook
Rubber caps
F-4-234
Hook
NOTE:
If the Fax Unit is installed, remove it from the host machine.
2 Hooks
3 Screws
1 Connector
Hook
Connecter
F-4-233
x3
FAX Unit
4-133
4-134
2) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box.
5) Remove the Harness Guide Cover.
2 screws
1 screw
Harness guide cover
x2
F-4-235
3) Open the High-voltage PCB.
F-4-238
6) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide [A], and free the Laser Scanner harness from
2 screws
the Harness Guide [B].

1 Edge Saddle
HVT PCB
4 Wire Saddles
x2
7) Shift the Harness Guide.

1 Screw
1 Claw
Wire Saddle
Harness
x6
Harness Guide
[A]
F-4-236
4) Remove the Drum Driver PCB.

3 screws
Laser Scanner
Harness
[B]
x3
Wire Saddle
Edge Saddle
Hook
F-4-239
Drum driver PCB

F-4-237
4-134
8) Remove the Fan Duct 1.
4-135
10) Disconnect the 9 connectors of the Drum Driver PCB and the 4 Reuse Bands, and free
1 connector
the harness by opening the 4 Wire Saddles.
Harness Guide [A]

Reuse Band
Wire Saddle
2 screws
1 claw
x9
Connector
x8
Wire Saddle
Reuse Band
Reuse Band
Connector
Connector
x2
Wire Saddle
Reuse Band
Fan duct
Wire Saddle
Connector
F-4-242
[A]
11) Remove the Main Drive Unit.

6 screws
Claw
x6
F-4-240
9) Disconnect the 8 connectors of the hopper.
x8
Connectors
Connectors
Connectors Connectors
Main drive unit
F-4-243
F-4-241
4-135
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover > Procedure
4-136
Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover
CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the 2 holes of the Main Drive Unit to the shafts of the host machine, and fit
the 4 couplings into the holes of the host machine when installing.
At this time, pulling out the Process Unit will make installation easier.
Pin
1) Open the Toner Replacement Cover.

2) Execute the service mode and release the lock of Toner Container.
Pin
Hole
Preparations
NOTE:
To release the lock of Toner Container manually, refer to the step 1) to 4) in Removing
the Toner Container manually. At that time, do not pull out the toner container.
Hole
Coupling
Hole
3) Turn OFF the power before closing the Small Cover and the Toner Replacement Cover.
4) Close the 4 Small Covers and the Toner Replacement Cover. (Same in manual operation)
5) Open the Front Cover, the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.
Procedure
F-4-244
1) Remove the Front Right Cover.

1 rubber cap
1 screw (remove)
1 screw (loosen)
Loosen
Rubber cap
Front right cover
F-4-245
4-136
2) Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and Remove the Small Plate.
5) Remove the Delivery Tray.
1 screw (P tight)
1 Hook
4-137
2 Protrusions
Protrusions
Small Plate
Toner Replacement Cover
3) Remove the Front Upper Cover.
F-4-246
Hook
1 screw (P tight)
F-4-249
1 screw (RS)
6) Open the 4 Small Covers and remove the 4 Toner Containers.
x2
F-4-247
4) Remove the Front Upper Right Cover.

F-4-250
F-4-248
4-137
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (M) > Procedure
4-138
Removing the Hopper (M)
7) Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover.

1 connector
Preparations
1 wire saddle
4 screws (RS)
1) Release the lock of Toner Container. (By service mode)

x4

Connector
5) Remove the Color Drum Heater. (When the option is installed)

Procedure
Wire saddle
1) Remove the Toner Tray.

1 screw (M4 binding)
F-4-251
F-4-252
4-138
2) While avoiding the duct sheet, remove the Hopper Unit.
4-139
CAUTION:
1 connector
4 screws
If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the
operation failure. Thus, stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper.
Connector
Hopper
Unit
x2
Paper
Duct Sheet
x2
F-4-254
CAUTION:
F-4-253
Before installing the hopper to the host machine, be sure to check that the leading edge
of the protrusion of the Bottle Fixing Ring and the leading edge of the Bottle Fixing Arm
are aligned. If not, rotate the gear in the direction as shown in the figure below to align
the leading edge of the protrusion of the Bottle Fixing Ring with the leading edge of the
Bottle Fixing Arm.
Bottle Fixing Arm
Gear
Bottle Fixing Ring
F-4-255
4-139
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Y) > Procedure
4-140
Removing the Hopper (Y)
CAUTION:
When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close
Rod Lever and install it.
Preparations
Procedure
Toner Cover
Open/Close Rod Lever
Rod Lever
F-4-256
CAUTION:
When installing the removed Toner Container, be sure not to shake it.
CAUTION:
F-4-257
When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously, make sure to install the Main
Drive Unit first and then, the Hopper Unit in order. Otherwise, toner supply failure may
occur.

When replacing the Developing Assembly, make sure to initialize before installing the Toner
Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M
If install the Toner Container before initialization, T/D ratio cannot set the right value.
4-140
4-141
2) Remove the Left Cover.
4) While avoiding the duct sheet, remove the Hopper Unit.
5 rubber caps
1 connector
5 screws
4 screws
5 claws
Connector
Crows
x5
x5
Hopper
unit
Crow
x2
Crows
x2
3) Remove the Left Middle Stay.
Duct sheet
F-4-258
4 screws
x4
Left Middle Stay
F-4-260
F-4-259
4-141
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Y) > Actions after Replacement
CAUTION:
4-142
CAUTION:
Paper
Toner Cover
Rod Lever
F-4-263
F-4-261
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Bottle Fixing Arm.
Bottle Fixing Arm
CAUTION:
occur.
Gear
Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y
Bottle Fixing Ring
F-4-262
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Y) > Actions after Replacement
4-142
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (C) > Procedure
Removing the Hopper (C)
4-143
3) Remove the 2 screws from the Harness Guide.
Preparations
x2

Procedure
F-4-265
1) Remove the Reverse Tray.
4) While opennig the Guide, remove the Hopper Upper Stay.
2) Remove the Inside Rear Cover 1 & 2.
2 screws (RS)
3 caps
3 screws (RS)
x2
x3
Inner rear cover 1
Inner rear cover 2

F-4-264
F-4-266
5) Remove the Secondary Delivery Duct.

2 screws (P tight)
x2
F-4-267
4-143
4-144
6) Remove the rail Retaining Plate.
8) While avoiding the Duct Sheet, remove the Hopper Unit.
4 screws (M4 binding)
1 connector
4 screws
x4
Connector
x2
F-4-268
Hopper
Unit
Duct Sheet
x2
F-4-270
F-4-269
4-144
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (C) > Actions after Replacement
CAUTION:
4-145
CAUTION:
Paper
Toner Cover
Rod Lever
F-4-273
F-4-271
CAUTION:
Bottle Fixing Arm.
Bottle Fixing Arm
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
occur.
Gear
Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C
Bottle Fixing Ring
F-4-272
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (C) > Actions after Replacement
4-145
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Bk) > Procedure
Removing the Hopper (Bk)
4-146
3) Remove the Duct Sheet.

2 screws (binding)
Preparations
1) Release the lock of Toner Container (By service mode).
x2

5) Remove the Color Drum Heater (When the option is installed).
6) Remove the Drum Heater (Bk).
8) Remove the Hopper (C).
Procedure
1) Remove the Harness from the Fixing Guide.
F-4-276
Harness
Guide
F-4-274
2) Remove all the Toner Trays.

3 screws (M4 binding)
x3
F-4-275
4-146
4) Remove the Hopper Unit.
4-147
CAUTION:
1 connector
6 screws
3 fixing guides
Connector
x2
Paper
Hopper
Unit
x4
F-4-278
CAUTION:
Fixed Guide
F-4-277
Bottle Fixing Arm.
Bottle Fixing Arm
Gear
Bottle Fixing Ring
F-4-279
4-147
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Bk) > Actions after Replacement
4-148
CAUTION:
Toner Cover
Rod Lever
F-4-280
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
occur.

Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Bk) > Actions after Replacement
4-148
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
Fixing System
4-149
2) Pinch and pull out the tab of Fixing Assembly.
Removing the Fixing Assembly

Preparations
Tabs
F-4-283
3) Hold the grip and remove the Fixing Assembly.
F-4-281
Procedure
1) Open the Fixing Rail and loosen the 4 screws.
Loosen the screws
Loosen the screws
F-4-284
Fixing Rail
Fixing Rail
F-4-282
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4-149
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Film Unit > Procedure
4-150
Removing the Film Unit
CAUTION:
When installing the Fixing Assembly, be sure to insert it until it stops and then tighten
the 4 screws [1] while holding the area [A] part as shown in the figure below.
Preparations
2) Remove the Fixing Unit.
[A]
Procedure
NOTE:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Film Unit and Pressure Roller.
[1]
[1]
1) Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly. (Place it in the position where the Drawer
[A]
connector side faces up.)

F-4-285
If the Fixing Assembly is not installed properly, abnormal noise from the Fixing Gear
or E009 may occur.
In such case, remove and then install the Fixing Assembly again.

3 connectors
Harness Guide [A]
Connectors
x3
Drawer connector
Harness
[A]
F-4-286
4-150
3) Remove the Shutter Unit.
4-151
CAUTION:
4 screws
Do not leave the Pressure Roller engaged for a long time.
x4
5) Open the left and right Pressure Levers.

2 screws
x2
F-4-287
4) Turn the pressure gear with hand and make the Pressure Roller engaged condition.
Pressure roller
engaged condition
F-4-290
6) Remove the left and right Fixing Plates and the Terminal Plate.
3 screws
x3
F-4-288
CAUTION:
When keeping the Fixing Assembly for long periods, turn the pressure gear and make
the Pressure Roller disengaged condition.
Pressure roller
disengaged condition
Fixing Plates
Terminal Plate
F-4-291
F-4-289
4-151
7) Remove the harness from the harness guide and remove the Film Unit.
4-152
CAUTION:
Point to Note when Installing the Fixing Separation Guide:
Be sure to check that Fixing Separation Guide [1] is installed properly.
F-4-292
8) Remove the Separation Guide from the Film Unit.

2 leaf springs
[1]
SIDE VIEW
[A]
F-4-294
F-4-293
4-152
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide > Procedure
4-153
Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide
CAUTION:
Example of improper installation:
Preparations
Illustration at the center: The Fixing Separation Guide is placed on the rib [A].
Illustration at the right: The Fixing Separation Guide is installed in opposite direction.
Checking method:
3) Remove the Film Unit.
After installing the Fixing Separation Guide, swing the guide with your finger. If it is
installed properly, it is stable. If not, it becomes wobbly.
When installing the Leaf Spring while the guide is not installed properly, the spring
will be expanded awkwardly.
Procedure
1) Clean the Fixing Separation Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

F-4-295
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide > Procedure
4-153
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Shutter Cover > Procedure
Cleaning the Shutter Cover
4-154
3) Remove the Shutter Unit.

4 screws
Preparations
x4
Procedure
NOTE:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Film Unit and Pressure Roller.
1) Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly. (Place it in the position where the Drawer
connector side faces up.)
F-4-297
4) Clean the Shutter Cover with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

3 connectors
Harness Guide [A]
Connectors
x3
Drawer connector
Harness
[A]
F-4-298
F-4-296
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Shutter Cover > Procedure
4-154
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing > Procedure
Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller

Bearing
4-155
2) When installing/removing it, to prevent the Pressure Roller from being damaged, insert the
paper (approx. 5mm) under the Fixing Delivery Lower Guide to make a space between the
Inner Delivery Guide and the Pressure roller.
Preparations
Paper Inner Delivery

Guide

Space
3) Remove the Film Unit.
Procedure
NOTE:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Pressure Roller.
Pressure Roller
Inner Delivery
Guide
Paper
1) Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide.

1 screw
3 hooks
About 5mm
thickness
Pressure Roller
F-4-300
Hooks
Hook
Fixing inlet guide
3) Lift the right side and remove the Pressure Roller Unit.
F-4-299
CAUTION:
At installation, install it after fitting the 3 hooks to the notches.
Pressure roller unit

F-4-301
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing > Procedure
4-155
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing > Actions after Replacement
4-156
4) Remove the Pressure Roller and the 2 Pressure Roller Bearings from the Pressure Roller
Unit.
2 bearing holders
1 E-ring
1 gear
Gear
Pressure roller
Bearing bearing
holder
E-ring
Bearing
holder
Roller unit
Pressure roller
bearing
F-4-302

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing > Actions after Replacement
4-156
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide > Procedure
Pickup Feed System
4-157
Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide

Preparations
Preparations
Procedure
1) Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Feed contact point guide
F-4-303
Procedure
1) Clean the Transfer Guide with the lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-305
Secondary transfer guide
F-4-304
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide > Procedure
4-157
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Assembly > Procedure
Cleaning the Registration Roller
4-158
Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Assembly
Preparations
Preparations
Procedure
Procedure
1) Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to soil the ITB.
1) Clean the Secondary Transfer Guide (area covered by black sheet) and the inside of the
Pre-registration Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Secondary Transfer Guide
Pre-registration Guide Assembly
Registration roller
F-4-306
2) Clean the Outer Registration Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while
rotating it.
F-4-308
2) Clean the outside of the Pre-registration Guide (area covered by black sheet) with lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
Registration roller
F-4-307
Pre-registration Guide
Assembly
F-4-309
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Assembly > Procedure
4-158
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet > Procedure
Cleaning the Transparency Sensor
4-159
Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof

Sheet
Preparations
Preparations
Procedure
1) Clean the Transparency Sensor with lint-free paper moistened with water in one direction.
Procedure
1) Remove the front stop ring and separate the arm.
Transparency sensor
Arm
Stop ring
F-4-310
2) Clean the Prism with lint-free paper.
Stop ring
Prism
F-4-311
Arm
F-4-312
4-159
2) Remove the wire from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover.
4-160
4) Clean the Lightproof Sheet with dry lint-free paper.
Wire
Lightproof Sheet
Right lower cover
F-4-313
F-4-315
3) Clean the Vertical Path Sensor with dry lint-free paper.
F-4-314
4-160
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller > Procedure
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly

Preparations
4-161
Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller

Preparations
Procedure
Procedure
1) Open the Fixing Delivery Guide.
2) Clean the inside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with
2) Clean the Post-fixing Roller 1 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it.
alcohol.
Post-fixing roller

F-4-318
F-4-316
3) Clean the Post-fixing Roller 2 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it.
3) Clean the outside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
Post-fixing roller
F-4-319
F-4-317
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller > Procedure
4-161
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel > Procedure
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller
4-162
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel
Preparations
Preparations
Procedure
Procedure
1) Open the Right Lower Cover.
2) Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 1 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating
2) Clean the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol
the gear.
while rotating it.
Duplex feed upper rollers
F-4-320
F-4-322
3) Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating
it.

Duplex feed upper wheels
F-4-323
F-4-321
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel > Procedure
4-162
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis, and the First, Second and Third Delivery Rollers > Procedure
4-163
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Lower Roller, Wheel

Preparations
Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and

Wheeis, and the First, Second and Third Delivery
Rollers
Preparations
Procedure
1) Open the Right Lower Cover.

2) Clean the Duplex Feed Lower Roller, Wheel with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol
while rotating it.
Procedure
1) Clean the the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis, and the First, Second and
Third Delivery Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Duplex feed lower rollers
Second and Third

delivery roller
F-4-324
F-4-326
Second and Third

delivery wheels
Duplex feed lower wheels

F-4-325
F-4-327
4-163
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis, and the First, Second and Third Delivery Rollers > Procedure
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit > Preparations
4-164
Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit

Preparations
2 screws (TP; M3)
1 claw
F-4-328
x3
Claw
F-4-329
F-4-331

1 rubber cap
1 screw (remove)
1 screw (loosen)
F-4-330
Loosen
Rubber cap
Front right cover
F-4-332
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit > Preparations
4-164
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-165
Procedure
4) Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover.
1 screw
1) Remove the 2 connectors and 3 wire saddles.
2 hooks
Wire saddles
x3
x2
x2
Reverse trail edge guide

Hooks
Connectors
Inner delivery cover
F-4-334
F-4-333
2) Open the Toner Replacement Cover 1 and the Front Cover.

3) Remove the Right Front Cover 1.
2 Screws
2 Hooks
Hook
x2
Toner
replacement
cover
Right front cover 1
Front cover
Hook
F-4-335
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-165
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the First Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-166
Removing the First Delivery Unit
4) Remove the Second and Third Delivery Unit.

4 screws
Preparations
Second and third delivery unit
x4

4) Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover.
5) Remove the Second and Third Delivery Unit.
Procedure
1) Remove the Right Upper Cover Latch.
2 screws
2) Remove the Right Lower Cover Latch.
F-4-336
2 screws
Right upper cover latch
CAUTION:
After installing the Second and Third Delivery Unit, make sure that the Sensor Flag in 1
place works normally.
x4
Reference: Second delivery sensor, I/O>DC-CON>P005>13

Sensor flag
Right lower cover latch
F-4-338
Second delivery
sensor
F-4-337
4-166
3) Open the Fixing Assembly and remove the Fixing Gear Cover.
4-167
CAUTION:
1 screw
Fixing gear cover
At installation, align the First Delivery Sensor and the Sensor Flag and install it.
Sensor flag
First delivery tray
full sensor
Fixing assembly
Sensor flag
F-4-339
4) Remove the First Delivery Unit.
F-4-341
2 screws
1 stepped screw
CAUTION:
After installing the First Delivery Unit, make sure that the 2 Sensor Flags work normally.
x3
Reference: First delivery sensor,
First delivery unit
I/O>DC-CON>P005>13
Reference: First delivery tray full sensor, I/O>DC-CON>P005>13

Sensor flag
First
delivery tray
full sensor
First delivery
sensor
F-4-340
F-4-342
4-167
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Duplex Unit > Procedure
Removing the Duplex Unit
4-168
3) Hold the sides of Duplex Unit and remove it.
Preparations
Procedure
1) Remove the Front Cover of Right Unit.
1 screw
1 claw
F-4-345
CAUTION:
When removing the Duplex Unit, note that the Right Door Rotation Hinge and the spring
are easily disassembled.
Right door
rotation hinge
Claw
F-4-343
Spring
2) Remove the connector and the grounding wire.

1 screw
1 wire saddle
2 connectors
Connectors
F-4-346
Wire saddle
Grounding wire
F-4-344
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Duplex Unit > Procedure
4-168
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
4-169
3) Tilt the shaft, pull the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller and remove it.
Preparations
CAUTION:
Be careful of the Split Pin securing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.

2) Remove the Duplex Unit.
Multi-purpose tray
pickup roller
Procedure
1) Remove the Both Angle Guide.
Split pin
Shaft
2 screws
x2
F-4-349
CAUTION:
At installation, be sure to fit the Split Pin into the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.
F-4-347
2) Remove the gear, 2 stop rings and the bushing.
Multi-purpose tray pickup roller

Split pin
Bushing
Gear
F-4-350
Stop rings
F-4-348
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure
4-169
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
4-170
2) While holding down the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft, remove the Middle
Feed Guide.
Preparations
1 Screw
2 Shaft Supports
1 Claw
2) Remove the Duplex Unit.

3) Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.
Procedure
Middle Feed Guide
1) While opening the Multi-purpose Tray Sub Cover, remove the Front Feed Guide.
1 Screw
Shaft
Supports
2 Shaft Supports
2 Claws
x2
Multi-purpose Tray
Sub Cover
Multi-purpose Tray
Separation
Roller Shaft
Claw
Multi-purpose Tray
Sub Cover
F-4-352
3) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller.

1 claw
Front Feed Guide
Claws
Shaft
Supports
F-4-351
Multi-purpose tray
separation roller
Claw
F-4-353
4-170
CAUTION:
4-171
CAUTION: Installing the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide
Align the groove of Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller with the protrusion of limiter
and push it until it clicks.
Multi-purpose tray
separation roller
In order to align the height of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide, be sure
to follow the following steps when installing.
Be careful not to remove the 2 rubbers of the Middle Feed Guide when installing.
When the rubbers are not properly installed, abnormal noise may occur at pickup
from the Multi-purpose Tray.
1. While holding down the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft, insert the Middle
Feed Guide from the hole [A] of the plate, and install the 2 Shaft Supports to the
Feed Guide Shaft.
Middle Feed Guide
Protrusion
Limiter
[A]
Shaft
Supports
Multi-purpose Tray
Separation
Roller Shaft
F-4-354
2. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Sub Cover, and fit the hole of the Middle Feed Guide to
the claw of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Frame.
Middle Feed Guide
Claw
Multi-purpose Tray
Sub Cover
4-171
3. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Sub Cover, and fit the holes of the Front Feed Guide to
the 2 claws of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Frame.
x2
CAUTION:
Open the Multi-purpose Tray Sub Cover and make sure that the bearing part of Multipurpose Tray Pickup Sensor Flag is surely installed.
Bearing part
Bearing part
Front Feed Guide
4-172
Claws
Sensor flag
Multi-purpose Tray
Sub Cover
F-4-355
4. Remove only the 2 Shaft Supports of the Middle Feed Guide from the Feed Guide
Shaft.
5. Align the height of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide, and install the
4 Shaft Supports of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide to the Feed
Guide Shaft.
Middle Feed Guide
Shaft Supports
Front Feed Guide
Shaft Supports
F-4-356
Check by hand whether the height of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed
Guide is aligned.
4-172
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Feed Roller > Procedure
Removing the Pickup Roller
4-173
Removing the Feed Roller
Procedure
Procedure
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removing step of cassette 1 Pickup Roller. Go through the
same procedure for the Pickup Roller of cassette 2.
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removing steps of cassette 1 Feed Roller. Go through the
same procedure for the Feed Roller of cassette 2.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller.
1) Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2.
1)Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2.
2) Remove the Pickup Roller.
2)Remove the Cassette Feed Roller.
1 pin
1 tab
1 tab
F-4-358
F-4-357
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Feed Roller > Procedure
4-173
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear > Procedure
Removing the Separation Roller
4-174
Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear
Preparations
Preparations
1) Remove the Cassette1 and Cassette2.

2) Remove the Pickup Roller.
Procedure
3) Remove the Feed Roller.
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removing procedure of cassette 1 Separation Roller. Go
through the same procedure for the Separation Roller of cassette 2.
Procedure
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removing procedure of cassette 1 Pickup Assembly Idler
Gear. Go through the same procedure for the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear of cassette 2.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
1)Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2.

2) Remove the Separation Roller.
1) Remove the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear.
1 tab
1 tab
F-4-359
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear > Procedure
F-4-360
4-174
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Lower Cover > Procedure
Removing the Right Lower Cover
4-175
1-2) When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed, remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 and
the Right Front Cover 3.
Preparations
1 claw
1 screw
1) Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2.
Procedure
Right front cover 3

NOTE:
If the Cassette Pedestal is connected, perform step 1-1).

If the Cassette Pedestal is not connected, perform step 1-2).
If the Side Paper Deck is connected, perform step 1-3).
Claw
1-1) When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, remove the Right Front Cover 3.
1 screw
F-4-362
1-3) When the side paper deck is installed, remove the side paper deck, remove the Deck
Connect Cover.
1 screw
Right front cover 3

F-4-361
F-4-363
4-175
2) Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover.
4-176
6) Remove the 2 screws and the connector.
3) If the Cassette Pedestal is connected, Open the Cassette Right Lower Cover.
4) Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover.
F-4-364
5) Remove the Right Rear Cover 3.

3 claws
1 hook
Claw
x4
Right rear cover 3

Connector
F-4-366
Claws
F-4-365
4-176
7) Remove the E-rings at the front and the rear sides, and disconnect the arm while closing
4-177
8) Remove the wire from the host machine and remove the Right Lower Cover.
the Right Lower Cover.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the roller.
Arm
Wire
Stop ring
Right lower cover
F-4-368
Stop ring
Arm
F-4-367
4-177
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit > Procedure
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
4-178
3) Remove the Pickup Harness.

1 wire saddle
Preparations
1 edge saddle
2 connectors

2) Remove the Right Lower Cover.
Connector
x2
Procedure
1)Lift the lever and remove the Right Front Inner Cover.
2 screws
x2
Wire saddle
Edge saddle
x2
Connector
D
Lever
F-4-371
4) Hold the Pickup Guide and remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit.
4 screws (RS; M4)
Right front inner cover
1 screw (RS; M3)

F-4-369
Pickup guide
2) Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and the Right Rear Inner Cover simultaneously.
2 Screws
x5
1 Shaft Support
x2
Right rear inner cover
Cassette 1 pickup unit

F-4-372

F-4-370
4-178
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path Sensor > Procedure
Removing the Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path

Sensor
4-179
3) Disconnect the round shape terminal, and 2 Connectors.

1 Screws
Preparations
Round Shape
Terminal

3) Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit.
x2
Procedure
1) Remove the cam.
1 Claw
Connector
F-4-375
4) Turn over the Pre-registration Guide Unit.
Cam
2 Connectors
2 Hooks
Claw
x2
Pre-registration
Guide Unit
Hook
F-4-373
2) Remove the Gear Unit.

2 Screws
Hook
x2
Gear Unit
F-4-376
F-4-374
4-179
4-180
8) Open the Edge Saddle, and remove the Vertical Path Sensor. (4 Claws, 1 Connector)
NOTE:
In the following procedure, remove only sensors that require replacement.
Connector
5) Remove the Transparency Sensor. (4 Claws, 1 Connector)
Edge Saddle
6) Remove the Registration Sensor. (4 Claws, 1 Connector)
Registration Sensor
x2
x4
Transparency Sensor
x8
F-4-379
F-4-377
7) Turn over the Pre-registration Guide Unit, and remove the Paper Feed Guide.
1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook
Hook
Paper Feed Guide
F-4-378
4-180
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover
Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover
4-181
2) Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover.

3) Lift the Lower Guide and remove the arm.
NOTE:
If the Cassette Pedestal is connected, perform step 1-1).

If the Cassette Pedestal is not connected, perform step 1-2).
Lower guide
1-1)When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, open the Cassette Right Lower Cover.
Arm
F-4-382
4) Remove the Cassette Right Upper Cover.
Cassette right lower cover
F-4-380
1-2)When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed, remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1.
1 claw
Cassette right upper cover

F-4-383
Claw
F-4-381
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover
4-181
Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit

Preparations
4-182
2) Remove the Pickup Harness.

1 wire saddle
1 edge saddle
2 connectors

Connector
3) Remove the Cassette Right Upper Cover.
x2
Procedure
1) Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and the Right Rear Inner Cover simultaneously.
Wire saddle
x2
2 Screws
Edge saddle
1 Shaft Support
x2
Right rear inner cover
Connector
F-4-384
3) Remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit.

4 screws
x4
Cassette 2 pickup unit

F-4-385
4-182
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure
4-183
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit

Preparations
1) Remove the Cassette.
2) When removing the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit, make sure to remove the Cassette 1
Pickup Unit.
3) When removing the Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit, make sure to remove the Cassette 2
Pickup Unit.
Procedure
NOTE:
This procedure describes the removing steps of Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit. Go
through the same procedure for Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit.
1) Remove the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit.

1 connector
1 wire saddle
2 screws
1 hook
Cassette size detection unit
x2 Connector
Hook
Wire saddle
F-4-386
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure
4-183
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Option > Removing the Reader ADF Unit > Procedure
Option
4-184
6) Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable.

2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
Removing the Reader ADF Unit
1 Cable Guide
Procedure
1) Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOSC (Level 2), and
Reader
power cable
x2
move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position.
x2
2) Remove the Reader Right Cover, Reader Left Cover, and Reader Front Cover.
Cable guide
Wire saddles

2 screws (TP; M3)
1 claw
Connectors
F-4-388
x3
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
5 Claws
Rubber cap
x2
Claws
Claw
x5
F-4-387
5) Close the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover.
Rubber cap
F-4-389
8) Disconnect the Reader Signal Cable.
4-184
9) Install the Scanner System Fixation Screws that have been kept in a safe place since
installation.
4-185
11) Release the fixation on the left side of the Reader Unit.
1 Boss
Screws (Binding; M4x8)
2 Screws
x2
x4
Boss
F-4-390
F-4-392
10) Install the handle.
12) Release the fixation on the front side of the Reader Unit.
2 Bosses
1 Boss
2 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8)
2 Screws (Binding; M4x8)

Boss
x2
x2
F-4-391
F-4-393
4-185
4-186
13) Remove the 2 Reader Mounting Plates on the right side of the Reader Unit.
x2
F-4-394
14) Lift the Reader Unit with 2 or more people and remove it.
CAUTION: How to hold the Reader Unit
When lifting the Reader Unit, be sure to work with 2 or more people. Also, be sure to lift
the equipment horizontally.
Be sure to lift the Reader Unit carefully as it is heavy at the rear.
When installing the Reader Unit on the host machine, be careful not to get the cables
and fingers caught.
Be sure to hold the Reader Unit at the positions as shown in the figure.
F-4-395
4-186
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine
Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption

Board
The kind of data to handle
Data to operate this machine is largely divided into 2 categories.
System software
Common data among the same model
Data in SRAM and HDD Factory settings value for the target machine and the values in Address
on the boards
Book and Settings/Registration, etc. entered by the user.
T-4-37
Upgrading and installation is used as the terms to handle the system software.
Backup and restoration is used as the terms to handle data in SRAM and HDD on the boards.
Version-up
Backup Restore
Settings/Registration
Service Mode
System software
F-4-396
Be sure to use the latest possible backup data for the SRAM data of each board.
If restoring the SRAM data backed up long time ago, image failure, etc., may occur due to
mismatch between the backup data and the parameter for host machine adjustment changed
after backup.
Handling SRAM data of this machine

With the normal service, the contents of SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed
up to HDD in service mode and restored after replacing the board.
If there is an HDD Encryption Board, the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board
recorded on SRAM is lost when replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, and the contents of
HDD cannot to be read. Therefore, restoration cannot be done although backup is performed.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, user data needs to be reentered in the same way
as when replacing the HDD with a new one.
Part to be Description
Procedure
replaced
Main
SRAM of the Main Controller PCB Hold down 2 and 8 to start the
Controller 2 2 includes user data and MEAP- machine, and then use SST to
related data.
clear the encryption key of the HDD
If there are any files backed up
Encryption Board.
from RUI by the user, restore them Use SST or a USB memory device
after recovery.
to Format ALL and install the
Explain the user that the
system.
reinstallation of everything related
to MEAP is necessary.
4-187
When TPM is
enabled (ON)
After the
system is
properly
installed,
enable TPM
to execute a
backup of TPM.
Reference: If Meapback.bin
is saved using SST, it can be
restored after replacing the Main
Controller PCB 2. This makes the
to MEAP unnecessary.
New HDD Install the system software on the Hold down 2 and 8 to start the
new HDD after formatting it by
machine, and then use SST or a
SST.
USB memory device to Format ALL
and install the system.
from RUI by the user, restore them
after recovery.
Explain the user that the
to MEAP is necessary.
Reference: If Meapback.bin
is saved using SST, it can be
restored after replacing the Main
Controller PCB 2. This makes the
to MEAP unnecessary.
After the
system is
properly
installed,
enable TPM
to execute a
backup of TPM.
System
To upgrade the system version,
installation the Assist Mode of SST is
when the recommended.
HDD is
properly
working.
Enter service mode and select the No additional

following:
work
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DOWNLOAD > OK
Use SST to install the system
software in Assist mode.
Backup
Enter service mode to make a
of Reader backup of SRAM data into the
Controller HDD.
PCB
Select the following to execute

No additional
system backup: COPIER >
work
FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP
Replace the Reader Controller PCB
Select the following to restore the
system: COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM RSRAMRES
4-187
4
Part to be
replaced
Backup
of DC
Controller
PCB
Description
Procedure
When TPM is
enabled (ON)
No additional
work
Enter service mode to make a

backup of SRAM data into the
HDD.
Select the following to execute

system backup: COPIER >
FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP
Replace the DC Controller PCB
Select the following to restore the
system: COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM DSRAMRES
HDD
An encryption key of the HDD
Hold down 2 and 8 to start the
After the
Encryption Encryption Board is newly made. machine, and then use SST or a
system is
Board
Install the system software on the USB memory device to Format ALL properly
HDD after formatting it by SST.
and install the system.
installed,
enable TPM
from RUI by the user, restore them
to execute a
after recovery.
backup of TPM.
TPM Board When there is a backup of TPM,
restore TPM.
When there is no backup of TPM,
select the following: Settings/
Registration > Management
Settings
Restore TPM when there is a

backup of TPM.
When there is no backup of TMP,
use RUI to make a backup, and
then select the following to restore
from RUI: Settings/Registration
> Management Settings > Data
Management > Initialize All Data/
Settings; enable TPM to make a
backup.
Follow the
description on
the left.
Items which needs to be backed up by the user when replacing the

HDD
The table below shows the items whose settings can be saved. Ask the user to save them
before replacing the HDD and the Main Controller PCB 2. Part of the items can be recovered
from Meapbac.bin.
User
Service
Address Lists
Settings/Registration > Paper Type
Management Settings
Quick Menu Settings
Remote UI(Import/Export)
None
None
SST(Meapback)
Quick Menu Settings
SST(Meapback)
Mail Box Settings
Remote UI(Back Up/Restore Settings) None
Advanced Box Settings
Printer Settings
Web Access Favorites
None
MEAP Settings
SMS
SST(Meapback)
Key information to TPM to use for coding Settings/Registration > Administrator > None
Management Settings >TPM Settings
T-4-40
Items with no backup method when replacing the HDD

Regarding the items in the table below, there is no method for the user to back them up. Ask
T-4-38
Items which needs to be backed up when replacing the Main

Controller PCB 2
the user to make settings again. Part of the items can be recovered from Meapbac.bin.
Default setting
When replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board
on SRAM is lost and HDD cannot be accessed. For recovery, perform "Items which needs to
be backed up by the user when replacing the HDD" as well in addition to the table below to
format the HDD.
User
Forwarding Settings
Settings/Registration(Except Paper Type Management

Settings)
Mail Box
Memory RX Inbox
Confidential Fax Inbox
Form for Superimpose Image
Remote UI(Back Up/Restore Settings)
Auto Adjust Gradation
Enforcement of Auto Adjust Gradation
Key information to TPM to use for coding
Settings / Registration > Administrator >

Management Settings > TPM Settings
None
Service mode MN-CON Settings
4-188
User
Service
None
SST(Meapback)
Other Register Options Shortcuts
None
SST(Meapback)
History of the setting
None
SST(Meapback)
None
None
Document of non-transmission
None
None
Settings/Registration : Management Settings : Device Management >

None
Display Log
Settings/Registration : Management Settings : Device Management > Key None
and Certificate Settings
PS font
None
None
None
None
Remote UI(Back Up/Restore Settings)
T-4-41
T-4-39
4-188
4-189
Using SST enables the following:

SST has the following functions that are necessary for service work:
1. To download system software
2. To copy the system software into a USB memory device.
3. To backup and restore information of SRAM and MEAP in Main Controller 2.
4. To format HDD
5. To collect device log
6. To clear the encryption key of HDD Encryption Board
Upgrading using a USB memory device

Using a USB memory device, the following functions are available to upgrade the system:
1. To download system software
2. To clear download file
3. To format HDD
4. To collect device log
4-189
Adjustment
Controller
Main
Formation System
Image
Feed System
Pickup
Adjustment
Adjustment > Main Controller > HDD
Main Controller
5-2
Aftter
Replacement
HDD
How to Replace Refer to Removing the HDD.
the Parts
Before
1) Back up the Settings/Registration data.
Replacing
Use the Remote UI.The data can be collectively saved in a DCM file format using
the steps below.
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/
Export All > Export
Target data:
Settings/Registration Basic Information
Forwarding Settings
Box Settings
Department ID Management Settings
Main Menu Settings
Web Access Settings
Favorite Settings
Address Book
User Access Control for Advanced Box
Quick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting Information
User Setting Information
Service Mode Settings (hidden by default)
* It can be displayed by selecting "1" in service mode (Lv1) > Option > USER >
SMD-EXPT. Printing out the Settings/Registration data becomes unnecessary by
saving the service mode setting values.
Select "Select All" for the items to export, enter the encryption password, and then
select "Select Exporting".
Adjustment > Main Controller > HDD
When using
the Card
Reader and
imageWARE
Accounting
Manager
1) Format the HDD.

1-1) Start the machine in safe mode (turn ON the main power switch while
simultaneously pressing 2+8 keys).
1-2) Execute Formatting All Partitions using SST.
2) Download the system software
2-1) Download the system software (system/LANG/RUI, etc.) using SST.
3) Initialize the key/certificate/CA certificate.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4)Turn OFF and then ON the power
5) Restore the backup data.
Use the Remote UI. Follow the steps below to specify the DCM file stored earlier.
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/
Export All > Import
Enter the encryption password entered at exporting, and select "Start Importing".
Turn OFF and then ON the power after importing.
6) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added
by the user, ask the user to execute regeneration.
7) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust). Settings/Registration mode:
Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value
of the leading card which is used for Department ID.
Then, press OK button. (e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for
Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following
operations from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management >
Page Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings>IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them.
Then, turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User
Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only
the downloaded card ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager.
Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE
Accounting Manager is collected.
Points to Note when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the
HDD which was installed the system software of the other machine (different serial
number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation.
If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
5-2
5
Points to note
when using
an HDD with
system software
already installed
Adjustment > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2
Use of an HDD in which the system software of another machine (a machine of a

different serial number) is installed for a troubleshooting is possible if it is an HDD
of a model of iR-ADV C5255 series and later. However, be sure to format it after
installing it. Operation is not guaranteed if it is continued to be used as is.
In addition, an HDD used in iR-ADV C5255 series and later cannot be accessed
from a PC due to enhanced security.
T-5-1

How to Replace Refer to Removing the Main Controller PCB 1.
the Parts
Operation at
Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
Replacement
DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is
replaced.
T-5-2
5-3

How to Replace Refer to Removing the Main Controller PCB 2.
the Parts
Before
Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory
Replacement
device or an HDD from download mode.
* However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not
possible. It is therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory
device.
Preparation:
USB memory device where the system software for this machine has been
registered using the SST
Or, USB memory device formatted as FAT32 which has been checked that it can
be recognized by the host machine
In order to let the USB memory device be recognized in service mode, create an
empty folder on the USB memory device and name the folder with the same name
used when registering the system software for this machine using the SST.
E.g.: iAC5255
Connect the USB memory device where system software of the model to be
connected is stored.
2) The download Mode (USB) will appear on the touch panel. Press the [5] key on
the Control Panel.
3) The Backup Menu (USB) will appear. Press the [7] key.
4) Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is stored in the USB
memory device.
Temporarily backing up SRAM data to an HDD (only when the HDD Data
Encryption Kit is not installed):
2) When the download Menu (HDD) appears, press the [5] key on the Control
Panel.
3) When the Backup Menu (HDD) appears, press the [6] key on the Control Panel.
4) Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is stored in the internal
HDD.
At replacement
Adjustment > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2
Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB.
2 boards of DDR2-SDRAMs (3 boards when the option DDR2-SDRAM is
installed)
Bypass PCB
Memory PCB
5-3
5
Aftter
Replacement
Points to Note
Restrictions
Adjustment > Main Controller > TPM PCB
5-4
When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an USB memory device:

2)Connect the USB memory device to USB I/F (Host) of the machine.
When the download Menu (USB) appears, press the [8] key on the Control
Panel.
3)The download Menu 2nd (USB) will appear. Press the [2] key.
4)Press the [0] key for confirmation.
5)The Restore Menu (USB) will appear. Press the [2] key.
6)Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is restored from the USB
memory device.
7)Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (USB).
8)Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host machine.
When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an HDD:
2)When the download Menu (HDD) appears, press the [8] key on the Control
Panel.
3)When the download Menu 2nd (HDD) appears, press the [2] key on the Control
Panel.
4)Press the [0] key for confirmation.
5)When the Restore Menu (HDD) appears, press the [2] key on the Control Panel.
6)Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM data is restored from the
internal HDD.
7)Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD).
8)Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host machine.
If mismatch between the box management information included in the SRAM
data and box data on the HDD occurs, which is caused by starting the machine
normally without restoring SRAM data after replacing the Main Controller 2 PCB,
the box management information is initialized. As a result, box documents on the
HDD are deleted.
Do not transfer the following parts to another machine (a machine of a different
serial number).
The machine will not start up normally, and may become unrecoverable in some
cases.
Main Controller PCB 2 (with the Memory PCB unremoved)
Memory PCB
DC controller PCB
How to Replace Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB.
the Parts
Before
Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Replacing
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2)
ACTIVE is displayed and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes later.
Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
Aftter Replacing Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2)
ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes
later. Restoration is complete.
Prohibited
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use
the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine.
Operation
T-5-4
TPM PCB
How to Replace Refer to Security Function (Encryption Key, Certificate and Protection of
the Parts
Password)
* Be sure to perform the installation work by referring to the procedure above.
T-5-5
T-5-3
Adjustment > Main Controller > TPM PCB
5-4
Adjustment > Image Formation System > ITB
5-5
ITB
Developing Assembly
Adjustment
procedure
Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it

differs depending on the color.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y Initialization of Y Developing
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M Initialization of M Developing
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C Initialization of C Developing
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K Initialization of Bk Developing
After replacement, execute the user mode (Settings/Registration > Adjustment/
Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation).
How to Replace Refer to Removing the ITB.

the Parts
Adjustment
Execute the user mode (Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust
Procedure
Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation).
T-5-6
Patch sensor
T-5-9
How to Replace Refer to Removing the Patch Sensor (Front/Center/Rear).

the Parts
Adjustment
When replacing the Patch Sensor, enter the alpha value of the Patch Sensor in the
procedure
following service mode.
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-ALPHA Input Patch Sensor alpha value
T-5-7
ITB Unit
How to Replace Refer to Removing the ITB Unit.
the Parts
Adjustment
procedure
T-5-8
Adjustment > Image Formation System > ITB
5-5
Adjustment > Image Formation System > Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
Adjustment
Procedure
How to Replace Refer to Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.

the Parts
Adjustment
Procedure
Execute the ITB equilibrium position detection in service mode. (COPIER>
FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-INIT) (Level1) This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3
minutes.
After executing the above, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITBPOS and ITB-POS2 are within the range from -350 to 350.
If not, execute the following adjustment.
Preparation
1) Open the ITB Cover.
2) Remove the ITB Motor [1].
4 Screws [3]
1 Connector [2]
Procedure
1) Put markings as shown in the figure below to use as the reference when
correcting the position.
Mark
Mark
When the values are above 350

Move the ITB Motor Support Plate up.
After adjustment, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITB-POS
[3]
[1]
x4
5-6
[2]
Loosen
[3]
Adjustment > Image Formation System > Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
5-6
5
Adjustment
Procedure
Adjustment > Image Formation System > Hopper Unit
When the values are below -350

Move the ITB Motor Support Plate down.
After adjustment, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITB-POS
5-7

How to Replace
the Parts
Adjustment
Procedure
Refer to Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller/Secondary Transfer

Separation Guide Unit.
When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, execute the following service
mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TNR-COAT
T-5-11
Hopper Unit
Loosen
T-5-10
How to Replace Refer to Removing the Hopper (M/Y/C/Bk).

the Parts
Adjustment
When installing the removed Toner Container, do not shake it.
Procedure
When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously, install the Main Drive Unit and
Hopper Unit in that order.
Toner supply failure may occur.
In case that the Developing Assembly is replaced simultaneously, execute the
following service mode to initialize the Developing Assembly before installing the
Toner Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-X (X: Color changed)
If the Toner Container is installed first, TD ratio of the Developing Assembly cannot
be set to a correct value.
T-5-12
Adjustment > Image Formation System > Hopper Unit
5-7
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Pre-secondary Transfer Guide Adjustment
Pickup Feed System
5-8
When the right side of image is distorted

Move the front side of the guide toward the inside of the machine.
Geometric Characteristics Adjustment
Loosen
Geometric characteristics adjustment is executed when image distortion (on the entire image
and the trailing edge only) occurs.
The following 3 adjustments are available as the geometric characteristics adjustment.
1) Pre-secondary transfer guide adjustment
2) Registration pressure adjustment
3) Fixing alignment adjustment
Applicable image error Adjustable maximum value Adjustment order
Pre-secondary transfer
guide adjustment
Registration pressure
adjustment
Fixing alignment
adjustment
Fan-shaped distortion
+/- 0.7 mm *1
Distortion on the trailing

edge
Distortion on the trailing
edge
+/- 0.3 mm *1
+/- 0.3 mm *1
Feed direction
T-5-13
F-5-2
When the left side of image is distorted
Pre-secondary Transfer Guide Adjustment

Adjustment is possible by loosening the screws as shown in the figure below and moving the
Move the rear side of the guide toward the inside of the machine.
Pre-secondary Transfer Guide toward the inside of the machine.
Loosen
The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum approx. 0.7 mm. (Differs
according to the paper type)
Symptom
Operation
The right side of image is distorted.

The left side of image is distorted.
Move the front side of the guide

toward the inside of the machine.
Move the rear side of the guide
toward the inside of the machine.
Feed direction
T-5-14
F-5-3
F-5-1
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Pre-secondary Transfer Guide Adjustment
5-8
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Registration Roller Pressure Adjustment
Registration Roller Pressure Adjustment
5-9
When the left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted
Adjustment is possible by turning the screw located as shown in the figure below. Check the
Turn the screw counterclockwise.
position of the Adjustment Plate before adjustment.

The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum approx. 0.3mm. (Differs
Symptom
The left side of the trailing
edge of image is distorted.
The right side of the trailing
edge of image is distorted.
Operation
Points to check
Turn the screw

counterclockwise.
Turn the screw clockwise.
The Adjustment Plate moves

to the right.
The Adjustment Plate moves
to the left.
T-5-15
Feed direction
Screw
Adjustment
Plate
F-5-5
When the right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted

Turn the screw clockwise.
Evaluation
Objective
F-5-4
Feed direction
F-5-6
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Registration Roller Pressure Adjustment
5-9
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Fixing Alignment Adjustment
Fixing Alignment Adjustment
5-10
When the right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted
Adjustment is possible by loosening the screw located as shown in the figure below and
Move the Adjustment Plate up.
moving the Adjustment Plate up and down. Check the position of the Adjustment Plate before
adjustment.
The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum approx. 0.3mm. (Differs
Loosen

Symptom
Operation
The right side of the trailing edge of Move the Adjustment Plate up.
image is distorted.
The left side of the trailing edge of
Move the Adjustment Plate down.
image is distorted.
T-5-16
Feed direction
Adjustment
Plate
F-5-8
When the left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted
Evaluation
Objective
Move the Adjustment Plate down.
F-5-7
Note:
This procedure cannot be performed correctly when the Fixing Assembly is installed. Be
sure to remove the Fixing Assembly at adjustment.
Loosen
Feed direction
F-5-9
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Fixing Alignment Adjustment
5-10
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Method of Setting Special Paper
aMethod of Setting 8K and 16K (Chinese Paper)

1) Set the original detection size to AB configuration.r
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODEL-SZ = 0
2) Enable detection and display of Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K and 16K).
5-11
Method of Setting Special Paper

Service mode
COPIER > OPTION > CST > CSTX-UY > Setting number
X: Cassette number, Y: Size category (X: 1 to 4, Y: 1 to 4)
(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW = 1

3) Change the setting of Cassette 1 from EXEC to 16K.
(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-K-SW = 1
4) (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW >MODELSZ2 = 0.
5) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Size category
Size category
U1
U2
U3
U4
Size
FLSC, A-FLS, OFI, E-OFI, A-LTRR, A-LGL, G-LGL, A-OFI, M-OFI, FA4, FB4
K-LGLR, G-LTRR
K-LGL, A-LTR, G-LTR
B-OFI
T-5-17
Setting No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
42
43
Size
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
A-OFI
M-OFI
FA4
FB4
T-5-18
Example: When setting G-LTR to Cassette 2

COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST2-U3> 31
Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Method of Setting Special Paper
5-11
Troubleshooting
Check
Initial
Print
Test
items
Troubleshooting
upgrade
Version
Self Diagnosis
Controller
log
Debug
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Initial check items list
6-2
Initial Check
Initial check items list
Item
Site Environment
No.
1
2
Checking the Paper

Checking the Placement of Paper
Checking the Durables
Checking the Periodically
Replaced Parts
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Detail
Check
The voltage of the power supply is as rated (10%).

The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The
machine is not near a source of fi re or dust.
The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
The site is well ventilated, and the fl oor keeps the machine level.
The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
The paper is of a recommended type.
The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level.
If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached the time of replacement.
T-6-1
Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Initial check items list
6-2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Steps to select the test print TYPE
6-3
Test Print
Overview
This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as Yes in the following image check items with each test print.
If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.
Items
PG
TYPE
TYPE Pattern
Gradation
0
1to3
4
5
6
7to9
10
Normal copy / print

---(For R&D)
16 gradations
Full half-tone
Grid
---(For R&D)
MCYBk horizontal stripes
(sub scanning direction)
---(For R&D)
11
12
64-gradation
13
---(For R&D)
14
Full color 16-gradation
15to100 ---(For R&D)
Yes
Fogging
Transfer
Fault
Black line
White line
(Color line)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Uneven
Density
Yes
Uneven
Density
at the Front /
Rea
Right
Angle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Color
displacement,
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Straight
Lines
Yes
Yes
Yes
Originator
------Main controller PCB 2

---Main controller PCB 2
---T-6-2
Steps to select the test print TYPE

1) Set the number of print, paper size etc.
2) Select: COPIER > TEST > PG.
3) Select: COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE.
4) Enter the desired TYPE number and press OK key.
5) Select the corresponding color (setting 1 means output) in COLOR-Y/M/C/K.
6) Set the density in DENS-Y/M/C/K (this is enabled for TYPE=5 only).
7) Press start key.
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Steps to select the test print TYPE
6-3
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full half tone (TYPE=5)
6-4
How to use the test print

16 gradations (TYPE=4)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradation, fogging, white line and uneven density at front & rear.
Check item
Check method
Gradation
Check that 16 density gradation is properly reproduced.
Fogging
Check that fogging occurs on white image area only.
White line
Uneven density at
front & rear
Check that white line does not appear on entire image.

Check that uneven density does not appear at front & rear.
Assumed cause
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Developing Assembly
Failure of Photosensitive Drum (approx. 94mm)
Failure of Developing Cylinder (approx. 63mm)
T-6-3
F-6-1
Full half tone (TYPE=5)

This test print is for mainly checking the black line, white line and uneven density.
MEMO:
1. Select: service mode > COPIER > TEST > PG and specify developing color COLOR-Y/M/C/K to output the print by
developing color.
2. To change the density of test print, select: service mode > TEST > PG > DENS-Y/M/C/K and set the density.
Check item
Transfer failure
Black line
(color line)
White line
F-6-2
Uneven pitch
Uneven density
Check method
Assumed cause
Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire image. Failure of ITB (scratch, dirt)
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller (scratch, dirt)
Failure of Secondary Transfer Roller (scratch, dirt)
Check that black line does not appear on entire image.
Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
Check that white line does not appear on entire image.
Failure of ITB Unit
Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Dirt on laser light path
Check that uneven pitch does not appear on entire image.
Failure of Photosensitive Drum (approx. 94mm)
Failure of Developing Cylinder (approx. 94mm)
Check that uneven density does not appear on entire image.
Dirt on Dustproof Glass
Deterioration of ITB
T-6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full half tone (TYPE=5)
6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10)
6-5
Grid (TYPE=6)
This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement, right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy.
Check items
Uneven density
Black line (color line)

White line
Check method
Assumed cause
Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of

each color

Failure of developer in Developing Assembly
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller
Check that black line (color line) does not appear on solid area Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
of each color
Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each
Failure of ITB Unit
color
Dirt on Laser Light Path
T-6-5
F-6-3
MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10)

This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color, each color balance and white line on development.
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
Check items
Uneven density
Black line (color line)

White line
Check method
Assumed cause
Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of

each color

Failure of developer in Developing Assembly
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller
Check that black line (color line) does not appear on solid area Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
of each color
Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each
Failure of ITB Unit
color
Dirt on Laser Light Path
T-6-6
2.5 +1.5mm/-1.5mm
F-6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10)
6-5
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14)
6-6
64-gradations (TYPE=12)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time.
Check item
Check method
Gradation
Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced.
Fogging
Check that fogging appears on white image area only.
White line
Check that there is no white line on entire image.
Assumed cause
Failure of Developing Assembly
T-6-7
F-6-5
Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14)

This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance, gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging.
Check item
Gradation
Light areas
Check method
Fogging
Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in

each color.
Check that fogging appears on white image area only.
Gray balance
Check that density is even in each color on gray scale area.
Assumed cause
T-6-8
White
White
F-6-6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14)
6-6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure
Troubleshooting items
Image Faults
Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure
Troubleshooting items list

Category
Image
failure
Item
Displacement/blur/ Foggy image due to charge failure

smear/fogging
35mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration
35mm uneven density due to cycle variation of
Developing Cylinder
Dirt/line
95mm uneven density on paper lead edge
Blank image/line
Color spot due to laser exposure failure
Secondary transfer blank image
Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet
Guide
Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing
Separation Guide
Operation failure
6-7
Reference
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
Noise around the Fixing Film Unit

6-14
6-15
Process Unit cannot be closed.
Productivity is reduced on paper stack delivery in thin 6-16
paper mode (52g/m2 to 63g/m2). <Staple Finisher C1/
Saddle Stitch Finisher C1>
[Occurrence area]
F-6-7
Between the Primary Charging Roller and the drum

T-6-9
[Cause]
When the solid image of Y color is copied under the high temperature and high humidity
environment, uneven discharge may occur between the Primary Charging Roller and the
drum. As a result, there is a possibility that a mottled image may occur on other colors than Y.
[Occurrence condition]
In case that the drum unit is under the high temperature and high humidity environment at an
initial state
[Remedy]
Please perform the following procedures.
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure
6-7
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > 35-mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration
In Case that Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Plain Paper"
6-8
35-mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration
1) Target current setting of discharge current control

(COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DIS-TGM/TGC/TGK) <Level 2>
Description modified: Set the setting value of the corresponding service mode to "+2", and
turn OFF and then ON the main power. If not improved, the setting value is increased by
every [ +2 ].
2) Adjustment of electrostatic charge AC current
(COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DIS-TGM2/TGC2/TGK2) <Level 2 >
Description modified: Set the setting value of the corresponding service mode to "+2", and
turn OFF and then ON the main power. The setting value is set to +4, If not improved.
In Case that Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Heavy Paper"
1) Target current setting of discharge current control (COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGM2/
TGC2/TGK2) <Level2>
The setting value of the applicable service mode is set to "+2." If not improved, the setting
value is set to +4.
2) Adjustment of electrostatic charge AC current (COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTACM2/
OFSTACC2/OFSTACK2) <Level1>
The setting value of the applicable service mode is set to "+2." The setting value is set to +4,
If not improved.
[Occurrence area]
F-6-8
Developing cylinder
[Cause]
In case that the image pattern, which has extreme shading differences, is copied under the
high temperature and high humidity environment, the deterioration toner of a previous image
may adhere on a developing cylinder. For this reason, the inversion residual image (negative
[Notes about remedy]

A drum life will be influenced if the 2nd service mode (adjustment of electrostatic charge AC
current) is changed.
For this reason, please do not set the setting value to +4 or more at the maximum.
ghost) of the previous image may occur in the next image.

In case that the image pattern with extreme shading differences is copied (the halftone image
was copied immediately after the solid image)
[Remedy]
1) Targeted value setting of ATR control (COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>P-TG-Y/M/C/K) <Level2>
The applicable service mode setting value for the color, which the poor image has occurred,
is set to "-1."
2) After cycling the power of the main unit, copy 8 A3 solid images.
As a result, if the image on the 8th sheet is checked and a defect is not improved, please
move on to the following step.
3) Lower the setting value of the applicable service mode by 1 step.
4) After cycling the power of the main unit, copy 8 A3 solid images.
5) Check the image on the 8th sheet.
6) If a poor image is not improved, repeat Step 3)-5).
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > 35-mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration
6-8
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge
The 35-mm uneven image density due to the periodic deflection
6-9
Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge
of the developing cylinder
About 95mm
[Occurrence area]
F-6-10
Fixing Unit
[Cause]
Usually, the paper, which passed the Fixing Unit, is fed to the Inner Delivery Roller along with
About 35mm
[Occurrence area]
the separation guide. However, when thin paper is used, since the elasticity of the paper is
F-6-9
low, there is a possibility that the paper may be pulled by the roller if the paper leading edge
Developing cylinder
reaches the Inner Delivery Roller.
[Cause]
the Fixing Unit changes.
As a result, since the paper, which met the separation guide, comes floating, the nip angle of
In case that the durable advanced Developing Assembly is used under the high temperature
and high humidity environment, the slight periodic deflection on the developing cylinder may
occur. As a result, since the gap between the developing cylinder and the drum becomes
uneven, the uneven image density in a cycle of 35 mm due to a developing failure may occur.
In case that the durable advanced Developing Assembly is used under the high temperature
and high humidity environment.
This phenomenon tends to occur, when a solid image or a halftone image is copied.
For this reason, a density change may occur at around 94 mm from the image leading edge.
In case that the solid image is copied on the thin paper under the high temperature and high
humidity environment
[Remedy]
Please perform the following steps.
In case that the Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Thin Paper"
[Remedy]
Setting of the ITOP temperature in thin paper (COPIER>OPTION>IMG-TR>FXS-TMP5)
Adjustment of the maximum developing AC bias value (COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV >
<Level1>
ADJ-VPP) <Level 2> The applicable service mode setting value is set to "-1", and turn OFF
Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "-1", and turn OFF and then ON the
and then ON the main power. If a defect is not improved, check the images with lowering the
main power. If not improved, set the setting value to "-2."
setting value one step by one step.
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge
6-9
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Missing color due to the laser exposure failure
In case that the Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Plain Paper 1"
Setting of the ITOP temperature in the plain paper 1 (COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX>FX-S-TMP)
<Level1>
Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "-1", and turn OFF and then ON the
main power. If not improved, set the setting value to "-2."
6-10
[Remedy]
When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine, perform the following procedures.
1)Pull out the Process Unit.
2)Remove a dummy Drum or Drum Unit.
3)Place the half fold paper on the Developing Assembly (Bk).

Paper
If the applicable service mode is changed and a heavy paper is fed, fixing capability may
deteriorate.
Missing color due to the laser exposure failure
F-6-12
4) While the paper is set, install the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine.
Drum Unit (BK)
[Occurrence area]
F-6-11
Developing Assembly
[Cause]
If pushing the drum unit to the Developing Assembly in installation, there is a possibility to
catch the Mylar sheet of the Developing Assembly downward.
As a result, since an optical path is shut when the laser for the applicable color is irradiated,
the image may become light.
The installation failure of the drum unit
F-6-13
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Missing color due to the laser exposure failure
6-10
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Blank area cased by poor secondary transfer
5) Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction of upper.
6-11
Blank area cased by poor secondary transfer
Paper
[Occurrence area]
F-6-14
F-6-15

[Cause]
Since the resistance of a paper changes when the recycled paper having bad surface nature
is used under the high temperature and high humidity environment, the current value of the
Secondary Transfer may be insufficient. As a result, the blank area caused by Secondary
Transfer failure may occur.
In case that the recycled paper having bad surface nature is used under the high temperature
and high humidity environment.
This phenomenon will be more obvious when a blue solid image is copied.
[Remedy]
Please perform the following steps.
1) Check environmental classification inside the machine.
Indication of inside environmental classification (COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ENV-TR)
<Level1>
2) Check the "paper type" when the poor image occurred. (Example: Plain paper 1)
3) Check the "printing surface" which the poor image occurred. (Example: In the case of a first
side)
4) Perform adjustment of secondary transcription ATVC target current
(COPIER>ADJUST>HVTR>XXXX).
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Blank area cased by poor secondary transfer
6-11
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet Guide
Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "+10" after checking the sub-item
name corresponding to XXXX from the following table. If not improved, please increase the
6-12
Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet Guide
setting value by +10 each.

(Example: When the paper type is the plain paper 1, environmental classification is 1 and it is
on a first side, COPIER>ADJUST>HVTR>2TR-N1)
Paper type
Environmental
Classification
Plane Paper1
64 ~ 82g
Plane Paper2
83 ~ 105g
Thin Paper
52 ~ 64g
Recycled Paper
Heavy paper 1
106 ~ 163g
Heavy paper 2
164 ~ 209g
Heavy paper 3
210 ~ 256g
Postcard
Envelope
Transparency
Service mode sub-item name

First side
Second side
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
2TR-N1
2TR-N12
2TR-N13
2TR-HN1
2TR-HN12
2TR-HN13
2TR-T1
2TR-T12
2TR-T13
2TR-R1
2TR-R12
2TR-R13
2TR-H1
2TR-H12
2TR-H13
2TR-SH1
2TR-SH12
2TR-SH13
2TR-UH1
2TR-UH12
2TR-UH13
2TR-P1
2TR-P12
2TR-P13
2TR-E1
2TR-E12
2TR-E13
2TR-O1
2TR-O12
2TR-O13
2TR-N2
2TR-N22
2TR-N23
2TR-HN2
2TR-HN22
2TR-HN23
2TR-T2
2TR-T22
2TR-T23
2TR-R2
2TR-R22
2TR-R23
2TR-H2
2TR-H22
2TR-H23
2TR-SH2
2TR-SH22
2TR-SH23
2TR-UH2
2TR-UH22
2TR-UH23
2TR-P2
2TR-P22
2TR-P23
2TR-E2
2TR-E22
2TR-E23
-
[Location]
F-6-16
Fixing Inlet Guide

[Cause]
When making 2-sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature & high humidity
environment, rib side on the Fixing Inlet Guide is deteriorated and resin part may be scraped.
As a result, when the leading edge of paper enters the Fixing Inlet Guide, it is trapped by the
scraped rib and the paper deflects leading to the wrinkle at the trailing edge of paper.
[Condition]
When making 2-sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature & high humidity
environment.
[Field Remedy]
Replace the Fixing Inlet Guide.
T-6-10

If the service mode is changed, the life of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller will be
influenced.
For this reason, please do not set the setting value to +80 or more at the maximum.
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet Guide
6-12
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation Guide
6-13
Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation

Guide
120mm
[Location]
F-6-18
Leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide

[Cause]
When the paper passes through the Fixing Assembly, oil of fused toner may attach to the
leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide and it may accumulate.
Fixing Inlet Guide

F-6-17
At that time, when making 2-sided solid print with 2-colors, curled leading edge of paper on
2nd side may contact with the Delivery Flapper.
Thus, movement of this paper changes and it may touch the leading edge of Fixing
Separation Guide. As a result, oil attached to the leading edge of guide may appear on the
image.
[Condition]
With using the Fixing Assembly that is used over a prolonged period, when making 2-sided
solid print with 2-colors.
[Field Remedy]
Clean the end of the Fixing Separation Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation Guide
6-13
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Noise around the Fixing Film Unit
6-14
Operation Error
Noise around the Fixing Film Unit
[Location]
Fixing Film Unit
[Cause]
Separation Guide
Because the grease inside the Fixing Film deteriorates due to prolonged use, sliding
Cleaning Area
performance between the Fixing Film and the heater surface may be decreased.
As a result, the Fixing Film contacts with the heater surface when it rotates and noise may be
generated.
[Field Remedy]
By pushing the Fixing Film area, grease inside the film circulates and sliding performance will
be improved.
F-6-19
Operation procedure is as below.

2) Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly. (Place the Fixing Assembly where the Drawer
Connecter faces up.)
Drawer connector
F-6-20
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Noise around the Fixing Film Unit
6-14
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Cannot close the Process Unit
3) While pushing the Fixing Film area with lint-free paper, move it right and left 2 times.
6-15
Cannot close the Process Unit

[Location]
Process Unit
[Cause]
If the main power switch is turned OFF just after the copy operation (approx. within 5
seconds) and the Process Unit is opened, the Laser Shutter May not be closed.
As a result, the rear side of Process Unit and the Laser Shutter interfere each other when the
Unit is closed and the Process Unit cannot be installed to the host machine.
F-6-21
[Occurrence Condition]
If the main power switch is turned OFF just after the copy operation (approx. within 5
seconds) or if the power plug is disconnected without turning OFF the main power switch.
[Field Remedy]
Process Unit can be installed to the host machine by strongly pushing it.
However, if the Unit is installed to the host machine with brute force, it may damage other
parts. Thus, be sure to follow the below operation procedure.
1) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. (Laser Shutter is closed automatically.)
2) While the Process Unit remains pulled out, make sure that the Laser Shutter is surely
closed. At this time, do not put your hands inside the machine.
3) Turn OFF the main power switch and install the Process Unit to the host machine.
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Cannot close the Process Unit
6-15
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper (52g/m2 ~ 63g/m2) mode < Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stit
6-16
Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper (52g/m2 ~

63g/m2) mode < Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stitch Finisher C1>
[Location]
Process Tray on the Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stitch Finisher C1
[Cause]
When the thin paper (52g/m2 to 63g/m2) is selected and the paper stack is delivered from
the corresponding finisher, electrostatic is generated under the low humidity environment
because the paper is fractioned in the Process Tray causing paper attraction. As a result,
alignment failure may occur.
To avoid this, the electro static is prevented from being generated by decelerating the feed
speed in case of foregoing condition.
This paper (52g/m2 to 63g/m2) is selected and the paper stack is delivered from the
corresponding finisher.
[Field Remedy]
Change the paper selection to plain paper 1 (64g/m2 ~ 81g/m2) and deliver the paper stack.
Approx. 19% of productivity can be enhanced (in the following condition).
Condition: A4 paper and 10 sheets stack delivery (1-point staple)
[Note at operation]
Feed speed is enhanced when the plain paper 1 (64g/m2 ~ 81g/m2) is specified for paper
selection.
However, the possibility to generate the electrostatic is also increased when the feed speed is
enhanced and it may cause the alignment failure.
If such a case, change the paper selection to thin paper (52g/m2 ~ 63g/m2).
6-16
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper (52g/m2 ~ 63g/m2) mode < Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stit
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-17
Version upgrade
Overview
Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
Downloading System Software

This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
1. Download via the service support tool (hereinafter SST)
Connect this machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC.
2. Download using the USB memory storage device
Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device.
3. Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter CDS)
Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine.
SST
System Software
System CD
System Software
Host Machine
Download mode
Normal mode
/(Safe mode)
Write the
system software
Restart
Copy the
System Software
Automatically restarted
USB menu
USB memory
storage device
System Software
Temporary Memory Space
Activate the machine with the

new system software version
Done
CDS
System Software
Updater
F-6-22
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-17
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software
6-18
Writing System Software

The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the temporary memory space.
After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the software in the machine.
In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not be started.
This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system software via CDS, the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the
power switch.
F-6-23
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message, version up..error. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the machine. If so,
turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for details).
6-18
6-19
Log
version up...
error massage
Error
massage
F-6-24
6-19
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
6-20
Download Mode
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with
other iR-series models.
Normal mode(recommend):
Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.
Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1 and 7 keys. However, the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the
download same as before.
You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.
NOTE :
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed.
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.
Safe mode:
Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
* Be sure to use "Single mode" when using SST. SST "Assist mode" cannot be used in safe mode. Any mode can be used when using USB.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
6-20
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-21
System Software Components

The table below shows the system software components for this machine.
Software to be upgraded
Host Machine
Main Controller
MEAP Controller
Language Module
OCR Libraly
Remote UI Contents
RUI portal
Mobile print
UI-BOX
UI-COPY
UI-Intro
UI-SEND
Voice Synthesis Dictionary
Voice Recognition Dictionary
Paper Type Information File
Service Mode Contents
Printer Controller
WebDAV Contents
Resources for Web Browser
Reader Controller(2-sided Single Pass)
Reader Controller(2-sided Double Pass)
Fax Board Boot Program Super G3 Fax Board AE1
Fax Board Main Program Super G3 Fax Board AE1
Box Checker
Key/Certificatefor Encrypted Communication
Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Finisher Controller
Stitch Finisher C1
Saddle Controller
External 2-hole Puncher B1 Punch Controller
Inner Finisher A1
Finisher Controller
Display on SST
Registered name
Name of system
of product
software
iAC5051
iAXXXX
FIN_C1
EXP_B1
IFN_A1
SYSTEM
MEAPCON
LANGUAGE
SDICT
RUI
RPTL
MOBPR
BOX
COPY
INTRO
SEND
TTS
ASR
MEDIA
SMCNT
DCON
WEBDAV
BROWSER
RCOND
RCONS
G3CCB
G3CCM
BCT
KEY
FIN_CON
SDL_CON
EXP_CON
FIN_CON
How to upgrade versions

SST USB memory Others
Remarks
Color Image Reader Unit-B1

Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Super G3FAX Board AE1
Super G3FAX Board AE1
Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stitch Finisher C1

Saddle Stitch Finisher C1
External 2-hole Puncher B1
Inner Finisher A1
T-6-11
This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.
The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double Pass, requiring specific system software for each.
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1): RCOND
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Double Pass Image Reader (Color Image Reader Unit B1): RCONS
The finisher for this machine supports version upgrade via the host machine in any of the above-mentioned methods, i.e., via SST, USB memory storage device storage device or CDS. Note that the
External 2-hole Puncher B1 does not support version upgrade via the host machine. To upgrade versions, connect the option with the PC using the downloader PCB to download the system software
via SST.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-21
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
6-22
Note on Download Process

CAUTION: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.
Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of machine start-up at power-on.
If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).
When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode, execute formatting of BOOTDEV partition, retry downloading the system software.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not possible to start this machine and enter service mode.
In safe mode, version information of SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and SDICT can be obtained, but version information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot
be obtained. Therefore the following points to note are required when downloading in safe mode.
[RCON]
The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when "Overwrite all" of USB download menu is used.
[DCON and others]
The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto) is used.
- The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten even when system software of the same version is being written.
- A confirmation message is not displayed when a lower version is going to be downloaded.
CAUTION: error code E753-0001

When an error occurs during writing process of the system software downloaded using SST or USB memory, error code E753-0001 is displayed.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the correct target option, and then execute downloading again.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
6-22
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
Version Upgrade via SST
6-23

System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST.
Overview
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
Assist mode (recommended)
Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash
ROM.
After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the
Single mode
new system software.
Assist mode provides the following features.
Attached option types are automatically recognized.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically
searched.
- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete

iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically

downloaded.
HDD
The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download
System
Software
the system software for each accessory.
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts
during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are
downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system
software for this machine.
2) OFF/ON
NOTE :
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted.
3) The system software is written

<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
4) OFF/ON
FLASH
ROM
5) Start with the new version.
F-6-25
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-23
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
Copying System Software
6-24
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver.4.41 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
Steps to copy the system software
F-6-27
1) Start the PC
6) The system software stored in the system CD is listed.
2) Set the system CD in the PC
Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click Copy
3) Start SST
button.
4) Click Register Firmware button.
F-6-28
F-6-26
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
6-24
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click OK button.
6-25
Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
IP address:172.16.1.100
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address to the following.
IP address:172.16.1.160
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
Default gateway: arbitrary
CAUTION:
F-6-29
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that
the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings.
Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.
Preparation
Requirements
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
Cross cable
10Base-T : Category 3 or 5
100Base-T : Category 5
1000Base-T : Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
CAUTION:
Disconnect USB memory storage device storage devices if connected.
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device
storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device
cannot be used concurrently.
6-25
6-26
4) Check the IP address of the PC.

Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network
settings of the PC.
F-6-31
CAUTION:
IP address172.16.1.160
Subnet mask255.255.255.0
IP address172.16.1.100
Subnet mask255.255.255.0
Cross cable
10Base-TCategory 3, 5 or later
100Base-TXCategory 5 or later
1000Base-TX Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the
cross cable.
F-6-30
Steps
1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
2) Turn on the main power switch of this machine.
3) Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode.
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].
6-26
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
Downloading System Software (Assist mode)

1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
6-27
NOTE:
If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode,
DOWNLOAD).
2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
3) Click Start Assist mode button.
Skip this step when starting SST in Assist mode.
only the system software of SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT and SDICT can
acquire version information.
F-6-32
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically
selected.
4) Click Start button
NOTE:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any
versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.
F-6-33
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing
process.The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is
displayed.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-27
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-28
Downloading System Software (Single mode)
NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes

Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
software can be downloaded similarly).

1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
2) Connect the PC to this machine to start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and Single, check the network settings. Click Start
button.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
versions is selected.
5) Click"Next"button.
F-6-35
F-6-34
6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine.

7) Enter Service mode to check the system software versions.
8) Click"OK"button.
The main menu is displayed.
6-28
NOTE:
The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
IP address
Model name
Download mode
6-29
NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes

Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
5) When download is completed, click OK button.
4) Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click Start button.

Multiple files can be selected in this step.
F-6-37
The main menu is displayed.
F-6-36
6-29
NOTE:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted
not written on HDD or Flash ROM.
1) Click Clear button.
6-30
6) Click Shutdown / Restart button.
Clear button
F-6-38
7) Click Restart button.
2) Click Execute Clear button.

The system software, which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD, is
deleted.
F-6-39
The machine is restarted.

The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM.
8) Click"OK"button.
9) Enter Service mode to check the versions.
3) ClickOKbutton.
Return to the previous screen.
6-30
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
Formatting HDD
When executing format BOOTDEV
Overview
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
Execute format BOOTDEV
ALL:to format the whole HDD
6-31
When executing format ALL
startup in normal mode
Execute format ALL
Automatically restart
When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted
When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the
system software.
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications
held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.
Select download mode

([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Download the system software

for the main controller
Writing process
Writing process
Start in the new version

of the system software

BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.

When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software
HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade.
HDD can be formatted only in Single mode.
After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software is
downloaded.
After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting
to HDD. At this time, the machine automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV
format, the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting.
After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the
system software.
F-6-40
6-31
Steps of Formatting
When executing format ALL startup in normal mode

1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the
machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
Execute format ALL
Execute format ALL

Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode)
Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode)

Writing process
Writing process
6-32
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.

3) Select the model to be connected and single. Check the network settings and click Start
button.
F-6-42
4) ClickFormat HDDbutton
Start in Download mode

of Normal mode
Start in Download mode

of Normal mode
Download the system software for

DCON/RCON/option
Since there is no system software

to be downloaded,
the shutdown sequence is executed
restart the machine manually

Writing process
Start in the same version
F-6-43

F-6-41
6-32
5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start".
6-33
7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See
the steps to download the system software for details.
F-6-44
6) Click "Execute Format" button.
F-6-46
CAUTION:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software
is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.
CAUTION:
Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is
downloaded (to write the downloaded software).
Down time may be approx. 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process.
Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown.
F-6-45
HDD is formatted.
6-33
Mounting New HDD
6-34
When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure.
After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In
this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the
message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
The figure below shows the abbreviated steps.
Replacing HDDs
Start the machine in Safe mode

(by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)
Connect to SST
F-6-48
Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.
Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted
Format HDD (Format ALL)
Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section.

F-6-47
F-6-49
Click Initialize button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format
ALL section to download the system software.
6-34
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
Backup
Overview
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the
PCB to migrate them to the new PCB.
Backup via SST
Backup data
Backup data RAM
MEAP applications
For investigation in Dev
Service Print
Downloaded/Uploaded file names

SramImg.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
MeapBack.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
Sublog.bin((Downloadable))
The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service
mode(Downloadable).
T-6-12
Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2.
(Because setting data of service mode for the parts counter and the Main Controller are
stored, be sure to back up the data when replacing the Main Controller PCB and the DC
Controller PCB.)
MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD
6-35
NOTE:
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode.
The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader
Controller PCB.
Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The
backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller
PCB.
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading
SramImg.bin after replacement, the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data
including Service mode stored in the old PCB
Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS.
Restore Meapbackup.bin which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
Backup via Service mode

Backup data
Backup of Reader
Controller PCB
Backup of DC Controller
PCB
Service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore)
T-6-13
Data is stored in HDD.
6-35
Steps to Upload Data
6-36
Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack.

1) Enter Download mode.
CAUTION:
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation
to determine the cause.
3) Select the model to be connected and Single. Check the network settings and click Start.
The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were
uploaded.
This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon
iR ADVNCE C5051 Series

Service PC
F-6-51
4) Click Upload Data button.
SST
iR ---System
Upload/Download
MeapBack
/ SramImg.bin

SRAM
HDD
SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin
F-6-52
Main controller
F-6-50
6-36
6-37
Steps to Download Data
5) Select MeapBack.bin to click Start button.
CAUTION:
The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were
uploaded
Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS. Restore Meapbackup.bin
which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack.

F-6-53
6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click Save button.
1) Enter Download mode

2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and Single. Check the network setting and click Start
button.
F-6-54
7) Click OK button.
F-6-55
6-37
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device
6-38
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device
4) Click Download Data button.
Relation between SST and USB memory storage device

Storage Device
When using the USB memory storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system
software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device. By inserting
the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine, the system
software can be upgraded.
The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage
device.
iR ----
PC
F-6-56
5) Select the data to be downloaded and click Start button.
SST
System software
Copying the System Software
USB memory
storage device
SST
Downloading the
system software
HDD
F-6-57
6) When the data are successfully downloaded, click OK button.
System software
7) Restart the machine
Flash ROM
F-6-58
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below.
Normal mode (recommended)
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download in Service mode and press [OK].
Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally;
turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric
keypad)
6-38
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-39
Copying System Software

Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
System CD to SST
Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
software is stored in the temporary memory space in HDD.

The system software is written in the system memory area, Boot area and Flash ROM upon
the machine restarted.
When the writing process is successfully completed, the machine is automatically restarted
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
with the new version of the system software.
Tasks in the customer site
Preparation

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete

iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
The system CD for this machine
Task in the office

USB memory
storage device
System
Software
System
Software
HDD
1) Start the PC.

2) Set the system CD to the PC.
System
Software
3) Start SST.
Temporary
memory space
4) Click Register Firmware button.
Copying the system software
2) OFF/ON
3) The system software is written
<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
4) OFF/ON
FLASH
ROM
F-6-60
5) Start with the new version.
F-6-59
6-39
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
6-40
7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click OK button.
F-6-61
6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the
F-6-63
screen.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and
click Copy button.
F-6-62
6-40
SST to USB memory Storage Device
6-41
4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.
Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
USB memory storage device (*)
Requirements for USB memory storage device:
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption
technology.
F-6-64
5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is
inserted.

1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the PC.
3) Start SST.
F-6-65
6-41
6) Select Series and Version (the System Version).
6-42
NOTE:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software
is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is
triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)
8) Click OK when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage
device storage device.
F-6-66
NOTE:
The signs shown in the field of Firmware registration static indicate the following:
Y: Stored in SST
N: Not stored in SST
7) Click Start button.
Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.
F-6-68
F-6-67
6-42
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
Connection
6-43
3) Switch to the download mode to use.

In the case of normal mode (Recommended)
Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD;
CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at
the same time.
and then press [OK].

In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used only
when normal startup fails, such as a system error, etc.)
While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is
displayed on the Control Panel.
Preparation
Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is stored.
[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[7]: Clear downloaded files
[8]: download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
Procedure
1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-70
CAUTION:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB
memory storage device.
USB memory
This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60
seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB
memory storage device is failed within the time period.
In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.
USB port
F-6-69
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
6-43
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
Upgrading System Software
6-44
Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.
Menu/Function Overview

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-71

[1]: Upgrade(Auto)
To download/write the system software (automatic)
To download the system software (confirmation)
To download the system software (overwriting)
[4]: Format HDD
To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition
[5]: Backup
Collection of debug Log or Service Print(Because You are for R&D review, do not use it
other than the following.)
To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing)
[8]: Download Menu 2
To move to Download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
Others (e.g.: version information)
[Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence
6-44
Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software

NOTE:
The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the
system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting
the HDD):
Download mode --- Normal mode
Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
6-45
CAUTION: Note when the power is turned OFF

Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode.
Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the
shutdown sequence.
Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
CAUTION: Prohibition to turn OFF the power during downloading/writing

Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software;
otherwise, this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON.
If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON, start the machine in
safe mode (pressing 2 + 8 keys).
When the machine can be started in safe mode, be sure to download the system
software once again.
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system
software.
F-6-72
6-45
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the
USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is before 00.36
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
6-46
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.

[1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-73
During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.
download mode) is 00.36:
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not
installed (E753 is displayed).
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the

downloaded system software to the HDD system area/flash ROM.
F-6-74
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
HDD system area/flash ROM.
The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete.
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-46
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
6-47
Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB
memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a
confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
F-6-75
Once the countdown shows 0, this machine is automatically restarted.

4) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the lower right on the touch
panel and select removal of the memory media, and then remove the USB memory storage
device.
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
CAUTION:
After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the
software).
This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At
this time, do not turn off the main power switch.
download mode) is before 00.36:

All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
download mode) is 00.36:
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not
installed (E753 is displayed).
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
6-47
6-48
Operation procedure

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
/[2] has been selected. Execute?/
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-76

NOTE:
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or
older than the system software in the HDD, a message is displayed in each case to
confirm whether to overwrite or not.
Press the key on the Control Panel.
[0]: To overwrite/Any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite
F-6-78
4) Press the Reset key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6) Remove the USB memory storage device.
7) Ensure the LED at the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.
Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly completed.
The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. This
machine is restarted with the downloaded system software at the count of 0.
F-6-77
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset

key.
6-48
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-49
CAUTION:

Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system
software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore,
be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB memory storage device includes the
system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing
process is completed.
In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can
be recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system
software of the non-connecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system
software from SST to USB.
Operation procedure
key.


------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
F-6-80
4) Press the Reset key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.

- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
7) After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON
F-6-79
the Main Power Switch.

Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly complete.
When the countdown shows 0, this machine is restarted with the downloaded system
software.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-49
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
Formatting HDD
HDD Format Overview

The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine:
Execute format BOOTDEV
ALL: To initialize the entire HDD
6-50
startup in normal mode
Execute format ALL
In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD).
In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system
software.
All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL
with the machine in use; therefore, be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute



Writing process
Writing process


Format ALL.
BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.

In the case of normal upgrading by cleaning the storage area of the system software
User data will not be deleted.
To reinstall the system software, HDD formatting is not required.
After formatting, this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded.
When Format ALL is executed, initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this
machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode. In the case of
formatting BOOTDEV, the machine is not automatically restarted, but the system software
can be downloaded.
After formatting is executed, be sure to download the system software by [1]: Upgrade
(AUTO) in main menu.
F-6-81
6-50
[4]: Format HDD
6-51
This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.
[1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu
Operation procedure
[2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the
screen.
menu screen.
[C]: To return to the menu screen.

[4] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-82
F-6-83

key.
5) Press any key to return to the menu screen.
6) Download the system software.
Refer to Separate Download for details.
6-51
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2
6-52
Backup
1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the Reset key to execute shutdown
[5]: Backup
2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the
sequence, and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears.
Main Power Switch).
CAUTION:
If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the
This function includes R&D review.
machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message
Do not usually use it other than the following function.
is displayed on the touch panel.
The USB memory collecting log uses the USB memory where You registered a system
software for this Host machine with by SST.
All downloaded file is deleted.

3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
Operation procedure
Download Menu 2

[8]: Download Menu 2

[5] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
4) SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB 2
[1] Sublog -> Collect debugging log.
[[[[[ download Menu 2nd (USB) ]]]]]]
[4] ServicePrint -> Save the service data which P-PRINT or etc. output to paper with a text
------------------------------------
format.

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
F-6-85
F-6-84
Clearing Download File

This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD.
This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the
system software in menu [2] or [3].
Operation procedure
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2
6-52
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-53
Troubleshooting
Other Menu
[9]: Other Menu
Error Code: E753-0001
This mode displays other menu.
Cause
In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
Operation procedure
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753-
0001.

[9] -> [0]: To display other menu/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
Remedy
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
[1]: Version Information
Be sure to check the system software with the error (error or NG) displayed.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the
This mode displays the version of download mode.
correct target option, and then execute downloading again.

Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the nonconnecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode.
In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not
installed.
In the case of downloading the Finishers system software, make the download mode of
the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system
software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST
screen.
In the case that Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed or in the case of download mode
in safe mode, G3CCB/G3CCM is not displayed on the list of downloadable system software.
F-6-86
Press any key to return to the main menu.
NOTE:
Image Reader has 2 types of system software: RCOND and RCONS.
Downloading both RCOND and RCONS results in writing of only the system software
that complies with the Image Reader installed in the Host Machine. When downloading
the system software that does not comply with the Image Reader installed in the Host
Machine, it results in skipping of writing process (it will not be an error).
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-53
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview
6-54
Version Upgrade via CDS

Overview
Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the
following 3 methods are available using Updater functions.
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in)
e: Update via SST
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Automatic update
e
b
c
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1
Automatic download
Firmware acquisition
Register the
firmware in the LCDS

Download
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled download

Download
Via User mode
(Local UI)

Download
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Download via SST
Executing the task

from Device
Firmware Update
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Update via SST
Automatic update
F-6-87
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

NOTE:
See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the
communication with the distribution server is normal.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview
6-54
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
Preparation
For Install of Application
Overview of Preparation
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
For updating of firmware
COPIER >
FUNCTION
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via
Local CDS
Installation Method
Network Settings

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-15

CDSUGW
CDS-CTL
Installation
Method
6-55
CDS-FIRM
LOCLFIRM
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
[Manual
[Update
Network Enabling
Sales
Update]
Firmware]
Button of
Button of User
HQ
User Mode
Mode
(Remote UI)
LCDSFLG
Setting Sales Companys HQ

When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Enabling
[Local CDS]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.

Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Default Setting of Sales

Company's HQ
US
US/SG
SG
Setting of Sales Company's

HQ after Change
CA
LA
HK
T-6-16
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.

Service
Technician

(Level 1)
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-6-14
6-55
Network Settings
6-56
1.Connecting to External Network

The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
2.Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
F-6-89

F-6-90
F-6-88
6-56
5. Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside the

[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
Delivery Server CDS
6-57
Note:
number.
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service
mode.
set.
3.Communication Test
F-6-91
Delivery Server Local CDS
F-6-93
F-6-92
6-57
6-58
F-6-96
F-6-94
4.
Press [Test Communication] button.
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
F-6-95
F-6-97
6-58
6-59
Enabling UGW Link

When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW

(0 -> 1)
In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not

distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ
Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
See imageWARE Remote Operators Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation

Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
[Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
When using the Device Firmware Update Plug-in and Local CDS, it is necessary to
disable "UGW linkage".
6-59
6-60
6-60
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked Download and Update.
6-61
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked download.
STEP 1
STEP 1
STEP 2
Scheduling
via UGW
Scheduling
via UGW
Update using
Updater
F-6-98
F-6-99
STEP1: Scheduling via UGW
STEP 1: Scheduling via UGW
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See UGW-linked Download and Update in chapter 5 of Operation Manual of Content
See UGW-linked Download in Operation Manual of Content Delivery System (for Firmware
Delivery System V1.0 for Firmware Distribution for details.
Distribution) for details.
The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device
to register the firmware distribution setting, enabling automatic firmware download and
update.
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during nonbusiness hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)
NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User
mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware
downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
STEP 2: Update using Updater

The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
6-61
6-62
4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.
F-6-100
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
F-6-102
F-6-101
6-62
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.
6-63
CAUTION:
queue.
-Print
-Scan
F-6-103
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.

1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].
Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
6-63
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service
6-64
Mode)
The figure below shows the operational flow of Manual Download and Update.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Download using
Updater
Update using
Updater
F-6-104
STEP 1: Download using Updater

The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater.
F-6-106
4. Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways.

To update to the official edition, press [Confirm Applicable Firmware] button and go to Step 6.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] on the control panel.
To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.

F-6-107
F-6-105
6-64
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
6-65
6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.
F-6-108
F-6-109
[Retrieval ID]:
[Version]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
The current firmware version is shown.
[Password]:
[Applicable Firmware]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
[Additional Languages]:
If there are any additional languages, they are displayed.
More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when
upgrading the firmware.
Up to 8 languages can be added, including Japanese and English. The languages already
registered in the device are always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary
language from the device.
[Release Note]:
If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.
NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and
password that you input is displayed in [Applicable Firmware].
6-65
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
6-66
[E-mail]:
E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here.
Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.
Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters.
[Comments]:
Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters.
Enter the comment to be automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will
be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-mail.
NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in
[Timing to Apply]
[Updated Module Only]
For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be
F-6-110
[Delivery Time]:
Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button.
selected in [Updated Module Only].

[E-mail]
To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with
[Now]:
The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.
[Set Time]:
Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on
the specified date and time.
Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
[Timing to Apply]:
Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
comma (,) or semi-colon (;).

For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following
timing.
-Distribution Set
-Distribution Started
-Distribution Finished
-Update Started
-Update Finished
-Error Occurred
[Auto]:
The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
[Manual]:
The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for
updating the downloaded firmware.
[Updated Module Only]:
Press either [On] or [Off] button.
[On]:
Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded.
[Off]:
The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded.
6-66
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept]
button.
6-67
When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
[Manual], respectively:
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
F-6-111
9. One of the screens below is shown according to the setting.

When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
[Auto], respectively:
F-6-113
When Distribution Time is set to [Set Time] in Distribution Setting:

Confirm the distribution schedule and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully
completed.
Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device. The device is

automatically restarted upon update completed. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
F-6-114
F-6-112
6-67
STEP 2: Update using Updater
6-68
The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is
updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to
update the firmware.
F-6-116
F-6-115
F-6-117
6-68
6-69

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
CAUTION:
F-6-118
queue.
-Print
-Scan
6-69
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-70
4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button.
This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
F-6-120
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.
F-6-119
F-6-121
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the
firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-70
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-71
This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware.

F-6-123
F-6-122
F-6-124
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-71
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.
6-72
Deleting Downloaded Firmware

This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
F-6-125
6-72
6-73
4. Press [Delete Firmware] button.
F-6-126
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button.
F-6-127
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is
successfully deleted.
6-73
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
6-74
No.2
Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions.
No.1
Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.
Symptom: I cant find the firmware to be updated using Updater.
Action: Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted.
Cause: Preparation has not been properly done.

Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Companys HQ bellow.
No.3
Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1)
Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the
device cannot be started.

Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device.
1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory,
service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps
below.
2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.
F-6-128
Cause: The version currently in use is not available for update.

Action: Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available
for update.
Cause: You try to download firmware from User mode.You can download only the latest
version of firmware from User mode.
3. Via SST, install the firmware in the device.

No.4
Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held,
Action: Download from Service mode.
the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.
<User Mode>
Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution
<Service Mode>
should be rescheduled for the firmware.

Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on
CDS.
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST.
(Status of the firmware in the device is changed.)
F-6-129
F-6-130
Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
6-74
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports
Cause: The network between the updater and the CDS server has stopped.
Remedy: Conduct a communication test and check the state of network.
There are some cases where the network is stopped only at night, during which update is
performed. If the communication test ended in success, check the state of network during the
period when update is scheduled.
6-75
Information required for Reports

Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site
Update Logs
System Logs (Log Level: 4)
Information to Report
No.5
Symptom occurred
Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found.
Location of the device
Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded
Date and Time that symptom occurred
was overridden by the newly downloaded one.
Steps taken for reproduction
Action: Retry the firmware download.
Firmware / Application you tried to install

Occurrence frequency
Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)
Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option
Conditions of symptom occurrence
Model
Firmware version installed on the device
List of MEAP applications installed on the device
Network setting information of the device
Service mode setting information
Setting of device service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
(Level 1)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-LVUP
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided
will be helpful for investigation.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports
6-75
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs
Debug Logs
6-76
NOTE:
See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 2 for details of changing Log Level
Obtaining Log Files

Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.
This procedure is shown below.
4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the
1. Check that the CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM is enabled in the service mode. If they are not
enabled, change the value to 1 and then restart the device.
original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.
Obtaining the log files is completed.
Service mode (Level1) > Mode List

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP: 1
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM: 1
2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<devices IP address or host name>) using the system
administrator right.
3. From Display Logs/Communication Test screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and
Update Logs by copy & paste.
Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/
Others] > [Register/Update Software] > Display Logs/Communication Test
F-6-131
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs
6-76
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-77
Error Messages
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
No.
Messages
Timing of display
Cause
Remedy
An error occurred with the delivery

In communicating with the System error occurred in server.
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof
server.
delivery server.
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
Contact your sales representative.
company.
Error Code: [xxx]
Delivery server is stopped.
In communicating with the Delivery server stopped.
Check the delivery server stop information. After the delivery server starts, perform the
Wait a while and then try to perform the delivery server.
operation from this application.
operation again.
When the delivery server stop information is not available, contact the sales company's
Check the following URL for details.
Support Department.
<Stopped Delivery Server URL>
Failed to connect to delivery server.
In communicating with the Communication error due to incorrect settings of
Set correct CDS URL in the Updater settings.
Check the delivery server and network. delivery server.
CDS URL.
Excluding delivery server stop, communication error Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
to the delivery server occurred.
If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version
Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
Download was stopped because an
At the time of file
Communication error to the delivery server
Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
error occurred with the file server.
download
occurred.
Check the network.
Downloaded files are invalid. Check
At the time of file
The received file is broken.
After checking the network environment of the device, re-execute the job.
the network.
download
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Failed to retrieve information of special Acquisition of applicable No information exists about firmware for special
Enter the correct firmware ID or Password applicable to the firmware information.
firmware.
firmware information
firmware retrieval ID or Password is invalid.
Check the retrieval ID and password.
sales company.
Acquisition of applicable Delivery information with specified delivery ID does Register the delivery schedule again. If this occurs at the time of canceling file download,
Scheduled delivery information of
firmware does not exist.
firmware information
not exist.
deleting downloaded firmware or deleting scheduled delivery, no remedy is required.
Check it because it may already have
been deleted.
Failed to apply firmware.
Firmware application error Error due to the application (NLM)
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof
company.
6-77
6
No.
Messages
Delivery Server : Connect Failed

File Server : Retrieve Failed
Error Code: [xxxx]
10
Delivery Server : Connect OK

File Server : Retrieve Failed
Error Code: [xxxx]
Timing of display
Cause
Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect to the

(communication test result delivery server.
dialogue)
In SOAP communication, failed to success after 1
min retry.
ID and Password required for proxy to connect to
the internet are not configured in device.
6-78
Remedy
Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job.
sales company.
Set proxy and restart the communication test.
sales company.
The access to the network is limited.
Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
sales company again.
Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication test, Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
OK
time-out (in HTTP communication, no response
File Server : Retrieve
for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but failed to Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Failed
connect to server.
sales company.
The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test.
Error Code: [XXXX]
download in the communication test.
sales company.
The file server stopped during data download in the Contact the sales company's Support Department.
communication test.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
sales company again.
Hash value in the communication test file is
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
incorrect.
sales company.
6-78
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
Cause
communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new
(main screen)
log was not accepted.
Normally an old log file is deleted before the max
value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur
due to other element (e.g. I/O error).
6-79
Remedy
Check if the log file exceeded the max value.

<Update log>
Max space: 128KB/file
Max file number: 4
<System log>
Max space: 512KB/file
Max file number: 4
sales company.
Notice of version
Failed to acquire version information of device
Re-execute the job.
information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
device.
sales company.
At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
connect to the delivery server.
No return of notifying version information
Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
version information.
sales company.
Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job.
the main power was turned OFF and then ON
during the sending.
sales company.
Server stopped at the time of sending notice of
Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
version information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
notice of version information.
company.
6-79
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
UGW linkage (main

screen)
On-site (error dialogue)
Immediate download
(error dialogue)
Manual update (error

dialogue)
Automatic update (error
dialogue)
Deletion of downloaded
firmware
Cause
6-80
Remedy
UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the
UGW linkage.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
delivery information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
applicable firmware information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Re-execute the job.
approval information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of delivery
Re-execute the job.
order
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job.
firmware delivery information.
sales company.
During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job.
was occupied. (DiskFull)
sales company.
At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company.
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company
Re-execute the job.
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
sales company.
At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal
Re-execute the job.
error occurred.
sales company.
6-80
6
No.
12
Messages
An error occurred. Check the Update

Firmware screen.
Timing of display
UGW linkage (main

screen)
Immediate download
(main screen)
Manual update (main
screen)
Automatic update (main
screen)
Cause
eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect

to server.
6-81
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
Scheduled date and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
passed.)
sales company.
Scheduled data and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server did not exist.
sales company.
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
then ON the power of device main body.
sales company.
Updated version was different from the ordered
Re-execute the job.
version.
sales company.
After the update, failed to connect to the delivery
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
server.
sales company.
After the update, delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
After the update, the network cable was
Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected.
sales company.
After the update, server returned an error.
company.
After the update, an internal error occurred.
sales company.
6-81
6
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Messages
Delivery Error
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
UGW linkage (Update

Firmware screen)
Cause
eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect

to the server.
6-82
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
sales company.
The delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
The scheduled data and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server does not exist.
sales company.
Delivery Error
UGW linkage (Update
The scheduled date and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
Delivery Time
Firmware screen)
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Delivery Firmware Label
passed).
Delivery Firmware version
sales company.
Immediate download
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
Error Code: [ xxx ]
(Update Firmware screen) then ON the power of device main body.
sales company.
Applicable firmware is not registered. On-site (error dialogue) At the user site, no latest firmware exists.
This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact.
But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware
information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
service person can't select any applicable firmware.
Manual update (error
An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
Restart failed.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.
dialogue)
sales company.
Automatic update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
dialogue)
sales company.
Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64 At the time of periodical The specified E-mail address exceeded 64
Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
characters.
update setting
characters.
At the time of periodical The E-mail address was including the characters Do not specify E-mail address with characters which cannot be used.
The following characters cannot be
used for the [E-Mail Address]:
update setting
which could not be used.
,:;()[]<>\
Specify [Comments] with up to 128
At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters.
Specify comments within 128 characters.
characters.
update setting
The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect. In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong.
Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif)
server URL.
T-6-17
6-82
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > How to read an error code
6-83
Error Code
The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation of those error codes.
How to read an error code
84014206
Local UI
Error Message dialogue
Code
Value
The rst digit

Error eld
The second digit
Operator
Error
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Not dened.
CDS server
Updater
UGW
Service person
IT administrator (User)
Scheduled Update
The 3rd - 4th digits

Method category
The 5th digit
Category code
XX
Method
The 6 - 8th digits

Description code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000-
Contents
Category code
See Error code list
F-6-132
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > How to read an error code
6-83
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
6-84
List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

In the list shown below, error codes which are likely to be displayed are classified into two groups:
Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81")
Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86")
When an error code is displayed, check this list first. If it is not in this list, see "Error Code".
Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81")
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
Error codes starting with "81": CDS server

81021008 As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no applicable device code product
81040002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type is/are set against the regulations
81040002 is displayed in the following cases:
81041012
81060002
81081014
81091001
8106100A
The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8.

The registration ID or password includes characters other than single-byte numeric characters.
Device is "Not applicable to CDS" (Firmware distribution)
* It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed.
In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type is/are set against the regulations
The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type, Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or
Firmware Label does not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters.
The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) includes characters other than numeric
values.
The number of digits of E-mail Address mailAddress) is larger than 128.
Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E-mail Address
(mailAddress).
An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)
When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time-out.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time. The device has been turned OFF, the
network has been disconnected, etc.
The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware
information of the device at the time of registration of the distribution schedule.
The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution schedule for the device that supports the
UGW-linked function had been registered.
As a result, the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the
firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of the distribution schedule.
When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated was disabled after distribution schedule was
registered using auto update.
The delivery status is Applying
After the firmware was updated and when an update completion notification has not been sent to CDS,
distribution of the firmware was attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS.
Remedy
Check registration of LMS. (CINC)

When 81040002 is displayed:
Enter the correct ID and password for Special Firmware. (User)
Register the device as a CDS device.

When 81060002 is displayed due to an error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or
Firmware Group Version, register the correct firmware again.(CINC)
When 81060002 is displayed due to an invalid e-mail address, register the correct
e-mail address. (User)
Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.
If distribution of the firmware is necessary, search the applicable firmware again, and
perform distribution of the firmware.
After 2 hours and 30 minutes have passed since the failed attempt to distribute
the firmware, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the
firmware.
6-84
6
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
8108100D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed

8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule information was checked with CDS. (CDS has
not been notified of the status change due to a network
810A1015 When firmware distribution time-out occurs.
A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours after the start of the distribution. The
device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc.
810B1010 The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/Finished/Failed
810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid status. (The CDS server failed to receive
the status change due to a network error, etc.)
810C1016 Firmware update time-out occurred.
An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after 2 hours since the start of the update.
6-85
Remedy
Check the device to see if the update has been completed. When the update has
ended in failure, execute the operation again if there is no problem with the device.
T-6-18
Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86")
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
Error codes starting with "82": Updater

82001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing.
82005202 Failed to connect to the server
82005203 Failed to find the server
82005204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server
82005205 Failed to read a HTTP response
82005206
82005300
82005304
82005308
82005309
Error in a HTTP response

Codes other than the following "3xx" definition
Failed to receive the data
Invalid hash code of the download file
The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.
82007502 The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a certain period of time due to the power of the
device being OFF at the scheduled time or other reasons.
82095206 Error in a HTTP response
Remedy
Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device
Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS
server), and start the operation again.
Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
Check the network environment.
Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
Scheduled deliveries not executed within the defined period of time are abandoned,
so register a scheduled delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the scheduled delivery, be sure to designate a time
when the device is ON.
6-85
6
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
82095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition

82095309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.
Error codes starting with "84": Service person

84005202 Failed to connect to the server
84005206
84005300
84005304
84005308
84005309


Error codes starting with "85" :IT administrator (User)

6-86
Remedy
Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS
operation again.
operation again.
operation again.
6-86
Error
Code (hex
number)
85005206
85005300
85005308
85005309
Description


850C1104 Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing delivery ID)
Error codes starting with "86": Scheduled Update
86005206
86005300
86005304
86005305

86005308 Invalid hash code of the download file


6-87
Remedy

operation again.
Start the operation again from the beginning
operation again.
Check that no problem is found in the HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact Support Group of sales companies.
operation again.
T-6-19
6-87
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code
6-88
Error Code
The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
Error Code (hex number)
The first
The
The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th
digit Error second - 4th digits digit
digits
field
digit
Method Category Description
Operator category code
code
8
8
8
8
8
8
Error
0
1
1
1
1
002
003
004
Description
Not defined.
CDS server
x
x Relating method code
x
x 0
Not categorized
x
x 0
001
No value is set in a mandatory data entry item
Remedy
Contact the support department of the

sales company.
In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type When 81040002 is displayed:
is/are set against the regulations
Enter the correct ID and password for
Special Firmware. (User)
The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8.
The registration ID or password includes characters other than
When 81060002 is displayed due to an
single-byte numeric characters.
error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or
Firmware Group Version:
Register the correct firmware again.
The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type,
(CINC)
Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or Firmware Label does
not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters.
When 81060002 is displayed due to an
The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) invalid e-mail address: - Register the
includes characters other than numeric values.
correct e-mail address. (User)
The number of digits of E-mail Address (mailAddress) is larger than
128.
Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and
symbols are used for E-mail Address (mailAddress).
An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .
(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)
In an data entry item, the value is set against the regulations
(E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Service person, 5. User") sales company.
No applicable delivery information exists
sales company.
Cause of error
CDS Local UP CDS file Network
delivery CDS DATER server
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-88

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
8
1
1
x
x
x
x
Operation
001
Description
Inconsistency between the current firmware component in the data

entry item and delivery information (E.g. the conditions for automatic
update are not met. The settings of a mandatory additional set are
invalid)
6-89
Remedy
If distribution of the firmware is necessary,

search the applicable firmware again,
and perform distribution of the firmware.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

A cancellation notification was sent to CDS when the distribution
status was not correct. (CDS has not received the status change due
to a network failure, etc.)
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of
distribution differs from the firmware information of the device at the
time of registration of the distribution schedule.
The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution
schedule for the device that supports the UGW-linked function
had been registered. As a result, the firmware information of the
CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the
firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of
the distribution schedule.
When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated
was disabled after distribution schedule was registered using auto
update.
In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an install-set was release to Contact the support department of the
the market, but the market release was stopped during the delivery
sales company.
No mail template file exists
sales company.
The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in
delivery information
sales company.
User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the retrieval Contact the support department of the
type is other than the latest
sales company.
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and registration
ID and individual Password are not set (* Operator did not enter
sales company.
registration ID and individual Password)
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and Operator is not Contact the support department of the
Service person
sales company.
As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no
Check registration of LMS. (CINC)
applicable device code product
The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and there are no
Enter correct ID and the password.
basic-set applicable to the registration ID and Password (* When
wrong registration ID or Password was entered by an operator)
6-89

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
00A
00B
00C
00D
00E
00F
010
011
012
013
014
015
Description
6-90
Remedy
The delivery status is Applying

After the firmware was updated and when an update completion
notification has not been sent to CDS, distribution of the firmware was
attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS.
After 2 hours and 30 minutes have

passed since the failed attempt to
distribute the firmware, search the
applicable firmware again, and perform
distribution of the firmware.
No approval information exists about EULA or the export criteria when Contact the support department of the
the delivery is determined
sales company.
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again,
When the distribution status was not correct, distribution information
was obtained from CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the status
change due to a network failure, etc.)
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again,
8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule
information was checked with CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the
status change due to a network
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributed/Applying/
Finished/Failed
The delivery code is other than Distributing.
(Firmware distribution)
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/
Finished/Failed
810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid
status. (The CDS server failed to receive the status change due to a
network error, etc.)
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed

sales company.
sales company.
Search the applicable firmware again,

sales company.
Register the device as a CDS device.
Device is "Not applicable to CDS"

* It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed.
When the specified distribution time was within the time frame of CDS Contact the support department of the
distribution stop.
sales company.
When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time- Search the applicable firmware again,
out.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time.
The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected,
etc.
When firmware distribution time-out occurs.
Search the applicable firmware again,
A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours and perform distribution of the firmware.
after the start of the distribution. The device has been turned OFF, the
network has been disconnected, etc.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-90

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
8
8
1
1
x
x
x
x
2
2
I/O
Description
Remedy
Firmware update time-out occurred.

Check the device to see if the update has
An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after been completed. When the update has
2 hours since the start of the update.
ended in failure, execute the operation
again if there is no problem with the
device.
When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the
in processing the distribution information.
sales company.
When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the
sales company.
in processing the scheduled update information.
When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set",
sales company.
"Finished", or "Failed".
When the status of the scheduled update information is "Waiting to
sales company.
Transmit" or "New".
When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set".
sales company.
The scheduled update setting information differs between the input
sales company.
information and the distribution information.
When the distribution status is "Cancel".
sales company.
001
The specified license access number does not exist in LMS
002
The specified license access number has been deauthorized
003
004
005
006
007
The package product of the entered license access number doesn't

include MEAP application/System Option
The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the
sale company for the package product
The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit number
allowed to register
As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were
issued more than the defined number of times for the same device
serial number
No device product exists applicable to the optional product
008
009
00A
00B
00C
6-91

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.

sales company.
No product exists applicable to the device serial number
sales company.
The product of the entered license access number cannot be used with Contact the support department of the
this device because the settings of the sales company are incorrect
sales company.
No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS Contact the support department of the
for delivery
sales company.
Although the product linked to the license access number is registered Contact the support department of the
in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now
sales company.
No existence of optional product applicable to the device serial number.Contact the support department of the
sales company.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-91

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
00D
00E
010
011
012
013
8
8
1
1
x
x
x
x
F
F
000
001
003
007
008
009
00F
010
011
012
Description
The license access number has been registered for another device
6-92
Remedy

sales company.
For the device product applicable to the device serial number, no
available software (MEAP application, System Option) exists
sales company.
LMS system error
* In support of multi-manifest, when the MFP/SFP section value shows sales company.
any value other than 0 or 1, LMS returns an error code "-215" to
CDS.
LMS system error
* In the case of failure in collection of manifest in support of multisales company.
manifest, LMS returns an error code "-999" to CDS.
License cannot be issued for the upgrade product.
Since the configuration has been changed in the upgrade product,
sales company.
there are no applications and options for which a license can be
issued.
Not registered in CSA
CSA associated with the license access number does not include any sales company.
products associated with the group ID.
L-CDS
Unclassified
sales company.
Communication test information not registered
Download file information for communication test does not exist.
sales company.
Firmware information not registered
Firmware information corresponding to the target device serial number sales company.
does not exist.
Invalid firmware version
The firmware version at the time of registration of the distribution
sales company.
schedule differs from the current firmware version.
Invalid firmware information
Firmware information to be distributed does not exist.
sales company.
Forcible termination
Distribution information is forcibly terminated from the server UI.
sales company.
Invalid distribution status
Distribution status of the server is in a condition where a requested
sales company.
method from the client cannot be accepted.
Invalid parameter
sales company.
Requested parameter from the client is not correct.
Version information not registered
Version information corresponding to the specified serial number has sales company.
not been registered.
Distribution time-out
Distribution has not been completed even after a certain period of time sales company.
from the start of the distribution.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-92

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
013
FFE
FFF
Description
Unable to judge the necessity of distribution

Version information from a device has not been registered in the local
CDS.
Since the local CDS does not know the version information of the
device, it cannot respond to the distribution request from updater. As a
result of that, an error occurred when the request has been made.
DB error
General error to access DB.
DB error
Internal error other than error to access DB (file I/O, etc.).
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2~6
002
2~6
101
2~6
102
2~6
103
2~6
104
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
1
1
105
106
2~6
201
2~6
202
2~6
203
2~6
204
L-CDS update process for a model that does not support L-CDS
2~6
301
Security Token verification error
2~6
302
Privilege check error
2~6
303
Parameter error
Relating method code

0
Not cartelized
0
000
Not defined
0
100
Unknown error
1
Operation
1
001
Processing exclusively
6-93
Remedy

sales company.
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Normally not indicated

Normally not indicated
Start the operation again after terminating

other Updater operations being executed
simultaneously
Stopped
Restart the device, and start the
operation again.
Failed to process preparation for use
sales company.
Failed to process use end
sales company.
Time out during restart of readiness preparation
sales company.
Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing
Start the operation again from the
delivery ID)
beginning
Set CDS URL
CDS URL is not set
Start the operation again after terminating
Another job existed immediately before the firmware update
the job of the device
processing.
Specifying of an iR option for a model that does not support iR options Contact the support department of the
sales company.
Specifying of scheduled update for a model that does not support
sales company.
scheduled update
Firmware processing for a model that does not support firmware
sales company.
processing
Cause of error
server server

sales company.
sales company.
Perform the authentication as a correct
user.
sales company.
6-93

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
Description
2~6
304
There is no distribution information from the server.
2~6
305
Version notification is not required.
8
8
8
2~6
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
x
x
306
Connection server information mismatch error
1xx
An internal error about file operation
2~6
2xx
An internal error about xML file operation
2~6
301
Failed to output the license file
2~6
400
2~6
401
Failure in creation of an auto shutdown stop file
2~6
402
Failure in deletion of the auto shutdown stop file
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
Device
1xx
2~6
2xx
An internal error in IMI
2~6
3xx
An internal error in SMS
2~6
4xx
An internal error in NLM
2~6
5xx
Configuration Service property setting error
2~6
6xx
An internal error related to APL_CDS partition
2~6
7xx
DCM-related service error
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
2~6
2~6
103
The function type is not matched
2~6
104
An invalid SOAP response error
2~6
201
An internal error about application information
1
2
I/O
An internal error in CPCA
SOAP communication
101
The processing thread stopped
102
Processing SOAP communication now
6-94
Remedy
Cause of error
server server

sales company.
sales company.
Check the connection server settings.
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
When this problem recurs, contact
the support department of the sales
company.
sales company.
6-94

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
Description
2~6
202
config.xml is NOT FOUND
2~6
203
type.xml is NOT FOUND
2~6
204
An error in binding type.xml
2~6
205
An error in creating a service tab
2~6
206
A runtime error in performing the web method
2~6
207
An unknown host error in performing the web method
2~6
301
The delivery server is stopped
2~6
302
<In the case of scheduled update>

In response to a download start notification sent from the device, the
distribution server returned an error and stopped the operation of the
device within a certain period of time before the distribution server
maintenance time.
<In the case of distribution executed by specifying the date and time>
The firmware version of the device at the time when the distribution
settings were specified and the version at the time immediately before
update are different.
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
5
5
HTTP communication
101
Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown
2~6
102
Download file URL is invalid
2~6
103
No network cable connection (device side)
2~6
201
Invalid HTTP request
2~6
202
Failed to connect to the server
6-95
Remedy

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Check the network environment of the
device and start the operation again
Check if the URL settings of the
CDS server are correct, and start the
operation again after resetting
sales company.
<In the case of scheduled update>
Specify the distribution settings again,
making sure that the distribution server
maintenance time and the scheduled
update time do not overlap.
Cause of error
server server
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
<In the case of distribution executed by

specifying the date and time>
Specify the distribution settings again,
making sure that the firmware version of
device at the time when the distribution
settings are specified and the version at
the time immediately before update are
the same.
sales company.
Check the URL setting of CDS server,
reset the setting, and then start the
operation again.
device, and start the operation again.
sales company.
device (check for any problem in the DNS
6-95

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
Description
2~6
203
Failed to find the server
2~6
204
2~6
205
An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the

server
Failed to read a HTTP response
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
5
5
206
207

Generation of secure socket failed.
2~6
208
Certificate check error
2~6
209
Connection time-out
2~6
300
2~6
301
Failed to retrieve the data stream
2~6
302
Failed to create the file object for receipt
2~6
303
Failed to create the data stream of the file for receipt
2~6
304
2~6
305
An error about reserving the file data for receipt
2~6
306
Failed to close the data stream
2~6
307
Failed to close the file data for receipt
2~6
308
2~6
309
The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the

CDS file server is not permitted.
6-96
Remedy

device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start
the operation again.
Check that no problem is found in
the two items displayed during the
communication test. If any problem was
found, check the network environment.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Check that no problem is found in the
proxy settings and network environment.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Check that no problem is found in the
HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact
Support Group of sales companies.
sales company.
sales company.
Check the proxy authentication method
being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then
start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is
permitted.
cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol:
http)
Cause of error
server server
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-96

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
Description
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
6
6
Socket communication
101
Failed to connect the eRDS
2~6
102
No response from eRDS
2~6
103
No notice of start from the eRDS
2~6
104
Error of socket reading
2~6
105
Socket communication time-out
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
7
7
2~6
03x
2~6
1xx
2~6
2xx
2~6
301
2~6
302
2~6
303
2~6
304
2~6
305
2~6
306
2~6
401
2~6
501
2~6
502
Other internal codes

002
One of installation, start or authorization failed
(When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an error) *
An internal error in processing the installation
6-97
Remedy

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.

sales company.
An error by using invalid API
sales company.
An internal error in SMS
sales company.
No existence of delivery ID
sales company.
Invalid delivery ID
sales company.
The updated firmware information is not identical with the firmware
information after activation of the Updater
sales company.
The process of firmware download is incomplete
It occurs when the power of the device is turned OFF during download. sales company.
The update process is incomplete
The power was turned OFF after completion of download and before sales company.
start of update processing.
The installment process is incomplete
sales company.
Failed to retrieve delivery information
sales company.
Failed to execute the delivery process
sales company.
The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a
Scheduled deliveries not executed
certain period of time due to the power of the device being OFF at the within the defined period of time are
scheduled time or other reasons.
abandoned, so register a scheduled
delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to designate
a time when the device is ON
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
8
Description
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
A
A
Internal Module
xxx
Communication error in the internal module
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
I/O
200
201
202
203
Device
303
304
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
Restart of the device failed.
409
Application of the firmware failed.
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Remedy
Cause of error
server server

sales company.
Yes
An error occurred in the CDS server.

sales company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Restart of the device failed.
Restart the device, and perform the

operation again.
When this problem recurs, obtain the
Updater log, and contact the support
department of the sales company.
Obtain the Updater log, and contact
company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Application of the firmware failed.
SOAP communication
104
An error occurred in the CDS server.
207
6-98
An error occurred in the CDS server due to an unknown host error at

execution of Web method.
Restart the device, and perform the

operation again.
When this problem recurs, obtain the
Updater log, and contact the support
department of the sales company.
Obtain the Updater log, and contact
company.
sales company.
device, and then check that the URL
setting of the CDS server is correct, and
perform the operation again.
6-98

The first
The
digits
field
digit
code
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Description
6-99
Remedy
HTTP communication
101
Download was canceled due to an error that occurred in the file server. Check the network environment.
201
When there is no problem with the
202
network environment, collect the Updater
203
log, and contact the support department
204
of the sales company.
205
206
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
309
308
An error occurred in the CDS server due to an invalid hash code of

download file.
* Not displayed on a device UI
Check the network environment, and

perform the operation again.
When there is no problem with the
network environment, collect the Updater
log, and contact the support department
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-20
6-99
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
6-100
Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function

Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW-linked function is used
The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits
digit Error
digit
digits Method Category
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
Error
x
Unclassified
000
002
101
303
304
706
707
708
709
Description
Remedy
An unexpected error occurred in the device.
Restart the device, and perform the operation again.

When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device
needs to be reinstalled (upgraded).
A time-out error occurred due to no response from Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department
Updater within the specified time (3 seconds).
Processing in the device (event processing)
failed. Restart the device, and perform the
operation again.
Queue could not be sent due to failure of
processing in the device (event processing).
An error occurred in control of synchronization or Wait for a while, and perform a communication test
interruption processing between processes being again.
handled in parallel.
Communication with Updater failed.
Restart the device, and perform the operation again
after checking that Updater has been started.
When this problem recurs, obtain the sublog, and
contact the support department of the sales company.
At the time of firmware update, the Tracking
Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department
ID ordered by UGW and the one to which the
Updater responded did not match.
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-21
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
6-100
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
6-101
Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
Scenes Where an Error Occurs
When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have occurred.
Content
Communication test, etc. (main screen)

Version information notification (main screen)
Log could not be written due to maximum value (capacity/the number of files) being exceeded.
Retrieval of device version information ended in failure because the firmware version of the device was not registered in CDS.
Connection to the delivery server failed at the time of notification of version information.
The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information.
Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during notification of version information.
UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF.
An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware information.
An internal error occurred at the time of request of firmware delivery information.
Free space in the storage destination disk ran out during download. (DiskFull)
An internal error occurred at start of update.
An internal error occurred at the time of cancellation notification.
UGW linkage (main screen)

On-site (error dialog)
Immediate download (error dialog)
Manual/auto update (error dialog)
Deletion of downloaded firmware
T-6-22
Remedy
Check that the log files shown below do not exceed the maximum values.
When this problem recurs, obtain the log, and contact the support department of the sales company.
Logs and maximum capacity / number
Log name
Update log
System log
Maximum capacity
Maximum number of files
128KB/ file
512KB/ file
4
4
T-6-23
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
6-101
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview
Controller Self Diagnosis
6-102
Overview
Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations
Controller Self Diagnosis
shown below.
Introduction
Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for
errors are described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in
field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations.
This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
The main body does not boot. (In such a case that the Control Panel is not displayed or the
progress bar does not work, etc.)
An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related
PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2).
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow:
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, FLASH Memory PCB>
Control Panel
All-night Power Supply, Non-all-night Power Supply
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB>
Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (M0*, M1), SDRAM (P),
Memory PCB, Open I/F PCB (option)>
F-6-133
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line)
in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the
blue frame (dotted line).
Rizer PCB / HDD
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
* SDRAM (M0) is an option.
Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and
This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB 1, All-night Power
blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB 1.
Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error
occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in HDD.
Therefore, this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in HDD or HDD cannot be
accessed.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview
6-102
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing
6-103

SDRAM
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis
BAT
F-6-135
DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
F-6-134
J13
DDR2-SDRAM(M1)
DDR2-SDRAM(P)
BAT
F-6-136
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing
6-103
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
Basic Flowchart
6-104
Basic Check Items

1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF.
Basic Check Items
2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.
Check all of the items shown below.
3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is
disconnected.
4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?
Turn O N the m ain power s witc h.
5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if
not recovered.
Does the Pow er Supply LED

on the Control Panel light up?
No
Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.
Yes
No
Is the Control Panel dis play ed?
Ex ec ute Boot Sy s tem Error

Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
No
Does the main body boot c orrec tly ?
Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem Error

Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
Take an ac tion appropriate f or
the error.
F-6-137
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
6-104
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis
Operation
6-105
2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis
starts.
Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below.
(When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the Control
Use each tool according to the following purposes.

When the main body does not boot (the Control Panel is not displayed): Execute Boot
Panel Switch.)
System Error Diagnosis.

When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 or child PCBs
mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2: Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis.
Boot System Error Diagnosis

Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Energy Saver
Switch.
F-6-139
Note:
Diagnosis Time
At the time of high-speed start ON, you cannot use it.
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minuites.
Perform OFF/ON of the breaker once.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>

After the Main Power Supply Lamp repeatedly lights out 4 times, it lights up and the diagnosis
is completed.
After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence.
Control Panel
Energy Saver Switch
F-6-140
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>

The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in
which an error is detected. (See *1.)
For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out
twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval).
When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply
F-6-138
Lamp lights out.

For detailed results, see Error Diagnosis.
6-105
6-106
Error Diagnosis
<Boot System Error Diagnosis Table>
The error locations are identified according to the following table.
F-6-141
*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may
not perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). In
this case, remove and then install the Main Controller PCB 1.
If the error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed
normally. (For details, see Error Diagnosis.)
*2: Although diagnosis time for Check 3, and Check 4 is longer than that of other Checks, it is
correct operation.
Board
Board
F-6-142
6-106
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-107
Controller System Error Diagnosis

Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4
simultaneously.
F-6-145
F-6-143
NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown
above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, --.-- is displayed in Service
Mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT) in the main body.
F-6-144
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen
appears on the Control Panel.
F-6-146
6-107
Diagnosis Time
<Controller System Error Diagnosis Table>
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The error locations are identified according to the following table.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
Test Name
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
F-6-147
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name
of the test where an error was detected is indicated.
F-6-148
Description
Assumed Error
Location
SN-1 IA-DDR2 Check an error

SDRAM
between the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and
SDRAM on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
SN-2 SM BUS Check an
IA DIMM1
SM bus error
in SDRAM
(outside) on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
SN-4 SM BUS Check an SM
IA Clock Gen bus error in
Clock Generator
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
SN-5 SM BUS Check an SM
SOC DIMM1 bus error in the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and the
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 1
SN-6 PCI
Config
Maestro
Check a PCI
bus error in the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and the
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 2
Main Controller
1. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1
PCB 1.
SDRAM (outside)
on Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 2
1. Check the connection of the

Main Controller PCB 1, and the
Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Check the installation of SDRAM
(M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace SDRAM (M1) on the
PCB 2.
PCB 1.
Main Controller PCB 1, and the
PCB 1.
PCB 2.
PCB 1.
SN-7 PCI
Config LANC
Check a LAN
Main Controller
chip error on the PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.
When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been
occurring.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
NOTE:
Once the tool is activated, this machine reboots after approx. 2 minutes.
After completion of the diagnosis, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power.
By turning the power OFF, the operation of this tool completes.
Error Code
-
Explanation of the detailed error information is described.
[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.
Remedy
PCB 1.
<How to view the error result>
6-108
6-108
6
Test Name
SN-8 PCI
Config PCIBridge
SN-9 CPLD
SN-10 LANC
SPI
SN-11 RTC
CHECK
SN-12 TPM
SN-13
DDR2
SDRAM
Description
Check a PCI
bus error
between the
Main Controller
PCB 1
Check failure
of CPLD chip
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
Check failure
of LANC SPI
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
Check failure
of RTC on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
Check failure of
the TPM PCB
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
* TPM PCB is
not installed
in products
for China. So,
the diagnosis
results NG.
Check an
error between
SDRAMs on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
Error Code
Main Controller
PCB 1
1. Check the installation between

the Main Controller PCB 1.
PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Test Name
SN-15
P-DDR2
SDRAM
SN-16
GOR(R)DDR2
SDRAM
SN-17
S-SDRAM
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1
TPM PCB
1. Check the installation of the

TPM PCB.
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
PCB 1.
E746
SN-18
GORDDR2
SDRAM
SN-19
GU BUS
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0) on
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
SN-14 FLASH Check failure
ROM
of CPU ROM
PCB 2
(IC60) on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
1. Check the installation of SDRAM (M0) on the Main Controller PCB 2.

2. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the
PCB 2.
PCB 2.
Description
Check an error
between the
Main Controller
PCB 2 and
SDRAM (P)
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Check failure of
Rchip SDRAM
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Check failure of
Schip SDRAM
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Check failure of
Ochip SDRAM
on the Open I/F
PCB
Check a
GUBUS error
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Assumed Error
Location
6-109
Remedy
Error Code
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (P)
Open I/F PCB
Bypass board

bypass board /Open I/F board.
PCB 2.
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
Bypass board

bypass board /Open I/F board.
PCB 2.
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2

PCB 2.
E747
E748
E732
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB

Open I/F PCB.
2. Replace the Open I/F PCB.
PCB 2.
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
Bypass PCB
SN-20 FRAM Check failure

Main Controller
between the
PCB 2
Main Controller Memory PCB
PCB 2 and the
Memory PCB
Supplementary Information: If
the Open I/F PCB is not installed,
[no] is displayed for the diagnosis
result.
E747
Open I/F PCB or the Bypass I/F
E748
PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Open I/F PCB or
the Bypass I/F PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2.
E355
1. Check the installation of
the Memory PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Memory PCB on
the Main Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2.
6-109
6
Test Name
Description
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
Error Code
SN-21 SRAM Check failure

of SDRAM
and battery
exhaustion
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
SN-22 JUST Check ROM
ROM READ READ on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-23 HDD
Check an HDD
I/F error
Main Controller
PCB 2

PCB 2.
E246
E350
E355
Main Controller
PCB 2

PCB 2.
Main Controller
PCB 2
HDD Cable
HDD
SN-24
S-SRI
Main Controller
PCB 2
Z-FIFO board
1. Check the cable connection of the HDD.

2. Check the connection between
the Main Controller PCB 2 and the
3. Replace the HDD.
1. Check the Z-FIFO board
connection
2. Replace the Z-FIFO board
PCB 2.
Check an SRI
bus
6-110
T-6-24
Restrictions
<Boot System Error Diagnosis>
If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table
described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate
actions.
<Controller System Error Diagnosis>

Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 7, 15, 21, 24), if an error occurs in the
diagnosis under the test names, this diagnosis tool will not boot.
When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results
are displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions
6-110
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
6-111
Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs
Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by
checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.
Check the lighting of the LED on

the Main Controller PCB 2
Location of LEDs
LED4 is lit.
No
Yes
LED1 Green
LED 4 Red
Normal operation
LED9 Green
LED16 Green
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board

- Check whether the connector (on the Main
Controller PCB 2 side) is securely connected
F-6-150
Riser PCB

F-6-149
Preconditions
Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly
inserted.
Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contaction
is poor. (Power-on is not possible)
When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such
as UI Cable).
6-111
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
6-112
Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16
Flash PCB - LED1
Check the lighting of the LDEs on

the Main Controller PCB 1
LED16 is lit.
Yes
No
LED9 is lit.
Yes
LED1 of the Flash
PCB is lit.
Yes
No
No
Normal startup
Yes
No
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board

- Check whether the connector (on the Main
Controller PCB 1 side) is securely connected
- Replace the Main Controller PCB
Determine the faulty PCB by the error code (E602-0001) after

removing the Main Controller PCB 2 and turning ON the power.
- No error code is displayed => Replace the Main Controller PCB 1
- Error code (E602-0001) is displayed => Replace the Main Controller
PCB 2
- Check for poor connection of the FLASH PCB connector

- Replace the FLASH PCB / Main Controller PCB 1
- In the case of startup failure (error code cannot be displayed)
although the LED is lit, replace the FLASH PCB
Replace the
FLASH PCB
Normal operation
F-6-151
6-112
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
Debug log
6-113
Types of Logs
There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs.
Scope of Application
Type
Purpose
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log
by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the
cause.
This is intended to improve efficiency in log collection when a trouble occurs.
Overview
Function Overview
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software
modules in the device for debug purpose.
Collecting method
Number/size of
logs collected
Continuous The behaviors of the Main Controller, 800 KB x 200
log
Reader Controller, and DC Controller files
are recorded on the HDD.
(160 MB)
Event log Automatically recorded in accordance 800 KB x 10 files
with the conditions specified in
(80 MB)
DEBUG-1.
Manual log Perform the following procedure.

1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10
seconds or longer).
2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
Setting
n/a
Service mode Lev2: COPIER
> FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DEBUG-1 > 3 (default)
3: Exception + E code + Reboot
Make movement same as 3
even if you change setting of it.
n/a
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve
efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at
the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to
determine the cause.
T-6-25
Conditions of Log Collection

Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_
DCON)
As for continuous logs, only SUBLOG is collected.
When restriction has occurred, SUBLOG_RCON and SUBLOG_DCON are collected.
Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log

The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company
or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.
Location
File name
Automatic collection
Continuous
log
When the error frequency is low.
Yes
SUBLOG_RCON No
Yes
Yes
Yes
SUBLOG_DCON No
Yes
Yes
Yes
failure.
* Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and
Main Controller SUBLOG
the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge
Reader
Controller
DC Controller
SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z
Event log
When
restriction
has occurred
No
Yes
When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical
of quality follow-up.
Manual
collection
Manual log
Yes
When an event
has occurred
T-6-26
Collection of Logs
Connect SST or a USB memory device,
Layer number
mmddhhmm
Sequence number
and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs.
F-6-152
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
6-113
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
Description of Log to be Collected
6-114
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
As for SUBLOG, up to 200 logs can be stored on the HDD.

As for SUBLOG_RCON and SUBLOG_DCON, up to 10 logs can be stored on the HDD.
Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored.
Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log.
NOTE:
When the data is sent to the USB memory device:
USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using
the SST.
When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted.
Previous time
Delete
Delete Delete
10
This time
10
F-6-153
Collecting System Information

Collection Destination
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP
server or SST (Ver. 4.63 or later).
Collection Method
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode
Lev1: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK.
Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log.
1) Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK

Connect the USB memory device to the machine.
2) [5] Execute [BACKUP].

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine.
F-6-154
3) [1] Execute [Sublog].
File Name of Sublog

Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
[7]: SRAM(USB)
F-6-155
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
6-114
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
When the data is sent to the USB memory device

A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The
log file is saved in the folder.
6-115
Uploading Data by SST

The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.63 or
later) running to the machine.
Example: Folder 201205241821
Preconditions:
In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3
keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1) are stored in the machine.
A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download
mode.
Note:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.
1. Start SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.
F-6-157
F-6-156
6-115
2. Press the Upload Data button.
6-116
4. Press the "Save" button.
F-6-158
3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button.
F-6-160
5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment
column just below.
It is displayed as "log" in the figure below.
Note:
The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button.
It is deleted from the main body.
F-6-161
6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
In the initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) >
20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)
F-6-159
6-116
6-117
F-6-162
6-117
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
Network Packet Capture
6-118
Overall flow
1) Enable network capture
Overview
2) Start the network capture function
The network capture function is an embedded function of the machine.The network data
sent to and received from the machine can be collected (captured) without using any special
equipment.
Until now, in the case of network failures that could not be solved at the first visit, the service
technician collected packet at the second visit to solve it.
By providing this function, investigation to determine the cause is available before the second
visit to take some measures. Also, service technicians can reproduce the symptoms of
network failure and collect network packet to bring it back to the office.
The network capture data can be collected using SST/USB memory.
There is no need to prepare dedicated equipments (PC, HUB, cable, packet capture software,
etc.) that have been needed before.
3) Overwrite function
4) Encryption function
5) Start/stop network capture
6) Stop the network capture function
7) Disable network capture
Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

Enable network capture
To enable this function, the following 2 steps need to be executed.
Enabling the license of network capture
Enabling user mode > Network > Store Network Packet Log
Because this function is able to acquire the customer information such as print data, it is not
The following effects can be expected thanks to the embedded feature.

The packet in customer environment can be collected by remote operation.
Packet collection can be continued when the symptom is not reproduced during the visit.
standard function.You make it valid as free license option after obtaining permission from
the customer.Then it displays "OFF/ON" in the user mode, you obtain permission from the
customer again and let the customer change it to ON.
For network failures on iR-ADV collaboration (a function to communicate between

machines across a network), packet collection for both sides becomes easy.
Caution:
The network capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high-loaded
network environment.
The network capture function of the machine is more prone to failures in collecting
packet than when using a PC to do so.
When collecting packet due to trouble of print data, etc., a case is assumed in which
it is impossible to judge whether it is a failure in the print data or a failure in collecting
packet.
F-6-163
Changing it to "ON" in user mode, it is displayed in Service Mode.
To check whether packet is failed to be collected by the network capture function of the
machine, there may be a case where user is requested to collect packet using a PC.
6-118
Start the network capture function
6-119
The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full.
Select the following: Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > "1".
When the overwriting setting is ON

The oldest packet file is deleted. The oldest file is determined by the last update time of the
file (not by the date and time attached to the file).
When the HDD space reaches full during packet collection, the oldest file is deleted to
continue collecting packet data to the currently-stored file.
CAPSTATE of capturing continues to be "RUNNING".
When the overwriting setting is OFF
Capturing is stopped.
CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "HDDFULL". Note that STT-STP remains as start state
(1). Capturing is started again by changing the value from STT-STP (0) to STT-STP (1).
If the HDDFULL state is cleared when starting capturing again, capturing is started.
CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "RUNNING".
F-6-164
*1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available.
If the HDDFULL state is not cleared, starting data capturing results in an error.
CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "HDDFULL".
Overwrite function
When a command of stopping data capturing is given during the "HDDFULL" state,
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT > 1
CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "STOP".
Encryption function
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA >2.
0: Data is encrypted at data extraction (factory setting value).
1: Data is not encrypted at data extraction.
2: Two types of files (one in encrypted format and another in clear text format) are extracted
at data extraction.
F-6-165
Note:
When the HDD space becomes full after starting the capture, the oldest file is deleted
and the captured data continues to be saved; therefore, it is necessary to set "1:
Overwrite" in advance.
6-119
6-120
Start/stop network capture

1) Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > STT-STP > 1.
2) To stop capturing, set "0".
F-6-166
Note:
When collecting data using SST, the above service mode setting is not reflected and
both files in encrypted format and clear text format are always collected.
F-6-167
"RUNNING" is displayed for the item CAPSTATE during packet collection.

STOP is displayed at the time of shipment or at completion of packet collection, and
When the encryption setting is enabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.
HDDFULL is displayed when 1GB of data (the upper limit for packet collection) is collected.
can.
When the encryption setting is disabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.
cap.
This setting applies only when using USB memory for data extraction.
Stop the network capture function

Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > 0.
This setting is ignored when using SST for data collection because both files in encrypted
format and clear text format are extracted.
F-6-168
6-120
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions
6-121
Other functions
Caution:
Be sure to stop the network capture function after collecting network packet capture
data.
Payload discard function

Payload is customer data. Data is collected including payload by default. To prevent leak
of customers' information or large volume of network packet, the network packet can be
collected while payload is discarded.
0: OFF (disabled) The capture function is not available. At the time of shipment.
1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available.
Service Mode(Level 2) Copier>Test>NET-CAP>PAYLOAD

0: Payload is not discarded (factory setting value)
Disable network capture
1: Payload is discarded
1) Select the following in user mode: Network > Store Network Packet Log > OFF.
2) Select the following: Service Mode(Lv2) Copier > Option > LCNS-TR > ST-NCAPT > 0,
and click OK.
F-6-170
F-6-169
Caution:
Filter function
Be sure to disable the network capture function once analysis of network failure is
complete. It is required to disable and transfer the license; however, the further step,
LMS license transfer, is not required.
Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
Filtering setting is available.

0: Filtering is performed. All the data is collected (factory default setting).
1: Only the packet data where the machine's MAC address is included in the destination
address or sender's address of Ether header is captured.
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions
6-121
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection
6-122
Delete files
Delete all the network capture data stored on the HDD.
Select Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > FILE-CLR, and then click the OK
button.
F-6-171
Collection function at startup

Setting this service mode automatically starts collecting packet data if the condition of
network capture operation is satisfied when the main power of the host machine is turned
ON. Completion of packet data collection needs to be executed manually.
Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > PONSTART
F-6-173
SST Network Packet File Collection

Overview
0: Data is not automatically collected at startup (factory setting value).
Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST.
1: Data is automatically collected at startup.
It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software,
such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of
failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
When using SST for collecting data, the setting of encryption function in Service Mode(level
2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA is disabled and files in clear text format/encrypted
format can be always collected.
Preparation
PC with SST (V4.62 or later) registered
(The system software of the corresponding model must have been registered with SST.)
Overflow
F-6-172
1) Connect the machine to SST

2) Upload data
3) Collect the network capture data
6-122
Starting the Machine and SST

1) Start the machine using the 2 and 8 keys, and connect SST in Single mode.
2) Click the "Start" button.
6-123
Note:
When using SST to collect data, you can select both files in encrypted format and clear
text format.
3) Select a model to connect and "Single", check the network settings, and then click the
"Start" button.
Collect the network capture data

1) In the case of the default installation destination for SST, click the folder with the name of
the serial number of the machine stored in C drive > ServData > target model (e.g.: iAC5255)
on the PC.
2) Three types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap), a file in encrypted
format (xxx.can), and a list of collected network capture files (ufset.txt).
F-6-176
F-6-174
Upload data
1) Click the [Upload Data] button on SST.
2) When a list of packet files stored in the device appears, select target data files to upload.
F-6-177
3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format
(xxx.cap).
Note:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.
F-6-175
6-123
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection
USB Network Packet File Collection
6-124
Select Backup
1) When Download Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Backup.
Overview
Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using a USB memory.
It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software,
such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of
failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
Preparation
USB memory
Store in advance the system software of the machine to connect to.
For the system software, it is fine to store just one of the system software of the machine
(LANG, etc). There is no need to store the full set.
Overall flow
1) Enter download mode
F-6-179
2) Select Backup
2) Select - (OK): 0.
3) Transfer the network capture data
3) When Backup Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Netcap.
4) Collect the network capture data
Enter Download Mode

1) Connect the USB memory to the USB port.
2) Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK].
3) When the machine recognizes the USB memory, download Menu (USB) appears on the
Control Panel.
F-6-180
4) Select - (OK): 0.
F-6-178
6-124
6-125
Transfer the network capture data

1) Store all the network capture data stored in the machine on the USB memory.
F-6-181
2) When ---Please hit any key--- appears, press any key.

4) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the machine.
Collect the network capture data

1) Check that the network capture files are stored on the USB memory.
2) Two types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap) and a file in encrypted
format (xxx.can).
F-6-182
3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format
(xxx.cap).
Note:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.
6-125
Error Code
Overview
Code
Error
Code
Jam
Code
Alarm
Error Code
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Location code
Overview
7-2
Location code
When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Outline
Pickup position
Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the
product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows.
Code type
Explanation
Reference
Error code
This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.
Jam code
This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.
T-7-1
At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup

operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3 (Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1)
Cassette 4 (Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1)
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Deck Unit
Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through the
Duplex Paper Sensor (PS38).)
Error code notation
Pickup position code

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
F0
T-7-3
An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However,
[000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit
in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)
Location code
Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information.
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.
Device
JAM
ERR
ALARM
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 00
Main Controller = 00 Others of

Printer engine = 05 listed below
Color Image Reader Unit - F1

Duplex Color Image Reader Unit - E1
01
04
02
Paper Deck Unit-B2
00
05
04
00
05
Buffer Pass Unit-G1
00
05
Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1
02
05
61,62
Inner Finisher-E1
02
05
02
05
65
T-7-2
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Location code
7-2
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Reorganization of E602 Detail Code
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON

Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Forwarding Settings, Settings/
Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination,
7-3
Reorganization of E602 Detail Code

With the existing models, partition number and detail code are not matched. To simplify the
detail code, following reorganization has been made.
Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user to
back up the data and get approval for this operation.
Meaning of detail code "XXYY"

XX: Same as the partition number It has reorganized to make it the same as the number to
When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,
error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and
switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.
be entered when performing HD-CHK.

YY: Indication of machine state: at startup or during operation When an error occurs at
startup, 01 is indicated. When an error occurs during operation, 11 is indicated.
XX
Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the
target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of
HDD partition10-60 and explain to the user before starting work.
CHK-TYPE
Partition
On start up : 01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FF
FSTDEV
IMG_MNG
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
APL_GEN
TMP_GEN
TMP_FAX
TMP_PSS
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
APL_MEAP
APL_SEND
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Undefined
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
01FF
YY
During start up : 11
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
11FF
T-7-4
Detail codes have been reorganized into 43 types as the total (34 types of detail codes
mentioned above and 9 types of exceptional detail codes).
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Reorganization of E602 Detail Code
7-3
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details
Error Code
E Detailed Occurance
code code
area
Error Code Details

code code
area
E001
0000
05
E001
0001
05
7-4
Items
E001
0003
05
E003
0000
05
Description
Title
Abnormal high temperature in Main Thermistor 1, 2
Description Main Thermistor 1, 2 (TH1) detects 260 deg C or more for
0.2 sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following: DISPLAY > ANALOG >
FIX-C, or DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E; if its less than
260 deg C, go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; and then turn OFF/
ON the power.
It its 260 deg C or more, do not turn on the power before
replacing the Film Unit.
2. Replace the Film Unit.
3. Replace the Shutter Unit.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go

through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR.
Title
Abnormal high temperature in Sub Thermistor 1, 2
Description Sub Thermistor 1, 2 (TH1) detects 275 deg C or more for
0.2 sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following: DISPLAY > ANALOG >
FIX-E2 or DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E3; if its less than
275 deg C, go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
If its 275 deg C or more, do not turn on the power before
replacing the Film Unit.
4. Go through the following to check drive of FM5 and
FM6: COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > FAN; if not
working properly, replace the fan.

Items
Description
Title
High temperature error detected by hardware
Description Hardware detects abnormal high temperature of the
Thermistor (Main Thermistor 1: 264 deg C, Main
Thermistor 2: 265 deg C, Sub Thermistor 1, 2: 280 deg C)
for 400 msec consecutively.
Remedy
1. If the detected temperature of the Thermistor is
less than the abnormal high temperature specified for
Thermistor, go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
If its at abnormally high temperature, do not turn on the
power before replacing the Film Unit.
4. Go through the following to check drive of FM5 and
FM6: COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > FAN; if the
not working properly, replace the fan.

Title
Error detected when the Heater is ON
Description After the Heater was turned ON, Main Thermistor 2, Sub
Thermistor 1 or Sub Thermistor 2 detects 21 deg C or
more and 50 deg C or less for 3 sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER
> FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn OFF and
then ON the power.
2. Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor
Connector and AC Connector).

7-4
7
code code
area
E003
E003
E003
0001
0002
0004
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Abnormal detection during paper feeding
Description During print control, Sub Thermistor detects 70 deg C or
less from the target temperature for 5 sec.
Remedy
then ON the power.
2. Check for open circuit inside the Fixing Assembly and
any disconnection of the connector.

Title
Abnormal low temperature when the Heater is ON
(disconnection detected)
Description After the Heater was turned ON, any of the Thermistors
detects 20 deg C or less for 3 sec.
Remedy
then ON the power.

Title
Timeout at start-up
Description After the start-up control was started, the start-up control
is not completed although 60 sec has passed.
Remedy
2. Replace the Film Unit
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)

7-5
code code
area
E004
0000
05
E004
0001
05
E009
0000
05
E009
0001
05
Items
Description
Title
Thermistor disconnection detection error
Description Signal name, FUSER_CNCTX, detects disconnection for
500 msec or longer.
Remedy
1. Check if the Fixing Assembly is installed.
2. Check connection of the connectors in Fixing Assembly.
3. Check connection of DC Controller PCB (UN1)
Connector.
Title
Error in detection of welding with fixing relay
Description Welding of fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB
Remedy
1. Replace the AC Driver PCB (replacement is necessary
due to welding of the relay).
Other fixing-related error occurs (highly possible of E001)

2. Perform the remedy for the error occurred.
Title
Error in engagement
Description Unable to detect ON with the Fixing Pressure Sensor
although 5 seconds have passed.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Remove and then reinstall the Fixing Assembly.
3. Go through the following to move M21: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR.
If the motor rotates properly:

4-1. Replace the Fixing Drive Assembly.
5-1. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
If the motor does not work properly:

4-2. Identify and replace the faulty gear.
5-2. Replace the Motor.
Title
Error in disengagement
Description Unable to detect OFF with the Fixing Pressure Sensor
although 5 seconds have passed.
Remedy
2. Remove and then reinstall the Fixing Assembly.
3. Go through the following to move M21: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR.
If the motor rotates properly:

4-1. Replace the Fixing Drive Assembly.
5-1. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
If the motor does not work properly:

4-2. Identify and replace the faulty gear.
5-2. Replace the Motor.
7-5
7
code code
area
E009
E012
E012
0002
0101
0102
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Pressure error (it is highly possible that grease is

scattered on the surface of the cam.)
Description Unable to detect stopping of the cam at the specified
position even if pressure is applied 10 times.
Remedy
Clean the scattered grease and excess grease on the
gear at the rear side of the host machine. Procedure is as
follows.
1. Remove the Fixing Assembly.

2. Remove the Gear Cover at the rear side of the host
machine, and remove the Pressure Release Stopper and
the Pressure Release Support Plate (so that the gear is
easily cleaned).
3. Wipe off the scattered grease around the Pressure
Release Cam and the Pressure Plate with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
4. Wipe off the excess grease on the side of the gear and
the shaft.
Title
Y Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error
Description Y Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error (It was detected that
the motor was rotating, but not the encoders.)
Remedy
1. Check connection of drum encoder sensor 1 and 2
(UN31, UN32).
2. Check that the drum encoder sensor Wheel is properly
installed.
3. Check connection of the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
4. Manually turn the Rotor of the Drum Motor
counterclockwise and check that the drum encoder
sensor Wheel rotates. -> If the wheel does not rotate,
replace the Drum Drive Unit.
5. Take out the drum encoder sensor to clean the Sensor
and the Wheel.
6. Replace the drum encoder sensor.
7. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Faulty signal with Y drum encoder sensor 1
Description The signal was not detected for 100 msec or more.
Remedy
1. Check connection of drum encoder sensor 1.
2. Take out drum encoder sensor 1 (UN31) to clean the
Sensor.
3. Replace drum encoder sensor 1.
4. Check if the harness of the drum encoder sensor is
faulty (replace the harness if its disconnected).
7-6
code code
area
E012
0103
05
E012
0104
05
E012
0105
05
E012
0106
05
Items
Description
Title
Faulty signal with Y drum encoder sensor 2
Remedy
1. Check connection of drum encoder sensor 2 (UN32).
2. Take out drum encoder sensor 2 to clean the Sensor.
Title
Failure in Y drum encoder sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the Y drum encoder sensor Wheel
Remedy
(UN31, UN32) and the Wheel.
2. Replace the drum encoder sensor Wheel.
Title
Failure in Y Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the Y Drum Motor
Remedy
1. Check if the Drum is installed.
2. Take out the drum encoder sensor (UN31, UN32) to
clean the Sensor and the Wheel.
3. Remove the Process Unit and then install (reinstall) the
Process Unit.
4. Replace the Drum Unit.
Title
Failure in rotation of Y Drum Motor
Description The Y Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the Y Drum
Motor (M1).
2. Check connection of the connector with Drum Driver
PCB (UN4).
3. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced/damaged.
Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
4. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
7-6
7
code code
area
E012
E012
0201
0202
05
05
E012
0203
05
E012
0204
05
Items
Description
Title
M Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error
Description M Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error (It was detected
that the motor was rotating, but not the encoders.)
Remedy
(UN33, UN34).
installed.
and the Wheel.
Title
Faulty signal with M drum encoder sensor 1
Remedy
Sensor.
Title
Faulty signal with M drum encoder sensor 2
Remedy
Title
Failure in M drum encoder sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the M drum encoder sensor
Wheel
Remedy
7-7
code code
area
E012
0205
05
E012
0206
05
E012
0301
05
E012
0302
05
Items
Description
Title
Failure in M Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the M Drum Motor
Remedy
Process Unit.
Title
Failure in rotation of M Drum Motor
Description The M Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/
is stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the M Drum
Motor (M2).
PCB (UN4).
Title
C Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error
Description C Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error (It was detected that
the motor was rotating, but not the encoders.)
Remedy
(UN35, UN36).
installed.
and the Wheel.
Title
Faulty signal with C drum encoder sensor 1
Remedy
Sensor.
7-7
7
code code
area
E012
0303
05
E012
0304
05
E012
0305
05
E012
0306
05
Items
Description
Title
Faulty signal with C drum encoder sensor 2
Remedy
Title
Failure in C drum encoder sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the C drum encoder sensor
Wheel
Remedy
Title
Failure in C Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the C Drum Motor
Remedy
Process Unit.
Title
Failure in rotation of C Drum Motor
Description The C Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the C Drum
Motor (M3).
PCB (UN4).
7-8
code code
area
E012
0401
05
E012
0402
05
E012
0403
05
E012
0404
05
Items
Description
Title
Bk Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error
Description Bk Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error (It was detected
that the motor was rotating, but not the encoders.)
Remedy
(UN37, UN38).
installed.
and the Wheel.
Title
Faulty signal with Bk drum encoder sensor 1
Remedy
Sensor.
Title
Faulty signal with Bk drum encoder sensor 2
Remedy
Title
Failure in Bk drum encoder sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the Bk drum encoder sensor
Wheel
Remedy
7-8
7
code code
area
E012
E012
E012
E012
0405
0406
1000
1001
05
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Failure in Bk Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the Bk Drum Motor
Remedy
Process Unit.
Title
Failure in rotation of Bk Drum Motor
Description The Bk Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/
is stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the Drum
Motor (M4).
PCB (UN4).
Title
Failure in rotation when ITB Motor is driven.
Description The ITB Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Motor
(M13).
2. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Unit.
3. Check connection of the connector with the Drum
Driver PCB (UN4).
4. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced or
damaged. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
Title
Failure is detected before ITB motor is driven.
Description LOCK signal is detected Low before the ITB Motor is
driven.
Remedy
1. Check the cable connected to the ITB Motor.
2. Check the cable connected to the Drum Driver PCB
(UN4).
7-9
code code
area
E012
2000
05
Items
Title
Description
Remedy
E012
3000
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E012
3001
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E012
3002
05
Title
Description
E013
0001
05
E014
0001
05
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
Failure in rotation of Drum Motors (in all colors) and ITB
Motor
Faulty rotation with all of the Motors at the same time
(based on the assumption that all of the motors fail to
rotate)
1. Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
2. Check the connector on the Relay Board (UN5).
3. Check the Interlock Switch.
4. Check the Drum Driver Harness.
Failure in drum encoder sensors (in all colors)
The drum encoder sensors are faulty (in all colors) at the
same time.
1. Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
2. FU3 is disconnected on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4) ->
Check the harness & replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Failure in control of Drum Motors in all colors
Controls of the Drum Motors (in all colors) are faulty at
the same time.
Check the Process Unit (to see if its properly installed).
Check the Drum Unit (to see if its properly installed).
Failure in rotation of Drum Motor (in all colors)
(M1,M2,M3,M4)
All of the Drum Motors are not rotating at the specified
speed/are stopped.
Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Error in Recycle Toner Stirring Motor
The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
1. Check disconnection of the Recycle Toner Stirring
Motor (M14).
2. Check toner level in the Recycle Toner container
(replace the Recycle Toner container if the toner level is
too much).
3. Replace the Recycle Toner Stirring Motor.
4. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
Error in Fixing Motor
The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
1. Check the Fixing Assembly.
2. Remove and then install the Fixing Assembly.
4. Replace the Fixing Motor.
7-9
7
code code
area
E020
0011
05
E020
0012
05
E020
0013
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although
the patch level was minimized at the time of patch
initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the

Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
initialization.
Remedy

Drum.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
initialization.
Remedy

Drum.
7-10
code code
area
E020
0014
05
E020
0021
05
E020
0022
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
initialization.
Remedy

Drum.
Title
Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although
the patch level was maximized at the time of patch
initialization.
Remedy
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47, UN48,UN49) value shows
1-digit, check that the Developing Assembly is installed,
and then perform remedy from 3.

Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
Title
initialization.
Remedy

Drum.
7-10
7
code code
area
E020
E020
E020
0023
0024
0101
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
initialization.
Remedy

Drum.
Title
initialization.
Remedy

Drum.
Title
Description The value is higher than the upper limit for the patch.
Remedy

Drum.
3. Check if the patch sensor is disconnected.
7-11
code code
area
E020
0102
05
E020
0103
05
E020
0104
05
E020
0130
05
E020
0131
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy

Drum.
Title
Remedy

Drum.
Title
Remedy

Drum.
Title
Description The average of ATR reference value was lower than the
specified value at the time of ATR Sensor initialization.
Remedy
1. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS5) Harness.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Description The average of ATR reference value was higher than the
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS5) Connector is properly
connected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
7-11
7
code code
area
E020
0140
05
E020
0141
05
E020
0190
05
E020
0191
05
E020
01B0
05
Items
Description
Title
Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR
initialization: less than the specified value (3.2V).
Remedy
connected.
Title
initialization: exceeds the specified value (6.8V).
Remedy
Title
Description Error in signal lower limit with ATR sampling detected
value
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor Connector is disconnected.
Title
Description Error in signal upper limit with ATR sampling detected
value
Remedy
1. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
2. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
4. Check short-circuit of the harness with the Toner Buffer
Supply Sensor (PS1).
Title
Description TD ratio lower limit error at the time of print sequence
(Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-Y; if
DENS-Y is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of
solid image with the color causing the error (to reduce T/D
ratio). See the Service Mode again to see if the problem
is improved. Remedy is complete if its improved. If not,
perform the following remedy work.
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS5) Connector is

disconnected.
7-12
code code
area
E020
01B1
05
E020
0201
05
Items
Description
Title
Description TD ratio upper limit error at the time of print sequence
(Small amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
1. Output 10 sheets of white (blank) sheets (to increase
T/D ratio).
5. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner supply
sensor (PS1).
Title
Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch.
Remedy
If the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) value shows
1-digit, perform remedy from 3.
If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly
soiled, toner can be leaked.

Drum.
8. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner Supply
Sensor (PS1).
7-12
7
code code
area
E020
0202
05
E020
0203
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy

Drum.
Sensor (PS2).
Title
Remedy

Drum.
Sensor (PS3).
7-13
code code
area
E020
0204
05
E020
0230
05
E020
0231
05
E020
0240
05
E020
0241
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy

Drum.
Sensor (PS4).
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
connected.
Title
Remedy
connected.
Title
Remedy
7-13
7
code code
area
E020
0290
05
E020
0291
05
E020
02B0
05
E020
02B1
05
E020
0330
05
Items
Description
Title
value
Remedy
Title
value
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-M; if
DENS-M is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of

disconnected.
Title
Remedy
T/D ratio).
sensor (PS2).
Title
Remedy
7-14
code code
area
E020
0331
05
E020
0340
05
E020
0341
05
E020
0390
05
E020
0391
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
connected.
Title
Remedy
connected.
Title
Remedy
Title
value
Remedy
Title
value
Remedy
7-14
7
code code
area
E020
E020
03B0
03B1
05
05
E020
0430
05
E020
0431
05
E020
0440
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-C; if
DENS-C is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of

disconnected.
Title
Remedy
T/D ratio).
sensor (PS3).
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
connected.
Title
Remedy
connected.
7-15
code code
area
E020
0441
05
E020
0490
05
E020
0491
05
E020
04B0
05
E020
04B1
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
value
Remedy
Title
value
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-K; if
DENS-K is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of

disconnected.
Title
Remedy
T/D ratio).
sensor (PS4).
7-15
7
code code
area
E021
0100
05
E021
0200
05
E021
0300
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Y Developing Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check the load applied to the Developing Assembly
(turn the gear with your hand to check if the load
is appropriate. If the load is too much, replace the
Developing Assembly).
2. Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR; and turn M5 to check
the drive of the Developing Motor. If its not rotating
properly, check the harness (to see if the harness is
caught, disconnected or physically removed).
3. (If the above measures do not solve the problem,)
replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Error in M Developing Motor
Remedy
Title
Error in C Developing Motor
Remedy
7-16
code code
area
E021
0400
05
E025
0100
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Bk Developing Motor
Remedy
Title
Error in lock of the Y Toner Container Motor
Description The Y Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked /
lock detection.
Remedy
1. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive
Unit to check the operation (by comparing with other
color, etc.)
If the manual rotating operation results in NG, perform
the following because its due to mechanical overload.
If there is no problem, go to step 5.
2. Remove the Delivery Tray to check the position of the
projection attached at the back of the gear in the Hopper
Assembly. Compare with the gear that works properly.
If the position of the projection is displaced, check the
following.
Check the lever to open/close the Toner Small Cover (to
see if the operation is smooth, no damage with the lever,
the lever works OK (no wrong move to up/down). If the
lever is faulty, replace the lever.
3. Remove the Main Drive Unit to check the unit (to see
damage, etc.)
If its results in NG, replace the Main Drive Unit.
4. Manually turn the gear on the cam in the hopper unit to
check the rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Set-on Hopper Unit.
5. (If the above measures do not solve the problem)
Replace the Toner Container Motor (M9).
Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
7-16
7
code code
area
E025
0110
05
E025
0120
05
Items
Description
Title
Timeout error in detection of Y Toner Bottle Seal/Release

Sensor
Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON => OFF
=> ON with the sensor when the cap of the Y Toner
Container was sealed/released.
Remedy
Unit to check the operation.
2. If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate, check the
drive (to see damage of the gear, etc.)
3. If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate while the
Drive rotates, turn the Set-on Hopper Unit to check the
rotating operation. If its results in NG, replace the Set-on
Hopper Unit.
4. If both the Main Drive Unit and the Set-on Hooper Unit
rotates together once the Main Drive Unit is manually
rotated while sealing/releasing of the container works
properly, check the sensor harness (to see if the harness
is caught, disconnected or physically removed).
5. Replace the sensor which has been checked in step 4.
NOTE: When checking the operation after performing

the remedy, go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; then, turn OFF and
then ON the power. After performing the remedy, perform
the toner replacement operation (from toner removal to
reset/recovery) from the Control Panel at least once, and
check that the replacement operation can be performed
normally.
Title
Y Mismatched phase
Description Set-on Unit detects opening of the Y Toner Container as
well as the Small Door.
Remedy
1. Check if the Small Door can be closed.
2. Close the Small Door and turn OFF and then ON the
power to check recovery.
3. Check the installation of the Open/Close Sensor of the
Small Door (to see if its installed at the correct position).
4. Check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is
7-17
code code
area
E025
01A0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS5)
Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam
HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the Toner
Cap so that open and close status of the Toner Cap
cannot be judged.
Remedy
Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open/close the Toner Cap or
problem at the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor side.
1. Check if the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor is soiled
and the installation of the sensor.
2. Rotate the Set-on Drive Shaft a little with the attached
tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DCON>
P024 bit4) to see that the output value of the sensor is
changed.
Since it is difficult to check the screen while rotating it,
repeat the operation to rotate it a little and check the
screen until the value is changed.
If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed
when opening/closing the Toner Cap. Even if it is normal,
be sure to perform step 4 and later steps.
2-1. If there is an error in rotation of the Set-on Drive
Shaft, check the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then
perform step 4 and later steps.
2-2. When the Set-on Drive Unit is not driven although
the Set-on Drive Shaft rotates, check if it is driven by
removing the Hopper Unit.
If it is not driven, replace the Hopper Unit and then
2-3. When the output value of the sensor is not changed
although the Set-on Drive Unit is driven, check the Sensor
Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or
physically removed).
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After checking
the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and later steps.
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
parts, replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4) and then
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and then
ON the main power.
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check that
toner replacement can be performed normally.
7-17
7
code code
area
E025
01B0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS5)
HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the Toner
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-18
code code
area
E025
01C0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS13) in Y Toner Container
Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner
Cover when removing the Toner Container.
Remedy
Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link
mechanism to open the Toner Container Inner Cover or
problem at the Toner Container Inner Cover Sensor side.
1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance>
Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Container
Inner Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft area,
etc.).
2. Check if the Toner Container Inner Cover Sensor is
soiled and the installation of the sensor.
3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DCON> P024
bit8) to see that the output value of the Toner Container
Inner Cover Sensor is changed normally when opening/
closing the Toner Container Inner Cover.
If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by rotating the Set-on
Drive Shaft with the attached tool and opening the Toner
Container Inner Cover. When closing the Toner Container
Inner Cover by hand, it becomes 1.
3-1. When the Toner Container Inner Cover is not opened
although the Set-on Drive Shaft rotates, check the drive
system from upstream (Set-on Drive Unit -> Hopper Unit
-> Bottle Base Unit -> Toner Container Inner Cover Unit).
If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then
3-2. When the output value is not changed normally
although the Toner Container Inner Cover can be opened/
closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness
is caught, disconnected or physically removed, *including
the Relay Connector).
part, replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4) and then
ON the main power.
7-18
7
code code
area
E025
0200
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in lock of the M Toner Container Motor
Description The M Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked /
lock detection.
Remedy
color, etc.)
following.
damage, etc.)
check the rotation.
7-19
code code
area
E025
0210
05
E025
0220
05
Items
Description
Title
Timeout error in detection of M Toner Bottle Seal/Release

Sensor
=> ON with the sensor when the cap of the M Toner
Remedy
Hopper Unit.

normally.
Title
M Mismatched phase
Description Set-on Unit detects opening of the M Toner Container as
Remedy
7-19
7
code code
area
E025
02A0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS6)
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-20
code code
area
E025
02B0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS6)
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-20
7
code code
area
E025
02C0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS14) in M Toner Container
Remedy
etc.).
ON the main power.
7-21
code code
area
E025
0300
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in lock of the C Toner Container Motor
Description The C Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked /
lock detection.
Remedy
color, etc.)
following.
damage, etc.)
check the rotation.
7-21
7
code code
area
E025
0310
05
E025
0320
05
Items
Description
Title
Timeout error in detection of C Toner Bottle Seal/Release

Sensor
=> ON with the sensor when the cap of the C Toner
Remedy
Hopper Unit.

normally.
Title
C Mismatched phase
Description Set-on Unit detects opening of the C Toner Container as
Remedy
7-22
code code
area
E025
03A0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS7)
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-22
7
code code
area
E025
03B0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS7)
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-23
code code
area
E025
03C0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS15) in C Toner Container
Remedy
etc.).
ON the main power.
7-23
7
code code
area
E025
0400
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in lock of the Bk Toner Container Motor
Description The Bk Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked /
lock detection.
Remedy
color, etc.)
following.
damage, etc.)
check the rotation.
7-24
code code
area
E025
0410
05
E025
0420
05
Items
Description
Title
Timeout error in detection of Bk Toner Bottle Seal/Release

Sensor
=> ON with the sensor when the cap of the Bk Toner
Remedy
Hopper Unit.

normally.
Title
Bk Mismatched phase
Description Set-on Unit detects opening of the Bk Toner Container as
Remedy
7-24
7
code code
area
E025
04A0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS8)
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-25
code code
area
E025
04B0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS8)
cannot be judged.
Remedy
changed.
ON the main power.
7-25
7
code code
area
E025
04C0
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS16) in Bk Toner Container
Remedy
etc.).
ON the main power.
7-26
code code
area
E027
0100
05
E027
0200
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in supply with Y Developing Assembly
Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON => OFF =>
ON with the sensor which detects a full rotation of the
supply screw within the specified period of time.
Remedy
1. Check the damage of the Developing Coupling.
If its damaged, replace the Developing Assembly.
2. Check the damage of the coupling (with the Developing
Assembly) at the Host Machine side.
If its damaged, remove the Main Drive Unit to replace
the coupling.
3. Turn the motor as a single unit while the Drum/
Developing Assembly is removed to check rotation of the
Main Drive Unit.
If it does not rotate, replace the Motor.
If the above measures do not solve the problem, replace
the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
If there still remains the problem, replace the Main Drive
Unit.
4. Remove the Hopper Unit and manually turn the Supply
Input Gear to check rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Hopper Unit.
Title
Error in supply with M Developing Assembly
Remedy
the coupling.
Main Drive Unit.
Unit.
7-26
7
code code
area
E027
E027
0300
0400
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in supply with C Developing Assembly
Remedy
the coupling.
Main Drive Unit.
Unit.
Title
Error in supply with Bk Developing Assembly
Remedy
the coupling.
Main Drive Unit.
Unit.
7-27
code code
area
E029
0003
05
E032
0001
05
E045
0000
05
E061
0001
05
E061
00E0
05
Items
Description
Title
ITB light intensity error
Description The reflected value from ITB was lower than the lower
limit when adjusting the light intensity of patch LED.
Remedy
1. Check if the cable of the Registration Shutter Solenoid
(SL1) is open circuit.
2. Check if the cable of the Patch Sensor (Front, Rear)
(UN47, 48) is open circuit.
3. Check the installation of the ITB Unit.
4. Replace the Patch Sensor Unit.
5. Replace the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL1).
Title
ASSIST Counter failed to work
Description Detection of short-circuit with the Count Pulse Signal
Remedy
Check the cable (to see if its disconnected)
Title
Error in Transparency Sensor
Description When the power is ON or the door is closed, the light
failed to be back although there is no paper.
Remedy
1. Check installation or soil of the Transparency Sensor
(UN51) and the prism.
3. Replace the Transparency Sensor.
Title
Abnormal current run to the Y Drum
Description Abnormal current run to the Y Drum (small current level
or no drum is found)
Remedy
1. Check installation of the Drum Unit.
2. Check if there is failure in grounding contact at the
Drum Unit side (such as loosened screw which secures
the plate at the contact point).
3. Check if there is failure in grounding contact with the
Drum at Process Unit side.
5. Replace the Pre-exposure LED PCB (UN23,UN24).
Title
Description The change in current level for Y Drum film thickness
detection is too much compared to the previous time.
Remedy
1. Check with the Host Machine which generates an error
to check if a wrong cartridge (which is different from the
initialized cartridge) is installed.
the plate at the contact point)
7-27
7
code code
area
E061
01F0
05
E061
01F1
05
E061
0101
05
Items
Description
Title
Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of
the Y Drum film thickness (large current level)
Remedy
Drum at the Process Unit side.
4. Forced initialization in Service Mode: COPIER >
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETY: execution of the color
causing the error.
6. Check the primary transfer voltage value (if its not
appropriate, turn OFF and then ON the main power to
forcibly execute the ATVC control).
Title
the Y Drum film thickness (small current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETY: execution of the color
causing the error)
Title
Abnormal current run to the M Drum
Description Abnormal current run to the M Drum (small current level
Remedy
7-28
code code
area
E061
01E0
05
E061
02F0
05
E061
02F1
05
Items
Description
Title
Description The change in current level for M Drum film thickness
Remedy
Title
the M Drum film thickness (large current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETM: execution of the color
causing the error.
Title
the M Drum film thickness (small current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETM: execution of the color
causing the error)
7-28
7
code code
area
E061
0201
05
E061
02E0
05
E061
03F0
05
Items
Description
Title
Abnormal current run to the C Drum
Description Abnormal current run to the C Drum (small current level
Remedy
Title
Description The change in current level for C Drum film thickness
Remedy
Title
the C Drum film thickness (large current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETC: execution of the color
causing the error.
7-29
code code
area
E061
03F1
05
E061
0301
05
E061
03E0
05
Items
Description
Title
the C Drum film thickness (small current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETC: execution of the color
causing the error)
Title
Abnormal current run to the Bk Drum
Description Abnormal current run to the Bk Drum (small current level
Remedy
Title
Description The change in current level for Bk Drum film thickness
Remedy
7-29
7
code code
area
E061
E061
04F0
04F1
05
05
E074
0001
05
E074
0002
05
Items
Description
Title
the Bk Drum film thickness (large current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETK: execution of the color
causing the error.
Title
the Bk Drum film thickness (small current level)
Remedy
FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETK: execution of the color
causing the error)
Title
Error in disengagement operation
Description Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 failed to be
detected for 2 sec at the time of disengagement operation
Remedy
1. Check if the ITB Connector is physically removed.
2. Replace the Primary Transfer Detachment Motor (M15)
and its Drive Assembly (the gear, Drive Shaft, Mounting
Plate, etc.).
Title
Error in engagement operation
Description Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 failed to be
detected for 2 sec at the time of engagement operation
Remedy
2. Replace the Primary Transfer Detachment Motor (M15)
Plate, etc.).
7-30
code code
area
E074
0003
05
E075
0002
05
E075
0003
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Sensor
Description Both Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 and 2
(PS22,PS23) are detected at the time of engagement/
disengagement operation
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Unit.
2. Replace the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1
and 2 (PS22,PS23)
Title
Timeout error in searching ITB steering HP
Description Unable to detect change (Low -> High or High -> Low) of
ITB Steering Sensor Signal although 10 sec has passed.
Remedy
2. Check if the cable of the ITB Unit is open circuit
(including the inside of the ITB Unit).
3. Replace the ITB Displacement Control Motor (M14)
Plate, etc.).
Title
Error in full displacement of ITB (rear)
Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement
position at the rear.
Remedy
1. Correct the displacement of the ITB. (Procedures are
shown below.)
2. Replace the ITB.
3. Replace the Secondary Transfer Roller.
a) Place paper and remove the ITB Unit.

b) Lift the front left side up (where the Cleaner and Motor
are located) and hold the ITB Unit as if to twist it.
c) Turn the Motor counterclockwise as if to make 2 to 3
rounds of the ITB.
d) As the ITB is getting closer to the center, align the edge
of the ITB with the marking line.
NOTE:
This symptom is likely to occur if the machine is not
installed on the level (the left-rear is higher). Check if the
machine is installed on the level.
If this symptom still occurs, perform steps 2 and 3.
7-30
7
code code
area
E075
0004
05
E075
0005
05
E075
0006
05
E075
0007
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in combination of ITB Displacement Sensors
Description Failed to determine position due to combination of the ITB
Displacement Sensors (PS25 - PS28) (faulty sensor)
Remedy
Plate, etc.).
Title
Error/failure in searching ITB steering HP
Description Failed to detect correct HP position although the change
(Low -> High or High -> Low) of the ITB Steering Sensor
Signal can be detected (execute retry twice)
Remedy
Plate, etc.).
Title
Timeout error in searching ITB equilibrium position
Description The equilibrium position could not be found although 11
minutes have passed when searching ITB equilibrium
position.
Remedy
2. Replace the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
3. Replace the ITB Unit.
Title
Interruption error in searching ITB equilibrium position
Description Door open was detected while executing
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-INIT.
Remedy
After turning OFF and then ON the power, execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-INIT, and check that
OK is displayed.
7-31
code code
area
E075
0103
05
E100
0100
05
E100
0300
05
E100
B000
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in full displacement of ITB (front)
Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement
position at the front.
Remedy
1. Correct the displacement of the ITB. (Procedures are
shown below.)
2. Replace the ITB.
3. Replace the Secondary Transfer Roller.
a) Place paper and remove the ITB Unit.

b) Lift the rear left side up (where the cleaner is located;
opposite to the motor) and hold the ITB Unit as if to twist
it.
c) Turn the Motor counterclockwise as if to make 2 to 3
rounds of the ITB.
d) As the ITB is getting closer to the center, align the edge
of the ITB with the marking line.
NOTE:
This symptom is likely to occur if the machine is not
installed on the level (the left-front is higher). Check if the
machine is installed on the level.
If this symptom still occurs, perform steps 2 and 3.
Title
BD error of YM-side Scanner
Description Failure in detection of BD signal even though the
specified period of time has passed when Laser Scanner
Unit 1 (YM laser) is started or making prints.
Remedy
2. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 1
3. Replace Laser Scanner Unit 1.
Title
BD error of CBk-side Scanner
Description Failure in detection of BD signal even though the
specified period of time has passed when Laser Scanner
Unit 2 (CBk laser) is started or making prints.
Remedy
2. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 2.
Title
BD cycle error
Description When the BD cycle count value is not within the specified
range.
Remedy
2. Check connection of harness on the Laser Scanner
Unit.
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
5. Replace the harness.
7-31
7
code code
area
E102
E102
E103
E110
E110
0101
0301
0001
0100
0101
05
05
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Faulty EEPROM of YM-side Scanner
Description In the case of an error in reading EEPROM in the Laser
Driver (YM) or in the case of a wrong Laser Scanner Unit
which does not match with the Host Machine.
Remedy
2. Check the connector of the Laser Scanner Unit 1
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit 1.
Title
Faulty EEPROM of CBk-side Scanner
Description In the case of an error in reading EEPROM of the Laser
Driver (CBk), in the case of failure in reading the correct
information (laser, etc.) from EEPROM, or in the case of a
wrong Laser Scanner which does not match with the Host
Machine.
Remedy
Title
With the Laser Scanners at YM side and CK side, the
laser driver IDs were different
Description The model IDs were different between the YM side and
CK side when reading the model ID from EEPROM.
(Detection is performed only with iR-ADVC5255, and
C5250.)
Remedy
Check the parts number of the Laser Scanner Unit.
Replace the Laser Scanner Unit to make the following
combinations.
YM side: For iR-ADVC5255 and C5250, CK side: For iRADVC5255 and C5250 (recommended)
YM side: For iR-ADVC5051 and C5045, CK side: For
iR-ADVC5051 and C5045 (operates normally but not
recommended)
Title
Error in Polygon Motor of YM-side Scanner (BD lock
failed)
Description In the case of failure in detecting FG signal although the
specified period of time has passed after the Scanner
Motor of Laser Scanner Unit 1 (YM laser) was started.
Remedy
Title
Error in Polygon Motor of YM-side Scanner (unreached
speed)
Description In the case of failure in detecting FG signal while the
Scanner Motor of Laser Scanner Unit 1 (YM laser) is
stably rotating.
Remedy
2. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 1
7-32
code code
area
E110
0300
05
Items
Title
Description
Remedy
E110
0301
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E112
0000
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E112
0001
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E112
0002
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
Error in Polygon Motor of CBk-side Scanner (BD lock
failed)
In the case of failure in detecting FG signal although the
specified period of time has passed after the Scanner
Motor of Laser Scanner Unit 2 (CBk laser) was started.
Error in Polygon Motor of CBk-side Scanner (unreached
speed)
In the case of failure in detecting FG signal while the
Scanner Motor of Laser Scanner Unit 2 (CBk laser).
Error in Dustproof Shutter
Failed to be at HP when its open (when the Job is
started).
1. Check installation of the Dustproof Shutter Drive.
2. Check if the connector of the Laser Shutter Sensor
(PS29) or the Laser Shutter Motor (M28) is removed
(disconnected).
3. Check the status of Sensor Flag.
4. Replace the HP Sensor, Replace the Laser Shutter
Motor (M28).
Failure to be back to the HP although the specified period
of time has passed when closing.
(disconnected).
Motor (M28).
Failed to move from the HP when opening (the Job is
started)
(disconnected).
Motor (M28).
7-32
7
code code
area
E193
0001
05
E197
0000
05
E197
0001
05
E197
0002
05
E197
0003
05
E197
0080
05
E197
0081
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in IMG2
Description Failure of LSI timing adjustment circuit on the DC
Controller PCB.
Remedy
Title
Error in communication of HOB DMA mode
Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC
Controller.
Remedy
Title
Error in communication of HOB single-shot mode
Controller PCB (UN1).
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Timeout error in HOB single-shot mode
Remedy
Title
Timeout error in EHOB transmission-waiting
Description Communication failure between the DC Controller PCB
(UN1) and Laser Scanner Unit.
Remedy
2. Check connection of harness on the target color side
(YM/CK).
5. Replace the harness on the target color side (YM/CK).
Title
Timeout error in EHOB reception-waiting
Remedy
(YM/CK).
7-33
code code
area
E197
00A0
05
E197
00B0
05
E197
00E0
05
E197
0100
05
E197
0101
05
E197
0102
05
E197
0103
05
E197
0180
05
Items
Description
Title
Timeout error in HOB transmission-waiting
Remedy
Title
Timeout error in HOB reception-waiting
Remedy
Title
Timeout error in the Motor stop signal interruption
reception
Description Communication error between CPU and LSI on the DC
Controller PCB
Remedy
Title
Controller.
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
(YM/CK).
7-33
7
code code
area
E197
0181
05
E197
01A0
05
E197
01B0
05
E197
0200
05
E197
0201
05
E197
0202
05
E197
0203
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
(YM/CK).
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Controller.
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-34
code code
area
E197
0280
05
E197
0281
05
E197
02A0
05
E197
02B0
05
E197
1001
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
(YM/CK).
Title
Remedy
(YM/CK).
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Feed Driver PCB disconnection
Description Feed Driver PCB disconnection detection
Remedy
1. Disconnect and then connect the connectors (J103 and
J107) on the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
J253) on the Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Check that 3.3V power is supplied to the Feed Driver
PCB (UN2).
4. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
7-34
7
code code
area
E197
1002
05
E197
1003
05
E197
1004
05
Items
7-35
Description
Title
Drum Driver PCB disconnection
Description Drum Driver PCB disconnection detection
Remedy
J313) on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
3. Check that 3.3V power is supplied to the Drum Driver
PCB (UN4).
Title
Cassette Feed Driver PCB disconnection
Description Cassette Feed Driver PCB disconnection detection
Remedy
J202) on the Cassette Feed Driver PCB (UN3).
3. Check that 3.3V power is supplied to the Cassette
Feed Driver PCB (UN3).
4. Replace the Cassette Feed Driver PCB (UN3).
Title
High Voltage PCB disconnection
Description High Voltage PCB disconnection detection
Remedy
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J110) on
the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
654) on the HVT1 PCB (UN16).
3. Check that 3.3V power is supplied to the HVT1 PCB
(UN16).
4. Replace the HVT1 PCB (UN16).
T-7-5
7-35
7
code code
area
E202
0001
04
E202
0002
04
E202
E202
0101
0102
04
04
Items
Description
Title
Scanner HP error
Description Scanner Unit error when moving to the left side for HP
check operation
Remedy
2. Check the drive of Scanner Motor. (Open the DF Unit
to check the operation of Motor.)
3. Check the flag position of Scanner Home Position
Sensor and Scanner Unit.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Scanner HP error
Description Scanner Unit error when moving to the right side for HP
check operation
Remedy
2. Check the drive of Scanner Motor. (Open the DF Unit
to check the operation of Motor.)
Title
Glass HP error (This error occurs on Duplex Color Image
Reader Unit-B1 only)
Description Glass error when moving to the left side for HP check
operation
Remedy
2. Check the drive of Glass Shifting Motor. (Set the
service mode: FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-CHK > 7.
Then, set FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-ON.)
Title
Glass HP error (This error occurs on Duplex Color Image
Reader Unit-B1 only)
Description Glass error when moving to the right side for HP check
operation
Remedy
2. Check the drive of Glass Shifting Motor. (Set the
service mode: FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-CHK > 7.
Then, set FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-ON.)
7-36
code code
area
E227
0001
04
E227
0002
04
E227
0003
04
E227
0004
04
Items
Description
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when the power is turned ON
Remedy
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and
DF Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver
PCB.
Title
Description 24V port error when a job is started
Remedy
DF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Description 24V port error when a job is ended
Remedy
DF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Description 24V port error when loading
Remedy
DF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
7-36
7
code code
area
E227
E227
E227
E240
0101
0102
0103
0000
04
04
04
05
Items
Description
Title
Description 24V port error when the power of DF Unit is turned ON
Remedy
DF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Description 24V port error when a job is started in the DF Unit
Remedy
DF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Description 24V port error when a job is ended in the DF Unit
Remedy
DF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Error in communication data
Description When communication data error between the controller
and DC Controller PCB is detected.
Remedy
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB
(UN1)/Main Controller PCB.
7-37
code code
area
E240
0004
05
E240
0005
05
E246
0001
05
E246
0002
05
E246
0003
05
E246
0005
05
E247
0001
05
E248
0001
04
E248
0002
04
Items
Description
Title
Error in controller communication
Description No response after 1.5 minutes has passed since the print
request from the Main Controller to the DC Controller.
Remedy
(UN1)/Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Timeout error in Dhalf request
Description No response after 1.5 minutes has passed since the auto
adjustment request from the Main Controller to the DC
Controller.
Remedy
(UN1)/Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
System error
Description System error
Remedy
Contact the service company office
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
EEPROM error
Description Failure of power-on at EEPROM for the reader controller
PCB (PCB1)
Remedy
Title
EEPROM error
Description Failure of writing at EEPROM for the reader controller
PCB (PCB1)
Remedy
7-37
7
code code
area
E248
0003
04
E270
0001
04
E270
E270
0002
0101
04
04
Items
Description
Title
EEPROM error
Description Failure of reading after writing at EEPROM for the reader
controller PCB (PCB1)
Remedy
Title
Scanner Unit (Paper Front) VSYNC signal error
Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB (Paper
Front) which communicates with Reader Controller PCB,
VSYNC signal is not sent appropriately, so the image
error occurs or the operation stops abnormally.
Remedy
2. Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB
and Scanner Unit PCB (Paper Front), and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
5. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front).
Title
DDI HSYNC error
Description Due to the DDI hardware HSYNC signal error, VSYNC
signal is not sent appropriately, so the image error occurs
or the operation stops abnormally.
Remedy
3. Replace the DDI-S Cable between Reader and Printer.
Title
Scanner Unit (Paper Back) VSYNC signal error (This
error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only)
Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB (Paper
Back) which communicates with Reader Controller PCB,
VSYNC signal is not sent appropriately, so the image
error occurs or the operation stops abnormally.
Remedy
and Scanner Unit PCB (Paper Back), and check that the
5. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back).
7-38
code code
area
E280
0001
04
E280
0002
04
E280
0101
04
Items
Description
Title
Communication error between Reader Controller PCB

and Scanner Unit (Paper Front)
Description Within specified time, communication between Reader
Controller PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) cannot
be made.
Remedy
Title
and Scanner Unit (Paper Front)
Description Disconnection of the cable between the Reader
Controller PCB and the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) was
detected.
Remedy
Title
and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (This error occurs on
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only)
Description Within specified time, communication between Reader
Controller PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) cannot
be made.
Remedy
7-38
7
code code
area
E280
0102
04
E301
0001
04
E301
0002
04
Items
Description
Title

and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (This error occurs on
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only)
Description Disconnection of the cable between the Reader
Controller PCB and the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) was
detected.
Remedy
Title
Reading light intensity error
Description The light intensity was at the reference level or below at
paper front shading.
Remedy
1. Execute the service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION >
MISC-R > SCANLAMP) and check that the LED of the
Scanner Unit (Paper Front) is lit.
2. Check the connection between Scanner Unit (Paper
Front) and LED, and check that the Cable is not opencircuit.
3. Check the connection between Reader Controller
PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Front), and check that the
Title
Reading light intensity error
Description The light intensity was at the reference level or below at
paper back shading.
Remedy
1. Check that the LED of the Scanner Unit (Paper Back)
is lit.
Back) and LED, and check that the Cable is not opencircuit.
and Scanner Unit (Paper Back), and check that the Cable
is not open-circuit.
7-39
code code
area
E302
0001
04
E302
0002
04
Items
Description
Title
Error in paper front white shading
Description Error in shading RAM access
The shading value is out of the specified range.
Remedy
1. Check that the LED of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front)
is lit.
PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Front), and check that the
4. Check the condition of Shading White Plate of the
Stream Read Glass (Paper Front) (scratches, dust, soil,
etc.).
5. Check if Scanner Unit (Paper Front) detects HP
correctly. (If it does not detect correctly, the Scanner Unit
reaches to the end when DF is opened.)
Title
Error in paper front black shading
Remedy
1. Check that the LED of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front)
is lit.
Stream Read Glass (Paper Front) (scratches, dust, soil,
etc.).
4. Check if Scanner Unit (Paper Front) detects HP
correctly. (If it does not detect correctly, the Scanner Unit
reaches to the end when DF is opened.)
7-39
7
code code
area
E302
E302
E315
0101
0102
000E
04
04
05
E350
0000
05
E350
0001
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in paper back white shading
Remedy
is lit.
Scanner Glass (Paper Back) (scratches, dust, soil, etc.).
5. Check if Scanner Unit (Paper Back) detects HP
correctly.
Title
Error in paper back black shading
Remedy
is lit.
Scanner Glass (Paper Back) (scratches, dust, soil, etc.).
4. Check if Scanner Unit (Paper Back) detects HP
correctly.
Title
Image process device error
Description Software error of image process device was detected.
Remedy
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector on the
Main Controller PCB 2 (including SDRAM).
2. Replace the SDRAM.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
7-40
code code
area
E350
0002
05
E350
0003
05
E350
3000
05
E351
0000
00
E354
0001
05
E354
0002
05
E355
0001
05
E355
0002
05
E355
0003
05
E355
0004
05
E400
0001
04
Items
Description
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
Main Controller PCB 2 communication error
Main Controller PCB 2 communication error.
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
and DF Unit
Communication checksum error between Reader
Controller PCB and DF Unit
and DF Driver PCB (Signal Cable and Power Supply
Cable), and check that the Cables are not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Cable between Reader Controller PCB
and DF Driver PCB.
5. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
7-40
7
code code
area
E400
0002
04
Items
Title
Description
Remedy
E400
0003
04
Title
Description
Remedy
E412
0005
04
Title
Description
Remedy
E412
0006
04
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
and DF Unit
and DF Unit
3. Replace the Cable between Reader Controller PCB
and DF Driver PCB.
Disconnection of the Flat Cable between the Reader
Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB
Connection of the Flat Cable between the Reader
Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB could not be
detected.
3. Replace the cable between Reader Controller PCB
and DF Driver PCB.
5. Replace the DF PCB.
Failure in the drive of the DF Drive Cooling Fan
The DF Cooling Fan was not driven.
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
2. Check if the cable is open circuit.
3. Replace the fan.
DF Cooling Fan kept rotating
The DF Cooling Fan is not stopped. (Signal is still being
sent.)
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
2. Check if the cable is open circuit.
3. Replace the fan.
7-41
code code
area
E401
0001
04
E401
0002
04
E407
0001
04
E407
0002
04
Items
Description
Title
Pickup error
Description Pickup Unit is not returned to the home position.
Remedy
1. Check that Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor flag moves
smoothly.
2. Check the connection between DF Driver PCB and
Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor, and check that the Cable is
not open-circuit.
3. Check the operation of Pickup Motor. (Set the service
mode: FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-CHK > 9. Then,
set FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-ON.)
Title
Pickup error
Description Pickup Unit does not move from the home position.
Remedy
1. Check that Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor flag moves
smoothly.
2. Check the connection between DF Driver PCB and
Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor, and check that the Cable is
not open-circuit.
3. Check the operation of Pickup Motor. (Set the service
mode: FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-CHK > 9. Then,
set FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-ON.)
Title
Tray Lifter Motor error
Description Tray HP Sensor does not detect ON or OFF within
specified time.
Remedy
1. Check that after Lifter is lifted fully, it is located in the
correct position. (Check the engagement with the Gear.)
2. Check the connection between Tray HP Sensor and
DF Driver PCB, and check that the Cable is not opencircuit.
3. Check the operation of Tray Lifter Motor.
5. Replace the Tray Lifter Motor.
Title
Tray Lifter Motor error
Description Paper Face Detection Sensor when Lifter is being lifted
does not become ON within specified time.
Remedy
1. Check that after Lifter is lifted fully, it is located in the
correct position. (Check the engagement with the Gear.)
2. Check the Tray Lifter Motor, and also check whether
shifting operation is performed normally.
3. Check the connection between Paper Face Detection
Sensor and DF Driver PCB, and check that the Cable is
not open-circuit.
5. Replace the Tray Lifter Motor.
7-41
7
code code
area
E413
0001
04
E413
0002
04
E413
0011
04
E413
E423
0012
0001
04
04
Items
Description
Title
DF Disengagement Motor error
Description Lead Roller 1 disengagement error
Remedy
1. Open the ADF Front Cover, and then check the
operation of active Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the physical position of Disengaging HP Sensor
and its flag.
3. Check that the Cable of Disengaging HP Sensor is not
open-circuit.
Title
Remedy
and its flag.
open-circuit.
Title
Remedy
and its flag.
open-circuit.
Title
Remedy
and its flag.
open-circuit.
Title
DF Unit SDRAM error (This error occurs on Duplex Color
Image Reader Unit-B1 only)
Description SDRAM access error
Remedy
2. Check the connection between Reader and Controller,
7-42
code code
area
E423
0002
04
Items
Title
Description
Remedy
E490
0001
04
Title
Description
Remedy
E500
0000
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E500
0001
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E503
0002
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E503
0003
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E505
0001
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
DF Unit SDRAM error (This error occurs on Duplex Color
Image Reader Unit-B1 only)
SDRAM Verify error
2. Check the connection between Reader and Controller,
Different DF model
Installed DF is not the supported DF.
1. Using the service mode, check if the installed DF
model is the same model which was set in the service
mode.
PCB and DF Driver PCB, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Communication error
Communication between the controller of the connected
device and the Finisher Controller is suspended.
1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The host machine DC Controller PCB (UN1) is faulty.
Communication error
Communication between the controller of the connected
device and the Finisher Controller is suspended.
Communication error
Communication between the Saddle Controller and the
Finisher Controller is suspended.
1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
saddle controller PCB is faulty.
3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Communication error
Communication between the Punch Controller and the
Finisher Controller is suspended.
host machine DC Controller PCB (UN1) is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
EEPROM error
The checksum for the finisher controller EEPROM data
has an error.
Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
7-42
7
code code
area
E505
0002
05
E509
0001
05
E514
8001
05
E514
8002
05
E519
0002
05
Items
Description
Title
EEPROM error
Description The checksum for the punch controller EEPROM data
has an error.
Remedy
1. Failure of Punch Controller PCB.
Title
The combination error of the host machine and finisher
Description The unconformed finisher is equipped with the host
machine.
Remedy
1. The miss-combination of the host machine and finisher
2. The finisher controller PCB is fault.
3. The host machine controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Rear end assist home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home
position when the rear end assist motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) is
faulty.
rear end assist motor is faulty.
3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
Title
Rear end assist home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home
position when the rear end assist motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) is
faulty.
rear end assist motor is faulty.
3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
Title
Gear change home position error
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn ON
when the gear change motor has been driven for 387
pulses.
Remedy
1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is
faulty.
gear change motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
7-43
code code
area
E519
8001
05
E520
0001
05
E520
0002
05
E530
8001
05
Items
Description
Title
Gear change home position error
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn
OFF when the gear change motor has been driven for
387 pulses.
Remedy
1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is
faulty.
gear change motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
Title
Shift Motor fails to move from HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified
period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as
an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first
retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M4) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) failure occurs.
Title
Shift Motor fails to return to HP
period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) failure occurs.
Title
Front aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not leave the aligningplate front
home position sensor when thealignment plate front
motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106)
is faulty.
front aligning plate motor is faulty.
3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
7-43
7
code code
area
E530
8002
05
E531
8001
05
E531
8002
05
E532
0001
05
Items
Description
Title
Front aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front
home position sensor when the alignment plate front
Remedy
1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106)
is faulty.
front aligning plate motor is faulty.
3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
Title
Staple home position error
Description Stapler fails to move from the staple home position
although the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period
of time.
Remedy
stapler is faulty.
2. The stapler is faulty.
Title
Staple home position error
Description Stapler fails to move from the staple home position
although the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period
of time.
Remedy
stapler is faulty.
2. The stapler is faulty.
Title
STP Move Motor fails to return to HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) Connector
is physically removed.
4. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) failure
occurs.
7-44
code code
area
E532
0002
05
E532
8001
05
E532
8002
05
E535
8001
05
Items
Description
Title
STP Move Motor fails to move from HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) Connector
4. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) failure
occurs.
Title
Stapler shift home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the stapler shifthome position
when the stapler shift motor hasbeen driven for 5
seconds.
Remedy
1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is
faulty.
stapler shift motor is faulty.
3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
Title
Stapler shift home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the stapler shift home
position when the stapler shift motor has been driven for
20 seconds.
Remedy
1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is
faulty.
stapler shift motor is faulty.
3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
Title
Swing home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the swing home position when
the swing motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
swing motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
7-44
7
code code
area
E535
8002
05
E537
8001
05
E537
E540
8002
0001
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Swing home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the swing home position
when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
swing motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
Title
Rear aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate rear
home position sensor when the alignment plate rear
Remedy
1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is
faulty.
aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
Title
Rear aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate rear
home position sensor when the alignment plate rear
Remedy
1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is
faulty.
aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
Title
Tray Lift Motor timeout error
Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified
period of time during initial rotation. When the Motor
remains in the same area for the specified period of time
and the same symptom occurs again after the first retry,
it is detected as an error.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) Connector
4. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) failure
occurs.
7-45
code code
area
E540
0005
05
E540
8001
05
E540
8002
05
E540
8003
05
Items
Description
Title
Tray Lift Motor clock error
Description At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and
clock input is not detected within the specified period
of time, it is detected as an error if the same symptom
occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) Connector
4. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) failure
occurs.
Title
Tray 1 time out error
Description If the tray does not return to home position when the tray
1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds.
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 1 shift
motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
Title
Tray 1 shift area error
Description The dangerous area is reached before the tray 1 paper
surface sensor detects paper surface during the paper
surface detection operation.
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
Remedy
Title
Swing guide switch/Staple safety switch error
Description The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is
activated while the tray is operating.
Remedy
7-45
7
code code
area
E540
8004
05
E540
8005
05
E540
E540
8006
8007
05
05
Items
Description
Title
The tray 1 shift motor clock error
Description The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift
motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
Remedy
Title
The tray 1 shift motor speed error
Description The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock
detection signal turned ON.
Remedy
Title
The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray
1 shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy
Title
The tray 1 shift motor error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the
tray 1 shift motor is at a stop.
Remedy
7-46
code code
area
E542
0001
05
E542
0005
05
E542
8001
05
Items
Description
Title
Additional Tray Lift Motor timeout error
Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified
period of time during initial rotation. When the Motor
remains in the same area for the specified period of time
and the same symptom occurs again after the first retry,
it is detected as an error.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23)
Connector is physically removed.
4. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) failure
occurs.
Title
Additional Tray Lift Motor clock error
Description At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and
clock signal is not detected within the specified period
of time, it is detected as an error if the same symptom
occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23)
4. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) failure
occurs.
Title
Tray 2 time out error
Description If the tray does not return to home position when the tray
1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds.
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 2 shift
motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
7-46
7
code code
area
E542
E542
8002
8004
05
05
E542
8005
05
E542
8006
05
Items
Description
Title
Tray 2 shift area error
Description The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper
surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during paper
surface detection operation.
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
During evacuation operation, arrival at the area beyond
the tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 is detected before this
sensor detects paper surface.
Remedy
Title
The tray 2 shift motor clock error
Description The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 2 shift
motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
Remedy
1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
Title
The tray 2 shift motor speed error
Description The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock
detection signal turned ON.
Remedy
Title
The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray
2 shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy
7-47
code code
area
E542
8007
05
E567
0001
05
E567
0002
05
E56F
0001
05
Items
Description
Title
The tray 2 shift motor error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the
tray 2 shift motor is at a stop.
Remedy
Title
Shift Roller Release Motor fails to move from HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3)
4. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) failure
occurs.
Title
Shift Roller Release Motor fails to return to HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3)
4. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) failure
occurs.
Title
Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to move
from HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP
Sensor (S5) Connector is physically removed.
Sensor (S5) failure occurs.
7-47
7
code code
area
E56F
0002
05
E571
0001
05
E571
0002
05
Items
Description
Title
Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to return

to HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
Sensor (S5) Connector is physically removed.
Sensor (S5) failure occurs.
Title
Gripper Open/Close Motor fails to move from HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Gripper Arm HP Sensor (S13) Connector
4. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) failure
occurs.
Title
Gripper Open/Close Motor fails to return to HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Gripper Arm HP Sensor (S13) Connector
occurs.
7-48
code code
area
E575
0001
05
E575
0002
05
E584
0002
05
E584
8001
05
Items
Description
Title
Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to move from HP
retry.
Remedy
removed.
3. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) Connector is
physically removed.
occurs.
Title
Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to return to HP
retry.
Assumed
cause
removed.
3. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) Connector is
physically removed.
occurs.
Title
Shutter home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the shutter home position
when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
Remedy
1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
2. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
3. The stack ejection motor (M102), shutter clutch
(CL101), ang stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) is
faulty.
Title
Shutter home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the shutter home position
when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 30
seconds.
Remedy
1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
stack ejection motor, and between the finisher controller
PCB and shutter clutch is faulty.
3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
4. The stack ejection motor (M102), shutter clutch
(CL101), ang stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) is
faulty.
7-48
7
code code
area
E590
E590
E591
E591
8001
8002
8001
8002
05
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Punch home position error
Description The puncher does not detect the punch home position
sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for 20
msec.
Remedy
1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch
motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and
sensor is faulty.
3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
Title
Punch home position error
Description After the motor has been stopped at time of punch motor
initialization, the puncher does not detect punch home
position sensor.
Remedy
1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch
motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
sensor is faulty.
3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
Title
Punch scrap empty error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even
when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector
sensor has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the scrap full detector PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
Title
Punch scrap full detection error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector
sensor has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
7-49
code code
area
E592
8001
05
E592
8002
05
E592
8003
05
E592
8004
05
E592
8005
05
Items
Description
Title
Trailing edge sensor error
when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
(LED5,PTR5) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB
and punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
Title
Trailing edge sensor error
when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 1 error
when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
sensor 1 (LED1,PTR1) has been increased to 66% or
more.
Remedy
Title
sensor 1 (LED1,PTR1) has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
Title
more.
Remedy
7-49
7
code code
area
E592
8006
05
E592
8007
05
E592
8008
05
E592
8009
05
E592
800A
05
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
more.
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
more.
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-50
code code
area
E593
8001
05
E593
8002
05
E5F0
8001
05
E5F0
8002
05
Items
Description
Title
Horizontal registration home position error
Description At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the
punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home
position sensor even when it has been driven for 9 mm.
Remedy
1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is
faulty.
sensor is faulty.
3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration home position error
Description At time of horizontal registration motor initialization,
the punch slide unit does not return to the horizontal
registration home position sensor even when the unit has
been driven for 37 mm.
Remedy
1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is
faulty.
sensor is faulty.
3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
Title
Paper positioning plate home position error
Description The paper positioning plate home positio sensor does not
turn ON when the paper positioning plate motor has been
driven for 1500 pulses.
Remedy
1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7)
is faulty.
2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
Title
Description The paper positioning plate home position sensor does
not turn OFF when the paper positioning plate motor has
been driven for 300 pulses.
Remedy
1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7)
is faulty.
2. Open circuit of the Harness between Finisher
Controller PCB and Stack Delivery Motor & between
Finisher Controller PCB and Shutter Open/Close Clutch
3. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
4. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
7-50
7
code code
area
E5F1
8001
05
E5F1
8002
05
E5F2
8001
05
E5F2
8002
05
E5F3
8001
05
Items
Description
Title
Paper folding motor lock error
Description The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/sec
or less.
Remedy
1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper
folding home position sensor (PI21) is faulty.
2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
Title
Description The status of Paper Fold Home Position Sensor does
not change although the Paper Fold Motor is driven for a
specified period of time.
Remedy
1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper
folding home position sensor (PI21) is faulty.
2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
Title
Guide home position error
Description The guide home position sensor does not turn ON when
the guide motor has been driven for 700 pulses.
Remedy
1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
Title
Guide home position error
Description The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF when
the guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Remedy
1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
Title
Aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn
ON when the aligning plate motor has been driven for
500 pulses.
Remedy
1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty.
2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
7-51
code code
area
E5F3
8002
05
E5F4
8001
05
E5F4
8002
05
E5F5
8001
05
E5F5
8002
05
Items
Description
Title
Aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn
OFF when the aligning plate motor has been driven for
50 pulses.
Remedy
1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty.
2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (rear) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON
when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven backward
for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is
faulty.
2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (rear) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven forward for
0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is
faulty.
2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (front) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON
when the stitch motor (front) has been driven forward for
0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is
faulty.
2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (front) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the stitch motor (front) has been driven backward
for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is
faulty.
2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
7-51
7
code code
area
E5F6
8001
05
E5F6
8002
05
E5F6
8003
05
E5F6
8004
05
Items
Description
Title
Paper pushing plate home position error
Description The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not
turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been
driven for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14),
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and
paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
Title
Paper pushing plate home position error
Description The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not
turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been
driven for 150 ms.
Remedy
Title
Paper pushing plate motor clock error
Description The number of pulses detected by the paper pushing
plate motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less.
Remedy
Title
Pushing position error
Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor
does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor
has been driven for 0.1 sec.
Remedy
7-52
code code
area
E5F6
8005
05
Items
Description
Title
Pushing position error
Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor
does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor
has been driven for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
T-7-6
7-52
7
code code
area
E602 0001
00
E602 0002
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition (BOOTDEV)
failed to be found at startup.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF the main switch and check connection of
HDD cable, and then turn ON the main switch.
2. If the Encryption Board has been installed, there may
be an Encryption Board failure. In this case, disconnect
the signal cable connecting to the Encryption Board and
directly connect to the HDD. (It cannot be connected
from the back side. Open the Main Controller Cover, and
connect by going over the Main Controller PCB 1.) After
connecting, power on by the safe mode. If the machine
starts normally, replace the Encryption Board as the
Encryption Board had failed.
3. Be sure that HDD spins stably (no problem in drive
sound) and 5V/12V power is supplied when the main
power is turned ON. (If the drive sound is abnormal,
replace the HDD.)
4. Replace the HDD and reinstall the system. (In the case
of using a USB memory device, insert a USB memory
device where the system software has been registered to
the slot of the host machine, and then execute main menu
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all).)
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the main CPU
Remedy
1. Start in Safe Mode, then perform overall format using
SST or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then
turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch. (Prepare the USB
memory which system software was registered. Insert
the USB memory to the equipment. Execute [3]: Upgrade
(Overwrite All) in the main menu.)
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the
HDD and reinstall the system.
7-53
code code
area
E602 0003
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice
Remedy
1. Execute detection and recovery of WriteAbortSector
<In the case of display of B/W E-code>
1-1. Perform the following steps because Service Mode is
not available.
1-2. Turn OFF the power. Then, while pressing 1+9 keys,
turn ON the power. WriteAbortSector recovery routine is
automatically started which makes the screen black.
1-3. After a while, progress is displayed because the
process takes time (40 to 50 min.). The process is
complete when the screen turns white.
<In the case of official display of wrench-mark>
1-1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=0; and execute HDCHECK (40 to 50 min.), and then turn OFF and then ON
the main switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
up in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF
and then ON the main switch.
3. If no improvement is found despite the above measures,
it can be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace
the HDD and reinstall the system.
7-53
7
code code
area
E602 0006
00
E602 0007
00
E602 0009
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the sub CPU
Remedy
Reinstall the system software. For details, see Chapter 6:
Upgrading.
For your reference, the method using USB memory is
described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter
the download mode. (When it is not operated normally,
start the safe mode.)
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu.
(Be sure to download SYSTEM, LANGUAGE and RUI.)
5. System software is downloaded and the machine
restarts automatically. At this time, if the machine restarts
with the safe mode, E753 might occurs. Check the log. In
case of the system software of the options which are not
connected, turn OFF and then ON the power supply to
restore. (For details, see the description for E753.)
If the measures above do not solve the problem, replace

the HDD and download the system software with the
foregoing method.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no ICCProfile
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using
SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
switch.
be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT
Remedy
switch.
7-54
code code
area
E602 0010
00
E602 0011
00
E602 0012
00
Items
Description
Error in HDD
There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
switch.
Error in HDD
There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no file in which the Web browser refers to
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the Web browser
using SST, and then turn OFF and then ON the main
power switch.
7-54
7
code code
area
E602 0101
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at
startup)
Remedy
When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that
data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be
able to be protected in the worst case.)
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD
using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
-> Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data.
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in
some cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.
7-55
code code
area
E602 0111
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-55
7
code code
area
E602 0201
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in management data area of image (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-56
code code
area
E602 0211
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in management data area of image (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-56
7
code code
area
E602 0301
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-57
code code
area
E602 0311
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-57
7
code code
area
E602 0401
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in thumbnail area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-58
code code
area
E602 0411
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in thumbnail area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-58
7
code code
area
E602 0501
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-59
code code
area
E602 0511
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-59
7
code code
area
E602 0601
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-60
code code
area
E602 0611
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data)
(after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-60
7
code code
area
E602 0701
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-61
code code
area
E602 0711
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-61
7
code code
area
E602 0801
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-62
code code
area
E602 0811
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-62
7
code code
area
E602 0901
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-63
code code
area
E602 0911
00
E602 1001
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (at startup)
Remedy
If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
the power,
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and
download the firmware.
2. Replace the HDD.
7-63
7
code code
area
E602 1011
00
E602 1101
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after
startup)
Remedy
the power,
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and
download the firmware.
2. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-64
code code
area
E602 1111
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-64
7
code code
area
E602 1201
00
E602 1211
00
E602 1301
00
E602 1311
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Send area (at startup)
Remedy
the power,
3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Send area (after startup)
Remedy
the power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (at startup)
Remedy
the power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (after startup)
Remedy
the power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
7-65
code code
area
E602 1401
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of system log (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-65
7
code code
area
E602 1411
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of system log (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-66
code code
area
E602 1501
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Advanced Box area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-66
7
code code
area
E602 1511
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Advanced Box area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-67
code code
area
E602 1601
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in CDS area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-67
7
code code
area
E602 1611
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in CDS area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
7-68
code code
area
E602 2000
00
E602 4000
00
E602 4001
00
E602 5001
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD Encryption Board
Description Authentication error between the host machine and the
Encryption Board.
Remedy
1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board,
disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
2. Execute the key clear procedure.
* Key clear: system recovery procedure

1. Execute the key clear procedure with SST.
--> As a result, the disk becomes unformatted disk. Thus,
it is necessary to execute step 2.
--> E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine
with the unformatted disk.
2. Execute HDD format and system reinstallation with
SST.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Unable to mount the Linux system.
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description No Linux system start script.
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
Title
Authentication error between the host machine and the
Encryption Board
Description Mistake in the procedure for installing the HDD Encryption
Board
Remedy
1. Remove the HDD Encryption Board, and start the
machine with only the HDD connected.
2. Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION >
INSTALL > HD-CRYP.
3. Install the HDD Encryption Board again.
7-68
7
code code
area
Items
Description
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
HDD error
A non-genuine HDD has been detected.
Install a genuine HDD.
Error in HDD
HDD error (unidentified) (at startup)
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Error in HDD
HDD error (unidentified) (after startup)
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)
No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as
indicated by 0512.
indicated by 1024.
indicated by 1536.
The Encryption Board does not exist.
No Encryption Board was detected.
1. Check that the Encryption Board is installed properly.
(Perform the installation procedure)
2. Replace the Encryption Board.
E602 5002
00
E602 FF01
00
E602 FF11
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E604 0512
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E604 1024
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E604 1536
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E610 0001
00
Title
Description
Remedy
7-69
code code
area
Items
Description
E611 0000
00
Title
Error code to prevent repeated retransmission at power

down during fax transmission
Description When the power is down during fax transmission,
this machine resends the fax at the next power-on.
However, the operation (retransmission => rebooting =>
retransmission) might be repeated due to the damage on
SRAM at the power down. To prevent this symptom, this
error code is displayed when this operation is repeated in
a short term.
Remedy
1. Execute service mode > COPIER> FUNCTION >
CLEAR > FXTX-CLR. (This service mode can be used
only when the System is ver. 30.30 or later)
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
[Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON]

Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in
Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration
(Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function
Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM
Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user
to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
When clearing MN-CON while any login application other
than Default Authentication is, error such as not displayed
login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once
and switch login application to Default Authentication to
recover to the normal status.
E613 0512
00
E613 1024
00
E613 1536
00
E615 0001
00
Title
Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 2
Remedy
indicated by 0512.
Title
Remedy
indicated by 1024.
Title
Remedy
indicated by 1536.
Title
Self test error of encryption module
Description A self test of the Ipsec Board was conducted, and an error
was detected. The encryption module is broken.
Remedy
Upgrade the system after HDD format.
When this error occurs, normal network communication
cannot be guaranteed.
7-69
7
code code
area
E674 0001
E674 0004
E674 0008
E674 000C
E674 0010
00
00
00
00
00
Items
Description
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Error is detected for specified number of times in
communication with FAX board.
Remedy
1. Check the connection between FAX Board and Main
controller PCB.
2. Replace the FAX Board.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
(Main Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board, and Main
Controller PCB 1 for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board)
Title
Description Failure in access of the modem IC which is used with
OnBoardFax
Remedy
controller PCB.
Title
Description Failure in access of the port IC that is be used with
OnBoardFax
Remedy
controller PCB.
Title
Description Failure is detected in access of the modem IC and port IC
that are used with OnBoardFax
Remedy
controller PCB.
Title
Description Failure in opening of the timer device to be used with
OnBoard Fax
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB.
7-70
code code
area
E674 0011
00
E674 0030
00
E674 0100
00
E674 0200
00
E677 0003
00
E677 0010
00
E677 0080
00
Items
Description
Title
Description Failure in starting of the timer device which is used with
OnBoardFax
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Title
Description Error in checksum of USB-FAX MAINROM
Remedy
Get in the download mode from the Service Mode when
the power is turned ON and execute downloading of
USBFAX MAINROM.
Title
Description Logging was failed after completion of fax communication.
Remedy
Turn OFF and then ON the power.
The logs collected so far are deleted.
Title
Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD.
Remedy
2. Format and upgrade the entire HDD.
3. Replace the HDD.
Title
Failure in Print Server
Description Error is detected at the Mother Board check when print
server is started.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the cable and turn OFF and then
ON the power.
2. Reinstall the Print Server(For details, refer to Service
Manual image PASS-A1_B1.)
Title
Description Failure was detected in operation of the CPU fan on the
print server.
Remedy
1. Replace the board of the print server.
2. Reinstall the Print Server
Title
Description Error is detected at the Mother Board check when print
server is started.
Remedy
1. Check the cable connection and turn OFF and then ON
the power.
2. Reenter the job.
3. Reinstall the print server.
T-7-7
7-70
7
code code
area
E710
0001
05
E711
0001
05
E711
0002
05
E713
0001
05
E713
0002
05
E713
0004
05
E713
0008
05
E713
0010
05
E713
0011
05
E713
0020
05
E713
0021
05
E713
0022
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in initialization of IPC (Ctrl)
Description Failed to be at ready status within 3 sec after IPC chip
has been started.
Remedy
Check the connection between DC Controller PCB and
Finisher, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
Title
Error in register of IPC (Ctrl)
Description Set 4 errors within 1.5 sec in register IPC chip.
Remedy
Check the cable.
Title
Error in IPC communication
Description Initial communication error with the Finisher
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Description When receiving retransmission request for 3 times in a
row.
Remedy
Title
Description When detecting CRC error at transmission.
Remedy
Title
Description When not receiving data for more than specified time
Remedy
Title
Description When checksum of the received data is not correct.
Remedy
Title
Error in UFDI communication
Description Neither ACK nor NAK is returned for specified times in a
row.
Remedy
Title
Description NAK is returned for specified times in a row.
Remedy
Title
UFDI communication error
Description BCC of the reception data is invalid for specified number
of times in a row.
Remedy
Check the connection of the Connector with Finisher.
Title
Description Timeout before the completion of reception for specified
times in a row.
Remedy
Title
Description Undefined error for specified times in a row at reception.
Remedy
7-71
code code
area
E719
0001
00
E719
0002
00
E719
0003
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in Coin Vendor.
Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor
- The Coin Vendor, which should have been connected
before the power was turned OFF, is not connected when
the power is turned ON.
Remedy
Check the connection between charging management
equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management

equipment is connected to operate and when switching to
the operation without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging
management equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Title
Description Error in IPC when CoinVendor is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which
IPC communication failed to be recovered.
- When disconnection of the pickup delivery signal is
detected.
- When illegal connection is detected (short-circuit with
Tx and Rx of IPC)
Remedy
open-circuit.

Title
Description - In the case of communication error with the coin vendor
while obtaining the unit price at start-up.
Remedy
open-circuit.

7-71
7
code code
area
E719
E719
E719
E719
0011
0012
0031
0032
00
00
00
00
Items
Description
Title
Description Error in starting of NewCardReader
- NewCardReader, which should have been connected
before the power was turned OFF, is not connected when
the power is turned ON.
Remedy
open-circuit.

Title
Description Error in IPC when NewCardReader is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which
IPC communication failed to be recovered.
Remedy
open-circuit.

Title
Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card
Reader
Description Failure in communication with the serial New Card
Reader at start-up.
Remedy
- Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is
disconnected.
- Take out the serial New Card Reader.
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CARD
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR
Title
Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card
Reader
Description Communication failed in the middle of the operation
although communication with the serial New Card Reader
was successful at start-up.
Remedy
- Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is
disconnected.
7-72
code code
area
E720
0001
00
E730
1001
00
E730
100A
00
E730
A006
00
E730
A007
00
E730
B013
00
E730
C000
00
E730
C001
00
E731
3000
00
Items
Description
Title
Error due to non-compatible Finisher
Description Non-compatible Finisher was connected.
Remedy
Connect either the Staple Finisher-J1 or Saddle Stitch
Finisher-J1.
Title
Error in PDL software
Description Initialization error.
Remedy
1. Execute the PDL reset process.
Title
Error in PDL software
Description Fatal system error occurs.
Remedy
Title
Error in PDL communication
Description PDL fails to respond. No response from PDL due to
Controller firmware, not installed, etc.
Remedy
3. Check the connection of Main Controller PCB 2.
4. Reinstall the controller firmware.
Title
Mismatch in PDL version
Description Mismatch of version between the control software of the
host machine and PDL control software.
Remedy
Execute overall system format and installation.
Title
Error in PDL embedded font
Description Font data is corrupted.
Remedy
2. Reinstall the system.
3. Execute overall system format and installation.
Title
Error in initialization
Description An error, such as memory acquisition failure, occurs at
initialization.
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB1.
Title
Error in HDD access
Description An error occurs at HDD access.
Remedy
Replace the HDD.
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB 2
Description Unable to recognize the SURF Board.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 2.
7-72
7
code code
area
E731
3001
00
E731
3002
00
E731
3015
00
E732
E732
E732
E732
0001
0021
0021
8888
00
00
04
00
Items
Description
Title
Description Failure of SURF initialization.
Remedy
Title
Description Failure of SURF initialization.
Remedy
Title
Description Video data is not transmitted to CL1-G even though there
is no problem in the software.
Remedy
Title
Error in scanner communication
Description Error in DDI-S communication
Remedy
1. Check the connector connecting to the Scanner.
2. Check the power of the Scanner ->whether to perform
initialization at start-up?
3. Replace the Rcon, the Scanner Board or the Main
controller PCB 2.
Title
Remedy
controller PCB 2.
Title
Remedy
controller PCB 2.
Title
ADF setting error
Description ADF which was not the one set in service mode was
detected.
Remedy
Turn OFF and then ON the power.
At restart, select COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM>
SCANTYPE, and change the setting to the setting of ADF
which is currently installed.
7-73
code code
area
E733
0000
00
E733
0001
00
E733
0002
00
E740
0002
00
E740
0003
00
E744
0001
00
E744
0002
00
E744
0003
00
E744
0004
00
Items
Description
Title
Error in printer communication
Description Communication with the printer failed at start-up.
Remedy
1. Check the connector connecting to the Printer.
2. Check the power of the Printer -> whether to perform
3. Replace the Dcon or the Main controller PCB 2.
Title
Description Error in DDI-P communication
Remedy
3. Replace the Dcon or the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Description Error in DDI-P communication
Remedy
3. Replace the Dcon or the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Failure in Ethernet Board
Description Incorrect MAC address
Remedy
Replace the LAN card.
Title
Failure in Ethernet Board
Description Incorrect MAC address
Remedy
Replace the LAN card.
Title
Failure in language file
Description Mismatched version between the HDD and the Bootable
Remedy
Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB
memory reinstall the entire software.
Title
Description Oversized language file in HDD
Remedy
Format the HDD and reinstall the software because there
can be more than necessary language files.
Title
Description Unable to find the language which should be switched
and described in Config.txt in the HDD.
Remedy
Reinstall the software.
Title
Description Unable to switch to the language in the HDD.
Remedy
Reinstall the software.
7-73
7
code code
area
E744
2000
00
E744
4000
05
E746
0011
00
E746
0021
00
E746
0022
00
Items
Description
Title
Controller firmware mismatch
Description Invalid controller firmware was detected.
Remedy
This error normally does not occur.
This error occurs when using the HDD which was used
with another model.
Replace the HDD with the one which was originally
installed or a new one for the model.
Title
Model information mismatch
Description Mismatch of model information between the Main
Controller PCB 1 and the DC Controller is detected.
Remedy
This error occurs only when replacing the DC Controller.
By returning the original PCB, this error can be
recovered. (If other error code is displayed, see the
corresponding error code.)
If it is not recovered, replace the DC Controller to a new
one.
DC Controller PCB does not have model information

at the time of shipment. Model information is written
when installing the PCB to the host machine. Therefore,
the DC Controller PCB which was installed to
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5250 can be installed only
to imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5250.
Title
Voice Board error
Description Because both the voice composition board and the
composition recognition board are inserted.
Remedy
Insert only 1 board of the appropriate voice board.
Title
Image Analysis Board error
Description Self-check NG of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for
PCAM)
Remedy
1. Replace the Image Analysis Board (PCB used for
PCAM)
2. Remove the Image Analysis Board and go to the
following service mode: COPIER>OPTION>LCNSTR>ST-JBLK (Lv2). Change the value of ST-JBLK from 1
to 0, and turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Title
Description Different version of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for
PCAM)
Remedy
1. Update the firmware of the Option Board.
7-74
code code
area
E746
0023
00
E746
0024
00
E746
0031
00
E746
0032
00
Items
Description
Title
Description No response from Image Analysis Board (PCB used for
PCAM)
Remedy
1. Check to see if the Option Board is properly inserted.
3. If the above measure does not solve the problem,
replace the Option Board.
Title
Description Failure in behavior of Image Analysis Board (PCB used
for PCAM)
Remedy
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem,
replace the Option Board.
Title
TPM error
Description Error in hardware
Remedy
Replace the TPM chip.
Title
TPM error
Description Mismatched data in TPM
Remedy
Format the system.
Format the HDD using SST or USB memory, and
download the system software. For details, see Chapter
6: Upgrading. For your reference, the method using USB
memory is described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter
the download mode.
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [4]: Format HDD in the main menu.
5. After formatting is completed, the machine reboots
automatically and starts with the download mode.
6. Execute [1]: Upgrade (Auto) in the main menu.
7. System software is downloaded and the machine
restarts automatically.
7-74
7
code code
area
E746
0033
00
E746
0034
00
E746
0035
00
E747
0000
00
E747
001E
00
Items
Description
Title
TPM error
Description Error that can be recovered
Remedy
When the TPM key was backed up, it can be restored.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Go to Management Settings > Data Management >
TPM Settings, and then click Restore TPM Key.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed,
click OK. Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and
then ON the main power.
When the TPM key was not backed up:

Formatting the system is required.
Title
TPM auto recovery error
Description The error occurs when clearing HDD while TPM setting is
ON.
Remedy
It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power.
Title
TPM version error
Description TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
Remedy
Install the supported TPM.
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB. Check contact of SDRAM
at Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Remedy
7-75
code code
area
E747
0119
00
E747
011A
00
E747
011B
00
E747
0219
00
E747
021A
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-75
7
code code
area
E747
021B
00
E747
0319
00
E747
031A
00
E747
031B
00
E747
0419
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-76
code code
area
E747
041A
00
E747
041B
00
E747
051B
00
E747
051C
00
E747
051D
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-76
7
code code
area
E747
0618
00
E747
0619
00
E747
061A
00
E747
061B
00
E747
0718
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-77
code code
area
E747
0719
00
E747
071A
00
E747
071B
00
E747
0818
00
E747
0819
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-77
7
code code
area
E747
081A
00
E747
081B
00
E747
0918
00
E747
0919
00
E747
091A
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-78
code code
area
E747
091B
00
E747
0A18
00
E747
0A19
00
E747
0A1A
00
E747
0A1B
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-78
7
code code
area
E747
0B18
00
E747
0B19
00
E747
0B1A
00
E747
0B1B
00
E747
0C18
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-79
code code
area
E747
0C19
00
E747
0C1A
00
E747
0C1B
00
E747
110D
00
E747
110E
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-79
7
code code
area
E747
1117
00
E747
1200
00
E747
1201
00
E747
1202
00
E747
1203
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
PDL rendering error
Description Image processing IC error.
Remedy
Turn OFF and then ON the power (Send the data to Inc.
because the error code will be displayed again if printing
the data with which the error was displayed.)
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-80
code code
area
E747
1204
00
E747
1205
00
E747
1206
00
E747
1207
00
E747
1208
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-80
7
code code
area
E747
1217
00
E747
2000
00
E747
2017
00
E747
2018
00
E747
201B
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-81
code code
area
E747
201C
00
E747
201F
00
E747
2217
00
E747
2218
00
E747
2219
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-81
7
code code
area
E747
221A
00
E747
221B
00
E747
221C
00
E747
221D
00
E747
221E
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-82
code code
area
E747
221F
00
E747
3C00
00
E747
3D00
00
E747
3F00
00
E747
6000
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Undetected error of the Image Process Chip P
Description Undetected error of the Image Process Chip P
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Remedy
7-82
7
code code
area
E747
6211
00
E747
6210
00
E747
620F
00
E747
620E
00
E747
620D
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-83
code code
area
E747
620C
00
E747
6218
00
E747
6219
00
E747
621A
00
E747
621B
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-83
7
code code
area
E747
621C
00
E747
621D
00
E747
621F
00
E747
651B
00
E747
651A
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-84
code code
area
E747
6519
00
E747
6517
00
E747
6516
00
E747
6515
00
E747
6514
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-84
7
code code
area
E747
6513
00
E747
650F
00
E747
651C
00
E747
651D
00
E747
651F
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-85
code code
area
E747
6A1F
00
E747
6B1F
00
E747
6C1E
00
E747
6C1F
00
E747
6F1F
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-85
7
code code
area
E747
711F
00
E747
721F
00
E747
741E
00
E747
741F
00
E747
751B
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-86
code code
area
E747
751C
00
E747
751F
00
E747
7C00
00
E747
7D00
00
E747
7F00
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Undetected error of the Image Process Chip R
Description Undetected error of the Image Process Chip R
Remedy
7-86
7
code code
area
E747
851B
00
E747
851A
00
E747
8519
00
E747
8517
00
E747
8516
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-87
code code
area
E747
8515
00
E747
8514
00
E747
8513
00
E747
850F
00
E747
851C
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-87
7
code code
area
E747
851D
00
E747
851F
00
E747
951A
00
E747
951B
00
E747
9C00
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-88
code code
area
E747
9F00
00
E747
BF00
00
E747
C000
00
E747
C519
00
E747
C51A
00
E747
C51B
00
Items
Description
Title
Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Description Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Remedy
Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable, or
replace
-> Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Description Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Remedy
Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable, or
replace -> Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-88
7
code code
area
E747
C51C
00
E747
C51D
00
E747
E747
E747
C51F
C701
C706
00
00
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
7-89
code code
area
E747
DC00
00
E747
DF00
00
E747
FF00
00
E747
FF01
00
E748
2010
00
E748
2011
00
E748
2012
00
E748
2021
00
Items
Description
Title
Remedy
Title
Undetected error of Image Process Chip S
Description Undetected error of Image Process Chip S
Remedy
Check contact of ScanI/F cable --> Replace
-> Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
A wrong Sub Board was detected
Description A wrong Sub Board was detected
Remedy
Check contact of ScanI/F cable --> Replace
Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable -->
Replace
Title
Connection failure with DDR-SDRAM (P)/inappropriate
memory size
Description Connection failure with DDR-SDRAM (P)/inappropriate
memory size
Remedy
Replace the DDR-SDRAM (P)
Title
Error in Flash PCB
Description Unable to find the IPL (startup program).
Remedy
Contact to the sales companies.
Title
Error in Flash PCB
Description Unable to find the kernel.
Remedy
Title
Error in Flash PCB
Description Unable to mount the Linux system at starting service
mode, or there is no system start script.
Remedy
Title
Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2
Description Necessary H/W on the Main Controller PCB 2 is not
found.
Remedy
1. Clean the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 2, and
disconnect and then connect it.
2. Clean the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 1, and
7-89
7
code code
area
E748
2022
00
E748
2023
00
E748
2024
00
E748
2025
00
E748
2026
00
E748
9000
00
Items
Description
Title
Description Necessary H/W on the Main Controller PCB 2 is not
found.
Remedy
1. Remove and then insert the Main Controller PCB 1
and the Main Controller PCB 2 .
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main
Controller PCB 2.
Title
Description Unable to initialize the memory DDR2-SDRAM on the
Remedy
1. Clean the terminal of the DDR2-SDRAM , and
2. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM.
Title
Description CPU on the Main Controller PCB 2 fails to complete the
initialization.
Remedy
1. Clean the terminal of DDR2-SDRAM, and remove and
then install the DDR2-SDRAM.
2. Check power state of Main Controller PCB 2 and
check around the connector.
3. Check power state of the Riser PCB and check around
the connector.
5. Replace the Riser PCB.
Title
Description Disconnection of the Bypass PCB was detected.
Remedy
Remove and then install the Bypass PCB.
Title
Description Disconnection of the Image Processing Sub PCB was
detected.
Remedy
Remove and then install the Image Processing Sub PCB.
Title
System error
Remedy
7-90
code code
area
E749
0006
00
E753
0001
00
Items
Description
Title
Restart direction due to configuration change.
Description The option such as the Finisher and Paper Deck was
installed or removed when all of following conditions were
met and the machine configuration is changed when the
main power switch is turned ON.
- Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy
Settings > Quick Startup at Power-on > ON
- The Main Power Switch is turned OFF

- The power plug of the machine is connected to the
output.
- The breaker is ON
Remedy
It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the main
power.
CAUTION
This machine provides power to some PCBs even when
in the main power OFF status.
The power supply is not completely OFF by just turning
OFF the main power switch and therefore, the machine is
unable to detect a configuration change.
When disconnecting and then connecting a connector,
always disconnect the power plug or turn the breaker
OFF.
Refer to the Service Manual > Chapter 2 > External and
Controls > Quick Startup for details.
Title
Download Error
Description System Software Update Error
Error occurs when updating system software of
uninstalled options
Remedy
1. Check the log to find where the download error has
been occurred.
FIN_XX Staple Finisher-XX/Booklet Finisher-XX
IFN_XX Inner Finisher-XX
G3CCB Super G3 FAX Board
G3CCM Super G3 FAX Board
When any of the above system software is displayed,
check if the target option has been installed.
When the target option has not been installed:
Turn OFF and then ON the main power supply to restore
(since there is no system software to be updated.).
When the target option has been installed:
Check if the accessory is correctly installed and if the
target system software to be downloaded is for the
installed option. Then download the appropriate system
software again.
7-90
7
code code
area
E760
0001
00
E804
0000
00
E805
E805
E806
0000
0001
0000
05
05
05
Items
Description
Title
Main Controller PCB 2 internal error
Description Main Controller PCB 2 internal error
Remedy
2. Remove and then reinstall the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Disconnect and then connect the connector connected
to the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Error in Power Supply Fan
Description Lock of the Power Supply Fan was detected
Remedy
1. Check power distribution to the Fan.
2. Replace the Fan.
Title
Error in Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned
ON, rotation of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2) was
detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the Fixing Heat
Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2) is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2) harness (to
see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed).
2. Check the fuse of the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
4. Replace the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2).
Title
Error in Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1
ON, rotation of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1) was
detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the Fixing Heat
Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1) is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1) harness (to
see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed).
2. Replace the Feed Driver PCB.
3. Replace the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1).
Title
Error in Delivery fan 1
Description 1. Failure in the Connect signal when the fan was turned
OFF.
2. Failure detected while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the fan harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
3. Replace the Delivery Fan (FM7).
7-91
code code
area
E806
0001
05
E806
0002
05
E807
0000
05
E807
0001
05
E808
0000
05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Delivery fan 2
ON, rotation of the fan was detected before turning ON
the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
3. Replace the Delivery Fan 2 (FM9).
Title
Error in Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan
the fan.
Remedy
3. Replace the Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan (FM8).
Title
Error in Process cartridge fan (rear)
the fan.
Remedy
2. Replace the Relay Board.
3. Replace the fan.
Title
Error in Process cartridge fan (front)
the fan.
Remedy
3. Replace the fan.
Title
Error in Zero Cross
Description Zero Cross failed to be detected for 50ms or more while
the fixing relay was ON.
Remedy
1. Replace the AC Driver (UN6).
2. Check the cycle of the input voltage (failure in powerperipheral area of the customer. Ask the customer to
perform the power supply work).
7-91
7
code code
area
E811
0000
05
E811
0001
05
E840
0000
05
E880
0001
00
E880
0003
00
E880
0005
00
Items
Description
Title
Fuse cutoff error in Process Cartridge
Description Fuse cannot be cut off (disconnect) although it is tried to
be cut off.
Remedy
2. Check the resistance value of the Fuse on Drum.
Title
Error in 24V of the drum new/old detection.
Description Error in 24V of the drum new/old detection.
Remedy
1. Check the FUSE_5 on the Pickup Feed Driver PCB
(UN2).
Title
Error in shutter for Fixing Edge Cooling Fan (if the HP
failed to be detected when the error occurred).
Description Failed to detect that the fan shutter has moved to the
specified position when moving the fan shutter from
anywhere other than the HP.
Remedy
1. Check the harness of the Shutter Motor (M27), the
Shutter HP Sensor (PS31) and the Shutter Position
Sensor (PS32) (to see if the harness is caught,
3. Replace the Shutter Motor, the Shutter HP Sensor or
the Shutter Position Sensor.
Title
Error in Controller Fan
Description Fan lock of the Controller CPU cooling fan was detected
Remedy
Check if the connector is connected.
If the connection was found OK, replace the Controller
Fan 3 (FM13).
Title
Description Riser PCB Fan was detected to be locked.
Remedy
If the connection was found OK, replace the Controller
Fan 1 (FM11).
Title
Description Fan lock of the HDD Cooling Fan was detected
Remedy
It the connection is OK, replace the HDD Cooling Fan
(FM14).
7-92
code code
area
E881
0001
00
E890
0000
05
E890
0001
05
Items
Description
Title
CPU abnormal temperature rising error
Description It was detected that CPU was 100 deg C or more.
Remedy
When it is detected that the temperature of the CPU is
100 deg C or more, forcible shutdown is executed. After
that, the error is recorded in the error log.
If the error occurred during a service visit and then

occurred again:
- If the error does not occur during a service visit but is

found in the log:
1. Check the space behind the host machine.
If the space behind the host machine is less than 10
cm, ask the user to secure enough space.
2. Clean the inlet on the rear of the host machine.
Remove dust.
Title
Environment Sensor 1 error
Description A communication error between the Environment Sensor
1 and DC Controller PCB was detected.
Remedy
Environment Sensor 1 (UN22).
the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Environment Sensor 1 (UN22).
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Title
Description The Environment Sensor 2 detected the value higher
than the specified value.
Remedy
3. Check if the cable of the Environment Sensor 2 (UN50)
is open circuit.
7-92
7
code code
area
E890
0002
05
E996
0071
04
E996
0CA1
05
E996
0CA2
05
E996
0CA3
05
E996
0CAF
05
Items
7-93
Description
Title
Description The Environment Sensor 2 detected the value lower than
the specified value.
Remedy
3. Check if the cable of the Environment Sensor 2 (UN50)
is open circuit.
Title
Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF)
Description Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF)
Remedy
Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode,
010071 jam is displayed as an error.
Collect log and contact to the sales companies.
To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNCSW> JM-ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0.
Title
Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Description Error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Remedy
Make 000CA1 jam to be displayed as an error by
setting JM-ERR-D in service mode.
To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNCSW> JM-ERR-D, and set JM-ERR-D to 0.
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Title
Remedy
Make 000CAF jam to be displayed as an error by
T-7-8
7-93
Error Code > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235
Jam Code
7-94
PS8
PS9
image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/

C5235
[PS39]
[PS42]
[PS40]
[PS43]
[PS41]
[PS37]
F-7-3
ACC
Jam Code
ID
[PS34] [PS35] [PS36]

[PS38]
[PS33]
[UN53]
[PS47]
[PS55]
[PS56]
F-7-1
[PS1D]
[PS6D]
F-7-2
Type
00
0B00
Door open
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0A01
0102
0202
0A02
0103
0203
0A03
0104
0204
0A04
0105
0205
0A05
0106
0206
0A06
0107
0207
0A07
0108
0208
0A08
0109
0209
0A09
010A
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Error Code > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
Front door sensor, Right lower door

sensor, Right door sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Reverse sensor
PS18, PS19, PS20

PS55
PS56
PS56
PS56
PS8
PS8
PS8
PS9
PS9
PS9
PS33
PS33
PS33
PS34
PS34
PS34
PS37
PS37
PS37
PS41
PS41
PS41
PS42
PS42
PS42
PS39
7-94
7
ACC
Jam Code
ID
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
020A
0A0A
010B
020B
0A0B
010C
020C
0A0C
010D
020D
0A0D
010F
020F
0A0F
0111
0211
0A11
0112
0212
0A12
0113
0213
0114
0214
0A14
0D91
0D92
0D93
0CA1
0CA2
0CA3
0CAF
0CF1
Type
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Different media length
Incorrect paper
Incorrect paper
Sequence jam *2
Sequence jam *2
Sequence jam *2
Sequence jam *2
Error *1
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 / Color Image Reader Unit-F1
Sensor Name
Reverse sensor
Reverse sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Pre-reverse sensor
Pre-reverse sensor
Pre-reverse sensor
Different media length
Transparency sensor
Transparency sensor
-
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 / Color Image

Reader Unit-F1
Sensor ID
PS39
PS39
PS43
PS43
PS43
PS40
PS40
PS40
PS38
PS38
PS38
PS6D
PS6D
PS6D
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS2
PS2
PS2
UN53
UN53
PS57
PS57
PS57
UN51
UN51
-
PS2
PS1
PS4
SR12,SR13,SR14,SR15
SR1
SR4 SR5
SR2
SR3
SR9
SR7
SR8
VR1
F-7-4
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
Detected error is either of the following.
E001-0000, E001-0001, E009-0002, E012, E014, E021, E061, E074, E075-0004, E100,
E197, and E808
*2: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
PS13
PS3
T-7-9
power supply.
7-95

ACC Jam Code
ID
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0001
0002
0042
0003
0043
0004
0044
Type
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Sensor Name
Post-separation sensor 3
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Sensor ID
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS13
PS13
PS13
PS13
7-95
7
ACC Jam Code
ID
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0005
0045
0006
0046
0007
0047
0008
0048
0009
0049
0010
0050
0071
0073
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
Type
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Sequence Error *2
Error *1
ADF open
ADF open
Door open
Door open
Stationary
Pickup Error
Limited function *3
Sensor Name
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 2
Read sensor 2
Read sensor 2
Read sensor 2
Cover open/closed sensor
-
Sensor ID
PS2
PS2
PS2
PS2
PS3
PS3
PS3
PS3
PS4
PS4
PS4
PS4
PS9
PS9
-
ACC Jam Code

ID
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0071
0073
Type
Door open
Door open
Power ON
Pickup Error
Limited function *3
Sequence Error *2
Error *1
7-96
Sensor Name

Release motor HP sensor
Sensor ID
SR6
SR6
SR11
T-7-11
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
*2: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
*3: Jam code generated to prompt a user to remove the original that remains inside the
machine when an error occurs during a job and the machine enters limited functions mode.
Troubleshooting using this jam code is not possible.
T-7-10

ACC Jam Code
ID
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0001
0002
0042
0095
0003
0043
0004
0044
0009
0049
0010
0050
0013
0053
0014
0054
0090
0091
Type
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Pickup Error
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Door open
Door open
Sensor Name
Timing sensor
Timing sensor
Timing sensor
Timing sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Read sensor
Read sensor
Read sensor
Read sensor
Delivery reversal sensor
-
Sensor ID
SR4
SR4
SR4
SR4
SR1
SR1
SR1
SR1
SR2
SR2
SR2
SR2
SR3
SR3
SR3
SR3
-
7-96
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1
7-97
Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1

PI109
PI108
PI123
PI105
PI107
PI101
PI111
PI22
PI117
PI18
PI19
PI106
PI11
PI114
PI16
PI9
PI20
PI104
PI21
PI102
PI6
PI103
PI14
PI15
PI5
PI116
PI113
PI12
PI110
PI17
PI4
PI115
PI112
PI13
PI1
PI7
PI8
F-7-6
PI120
F-7-5
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1
7-97
7
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1200
110F
1F2F
1F8F
1002
1400
1408
1F88
1102
1F92
1F87
Early jam
Retry error *
Retry error *
Retry error *
Delay jam
Door open
Door open
Door open
Stationary jam
Delay jam
POWER ON
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1001
1101
1301
1004
1104
1304
1FA2
1F91
1FA1
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
stationary jam
Delay jam
Stationary jam
02
02
02
02
02
02
1F93
1FA3
1644
1645
1F86
1500
Delay jam
Stationary jam
error
POWER ON
Staple jam
Staple jam
Type
Error Code > Jam Code > Inner Finisher-E1
Sensor Name
Inlet sensor
Punch pass sensor
Punch pass sensor
Delivery sensor
Paper pushing plate motor clock
sensor,Vertical pat paper sensor,No.1
paper sensor,No.2 paper sensor,No.3
paper sensor,Saddle inlet sensor
Inlet sensor
Inlet sensor
Inlet sensor
Feed path sensor
Feed path sensor
Feed path sensor
Delivery sensor, Vertical path sensor
No.1 paper sensor
No.1 paper sensor,No.2 paper
sensor,No.3 paper sensor
Saddle inlet sensor
Saddle inlet sensor
Side registration HP sensor
Punch pass sensor
Saddle staple
stapler
Sensor ID
PI103
PCB12
PCB12
PI11
PI1, PI17, PI18,
PI19, PI20, PI22
PI103
PI103
PI103
PI104
PI104
PI104
PI11,PI17
PI18
PI18,PI19,PI20
7-98
Inner Finisher-E1
S22
S15
S2
S16
S1
S6
F-7-7
S18
S19
S20
PI22
PI22
PI63
PCB12
SDL STP
STP
T-7-12
* The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
S10
S7
S13
S9
S12
S11
F-7-8
7-98
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
Type
Sensor Name
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1C75
1C71
1C20
1C67
1C32
1C6F
1C40
1C42
1001
1101
1701
1102
1300
1F00
1500
1400
Error
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Early jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Early jam
Staple jam
Door open
Gripper unit HP sensor

Gripu arm sensor
Shift roller HP sensor
Shift roller release sensor
stapler move HP sensor
Entrance roller release /stopper HP sensor
stack tray clock sensor
Additional tray clock sensor
Entrance sensor
Entrance sensor
Entrance sensor
Processing tray sensor
Entrance sensor,Processing tray sensor
Entrance sensor
Stapler HP sensor,Stapler edging sensor
Front cover switch
7-99
Sensor ID
S7
S13
S2
S3
S10
S5
S14
S23
S1
S1
S1
S6
S1,S6
S1
S18,S19
SW1
T-7-13
* The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
7-99
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code
Alarm Code
7-100
31
- 0008 HDD failure prediction

alarm
Alarm Code
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
00
00
02
04
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
30
31
Description
- 0246 Error code display

(4-digit)
- 0247 Error code display
(4-digit)
- 0025 Insufficient Scanner
Unit (Paper Front) LED
light intensity alarm
(Some of the LEDs are
OFF. Scanning can be
continued.)
- 0008 Optional deck lifter error
- 0001 No toner (Bk) (RDS
creates)
- 0002 No toner (Cy) (RDS
creates)
- 0003 No toner (M) (RDS
creates)
- 0004 No toner (Ye) (RDS
creates)
- 0017 Toner (Y) prior delivery
alarm
- 0018 Toner (M) prior delivery
alarm
- 0019 Toner (C) prior delivery
alarm
- 0020 Toner (Bk) prior delivery
alarm
- 0022 Patch detection light
intensity abnormal
change alarm
- 0100 Toner bottle change
notification alarm
- 0001 Waste toner alarm
- 0010 Near-full state of the
Waste Toner Container
- 0002 Charge loss of
secondary transfer roller
- 0006 HDD failure when
equipped with the
mirroring function
Details
Soft counter PCB cannot write normally.
Soft counter PCB cannot restore data.
In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at
LED lighting.
33
- 0010 Scanner Unit Exhaust

Fan (FM1) alarm
34
- 0003 Auto registration

adjustment
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
50
50
- 0014 Insufficient Scanner

Unit (Paper Back) LED
light intensity alarm
(Some of the LEDs are
OFF. Scanning can be
continued.)
Detected waste toner bottle full.

Detection of near-full state of the Waste Toner
Container
Charge loss of secondary transfer roller was
detected.
HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring
function
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
1000
2000
0001
0002
0010
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Successive occurrence
of separation alarm
Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a

short time due to occurrence of physical error in
HDD. It does not occur in the HDD of mirroring
configuration.
Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD
Measures:
1. Back up the data stored in HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Restore the data.
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the HDD.
The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and
writing speed, the total number of Motor start-up and
stop times, the total length of power-on time, etc. are
monitored.
The fan rotation signal cannot be detected after
3 seconds have passed since the Scanner Unit
Exhaust Fan (FM1) of the Reader is turned ON.
Check the connector connection -> Replace the
Scanner Unit Exhaust Fan (FM1).
Timeout occurred due to unsuccess in reading 10
sets of auto registration pattern.
Registration detection sensor failure, Registration
detection sensor cleaning member covered the
registration detection sensor, or no image drew on
the belt.
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original
from the ADF occurs 3 times in a row. Check rotation
of the Pickup Motor -> Check the life of the Pickup
Roller -> Check if paper lint is at the pickup slot.
In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at
LED lighting.
7-100
7
61
- 0001 No staple (process tray

assembly)
62
- 0001
65
- 0001
70
70
70
70
70
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
70
70
- 0006
- 0007
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
0004
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Operation : User message is displayed on controller

of main unit.
Printing operation is suspended when operating
staple job during a print job.
Recovery method : Replenish with staples.
No staple (saddle
Operation : Print operation is suspended after user
assembly)
message is displayed on controller of main unit.
Printing operation is suspended when operating sidestaple job during a print job.
Recovery method : Replenish with staples.
Punch dust full
Operation : User message is displayed on controller
of main unit.
When punching during a print job, operation varies
depending on the detection level of the punch dust
sensor.
Punch dust detection level 1: Continue operation.
Punch dust detection level 2: Suspend printing (in
case punching operated 1000 times after the level 1
detection)
Recovery method : Remove punch dust.
Memory overflow
Font memory overflow Micromemory overflow Image memory overflow Pattern memory
overflow
A hard disk error
Detect operation
abnormality for the HDD
access request
LIPS
Overflow of work memory for translator
LIPS
Error in configuration acquisition/management
LIPS
Memory management error in LIPS
LIPS
File management error in LIPS
LIPS
Reception data management error
LIPS
Page control error
LIPS
Macro management error
LIPS
Color management error
LIPS
Layout control error
LIPS
Font management error
LIPS
Letter drawing error
LIPS
Graphic drawing error
LIPS
Image drawing error
LIPS
Display error to LCD
LIPS
Text mode command error layer error
LIPS
Vector mode command error layer error
LIPS
Utility execution control error
LIPS
Database management error in LIPS
7-101
73
73
73
- 0023 LIPS
- 0024 LIPS
- 0025 LIPS
Menu control error in LIPS

Boot error in LIPS
When the graphic library is in use for image
processing, if the memory allocation is failed.
LIPS
Data format error of image mode
Error occurred in Yukon Error occurred due to
invalid SVG analysis
from Yukon
Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 Overrun error)
(CLG-O1 VsyncB error)
(CLG-O1 VsyncB,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O1 VsyncA error)
(CLG-O1 VsyncA,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O1 VsyncA,
VsyncB error)
(CLG-O1 VsyncA,
VsyncB, Overrun error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncB error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
VsyncB error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
VsyncA error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
VsyncA, Overun error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
VsyncA, VsyncB error)
73
75
75
- 0026
- 0001
- 0002
75
- 9101
75
- 9102
75
- 9103
75
- 9104
75
- 9105
75
- 9106
75
- 9107
75
- 9108
75
- 9109
75
- 910A
75
- 910B
75
- 910C
75
- 910D
75
- 910E
7-101
7
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
- 910F Video transfer error

(CLG-O1 HsyncB,
VsyncA, VsyncB
,Overun error)
- 9110 Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 HsyncA error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
VsyncB error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
VsyncA error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
VsyncA, VsyncB,
Overun error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB error)
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, Overrun error)
- 911A Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncB error)
- 911B Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncB,
Overrun error)
- 911C Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA error)
- 911D Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA,
Overun error)
7-102
75
75
75
-
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
-
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
- 911E Video transfer error

(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA,
VsyncB error)
- 911F Video transfer error
(CLG-O1 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA,
(CLG-O1 timeout error)
- B101 Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 Overrun error)
(CLG-O2 VsyncB error)
(CLG-O2 VsyncB,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O2 VsyncA error)
(CLG-O2 VsyncA,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O2 VsyncA,
VsyncB error)
(CLG-O2 VsyncA,
(CLG-O2 HsyncB error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
Overrun error)
- B10A Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
VsyncB error)
- B10B Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
- B10C Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
VsyncA error)
- B10D Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
- B10E Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
7-102
7
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
- B10F Video transfer error

(CLG-O2 HsyncB,
VsyncA, VsyncB
,Overun error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
Overrun error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
VsyncB error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
VsyncA error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
VsyncA, VsyncB,
Overun error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB error)
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, Overrun error)
- B11A Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncB error)
- B11B Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncB,
Overrun error)
- B11C Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA error)
- B11D Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA,
Overun error)
7-103
75
76
76
- B11E Video transfer error

(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA,
VsyncB error)
- B11F Video transfer error
(CLG-O2 HsyncA,
HsyncB, VsyncA,
(CLG-O2 timeout error)
- 0001 Font
- 0002 Font
75
76
76
76
76
76
76
- 0008 Font
77
77
77
77
77
78
78
79
79
79
79
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
81
81
81
81
81
82
83
75
-
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0001
0002
0003
0005
0006
0003
0005
0001
0002
0003
0004
0001
0003
0010
0011
0015
0016
0018
0019
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0001
0001
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
PDL
PDL
PDL
PDL
PDL
GL
GL
In-house developed PCL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
RIP
CanonPDF
No memory for internal font

Fails to assure the work area to analyze the font that
is downloaded at Resource Download.
Fails to access the file that stores the font.
Fails to allocate the FM work memory.
Fails to analyze the internal font.
Alignment of font data is wrong.
Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There
are 3 types depending on where to occur.
Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There
are 3 types depending on where to occur.
Fails to allocate the memory
Failure of rendering
DGL entry invalid
Other errors
DLG memory insufficient
GL entry invalid
System memory full
PCL initialization error
PCL processing error
Download overflow
Admin error
DataArea error
Graphics error
Char error
Print data cannot process this version.
Syntax error
In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode.
Fails to allocate the memory
Failure of rendering
Imaging initialization error
Imaging processing error
H/W Dart hangup by the DisplayList injustice
PDF data error
7-103
7
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
84
84
84
84
0001
0002
0003
0004
84
84
84
84
0005
0006
0007
0008
84
85
- 0009
- 0001
85
- 0002
85
- 0003
85
- 0004
85
- 0005
85
- 0006
85
- 0007
85
- 0008
XPS memory full error

XPS spool full error
XPS print range error
XPS document data
error
XPS page data error
XPS image data error
XPS font data error
XPS non-support image
error
XPS rendering error
ScanASIC - Time-out in
scan input
ScanASIC - Encode
error at scan input
ScanASIC - Encode
error 2 at scan input
ScanASIC - VSync error
at scan input
ScanASIC - HSync error
at scan input
LookbackASIC - An
occurrence of time-out
LookbackASIC - An
occurrence of illegal
packet error
PrintASIC - An
occurrence of illegal
packet error
PDF compression analysis error

PDF page compression error
PDF data processing error
PDF memory full
PDF temporary file error
PDF color analysis error
PDF data reading error
PDF output selection error
PDF process file error
PDF access error
PDF analysis access error
PDF font error
PDF rendering error
PDF data decode error
PDF print range error
PDF error
PDF analysis error
Un-supported transparent object exists.
-
7-104
85
- 0009 PrintASIC - An
occurrence of process
instruction error
T-7-14
7-104
Service Mode
Overview
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
Service Mode
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
Overview
8-2
Service mode item explanations
Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.
Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be
displayed.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.
Note on useing service mode
E.g., COPIER > DISPLAY > Version window
When setting or operating the service mode, do not open the cover or turn off the main
switch while [active] is displayed. If this is not followed, the service mode cannot be set or
implemeted correctly.
Service Mode Menu
1) Press [i]
TOP Screen
2) Minor item titles

are displayed.
4) A detailed explanation on the

item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
F-8-1
"MODELIST"
"MODELIST CLASSIC"
A brand new additional mode in the host machine.

A function that can be used as a reference on
how to use each item in Service Mode is installed.
The new function, which will be described later, is
available in MODELIST Mode.
This mode is same as the old machine. The new
function, which will be described later, is not
available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode.
If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " is pressed, the screen will switch to initial screen for
each mode.
3) Select the desired

minor item and
press [i]
The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages.
F-8-2
Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
8-2
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
I/O information enhancement
8-3
Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,
The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code
motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.
occurrence record screen.
And the screen will also display the input output signal.
ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
1) Press the button.

Which button to press, will depend on which
electrical parts intended and its device
classification. For instance, if the host
machine uses paper pass detection sensor,
then press the button on the "COPIER" and
"P-Sensor" position.
2) Then the selected electrical

parts classification's mark,
name, port number and 0/1
content will appear.
F-8-4
ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
3) If the "i" button is pressed,

the screen displaying the
electrical parts array will appear.
[PS39]
[PS42]
[PS40]
[PS43]
[PS41]
[PS37]
[PS34] [PS35] [PS36]
[PS38]
[PS33]
[UN53]
[PS47]
[PS55]
[PS56]
F-8-3
F-8-5
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8-3
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
Security features
On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in
To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled.
related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
15 categories.
Classification
Function switching
Related service modes

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level1)
Name
FNC-SW
Set password type for transition to service mode.
Description
Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/
DA connection, count-up spec., document size
detection, dirt detection level
Display switching/ display timing
DSPLY-SW
UI (User Interface) display related
Image related (fixing)
IMG-FIX
Fixing related
Image related (transfer)
IMG-TR
Primary transfer, secondary transfer, ITB
Image related (developing)
IMG-DEV
Developer related
<Setting range>
0: No password (default)
1: Service engineer
2: System administrator and Service engineer.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2)
Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.
<Setting range>
Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR
Laser, latent image related
Image related (reader/ ADF)
IMG-RDR
Reader, ADF image related
Image related (controller, other

general items)
IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items

other than those referred to above.
Image quality/ copy speed
IMG-SPD
Cleaning
CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller,

ITB, etc.
Environment settings
ENV-SET
Temperature, humidity, environmental heater,

condensation, log acquisition
Paper feed (pickup, delivery)
FEED-SW
Stack performance, motor speed adjustment,

delivery functions, etc.
Noise reduction
SOUND
Noise related
Network
NETWORK
Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.
Customization
CUSTOM
Customization
To reinforce the security, change the password from a default.
Power down sequence
******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111]

After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.
T-8-1
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8-4
Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)
1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System
Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.
8-5
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier.
When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1> in the right upper side of the screen, and
it will switch to level 2.
System
Manager
ID
System
Password
F-8-6
2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option >
FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.
SM-PSWD
F-8-7
MEMO :
If Service Engineers password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using
Service Support Tool (SST).
F-8-8
Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)
8-5
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
Language switch
8-6
Back-up of service mode
The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written
performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode
in the service label.
The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment
HDD.
values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and
Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.
changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in
Settings/Registration > Prefernces > Display Settings > Language/Keyboard Switch
the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in
a blank field.
Service Label
F-8-9
MEMO :
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
F-8-10
8-6
Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device
The data output of the service data print
8-7
How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device

What to Prepare:
Overview
A USB memory device where the system software for this machine has been registered using
Data output of service print such as P-PRINT is supported.

If a service print was printed on paper, the data at the time of printing can be retrieved.
When a service print is output (e.g. P-PRINT) in service mode, a data for print and a data
for file are created in the controller.
the SST.
Operation Procedure
The created data file is saved in the HDD of the machine.

The created (saved) data is deleted when it is moved to the SST or a USB memory device.
If multiple service data (e.g. P-PRINT and HIST-PRINT) are stored in the HDD of the
3) Press the control panel keys.

[5] -> [0]:
machine, they are collectively moved to the SST or the USB memory device.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
Even if the machine has stopped operation due to a no-paper error, data can be moved to
the SST or the USB memory device as long as the machine can enter download mode.
NOTE:
While an error is occurring, data of service print cannot be create.

When connecting a USB device that operates on an external power supply, the machine
needs to be started with the USB device ON. A USB device connected after starting the
machine cannot be recognized.
Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output
Service Mode
Content
P-PRINT
Output of service mode setting value
HIST-PRT
Output of jam and error history
USER-PRT
Output of user mode list
F-8-11
D-PRINT
Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
ENV-PRT
Inside temp/hmdy & fix roller temp log
PJH-P-1
Detail info of print job history:100 job
PJH-P-2
Detail info of print job history:all job
USBH-PRT
Output of USB device information report
4) Download ServicePrint.
Save the service data output on paper (e.g. [4] ServicePrint) as plain text.
Note:
T-8-2

If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which
makes it difficult to read the data.
When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may
be displayed in some cases.
Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device
8-7
Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST
8-8
[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
[7]: SRAM(USB)
F-8-12
How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST

Introduce it in SST Ver.4.6x.
F-8-14
4) Select 'P-PRINT-RPT.txt', and click [Start].
1) Start up the SST.

2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the
network settings, and click [START].
[1]
[2]
F-8-15
5) Select the name of the Folder to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click
[Save].
F-8-13
3) Click [Upload Data].
8-8
8-9
F-8-16
6) Click [OK].
8-9
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
COPIER
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
DISPLAY
VERSION
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PANEL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ECO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PS-PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SDL-STCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OP-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-10
Display of DCON firmware version

To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
When upgrading the firmware
00.01 to 99.99
Display of RCON firmware version
To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
[Not used]
Display of FIN-CONT firmware version
To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of network software version
To display the version of the network software.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UFR function version
Display of UFR function version
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver
To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver
To display the ROM version of Option Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
MN-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RUI
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of MNCON firmware version

To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of remote UI version
To display the version of remote UI.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Puncher Unit version
To display the version of Puncher Unit.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of English language file version
To display the version of English language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of French language file version
To display the version of French language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of German language file version
To display the version of German language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Italian language file version
To display the version of Italian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Japanese language file ver
To display the version of Japanese language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Czech language file version
To display the version of Czech language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Danish language file version
To display the version of Danish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Greek language file version
To display the version of Greek language file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-10

LANG-ES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Spanish language file version

To display the version of Spanish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Estonian language file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Finnish language file version
To display the version of Finnish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Hungarian language file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Korean language file version
To display the version of Korean language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Dutch language file version
To display the version of Dutch language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Norwegian language file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Polish language file version
To display the version of Polish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Portuguese language file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Russian language file version
To display the version of Russian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Slovenian language file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-11
LANG-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ECO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GDI-UFR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEAP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of Swedish language file version

To display the version of Swedish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Chinese language file ver: trad
To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Chinese language file ver: smpl
To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ECO-ID code
To display the ECO-ID code.
ASCII character string (12 digits)
Display of GDI-UFR function version
To display the version of GDI-UFR function.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Bulgarian language file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Croatian language file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Romanian language file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Slovak language file version
To display the version of Slovak language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Turkish language file version
To display the version of Turkish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of MEAP contents version
To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD.
00.01 to 99.99
8-11

OCR-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-KR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-TW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOOTROM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of Chinese OCR: simplified

To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified).
--.-- is displayed when no file is found.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Japanese OCR version
To display the version of Japanese OCR.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Korean OCR version
To display the version of Korean OCR.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Chinese OCR ver: traditional
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOOTROM version
To display the version of BOOTROM.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Japanese voice dictionary version
To display the version of Japanese voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of English voice dictionary version
To display the version of English voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Italian voice dictionary version
To display the version of Italian voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of French voice dictionary version
To display the version of French voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
8-12
TTS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
WEB-BRWS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HELP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WEBDAV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TIMESTMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dis of Spanish voice dictionary version

To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of German voice dictionary version
To display the version of German voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Web browser version
To display the version of Web browser.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Easy NAVI version
To display the version of Easy NAVI file.
Version should be displayed for Easy NAVI function because it is an
external file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Catalan language file version
To display the version of Catalan language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of WebDAV version
To display the version of WebDAV file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of timestamp version
To display the version of Time Stamp file.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Japanese ASR dictionary version
To display the version of Japanese automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
8-12

ASR-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MEDIA-JA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-DE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-IT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-FR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of English ASR dictionary version

To display the version of English automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Japanese media information ver
To display the version of Japanese media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of English media information version
To display the version of English media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of German media information version
To display the version of German media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Italian media information version
To display the version of Italian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of French media information version
To display the version of French media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Chinese media info ver: smpl
To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Slovak media information version
To display the version of Slovak media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Turkish media information version
To display the version of Turkish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Czech media information version
To display the version of Czech media information.
00.01 to 99.99
8-13
MEDIA-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of Greek media information version

To display the version of Greek media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Spanish media information version
To display the version of Spanish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Estonian media information ver
To display the version of Estonian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Finnish media information version
To display the version of Finnish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Hungarian media information ver
To display the version of Hungarian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Korean media information version
To display the version of Korean media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Dutch media information version
To display the version of Dutch media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Norwegian media information ver
To display the version of Norwegian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Polish media information version
To display the version of Polish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Portuguese media information ver
To display the version of Portuguese media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Russian media information version
To display the version of Russian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
8-13

MEDIA-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ECO2
FAX1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FAX2-3-4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IOCS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dis of Slovenian media information ver

To display the version of Slovenian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Swedish media information version
To display the version of Swedish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Chinese media info version:trad
To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Bulgarian media information ver
To display the version of Bulgarian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Croatian media information ver
To display the version of Croatian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Romanian media information ver
To display the version of Romanian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Catalan media information version
To display the version of Catalan media information.
00.01 to 99.99
[Not used]
Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
NULL is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Dis of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB.
NULL is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Display of BIOS version
To display the BIOS version.
00.01 to 99.99
8-14
SYSTEM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ROOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-GR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-SP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
UI-RES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dis of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver

To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file.
00.01 to 99.99, 00.01 to 99.99, 00.01 to 99.99, 00.01 to 99.99
Display of ROOT version
To display the ROOT version.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of service mode Japanese file ver
To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of service mode English file version
To display the version of English language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of service mode French file version
To display the version of French language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of service mode Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of service mode German file version
To display the version of German language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of service mode Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UI resource file version
To display the UIRES version.
UIRES consists of the resource file which is necessary to display the
native screen (top screen and software keyboard screen) of UI.
When checking the version at the time of downloading UIRES to
MFP
00.01 to 99.99
Display of COPY (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-14

SEND-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MOBPR-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RPTL-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TSP-JLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version

To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of BOX application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of mobile print(JAVA UI) version
To display the version of the mobile print application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of RUI portal version
To display the RUI portal version.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func introduce appli ver
To display the version of Introduction to Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Image Data Analyzer PCB version
To display the version of Image Data Analyzer PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli French file version
To display the French language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Italian file version
To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli German file version
To display the German language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Spanish file version
To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-15
COPY-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl

To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY
application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Czech file version
To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Hungarian file version
To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-15

COPY-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of COPY appli Dutch file version

To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Norwegian file version
To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Portuguese file ver
To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Slovenian file version
To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Indonesian file ver
To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Bulgarian file version
To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-16
COPY-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dis of COPY appli Croatian file version

To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver
To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli French file version
To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Italian file version
To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-16

SEND-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of SEND appli German file version

To display the German language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Spanish file version
To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis SEND appli Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Czech file version
To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-17
SEND-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of SEND appli Finnish file version

To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Hungarian file version
To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Norwegian file version
To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Portuguese file ver
To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Slovenian file version
To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-17

SEND-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of SEND appli Indonesian file ver

To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Bulgarian file version
To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Croatian file version
To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver
To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-18
INTRO-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of useful func intro French file ver

To display the version of French language file of Introduction to
Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful
Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro German file ver
To display the version of German language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Spanish file ver
To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Useful func intro Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Useful func intro Chinese file ver: trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Korean file ver
To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Czech file ver
To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Danish file ver
To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
8-18

INTRO-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of useful func intro Greek file ver

To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Finnish file ver
To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Dutch file ver
To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Polish file ver
To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Portuguese filever
To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Russian file ver
To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
8-19
INTRO-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis useful func intro Slovenian file ver

To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Swedish file ver
To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Indon file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Romanian file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of useful func intro Slovak file ver
To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Turkish file ver
To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis useful func intro Catalan file ver
To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
8-19

INTRO-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis useful func intro Thai file version

To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Useful func intro Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu French file version
To display the version of French language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu German file version
To display the version of German language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis custom menu Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom
menu application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom
menu application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-20
CSTMN-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of custom menu Czech file version

To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-20

CSTMN-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of custom menu Portuguese file ver

To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-21
CSTMN-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of custom menu Turkish file version

To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of custom menu Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility French file version
To display the version of French language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility German file version
To display the version of German language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Spanish file ver
To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis Accessibility Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for
Accessibility application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-21

ACSBT-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis accessibility Chinese file ver:trad

To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for
Accessibility application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Finnish file ver
To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-22
ACSBT-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of accessibility Norwegian file ver

To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Russian file ver
To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Swedish file ver
To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-22

ACSBT-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dis of accessibility Romanian file ver

To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Turkish file ver
To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Catalan file ver
To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of accessibility Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS French file version
To display the version of French language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS German file version
To display the version of German language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-23
ERS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Spanish file version

To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-23

ERS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Dutch file version

To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Bulgarian file version
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-24
ERS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Romanian file version

To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC French file version
To display the version of French language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC German file version
To display the version of German language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-24

NLS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Chinese file ver:smpl

To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-25
NLS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Norwegian file version

To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Bulgarian file version
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-25

NLS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BCT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Slovak file version

To display the version of Slovak language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of self diagnosis tool version
To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Spanish ASR dictionary version
To display the version of Spanish automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of French ASR dictionary version
To display the version of French automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Italian ASR dictionary version
To display the version of Italian automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of German ASR dictionary version
To display the version of German automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Thai language file version
To display the version of Thai language file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-26
LANG-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Vietnamese language file ver

To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli French file version
To display the version of French language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli German file version
To display the version of German language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-26

BOX-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Danish file version

To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
8-27
BOX-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of BOX appli Russian file version

To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Bulgarian file version
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-27

BOX-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SC-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SC-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WSDS-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of BOX appli Catalan file version

To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of BOX appli Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SC appli Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for Self Copy application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of SC appli Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Self Copy
00.01 to 99.99
Display of WSD-SCAN (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of WSD-SCAN application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
8-28
RPTL-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case

00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
8-28
8-29

RPTL-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case

00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
00.00 to 99.99
T-8-3
8-29
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
USER
ACC-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > USER
SPDTYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BRWS-STS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
8-30
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
Dis of Ctrollr Board engine speed type

To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board.
When checking the engine speed type of Controller Board
Display of service browser ON/OFF
To display whether the service browser can be used.
If the value is 1, [Service Browser] button is displayed on the service
mode initial screen.
The value of BRWS-STS switches whenever COPIER> FUNCTION>
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT is executed, but ON/OFF of service browser
is enabled after reboot. If the service browser does not start even
though the value of BRWS-STS is 1, turn OFF/ON the main power
switch.
When checking the usage status of service browser
The value of BRWS-STS is linked with COPIER> FUNCTION>
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT, but the service browser cannot start even
though 1 is displayed unless the main power switch is turned OFF/
ON.
0 to 2
0: OFF (Only at the time of factory shipment, not connected to the
UGW server), 1: ON (Available), 2: OFF (Not available)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DECK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
T-8-4
CARD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
COINROBO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of DADF connection state

To display the connection state of DADF.
When checking the connection between the machine and DADF
0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
Connect state of Finisher-related option
To display the connecting state of Finisher-related options.
When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
Left column (connecting state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
1: Without Saddle
2: With Saddle, without Folding Unit
3: With Saddle and Inserter, without Folding Unit
4: With Saddle and Folding Unit, without Inserter
5: With Saddle, Inserter and Folding Unit
Right column (connecting state of Finisher-belonged Inserter): 0 to 4
0: no hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW)
Dis of Paper Deck connection state
To display the connection state of the Paper Deck.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper
Decks
0 to 5
0: Not connected, 1: Connected, 2 to 4: Not used, 5: Multi-purpose
Tray only
Dis of connection state of Card Reader
To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Card
Reader
0 to 1
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is
not available.)
1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card
Reader is connected. (Copy is available.)
Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity
To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
When checking the memory capacity of the machine
Numeric value
MB
Dis of Coin Manager connection state
To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin
Manager
0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
8-30

NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NETWARE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HDD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of Network PCB connection state

To display the connection state of the Network PCB.
When checking the connection between the machine and the
Network PCB
0 to 3
0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB
connected, 3: Ethernet PCB + Token Ring PCB connected
Install state dis of NetWare firmware
To display the installation state of NetWare firmware.
When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the
machine
0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Display of SEND support PCB existence
To display whether there is a PCB to support SEND function.
SEND function can be used only when the PCB is mounted.
When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB
that supports SEND function
0 to 1
Display of HDD model name
To display the model name of HDD.
When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
Character string
Display of PCI1-connected PCB name
To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1.
When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1
-: No PCB connected
Voice Board: Voice PCB
3DES Board: Encryption PCB
1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB
When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2
-: No PCB connected
iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB
Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this
machine.)
8-31
PCI3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IA-RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit

When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3
-: No PCB connected
iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB
Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this
machine.)
Display of MNCON PCB memory(IA) capacity
To display the memory (IA) capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB
MB
T-8-5
8-31
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
ANALOG
8-32
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

TEMP
Lv.1 Details
Display of outside temperature

To display the temperature outside the machine.
This is measured by the Environment Sensor 2 that detects the
outside air.
Use case
When checking the temperature outside the machine
0 to 50
Unit
deg C
Appropriate target value 20 to 27
HUM
Display of outside humidity
Lv.1 Details
To display the humidity outside the machine.
outside air.
Use case
When checking the humidity outside the machine
0 to 100
Unit
%
ABS-HUM
Display of outside moisture amount
Lv.1 Details
To display the absolute moisture content outside the machine.
outside air.
Use case
When checking the moisture content outside the machine
0 to 100
Unit
g/m3
FIX-C
Display of Fixing Film temperature
Lv.1 Details
To display the center temperature of the Fixing Film detected by the
Main Thermistor 2.
Use case
When checking the temperature of Fixing Film
0 to 300
Unit
deg C
FIX-E
Dis of Fixing Heater center temperature
Lv.1 Details
To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by
the Main Thermistor 1.
When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Heater
Use case
0 to 300
Unit
deg C
FIX-E2
Dis of Fixing Heater front edge temp
Lv.1 Details
To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected
by the Sub Thermistor 1.
Use case
When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater
0 to 300
Unit
deg C
TEMP2
Lv.1 Details
Display of inside temperature

To display the temperature inside the machine measured by the
Environment Sensor 1.
Use case
When checking the temperature inside the machine
0 to 100
Unit
deg C
HUM2
Display of inside humidity
Lv.1 Details
To display the humidity inside the machine measured by the
Environment Sensor 1.
Use case
When checking the humidity inside the machine
0 to 100
Unit
%
FIX-E3
Dis of Fixing Heater rear edge temp
Lv.1 Details
To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected
by the Sub Thermistor 2.
Use case
When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater
0 to 300
Unit
deg C
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
T-8-6
8-32
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
CST-STS
HV-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
WIDTH-MF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
8-33
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
Dis of Multi-purpose Tray ppr width size

To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray.
When checking the paper width side set on the Multi-purpose Tray
Numeric value
mm
T-8-7
1ATVC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Dis of primary transfer current (Y)

To display the decuple value of the current flown to the Primary
Transfer Roller (Y) by the primary transfer ATVC control.
When the two values are out of the target value range (50 to 700),
clear the log information for the appropriate control (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> 1TR-CLR).
If the two values are both small, the Primary Transfer Roller may
have reached the end of life.
Use case
When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the
displayed value
0 to 900
Unit
uA
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> 1TR-CLR
Dis of primary transfer current (M)
1ATVC-M
Lv.2 Details
Transfer Roller (M) by the primary transfer ATVC control.
Use case
displayed value
0 to 900
Unit
uA
Dis of primary transfer current (C)
1ATVC-C
Lv.2 Details
Transfer Roller (C) by the primary transfer ATVC control.
Use case
displayed value
0 to 900
Unit
uA
8-33

1ATVC-K4
Lv.2 Details
Dis prmry trns current(Bk): full clr mod

Transfer Roller (Bk) by the primary transfer ATVC control in full color
mode.
Use case
displayed value
0 to 900
Unit
uA
2ATVC
Dis secondary transfer ATVC tgt current
Lv.2 Details
To display the decuple value of the voltage flown to the Secondary
Transfer Outer Roller derived from the secondary transfer ATVC
control.
As the usage of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is extended,
the value decreases.
If the two values are both small, the Secondary Transfer Roller may
Use case
When identifying the cause at the occurrence of an image failure
0 to 65535
Unit
uA
THCK-Y
Display of Y Drum abrasion level
Lv.1 Details
To display the Y Photosensitive Drum abrasion level calculated from
the drum film thickness detection results.
The drum film thickness detection results are reflected to the controls
of charging, development and transfer.
- When checking the validity of the setting values for transfer and
Use case
development
- When checking the change in the drum film thickness against the
Drum Cartridge life
0 to 20
Unit
um
8-34
THCK-M
Lv.1 Details
Display of M Drum abrasion level

To display the M Photosensitive Drum abrasion level calculated from
Use case
development
Drum Cartridge life
0 to 20
Unit
um
THCK-C
Display of C Drum abrasion level
Lv.1 Details
To display the C Photosensitive Drum abrasion level calculated from
Use case
development
Drum Cartridge life
0 to 20
Unit
um
T-8-8
8-34
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
CCD
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

TARGET-B
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Appropriate target value
TARGET-G
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TARGET-R
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-35
Shading target value (B)

To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is
considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure
or E302 (shading error) may have occurred. Identify the cause
according to the value.
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
0 to FFFF
512 to 2047
Shading target value (G)
To display the target value of Green.
0 to FFFF
512 to 2047
Shading target value (R)
To display the shading target value of Red.
0 to FFFF
512 to 2047
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): frt
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the
Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB.
0 to 143
0 to 143
GAIN-OG
Lv.2 Details
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): frt

To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
0 to 143
GAIN-OR
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): frt
Lv.2 Details
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
Use case
0 to 143
GAIN-EB
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):frt
Lv.2 Details
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
Use case
0 to 143
8-35
8-36

GAIN-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LAMP-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LAMP-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LAMP2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):frt

To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
0 to 143
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):frt
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
0 to 143
0 to 143
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): front
To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit
(paper front) in B&W scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode
55 to 275
100 to 275
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): frt
(paper front) in color scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
55 to 275
100 to 275
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): back
(paper back) in B&W scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode.
55 to 275
100 to 275
LAMP2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): back

(paper back) in color scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
55 to 275
100 to 275
Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Front]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning.
0 to 116
0 to 116
Img Sensor offset value (color) [Front]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
0 to 116
0 to 116
Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Back]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning.
0 to 116
0 to 116
Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): frt
To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of
Scanner Unit (paper front).
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
8-36
8-37

GAIN2BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): Back

Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): bck
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to 143
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): bck
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to 143
0 to 143
GAIN2-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): bck

To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
0 to 143
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):bck
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
0 to 143
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):bck
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to 143
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):bck
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
0 to 143
0 to 143
Img Sensor offset value (color) [Back]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
0 to 116
0 to 116
T-8-9
8-37
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
DPOT
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

2TR-PPR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
2TR-BASE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1TR-DC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1TR-DC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1TR-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1TR-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
8-38
Dis of sec trns ATVC ppr allotted voltg

To display the paper allotted voltage set by the latest secondary
transfer Full ATVC control.
The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting.
When an inquiry is received from the quality evaluation division
0 to 5000
V
Dis of sec transfer ATVC base voltage
To display the base voltage set by the latest secondary transfer Full
ATVC control.
The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting.
When an inquiry is received from the quality evaluation division
0 to 6000
V
500 to 5000
Dis of primary transfer voltage (Y)
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (Y).
When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer
0 to 3000
V
300 to 3000
Dis of primary transfer voltage (M)
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (M).
0 to 3000
V
300 to 3000
Dis of primary transfer voltage (C)
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (C).
0 to 3000
V
300 to 3000
Dis of primary transfer voltage (Bk)
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller
(Bk).
0 to 3000
V
300 to 4000
CHG-AC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-AC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-AC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-AC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LPWR-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LPWR-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of primary charging AC bias (Y)

To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary
Charging Roller (Y).
When an image failure occurs due to charging failure
0 to 3000
V
300 to 3000
Display of primary charging AC bias (M)
Charging Roller (M).
0 to 3000
V
1200 to 2500
Display of primary charging AC bias (C)
Charging Roller (C).
0 to 3000
V
1200 to 2500
Display of primary charging AC bias (Bk)
Charging Roller (Bk).
0 to 3000
V
1200 to 2500
Display of laser power (Y)
To display Y laser power determined by D-max control.
FF display with low image density is considered that the
Photosensitive Drum may be near the end of life.
When the image density is low
00 to FF (hexadecimal)
60 to FF
Display of laser power (M)
To display M laser power determined by D-max control.
60 to FF
8-38

LPWR-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LPWR-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
PVCONT-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PVCONT-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of laser power (C)

To display C laser power determined by D-max control.
60 to FF
Display of laser power (Bk)
To display Bk laser power determined by D-max control.
60 to FF
Dis of target patch contrast potntl (Y)
To display the target Y patch contrast potential.
Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner
supply control is properly executed at image density failure.
Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined
range.
- When analyzing the cause of the image density failure
- When analyzing the cause of a problem
0 to 255
V
20 to 120
Dis of target patch contrast potntl (M)
To display the target M patch contrast potential.
range.
0 to 255
V
20 to 120
8-39
PVCONT-C
Lv.2 Details
Dis of target patch contrast potntl (C)

To display the target C patch contrast potential.
range.
Use case
0 to 255
Unit
V
PVCONT-K
Dis of target patch contrast potntl (Bk)
Lv.2 Details
To display the target Bk patch contrast potential.
range.
Use case
0 to 255
Unit
V
VRATE-Y
Display of D-max Y-color Vd gain value
Lv.1 Details
To display the gain value for the Y Vd set by D-max PASCAL/D-max
control against the environment table value.
Use case
When the image density is not appropriate
-100 to 100
Unit
%
VRATE-M
Display of D-max M-color Vd gain value
Lv.1 Details
To display the gain value for the M Vd set by D-max PASCAL/D-max
Use case
-100 to 100
Unit
%
VRATE-C
Display of D-max C-color Vd gain value
Lv.1 Details
To display the gain value for the C Vd set by D-max PASCAL/D-max
Use case
-100 to 100
Unit
%
VRATE-K
Display of D-max Bk-color Vd gain value
Lv.1 Details
To display the gain value for the Bk Vd set by D-max PASCAL/D-max
Use case
-100 to 100
Unit
%
8-39
8-40

LPGAIN-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LPGAIN-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LPGAIN-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Dis of Y-color laser power gain value

To display the gain value of Y laser power by D-max control.
When checking D-max control results
-100 to 100
%
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LPGAIN-M, LPGAIN-C
Dis of M-color laser power gain value
To display gain value of M laser power by D-max control.
-100 to 100
%
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LPGAIN-Y, LPGAIN-C
Dis of C-color laser power gain value
To display gain value of C laser power by D-max control.
-100 to 100
%
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LPGAIN-Y, LPGAIN-M
T-8-10
8-40
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS
DENS
8-41
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

DENS-Y
Lv.1 Details
Dis of Y developer density change ratio

To display the difference between Y-color developer density and the
target value in % (percentage).
Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by
deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the ATR
Sensor or error in toner supply system.
The value is updated upon print operation after power-on.
Use case
- When the density varies dramatically
- When the density is unstable even after gradation correction
-7 to 7
Unit
%
Appropriate target value -4.5 to 4.5
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-Y
DENS-M
Dis of M developer density change ratio
Lv.1 Details
To display difference between M-color developer density and the
Use case
-7 to 7
Unit
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-M
DENS-C
Dis of C developer density change ratio
To display difference between C-color developer density and the
Lv.1 Details
Use case
-7 to 7
Unit
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-C
DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DENS-S-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DENS-S-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DENS-S-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DENS-S-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
D-Y-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
D-M-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of Bk developer density change ratio

To display difference between Bk-color developer density and the
-7 to 7
%
-4.5 to 4.5
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-K
Dis of ATR control patch density (Y)
To display Y patch image density created by ATR control.
When analyzing the cause of a problem
0 to 1023
300 to 700
Dis of ATR control patch density (M)
To display M patch image density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
300 to 700
Dis of ATR control patch density (C)
To display C patch image density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
300 to 700
Dis of ATR control patch density (Bk)
To display Bk patch image density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
300 to 700
Dis of ATR ctrl Y patch target density
To display the target density for Y patch image created by ATR
control.
0 to 1023
300 to 700
Dis of ATR ctrl M patch target density
To display the target density for M patch image created by ATR
control.
0 to 1023
300 to 700
8-41
8-42

D-C-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
REF-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
REF-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
REF-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
REF-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SGNL-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SGNL-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dis of ATR ctrl C patch target density

To display the target density for C patch image created by ATR
control.
0 to 1023
300 to 700
Dis of Y developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Y).
0 to 255
20 to 230
Dis of M developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (M).
0 to 255
20 to 230
Dis of C developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (C).
0 to 255
20 to 230
Dis of Bk developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Bk).
0 to 255
20 to 230
Display of Y-color developer density
To display the measured value of Y-color developer density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (Y) for each job.
0 to 255
20 to 230
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-Y
Display of M-color developer density
To display the measured value of M-color developer density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (M) for each job.
0 to 255
20 to 230
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-M
SGNL-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SGNL-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
P-SENS-P
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DEV-DC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
DEV-DC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of C-color developer density

To display the measured value of C-color developer density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (C) for each job.
0 to 255
20 to 230
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-C
Display of Bk-color developer density
To display the measured value of Bk-color developer density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (Bk) for each job.
0 to 255
20 to 230
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-K
Dis base intnsty at ATR ctrl (P-wave)
To display the light intensity (P-wave) reflected from the background
(ITB) at ATR control.
Intolerable values may be caused by Patch Sensor disconnection,
LED failure, soiled Sensor surface, Shutter failure, Registration
Patch Shutter Open/Close Solenoid failure, insufficient ITB cleaning,
etc.
When checking the failure of Patch Sensor/ITB at low density,
fogging deterioration or E020 display
0 to 1023
400 to 1000
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-S
Dis of developing DC voltage (Y)
To display the latest Y developing DC voltage Vdc.
- When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence
- When fogging occurs
- When fogging is deteriorated
-800 to -200
V
-800 to -200
Dis of developing DC voltage (M)
To display the latest M developing DC voltage Vdc.
-800 to -200
V
-800 to -200
8-42

DEV-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
DEV-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-DC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-DC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
D-K-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of developing DC voltage (C)

To display the latest C developing DC voltage Vdc.
-800 to -200
V
-800 to -200
Dis of developing DC voltage (Bk)
To display the latest Bk developing DC voltage Vdc.
-800 to -200
V
-800 to -200
Dis of primary charging DC voltage (Y)
To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Y color.
At low density/occurrence of fogging
0 to 1500
V
400 to 900
Dis of primary charging DC voltage (M)
To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of M color.
0 to 1500
V
400 to 900
Dis of primary charging DC voltage (C)
To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of C color.
0 to 1500
V
400 to 900
Dis of primary charging DC voltage (Bk)
To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Bk color.
0 to 1500
V
400 to 900
Dis of ATR ctrl Bk patch target density
To display the Bk patch image target density created by ATR control.
340 to 640
340 to 640
8-43
D-CRNT-P
Lv.2 Details
Use case
D-CRNT-S
Lv.2 Details
Use case
P-SENS-S
Lv.2 Details
Dis of ATR ctrl dark current (P-wave)

To display the dark current value (P-wave) measured at ATR control.
When checking the Patch Sensor
0 to 1023
less than 100
Dis of ATR ctrl dark current (S-wave)
To display the dark current value (S-wave) measured at ATR control.
0 to 1023
0 to 409
Dis base intnsty at ATR ctrl (S-wave)
To display the light intensity (S-wave) reflected from the background
(ITB) at ATR control.
When checking ITB failure at low density or fogging deterioration
Use case
0 to 1023
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P
DENS-Y-H
Dis of ATR ctrl Y-clr TD ratio history
Lv.2 Details
To display the latest 8 Y-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by
the ATR Sensor at ATR control.
Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection/
failure, whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in
toner supply system.
Use case
When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low
density or fogging deterioration
0 to 255
DENS-M-H
Dis of ATR ctrl M-clr TD ratio history
Lv.2 Details
To display the latest 8 M-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected
by the ATR Sensor at ATR control.
Use case
0 to 255
8-43
8-44

DENS-C-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DS-S-Y-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DS-S-M-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DS-S-C-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of ATR ctrl C-clr TD ratio history

To display the latest 8 C-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by
the ATR Sensor at ATR control.
0 to 255
20 to 230
Dis of Y-clr patch image density history
To display the latest 8 Y-patch image density log data.
It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc.
Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor,
Shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in
This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor.
When analyzing the cause of E020
0 to 1023
200 to 900
Dis of M-clr patch image density history
To display the latest 8 M-patch image density log data.
0 to 1023
200 to 900
Dis of C-clr patch image density history
To display the latest 8 C-patch image density log data.
0 to 1023
200 to 900
DS-S-K-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
P-LED-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPL-LG-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPL-LG-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPL-LG-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis Bk-clr patch image density history

To display the latest 8 Bk-patch image density log data.
0 to 1023
200 to 900
Dis of Patch Sensor LED light intensity
To display the Patch Sensor LED light intensity.
The soiled Sensor window or soiled ITB (ITB cleaning failure) is
suspected if the background light intensity (P-wave) is too low even
with sufficient LED light intensity and PT-LPADJ execution will not
correct the problem.
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P
Display of Y toner supply history
To display the latest 8 Y-toner supply log data.
Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper.
When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density
or fogging deterioration
0 to 4
0 to 4
Display of M toner supply history
To display the latest 8 M-toner supply log data.
0 to 4
0 to 4
Display of C toner supply history
To display the latest 8 C-toner supply log data.
0 to 4
0 to 4
8-44
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC

DENS-K-H
Lv.2 Details
Dis of ATR ctrl Bk-clr TD ratio history

To display the latest 8 Bk-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected
by the ATR Sensor at ATR control.
Use case
0 to 255
SPL-LG-K
Display of Bk toner supply history
Lv.2 Details
To display the latest 8 Bk-toner supply log data.
When checking the toner supply status at low density or fogging
Use case
deterioration
0 to 10
T-8-11
8-45
MISC
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
ENV-TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LPOWER-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LPOWER-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LPOWER-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LPOWER-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ITB-POS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
ITB-POS2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Dis of secondary transfer environment

To display environment (moisture content) classification used for
secondary transfer ATVC control.
1: Low humidity, 2: Normal humidity, 3: High humidity
When adjusting the secondary transfer ATVC paper allotted voltage
1 to 3
1 to 3
Display of laser light intensity (Y)
To display the Y laser intensity in real-time.
When analyzing the cause of the image density failure
00 to FF
50 to FF
Display of laser light intensity (M)
To display the M laser intensity in real-time.
00 to FF
50 to FF
Display of laser light intensity (C)
To display the C laser intensity in real-time.
00 to FF
50 to FF
Display of laser light intensity (Bk)
To display the Bk laser intensity in real-time.
00 to FF
50 to FF
Dis of ITB steering reference position
To display the steering reference position of ITB.
At initial installation (after execution of COPIER> FUNCTION>
MISC-P> ITB-INIT)
-580 to 580
pulse
-300 to 450
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-INIT
Dspl ITB steering ref position: CL mode
To display the steering reference position of ITB (color mode).
At initial installation (after execution of COPIER> FUNCTION>
MISC-P> ITB-INIT)
-580 to 580
pulse
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-INIT
T-8-12
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
8-45
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C
HT-C
COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

TGT-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-46
Dis of ARCDAT screen A Y-color target VL

To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the
tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the
target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated.
When hue variation occurs
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen A M-color target VL
To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen A C-color target VL
To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen A Bk-clr target VL
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen B Y-color target VL
To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
TGT-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of ARCDAT screen B M-color target VL

To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen B C-color target VL
To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen B Bk-clr target VL
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen C Y-color target VL
To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dis of ARCDAT screen C M-color target VL
To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
8-46
8-47

TGT-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Dis of ARCDAT screen C C-color target VL

To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
Use case
0 to 1023
TGT-C-K
Dis of ARCDAT screen C Bk-clr target VL
Lv.2 Details
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
Use case
0 to 1023
SUM-A-Y
Dis ARCDAT screen A Y-color ctrl differ
Lv.2 Details
To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control.
target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-M
Dis ARCDAT screen A M-color ctrl differ
Lv.2 Details
To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-C
Dis ARCDAT screen A C-color ctrl differ
Lv.2 Details
To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis ARCDAT screen A Bk-color ctrl differ

To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT
control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B Y-color ctrl differ
To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B M-color ctrl differ
To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B C-color ctrl differ
To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B Bk-color ctrl differ
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT
control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-47
8-48

SUM-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis ARCDAT screen C Y-color ctrl differ

To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen C M-color ctrl differ
To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen C C-color ctrl differ
To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen C Bk-color ctrl differ
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT
control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen A Y-patch current VL
To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen A M-patch current VL
To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
SGNL-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis ARCDAT screen A C-patch current VL

To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen A Bk-patch current VL
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B Y-patch current VL
To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B M-patch current VL
To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B C-patch current VL
To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen B Bk-patch current VL
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen C Y-patch current VL
To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
8-48
8-49

SGNL-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-C-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis ARCDAT screen C M-patch current VL

To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen C Bk-patch current VL
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis ARCDAT screen C C-patch current VL
To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen A Y-density differ
To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the
current value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen A M-density differ
To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen A C-density differ
To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis of ARCDAT screen A Bk-density differ

To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen B Y-density differ
current value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen B M-density differ
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen B C-density differ
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dis of ARCDAT screen B Bk-density differ
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-49
8-50

DLTA-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Dis of ARCDAT screen C Y-density differ

current value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-C-M
Dis of ARCDAT screen C M-density differ
Lv.2 Details
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-C-C
Dis of ARCDAT screen C C-density differ
Lv.2 Details
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-C-K
Dis of ARCDAT screen C Bk-density differ
Lv.2 Details
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
TGT-A-Y2
ARCDAT scrn A Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
Lv.2 Details
To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
Use case
When checking ARCDAT control operation
0 to 1023
TGT-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A C-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A C-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
8-50
8-51

TGT-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B M-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B C-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B M-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B C-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
TGT-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C M-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C M-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
8-51
8-52

TGT-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
Use case
0 to 1023
TGT-C-K3
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD)
Lv.2 Details
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
Use case
0 to 1023
SUM-A-Y2
ARCDAT scrnA Y-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
Lv.2 Details
To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-M2
ARCDAT scrnA M-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
Lv.2 Details
To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-C2
ARCDAT scrnA C-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
Lv.2 Details
To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)

To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Y-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB M-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB C-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-52
8-53

SUM-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnC Y-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)

To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC M-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Y-density differ (1/2 SPD)
current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
DLT-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/2 SPD)

alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/2 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Y-density differ (1/2 SPD)
current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B M-density differ (1/2 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-53
8-54

DLT-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/2 SPD)

alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Y-density differ (1/2 SPD)
current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C M-density differ (1/2 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C C-density differ (1/2 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
DLT-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD)

To display the difference between Bk-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bk-patch current VL(1/2SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
8-54
8-55

SGL-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bk-patch current VL(1/2SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
SGL-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnC Bk-patch current VL(1/2SPD)

To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-55
8-56

SUM-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnB Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)

To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
SUM-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnC M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)

To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Y-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-56
8-57

DLT-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/3 SPD)

alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Y-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B M-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
DLT-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD)

alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Y-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C M-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C C-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-57
8-58

SGL-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bk-patch current VL(1/3SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
SGL-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bk-patch current VL(1/3SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Bk-patch current VL(1/3SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
T-8-13
8-58
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030)
IO
Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030)
Address
bit
P004
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P005
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Delivery fan 1
Pre-reverse sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Primary transfer disengagement
sensor 1
Primary transfer disengagement
sensor 2
Reverse sensor
ITB steering sensor
Mark
bit
P006
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
Remarks
FM7
PS58
PS57
PS43
PS40
PS22
0:connect
1:ON
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:release
PS23
1:contact
PS39
PS42
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
M25
SL5
SL6
SL4
1:paper
1:paper
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:enable
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
Address
P007
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-59
Name

Fixing motor
Patch sensor (rear)
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1,2
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1,2 _half
speed
Fixing cooling fan (front),(rear)
Secondary transfer exhaust fan _
half speed
Y pre-exposure LED PCB
(front),(rear)
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB
(front),(rear)
Mark
Remarks
SL7
M21
UN47
UN48
UN49
FM1,2
FM1,2
1:ON
0:ON
1:LED_ON
1:LED_ON
1:LED_ON
1:ON
1:half speed
FM5,6
FM8
FM8
1:ON
1:ON
1:half speed
M27
UN23,24
1:enable
1:ON
UN29,30
1:ON
8-59
8
Address
bit
P008
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P009
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Waste toner Box
Waste toner Box
Front door sensor
Registration sensor
Transparency sensor
Second & third delivery door
sensor
Right door sensor
-
Mark
Remarks
UN21
UN21
UN59
UN58
UN57
UN56
PS45
PS44
PS41
PS18
PS33
UN53
UN51
PS21
1:FULL
1:bottle
0:NEW
0:NEW
0:NEW
0:NEW
0:full
0:full
1:paper
0:DOOR_OPEN
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
0:DOOR_OPEN
PS20
PS37
PS32
PS31
PS30
-
0:DOOR_OPEN
1:paper
1:ON(lightproof)
1:ON(lightproof)
1:engage
-
Address
bit
P010
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P011
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-60
Name
Delivery fan 2 _ON

Delivery fan 2 _half speed ON
Transparency sensor LED _ON
Waste toner sensor LED _ON
C pre-exposure LED PCB
(front),(rear)
M pre-exposure LED PCB
(front),(rear)
Registration motor
Multi-purpose motor
Multi-purpose feed motor
-
Mark
Remarks
FM9
FM9
UN51
UN21
M26
UN27,28
1:ON
1:half speed
0:LED_ON
1:LED_ON
1:ON
1:ON
UN25,26
1:ON
CL1
M24
M23
M19
M18
M20
-
1:ON
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
-
8-60
8
Address
bit
Name
P012
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Cassette 1 size switch

Duplex paper sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
-
P013
Mark
SW7
SW7
SW7
SW7
SW6
SW6
SW6
SW6
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW8
SW8
SW8
SW8
PS49
PS51
PS52
PS55
PS50
PS53
PS54
PS56
PS47
PS38
PS35
PS36
PS34
-
Remarks
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:ON
1:ON
1:paper
-
Address
bit
P014
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P015
8-61
Name

Mark
PS19
PS29
M16
M17
FM10
FM10
SL3
SL2
Remarks
0:DOOR_OPEN
1:lightproof
1:enable
1:enable
1:ON
1:half speed
1:ON
1:ON
8-61
8
Address
bit
Name
P016
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7

Cassette pedistal right lower door
sensor
-
P017
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:DOOR_OPEN
Address
bit
P018
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P019
8-62
Name

-
Mark
-
Remarks
1:ON
1:ON
-
8-62
8
Address
bit
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P021
Name
-
Mark
-
Remarks
-
Address
bit
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P023
8-63
Name
Mark
-
Remarks
-
8-63
8
Address
bit
Name
P024
15
14
13
12
11

Toner container inner cover sensor
(Bk)
(C)
(M)
(Y)
Toner container cam HP sensor
(Bk)
Piezo sensor (Bk)
Piezo sensor (C)
Piezo sensor (M)
Piezo sensor (Y)
-
10
9
8
7
P025
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
PS17
PS16
1:close
1:close
PS15
1:close
PS14
1:close
PS13
1:close
PS8
1:HP
PS7
PS6
PS5
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
-
1:HP
1:HP
1:HP
1:toner
1:toner
1:toner
1:toner
-
Address
bit
P026
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P027
8-64
Name
Primary transfer separation motor

Buffer pass motor
Mark
M15
M14
M3
Remarks
1:enable
1:enable
1:ON
8-64
8
Address
bit
Name
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
Deck open solenoid

Deck lifter motor
Deck pickup clutch
Deck open solenoid
Deck main motor
Deck lifter lower limit sensing
switch
Deck lifter upper limit sensor
Deck lifter position sensor
Deck feed sensor
Deck open sensing switch
Deck pickup roller release solenoid
Deck pickup sensor
Deck paper-out sensor
-
P029
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
SL2D
M2D
CL2D
SL2D
M1D
SW2D
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
0:lowerlimit
PS3D
PS4D
PS1D
SW1D
SL1D
PS6D
PS2D
-
0:upperlimit
0:paper
0:paper
1:OPEN
1:release
1:paper
1:nopaper
-
Address
bit
P030
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-65
Name
Baffer path delivery sensor

Baffer path open/close sensor
Baffer path entrance sensor
Mark
PS2
PS3
PS1
Remarks
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
T-8-14
8-65
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Color Image Reader Unit (RCON > P001 to 005)
Color Image Reader Unit (RCON > P001 to 005)

Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
Name
Original size sensor 1
-
Mark
CF1
-
Remarks
0:paper
-
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P004
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-66
Name
Scanner unit cooling fan lock
Scanner unit exhaust fan lock
DADF open/closed sensor 2
DADF open/closed sensor 1
Scanner motor_I0
Mark
FM2
FM1
SR3
SR1
CF2
M1
Remarks
1:error
1:error
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:paper
(I0:I1)=(0,0)100%(0,1)75
%(1,0)50%(1,1)25%
-
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Color Image Reader Unit (RCON > P001 to 005)
8-66
8
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Scanner motor_derection
Fan drive
Scanner motor
Scanner motor_I1
Mark
M1
FM2
M1
M1
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 (FEEDER > P001 to 007)
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 (FEEDER > P001 to 007)
Remarks
0:scan1:backscan
1:ON
1:enable
-
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
T-8-15
P002
8-67
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Paper surface sensor

Tray HP sensor
Tray open/closed sensor
AB/ Inch identification sensor
SR6
SR13
SR9
SR7
LTR-R/ LGL identification sensor
SR8
Read motor cooling fan lock

Scanner unit cooling fan lock
Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor
Original sensor
FM2
FM3
SR12
SR2
SR3
SR1
SR10
Remarks
1:upperlimit
1:HP(lowerlimit)
0:OPEN
0:LGL(LTRR),A5R1:A4R(A5
),STMTR,B6
0:A4Randsmaller,
1:LargerthanA4R
0:error
0:error
1:HP
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:OPEN
8-67
8
Address
bit
Name
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4

Disengaging home position sensor
1
Leading edge position sensor
Disengaging home position sensor
2
Post-separation sensor 3 (feeder
side)
Delay sensor
Glass shifting home position
sensor
Registration sensor
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 2
Delivery sensor
3
2
1
0
P004
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
SR17
SR18
SR19
SR20
SR15
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:HP
SR22
SR16
1:paper
1:HP
PCB2
0:paper
SR4
SR11
0:paper
0:HP
PCB3
PCB4
SR5
PCB5
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:paper
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
P006
3
2
1
0
Name
Disengagement motor 2
Disengagement motor 1
Tray lifter motor
stamp solenoid
Tray lifter motor_direction
Feed motor_direction
Read motor
Registration motor
Feed motor
Pickup motor_direction
Pickup roller unit lifter motor_
direction
Read motor cooling fan
Glass shift motor_direction
Glass shift motor
8-68
Mark
Remarks
M7
M6
M8
M8
M2
M4
M3
M2
M1
M10
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
1:ON
0:down1:up
0:nouse1:CW
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
0:nouse1:CW
0:nouse1:CW
FM2
M9
M9
1:ON
0:HP1:
1:enable
8-68
8
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Delivery motor_direction
Delivery motor
Scanner unit cooling fan
Pickup roller unit lifter motor
Mark
M5
M5
FM3
M10
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Color Image Reader Unit-F1 (FEEDER > P001 to 006)
Color Image Reader Unit-F1 (FEEDER > P001 to 006)
Remarks
0:CW1:CCW
1:enable
1:ON
1:enable
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
T-8-16
P002
8-69
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
A4R/LTRR identification sensor
SR10
Last document detection sensor

Timing sensor
Document width sensor2
Release motor HP sensor
Document length sensor 1
Document length sensor 2
SR9
SR4
SR13
SR14
SR15
SR3
SR11
SR7
SR8
Remarks
0:A4R and smaller,1:Larger
than A4R
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:HP
1:paper
1:paper
8-69
8
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
Name
Document set sensor
-
Mark
SR5
SR6
SR12
-
Remarks
0:papeer
1:OPEN
1:paper
-
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P006
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-70
Name
Mark
Fan
Pickup clutch
Registration clutch
release motor_I0
FM1
CL2
CL1
M2
release motor_I1
M2
release motor
Stamp solenoid
ADF motor_I0
M2
SL2
M1
ADF motor_I1
M1
ADF motor
ADF motor_direction
-
M1
M1
-
Remarks
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
1:enable
1:ON
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
1:enable
0:separate 1:pickup
T-8-17
8-70
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Inner Finisher-E1(SORTER>P001 to P014)
Inner Finisher-E1(SORTER>P001 to P014)

Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
Name
Entrance sensor
Gripper unit HP sensor
Gripper unit move motor_CW
Paper lever drive solenoid
Shift motor
shift roller release motor
stopper motor
Gripper open/close motor
Mark
S1
S7
M2
SOL1
M4
M5
M6
M7
Remarks
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:CW1:CCW
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
8-71
Name
Feed motor_CW
Feed motor_clock
STPmove motor_clock
STPmove motor_PWM
Feed motor_PWM
Gripper unit move motor_PWM
Additional tray clock sensor
stack tray clock sensor
stapler move HP sensor
stapler HP sensor
Mark
M3
M3
M1
M1
M3
M2
S23
S14
S10
S18
Remarks
0:CW1:CCW
1:output
1:output
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
8-71
8
Address
bit
Name
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Entrance roller release /stopper HP

sensor
Shift roller release sensor
Shift roller HP sensor
Additional tray upper/lower limit
sensor
-
P006
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
S5
0:ON1:OFF
S3
S2
S21
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P008
8-72
Name
Additional tray paper sensor

-
Mark
S22
-
Remarks
0:ON1:OFF
-
8-72
8
Address
bit
P009
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P010
Name
stack tray paper sensor
stack tray middle sensor
-
Mark
S15
S16
-
Remarks
0:nopaper1:paper
1:mid/lowlevel
-
8-73
Address
bit
Name
P011
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Processing tray sensor

Stapler safety switch
Fan2
Fan1
paper surface sensor2
paper surface sensor1
stapler edging sensor
stapler sensor
Gripper stapler connection sensor
Front cover switch
P012
Mark
S6
SW2
M9
M8
S12
S11
S19
S20
S9
SW1
Remarks
0:nopaper1:paper
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
8-73
8
Address
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P014
Name
stapler motor
Tray lift motor
-
Mark
M10
M11
-
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Staple Finisher-J1/Booklet Finisher-J1(SORTER>P001, P007 to P031)
Staple Finisher-J1/Booklet Finisher-J1(SORTER>P001, P007
Remarks
0::ENABLE1:DISABLE
0::ENABLE1:DISABLE
-
to P031)
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P007
T-8-18
8-74
Name
Tray 2 paper surface sensor 2
Front cover sensor
Tray 1 shift motor_lock
Front cover sensor
Mark
PI120
PI102
M107
PI102
Remarks
0:paper1:nopaper
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
0:OFF1:lock
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
8-74
8
Address
bit
Name
P008
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Inlet sensor
Swing guide home position sensor
Tray 1 paper surface sensor
Tray 2 shift motor_lock
Tray 1 paper sensor
P009
Mark
PI103
PI105
PI111
M108
PI112
Remarks
0:paper1:nopaper
1:HP
0:paper1:nopaper
0:OFF1:lock
0:paper1:nopaper
Address
bit
P010
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P011
Name
-
8-75
Mark
-
Remarks
-
8-75
Address
bit
Name
P012
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
Swing height sensor

Gear change home position sensor
Upper cover sensor
Rear end assist guide home
position sensor
Processing Tray sensor
Rear aligning plate home position
sensor
Front aligning plate home position
sensor
Tray 2 shift motor
Tray 2 shift motor_CW
Inlet roller separation solenoid
Entrance feed motor_I1
PI123
PI117
PI101
PI109
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
0:HP
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
0:HP
PI108
PI107
0:paper1:nopaper
0:HP
PI106
0:HP
M108
M108
SL101
M101
0:OFF1:ON
0:CW1:CCW
0:OFF1:ON
[P013>1:P013>0][0:0]:Low,
[0:1]:MID,[1:0]:High,[1:1]:M
ax
Entrance feed motor_I0
M101
4
3
2
1
P013
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
Address
bit
P014
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P015
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Tray 1 shift motor_enable

Tray 1 shift motor_CW
Tray 1 shift motor
Rear end assist motor_enable
Rear end assist motor_enable_I1
M107
M107
M107
M109
M109
Rear end assist motor_enable_I0

Rear end assist motor_enable_CW
Stapler shift motor_enable
Stack ejection motor_CW
Swing motor_ampere
Swing motor_CW
M109
M109
M105
M102
M106
M106
8-76
Remarks
0:standby1:enable
0:CW1:CCW
0:OFF1:ON
0:standby1:enable
[P014>3:P014>2][0:0]:Low,
[0:1]:MID,[1:0]:High,[1:1]:M
ax
0:CW1:CCW
0:standby1:enable
0:CW1:CCW
0:High1:Low
0:CW1:CCW
8-76
8
Address
bit
Name
P016
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Rear aligning plate motor

Rear aligning plate motor
Front aligning plate motor_ ampere
Front aligning plate motor_CW
Stapler alignment interference
sensor
Shutter home position sensor
Tray 2 paper sensor
Stapler shift home position sensor
Tray 2 paper surface sensor 1
-
P017
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
M104
M104
M103
M103
PI115
0:CW1:CCW
0:High1:Low
0:High1:Low
0:CW1:CCW
0:paper1:nopaper
PI114
PI113
PI110
PI116
-
0:paper1:nopaper
0:HP
0:HP
0:Interference
-
Address
bit
P018
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P019
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
8-77
Remarks
Stapler shift motor_CW

Buffer roller separation solenoid
Shutter clutch
Stack ejection lower roller clutch
Buffer rear end holding solenoid
1st delivery roller separation
solenoid
Stapler shift motor_I1
M105
SL102
CL101
CL102
SL104
SL103
0:CCW1:CW
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
M105
[P018>1:P018>0][0:0]:Low,
[0:1]:MID,[1:0]:High,[1:1]:M
ax
Stapler shift motor_I0

Feed path sensor
Stitcher HP sensor (rear)
Stitcher HP sensor (front)
-
M105
PI104
SW5
SW7
-
0:paper1:nopaper
1:HP
1:HP
-
8-77
8
Address
bit
Name
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Alignment plate home position

sensor
Vertical pat paper sensor
Paper pushing plate top position
sensor
Paper pushing plate home position
sensor
P021
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
PI5
1:HP
PI17
PI15
0:nopaper1:paper
0:edge
PI14
1:HP
Address
bit
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P023
Name
Feed motor_CW
-
Mark
M1
-
8-78
Remarks
0:CCW1:CW
-
8-78
8
Address
bit
Name
P024
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
No.2 paper deflecting solenoid

No.1 paper deflecting solenoid
Saddle inlet solenoid
Paper folding home position sensor
Feed motor
-
P025
Mark
SL2
SL1
SL5
PI21
M1
-
Remarks
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
-
Address
bit
P026
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P027
2
1
0
Name
Stitcher motor (rear)_CW
Staple sensor (rear)
Feed plate contact solenoid
Paper folding motor_RV
Paper positioning
plate paper sensor
Paper positioning plate home
position sensor
Tray paper sensor
8-79
Mark
Remarks
M6
SW4
SL4
M2
PI8
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:paper1:nopaper
PI7
0:HP
PI6
0:paper1:nopaper
8-79
8
Address
bit
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P029
Name
Paper pushing plate motor_EN
Paper pushing plate motor_FWM
Paper pushing plate motor_RV
Paper folding motor_FWD
Stitcher motor (rear)_CCW
Stitcher motor (front)_CW
Stitcher motor (front)_CCW
Staple sensor (front)
-
Mark
M8
M8
M8
M2
M6
M7
M7
SW6
-
Remarks
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
1:enable
-
Address
bit
P030
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P031
Name
Saddle inlet sensor
Guide home position sensor
Crescent roller phase sensor
Delivery sensor
Inlet cover sensor
-
Mark
PI22
PI13
PI12
PI11
PI9
-
8-80
Remarks
0:nopaper1:paper
1:HP
1:HP
0:paper1:nopaper
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
T-8-19
8-80
Service Mode > COPIER > IO > External 2 Hole Puncher-B2(SORTER>P013, P032 to P036, P039)
External 2 Hole Puncher-B2(SORTER>P013, P032 to P036,

P039)
Address
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P032
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Punch feed motor_enable

Punch feed motor_I1
M63
M63
Punch feed motor_I0

Punch HP sensor
-
M63
PI63
-
bit
P033
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
0:standby1:enable
[P013>3:P013>2][0:0]=Low
,[0:1]=MID,[1:0]=High,[1:1]=
Max
0:HP
-
Address
P034
Name
Punch motor_CW
Punch motor_CCW
LED PCB (Rear edge direction)
Horizontal registration HP sensor
-
8-81
Mark
M61
M61
PCB3
PI61
-
Remarks
0:ON
0:ON
0:nopaper1:paper
1:HP
-
8-81
8
Address
bit
P035
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P036
Name
Side registration motor_ampere
Side registration motor_B
Side registration motor_A
-
Mark
M62
M62
M62
-
Remarks
0:active1:keep
1:ON
1:ON
-
Address
bit
P039
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Side registration sensor1
Scrap full detector PCB
Upper door switch
Front door switch
-
8-82
Mark
PCB2
PCB4
MSW61
MSW62
PCB2
PCB3
PCB3
-
Remarks
0:paper
0:paper
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
T-8-20
8-82
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJUST
8-83
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJ-S
Lv.1 Details
ADJ-XY
ADJ-X
Lv.1 Details
Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan

To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge
position) in vertical scanning direction.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter
the value of service label.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the
trailing edge side by 0.1mm.
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y
Adj of img pstn in book mode: horz scan
To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
Lv.1 Details
direction.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Adjustment of shading position

To adjust the shading position.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the backup value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the position moves by 0.1mm.
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y-DF
Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt]
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction at DADF reading.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
STRD-POS
Adj read pstn in DADF mode: front side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the reading position at DADF reading (front side).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8-83
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

ADJ-X-MG
Lv.1 Details
Fine adj img ratio:book, vert scan [frt]

To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical
scanning direction at copyboard reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification ratio
changes by 0.01%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
%
Default value
0
ADJY-DF2
Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[bck]
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image position of back side in horizontal scanning
direction at simultaneous duplex reading.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y-MG
Fine adj img ratio:book, horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in horizontal
scanning direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the backup value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification ratio
changes by 0.1%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
8-84
CCD
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
W-PLT-X
Lv.1 Details
White level data(X) entry of white plate

the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass,
enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use case
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Caution
- Do not use this in cases other than those listed above.
- After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
1 to 9999
Default value
8271
COPIER.> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z, BW-TGT
W-PLT-Y
White level data(Y) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
service label.
1 to 9999
Default value
8735
COPIER.> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z, BW-TGT
W-PLT-Z
White level data(Z) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
service label.
1 to 9999
Default value
9418
COPIER.> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, BW-TGT
T-8-21
8-84

SH-TRGT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Shading tgt VL(B&W)[Copyboard](D-Reader)

To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Caution
service label.
1 to 2047
Default value
1126
100-RG
Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:Frt
Lv.1 Details
To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-256 to 256
Unit
line
0
Default value
100-GB
Img Sensr GB color displace crrct VL:Frt
Lv.1 Details
To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-256 to 256
Unit
line
0
Default value
8-85
DFTAR-R
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (R) [Front side]

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of
service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front),
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and
write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
Use case
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front)
1 to 2047
Default value
1159
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
DFTAR-G
Shading target value (G) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front),
Use case
1 to 2047
Default value
1189
DFTAR-B
Shading target value (B) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
(paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1,
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use case
1 to 2047
Default value
1209
8-85
8-86

MTF2-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Default value
MTF2-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front]

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
20 to 80
50
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF2-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
8-86
8-87

MTF2-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Front]
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF2-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
8-87
8-88

MTF2-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
100DF2GB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
100DF2RG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
Img Sns GB clr displc crrct VL:bck,DRead
To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back).
1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-256 to 256
line
0
Img Sns RG clr displc crrct VL:bck,DRead
To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back).
press OK key.
-256 to 256
line
0
DFCH2R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2R10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2B2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2B10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Front side]

To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper
front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data(R) [Front side]
0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data(B) [Front side]
0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
8-88
8-89

DFCH2G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CCD-CHNG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.10 data(G) [Front side]

0 to 2550
0
Scanner Unit(ppr frt) rplce flag setting
To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at
the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper front).
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front), enter 1. When
replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
value of service label.
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front)
0 to 1
0: Data at factory shipment is used.
1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper front) is
already replaced.)
0
MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Back]
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
8-89
8-90

MTF-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Back]
20 to 80
50
MTF-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
8-90
8-91

MTF-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
DFCH-R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-R10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-B2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-B10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Back side]

back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
1 to 2550
2000
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10,
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
Complex chart No.10 data (R) [Back side]
0 to 2550
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Back side]
1 to 2550
2000
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
Complex chart No.10 data (B) [Back side]
0 to 2550
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
8-91
8-92

DFCH-G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Back side]

1 to 2550
2000
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
Complex chart No.10 data (G) [Back side]
0 to 2550
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
MTF2-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-92
8-93

MTF-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
MTF-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Front]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Front]
0 to 2550
0
8-93

DFCH-K2
Lv.1 Details
Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Back]

Use case
1 to 2550
Default value
2000
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K10
DFCH-K10
Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Back]
Lv.1 Details
Use case
0 to 2550
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K2
DFTAR-BW
Shading target value (B&W) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
(paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3,
DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1209
8-94
DFTBK-G
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (G) [Back side]

service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back),
Use case
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back)
700 to 1400
Default value
1136
DFTBK-B
Shading target value (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
DFTBK-R
Shading target value (R) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1156
8-94
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

CCD-CHG2
Lv.1 Details
Scanner Unit(paper back) rplce flag set

To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at
the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper back).
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back), enter 1. When
replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
Use case
0 to 1
0: Data at factory shipment is used.
1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper back)
is already replaced.)
Default value
0
DFTBK-BW
Shading target value (B&W) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back)
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
T-8-22
IMG-REG
COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
REG-H-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-H-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-H-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-HS-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
8-95
Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan

To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel.
When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
Adj C-color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal
When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
Adj Bk-color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal
When Bk-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel or less.
When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
8-95

REG-HS-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-HS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-V-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-V-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Fine adj C write start pstn: horz scan

To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel or less.
When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
Fine adj Bk write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel.
When Bk-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
Adj Y color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the vertical
When Y-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 127
line
0
Adj C-color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the vertical
When C-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
line
0
8-96
REG-V-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-H-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-V-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-HS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Adj Bk-color write start pstn: vert scan

To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the vertical
When Bk-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
line
0
Adj M-color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal
When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
Adj M-color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the vertical
When M-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
line
0
Fine adj M write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel.
When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
press OK key.
-128 to 127
pixel
0
8-96
8-97

MAG-H
Lv.1 Details
Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio: horz scan

To adjust the standard magnification ratio in horizontal scanning
direction by increasing/decreasing the number of pixels.
The adjustment result is reflected to all colors.
All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally
changed.
Use case
When adjusting the standard magnification due to parts replacement
or environmental change, etc.
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
%
Default value
0
MAG-V
Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio: vert scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the standard magnification ratio in vertical scanning
direction by changing the speed of Photosensitive Drum, ITB and
Registration Roller.
When adjusting the standard magnification due to parts replacement
Use case
or environmental change, etc.
press OK key.
Caution
- Do not use this at the normal service.
- Be sure to perform auto color displacement correction after
adjustment.
-12 to 12
Unit
%
Default value
0
T-8-23
8-97
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
DENS
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

SGNL-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SGNL-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SGNL-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
REF-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-98
Enter Y toner dens VL: initialization

To enter the Y toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor
(Center).
When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after
RAM clear
0 to 1023
0
Enter M toner dens VL: initialization
To enter the M toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor
(Center).
RAM clear
0 to 1023
0
Enter C toner dens VL: initialization
To enter the C toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor
(Center).
RAM clear
0 to 1023
0
Y toner dens target VL entry
To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (Y) of ATR control after
RAM clear.
RAM clear
0 to 255
90(RAM clear)
REF-M
Lv.1 Details
M toner dens target VL entry

To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (M) of ATR control after
RAM clear.
Use case
RAM clear
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
90(RAM clear)
REF-C
C toner dens target VL entry
Lv.1 Details
To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (C) of ATR control after
RAM clear.
Use case
RAM clear
Caution
0 to 255
90(RAM clear)
Default value
SIGG-Y
Adj Y toner dens gain value: ATR control
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the gain value of the Y toner density target value at ATR
control.
The Y-color patch level value at the time of ATR-INIT execution is
displayed at Drum Unit initialization.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, enter the ATR-INIT value
peculiar to each drum unit.
Use case
- When identifying the cause at the occurrence of an image density
failure
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB
0 to 255
Default value
0
SIGG-M
Adj M toner dens gain value: ATR control
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the gain value of the M toner density target value at ATR
control.
The M-color patch level value at the time of ATR-INIT execution is
Use case
failure
0 to 255
Default value
0
8-98
8-99

SIGG-C
Lv.1 Details
Adj C toner dens gain value: ATR control

To adjust the gain value of the C toner density target value at ATR
control.
The C-color patch level value at the time of ATR-INIT execution is
Use case
failure
0 to 255
Default value
0
SIGG-K
Adj Bk toner dens gain value:ATR control
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the gain value of the Bk toner density target value at ATR
control.
The Bk-color patch level value at the time of ATR-INIT execution is
Use case
failure
0 to 255
Default value
0
SGNL-K
Enter Bk toner dens VL: initialization
Lv.1 Details
To enter the Bk toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor
(Center).
Use case
RAM clear
0 to 1023
Default value
0
T-SPLY-Y
[Not used]
T-SPLY-M
T-SPLY-C
T-SPLY-K
DMAX-Y
Lv.2 Details
[Not used]
[Not used]
[Not used]
Adj D-max ctrl Y-color dens target VL
An image failure might occur because the density target value of the
D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment
change.
Adjust the offset of the Y-color density target value of D-max control.
The offset is reset when D-max control (full adjustment) is executed.
Use case
When an image failure occurs due to environment change
press OK key.
Caution
- This is limited for the use of printer model.
-128 to 128
Default value
0
8-99

DMAX-M
Lv.2 Details
Adj D-max ctrl M-color dens target VL

change.
Adjust the offset of the M-color density target value of D-max control.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-128 to 128
Default value
0
DMAX-C
Adj D-max ctrl C-color dens target VL
Lv.2 Details
change.
Adjust the offset of the C-color density target value of D-max control.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-128 to 128
Default value
0
P-TG-Y
Adj of ATR control Y-color target value
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Y.
When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the
TD ratio is also changed.
Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is
smaller, and carrier adherence is alleviated when it is larger.
Use case
When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur
press OK key.
3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST>
PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times.
4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment.
Caution
Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If
you adjust the offset of the target value, fogging might get worse.
-4 to 4
Default value
0
8-100
P-TG-M
Lv.2 Details
Adj of ATR control M-color target value

To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-4 to 4
Default value
0
P-TG-C
Adj of ATR control C-color target value
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-4 to 4
Default value
0
8-100
8-101

P-TG-K
Lv.2 Details
Adj of ATR control Bk-color target value

To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-4 to 4
Default value
0
DMAX-K
Adj D-max ctrl Bk-color dens target VL
Lv.2 Details
change.
Adjust the offset of the Bk-color density target value of D-max
control.
Use case
When any image failure occurs due to environment change
press OK key.
Caution
-128 to 128
Default value
0
P-ALPHA
Adjustment of Patch Sensor alpha value
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the correction coefficient alpha value of the Patch Sensor.
The value multiplied by 1000 is displayed on the screen.
Use case
When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density
512 to 2047
Default value
1200
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> PT-LPADJ
REF-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DMLMT-HY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DMLMT-HM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DMLMT-HC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Bk toner dens target VL entry

To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (Bk) of ATR control after
RAM clear.
RAM clear
0 to 255
90(RAM clear)
Adj Y-clr charge DC voltage upper limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for Y in
D-max control.
When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control
press OK key.
2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment.
-300 to 300
V
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-LY
Adj M-clr charge DC voltage upper limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for M in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-300 to 300
V
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-LM
Adj C-clr charge DC voltage upper limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for C in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-300 to 300
V
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-LC
8-101
8-102

DMLMT-HK
Lv.2 Details
Adj Bk-clr charge DC voltage upper limit

To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for Bk in
D-max control.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-300 to 300
Unit
V
0
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-LK
DMLMT-LY
Adj Y-clr charge DC voltage lower limit
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for Y in
D-max control.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-300 to 300
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-HY
DMLMT-LM
Adj M-clr charge DC voltage lower limit
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for M in
D-max control.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-300 to 300
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-HM
DMLMT-LC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DMLMT-LK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
CONT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
CONT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Adj C-clr charge DC voltage lower limit

To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for C in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-300 to 300
V
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-HC
Adj Bk-clr charge DC voltage lower limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for Bk in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-300 to 300
V
0
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DMLMT-HK
ATR Sensor (Y) control voltage entry
To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Y).
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc.
service label.
0 to 255
V
ATR Sensor (M) control voltage entry
To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (M).
service label.
0 to 255
V
8-102
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK

CONT-C
Lv.1 Details
ATR Sensor (C) control voltage entry

To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (C).
Use case
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Unit
V
CONT-K
ATR Sensor (Bk) control voltage entry
Lv.1 Details
To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Bk).
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Unit
V
T-8-24
8-103
BLANK
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
BLANK-T
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
BLANK-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BLANK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BLANK-B
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adjustment of leading edge margin

To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm).
- When reducing the margin upon users request
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
0 to 1000
pixel
94
Adjustment of left edge margin
To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper.
0 to 1000
pixel
59
Adjustment of right edge margin
To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper.
0 to 1000
pixel
59
Adjustment of trailing edge margin
To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper.
0 to 1000
pixel
59
T-8-25
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
8-103
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
V-CONT
8-104
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

VCONT-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj of Y-color contrast potential

To adjust the contrast potential for Y.
As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by
10V.
+: Image becomes darker.
-: Image becomes lighter.
When the value is too large, paper winds around the Fixing Roller or
a transfer failure occurs.
In principle, the adjustment of the density should be performed in
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image
Quality> Density Adjustment Mode.
Use case
When adjusting the density of D-max control in the case that an
image density failure occurs
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-M, VCONT-C, VCONT-K
VCONT-M
Adj of M color contrast potential
To adjust the contrast potential for M.
Lv.2 Details
10V.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y, VCONT-M, VCONT-C
VCONT-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj of C-color contrast potential

To adjust the contrast potential for C.
10V.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
0
Default value
VCONT-K
Adj of Bk-color contrast potential
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the contrast potential Vcont for Bk.
10V.
When the value is too large, paper winds around the Fixing Belt or a
transfer failure occurs.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-104

VBACK-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj Y-color fogging removal potential

To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y.
A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment/
Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast to the
fogging removal potential is set as the fogging adjustment value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fogging removal potential
changes by 5V.
+: Fogging, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are
alleviated.
-: Coarse image, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are
alleviated.
Use case
At the occurrence of Y fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
0
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-M, VBACK-C, VBACK-K
VBACK-M
Adj M-color fogging removal potential
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M.
changes by 5V.
alleviated.
alleviated.
Use case
At the occurrence of M fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-C, VBACK-K
8-105
VBACK-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj C-color fogging removal potential

To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C.
changes by 5V.
alleviated.
alleviated.
Use case
At the occurrence of C fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
0
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-M, VBACK-K
VBACK-K
Adj Bk-color fogging removal potential
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk.
changes by 5V.
alleviated.
alleviated.
Use case
At the occurrence of Bk fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-M, VBACK-C
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> VBACK-K
8-105

PT-VCT-Y
Lv.2 Details
8-106
Adj of Y-color target contrast potntl

To adjust the Y patch target contrast potential for D-max PASCAL
control.
As the value is incremented by 1, the target contrast potential
changes by 1V.
+: Potential is increased.
-: Potential is decreased.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
The value differs according to the environment.
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-C, PT-VCT-K
PT-VCT-M
Adj of M-color target contrast potntl
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the M patch target contrast potential for D-max PASCAL
control.
changes by 1V.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-C, PT-VCT-K
PT-VCT-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj of C-color target contrast potntl

To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for D-max PASCAL
control.
changes by 1V.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-K
PT-VCT-K
Adj of Bk-color target contrast potntl
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the Bk patch target contrast potential for D-max PASCAL
control.
changes by 1V.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-C
T-8-26
8-106
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
PASCAL
8-107
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

OFST-P-Y
Lv.1 Details
Y density adj at test print reading

To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto
gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-128 to 128
Default value
According to the setting at shipment
M density adj at test print reading
OFST-P-M
To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
C density adj at test print reading
OFST-P-C
To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
OFST-P-K
Lv.1 Details
Bk density adj at test print reading

To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
T-8-27
8-107
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR
COLOR
8-108
COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR

ADJ-Y
Lv.1 Details
Y color balance adjustment

To adjust the default value of the color balance for Y when the
density of Y varies between machines.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large,
a transfer failure and/or a fixing failure occurs.
Use case
Upon users request (to alleviate the variation of the density between
machines)
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
ADJ-M
M-color balance adjustment
To adjust the default value of the color balance for M when the
Lv.1 Details
density of M varies between machines.
Use case
machines)
press OK key.
-8 to 8
Default value
0
ADJ-C
C-color balance adjustment
To adjust the default value of the color balance for C when the
Lv.1 Details
density of C varies between machines.
Use case
machines)
press OK key.
-8 to 8
Default value
0
ADJ-K
Lv.1 Details
Bk-color balance adjustment

To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the
density of Bk varies between machines.
Use case
machines)
press OK key.
-8 to 8
Default value
0
OFST-Y
Adj of Y bright area dens&color balance
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Y.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly
because the density of a document is dark and increase the value
when the density of a document is light.
Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed
correctly and a fogging-like image appears.
This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image
Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color
Mismatch in user mode.
Use case
- When the background of a document cannot be read correctly

- When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly
and a fogging-like image appears
press OK key.
- 32 to 32
Default value
0
8-108

OFST-M
Lv.1 Details
Adj of M bright area dens&color balance

To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M.
Use case
press OK key.
- 32 to 32
Default value
0
OFST-C
Adj of C bright area dens&color balance
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the bright area density and color balance of C.
Use case
press OK key.
- 32 to 32
Default value
0
8-109
OFST-K
Lv.1 Details
Adj Bk bright area dens&color balance

To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
- 32 to 32
Default value
0
LD-OFS-Y
Color balance adj of Y low dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
LD-OFS-M
Color balance adj of M low dens area
Lv.2 Details
To
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
8-109

LD-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Color balance adj of C low dens area

To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
LD-OFS-K
Color balance adj of Bk low dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
MD-OFS-Y
Color balance adj of Y mid dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
0
Default value
8-110
MD-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Color balance adj of M mid dens area

To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
MD-OFS-C
Color balance adj of C mid dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
MD-OFS-K
Color balance adj of Bk mid dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
0
Default value
8-110

HD-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Color balance adj of Y high dens area

To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
HD-OFS-M
Color balance adj of M high dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
HD-OFS-C
Color balance adj of C high dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
0
Default value
HD-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PL-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PL-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PL-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-111
Color balance adj of Bk high dens area

To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of Y low dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of M low dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of C low dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
8-111

PL-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PM-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PM-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PM-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Clr blnce adj of Bk low dens area:PDL

To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of Y mid dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of M mid dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of C mid dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
8-112
PM-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PH-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PH-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PH-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area:PDL

To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of Y high dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of M high dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of C high dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
8-112
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

PH-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Clr blnce adj of Bk high dens area:PDL

To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk at PDL
print.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
T-8-28
8-113
HV-PRI
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
DIS-TGY
Lv.2 Details
Discharge crrnt ctrl Y tgt crrnt:1/1SPD

To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon discharging
current control for plain paper at 1/1 speed.
Use case
When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>IOFSTAC-Y
DIS-TGM
Discharge crrnt ctrl M tgt crrnt:1/1SPD
To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharging
Lv.2 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTAC-M
DIS-TGC
Discharge crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt:1/1SPD
To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharging
Lv.2 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTAC-C
8-113

DIS-TGK
Lv.2 Details
Discharge crrnt ctrl Bk tgt crrnt:1/1SPD

To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon discharging
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
0
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTAC-K
DIS-TGY2
Dischg crrnt ctrl Y tgt crrnt:1/2,1/3SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon discharging
current control for plain paper at 1/2 and 1/3 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTACY2
DIS-TGM2
Dischg crrnt ctrl M tgt crrnt:1/2,1/3SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharging
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTACM2
8-114
DIS-TGC2
Lv.2 Details
Dischg crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt:1/2,1/3SPD

To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharging
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
0
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTACC2
DIS-TGK2
Dischg crrnt ctrl BKtgt crrnt:1/2,1/3SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon discharging
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTACK2
OFSTAC-Y
Adj Y charge AC current (1/1 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for Y.
As the value is incremented by 1, the current value is increased by
20 micro A.
Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value
when the density is high or a spotted image occurs.
- At the occurrence of an image density failure
Use case
- At the occurrence of a spotted image
press OK key.
Caution
- Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
- If the value is too large, the life of the Photosensitive Drum
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGY
8-114

OFSTAC-M
Lv.1 Details
Adj M charge AC current (1/1 speed)

To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for M.
20 micro A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
0
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGM
OFSTAC-C
Adj C charge AC current (1/1 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for C.
20 micro A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGC
8-115
OFSTAC-K
Lv.1 Details
Adj Bk charge AC current (1/1 speed)

To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for Bk.
20 micro A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
0
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGK
OFSTACY2
Adj Y charge AC current (1/2 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for Y at 1/2 speed.
As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 50 micro
A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGY2
8-115
8-116

OFSTACM2
Lv.1 Details
Adj M charge AC current (1/2 speed)

To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for M at 1/2 speed.
A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
0
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGM2
OFSTACC2
Adj C charge AC current (1/2 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for C at 1/2 speed.
A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGC2
OFSTACK2
Adj Bk charge AC current (1/2 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC current for Bk at 1/2 speed.
A.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGK2
T-8-29
8-116
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
HV-TR
8-117
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

1TR-TGY
Lv.2 Details
Adj of prmry trns ATVC Y target current

To adjust the target current for the Y-color primary transfer current.
Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs with
Y-color.
Decrease the value when Y-color fogging occurs (especially in the 94
mm portion of the image leading edge).
Use case
When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGM
Adj of prmry trns ATVC M target current
To adjust the target current for the M-color primary transfer current.
Lv.2 Details
M-color.
Decrease the value when M-color fogging occurs (especially in the
94 mm portion of the image leading edge).
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGC
Adj of prmry trns ATVC C target current
To adjust the target current for the C-color primary transfer current.
Lv.2 Details
C-color.
Decrease the value when C-color fogging occurs (especially in the
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGK1
Lv.2 Details
Pry trns ATVC Bk target current:full clr

To adjust the target current for the Bk-color primary transfer current.
Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs with Bkcolor.
Decrease the value when Bk-color fogging occurs (especially in the
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
2TR-N1
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 1st,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of plain paper 1
in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
When transfer failure occurs on an image, adjust the value in the -30
to 30 (-900 to 900V) range in increments of 10 (30V).
When white dots occur on an image, the image failure can be
alleviated by adjusting the value in the -100 to -10 (-3000 to -300V)
range in increments of 10 (30V). However, if the value is too small,
Use case
When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to conditions
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-N2
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 2nd,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of plain paper 1
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-117

2TR-P1
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 1st,L-hmdy

To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of postcard in
secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-P2
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 2nd,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of postcard in
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-H1
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 1st,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of heavy paper 1
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-118
2TR-H2
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 2nd,L-hmdy

To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-UH1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-UH2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-118

2TR-N12
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 1st,N-hmdy

in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-N22
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 2nd,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-H12
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 1st,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-119
2TR-H22
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 2nd,N-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-UH12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-UH22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-119

2TR-P12
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 1st,N-hmdy

secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-P22
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 2nd,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-N13
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 1st,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-120
2TR-N23
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 2nd,H-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-H13
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 1st,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-H23
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 2nd,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-120

2TR-UH13
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-UH23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-P13
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 1st,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-121
2TR-P23
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 2nd,H-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-O1
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: transp, L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for transparency in secondary
transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-O12
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: transp, N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-121

2TR-O13
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: transp, H-hmdy

transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-HN2
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 2nd,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy plain
paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-N2
1TR-TGKT
Pry trns ATVC Bk target current: 1-clr
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current for the Bk-color primary transfer current.
Use case
When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in black
mode
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
0
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 1TR-TGY, 1TR-TGM, 1TR-TGC
8-122
2TR-T1
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 1st,L-hmdy

To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper in
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each
time.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-T2
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 2nd,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of thin paper in
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-122

2TR-T12
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 1st,N-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-T22
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 2nd,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-123
2TR-T13
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 1st,H-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-T23
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 2nd,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
8-123

2TR-R1
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 1st,L-hmdy

To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of recycled paper
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-R2
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 2nd,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of recycled
paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-124
2TR-R12
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 1st,N-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-R22
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 2nd,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-R13
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 1st,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-124

2TR-R23
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 2nd,H-hmdy

paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-HN1
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 1st,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-125
2TR-HN12
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 1st,N-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-HN22
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 2nd,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
2TR-HN13
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 1st,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-125

2TR-HN23
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 2nd,H-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-SH1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-H1
8-126
2TR-SH2
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-SH12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-126

2TR-SH22
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-SH13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-E1
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 1st,L-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of an envelope in
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-P1
8-127
2TR-E2
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 2nd,L-hmdy

To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of an envelope
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-E12
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 1st,N-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-127

2TR-E22
Lv.1 Details
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 2nd,N-hmdy

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-E13
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 1st,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-E23
Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 2nd,H-hmdy
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
8-128
2TR-SH23
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
Default value
0
2TR-OFF
Uniform adj sec trn ATVC ppr allot voltg
Lv.1 Details
To uniformly adjust paper allotted voltage in secondary transfer ATVC
control regardless of paper type, 1st/2nd side or environment.
Use case
If similar symptoms occur regardless of the conditions, adjust the
secondary transfer bias.
press OK key.
-128 to 127
Unit
V
0
Default value
1TR-TGY2
Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current for the Y-color primary transfer current at
1/2 speed.
Y-color.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-128

1TR-TGM2
Lv.2 Details
Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed

To adjust the target current for the M-color primary transfer current at
1/2 speed.
M-color.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGC2
Adj C Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current for the C-color primary transfer current at
1/2 speed.
C-color.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
0
Default value
1TR-TK12
Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1-clr, 1/2SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current for the Bk-color primary transfer current
in single color mode at 1/2 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-129
1TR-TGY3
Lv.2 Details
Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed

To adjust the target current for the Y-color primary transfer current at
1/3 speed.
Y-color.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGM3
Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current for the M-color primary transfer current at
1/3 speed.
M-color.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
0
Default value
1TR-TGC3
Adj C Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current for the C-color primary transfer current at
1/3 speed.
C-color.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-129
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

1TR-TK13
Lv.2 Details
Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1-clr, 1/3SPD

in single color mode at 1/3 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TK42
Bk PryTrn ATVC tgt crrnt:full clr,1/2SPD
Lv.2 Details
in full color mode at 1/2 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
0
Default value
1TR-TK43
Bk PryTrn ATVC tgt crrnt:full clr,1/3SPD
Lv.2 Details
in full color mode at 1/3 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-130
FEED-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
REGIST
Lv.1 Details
Adj of registration start timing: Plain

To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor in the case of
plain paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of
paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves
upward.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves
downward.)
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-C1
Cassette 1 write start pstn in horz scan
To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 1. (Paper width is
320 mm or smaller.)
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
If the paper width is larger than 320 mm, execute mechanical
adjustment.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
T-8-30
8-130

ADJ-C2
Lv.1 Details

320 mm or smaller.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
adjustment.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
ADJ-C3
Lv.1 Details
320 mm or smaller.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
adjustment.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
8-131
ADJ-C4
Lv.1 Details

320 mm or smaller.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
adjustment.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
ADJ-MF
Write start pstn in horz scan: MP tray
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray. (Paper
width is 320 mm or smaller.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
adjustment.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
8-131

ADJ-DK
Lv.1 Details
Paper Deck write start pstn in horz scan

direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck. (Paper width is
320 mm or smaller.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
adjustment.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
ADJ-C1RE
Write start pstn in horz scan: Cst1,2nd
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the
horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette
1.
Use case
press OK key.
-55 to 55
Unit
mm
0
Default value
8-132
ADJ-C2RE
Lv.1 Details

2.
Use case
press OK key.
-55 to 55
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-C3RE
Lv.1 Details
3.
Use case
press OK key.
-55 to 55
Unit
mm
0
Default value
8-132

ADJ-C4RE
Lv.1 Details

4.
Use case
press OK key.
-55 to 55
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-DKRE
Write start pstn in horz scan:P-Deck,2nd
Lv.1 Details
horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Paper
Deck.
Use case
press OK key.
-55 to 55
Unit
mm
0
Default value
8-133
ADJ-MFRE
Lv.1 Details
Write start pstn in horz scan:MP Tr, 2nd

horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multipurpose Tray.
Use case
press OK key.
-55 to 55
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-THCK
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 1/2 speed
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON
the Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper.
upward.)
downward.)
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-OHT
Rgst start timing adj: Transparency
Lv.1 Details
the Registration Motor when feeding transparency.
upward.)
downward.)
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-133

REG-DUP1
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start timing adj: Plain, 2nd side

the Registration Motor when feeding the second side of plain paper.
upward.)
downward.)
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-DUP2
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 2nd side
Lv.1 Details
the Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper.
upward.)
downward.)
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LP-FEED1
Cassette pre-rgst arch amount: Plain
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain
paper from the cassette.
As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-134
LP-MULT1
Lv.1 Details
MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain

paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LP-DUP1
Duplex pre-rgst arch amount: Plain
Lv.1 Details
paper in duplex mode.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
REG-SPD
Speed adjustment of Registration Motor
Lv.1 Details
To adjust 1/1 speed of the Registration Motor.
As the value is incremented by 1, the speed is increased by 0.2%.
+: The speed is increased.
-: The speed is decreased.
As the value is reduced, blur image around 40 to 45 mm of the
trailing edge is alleviated.
Use case
When blue image occurs around 40 to 45 mm of the trailing edge
press OK key.
-5 to 5
Unit
%
Default value
0
T-8-31
8-134
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
CST-ADJ
8-135
MISC
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width

To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION>
CST> A4R.
Use case
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When registering a new value
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
MF-A6R
Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width
To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
Lv.1 Details
CST> A6R.
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
MF-A4
Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width
To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
Lv.1 Details
CST> A4.
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
SEG-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
K-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-EN
Lv.2 Details
T-8-32
Use case
Default value
Set criteria for text/photo: front side

To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map
mode.
As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo
document, and as the value is smaller, the original is more likely
judged as a text document.
When copy image area is judged incorrectly
press OK key.
Do not use this at the normal service. Take necessary action in
accordance with the instructions from the QA Center.
-4 to 4
0
Set criteria for black text: front side
To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing.
As the value is larger, the text tends to be judged as black.
When preferring the text to be judged as black
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front
To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a color document.
When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Set judgment area in ACS mode:front
To set the judgment area in ACS mode.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode
press OK key.
-2 to 2
1
8-135

ACS-CNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-EN2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-CNT2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
REOS-PG
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front

To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color
presence in ACS mode.
When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the
color presence in ACS mode
press OK key.
-2 to 2
0
Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode
To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading.
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading
press OK key.
-2 to 2
1
Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF
presence in ACS mode at DADF reading.
When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the
color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading
press OK key.
-2 to 2
0
Set Reos processing coeffct at 1200dpi
To set an optimal processing coefficient for 1200dpi print.
Print PG of the type 55 in COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE, check the
images in the 4 areas of this PG, and specify the number of the area
in which the character proportion and line width become optimum in
the case of PDL1200 dpi setting.
After the setting is done, output the vertical and horizontal patterns
with 3 dots and 10 spaces, which are the same as the PG above,
in 1200 dpi, and confirm that the result is the same as the specified
area.
1) Enter the setting value and press OK key.
0 to 4
2
COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE
8-136
SEG-ADJ3
Lv.1 Details
Set criteria for text/photo: back side

To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map
mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo
document, and as the value is smaller, the original is more likely
judged as a text document.
Use case
When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/
Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-4 to 4
Default value
0
K-ADJ3
Set Bk text jdgmt stdrd: back side
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
Use case
When preferring the text to be judged as black (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
ACS-ADJ3
Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:back
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a color document.
Use case
When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode (back side
at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-136
8-137

ACS-EN3
Lv.2 Details
Set judgment area in ACS mode:back

To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading
with 1 path).
Use case
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
1
ACS-CNT3
Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:back
Lv.2 Details
presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
Use case
When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color
presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
0
SH-ADJ
Adjustment of sharpness: front side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the sharpness of the images which are set in the user
mode.
- Image to be read in the copyboard reading mode
- Image on the first side of a document to be read in the reversepath duplex stream reading mode
- Image on the first side of a document to be read in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too
large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on
the first side is stronger than the second side and increase the value
when it is weaker.
When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Use case
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ2
SH-ADJ2
Lv.1 Details
Adjustment of sharpness: back side

To adjust the sharpness of images on the second side of a
document, which is set in the user mode, in the 1-path duplex stream
reading mode.
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too
large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on the
first side is stronger than the second side, and increase the value
when it is weaker.
When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Use case
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ
T-8-33
8-137
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
EXP-LED
8-138
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED

PR-EXP-Y
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Y Pre-exposure LED current

To set the current of the Pre-exposure LED (Y).
Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost.
Decrease the value when potential is not applied well.
- When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct)
Use case
- When potential is not applied well
Caution
0 to 3
4 to 15: Not used
Unit
uA
Default value
1
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y
PR-EXP-M
Setting of M Pre-exposure LED current
To set the current of the Pre-exposure LED (M).
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
0 to 3
4 to 15: Not used
Unit
uA
Default value
1
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-M
PR-EXP-C
Setting of C Pre-exposure LED current
Lv.2 Details
To set the current of the Pre-exposure LED (C).
Use case
Caution
0 to 3
4 to 15: Not used
Unit
uA
Default value
1
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-C
PR-EXP-K
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Bk Pre-exposure LED current

To set the current of the Pre-exposure LED (Bk).
Use case
Caution
0 to 3
4 to 15: Not used
Unit
uA
Default value
1
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-K
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
T-8-34
8-138
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
FUNCTION
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
INSTALL
STIR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
STIR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
STIR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
STIR-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
STIR-4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
8-139
Stirring of Y-color developer

To stir developer in the Y Developing Assembly.
- At installation of the machine
- When an image failure occurs
Select the item, and then press OK key.
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
60 sec(C5255/5250), 90 sec(C5240/5235)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-K, STIR-4
Stirring of M-color developer
To stir developer in the M Developing Assembly.
60 sec(C5255/5250), 90 sec(C5240/5235)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-C, STIR-K, STIR-4
Stirring of C-color developer
To stir developer in the C Developing Assembly.
60 sec(C5255/5250), 90 sec(C5240/5235)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-K, STIR-4
Stirring of Bk-color developer
To stir developer in the Bk Developing Assembly.
60 sec(C5255/5250), 90 sec(C5240/5235)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-4
Stirring of all color developer
To stir developer in the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors (Y/M/C/
Bk).
60 sec(C5255/5250), 90 sec(C5240/5235)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-K
INIT-Y
INIT-M
INIT-C
INIT-K
STRD-POS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
[Not used]
[Not used]
[Not used]
[Not used]
Scan position auto adj in DADF mode
To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically.
At DADF installation/uninstallation
1) Set a paper for stream reading position adjustment, and then
close the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRDPOS in the service label.
Caution
Write the adjusted value in the service label.
At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
10 sec
Required time
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS
CARD
Card number setting
Lv.1 Details
To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards
specified by CARD-RNG can be used.
Use case
- At installation of the Card Reader
- After replacing the HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key.
Caution
The card management information (department ID and password) is
initialized.
1 to 2001
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG (LEVEL2)
KEY
ON/OFF of management key function
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to enable or disable the management key function.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Default value
8-139

INISET-Y
Lv.1 Details
Exe of Y Dev Assy initial install mode

To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of
the Y Developing Assembly.
1. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly
2. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor
3. Secondary transfer ATVC control
4. Patch light intensity correction
5. Background correction
6. Discharge current control
7. Primary transfer ATVC control
8. Initialization of the Patch Sensor
9. Auto registration
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
12. ARCDAT-Lite (creation of target)
13. Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Roller twice
14. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly
Use case
When replacing the Y Developing Assembly
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
- When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly
of other color, do not use this item.
During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination:
OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Required time
155 sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-K,
INISET-4
8-140
INISET-M
Lv.1 Details
Exe of M Dev Assy initial install mode

the M Developing Assembly.
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use case
When replacing the M Developing Assembly
Caution
Required time
155 sec
INISET-4
8-140

INISET-C
Lv.1 Details
Exe of C Dev Assy initial install mode

the C Developing Assembly.
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use case
When replacing the C Developing Assembly
Caution
Required time
155 sec
INISET-4
AINR-OFF
[Not used]
E-RDS
Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function.
Use case
When using Embedded-RDS
Caution
Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
RGW-ADR as a set.
0 to 1
0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.)
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COMLOG, RGW-ADR
RGW-PORT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
COM-TEST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
COM-LOG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
RGW-ADR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-141
Set port number of Sales Cos server

To set the port number of the sales companys server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
RGW-ADR as a set.
1 to 65535
443
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG,
RGW-ADR
Dis connect result w/ Sales Cos server
To display the result of the connection test with the sales companys
server.
RGW-ADR as a set.
During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK,
When connection is failed: NG
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG,
RGW-ADR
Dis connect error w/ Sales Cos server
To display error information when the connection with the sales
companys server failed.
Display only
RGW-ADR as a set.
Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128
characters)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST,
RGW-ADR
URL setting of Sales Companys server
To set the URL of the sales companys server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
1) Select the URL.
2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
- Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
- Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
RGW-ADR as a set.
URL
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST,
COM-LOG
8-141

CNT-DATE
Lv.1 Details
Set counter send start date to SC server

To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter
information to the sales companys server.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended
function is available.
Use case
When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available
YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
Default value
000000000000
CNT-INTV
Set counter send interval to SC server
Lv.1 Details
To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales
companys server in a unit of one hour.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended
function is available.
Use case
- When restarting potential control after execution of COPIER>
OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT
- When the D-max control condition is changed
1 to 168 (=1 week)
Unit
hour
Default value
24
8-142
INISET-4
Lv.1 Details
All color Dev Assy initial instal mode

the Developing Assemblies of all colors.
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use case
- At installation
- When replacing the Developing Assemblies of all colors
Caution
- Use this item only when replacing Developing Assemblies of 4
colors simultaneously.
Required time
155 sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-C,
INISET-K
8-142

INISET-K
Lv.1 Details
Exe of Bk Dev Assy initial instal mode

the Bk Developing Assembly.
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use case
When replacing the Bk Developing Assembly
Caution
Required time
155 sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-C,
INISET-K
BRWS-ACT
ON/OFF of service browser
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of service browser.
ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power
switch is turned OFF/ON after execution.
If connection with the UGW server is successful, OK! is displayed.
If NG! is displayed, execute a communication test using COMTEST.
The setting is enabled after reboot. Whether the service browser is
ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWSSTS (1: ON, 2: OFF).
Use case
- When using the service browser
- At operation check
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot,
be sure to check the usage status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER>
BRWS-STS.
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-TEST
COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS
8-143
CDS-CTL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set country/area when using CDS

To set country/area to enable CDS.
When enabling CDS
Country/area set in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG, CA
(Canada), LA (Latin America) and HK (Hong Kong)
Default value
The value differs according to the location.
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
HD-CRYP
Exe HDD Encrypt Board ini install mod
Lv.1 Details
the HDD Encryption Board.
By turning OFF the main power switch after execution, the HDD
Encryption Board can be installed.
Use case
At installation of the HDD Encryption Board
RDSHDPOS
Auto adj of Reader shading position
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the shading position automatically.
When replacing the unit
Use case
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Required time
10 sec
BIT-SVC
ON/OFF of Web Service for eRDS
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of Web Service for eRDS. When OFF is set,
authentication information from eRDS cannot be obtained.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0:OFF 1:ON
1
Default value
T-8-35
8-143
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
CCD
8-144
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

DF-WLVL1
Lv.1 Details
White level adj in book mode: color

To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2
DF-WLVL2
White level adj in DADF mode: color
To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting
Lv.1 Details
the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B,
DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B
DF-LNR
Deriving of DADF front/back linearity
To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics in the use of
Lv.1 Details
DADF based on the scanning data of the DADF complex chart (No. 2,
No. 10).
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the readers service label. (under COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD)
DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2,
DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2,
DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10,
DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
MTF-CLC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DF-WLVL3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
DF-WLVL4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
BW-TGT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Deriving of MTF filter coefficient

To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the
MTF value of the DADF complex chart.
1) Enter the value of the readers service label. (under COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD)
MTF-MXX, SXX, MTR2-MXX, SXX
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 to M12, MTF-S1 to S12,
MTF2-M1 to M12, MTF2-S1 to S12
White level adj in book mode (B&W)
To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-BW
White level adj in DADF mode (B&W)
To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting
the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
1) Set paper on the DADF.
Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTBKBW
Set of B&W shading target value
After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set,
read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading
target value.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z.
None
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z, SH-TRGT
T-8-36
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
8-144
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER
LASER
8-145
COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER
COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER

LD-ADJ-Y
Lv.2 Details
Return Y Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn

When Y-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
than estimation, the Image Skew Correction Motor (Y) is locked,
and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color
displacement correction control is executed. This item places the
Image Skew Correction Motor (Y) to the center position in such
cases.
Use case
When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit to identify the failure position
Caution
After opening and closing the door during operation, execute the
service mode again even if OK! is displayed.
Required time
10 sec
LD-ADJ-M
Return M Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn
When M-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
Lv.2 Details
than estimation, the Image Skew Correction Motor (M) is locked,
Image Skew Correction Motor (M) to the center position in such
cases.
Use case
Caution
10 sec
Required time
LD-ADJ-C
Return C Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn
When C-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
Lv.2 Details
than estimation, the Image Skew Correction Motor (C) is locked,
Image Skew Correction Motor (C) to the center position in such
cases.
Use case
Caution
Required time
10 sec
LD-ADJ-K
Lv.2 Details
Return Bk Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn

When Bk-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
than estimation, the Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk) is locked,
Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk) to the center position in such
cases.
Use case
Caution
Required time
10 sec
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER
T-8-37
8-145
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
DPC
8-146
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC

DRMRSETY
Lv.1 Details
Forcible exe of Y Drum replacement mode

To execute the same operation as warm-up rotation forcibly.
At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according
to Y drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
control and drum durability are reset.
Use case
- When detection of the Drum Unit replacement has failed
- When installing a Drum Unit used in other machine for a while as a
dummy unit and then using it continuously
When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled
automatically after execution.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item only when installing a Drum Unit used
in other machine for a while as a dummy unit and then using it
continuously. Be sure not to execute this item when temporarily using
a dummy unit for checking.
None
Required time
2 min
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETM,
DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
DRMRSETM
Forcible exe of M Drum replacement mode
Lv.1 Details
to M drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
Use case
Caution
None
Required time
2 min
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETY,
DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
DRMRSETC
Lv.1 Details
Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode

to C drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
Use case
Caution
None
2 min
Required time
DRMRSETM, DRMRSETK
DRMRSETK
Forcible exe of Bk Drum replacement mode
Lv.1 Details
to Bk drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
Use case
Caution
None
2 min
Required time
DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
T-8-38
8-146
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
CST
8-147
CLEANING
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width

To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so
that it fits the paper width.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R
MF-A6R
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width
To register the standard value of A6R paper width (105 mm) on the
Lv.1 Details
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so
that it fits the paper width.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R
MF-A4
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width
To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the
Lv.1 Details
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that
it fits the paper width.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4
DEVL-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Cleaning of Developing Assembly

To clean the Developing Assembly by forcibly consuming deteriorated
toner.
Administrator executes the operation.
Use case
When low density, etc. occurs after operating in a low duty and high
humidity environment for a long time
2TR-CLN
Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
To execute bias cleaning after transferring toner to the Secondary
Lv.1 Details
Transfer Outer Roller.
Soil adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is removed.
Use case
- When the backside of the paper is soiled by the Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller
- When contacting with the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller at the
time of jam processing, etc.
Exe toner application to Sec Trns Roller
TNR-COAT
To apply Y-color toner onto the surface of the Secondary Transfer
Lv.1 Details
Outer Roller which is a service part when replacing the roller to a
new one.
Adhesion of substance leaking from the new Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller to the ITB can be prevented.
Use case
When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
T-8-39
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
T-8-40
8-147
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
8-148
FIXING
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
NIP-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Check of fixing nip width

To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur.
Use case
- When replacing the fixing-related parts (Fixing Roller, Pressure
Roller)
- When a fixing failure occurs
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4/LTR plain paper (75 to 90g/m2) on the Multi-purpose tray.
2) Select the Multi-purpose tray, and then press OK key.
Printing is started, and a sheet is automatically stopped at the fixing
nip (10 seconds) and then is automatically delivered.
3) Measure the nip width.
T-8-41
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
8-148
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
PANEL
PART-CHK
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
LCD-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LED-OFF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
KEY-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TOUCHCHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-149
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
Check of LCD Panel dot missing

To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the
Control Panel.
When replacing the LCD Panel
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black,
red, green and blue.
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.
Check of Control Panel LED
To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order.
3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking.
COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF
Termination of Control Panel LED check
To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel.
During execution of LED-CHK
None
COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK
Check of key input
To check the key input on the Control Panel.
1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking.
Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel
To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control
Panel.
2) Press the nine + keys in sequence.
T-8-42
CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Specification of operation Clutch

To specify the Clutch to operate.
When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Enter the value, and then press OK key.
1 to 6
1: Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Clutch (CL1)
2: Toner Supply Clutch (Y) (CL2)
3: Toner Supply Clutch (M) (CL3)
4: Toner Supply Clutch (C) (CL4)
5: Toner Supply Clutch (Bk) (CL5)
6: Not used
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON
CL-ON
Operation check of Clutch
To start operation check of the Clutch specified by CL.
Lv.1 Details
During operation, ON/OFF is repeated with an interval of 3 seconds.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Drive the ITB and Drum (COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK>
MTR > 13)
3) Check the gear of the Transfer Cleaning Assembly.
Required time
1 min
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL
Specification of operation Fan
FAN
To specify the Fan to operate.
Lv.1 Details
Use case
When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Adj/set/operate method Enter the value, and then press OK key.
1 to 10
1: Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1)
2: Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2)
3: Not used
4: Process Cartridge Fan (Rear) (FM4)
5: Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM5)
6: Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM6)
7: Delivery Fan 1 (FM7)
8: Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan (FM8)
9: Delivery Fan 2 (FM9)
10: Process Cartridge Fan (Front) (FM10)
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN-ON
8-149

FAN-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
Operation check of Fan

To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN.
When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
1 min
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN
MTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-150
Specification of operation Motor

To specify the Motor to operate.
When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Be sure not to operate M1, M14, and M22 (with *1 and *2 marks)
unless it is necessary.
1 to 28
1: Image Skew Correction Motor (Y) (M31) *1
2: Image Skew Correction Motor (M) (M32)
3: Image Skew Correction Motor (C) (M33)
4: Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk) (M34)
5: Developing Motor (Y) (M5)
6: Developing Motor (M) (M6)
7: Developing Motor (C) (M7)
8: Developing Motor (Bk) (M8)
9: Toner Container Motor (Y) (M9)
10: Toner Container Motor (M) (M10)
11: Toner Container Motor (C) (M11)
12: Toner Container Motor (Bk) (M12)
13: Drum Motors of all colors (M1 to M4), ITB Motor (M13) *4
14: ITB Displacement Control Motor (M14) *2
15: Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor (M15) *3
16: Cassette 1 Pickup Motor (M16)
17: Cassette 2 Pickup Motor (M17)
18: Multi-purpose Tray Motor (M18)
19: Registration Motor (M19)
20: Duplex Feed Motor (M20)
21: Fixing Motor (M21) *2
22: Not used
23: First & Second Delivery Motor (M23)
24: Reverse Roller Motor (M24)
25: Third Delivery Motor (M25)
26: Waste Toner Stirring Motor (M26)
27: Shutter Motor (M27) *3
28: Laser Shutter Motor (M28) *3
*1: Do not use this because it is the reference for operation of other
motors.
*2: Do not use this; otherwise, it may cause damage.
*3: Installation/uninstallation only. (If it is operated, it may cause
damage.)
*4: The 5 motors operate simultaneously.
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON
8-150
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
Operation check of Motor

To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR.
The operation automatically stops after operation of 5 seconds.
Use case
When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Caution
While the Toner Container Drive Motor is active, be sure to remove
the Toner Container. Otherwise, toner leakage may occur in the
machine.
Required time
1 min
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR
SL
Specification of operation solenoid
Lv.1 Details
To specify the Solenoid to operate.
When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Use case
1 to 9
1: Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL1)
2: Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid (SL2)
3: Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid (SL3)
4: Multi-purpose Tray Lifting Solenoid (SL4)
5: First Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5)
6: Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL6)
7: Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL7)
8 and 9: Not used
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON
SL-ON
Operation check of solenoid
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL.
The operation stops after ON for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON
for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON for 0.5 sec.
Use case
When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Required time
1 min
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL
T-8-43
CLEAR
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
ERR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
JAM-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERR-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PWD-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-151
Clear of error code

To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719).
At error occurrence
RAM clear of DC Controller PCB
To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
- Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before
execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value.
- The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
None
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB
To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB.
When clearing RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
OFF/ON.
None
Clear of jam log
To clear the jam log.
When clearing the jam log
None
Clear of error code log
To clear the error code log.
When clearing the error code log
Clear of system administrator password
To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user
mode.
When clearing the password of the system administrator
None
8-151

ADRS-BK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Clear of address book

To clear the address book data.
When clearing the address book data
Caution
The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is
turned OFF/ON.
None
CNT-MCON
Clear of Main Controller service counter
Lv.1 Details
To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB.
Use case
When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller
PCB
None
COPIER> COUNTER
CNT-DCON
Clear of DC Controller service counter
Lv.1 Details
To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller
PCB
OPTION
Clear of service mode setting VL(OPTION)
Lv.1 Details
To return the value specified in service mode (OPTION) to the default
value (value at the time of RAM clear).
Caution
- This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB, DC
Controller PCB and Reader Controller PCB.
None
8-152
MMI
Lv.1 Details
Clear of user mode setting value

To clear the user mode setting values (excluding values for Control
Panel, common settings, and FAX).
- Common Settings
- Timer Settings
- Adjustment/Cleaning
- Report Output
- System Settings
- Copy Settings
- Communications Settings
- Printer Settings
Use case
When clearing various setting values of user mode
Caution
The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
None
MN-CON
RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board
Lv.1 Details
To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board.
All data on the SRAM Board is initialized.
Use case
When clearing RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board
The machine is automatically rebooted.
Caution
- Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Preferences),
Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination,
Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. are deleted.
- Inform the user that all images in Inbox will be deleted and get
approval for it.
- Since the file management information is initialized, images on the
HDD cannot be read.
OFF/ON.
- If MN-CON is executed while a login application other than Default
Authentication is activated, any symptom occurs. (e.g. The login
screen is not displayed.) In this case, switch the login application to
Default Authentication once so that it returns to normal state.
8-152

CARD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Clear of card ID-related data

To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
When clearing the data related to the card ID
Caution
The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
CA-KEY
Deletion of CA certificate and key pair
Lv.2 Details
To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are
additionally registered by the user.
When a service person replaces/discards the device
Use case
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Caution
- Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard
of the device, the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally
registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem in
terms of security.
- Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate
and key pair which are additionally registered are deleted. If they
are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again registered by the
user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered,
the machine condition becomes the same as the one at the time of
factory shipment.
- When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was
not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by initializing
the HDD, etc.
ERDS-DAT
Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data
Lv.1 Details
To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the
SRAM. SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, servers port number,
servers SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server
(how often the data is acquired), etc.
The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGWPORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared.
Use case
When clearing the setting values of RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, and
COM-LOG
Caution
The method of using the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the
Bootable version. Therefore, unless the SRAM data is cleared at the
time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR,
COM-LOG
8-153
KEY-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board

To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security
Kit) for replacement.
Processing is executed at the time of installation of the Encryption
Board, and a new encryption key is generated.
Use case
When replacing the encryption key for the HDD Encryption Board
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Caution
Since all data in the HDD becomes unavailable when executing this
item, be sure to initialize the HDD after turning OFF/ON the main
power switch.
REG-CLR
Clear of image position correction value
Lv.2 Details
To clear the correction value when the value which is adjusted by
image position correction control is erratic value for any cause.
When color displacement is not corrected by image position
correction control, clear the correction value once. Then, either turn
OFF/ON the power or execute the quick adjustment in user mode so
that image position correction control is performed again.
If correction error occurs in diagonal direction, use this item in
conjunction with COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> LD-ADJ-Y, LDADJ-M, LD-ADJ-C.
Use case
- When color displacement cannot be corrected by image position
correction control
- When correction error occurs in diagonal direction
None
COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> LD-ADJ-Y, LD-ADJ-M, LD-ADJ-C,
LD-ADJ-K
USBM-CLR
Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info
Lv.1 Details
To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling
the API provided by the OS.
Use case
When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
8-153

1TR-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
2TR-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
JV-CACHE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FXTX-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Clear of primary transfer ATVC log

Although primary transfer ATVC control is executed based on the log
information, drastic changes in the resistance of the Primary Transfer
Roller, etc. may prevent an optimum transfer voltage from being set
because the control is not performed properly.
When the value (COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 1ATVC-Y/M/C/
K4) of current flown to the Primary Transfer Roller at ATVC control
is out of the appropriate target value range (50 to 700), clear the log
information for the appropriate control.
- When replacing the Primary Transfer Roller
- When the environment (temperature and humidity) changes
drastically
- When any image failure occurs due to primary transfer
None
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 1ATVC-Y/M/C/K4
Clear of secondary transfer ATVC log
Although secondary transfer ATVC control is executed based on the
log information, drastic changes in the resistance of the Secondary
Transfer Roller, etc. may prevent an optimum transfer voltage from
being set because the control is not performed properly.
When the value (COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 2ATVC) of current
flown to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller at ATVC control is
out of the appropriate target value range (50 to 700), clear the log
information for the appropriate control.
- When replacing the Secondary Transfer Roller
- When the environment (temperature and humidity) changes
drastically
- When any image failure occurs due to secondary transfer
None
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 2ATVC
Cache clear of JAVA application
To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
When initializing the JAVA application
Clearing fax job information
To clear fax job information stored on SRAM.
Use this mode to restore from E611-0001.
When E611-0001 occurs
8-154
LANG-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Uninstallation of language files

"To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English
files.
After execution, the machine automatically enters the download
mode."
Use case
When installing a new language file while there are 7 installed
language files
Adj/set/operate method "1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Select the firmware in which the necessary language is included
by SST, and perform downloading."
Caution
The language files are not uninstalled if a language file is not
installed by SST after the execution of this service mode.
Supplement/memo
Screen is displayed in English after the execution, so switch the
language.
FIN-MCON
Clearing Finisher information
Lv.1 Details
To clear the Finisher information which the Main Controller retains.
After execution, set the Delivery Tray again in user mode (Settings/
Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings>
Output Tray Settings).
Use case
When switching to another type of Finisher in the field
Related user mode
Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output
Settings> Output Tray Settings
T-8-44
8-154
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
MISC-R
8-155
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

SCANLAMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Required time
1PSCLB-A
Lv.1 Details
Light-up check of LED

To light up the LED for 3 seconds.
When replacing the LED
3 sec
DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (front)
To acquire scanning data on the front side in order to correct the
color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex
stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the front and back
side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light
source of the lamp and changes in durability. Such a color difference
is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
When a significant color difference occurs between the front and
Use case
back side caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and
changes in durability
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution
Be sure not to turn OFF/ON the power after OK is displayed by
1PSCLB-A.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-B
1PSCLB-B
DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (back)
To acquire scanning data on the back side in order to correct the
Lv.1 Details
color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex
stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the front and back
side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light
source of the lamp and changes in durability. Such a color difference
is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use case
When a significant color difference occurs between the front and
back side caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and
changes in durability
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the document used by 1PSCLB-A on DADF, so that the front
side is faced down and the cyan image is placed at the left rear side.
Caution
Be sure not to turn OFF/ON the power after OK is displayed by
1PSCLB-A.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A
1PCLBSET
Lv.1 Details
DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side

To set which side of the front or back side should be the reference
side when correcting a color difference at the time of duplex stream
reading.
The correction result is reflected after executing the following
operation: specify the reference side, execute a series of color
difference correction processing, and then turn OFF/ON the power.
Before starting correction of color difference in DADF duplex printing
Use case
0 to 2
0: N/A, 1: Front side, 2: Back side
Default value
0
1PCLBUDR
DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct lowr limit
Lv.1 Details
Colors which do not need to be corrected are sometimes corrected
as a result of correction of color difference in duplex stream reading.
To keep colors which do not need to be corrected, the correction
amount is adjusted so that the effect of correction is weakened.
The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed
again after the setting is made.
When 1: ON is specified, unnecessary correction is not executed,
but an expected effect may not be obtained for other colors.
Use case
If the color difference occurs on the colors which didnt have any
difference before correction, adjust the correction amount before
executing the color difference correction again.
Caution
Expected correction result may not be obtained.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
1PCLBOVR
DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct upr limit
Lv.1 Details
Excessive correction is sometimes made when correcting color
difference in duplex stream reading.
To control excessive correction, adjust the correction amount to
weaken the effect of correction.
The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed
again after the setting is made.
When 1: Weak control or 2: Strong control is specified, excessive
correction is not made, but an expected effect may not be obtained
for other colors.
Use case
If the color difference occurs on the colors which didnt have any
difference before correction, adjust the correction amount before
executing the color difference correction again.
Caution
Expected correction result may not be obtained.
0 to 2
0: No control, 1: Weak control, 2: Strong control
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
8-155
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

SCANLMP2
Lv.1 Details
Light-up check of LED Lamp Unit: back

To light up the LED Lamp Unit for back side, which is placed in the
ADF, and check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in
LED.
Use case
When replacing the LED Lamp Unit for back side
Required time
5 sec
RD-SHPOS
Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn
Lv.2 Details
To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed
when moving.
When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner
Unit may move and get damage. By moving the Scanner Unit to
the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before
moving, damage can be prevented.
Use case
When moving the Reader after installation
Caution
Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure
it in place with a screw when moving the Reader after installation.
Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage.
Required time
a few sec
T-8-45
8-156
MISC-P
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
P-PRINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
KEY-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HIST-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRS-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
USER-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LBL-PRNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
D-PRINT
Lv.1 Details
Output of service mode setting value

To print the service mode setting value.
Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
Output of Ctrl Panel key input log
To print the key input log on the Control Panel.
When printing the key input log on the Control Panel
Output of jam and error log
To print the jam log and error log.
When printing the jam/error log
Moving memory reception data to Inbox
To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
Output of user mode list
To print the user mode list.
When printing the user mode list
Output of service label
To print the service label.
When printing the service label
Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
To output items displayed by DISPLAY in the service mode .
Items output by P-PRINT, LBL-PRNT and HIST-PRT, and ALARM
are excluded.
Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll
ENV-PRT
To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/
Lv.1 Details
surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log.
Use case
When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing
temperature information at problem analysis
PJH-P-1
Detail info of print job log: 100 jobs
To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed
Lv.1 Details
information.
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is
printed.
Use case
When printing the print job log with detailed information
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
8-156
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

PJH-P-2
Lv.1 Details
Detail info of print job log: all jobs

To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with detailed
information (for maximum 5000 jobs).
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of
jobs printed.
Use case
When printing the print job log with detailed information
AT-IMG-X
Exe image position correction control
Lv.1 Details
To execute a series of image position correction control operation at
parts replacement.
Normally, image position correction control is executed in specific
timing according to the operation status of the printer engine and
environment change.
This item is linked with Operator Maintenance Mode> Adjustment/
Cleaning> Auto Correct Color Mismatch> Maintenance Correct
Use case
- When removing the Drum Unit
- When releasing the ITB pressure
USBH-PRT
Output of USB device information report
Lv.1 Details
To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a
report.
ITB-INIT
Initial adjustment of ITB steering
Lv.1 Details
To make an initial adjustment of the steering reference position of
ITB at initial installation or at replacement of ITB-related service
parts.
Use case
- At installation
- At replacement of ITB-related service parts
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after closing all covers.
During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal
termination: NG
COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> ITB-POS
T-8-46
SYSTEM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
CHK-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case

HD-CHECK
Lv.1 Details
Caution
HD-CLEAR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
8-157
Shift to download mode

To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a
command.
Perform downloading by SST or USB.
At upgrade
2) Perform downloading by SST or USB.
Do not turn OFF/ON the power of the device during downloading.
HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No.
To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/
HD-CHECK.
When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
0 to 65535
0: Entire HDD
1,2,3,4: Image data storage area
5: Universal file storage area
6,7,8: Universal file storage area (temporary file)
9: PDL file storage area
10: Program file storage area
11: MEAP application
12: Address book/transfer setting
13: MEAP stored data
14: System log storage area
15: Advanced Box area
16: Delivery server area
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK
Entire HDD check and recovery
To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing.
Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
During operation: %, When operation finished normally: OK!
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
Initialization of specified partition
To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE.
When initializing the HDD partition
Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
First 2 digits: Progress ratio (%, Returns to 00 at termination)
Last 2 digits: Result at termination (00: Normally finished, Others:
Abnormally finished)
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
8-157

DEBUG-1
Lv.2 Details
8-158
Setting of log type and save timing

To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in
the HDD.
Logs are used to analyze the cause of a problem.
Use case
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service. Change the setting value in
accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
0 to 3
0: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception
1: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
2: Save SUBLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
3: Save SUBLOG in overwrite mode at detection of Reboot/
Exception/Encode
Default value
3
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-2(LEVEL2)
DEBUG-2
Output of log saved on HDD
Lv.2 Details
To print the PLOG saved in HDD by COPIER> FUNCTION>
SYSTEM> DEBUG-1. (A4: Approx. 20 sheets)
SUBLOG is not printed. It should be uploaded from SST or USB.
When printing PLOG
Use case
Caution
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-1(LEVEL2)
DSRAMBUP
Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Lv.2 Details
To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
time of problem occurrence
Caution
During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic
adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period
of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
DSRAMRES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
RSRAMBUP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
RSRAMRES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
REBOOT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
R-REBOOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM

To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
the Reader Controller PCB.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
Reboot of host machine
To reboot the host machine.
For customization
None
Reboot of host machine: remote
To reboot the host machine by remote control via RUI.
When rebooting the host machine by remote control
T-8-47
8-158
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
OPTION
8-159
SENS-CNF
Lv.2 Details
FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ
Lv.1 Details
Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size

To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection
size with DADF.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader
according to the location.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E)
for North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for
Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South
America
Default value
SCANSLCT
ON/OFF of scan area calculate function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the
specified paper size.
When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON
reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger.
Use case
When matching the scanning area with the paper size
0 to 1
0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size)
1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
Default value
0
DH-SW
ON/OFF of auto D-half control
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of auto D-half control.
Execution interval can be set by COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW>
INTROT-2.
Use case
- When D-half-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of
D-half-related failure
- Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> INTROT-2
Setting of original detection size

To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch
configuration/A configuration.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data,
the value becomes 0. Set 1 for Inch configuration/A configuration
machine.
Use case
0 to 1
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration
Default value
CONFIG
Set country/regn/lang/location/ppr size
Lv.1 Details
To set the country/region, language, location, paper size
configuration for multiple system software in HDD.
Use case
Upon users request
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the setting item.
2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
XX YY.ZZ.AA
XX: Country/region
JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany,
IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea,
CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO:
Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ:
Czech Republic, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia,
SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey,
TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam
YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
AA: Paper size configuration
(00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03:
Inch/AB configuration)
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
W-SCNR
Setting of Reader Unit installation
Lv.1 Details
To set installation of the Reader Unit.
1 (Installed) is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is
detected at the start of the machine.
Use case
When installing/removing the Reader Unit
0 to 1
Default value
8-159

ORG-LGL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ORG-LTR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ORG-LTRR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ORG-LDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL

To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be
recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
0 to 10
0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: FOLIO-R, 4:
Australian FOOLSCAP-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia
OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Argentine LEGAL-R, 9:
Government LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R
0
Special paper size set in DADF mode: LTR
To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be
0 to 3
0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government
LETTER
0
Spcl ppr size set in DADF: LTRR, Reader
To set the size of special paper (LTR-R configuration) that cannot be
Other than Japan
0 to 3
0: LTR-R, 1: G-LTR-R, 2: A-LTR-R, 3:EXECUTIVE-R
0
Spcl ppr size set in DADF: LDR, Reader
To set the size of special paper (LDR configuration) that cannot be
Other than Japan
0 to 1
0: LEDGER-R, 1: Argentine LETTER
0
8-160
ORG-B5
Lv.2 Details
Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5

To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in
DADF stream reading mode.
Use case
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper
Default value
0
INTROT-1
Ppr intvl/last rotn auto adj exe intvl
Lv.1 Details
To set paper interval to execute discharge current control and
primary transfer ATVC at paper interval/last rotation.
As the value is incremented by 1, the interval is increased by 1
sheet.
Use case
When matching the use environment of the user
Caution
As the number of sheets is increased (the interval is widened), image
failure tends to occur.
50 to 1000
Unit
sheet
125
Default value
INTROT-2
Set of last rotation auto adj exe intvl
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper interval to execute auto adjustment (patch potential
control, D-max control, D-half control) at last rotation.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper interval is increased by 1
sheet.
Use case
When matching the use environment of the user
Caution
As the number of sheets is increased (the interval is widened), image
failure tends to occur.
50 to 2000
Unit
sheet
1000
Default value
INTROT-T
[Not used]
8-160

BK-4CSW
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF simple full color mode:photo mode

When outputting solid black image with black mode in text/photo
printout mode, 3.5 mm uneven pitch may occur. It may occur
because the ITB slips due to peripheral speed difference between
the ITB and Photosensitive Drum.
At this time, to set whether to use simple full color mode to create
black by using a small amount of Y, M and C toners.
In text/photo/map mode, it is output in black mode.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
MODELSZ2
Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in
copyboard reading mode.
Use case
Upon users request (mixed media original with AB/Inch
configuration)
Caution
- The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required
to correctly detect the original size when the original consists of
mixed media (AB/Inch configuration).
0 to 1
0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected
with AB/Inch mixed media.
Default value
0
DELV-FAN
ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of condensation control mode.
By selecting 1, the Process Cartridge Fan (Front) (FM10) is turned
OFF when the internal temperature drops to 20 deg C or lower.
Use case
When condensation occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
8-161
SVMD-ENT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Setting of entry method to service mode

To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak.
As needed
0 to 1
0: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [2] and [8] at the same time [Settings/Registration]
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time [Settings/Registration]
Default value
0
FXWRNLVL
Set Fix Film life display threshold VL
Lv.2 Details
To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film.
When COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW (ON/OFF of
Fixing Assembly replacement message) is 1 (default: 0), this setting
is enabled.
The counter for life judgment is stored in the DC Controller. The
counter value cannot be changed and checked.
Use case
It is to prevent the occurrence of fixing failure in the case of
continuing to use the Fixing Film beyond its life.
0 to 3
0: Warning is hidden.
1: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches
the specified value.
2 and 3: Not used
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW
BASE-SW
Model switch set from MEAP-Full to Base
Lv.1 Details
To switch from the MEAP-Full model to the Base model.
Switch this mode in the case of restricting the operation of MEAP
application for a problem analysis.
Use case
When a problem that is caused by MEAP application occurs
Caution
Switching from the Base model to the MEAP-Full model is not
available.
0 to 1
0: OFF (Base model), 1: ON (Full model)
Default value
Depending on the setting of option bit (MeapModelBIT).
8-161

KSIZE-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support

To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K).
When using K-size paper
Caution
Go through the following: COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ; and if MODEL-SZ is 0: AB configuration, this mode is enabled.
0 to 1
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
ORG-A4R
Special paper size set in DADF mode: A4R
Lv.2 Details
To set the size of special paper (A4R) that cannot be recognized in
DADF stream reading mode.
When picking up A4R size original from the DADF of the Inch/AB
configuration models, the size is converted into the specified size so
that an image can be formed properly.
Use case
0 to 1
0: A4R, 1: FOLIO-R
0
Default value
PDF-RDCT
PDF reduction set at forwarding
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting
the image received by IFAX into PDF for e-mail/file transmission.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: With the current setting, 1: Image reduction
Default value
0
REBOOTSW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
SJB-UNW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
WEBV-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CARD-RNG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-162
Restart setting at E240 error occurrence

To set whether to reboot in the case of E240 error.
In the case of E240 error, the machine is automatically rebooted due
to the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system while
the spooled print job is cleared.
Print job can be obtained if selecting the setting not to reboot.
Upon users request
- Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the possibility of
continuous operation of the drive system in the case of E240 error.
0 to 1
0: Rebooted, 1: Not rebooted
0
Reserve upper limit of secure print job
To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secure print
job.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: No limit
0
ON/OFF of WebDAV function
To set ON/OFF of WebDAV function.
OFF setting can reduce memory use of the machine. In addition, the
following WebDAV-related items are hidden in user mode.
- Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations>
File> Protocol> WebDAV
- Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common
Settings> Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX
When reducing memory use of the machine
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
0
Card number setting (department number)
To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the
Card Reader.
When setting the number of cards (departments)
1 to 1000
1000
8-162

COMP-PRT
Lv.2 Details
Img proc memory allocate at job conflict

When making 2 or more composition prints (page number, number
of copies, stamp, date, booklet, watermark), memory for image
processing is allotted preferentially to print jobs.
Meanwhile, memory for image processing of scan/send and PDL
input becomes insufficient depending on the options and document
size, and these jobs might be unprocessed until composition prints
are finished.
If these jobs are interfered each other, image processing can be put
forward little by little by allotting memory equally to each job.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Print priority, 1: Equal allocation
Default value
0
ARCDT-SW
ON/OFF of ARCDAT control
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of ARCDAT control.
When 1: OFF is set, the result of ARCDAT control is not reflected to
LUT.
When the hue variation occurs in the case of failure value displayed
in COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C, turn OFF the ARCDAT control once
and check the hue.
If hue variation is alleviated, analyze the cause of ARCDAT control
error (developer, Patch Sensor, etc.).
Use case
Caution
Be sure to set 0: ON again when ARCDAT control recovers.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C
SJOB-CL
Set of scan job canceling by logout
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the
user.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
- The job in scanning operation cannot be canceled.
- Cancel by logout is kept in the log.
0 to1
Default value
0
PT-W-SET
[Not used]
8-163
DELV-FN2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ON/OFF of Delivery Fan

To set ON/OFF of the Delivery Fan 2 (FM9) at a 1-sided job.
When the stackability at 1-sided setting is low
Caution
When ON is set, be sure to receive approval from the user in
advance by explaining the following.
- Fan noise occurs.
- Curl may get worse to a certain extent (especially with moist paper).
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Half speed, 2: Full speed
Default value
0
USB-RCNT
Auto connect set at USB device disconnct
Lv.2 Details
To set to enable/disable automatic connection when the USB device
is disconnected.
With the setting to disable automatic connection, USB device cannot
be used if disconnecting and then connecting the USB device. To
enable connection again, the power needs to be turned OFF/ON.
With the setting to enable automatic connection, reconnection is
made after disconnecting, and then connecting the USB device.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
With the setting to enable automatic connection, disconnecting of 1
area makes automatic connection of all USB devices if there is USB
hub.
0 to 1
0: No automatic connection, 1: Automatic connection
Default value
0
UNLMTBND
Over 400 binders print job support set
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders.
With the setting to support, the machine makes prints by sharing
binders according to job attribution.
Select 1: Not supported if the user does not print job* with large
quantity of binders.
Use case
When supporting print job that exceeds 400 binders
0 to 1
0: Automatic setting (When the print server is not connected: not
supported; When the print server is connected: supported)
1: Not supported
Default value
0
8-163

MIBCOUNT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
MEAP-PRI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CNTR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
W-RAID
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB

To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB
(Management Information Base).
0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only the displayed counter* is
obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained
*: Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER>
COUNTER 1 to 6
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6
Setting of MEAP task priority
Selecting 1: ON increases MEAP task priority.
When improving processing performance of MEAP
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Init of parts counter estimated life value
To return the estimated life value of parts counter to the initial value.
Upon users request
1) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
0: Returned to the initial value
0
Setting of RAID Board installation
To set installation state of RAID Board (HDD Mirroring Kit).
Select 1: Installed when installing the RAID Board. Select 0: Not
installed when removing the RAID Board.
When installing/removing RAID Board
0 to 1
0
8-164
PSWD-SW
Lv.1 Details
Password type set to enter service mode

To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into
service mode.
2 types are available: one for service technician and the other for
system administrator + service technician.
When selecting the type for system administrator + service
technician, enter the password for service technician after the
password entry by the users system administrator.
Upon request from the user who concerns security
Use case
0 to 2
0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator +
service technician
Default value
0
SM-PSWD
Password setting for service technician
Lv.2 Details
To set password for service technician that is used when getting into
service mode.
Use case
When password is required to get into service mode
Caution
Be sure to select 1 or 2 for PSWD-SW in advance.
1 to 99999999
Default value
11111111
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW
RPT2SIDE
Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service
mode.
Use case
When making 2-sided report output to reduce the number of output
pages
0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default value
1
8-164

PSCL-MS
Lv.1 Details
Set of auto gradation adjustment: Heavy

To set at which speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, or 1/3 speed) PASCAL
control and D-half control are executed at auto gradation adjustment.
When 2 is set, it is executed only for the lastly used speed only. The
time required for auto gradation adjustment is short, but switching
to another speed takes time. This is suitable for the users who
frequently use a specific paper type.
When 3 is set, it is executed for all speeds. The time required for
auto gradation adjustment is long (approx. 3 minutes), but switching
to another speed is quick. This is suitable for the users who use
various paper types.
Use case
When setting the speed according to the materials used by the user
2 to 3
2: Lastly used speed, 3: All speed
Default value
2
DMX-DISP
ON/OFF auto grdtn adj D-max PASCAL ctrl
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to execute D-max PASCAL control at full adjustment
of auto gradation adjustment.
When 0 is set, D-max PASCAL control and PASCAL control are
executed. Four A4-size sheets are used for test prints (one for D-max
PASCAL control and three for PASCAL control).
When 1 is set, PASCAL control (gradation adjustment) only is
executed. Three A4-size sheets are used for test prints (for PASCAL
control).
Use case
When making the setting according to the usage of the user
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
STND-PNL
Not used
INVALPDL
Disabling PDL license
Lv.1 Details
To disable the registered PDL license.
When 1: Disabled is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license
is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience
stores, which do not allow PDL to be used.
Use case
When prohibiting the use of PDL
0 to 1
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled
Default value
0
8-165
IMGCNTPR
Lv.1 Details
Setting of image quality mode

To set the image quality mode.
The counter priority mode is applied when 1 is set, and the image
quality priority mode is applied when 0 is set.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Image quality priority mode, 1: Counter priority mode
Default value
0
CDS-FIRM
Set to allow firmware update by admin
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware
update linked with CDS and collection of log files.
When 1 is set, Deliver Update is added to remote UI, and Firmware
Update is added to the Register/Update Software menu of local UI.
Log files can be collected from remote UI.
Use case
When allowing the administrator to update the firmware and collect
log files
Caution
Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files. In Japan,
the firmware cannot be updated by user. Be sure to return the value
to 0 after use.
0 to1
Default value
EUR: 1, Other: 0
CDS-MEAP
Set to allow MEAP installation by admin
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP
applications and enable iR options from CDS.
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater can be activated from the user
mode.
Use case
When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and
enable iR options from CDS
0 to1
Default value
1
8-165

CDS-UGW
Lv.1 Details
Set to allow firmware update from UGW

To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW
server.
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
Use case
When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server
0 to1
Default value
0
LOCLFIRM
Set to allow firmware update by file
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the
firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency
situations.
Use case
When prohibiting the administrator to update the firmware using a file
0 to1
Default value
1
RSHDW-SW
ON/OFF of remote shutdown
Lv.1 Details
A shared multi-function machine is not likely to be shut down at
power failure. Set ON/OFF of the remote shutdown function to
prevent accident.
When 1: ON is set, the machine can be shut down from the remote
shutdown menu displayed in the remote UI.
When preventing an accident at specified power-off time.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
MC-FANSW
Setting of Controller Fan control
Lv.1 Details
To set full speed/half speed to fan control of the Controller Fan 1 and
2.
When 1: Full speed is set, the heat exhaust efficiency is enhanced.
Use case
- When HDD damage occurs multiple times
- When the machine is installed in a high temperature environment in
which HDD damage is likely to occur
0 to 1
0: Half speed, 1: Full speed
Default value
0
8-166
BXNUPLOG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ON/OFF of Nup log at Inbox print

To set whether to keep Nup log at Inbox print.
When keeping Nup log at Inbox print
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
BUSI-SW
Setting of customized function
Lv.1 Details
To set the function in accordance with the customized specification.
Use case
When installing the customized machine
0 to 1
0: Standard, 1: Customization
Default value
0
SDLMTWRN
ON/OFF cpcty warn dspl at E-mail/I-Fax TX
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the warning message when sending data
that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via
E-mail/I-Fax.
Use case
For customization
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
JLK-PWSC
ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document
with the MEAP application.
Use case
When scanning the PCAM password authentication document
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-166

ATUDILOG
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of UDI log record

To set ON/OFF of UDI log record mode.
UDI log file is normally written in HDD file, but it is deleted at start-up
so the UDI log is not recorded.
When 1 is set, UDI log is recorded in HDD at job assignment, and is
written out with sub log when obtaining it with USB memory (it can
be also obtained from SST).
Use case
When investigation is not possible with only sub log at the time of
problem occurrence
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by telling that third
party other than Canon cannot recover the original document and
image from UDI log.
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used
Default value
0
FAX-INT
Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode
Lv.2 Details
To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception
print automatically.
Upon users request
Use case
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode
Default value
0
PDL-Z-LG
Setting of drawing algorithm
Lv.1 Details
To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR-ADV C
series to obtain output the user expects.
When 0 is set, image is output as displayed on the screen by the
new algorithm adopted from the iR-ADV C Series. Pseudo outline
(boundary for processing divided graphics separately) occurred with
the iR C series does not occur. However, when PDL job with special
data structure is sent, output the user expects may not be obtained.
When 1 is set, the drawing algorithm adopted by the conventional iR
C series is used. Output equivalent to that of the iR C Series can be
obtained; however, drawing-related phenomenon occurred with the
series occurs.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not use setting value 2 and 3.
0 to 3
0: Drawing algorithm of iR-ADV C series, 1: Drawing algorithm of the
conventional iR C series, 2, 3: For R&D use
Default value
0
8-167
CDS-LVUP
Lv.1 Details
Set to allow CDS periodical update

To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to use the periodical
update function linked with CDS.
When 1 is set, the periodical update function can be used from user
mode.
Use case
When allowing the user to use the periodical update function
Caution
Do not set 1 in Japan. The firmware cannot be updated by user.
0 to1
Default value
AMSOFFSW
Switch enable/disable of AMS mode
Lv.1 Details
(1) AMS license which is an iR option is installed.
(2) AMS-supported Login application is activated.
Normally, when the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, it enters AMS
mode automatically.
Use this mode when preferring to disable AMS mode.
For North/Middle/South America and for Europe, this setting is set to
1 by default. Use this mode when preferring to enable AMS mode.
Use case
When preferring to disable AMS mode
When preferring to enable AMS mode (for North/Middle/South
America and for Europe)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Press Counter button, and check that ACCESS MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM is displayed on the Device Configuration screen.
2) Set the service mode to 1.
4) Check that AMS is enabled/disabled.
Press Counter button, and check that ACCESS MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM is not displayed on the Device Configuration screen.
0 to 1
0: AMS mode enabled, 1: AMS mode disabled
Default value
JP:0 USA:1 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0
COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR> ST-AMS
Supplement/memo
AMS: Access Management System
When the device is in AMS mode, ACCESS MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM is displayed in Check Counter> Check Device
Configuration.
8-167

UA-OFFSW
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of unified auth function

To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set the value to 0 when not preferring to use the Unified
Authentication function because of security concern.
Use case
Upon users request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Integrated authentication: A function in which logging in by
SSO-H, etc. allows logins controlled under the above login to be
authenticated
MIB-NVTA
RFC-compatible character stringMIB write
Lv.1 Details
As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in
order to link with LUI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a
problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP
monitoring system, such as the 3rd vendors MPS.
Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB
can be set using this mode.
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible
with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP
manager.) LUI is not linked.
Use case
Upon users request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
0 to 3
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3:
Not used
Default value
0
MIB-EXT
[Not used]
SVC-RUI
Enabling of RUI function for servicing
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided
to end users).
When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled.
When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The
value entered becomes password to use the RUI function.
Use case
When preferring to use the import function of background image file
of main menu
0 to 65535
Default value
0

LCDSFLG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Related user mode
Supplement/memo
BXSHIFT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
SELF-CHK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
HOME-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-168
Enabling of local CDS server

To set whether to use the local CDS server.
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
When using the local CDS server
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
0 to 1
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDSFIRM
[Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Register/Update
Software] > [Software Management Setting] > [Setting]
When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plugin is required.
Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin
To set whether to judge the job as a job without binding when
storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to 0.
By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while 0 is set, the job is
processed as without binding. Booklet in Options on the Inbox
screen can be also used.When 1 is set, it is judged as with
binding even the binding margin is 0 mm so Booklet, which has an
exclusive relationship with binding, cannot be used.
Upon users request
When storing a PDL job in Inbox while 1 is set, Booklet in Options
on the Inbox screen cannot be used.
0 to 1
0: Without binding, 1: With binding
0
Set high voltg error condtn detect func
To set the high voltage error condition detection function.
For R&D use
0 to 15
0:OFF
1:ON
2 to 15:Not used
0
Set screen displayed with Main Menu key
To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen
registered as the startup screen when pressing Main Menu key.
Upon users request (to change the startup screen)
0 to 1
0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen
0
8-168

NO-LGOUT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
T-DLV-BK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
T-DLV-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
JM-ERR-D
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Display/hide of logout button

To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout
with the ID key is enabled. (Normal)
When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the
ID key is disabled.
Upon users request (for customization, etc.)
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
0
Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm
To set the Bk-toner level to display absence of toner message.
When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the
usage status
Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count,
some errors may occur.
0 to 40
%
EUR: 5, Other:10
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-CL
Set Y/M/C-toner level displaying alarm
To set the Y/M/C-toner level to display absence of toner message.
When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the
usage status
Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count,
some errors may occur.
0 to 40
%
5
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK
Handling 0CAX jam as an error: DCON
To display 0CAX jam as the error E996-0CAF.
By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of
the log can be prevented.
Be sure to enable the service mode at the users site where 0CAX
jam occurs.
After that, if the error E996-0CAX occurs, the log which has been
backed up can be obtained.
When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAX jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
0
8-169
JM-ERR-R
Lv.2 Details
Handling 0071 jam as an error: RCON

To display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071.
By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of
the log can be prevented.
Be sure to enable the service mode at the users site where 0071
jam occurs.
After that, if the error E996-0071 occurs, the log which has been
backed up can be obtained.
Use case
When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D
T-8-48
8-169
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
DSPLY-SW
8-170
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

UI-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/hide of copy screen

To set whether to display or hide the copy function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-BOX
Display/hide of Inbox screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to
Inbox.)
1: Inbox function is active
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with
PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI)
1
Default value
UI-SEND
Display/hide of send screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the SEND function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-FAX
Display/hide of FAX screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the FAX function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
T-LW-LVL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
NWERR-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UISW-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
T-CRG-SW
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Dspl timing of toner level warning mssg

To set the threshold value of residual toner in the toner container.
When COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> TNR-WARN = 0
When the residual toner level becomes lower than the threshold, a
warning message of Toner is low. Replacement not yet needed. is
displayed on the Control Panel.
As the value is incremented by 1, the threshold is increased by 1%.
As the value is larger, the message timing to be displayed becomes
earlier.
- At the timing that the service engineer visits to the customer, etc.
5 to 100
%
EUR: 5, Other:10
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> TNR-WARN
OFF/ON of network-related error display
To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
When setting 0: OFF while the machine is not connected to
network, the error message Check the network connection. is not
displayed.
When using the machine as a copy machine
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1: Normal model, 0: Self-copy model
ON/OFF of user screen switch display
To set ON/OFF of the switch to change the standard screen and
simple screen for the users.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
ON/OFF of Toner Cntner rplce user mode
To set whether to display or hide the Toner Container replacement
screen in user mode.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-170

FXMSG-SW
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of Fixing Assy rplce message

To set whether to display the message prompting to replace the
Fixing Assembly on the Control Panel when the counter for life
judgment reaches the specified value.
When FXMSG-SW is 1 (default: 0) and COPIER> OPTION> FNCSW> FXWRNLVL is 1 (default: 0), the Fixing Assembly life detection
is performed.
When the Fixing Assembly reaches its life, the Fixing Assembly
replacement message The Fixing Roller needs to be replaced. (Call
service rep.) is displayed.
When the message is displayed, perform the following procedure.
1) Replace the Fixing Film Unit and Pressure Roller after turning
OFF the main power switch.
2) Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CNT-DCON after
turning ON the main power switch.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CNT-DCON
MEAP-DSP
Screen switch set from MEAP to standard
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to switch from MEAP screen to the standard screen
(COPY/SEND/Mail Box screen, etc). (Setting to display/hide the
arrow mark on MEAP screen)
In the case of an error/jam/alarm, the screen is switched to the
standard screen to display warning even if disabling this mode.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> ANIM-SW
ANIM-SW
[Not used]
UI-PRINT
Display/hide of print job screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the print job screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
8-171
IMGC-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-RSCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-EPRNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-HOLD
Dis/hide of img adj item in user mode

To set whether to display or hide the item relating to image
adjustment in user mode.
When selecting 1: Display, detailed image adjustment procedure
will be displayed only for the duplicated paper specified with the
following settings: Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type
Management Settings.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Display/hide of remote scan screen
To set whether to display or hide the remote scan screen on the
Control Panel.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of extended print screen
To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print
screen for print server).
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of Web browser screen
To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
[Not used]
8-171

TNR-WARN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
RMT-CNSL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
BRWS-FAV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-SBOX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ON/OFF of toner warning display

To set whether to display the toner error message.
When ""0"" is set, the toner alarm is displayed until the toner runs
out.
When preferring to hide the alarm until the toner runs out
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
1
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> T-LW-LVL
ON/OFF of MEAP console screen
Selecting 1: ON enables to obtain log for Function Composer on
console screen.
When obtaining log for Function Composer
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set of service browser favorite register
To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for
service.
When 1 is set, favorites in the browser for service can be edited, and
any URLs can be accessed.
When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service
0 to 1
0
ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
EUR: 0, Other: 1
8-172
UI-MEM
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of memory media screen display

To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control
Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
UI-NAVI
Dis/hide of Tutorial
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide Tutorial in the main menu.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
8-172

UI-MOBP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-173
Display/hide of mobile print

To set whether to display or hide Mobile Print in the main menu.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
FCOT-DSP
ON/OFF of FCOT priority mode in usermode
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display Color/Black Priority for First Print Time in
user mode.
When 1 is set, the home position of the Primary Transfer Rollers for Y,
M, C can be switched.
Use case
When setting Color/Black Priority for First Print Time in the user
mode
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
UI-CUSTM
ON/OFF of custom menu screen display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control
Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
CNTCNFSW
ON/OFF of Counter Check screen display
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the Counter Check screen.
When 1 is set, the Counter Check screen can be displayed. The
setting value automatically returns to 0 (OFF) when the screen is
closed.
Use case
When checking the counter at servicing
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
SCT-BTN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
USER-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDTM-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDWK-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Default value
Set No. of shortcut buttons upper limit

To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear
at the top of the Control Panel screen.
The settings for shortcut buttons are made in Setting of Buttons at
the Top of the Screen which is displayed by pressing the advanced
menu button on the Main Menu screen.
Upon users request
When 1 is set, the number of shortcut buttons increases from 2 to 4.
However, the buttons become smaller in width, and the number of
characters that can be displayed decreases.
The character strings displayed are specified by the MEAP
application allocated to the shortcut button, and may not be fully
displayed in some cases. In this case, a measure such as decreasing
the number of characters on the MEAP application side needs to be
taken.
0 to 1
0: 2 buttons, 1: 4 buttons
0
Display/hide of login user name
To set whether to display the name of the user who logs in to the
machine on the screen of the Control Panel (upper left area).
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Hide, 1: Display(User define), 2:Display(User name)
0
Display/hide of auto shutdown shift time
To set whether to display or hide auto shutdown shift time menu in
user mode.
Set 0 in Europe, and set 1 in areas other than Europe.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Europe: 0, Others:1
Display/hide of auto shutdown time set
To set whether to display or hide auto shutdown time setting menu in
user mode.
Set 0 in Japan, and set 1 in areas other than Japan.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
JAPAN: 0, Other:1
T-8-49
8-173
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK
NETWORK
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

RAW-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IFAX-LIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SMTPTXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SMTPRXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-174
Setting of received data print mode

To set print mode for the received image data.
This item is used to identify the cause whether its due to image data
or image processing in the case of problem with received image.
When a problem with received image occurs
Be sure to set the value back to 0: Normal print operation after
recovering from the trouble.
0 to 1
0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image
processing
0
No. of max print lines at IFAX reception
To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed
when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file
data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation
of the context.
Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail
text without attached file.
When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
0 to 999
0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
500
Setting of SMTP TX port number
To set SMTP transmission port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
25
Setting of SMTP reception port number
To set SMTP reception port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
25
POP3PN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Setting of POP3 reception port number

To set POP3 reception port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
110
FTPTXPN
Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
Lv.2 Details
To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
21
STS-PORT
ON/OFF of TOT sync status comctn port
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for Inquiry/Response (sync)-mode status
communication port with T.O.T.
Select 1: ON in the case of connecting the PC and the machine
with the crossover cable while Service NAVI is used.
Use case
When the Service NAVI is used
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT
CMD-PORT
ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for asynchronous command communication port with
T.O.T.
Select 1: ON in the case of connecting the PC and the machine
with the crossover cable while Service NAVI is used.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Default value
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT
8-174

NS-CMD5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
NS-GSAPI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
NS-NTLM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
NS-PLNWS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of
SMTP authentication.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
0
Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth
To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0
Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth
To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0
Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext
authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the
environment where the communication packet is encrypted.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0
NS-PLN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
NS-LGN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MEAP-PN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RMT-LGIN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-175
Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry

To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext
authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the
environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0
Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth
To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0
HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application
To set HTTP port number of MEAP application.
Upon users request
Do not specify port 8080 when the print server is connected.
Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP
authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.)
0 to 65535
8000
Set to allow remote login to SSH server
To set whether to allow remote login from the remote host (SSH
client: DA) to debug console of the SSH server.
As needed (This mode is used for the Japanese models only. This
mode is not used with overseas models (outside Japan).)
This item is enabled when the setting value of SSH-SW is ON.
0 to 1
1
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW(LEVEL2)
8-175

CHNG-STS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CHNG-CMD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MEAP-SSL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
LPD-PORT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
WUEV-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set of TOT status connection port number

To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T.
1 to 65535
20010
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT
Set of TOT command connection port No.
To set the port number for command connection with T.O.T.
1 to 65535
20000
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT
HTTPS port setting of MEAP
To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP
of MEAP.
When setting HTTPS port for MEAP
0 to 65535
8443
Setting of LPD port number
To set the LPD port number.
Upon users request
1 to 65535
515
Setting of sleep notification execution
To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application
(imageWARE, etc) on the network when shifting to/recovering from
the sleep mode.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Notified, 1: Not notified
0
8-176
WUEV-INT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Setting of sleep notification interval

To set the interval of sleep notification.
Upon users request
Caution
This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is
set to 0: Notified.
60 to 65535
Unit
sec
Default value
600
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW
WUEV-POT
Port number setting for sleep notice
Lv.2 Details
To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
set to 0: Notified.
1 to 65535
Default value
11427
WUEV-RTR
Setting of sleep notification range
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep
notification.
Upon users request
Use case
Caution
set to 0: Notified.
0 to 254
Default value
3
WUEN-LIV
Recovery time setting after sleep notice
Lv.2 Details
To set the time from the sleep start from network without job
assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode.
Use case
When setting the startup time after sleep notification
1 to 600
Unit
sec
Default value
15
8-176

DHCP-12
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of DHCP-option 12 request

To set ON/OFF of inquiry on the host name (Option 12) which uses
Option 55 of DHCP.
Selecting OFF can prevent DHCP packet from including Option 12 or
Option 81 under the packet-monitoring network environment.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
DHCP-81
ON/OFF IPaddress dynamic chng in DHCP-81
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for dynamic change of IP address by Option 81 of
DHCP.
Selecting OFF can prevent DHCP packet from including Option 12 or
Option 81 under the packet-monitoring network environment.
Selecting ON enables dynamic change of IP address by Option 81 of
DHCP in the case that the dynamic DNS setting is ON in user mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to set ON for the dynamic DNS setting in user mode to
enable dynamic change of IP address.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
8-177
IFX-CHIG
Lv.1 Details
Set operation by IFAX recv e-mail text

To set the number of characters for the IFAX received e-mail text, so
that the e-mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the
text is less than the number of specified characters.
This machine can output blank paper because some senders send
e-mail text consisting of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2
(number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is
printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than
the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in
e-mail body text is increased by 1 character.
When reducing printouts of blank paper due to e-mail received by
Use case
IFAX
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no
print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the
specified value.
0 to 999
0: E-mail text is not ignored.
Unit
char
Default value
0
DNSTRANS
Setting of DNS transfer priority
Lv.1 Details
To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS
query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server
supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing DNS
query with priority on IPv6. The time can be shortened by placing
priority on IPv4.
Use case
When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6
because the DNS server supports IPv4
0 to 1
0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default value
1
PROXYRES
Setting of proxy response to Windows
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status
when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep
mode.
Use case
When executing status response for query from Windows correctly
0 to 1
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response
Default value
1
8-177

WOLTRANS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
802XTOUT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
IKERETRY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SPDALDEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of sleep recovery protocol

To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the
value of WOL (Wake On LAN) trans.
Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for
the device to recover from sleep mode.
When the number of network protocols supported by the device
increases, the types of network packets which activate recovery from
sleep mode vary. However, there is a possibility that the existing
network protocol is actually used.
Select the type of network packet which activates recovery from
sleep mode according to the environment where the device is used.
When selecting protocol for sleep recovery
1 to 3
1: WSD and SNMP, 2: WSD and CPCA, 3: CPCA and SNMP
1
Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout
To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time
for response from the authentication server.
When response from the authentication server is slow/fast
10 to 120
sec
30
Setting of IKE retry times
To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
Upon users request
0 to 3
1
Initialization of SPD value
To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-178
NCONF-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
IKEINTVL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
IPSDEBLV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SP-LINK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
AFS-JOB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ON/OFF of Network Configurator function

To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote
attack through network.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Setting of IKE retry interval
To set retry interval in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
Upon users request
1 to 10
sec
5
Setting of IPSec debug level
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Mode setting at 1W sleep
To set the mode to shift to sleep mode
When 0 is set, 10base-T standby is executed, therefore standby
power 1W is realized in sleep mode.
When 1 is set, like existing models, the machine enters sleep mode
after negotiation.
When shifting to sleep mode after negotiation
0 to 1
0: Shift to sleep mode with 10base-T
1: Shift to sleep mode after negotiation
0
Set of FAX server job reception port
To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends
jobs.
When changing the job reception port of the fax server
0 to 65535
20317
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT
8-178

AFC-EVNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set of FAX client event reception port

To set the event notification reception port of a fax client.
When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client
0 to 65535
Default value
29400
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB
ILOGMODE
Setting of Firewall range
Lv.1 Details
To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of
Firewall.
When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and
broadcast which have no direct relation, and consequently the
number of logs is increased.
When 1 is set, the machine filters TCP, UDP and ICMP unicast only.
Upon users request
Use case
0 to 3
0: All protocols support mode
1: TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast support mode
2, 3: Not used
0
Default value
ILOGKEEP
Setting of IP Filter log time
Lv.1 Details
To set the retention time from the log time blocked by IP Filter.
When access is made again from a same address which was
blocked by IP Filter before, if it is within the retention time from the
previous log time, its log is not recorded.
If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record
of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a
single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention
time.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 48
0: 1 minute (special mode)
1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default value
1
8-179
IPTBROAD
Lv.1 Details
Set to allow broad/multicast TX

To set whether to send broadcast packets and multicast packets.
Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is
permitted without specifying an exception address. It is permitted
within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the
IPv4/v6 transmission filter.
Set 1: Disabled when the user does not want to send them.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 5
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used
Default value
0
PFWFTPRT
Setting of IP Filter FTP
Lv.1 Details
When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets
from a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port
113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However,
since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased
and the performance is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking
packets.
Use case
When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports
authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PRNIPBLK
ON/OFF of IP range setting function
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of IP range setting function (only at reception and
print job).
When 1 is set, the following are displayed in user mode.
Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP Address
Range Settings
Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP Address
Range Settings
Use case
When using the IP address block function
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-179
8-180

IPMTU
Lv.1 Details
Setting of MTU size

To set MTU size of network packet.
This item is used when performing SEND communication between
locations connected with Ethernet in a field environment where MTU
black hole problem occurs.
Use case
When MTU black hole problem occur
1 to 10
1: 600 bytes, 2: 700 bytes, ..., 9: 1400 bytes, 10: 1500 bytes
Unit
byte
Default value
10
DDNSINTV
Set of DDNS periodical update interval
Lv.1 Details
DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current
iR, so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where
the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the
registered contents.
Use case
When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals
0 to 48
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47:
47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval
Unit
hour
24
Default value
AFC-JOB
[Not used]
T-8-50
8-180
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
SOUND
8-181
ENV-SET
COPIER > OPTION > SOUND
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
DRM-RTIM
Lv.2 Details
Set Drum line prev sequence exe interval

To set the time interval to rotate the Photosensitive Drum at standby
or sleep.
The Photosensitive Drum is rotated only for 300 msec at intervals to
prevent lines at the drum interval which occurs when the device is
not used for a long time.
As the value is incremented by 1, the interval is increased by 5
minutes.
Increase the value if the user does not mind line at the drum interval
or prefers to reduce the frequency of rotation.
Use case
When the user does not mind line at the drum interval which occurs
when the machine is not used for a long time or prefers to reduce the
frequency of rotation
0 to 12
0: Not executed
Unit
min
Default value
0
T-8-51
ENVP-INT
Lv.1 Details
Temp, humid &Fix Film temp log get cycle

To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside
the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film.
As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER >
DISPLAY > ENVRNT.
Use case
At problem analysis
0 to 480
Unit
min
Default value
60
COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT
ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode
DRY-CISU
To set ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode.
Lv.1 Details
When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit in DADF mode due to
condensation and image failure or E302 occurs, set 1: ON.
When 1 is selected, from the next startup, the paper back LED lights
for 30 seconds after completion of a job.
When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and
Use case
image failure or E302 occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Condensation prevention mode)
0
Default value
T-8-52
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
8-181
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
CLEANING
8-182
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

OHP-PTH
Lv.2 Details
Set of ITB clean transp threshold value

To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ITB cleaning
when feeding transparency.
When a large number of transparencies is fed, surface active agent
adheres to the ITB, and consequently the transfer efficiency is
lowered. To prevent image failure, a patch is formed on the ITB,
and surface active agent is removed together with the toner every
time after feeding 30 sheets at paper interval and 22 sheets at last
rotation.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of sheets at paper
interval and last rotation is increased by 1 sheet.
When the value is decreased in the case of using transparency to
which surface active agent is more likely to be adhered, image failure
can be alleviated.
When the value is increased, downtime and toner consumption can
be reduced, but image failure may occur.
Use case
When an image failure occurs due to lowering of the transfer
efficiency
-15 to 15
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-CLN
ITBB-TMG
Lv.1 Details
Set of drum/ITB cleaning band interval

To set interval at which band of ATR patches is formed as a measure
to prevent flipping of Drum Cleaner. If flipping is concerned, reduce
the interval.
The interval at which band of ATR patches is formed can also be set
by COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> PCHINT-1, but ITBB-TMG has
priority.
In addition, use this mode when Bk vertical lines occur in a high
temperature and high humidity environment.
Use case
Decrease the value when the density varies dramatically.
Increase the value to reduce downtime due to the control.
Set 6 to 8 when Bk vertical lines occur.
0 to 10
0: Value set by PCHINT-1 (default: 200 sheets), 1: Not used, 2: 25
sheets (select this value when taking a measure for flipping of Drum
Cleaner), 3: 50 sheets, 4: 75 sheets, 5: 100 sheets, 6: 5 sheets
(enabled in a high temperature and high humidity environment),
7: 10 sheets (enabled in a high temperature and high humidity
environment), 8: 25 sheets (enabled in a high temperature and high
humidity environment), 9 to 10: Not used
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> PCHINT-1
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
T-8-53
8-182
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW
FEED-SW
8-183
COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

EVLP-SPD
Lv.1 Details
Envelope feeding speed setting

To set the envelope feeding speed.
By feeding an envelope at 1/2 speed (default) in the case of a high
humidity environment, the glue flap may adhere at the time of fixing.
As a result of that, the envelope may not be opened.
By setting to 1/1 speed, adhesion can be prevented, but fixing might
be deteriorated in a low humidity environment.
Use case
When a glue flap of envelope adheres
Caution
The fixing is deteriorated by setting 1/1 speed in a low humidity
environment.
0 to 1
0: 1/2 speed, 1: 1/1 speed
Default value
0
EVLP-FS
Setting of fixing speed with envelop
To set fixing speed when feeding envelope.
Lv.2 Details
As the value is incremented by 1, the fixing speed changes by 0.1%.
Decrease the value when fine line displacement occurs on trailing
edge of envelop, and increase the value when wrinkles occur.
Use case
When fine line displacement or wrinkles occur on trailing edge while
feeding envelop
press OK key.
Caution
Be sure to change the value little at a time because when setting an
extreme value, phenomenon opposite to fine line displacement or
wrinkles occur.
-20 to 20
Unit
%
Default value
0
Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full
TFL-RTC
To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after
Lv.1 Details
recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level.
When 0 (default) is set, a job is output from the delivery destination
again from which the last job was delivered.
When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which
priority is set as high at Output Tray Settings in user mode.
Use case
When changing the delivery tray
0 to 1
0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output.
1: Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among
the delivery trays.
Default value
0
USZ-FEED
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF Job set/ppr source ppr size chck

To set whether to check if the paper size set for the job matches the
paper size set on the paper source.
When 1 is set, papers are picked up without checking even user
defined size papers that differ from the job setting size are set on a
paper source.
Use case
When forcibly picking up papers even the paper size setting differs
between a job and a paper source
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
MFENV-K2
Lift Plt press:MP Tr pckup, envlp(Kaku2)
Lv.1 Details
To set the Lifting Plate pressure mode when feeding an envelope
(Kakugata 2) from the Multi-purpose Tray.
When 0 is set, the Lifting Plate applies pressure to the envelope
once.
When 1 is set, pressure is applied twice and the feeding power is
increased.
Use case
- At installation
- When jams frequently occur
Caution
When applying pressure twice, jam may occur frequently with
Yougata-type envelope.
0 to 1
0: Pressure is applied once, 1: Pressure is applied twice
0
Default value
MFENV-N3
Lift Plt press:MP Tr pckup, envlp(Naga3)
Lv.1 Details
(Nagagata 3) from the Multi-purpose Tray.
once.
increased.
Use case
- At installation
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-183

MFENV-Y3
Lv.1 Details
Lift-P press:MP Tr pckup, envlp(Y-naga3)

(Yougatanaga 3) from the Multi-purpose Tray.
once.
increased.
Use case
- At installation
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
MFENV-MO
Lift-P press:MP Tr pckup, envlp(Monarch)
Lv.1 Details
(Monarch) from the Multi-purpose Tray.
once.
increased.
Use case
- At installation
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
MFENV-10
Lift-P press: MP-T pckup, envlp, No.10
Lv.1 Details
(No.10 (COM10)) from the Multi-purpose Tray.
once.
increased.
Use case
- At installation
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-184
MFENV-DL
Lv.1 Details
Lift Plt press: MP Tr pckup, envlp (DL)

To set the Lifting Plate pressure mode when feeding an envelope (DL)
once.
increased.
Use case
- At installation
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
MFENV-C5
Lift Plt press: MP Tr pckup, envlp (C5)
Lv.1 Details
To set the Lifting Plate pressure mode when feeding an envelope (C5)
once.
increased.
Use case
- At installation
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
T-8-54
8-184
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
IMG-SPD
8-185
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD

FX-D-TMP
Lv.1 Details
Set small paper down sequence start temp

To set temperature to start the down sequence control to small size
paper (width direction is smaller than A4R).
As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature is increased by 5
deg C from the initial setting temperature.
Use case
When improving hot offset on the edge of paper and productivity
-4 to 4
-4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1:
5 deg C, 2: 10 deg C, 3: 15 deg C, 4: 20 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FIX-ROT
Set idle rotn stop temp after s-ppr feed
Temperature on the edges of the Fixing Film becomes higher than
Lv.1 Details
the temperature at the center when feeding large size paper followed
by small size paper through the Fixing Assembly. Idle rotation is
executed until temperature is decreased to the specified value after
feeding small size paper to prevent occurrence of fixing offset or
wrinkles.
To set the temperature which is the condition to stop idle rotation.
As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature is increased by 5
deg C from the initial setting temperature.
Temperature is detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 and 2.
Use case
When improving hot offset on the edge of paper and productivity
-2 to 2
-2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: 5 deg C, 2: 10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
ARC-INT1
Lv.2 Details
Set of ARCDAT interruption interval

To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT
control is executed.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, ARCDAT
control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job.
Decrease the value when the density varies dramatically, and
increase the value to reduce downtime due to the control.
If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered. If the value is too
large, the density of image becomes different before and after the
interruption.
Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0.9
and rounding up after the decimal points. (e.g.: If an entry value is
100, setting value will be 112.)
Use case
- When decreasing downtime
5 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
100
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD> ARC-INT2
ARC-INT2
Set ARCDAT exe interval: last rotation
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets which ARCDAT control is not executed,
from the start of a job.
ARCDAT control which is supposed to be executed during the
specified number of sheets is executed at last rotation of the previous
job. Since the number of interruptions during a job is reduced, the
productivity is enhanced.
However, the number of times of ARCDAT control executed at last
rotation might be increased depending on the print conditions.
Caution
Do not set a larger value than INTPPR-1.
5 to 1000
Unit
sheet
25
Default value
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> INTPPR-1
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
8-185
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

MXSPDSEL
Lv.1 Details
SPD/Qty priority in mixed width:Reader

To set whether to give priority to speed or image quality when
feeding the paper with different width.
When 0: Image quality priority is set, idle rotation is performed at
different width mixed print and the number of registration is increased
so that the image quality can be maintained while the productivity is
reduced.
When 1: Speed priority is set, the productivity does not reduce
while skew may occur even same width.
When skew occurs at different width mixed print

Use case
0 to 1
0: Image quality priority, 1: Speed priority
Default value
1
T-8-55
8-186
IMG-RDR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
DFDST-L1
Lv.1 Details
DADF mode dust dtct level adj: ppr intvl

To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control
that is executed at paper interval in DADF mode.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning
instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the
dust is less detected.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger,
the small dust is more likely detected.
Use case
- When black line occurs due to dust
Caution
When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen
may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared
on the image can be detected.
When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
1 to 84: Weakest
85 to 169: Weak
170 to 254: Moderate (default)
255: Strong
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR> DFDST-L2
DFDST-L2
DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job
Lv.1 Details
that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode.
Use case
- When black line occurs due to dust
Caution
When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen
may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared
on the image can be detected.
When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR> DFDST-L1
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
8-186
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

DF2DSTL1
Lv.1 Details
DADF dust dtct lvl adj at ppr intvl:bck

that is executed at paper interval by the Scanner Unit (paper back) in
DADF mode.
Use case
- When black line appears due to dust
Caution
If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear
too often because even fine dust that will not appear on the image is
detected.
When the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
0 to 255
0:OFF
1 to 84: Weakest
85 to 169: Weak
170 to 254: Moderate (default)
255: Strong
Default value
200
DF2DSTL2
Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end:bck
Lv.1 Details
that is executed by the Scanner Unit (paper back) after the job is
completed in DADF mode.
Decrease the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger,
Use case
- When black line appears due to dust
Caution
If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear
too often because even fine dust that will not appear on the image is
detected.
When the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
0 to 255
0:OFF
Default value
200
8-187
IMG-MCON
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
PASCAL
Lv.1 Details
Use/no use of auto gradation adj data

To set to use/not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT
that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (full/quick adjustment)
control.
Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of
image formation.
Use case
When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of
PASCAL-related failure
0 to 3
0: Initial LUT is used. (Auto gradation adjustment is not used.)
1: Auto gradation adjustment is used.
2 to 3: Not used
1
Default value
SCR-SLCT
Halftone process in Photo Printout mode
To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo
Lv.2 Details
Printout mode when making a copy.
Change the setting if the copy image has a problem with the initial
setting (Low screen ruling).
Select 0 (error diffusion) in the case of moire (suitable for character
reproduction).
Select 2 (High screen ruling) in the case of rough dots.
Use case
When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image
0 to 2
0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling
Default value
1
TMC-SLCT
Setting of error diffusion coefficient
To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process.
Lv.2 Details
Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability.
0 to 2
0: Small granularity/low dot stability
1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/
high dot stability (black mode)
2: Large granularity/high dot stability
Default value
2
T-8-56
8-187

PRN-FLG
Lv.2 Details
Select of image area flag (PDL image)

To set the image area flag for the image processing which is
performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified
compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate,
the following operations are performed as default:
- Processing to prioritize reproduction of text
- Replacing Bk-color to black plain color
Set 1 when moire occurs or jaggy is significant.
Set 2 when not preferring to replace Bk color with single Bk color.
- When moire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an
Use case
image containing many halftone dots or photos
- When avoiding to replace Bk-color with single black color
Caution
This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0 to 2
0: High screen ruling, gray compensation LUT
1: Error diffusion, gray compensation LUT
2: High screen ruling, normal LUT
Default value
0
SCN-FLG
Select of image area flag (copy image)
Lv.2 Details
To set the image area flag for the image processing which is
performed when a scanned image fails to be compressed at a
specified compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate,
processing to prioritize reproduction of text is performed by default.
Set 1 when an image contains many halftone photo images.
Set 2 when an image contains many printed photos.
Use case
When copying an image which contains many halftone dots and
photos
Caution
This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0 to 2
0: Text
1: Halftone photo image
2: Printed photos
Default value
0
8-188
TMIC-BK
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct

To set ON/OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL
and for copy which are used by TMIC.
When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON, the density of the
high density area becomes high, and consequently text and thin
lines become clear. While an image becomes clear, the hue of the
gradation area of photos, etc. is changed.
Use case
When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded
0 to 3
0: ON for PDL, OFF for copy
1: OFF for PDL, OFF for copy
2: ON for PDL, ON for copy
3: OFF for PDL, ON for copy
Default value
2
DH-MODE
Set ptch data at Dhalf except full crrct
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to use the high-density patch data that has been
scanned by D-half control of full correction at the time of D-half
control other than full correction.
0 to 1
0: Used, 1: Not used
Default value
0
DH-TMG
Set auto D-half control exe interval
Lv.2 Details
To set the paper interval to execute auto D-half control.
D-half control is executed at the time of last rotation after completion
of job with every specified number of sheets.
The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER>
OPTION> FNC-SW> DH-SW is 1: ON.
Use case
Upon users request
500 to 2000
Unit
sheet
Default value
1000
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> DH-SW
8-188

MIX-FLG
Lv.2 Details
Set img processing at img composition

To set the image processing which is performed when an image
fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate by the Main
Controller upon image composition.
Use case
When an image processing failure occurs
0 to 3
0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4
colors. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area is more vivid
than that of 2.)
1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4
colors. Screen processed image.)
2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with
a single Bk color. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area
might be different from that of 0.)
3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with
a single Bk color. Screen processed image.)
Default value
0
REPORT-Z
Set of image processing at report print
Lv.1 Details
To set the image processing which is performed when printing a
report.
Use case
When there is a request for image improvement
0 to 3
than that of 2.)
Default value
0
8-189
IFXEML-Z
Lv.1 Details
Set img proc at clr iFAX,mail recv print

To set the image processing which is performed when printing color
iFAX or received e-mail.
Use case
0 to 3
than that of 2.)
Default value
0
BMLNKS-Z
Set img proc at BMLinkS reception print
Lv.1 Details
To set the image processing which is performed when printing
received BMLinkS.
Use case
0 to 3
than that of 2.)
Default value
0
8-189

REDU-CNT
Lv.2 Details
Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj

To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment
(color balance, fine adjustment of density).
When 1 is set, the color adjustment value is reflected to an image
precisely, but toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing
Assembly might occur, and paper might wind around the Fixing
Assembly.
When COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ is set to 1, this
setting can be also made in the user mode.
Use case
- When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely
Caution
When 1 is set, toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing
Assembly might occur, and paper might wind around the Fixing
Assembly.
0 to 1
0: Toner deposit amount is limited to the specified amount.
1: Toner deposit amount is not limited.
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ
VP-ART
Setting of line art processing
Lv.2 Details
To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the
field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector
data.
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data
or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line
width can be specified.
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width
line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize
edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 99
Default value
1
8-190
VP-TXT
Lv.2 Details
Set of character vectorization process

To set vectorization processing for text on scalable PDF.
In the vectorization processing, a binary image outline is extracted
in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted into vector
data.
In regular vectorization, function approximation is not used for small
text not to change the image quality.
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is
executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the
image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small
text.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 99
Default value
1
PASCL-TY
Set of paper type for auto gradation adj
Lv.2 Details
Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the
recommended paper specified for each location. However, if you
want to change the paper type, use this setting to change the paper
type.
Use case
When executing the auto gradation adjustment using a paper other
than the recommended paper type
Caution
Do not change the setting in the normal operation.
1 to 3
1: CS-814 (Except for USA and Europe. Mainly for Japan)
2: Hammermill (For USA)
3: Mondi (For Europe)
Default value
P-ALPHA
Adjustment of Patch Sensor alpha value
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the correction coefficient alpha value of the Patch Sensor.
The value multiplied by 1000 is displayed on the screen.
After replacing the Patch Sensor, enter the value *1/XXXX* (XXXX:
number around 1200) under the barcode of the service label.
Use case
When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value.
512 to 2047
Default value
1200
8-190

AST-SEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
REGM-SEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ERS-SEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SCR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Adj of advanced smoothing effect

To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced
smoothing UI.
Set 3 if the effect is not improved by selecting High on the UI.
Set 0 if too much effect is obtained even though Low is set.
When image failures (jaggy, moire) occur
0 to 3
2
Adj of fine-line density correction
To adjust the fine line and text density which is set in user mode (fine
density correction).
Set 4 if density is too low even though +2 is set in user mode and set
0 if density is too high even though -2 is set in user mode.
When line and text adjusted by fine line density adjustment is too
dark or too light in the case of 1200 dpi print
0 to 4
2
Effective Resolution System Proc mthd
To set the processing method of Effective Resolution System for
images and texts.
Select one of 1 to 7 when moire (a symptom of hue changing
depending on the location) occurs on a patterned image with 1200
dpi.
When moire occurs on a patterned image with 1200 dpi
0 to 7
0
Set of low screen ruling dither
To set the dithering method for low screen ruling.
When changing the value, confirm the change by setting 1: Low
screen ruling in COPIER> TEST> PG> TXPH.
Upon users request (Dot dithering is used)
0 to 1
0: Line dithering, 1: Dot dithering
0
COPIER> TEST> PG> TXPH
8-191
ERS-SEL1
Lv.1 Details
Set 1200 dpi ERS process:PS Expnsn Kit

To change the ERS processing when the hue of patterned graphics
is changed according to phase in the case of making 1200 dpi output
with the PS Expansion Kit installed.
The processing is changed only for graphics and images, and ERS
weighting processing is performed to characters even if the setting is
changed.
Set 1 when the aforementioned symptom occurs.
Set 3 if the proportion of small characters is distorted after 1 is set.
Set 5 if the color of graphics is not stabilized after 1 or 3 is set. In this
setting, however, a fine line of a single line disappears.
Use case
When the hue is changed according to phase when making 1200-dpi
output
0 to 7
The following processing are performed to graphics and images
respectively:
0: Max skipping, simple skipping
1: ERS (average), simple skipping
2: ERS (average), ERS (average)
3: ERS (weighting), simple skipping
4: ERS (weighting), ERS (weighting)
5: Simple skipping, simple skipping
6, 7: Not used
Default value
0
ERS-SEL2
Set 1200 dpi ERS process: print server
Lv.1 Details
To change the ERS processing when the hue of patterned graphics
is changed according to phase in the case of making 1200 dpi output
through connection to the print server.
Set 1 when the aforementioned symptom occurs.
Set 3 if the proportion of small characters is distorted after 1 is set.
Set 5 if the color of graphics is not stabilized after 1 or 3 is set. In this
setting, however, a fine line of a single line disappears.
Use case
When the hue is changed according to phase when making 1200-dpi
output
0 to 5
The following processing are performed to characters, graphics, and
images respectively:
0: ERS (weighting), Max skipping, simple skipping
1: ERS (average), ERS (average), simple skipping
2: ERS (average), ERS (average), ERS (average)
3: ERS (weighting), ERS (weighting), simple skipping
4: ERS (weighting), ERS (weighting), ERS (weighting)
5: ERS (weighting), simple skipping, simple skipping
Default value
0
8-191
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

CL-RDCTN
Lv.1 Details
High compress PDF TX clr reduct mode

To set whether to execute the color reduction processing mode at
high compression PDF (text mode) transmission.
Set 1 when image quality is deteriorated at high compression PDF
(text mode) transmission. Image quality is improved by executing the
color reduction processing mode.
Use case
Upon users request (improvement of image quality)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PSCL-TBL
Set auto gradation adjustment parameters
Lv.1 Details
To set the parameters of auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
When 0 is set, the parameters are optimized for GF-C081 (81 g/m2)
standard paper (Canon-recommended paper).
When 1 is set, the parameters are optimized for 64 g/m2 paper.
Use case
When paper arc occurs on 64 g/m2 paper at auto gradation
adjustment
Caution
Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after
the setting is done.
0 to 3
0: Standard paper (81 g/m2), 1: Plain paper (other than 81 g/m2), 2
to 3: Not used
0
Default value
BGE-OFS
Fine adj of background adjustment level
Lv.2 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background
removal) level which can be set manually.
Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does
not satisfy with the default adjustment values.
Use case
When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying
yellowed blank paper as an original
press OK key.
Caution
Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode,
not only the background of yellowed blank paper, but also other light
colors (light blue, etc.) are washed out.
-15 to 15
Default value
0
8-192
IMG-DEV
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV
DRM-IDL
Lv.1 Details
Set first idle rotn time in HH Ev

To set the idle rotation time to be performed first time for the day in
an HH (high temperature and high humidity) environment.
Use case
When coarseness occurs on the image first time for the day
Caution
When ON is set, startup takes time.
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON (HH environment only), 2: ON (all environments)
Default value
0
DEVL-VTH
Set toner ejectn image duty threshold VL
To set the threshold value of the image duty, which is the condition to
Lv.2 Details
perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.
As the value is larger, coarseness is decreased, but productivity is
lowered and toner consumption is increased.
As the value is smaller, productivity and toner consumption are
improved, but coarseness is worsened.
Use case
While printing low duty (low image ratio) images,
- When graininess (coarseness) occurs
- When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by
the user
Caution
-1 to 2
-1: -1%, 0: 0%, 1: +1%, 2: +2%
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DEVL-PTH
T-8-57
8-192

INTPPR-1
Lv.2 Details
Set of ARCDAT interruption interval

To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT
control is executed.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, ARCDAT
control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job.
Decrease the value when the density varies dramatically, and
increase the value to reduce downtime due to the control.
If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered. If the value is too
large, the density of image becomes different before and after the
interruption.
Use case
- When decreasing downtime
5 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
100
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD> ARC-INT2
DVTGT-K
Adj of ATR Sensor (Bk) gain value offset
Lv.2 Details
To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value
of ATR Sensor (Bk).
When the value is increased (TD ratio is increased), uneven density
at the screw interval is alleviated, but fogging may occur.
Since the target value of TD ratio changes when changing the value,
it is necessary to stable TD ratio by forcibly executing toner ejection
sequence.
The value is returned to 0 at the replacement of the Process Unit.
Caution
After the value is changed, execute the toner ejection sequence.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-193
DVTGT-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj of ATR Sensor (Y) gain value offset

of ATR Sensor (Y).
sequence.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
DVTGT-M
Adj of ATR Sensor (M) gain value offset
Lv.2 Details
of ATR Sensor (M).
sequence.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
DVTGT-C
Adj of ATR Sensor (C) gain value offset
Lv.2 Details
of ATR Sensor (C).
sequence.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-193

DEVL-PTH
Lv.1 Details
Set toner ejctn ppr intvl threshold VL

To set the threshold value of the interval, which is the condition to
perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.
As the value is smaller, coarseness is decreased, but productivity is
lowered and toner consumption is increased.
As the value is larger, productivity and toner consumption are
enhanced, but coarseness is worsened.
Use case
While printing low duty (low image ratio) images,
- When graininess (coarseness) occurs
- When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by
the user
Caution
0 to 2
0: 100 sheets, 1: 200 sheets, 2: 300 sheets
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DEVL-VTH
PCHINT-1
ATR patch ppr interval adj (1st limit)
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the paper interval at which patch detection is performed by
ATR control.
Decrease the value when hue variation is large to increase the
frequency.
Increase the value to reduce downtime.
When the service mode (COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> ITBBTMG) that sets the interval at which band of ATR patches is formed
as a measure to prevent flipping of ITB Cleaner is set simultaneously,
ITBB-TMG has priority.
0 to 5
Unit
sheet
2
Default value
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> ITBB-TMG
PCHINT-V
Adj ATR patch VD counter total VL intvl
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the interval of the total video counter value at which patch
detection is performed by ATR control.
Decrease the value when hue variation is large.
Increase the value to reduce downtime.
0 to 5
Default value
2
8-194
DELV-THY
Lv.2 Details
Setting of image ratio for Y-toner ejctn

To set the threshold value for average image ratio where Y-toner
ejection is executed.
As the value is incremented by 1, the ratio changes by 1%.
When fogging occurs while making a large number of outputs of low
duty images, increase the value if 0/1 is set in user mode.
If the user does not want too many waste toner when low duty image
is output, decrease the value.
0 to 10
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3 to 10: Not used
Default value
2
DELV-THC
Setting of image ratio for C-toner ejctn
Lv.2 Details
To set the threshold value for average image ratio where C-toner
0 to 10
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3 to 10: Not used
Default value
2
DELV-THM
Setting of image ratio for M-toner ejctn
Lv.2 Details
To set the threshold value for average image ratio where M-toner
0 to 10
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3 to 10: Not used
Default value
2
8-194

DELV-THK
Lv.2 Details
Setting of image ratio for Bk-tonr ejctn

To set the threshold value for average image ratio where Bk-toner
0 to 10
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3 to 10: Not used
Default value
2
ADJ-VPP
Adj of developing AC bias Vpp
Lv.2 Details
To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias.
Ring marks are alleviated when the value is decreased in the direction, and white spots are alleviated when the value is increased
in the + direction.
When image failures (ring marks, white spots) occur
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
When the value is decreased too much in the - direction, density
might be lowered.
-4 to 0
Default value
0
PAP-W-EN
Solid image uneven dens prevention mode
Lv.1 Details
If the developer is supplied unevenly to the Developing Cylinder,
uneven density occurs on the solid image. In order to make the
developer even, time for the Toner Feed Screw to rotate is secured
by widening the interval between images.
As the value is larger, the interval between images (interval between
sheets) becomes wider.
Increase the value when the density is uneven, e.g. when the left
edge of a solid image is dark.
Use case
When uneven density occurs on a solid image
0 to 10
Default value
0
PTN-LVL
[Not used]
8-195
DMX-OF-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adjustment of Y-color D-max setting

To adjust D-max control setting in the case where density of solid
area on Y-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
adjustment is executed.
when the density is high.
Use case
When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even
performing auto gradation adjustment
press OK key.
3) Execute auto gradation adjustment.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
DMX-OF-M
Adjustment of M-color D-max setting
Lv.2 Details
area on M-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-195
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

DMX-OF-C
Lv.2 Details
Adjustment of C-color D-max setting

area on C-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
DMX-OF-K
Adjustment of Bk-color D-max setting
Lv.2 Details
area on Bk-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-196
IMG-TR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
2TR-RVON
ITB-TYPE
Lv.2 Details
[Not used]
Setting of ITB thickness
To set the thickness of the ITB to be used and the Primary Transfer
Roller.
Setting value of the primary transfer current differs depending on the
thickness of ITB and the Primary Transfer Roller.
Use case
When replacing the ITB
0 to 2
0: Thick (old belt)
1: Thin (new belt) + old Primary Transfer Roller (16 mm-diameter)
2: Thin (new belt) + new Primary Transfer Roller (175 mm-diameter)
Default value
2
T-8-59
T-8-58
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
8-196
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
IMG-FIX
8-197
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

AUTO-DH
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of D-max/D-half control

To set ON/OFF of D-max/D-half control at warm-up rotation.
0: D-Max/D-half control is not executed.
1: D-Max/D-Half control is executed only in an HH (high temperature
and high humidity) environment.
2: D-Max/D-Half control is executed in all environments.
Use case
When image smear occurs in an HH environment
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON (HH environment only), 2: ON (all environments)
0
Default value
FX-S-TMP
ITOP control temperature: Plain paper
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper (64 to
Lv.1 Details
81 g/m2) at 1/1 speed.
As the value is incremented by 1, the control temperature is
increased by 5 deg C.
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of plain
paper
-2 to 2
-2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: 5 deg C, 2: 10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-TBL2
Fixing control temperature:Heavy paper 1
To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106
Lv.1 Details
to 163 g/m2).
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs, and decrease the
value when fixing offset occurs.
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on heavy paper 1
press OK key.
-2 to 2
-2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-TBL3
Lv.1 Details

to 209 g/m2).
Use case
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-TBL4
Lv.1 Details
to 256 g/m2).
Use case
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-TBL5
Fixing control temperature: Thin ppr
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper (52 to 63
g/m2).
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on thin paper
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-197

TMP-TBL6
Lv.1 Details
Fixing control temperature: Envelope

To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope.
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on envelope
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TMP2
ITOP control temperature: Heavy paper 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106
to 163 g/m2).
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of heavy
paper 1
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TMP3
Lv.1 Details
to 209 g/m2).
Use case
paper 2
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-198
FXS-TMP4
Lv.1 Details

to 256 g/m2).
Use case
paper 3
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TMP5
ITOP control temperature: Thin ppr
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper.
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of thin
paper
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TMP6
ITOP control temperature: Envelope
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for envelope.
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of envelope
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
0
Default value
8-198

FXST2-N2
Lv.1 Details
Set of ITOP wait time:Plain ppr in LL Ev

To set initial rotation time when plain paper 1/plain paper 2 is fed with
a temperature of 18 deg C or lower.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Use case
When fixing failure occurs in an LL environment
0 to 20
Unit
sec
Default value
0
FXST2-UH
Set of ITOP wait time:Heavy ppr in LL Ev
Lv.1 Details
To set initial rotation time when heavy paper 1/2/3 is fed with a
temperature of 18 deg C or lower.
Use case
When fixing failure occurs in an LL environment
0 to 30
Unit
sec
0
Default value
FN-ENTMP
Set of Fixing Cooling Fan ON/OFF temp
Lv.1 Details
To set the ON/OFF temperature of the Fixing Cooling Fan (Front)/
(Rear).
As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg
C.
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on the edge of small size paper
press OK key.
-4 to 4
-4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1:
5 deg C, 2: 10 deg C, 3: 15 deg C, 4: 20 deg C
Unit
deg C
0
Default value
8-199
FLYING
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of flying start temperature ctrl

To set ON/OFF of flying start temperature control.
When 1 is set, flying start temperature control is not performed.
Selecting 1 has an advantage over selecting 0 in terms of the life of
the Fixing Assembly.
Use case
When preferring to extend the life of the Fixing Assembly However,
selecting 1 does not always extend the life.
Caution
When 1 is set, FPOT becomes longer.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
TMP-TBL7
Fixing control temperature:Plain paper 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 2 (82 to
105 g/m2).
increased by 5 deg C from the specified value.
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on plain paper 2
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-TBL8
Fixing control temperature:Transparency
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of fixing control temperature for transparency.
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on transparency
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-199

TMP-TBL9
Lv.1 Details
Fixing control temperature:Coated paper1

To set the offset of fixing control temperature for coated paper 1 (106
to 163 g/m2).
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on coated paper 1
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-TB10
Fixing control temperature:Coated paper2
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of fixing control temperature for coated paper 2 (164
to 209 g/m2).
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on coated paper 2
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TMP7
ITOP control temperature: Plain paper 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 2 (82 to
105 g/m2).
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of plain
paper 2
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-200
FXS-TMP8
Lv.1 Details
ITOP control temperature: Transparency

To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency.
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of
transparency
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TM10
ITOP control temperature: Coated paper 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for coated paper 2 (164
to 209 g/m2).
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of coated
paper 2
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXS-TMP9
ITOP control temperature: Coated paper 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for coated paper 1 (106
to 163 g/m2).
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm) of coated
paper 1
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-200

THIN-LP
Lv.2 Details
Set of fixing arch ctrl with thin paper

To set the arch control method between the secondary transfer and
fixing when feeding thin paper (52 g/m2).
Normally, the arch control is executed at the point where arch on the
trailing edge of paper is small.
When 1 is set in the case that an image failure (crepe mark) occurs
with thin paper, the control is always executed at the point where the
arch on a paper is large while feeding thin paper.
When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs with thin paper
Use case
0 to 1
0: Arch control at the point where arch is small, 1: Arch control to
make the arch large with thin paper
Default value
1
TMP-TB11
Fixing control temperature:Recycled ppr
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper (52
to 105 g/m2).
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on recycled paper
press OK key.
- 3 to 2
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2:
+10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-201
FXS-TM11
Lv.1 Details
ITOP control temperature:Recycled ppr

To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for recycled paper (52
to 105 g/m2).
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge
of paper, and decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs on the
leading edge (94mm).
Use case
- When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper
- When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94mm)
press OK key.
- 3 to 2
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2:
+10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FXTBL-SW
Set fixing temp control table: Plain 1
Lv.2 Details
To set the fixing temperature control table for plain paper 1 (64 to 81
g/m2).
When mottled image occurs on the plain paper 1 regardless of
appropriate temperature of the Fixing Assembly, set 1. When plain
paper 1 is fed, the fixing temperature control table for recycled paper
is applied. However, for the fixing control temperature and ITOP
control temperature, the offset setting for plain paper 1 (TEMP-TBL
and FX-S-TMP) is reflected.
Use case
When mottle image occurs on the plain paper while the Fixing
Assembly is hot, the fixing temperature control table for plain paper 1
is switched to the one for recycled paper.
0 to 1
0: For plain paper 1, 1: For recycled paper
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> TEMP-TBL
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-S-TMP
8-201
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

PLN-LP
Lv.2 Details
Set of fixing arch ctrl with plain paper

fixing when feeding plain paper, color paper or recycled paper (52 to
105 g/m2).
with plain paper, color paper or recycled paper, the control is always
executed at the point where the arch on a paper is large while
feeding plain paper, color paper or recycled paper.
When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs with plain paper, color
Use case
paper or recycled paper
0 to 1
make the arch large with plain paper, color paper or recycled paper
Default value
0
TRC-LP
Set fixing arch ctrl with tracing paper
Lv.2 Details
fixing when feeding tracing paper.
with tracing paper, the control is always executed at the point where
the arch on a paper is large while feeding tracing paper.l
When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs with tracing paper
Use case
0 to 1
make the arch large with tracing paper
Default value
0
T-8-60
8-202
CUSTOM
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
TEMP-TBL
Lv.1 Details
Fixing control temperature:Plain paper 1

To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 (64 to
81 g/m2).
Decrease the value when fixing offset occurs.
Use case
When offset/fixing failure occurs on plain paper 1
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
SC-L-CNT
Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan
To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use
Lv.1 Details
B4 or LTR to determine large size.
The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of
B4-L-CNT.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as
large size, paper with B4 or smaller is determined as small size.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as
large size, paper smaller than B4 is determined as small size.
Use case
As needed
0 to 1
0: B4 size, 1: LTR size
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT
SCANTYPE
Switch of DADF + Reader
To switch to a different type DADF + Reader Unit.
Lv.1 Details
Use case
At installation
0 to 1
0: Reverse Duplex DADF + Reader, 1: 1-Path Duplex DADF +
Reader
Default value
0
8-202

ABK-TOOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP5
Lv.2 Details
Caution
Default value
Allow access from address book mntc tool

To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance
tool.
When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
0 to1
0
Device special settings 1
To execute the device special setting.
Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
8-203
DEV-SP6
Lv.2 Details
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
00000000
DEV-SP7
Lv.2 Details
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
00000000
DEV-SP8
Lv.2 Details
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Default value
USEUPTNR
Set Toner Container use-up mode
Lv.1 Details
To set operation when Toner Container is used up.
When the machine is slanted, it is judged that toner in the Toner
Container is empty before actual life.
When 2 is set, the Toner Container Motor is driven longer than when
setting to 1, so toner in the Toner Container can be used up more.
Upon users request
Use case
Caution
When high duty image is printed frequently, downtime may occur.
0 to 2
0: Not used, 1: 50 rotations, 2: 80 rotations
Default value
1
DFEJCLED
ON/OFF of DADF delivery LED
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to light up the delivery LED of DADF.
Upon users request (The LED is too bright.)
Use case
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
8-203

RDEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REDV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RCON device special settings 1

For customization, etc.
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
8-204
RDEV-SP6
Lv.2 Details
Use case

Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
0
RDEV-SP7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
0
Default value
RDEV-SP8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
0
Default value
T-8-61
8-204
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
USER
COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPY-LIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SLEEP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SIZE-DET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
COUNTER2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-205
Setting of upper limit for copy

To set the upper limit value for copy.
Upon users request
1 to 9999
999
ON/OFF of auto sleep function
To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
ON/OFF of original size detect function
To set ON/OFF of original size detection function.
Upon users request (glare of the Scan Lamp, etc)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Display of software counter 1
To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check
screen.
Upon user/dealers request
Display only. No change is available.
0 to 999
0: No registration
Setting of software counter 2
To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
COUNTER3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
8-205
8-206

DATE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MB-CCV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CONTROL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
B4-L-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of date/time display format

To set date/time display format according to the country or region.
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is
reflected to the followings: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings >
Date/Time Settings, and report output.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY
Control card usage limit for Mail Box
To restrict use of control card for Mail Box.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Unlimited, 1: Limited
1
Charge setting of PDL job
To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connected charge
management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control
card).
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No charge, 1: Charge
0
Count setting of B4 size
To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is
counted as large size or small size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper
smaller than B4 size as small size.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Small size, 1: Large size
0
COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT
TRY-STP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MF-LG-ST
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CNT-DISP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
COPY-JOB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set of suspension at full Finisher Tray

To set whether to suspend or continue output when the full Finisher
Tray is detected.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: At detection of full tray, 1: Detection of height only
0
Display/hide of long original mode
To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button.
When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy> Options
screen and the long length paper becomes available.
Upon users request (use of long original or long length paper)
Long length paper is delivered from the Second Delivery Outlet
(excluding delivery from the Inner Finisher).
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Display/hide of serial number
To set whether to display or hide the serial number on the Counter
Check screen.
When setting to display/hide serial number on the Counter Check
screen
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
0
Setting of copy job reservation
To set whether to allow copy job reservation when the Card Reader/
Coin Manager is used.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0
8-206

OP-SZ-DT
Lv.2 Details
Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open

To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is
opened.
When 0: OFF is set, enter original size manually from the Control
Panel.
When 1: ON is set, original size is detected automatically.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
NW-SCAN
Setting of network scan function usage
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to allow use of network scan function.
Upon users request
Use case
Caution
- Do not change this mode in Japan.
- For PS/PCL machines for overseas (outside Japan), fix the setting
value as 1: Enabled. For others, permit the use.
0 to1
Default value
1
HDCR-DSP
Setting of HDD complete delete method
Lv.2 Details
To set data deletion method of HDD data complete deletion function.
Use case
When switching the deletion method in HDD data complete deletion
mode
1 to 4
1: 1-time deletion with 0 data, 2: 1-time deletion with random data, 3:
3-time deletion with random data, 4: DOD (1st time: a series of fixed
values, 2nd time: a series of complement of fixed values, 3rd time:
random data)
Default value
1
8-207
JOB-INVL
Lv.2 Details
Job intvl setting at interruption copy

To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous
output of the next job. Paper interval becomes longer when starting
pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job is
delivered.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job
1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is
delivered all.
2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered
all. (For all jobs)
Default value
0
LGSW-DSP
ON/OFF of Log display ON/OFF setting
Lv.2 Details
[Not used] To set whether to display Management Settings> Device
Management> Display Log in user mode.
When 1: ON is set, Display Log is displayed in the Device
Management screen. When ON is set, the logs of each job are
displayed in System Status.
When 0: OFF is set, Display Log is not displayed in the Device
Management screen, and the logs of each job are not displayed
either.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
TAB-ROT
Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL
print is made on tab paper.
When 1: Rotated is set, image is rotated.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated
Default value
0
8-207

PR-PSESW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
IDPRN-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
P-CRG-LF
Lv.2 Details
Default value
CPRT-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Display/hide of output pause button

To set whether to display or hide [Pause Printing] button on the
system status/stop screen.
- When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under
reservation
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr
To set the job type that advances the department management
counter.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0:
PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL
Print
COPY category: COPY
1:
PRINT category: Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print
0
Set operation at end of Dev Assy life
To set the operation at the time when the Developing Assembly
reaches the end of its life.
When 1 is set, the Developing Assembly that has reached the end of
its life cannot be used.
0 to 1
0: Not stopped, 1: Stopped
0
ON/OFF of [Print Charge Log] button
To set whether to display the [Print Charge Log] button to print the
charge logs on the charge log screen in user mode.
When 1: ON is set, the button is displayed in Management
Settings> Charge Management> Charge Log Screen.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-208
PCL-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Set of PCL COPIES command control method

To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or
use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of
COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a
page basis)
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of
COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 when collating, as
bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or
later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL when not
collating)
2 to 65535: For future use
Default value
0
CNT-SW
Set default dspl items on charge counter
Lv.1 Details
To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter
Check screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0:
Counter 1 - Total 1: 101
Counter 2 - Total (Black 1): 108
Counter 3 - Copy (Full Color + Single Color/1): 232
Counter 4 - Total A (Full Color + Single Color/1): 149
1:
Counter 1 - Total 2: 102
Counter 2 - Copy (Full Color + Single Color/2): 231
Counter 3 - Total A (Full Color + Single Color/2): 148
Counter 4 - Copy (Black 2): 222
Counter 5 - Total A (Black 2): 133
Default value
0
8-208

TAB-ACC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
BCNT-AST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PRJOB-CP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
DFLT-CPY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ON/OFF of auto cst change for tab ppr

To set to enable/disable auto cassette change when tab paper runs
out.
Upon users request
Be sure to instruct the user to thoroughly comply the following:
- Use tab paper with the same number of tabs.
- Set tab paper.
Be sure to comply the above; otherwise, proper print is not available
and it can cause soiling inside the machine because of toner.
0 to 1
0: Auto cassette change disabled, 1: Auto cassette change enabled
0
Set of inbox print charge target job
To set the job type that advances the count in inbox print with NE
Controller (ASSIST).
When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the inbox
print with NE Controller
0 to 1
0: PDL job, 1: Copy job
0
Set count TX at RX/report print
To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the
charge management device at the time of reception print or report
print.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
0
Setting of color mode for copy
To set the default color mode for copy operation.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2:
Black mode
EUR: 2, Other: 0
8-209
DFLT-BOX
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set of color mode for inbox print

To set the default color mode for inbox print operation.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2:
Black mode
Default value
EUR: 2, Other: 0
DOC-REM
Display/hide of original removal message
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original
when scanning with DADF without opening/closing DADF after
scanning with the Copyboard.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
DPT-ID-7
Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to enter a password at the time of registration/
authentication of department ID.
With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required
beside department ID.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
Default value
0
RUI-RJT
Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives
invalid authentication from remote UI 3 times.
Upon users request
Use case
0 to 1
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
Default value
0
8-209

SND-RATE
Lv.2 Details
Set compress ratio at SEND high compress

To set the compression ratio when the data compression ratio for
SEND (transmission) is set to Compact.
As the value is larger, the compression ratio is higher (the file size
becomes small).
Use case
When making the transmission file size smaller
Caution
As the value is too large, an image is deteriorated.
0 to 2
0: Compression ratio 1/16, 1: Compression ratio 1/20, 2:
Compression ratio 1/24
Default value
0
CTM-S06
Set of password delete from export file
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to delete password for file transmission address from
export file.
When 1 is set, the password of file transmission target is deleted at
the time of exporting address book data from remote UI.
Use case
- When preventing information leak
0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
1
Default value
FREG-SW
Dspl/hide of MEAP counter free rgst area
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP
counter for SEND.
Use case
At problem analysis
Caution
- Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the
Quality Support Division.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
8-210
IFAX-SZL
Lv.2 Details
Setting of IFAX send size limit

To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that
does not go through the server.
With the setting to restrict the data size, it is to be #830 error in the
case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value.
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of
transmission data is always restricted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Limited, 1: Unlimited (Restriction applies when data goes through
the server.)
Default value
1
IFAX-PGD
Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to allow split-data transmission on a page basis in the
case that the transmission size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the
upper limit value.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to receive
approval from the user in advance by explaining the following:
- No guarantee for page order on the reception side
- There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between
pages.
0 to1
Default value
0
MEAPSAFE
Setting of MEAP safe mode
Lv.2 Details
To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system
application, which starts with initial state, is activated. This mode
enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure.
Use case
Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to
be activated due to resource conflict between MEAP applications,
service registration or use order.
0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode
Default value
0
8-210

TRAY-FLL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Set of target tray for tray full notice

To set the tray which is the target of an output tray full notification.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: All trays to which paper can be output, 1: All trays which are
specified as the dedicated trays
Default value
0
PRNT-POS
ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when
a job is canceled due to an error inside the machine (#037, etc.)
except service calls during PDL print.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
AFN-PSWD
Access limit setting to user mode
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to enter a password when accessing to the user
mode.
When 1 is set, password entry of system administrator is required
after pressing Settings/Registration key.
Upon users request
Use case
0 to 1
0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
Default value
0
PTJAM-RC
Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to automatically restart printing after clearing jam that
occurs with PDL print.
Upon users request
Use case
0 to 1
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
Default value
1
8-211
PDL-NCSW
Lv.2 Details
Card mngm setting for PDL print job

To set to make PDL print job be subject to card management by the
Card Reader.
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only
when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches
the department ID.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the
department ID in the case that the card is inserted.
Default value
0
SLP-SLCT
Usage setting of network applications
Lv.2 Details
With the setting to use network-related application, the machine can
be recovered through network because it does not shift to sleep
mode 1.
For this machine to recover from sleep mode 1 through network,
a particular packet needs to be received; however, the existing
network-related application does not send this packet. With the
setting not to use the network-related application, this machine
cannot recover from sleep mode 1 through network when it gets into
sleep mode 1.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: Not used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is available.)
1: Used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is not available.)
Default value
0
PS-MODE
Compatible mode setting at PS usage
Lv.2 Details
To set for compatibility with existing machine regarding image
process or print specification with PS print.
Selecting 1 enables to have the print result equivalent to that of
iR2200/2800/3300 series while selecting 2 enables to have the print
result equivalent to that of iR105 series.
Use case
At replacement
0 to 65535
0: No use of compatibility mode with PS
1: Compatible in a conventional manner with PS Type3 halftone
command (Forming dither pattern: opposite order)
2 to 65535: Spare
Default value
0
8-211

CNCT-RLZ
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
COUNTER8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
2C-CT-SW
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Setting of connection serialize function

Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of
imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0.
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement
because the machine does not receive job data from other
connection until it completes job data reception from the current
connection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
screen.
Upon users request
No change is available.
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
screen.
Upon users request
No change is available.
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
Set of color counter at 2-color mode
To set whether to use the single color counter or full color counter for
count-up in 2-color mode.
0 to 1
0: Single color counter, 1: Full color counter
JAPAN: 0, Other: 1
8-212
JA-FUNC
ON/OFF of job archive function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of job archive function.
Caution
Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is
available (in service mode).
This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job
archive.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
JA-JOB
Setting of job archive target job
Lv.2 Details
To set the job type subject to job archive.
With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed
when executing the target job.
Caution
archive.
0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
JA-RESTR
Setting of job archive limit items
Lv.2 Details
To set restriction items for job archive specification.
With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute
operation to restrict specification.
Caution
archive.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Function to edit document (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
8-212

LDAP-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
FROM-OF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DOM-ADD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SPEAKER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Search condition set for LDAP server

To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server.
When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP
server
0 to 5
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the
next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes
with the next
4
Deletion of e-mail senders address
To set whether to delete the senders address (From) at the time of
e-mail transmission.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
0
Additional entry of e-mail destn domain
To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the
sending address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission.
If specifying xxx.com as a domain in user mode in advance, just
entering aaa enables to display aaa@xxx.com when sending
e-mail.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not added, 1: Added
0
Display/hide to switch speaker/headphone
[Not used] To set whether to display or hide Speaker/Headphone
Switch on the Voice Navigation Settings screen in user mode.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
8-213
FILE-OF
Lv.1 Details
File send prohibition to entered address

To set to prohibit the file transmission to entered address.
File transmission is not available by entering the address because of
no File display on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be
selected, but even if a job is sent, it is to be a transmission error. (End
code #762 is displayed.)
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
- The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be
selected, but it is to be a transmission error. Therefore, be sure to
receive approval from the user in advance to delete the address. Set
the transmission prohibition after deleting the address.
- When #762 is displayed without executing the procedure above,
explain the user that it is different from the description in the Users
Guide.
0 to 1
Default value
0
MAIL-OF
Mail send prohibition to entered address
Lv.1 Details
To set to prohibit the e-mail transmission to entered address.
E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because
of no E-Mail display on the transmission screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Guide.
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-213

IFAX-OF
Lv.1 Details
IFAX send prohibition to entered address

To set to prohibit the IFAX transmission to entered address.
I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because
of no I-Fax display on the transmission screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Guide.
0 to 1
Default value
0
LDAP-DEF
Initial condtn set of LDAP server search
Lv.1 Details
To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at
the time of LDAP server Details search.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 6
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5:
No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > LDAP-SW
JA-DPI
Display of job archive record resolution
Lv.2 Details
To display the resolution of images for job archives recorded in jobs
other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc.
Only display is available in service mode. The setting is available
only in the MEAP applications which support job archiving.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: No conversion, 1: 100 x 100 dpi, 2: 200 x 200 dpi, 3: 300 x 300 dpi
Default value
3
8-214
JA-COMPR
Lv.2 Details
Dspl job archive record compress ratio

To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded
in jobs other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 5
0: No conversion, 1: Compression ratio 1/4, 2: Compression ratio
1/8, 3: Compression ratio 1/16, 4: Compression ratio 1/32, 5:
Compression ratio 1/64
Default value
3
FREE-DSP
Display/hide of charge disable screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the charge disable screen for
switching between charge and no charge.
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin
Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available
for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the charging
system.
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with
the software switch when it is set to display the charge disable
screen in Settings/Registration.
Use case
When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily
releasing the charging system
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
TNRB-SW
Display/hide of Toner Container counter
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter
Check screen.
Use case
When not showing the screen to users
0 to 2
0: Hide, 1: Display (Toner Container counter only), 2: Display (Toner
Container counter + ejection counter)
Default value
USA: 2, Other: 0
8-214

CLR-TIM
Lv.2 Details
Set of HDD Encry Kit data delete timing

To set the timing to completely delete the data when HDD Encryption
Kit is used.
Selecting 0 may reduce the job processing speed because page
data that has been already processed is deleted while the other job
is in process, causing overload to CPU and HDD access.
Selecting 1 improves the job processing speed because the process
is executed after a job is completed.
Use case
Upon request to improve the job processing speed
0 to 1
0: During job process, 1: After the job is completed
Default value
0
JA-FORMT
Display of job archive record format
Lv.2 Details
To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs
other than FAX reception and IFAX reception, etc.
Whether the images processed by Packet JPEG are recorded in
Packet JPEG, or converted into Raster JPEG and then recorded is
displayed.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Packet JPEG, 1: Raster JPEG
Default value
0
HDCR-DSW
Dspl/hide of HDD complete delete ON/OFF
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion
in user mode.
With this setting, HDD data complete deletion function is available
with ON/OFF button on the screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
8-215
SNMP-COA
Lv.2 Details
Inside comty name SNMPaccess limit:admin

To restrict SNMP access by the community name (administrator
right) that is kept internally.
This machine internally retains the community name (administrator
right) other than the SNMP community name that is specified in
user mode. Canon-made utility software, such as NetSpot, uses this
community name.
Because of security concern, select 0/1 in the case to restrict SNMP
access with the internal community name.
Use case
When restricting SNMP access with the community name
(administrator right) that is retained internally
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Read only, 2: Read/Write
Default value
2
SNMP-COU
Inside comty name SNMP access limit:user
Lv.2 Details
To restrict SNMP access by the community name (user right) that is
kept internally.
This machine internally retains the community name (user right)
other than the SNMP community name that is specified in user
mode. Canon-made utility software, such as NetSpot, uses this
community name.
Because of security concern, select 0/1 in the case to restrict SNMP
access with the internal community name.
Use case
When restricting SNMP access with the community name (user right)
that is retained internally
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Read only, 2: Read/Write
2
Default value
BWCL-DSP
Display/hide of clr/B&W selection screen
Lv.2 Details
[Not used] To set whether to display the color/B&W selection screen
to select the default of the color mode.
Use case
When displaying the color mode default selection screen
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
STPL-MAX
[Not used]
8-215

USBH-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Display/hide of Use USB Host

To set whether to display Preferences> External Interface> USB
Settings> Use USB Host.
By selecting 1: Display, whether to use USB host on USB Settings
screen can be selected.
Use case
When switching to display or hide Use USB Host on USB Settings
screen
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
USBM-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB ex-memory device driver
Lv.2 Details
Settings> Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device.
By selecting 0: Hide, the item is not displayed, and the user
administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB external memory device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device, set 0 after the specified
setting is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
USBI-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB input device driver set
Lv.2 Details
Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device.
By selecting 0: Hide, the item is not displayed, and the user
administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB input device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of Use
MEAP Driver for USB Input Device, set 0 after the specified setting
is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
8-216
CTCHKDSP
Lv.1 Details
Display/hide of Print List

To set whether to display or hide Print List on the Counter Check
screen.
Model name, serial number information, counter check date and
counter information can be output as Total Page Count List.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
USBR-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB infrared device driver
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display Preferences > External Interface > USB
Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device, set 0 after the specified
setting is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
POL-SCAN
Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set
Lv.1 Details
When 1: Display is set, the Rights Management Server function
screen is displayed.
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature,
it is possible to hide if not necessary.
Upon users request
Use case
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
JAPAN: 1, Other: 0
JA-SBOX
Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Use case
0 to1
0
Default value
8-216
8-217

JA-DFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-REP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-FREP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-BOX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-FORM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PREV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM

To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
0 to1
0
Setting of TX Report with image: SAM
To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
0 to1
0
Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM
To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
0 to1
0
Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM
To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
0 to1
0
Setting of image composition: SAM
To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled.
0 to1
0
Setting of preview page deletion: SAM
To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the
time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen.
0 to1
0
JA-PULL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PDLB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-JOBK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-JDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-RUI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of network scan: SAM

To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled.
0 to1
0
Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM
To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple
Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from
the printer driver.
0 to1
0
Setting of job merge allowance:SAM
To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
0 to1
0
Setting of JDF: SAM
To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
0 to1
0
Setting of Inbox document access: SAM
To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW
SAM
When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is
enabled.
0 to1
0
8-217

JA-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM

To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time
of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, uploading of the Inbox document with the Web
Browser is enabled.
Use case
0 to1
Default value
0
CS-ACC
Set paper source switch in color mode
Lv.1 Details
To change Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off in user mode to
switch of paper source in color mode.
When 1 is set, the meaning of ON/OFF of Paper Drawer Auto
Selection On/Off screen changes.
ON: Paper sources that can be selected when color mode is other
than B&W
OFF: Paper sources that can be selected when color mode is B&W
Use case
When switching the paper source in color mode
0 to 1
0: Same as conventional machines, 1: Paper source switch in color
mode
Default value
0
EXP-CRYP
Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the
Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings
via RUI.
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported
without encryption.
Use case
When there is a need to export password without encryption because
of operation and tool
Caution
Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption
because of security concern.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
8-218
SLEEP1SW
Lv.1 Details
Power supply when shifting to SLEEP1

When shifting to SLEEP1 mode, the power stops to be supplied, so it
takes time to activate after a job is received.
When 1 is set, the power keeps to be supplied even after shifting to
SLEEP1 mode, so the activation of job processing becomes earlier.
Upon users request (when job processing after shifting to SLEEP1
Use case
is slow)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
EZY-SCRP
ON/OFF of secure print simple auth
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to conduct secure print simple authentication.
When 1 is set, secured print, encryption secured print and inbox print
are received, but the normal print jobs are canceled.
If the password 3758211 is entered at job sending, authentication
by entering the password on the Control Panel is not required. If the
password is not entered at job sending, authentication by entering
the password on the Control Panel is necessary at job output.
In addition, the following selection is added as auto deletion time of
secure job: 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
DMN-MTCH
ON/OFF of secure print domain judgment
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display only the job which matches the domain in
the My Job Status screen of the secure print.LS
When 1 is set, only the job which matches the user name and
domain name is displayed in the My Job Status screen, so the job
which does not match the domain is not displayed.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
8-218
8-219

SMD-EXPT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SNDSTREN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
FAXSTREN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CNCL-ATH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of export target data: remote UI

To set whether to export service mode data from remote UI.
When 1 is set, service mode data is displayed as the target data
of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the
same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Set of setting delete aftr scan and send
To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the Scan and Send screen.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Retain
JP: 1, USA, EUR, AU, CN, KR, TW, ASIA: 0
Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit
To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the Fax screen.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Retain
JP: 1, USA, EUR, AU, CN, KR, TW, ASIA: 0
ON/OFF of auth at secured job stop
To improve the security of secured job by conducting authentication
at stopping of a secured job when user authentication is not
performed.
When changing the operation specification of secured print upon
users request
0 to 1
0:OFF,1:ON
0
T-8-62
8-219
8-220

SCALL-SW
Lv.1 Details
Display/hide of Service Call button

[Not used] (for expansion)
To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the
Control Panel.
Use case
When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service
Call button
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
SCALLCMP
Set of repair request complete notice
Lv.1 Details
[Not used] (for expansion)
With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent
to UGW server to clear the repair-request status that is retained
internally.
Use case
When service technician uses this mode after completing repair
0 to 1
Default value
0
T-8-63
8-220
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST
CST
COPIER > OPTION > CST

U1-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U2-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U3-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U4-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CST1-P1
Lv.1 Details
Default value
8-221
Dis/hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU1

To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Setting of Cassette 1 paper size
To set the paper size used in Cassette 1.
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
USA: 1, Other: 0
CST1-P2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
USA: 1, Other: 0
Default value
CST2-P1
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
USA: 1, Other: 0
Default value
CST2-P2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
USA: 1, Other: 0
Default value
CST3-P1
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
USA: 1, Other: 0
CST3-P2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
USA: 1, Other: 0
CST4-P1
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
USA: 1, Other: 0
8-221
8-222
CST4-P2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
USA: 1, Other: 0
Default value
CST1-U1
Set Cst1 overseas special ppr category 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 1.
0 to 43
0: A4-R/LTR-R, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 26: OFI,
27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used, 33:
A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not
used, 42: FA4, 43: Not used
0
Default value
CST1-U2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 34
0: 16K-R, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24 to 31: Not used, 32:
G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used
0
Default value
CST1-U3
Lv.1 Details
0 to 31
0: B4/B5/LTR/16K, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used,
29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
0
Default value
CST1-U4
Lv.1 Details
0 to 28
0: LGL, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
Default value
0
CST2-U1
Lv.1 Details
0 to 43
0: A4-R/LTR-R, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 26:OFI,
0
Default value
CST2-U2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 34
0
Default value
CST2-U3
Lv.1 Details
0 to 31
0
Default value
CST2-U4
Lv.1 Details
0 to 28
Default value
0
CST3-U1
Lv.1 Details
0 to 43
Default value
0
8-222
8-223
CST3-U2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 34
0
Default value
CST3-U3
Lv.1 Details
0 to 31
0
Default value
CST3-U4
Lv.1 Details
0 to 28
0
Default value
CST4-U1
Lv.1 Details
0 to 43
Default value
0
CST4-U2
Lv.1 Details
0 to 34
Default value
0
CST4-U3
Lv.1 Details
0 to 31
0
Default value
CST4-U4
Lv.1 Details
0 to 28
0
Default value
T-8-64
8-223
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC
ACC
COPIER > OPTION > ACC

COIN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-224
Setting of charge management

To set charge management method.
At installation of Coin Manager
Following items are automatically specified when changing the value
to 3 (from 0 to 2) when setting 3. The change will not be returned
even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode has
been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL, AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv4 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP
Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv6 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > FTP Print Settings >
Use FTP Printing=OFF
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPP Print Settings=ON
- Preferences> Network> SMB Server Settings> SMB Printer
Settings> Use SMB=ON
- Function Settings> Send> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication
Settings> SMTP Receive, POP=OFF
Following items are automatically specified when changing the value
to 4 (from 0 to 2) when setting 4. The change will not be returned
even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 4) once the mode has
been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX, UIRSCAN, UI-EPRNT, UI-HOLD=0
- Management Settings> Device Management> Display Log=OFF
0 to 7
0: No charge
1: Charge with Coin Manager
2: Charge with remote counter
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: New SC mode
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR
DK-P
Setting of Paper Deck paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck.
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: LTR, 2: Not used
0
Default value
CARD-SW
Screen set when Coin Manager connected
Lv.1 Details
To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control
Panel when the Coin Manager is connected.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: Coin, 1: Card, 2: Coin and card, 3: Card (for customization)
Default value
0
STPL-LMT
Set number of sheets for saddle stitch
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets for saddle stitch
0 to 3
Default value
3
SC-TYPE
Set of Coin Manager supported machine
Lv.2 Details
To set the machine that supports the Coin Manager.
Upon users request
Use case
Caution
Do not use this setting for the machines other than the ones that
support the Coin Manager.
0 to 1
0: Machine installed in convenience stores, 1: Self-operated copy
machine
Default value
0
OUT-TRAY
Presence/absence of Third Delivery Tray
Lv.1 Details
To set whether the Third Delivery Tray is installed or not.
When the Third Delivery Tray is installed, set 1.
Use case
When the Third Delivery Tray is installed
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-224

CC-SPSW
Lv.2 Details
Support setting of control card I/F

To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select 1: Priority
on speed.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets,
select 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets.
Use case
Upon users request (when connecting to the external counter
management system using the control card interface)
Caution
With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the
upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing
performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0 to 2
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number
of sheets
Default value
0
UNIT-PRC
Setting of Coin Manager currency unit
Lv.2 Details
To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
Use case
0 to 6
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No
currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional
unit)
Default value
0
IN-TRAY
Presence/absence of Second Delivery Tray
Lv.1 Details
To set whether the Second Delivery Tray is installed or not.
When the Second Delivery Tray is installed, set 1.
Use case
When the Second Delivery Tray is installed
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-225
DA-PUCT
Lv.2 Details
Set pickup/delivery comctn at DA charge

When a pickup and delivery notification error occurs due to network
failure, etc., the print operation might be done without charging.
This is to set the number of sheets that can be picked up after the
machine receives Ack single from DA.
When the value is decreased, the number of prints to be made
without charging is decreased, but the productivity may decrease.
When the value is increased, the productivity does not decrease, but
the number of prints to be made without charging is increased.
Caution
As the value is smaller, the number of prints to be made without
charging is decreased, but the productivity might be lowered.
2 to 10
Default value
6
MIN-PRC
Set of Coin Manager minimum price
Lv.1 Details
To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount
to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case
Caution
This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER >
OPTION > ACC > COIN.
0 to 9999
Default value
10
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
MAX-PRC
Set of Coin Manager maximum price
Lv.1 Details
To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum
amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese
yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case
Caution
This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER >
OPTION > ACC > COIN.
0 to 9999
Default value
8800
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
8-225

MIC-TUN
Lv.1 Details
Manual adj of voice recognize microphone

To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the
connected voice recognition microphone.
Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in user mode; however,
adjust it manually as needed.
Use case
When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning
0 to 255
Default value
128
SRL-SPSW
Setting of Serial I/F Kit support
Lv.1 Details
To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select 1: Priority
on speed.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets,
select 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets.
Use case
At installation of Serial Interface Kit
Caution
With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the
upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing
performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0 to 2
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number
of sheets
Default value
0
CC-EXT
Set of information output at CCV control
Lv.1 Details
To set the information output of large/small paper size and color/
B&W at CCV control.
Use case
When installing a machine which requires the information on large/
small paper size and color/B&W
0 to 1
0: Not output, 1: Output
Default value
0
8-226
PDL-THR
Lv.2 Details
Norm PDL print set: External charge mode

To set the normal PDL print processing when setting external charge
mode 6/7 with COIN.
When 0 is set, a job is canceled. When 1 is set, a job is executed.
0 to 1
0: Cancel, 1: Execute
0
Default value
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
CR-TYPE
Setting of Card Reader
Lv.1 Details
To set the model of the Card Reader.
Set 0 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-F1. It operates even
1 is set, but recognition rate decreases.
Use case
When connecting the Card Reader-F1
0 to 1
0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1
Default value
0
T-8-65
8-226
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
INT-FACE
8-227
LCNS-TR
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
IMG-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Connection setting of print server

To set connection with print server.
At installation
0 to 5
0: Normal mode (Print server not connected), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print
server connected, 4, 5: Not used
Default value
0
AP-OPT
[Not used]
AP-ACCNT
[Not used]
AP-CODE
[Not used]
Timeout setting of network connection
NWCT-TM
To set the time to keep network connection between this machine
Lv.2 Details
and the PC application (keep-alive setting).
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute.
1 to 5
Unit
min
Default value
5
Display of print server connection
CNT-TYPE
To display an automatically connected print server.
Lv.1 Details
Use case
At installation of print server
1 to 999
Default value
1
T-8-66
ST-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-SEND
ST-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-ENPDF
Installation state dspl of SEND function

To display installation state of SEND function when disabling the
function with license transfer.
When checking whether SEND function is installed
1) Select ST-SEND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
displayed under TR-SEND.
When operation finished normally: OK!
1
Trns license key dspl of SEND function
To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling
the function with license transfer.l
- When replacing the HDD
- When replacing the device
1) Select ST-SEND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state dspl of encrypted PDF
To display installation state of encrypted PDF transmission function
when disabling the function with license transfer.
When checking whether encrypted PDF transmission function is
installed
1) Select ST-ENPDF.
displayed under TR-ENPDF.
0
Trns license key dspl of encrypted PDF
To display transfer license key to use encrypted PDF transmission
function when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-227

ST-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-SPDF
ST-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-EXPDF
Installation state dspl of searchable PDF

To display installation state of searchable PDF when disabling the
When checking whether searchable PDF is installed
1) Select ST-SPDF.
displayed under TR-SPDF.
0
Trns license key dspl of searchable PDF
To display transfer license key to use searchable PDF when disabling
the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-SPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Instal state dspl of encryPDF+searchblPDF
To display installation state of encrypted PDF + searchable PDF
When checking whether encrypted PDF + searchable PDF are
installed
1) Select ST-EXPDF.
displayed under TR-EXPDF.
0
Trns license key of encryPDF+searchblPDF
To display transfer license key to use encrypted PDF + searchable
PDF when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-EXPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-228
ST-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PDFDR
ST-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-SCR
ST-HDCLR
TR-HDCLR
OF-HDCLR
Install state dspl of direct print PDF

To display installation state of direct print PDF function when
disabling the function with license transfer.
When checking whether direct print PDF function is installed
1) Select ST-PDFDR.
displayed under TR-PDFDR.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of direct print PDF
To display transfer license key to use direct print PDF function when
1) Select ST-PDFDR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of encry secure print
To display installation state of encrypted secure print when disabling
When checking whether encrypted secure print is installed
1) Select ST-SCR.
displayed under TR-SCR.
0
Trns license key dspl of encry secure pnt
To display transfer license key to use encrypted secure print when
1) Select ST-SCR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
This mode is enabled when there is 3DES+USH-H Board.
24 digits
[Not used]
[Not used]
[Not used]
[Not used]
8-228

ST-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-BRDIM
ST-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-VNC
Install state dspl of BarDIMM function

To display installation state of BarDIMM function when disabling the
When checking whether BarDIMM function is installed
1) Select ST-BRDIM.
displayed under TR-BRDIM.
0
Transfer license key dspl of BarDIMM func
To display transfer license key to use BarDIMM function when
1) Select ST-BRDIM.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft
To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when
When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed
1) Select ST-VNC.
displayed under TR-VNC.
0
Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Softl
To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software
1) Select ST-VNC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-229
ST-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-WEB
ST-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-HRPDF
Install state dspl of Web Access Software

To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling
When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
1) Select ST-WEB.
displayed under TR-WEB.
0
Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft
To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when
1) Select ST-WEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of high compress PDF
To display installation state of high compression PDF function when
When checking whether high compression PDF function is installed
1) Select ST-HRPDF.
displayed under TR-HRPDF.
1
Trns lcns key dspl of high compress PDF
To display transfer license key to use high compression PDF function
1) Select ST-HRPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-229

ST-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-TRSND
ST-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-WTMRK
Install state dspl of trial SEND function

To display installation state of trial SEND function when disabling the
When checking whether trial SEND function is installed
1) Select ST-TRSND.
displayed under TR-TRSND.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of trial SEND function
To display transfer license key to use trial SEND function when
1) Select ST-TRSND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of secure watermark
To display installation state of secure watermark function when
When checking whether secure watermark function is installed
1) Select ST-WTMRK.
displayed under TR-WTMRK.
0
Trns license key dspl of secure watermark
To display transfer license key to use secure watermark function
1) Select ST-WTMRK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
24 digits
[Not used]
ST-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-TSPDF
ST-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-USPDF
8-230
Install state dspl of time stamp PDF: JP

To display installation state of time stamp PDF transmission function
(JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer.
When checking whether time stamp PDF transmission function (JP
only) is installed
1) Select ST-TSPDF.
displayed under TR-TSPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of time stamp PDF: JP
To display transfer license key to use time stamp PDF transmission
function (JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-TSPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of dgtl user sign PDF
To display installation state of digital user signature PDF transmission
When checking whether digital user signature PDF transmission
function is installed
1) Select ST-USPDF.
displayed under TR-USPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of dgtl user sign PDF
To display transfer license key to use digital user signature PDF
transmission function when disabling the function with license
transfer.
1) Select ST-USPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-230

ST-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-DVPDF
ST-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-SCPDF
Install state dspl of device sign PDF

To display installation state of device signature PDF transmission
When checking whether device signature PDF transmission function
is installed
1) Select ST-DVPDF.
displayed under TR-DVPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of device sign PDF
To display transfer license key to use device signature PDF
transmission function when disabling the function with license
transfer.
1) Select ST-DVPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF
To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling
When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed
1) Select ST-SCPDF.
displayed under TR-SCPDF.
0
Trns license key dspl of Trace&Smooth PDF
To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when
1) Select ST-SCPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-231
ST-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-AMS
ST-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-ERDS
Instal state dspl of Access Mngm System

To display installation state of Access Management System when
When checking whether Access Management System is installed
1) Select ST-AMS.
displayed under TR-AMS.
0
Trns license key dis: Access Mngm System
To display transfer license key to use Access Management System
1) Select ST-AMS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
24 digits
[Not used]
Instal state dspl of monitor service func
To display installation state of monitoring service function when
When checking whether monitoring service function is installed
1) Select ST-ERDS.
displayed under TR-ERDS.
0
Trn lcns key dspl of monitor service func
To display transfer license key to use monitoring service function
1) Select ST-ERDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-231

ST-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PS
ST-PCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PCL
Install state display of PS function

To display installation state of PS function when disabling the
When checking whether PS function is installed
1) Select ST-PS.
displayed under TR-PS.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS function
To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling the
1) Select ST-PS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state dspl of PCL function
To display installation state of PCL function when disabling the
When checking whether PCL function is installed
1) Select ST-PCL.
displayed under TR-PCL.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PCL function
1) Select ST-PCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-232
ST-PSLI5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSLI5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSLI5
ST-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-LIPS5
Installation state display of PS/UFR II

To display installation state of PS/UFR II function when disabling the
When checking whether PS/UFR II is installed
1) Select ST-PSLI5.
displayed under TR-PSLI5.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS/UFR II
To display transfer license key to use PS/UFR II function when
1) Select ST-PSLI5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state display of UFR II
To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the
When checking whether UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-LIPS5.
displayed under TR-LIPS5.
0
Transfer lcns key dspl of UFR II function
To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling
1) Select ST-LIPS5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-232

ST-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-LIPS4
ST-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSPCL
Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP

To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when
When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
1) Select ST-LIPS4.
displayed under TR-LIPS4.
0
Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP
To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when
1) Select ST-LIPS4.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of PS/PCL function
To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling the
When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed
1) Select ST-PSPCL.
displayed under TR-PSPCL.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func
To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when
1) Select ST-PSPCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-233
ST-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PCLUF
ST-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSLIP
Install state dspl of PCL/UFR II function

To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling
When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-PCLUF.
displayed under TR-PCLUF.
0
Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func
To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when
1) Select ST-PCLUF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state dspl of PS function
To display installation state of PS function when disabling the
When checking whether PS function is installed
1) Select ST-PSLIP.
displayed under TR-PSLIP.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS function
1) Select ST-PSLIP.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-233

ST-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSPCU
ST-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-LXUFR
Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func

To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling
When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-PSPCU.
displayed under TR-PSPCU.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when
1) Select ST-PSPCU.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of UFR II function
To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the
When checking whether UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-LXUFR.
displayed under TR-LXUFR.
1
Trns license key dspl of UFR II function
To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling
1) Select ST-LXUFR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-234
ST-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-HDCR2
ST-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-JBLK
Install state dis:HDD Init All Data/Set

To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when
When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
1) Select ST-HDCR2.
displayed under TR-HDCR2.
0
Trns lcns key dis:HDD Init All Data/Set
To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings
1) Select ST-HDCR2.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock
To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling
When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed
1) Select ST-JBLK.
displayed under TR-JBLK.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock
To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when
1) Select ST-JBLK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-234

ST-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-AFAX
ST-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-REPDF
Installation state dspl of remote fax

To display installation state of remote fax client function when
When checking whether remote fax client function is installed
1) Select ST-AFAX.
displayed under TR-AFAX.
0
Transfer license key dspl of remote fax
To display transfer license key to use remote fax client function when
1) Select ST-AFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dis:reader extensions PDF
To display installation state of reader extensions PDF function when
When checking whether reader extensions PDF function is installed
1) Select ST-REPDF.
displayed under TR-REPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dis:reader extensions PDF
To display transfer license key to use reader extensions PDF function
1) Select ST-REPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-235
ST-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-OOXML
ST-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-XPS
Install state dspl of Office Open XML

To display installation state of Office Open XML transmission function
When checking whether Office Open XML transmission function is
installed
1) Select ST-OOXML.
displayed under TR-OOXML.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Office Open XML
To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when
1) Select ST-OOXML.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of direct print XPS
To display installation state of direct print XPS when disabling the
When checking whether direct print XPS is installed
1) Select ST-XPS.
displayed under TR-XPS.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of direct print XPS
To display transfer license key to use direct print XPS when disabling
1) Select ST-XPS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-235

ST-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-2600
ST-NCAPT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-NCAPT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-NCAPT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Inst state dis: scrty func of IEEE2600.1

To display installation state of security function of IEEE2600.1 when
When checking whether security function of IEEE2600.1 is installed
1) Select ST-2600.
displayed under TR-2600.
0
Trns lcns key dis: IEEE2600.1 scrty func
To display transfer license key to use security function of
IEEE2600.1 when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-2600.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state display of NetCap func
To display installation state of network packet capture function when
When checking whether network packet capture function is installed
1) Select ST-NCAPT.
displayed under TR-NCAPT.
0
Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func
To display transfer license key to use network packet capture
1) Select ST-NCAPT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
License key (24 characters)
Lcns deactivation of NetCap function
To deactivate the license of network packet capture function when
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-236
ST-OPFNT
Lv.2 Details
Install status display of PCL option font

To display the installation status of PCL option font when transfer is
disabled
Use case
When checking whether PCL option font is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under ST-OPFNT.
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Default value
0
TR-OPFNT
Trns lcns key display of PCL option font
Lv.2 Details
To display transfer license key to use PCL option font function with
Policy when transfer is disabled.
Use case
- When replacing HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select TR-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
24 digits
T-8-67
8-236
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG
TEST
8-237
COPIER > TEST > PG
DENS-Y
Lv.1 Details
PG
COPIER > TEST > PG
TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Test print
To execute the test print.
At problem analysis
Test print is executed.
Caution
Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
0 to 100
0: Image from CCD (Normal print)
1 to 3: For R&D use
4: 16 gradations
5: Whole-area halftone image
6: Grid
7 to 9: For R&D use
10: MCYBk horizontal stripes
11: For R&D use
12: YMCBk 64 gradations
13: For R&D use
14: Full color 16 gradations
15 to 100: For R&D use
0
Default value
TXPH
Setting of test print image mode
To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
Lv.1 Details
This mode is enabled for test print only.
At problem analysis
Use case
0 to 6
0: Error diffusion
1: Low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
2: High screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
3: Copy screen (approx. 220 lines)
4: REOS screen (no screen structure)
5 to 6: Not used
THRU
Image correction table use at test print
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test
print output.
Use case
At problem analysis
0 to 1
0: Used, 1: Not used
Use case
DENS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DENS-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COLOR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COLOR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj of Y-color density at test print

To adjust Y-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
At test print (TYPE=5)
0 to 255
Adj of M-color density at test print
To adjust M-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
0 to 255
Adj of C-color density at test print
To adjust C-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
0 to 255
Adj of Bk-color density at test print
To adjust Bk-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
0 to 255
Y-color output setting at test print
To make a setting of Y-color output for test print.
The setting is applied to all types.
When setting COLOR-Y to 1 and other items to 0, a single Y color
is output.
At test print
0 to 1
M-color output setting at test print
To make a setting of M-color output for test print.
When setting COLOR-M to 1 and other items to 0, a single M
color is output.
At test print
0 to 1
8-237
8-238
COPIER > TEST > PG

COLOR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COLOR-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
F-M-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PG-PICK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COPIER > TEST > PG
C-color output setting at test print

To make a setting of C-color output for test print.
When setting COLOR-C to 1 and other items to 0, a single C color
is output.
At test print
0 to 1
Bk-color output setting at test print
To make a setting of Bk-color output for test print.
When setting COLOR-K to 1 and other items to 0, a single Bk
color is output.
At test print
0 to 1
Setting of PG full color/single color
To set for the output in full color/single color with PG.
When separating (identifying) the cause whether its due to color or
monochrome.
0 to 1
0: Full color, 1: Single color
Setting of test print paper source
To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
- At problem analysis
- At test print output
1 to 8
1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 5: Paper
Deck, 6: Multi-purpose Tray, 7 to 8: Not used
Setting of PG 2-sided mode
To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
At problem analysis
0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
0
PG-QTY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
FINISH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of PG output quantity

To set the number of sheets for PG output.
At problem analysis
1 to 999
sheet
1
Accessory processing function test print
To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function.
When checking operation of accessory processing function
1) Enter the number of sheets in PG-QTY, and then press OK key.
3) Press Start button.
The machine outputs a test print.
0 to 99
0: N/A
1: Staple (front) *1
2: Staple (2 points) *1
3: Staple (rear) *1
4: Booklet (saddle stitch) *1
5: Z-fold (single sleeve) *1
6: 2-fold *1
7: C-fold *2
8: V-fold *2
9: 4-fold *2
10: Z-fold (out-3-fold) *2
11: Punch (Inner Puncher) *3
12: Multiple-hole punch *4
13: Shift *1
14 to 99: Spare (for future use)
*1 Finisher, *2 Multi-folding machine, *3 Inner Puncher, *4 Multiplehole Puncher
0
COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY
T-8-68
8-238
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
NETWORK
8-239
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

PING
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Network connection check

To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
- When checking network connection at the time of installation
- At network connection failure
Adj/set/operate method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the
main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at users site that installation of
this machine is complete, and ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection,
and check the remote host address of PING transmission target.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press
OK key and Start key.
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In
case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go to step 5).
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK
key and Start key.
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check
NIC.
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to
check the setting again.
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press
OK key.
OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the
system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment
and ask for countermeasure.
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/
replace NIC.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: NG
BML-DISP
Set System Monitor scrn: BMlinks support
To set whether to only display the device configuration in the System
Lv.2 Details
Monitor screen when supporting BMlinks.
When 1 is set, the Status and Log are not displayed.
Use case
When supporting BMlinks
0 to 1
0: Ordinary System Monitor screen
1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed
Default value
0
IPV6-ADR
Lv.1 Details
Caution
PING-IP6
Lv.1 Details
IPSECPOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IPSECINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
Setting of PING send address (IPv6)

To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK>
PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the IPv6 environment
can be checked.
- Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
- Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal
numbers (0 to 9, a to f) and a separator (:).
Up to 40 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0 to 9, A to F)
and a separator (:)
COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6
PING transmission to IPv6 address
To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be
checked.
COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR
Polling test of IPSec Encryption Board
To execute polling test of IPSec Encryption Board.
To check whether a hardware failure has occurred.
When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the
IPSec Encryption Board
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An
error occurred to the result.)
Interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board
To execute the interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board.
To check whether a hardware failure has occurred.
When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the
IPSec Encryption Board
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An
error occurred to the result.)
T-8-69
8-239
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
NET-CAP
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
CAPOFFON
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
STT-STP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CAPSTATE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
PONSTART
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
OVERWRIT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
PAYLOAD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
FILE-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-240
ON/OFF of NetCap function

To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function.
When switching ON/OFF of network packet capture function
0:OFF 1:ON
0
Start and stop of network packet capture
To start and stop network packet capture.
When starting and stopping network packet capture
0:STOP 1:START
0
Status of NetCap function
To display the status of network packet capture function
When displaying the status of network packet capture function
None
None
Start of NetCap function at power-on
To set whether to enable network packet capture function from
power-on.
When switching whether to enable network packet capture function
from power-on
0 to 1
0
Data overwriting control: NetCap function
To set whether to finish capturing or continue overwriting when HDD
becomes full.
When setting whether to finish capturing or continue overwriting
when HDD becomes full
1
Payload discard: NetCap function
To set whether to discard payload of captured packet.
When setting whether to discard payload of captured packet
0
Deletion of file: NetCap function
To delete data collected by network packet capture function.
When deleting data collected by network packet capture function
None
SIMPFILT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ENCDATA
Lv.2 Details
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
Use case
Caution
Default value
Settings of packet data filtering

To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data.
When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.)
When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receivers or
senders address coincides with the Mac address of this machine.
At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
0 to 2
0: Not filtered,
1: Filtered
2: Not used
Setting of packet data encryption
To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured
packet data to the USB memory.
- At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
- When improving security of written packet data
This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB memory.
Even when the packet data is loaded using SST, the file is specified,
therefore the setting is disabled.
0 to 2
0: Encrypted (encrypted file)
1: Not encrypted (plain text file)
2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file)
0
T-8-70
8-240
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
COUNTER
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
TOTAL
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
SERVICE1
Lv.1 Details
SERVICE2
Lv.1 Details
COPY
Lv.1 Details
PDL-PRT
Lv.1 Details
FAX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
BOX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
RPT-PRT
Lv.1 Details
8-241
Service-purposed total counter 1

To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
0 to 99999999
Service-purposed total counter 2
0 to 99999999
Total copy counter
0 to 99999999
PDL print counter
To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine
according to the charge counter at PDL print.
0 to 99999999
FAX reception print counter
according to the charge counter at FAX reception.
0 to 99999999
Inbox print counter
according to the charge counter at Inbox print.
0 to 99999999
Report print counter
according to the charge counter at report print.
2-sided copy/print counter

according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print.
0 to 99999999
SCAN
Scan counter
Lv.1 Details
To count the number of scan operations according to the charge
counter when the scanning operation is complete.
Adj/set/operate method When the counter is cleared
Select the item, and then press Clear key.
0 to 99999999
T-8-71
0 to 99999999
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
8-241
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
PICK-UP
FEEDER
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
C1
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Details
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Details
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Details
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Unit
8-242
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
Cassette 1 pickup total counter

Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Number of sheets
Number of sheets
Number of sheets
Number of sheets
Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
Number of sheets
Deck pickup total counter
Number of sheets
2-sided pickup total counter
Number of sheets
FEED
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
DFOP-CNT
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
DADF original pickup total counter

When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
Number of sheets
DADF hinge open/close counter
When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter
Number of times
T-8-73
T-8-72
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
8-242
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
JAM
MISC
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
TOTAL
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
FEEDER
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
SORTER
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C1
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Use case
Unit
8-243
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
Printer total jam counter

When checking the total jam counter of printer
Number of times
Feeder total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of feeder
Number of times
Finisher total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of finisher
Number of times
Duplex Unit jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
Number of times
Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray
Number of times
Right Deck jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Right Deck
Number of times
Left Deck jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Left Deck
Number of times
Cassette 3 pickup jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Cassette 3
Number of times
Cassette 4 pickup jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Cassette 4
Number of times
POD Deck Lite jam counter
When checking the jam counter of POD Deck Lite
Number of times
T-SPLY-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ALLPW-ON
Lv.1 Details
T-8-74
Use case
Unit
HDD-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
ST-NDL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
ENT-PTH
Lv.1 Details
Unit
TRAY-CHA
Lv.1 Details
Unit
PUNCH
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
Y toner supply counter

Number of Y color toner supply blocks.
Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw.
When checking the usage status of toner
Number of blocks
0
M toner supply counter
Number of M color toner supply blocks.
Number of blocks
0
C toner supply counter
Number of C color toner supply blocks.
Number of blocks
0
Bk toner supply counter
Number of Bk color toner supply blocks.
Number of blocks
0
Number of DCON PCB power-on times
Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
When checking the usage status of the product
Number of times
Number of HDD start-up times
To count up at HDD start-up.
When checking the usage status of the product
Number of times
Staple needle counter: Fin-A1/C1
To count the use of the staple needle.
Number of times
Entrance paper path counter: Fin-C1
Entrance paper path counter
Number of sheets
Tray change counter: Fin-C1
Tray change counter
Number of times
[Not used]
8-243
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
JOB
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

PUN-CAB
Lv.1 Details
Unit
PUN-WST
Lv.1 Details
SADDLE
SDL-STPL
SDL-NDL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
ESC-PTH
SUC-A-Y
SUC-A-M
SUC-A-C
SUC-A-K
SUC-L-Y
SUC-L-M
SUC-L-C
SUC-L-K
8-244
Punch Unit Cable counter: Fin-C1

Punch Unit Cable counter
Number of times
Punch waste counter: Fin-C1
Punch Unit punch waste counter
[Not used]
[Not used]
Saddle staple needle counter: Fin-C1
To count the use of the Saddle staple needle.
Number of times
[Not used]
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
COPIER > COUNTER > JOB

DVPAPLEN
Lv.1 Details
Unit
DVRUNLEN
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Average paper length of job

Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine
starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average paper length affects
calculation of the life.
0 to 99999999
mm
Average distance of job
Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine
starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average running distance affects
calculation of the life.
0 to 99999999
mm
T-8-76
T-8-75
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
8-244
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
DRBL-1
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

T/S-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
T-CLN-BD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
2TR-ROLL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-245
Transfer Separation Guide parts counter

Transfer Separation Guide Unit
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
then press OK key.
Clear the counter value after replacement.
0 to 99999999
0
ITB Cleaning Blade parts counter
ITB Cleaning Blade
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
ITB parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter.
PT-DRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DV-UNT-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
DV-UNT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
DV-UNT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
DV-UNT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Bk Photosensitive Drum parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Developing Assembly (C) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Developing Assembly (Y) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Developing Assembly (M) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Developing Assembly (Bk) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
8-245

C1-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C1-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C2-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C2-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Cassette1 Separation Roller prts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette1 Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-246
M-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
M-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-LW-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr

Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pressure Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Fixing Assembly parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-246

FX-UP-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-LW-BR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
WST-TNR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TN-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Fixing Film Unit parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Fixing Bearing parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Waste Toner Container parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Toner Filter parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-247
PT-DR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PT-DR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PT-DR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TR-ROLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Y Photosensitive Drum parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
M Photosensitive Drum parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
C Photosensitive Drum parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Transfer Roller(Bk) parts counter
Due to the engagement/disengagement of the Roller, Bk Roller
counter is advanced separately from Y/M/C Roller
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-ROLC
8-247

TR-ROLC
Lv.1 Details
Primary Transfer Roller(Y/M/C) parts counter

Due to the engagement/disengagement of the Roller, Y/M/C Roller
counter is advanced separately from Bk Roller
Use case
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-ROLK
T-8-77
8-248
DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Pickup Roller parts counter: All Reader

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is
Supplement/memo
advanced every time a sheet is fed.
DF-SP-PD
Pickup Separation Pad parts cntr: Reader
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DF-FD-RL
Feed Roller1 parts counter: D-Reader
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-248

DF-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Separation Roller prts counter: D-Reader

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
LNT-TAP1
Dust-collecting counter: All Reader
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
LNT-TAP2
Dust-colleting Type E counter: D-Reader
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-249
STAMP
Lv.1 Details
Stamp parts counter: All Reader

To display the parts counter and the estimated life of DADF Stamp.
1st line: Number of sheets fed after the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator
Use case
At replacement
To change the estimated life: Select the item, and then enter the
estimated life.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
DF-HNG-L
Left Hinge parts counter: All Reader
Lv.1 Details
To display the parts counter and the estimated life of DADF Hinge
Unit (Left).
1st line: Number of sheets fed after the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator
At replacement
Use case
To change the estimated life: Select the item, and then enter the
estimated life.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
The counter is advanced every time it is opened/closed.
PD-PU-RL
Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck
Lv.1 Details
Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck
(Upper)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
0
Default value
8-249

PD-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PD-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
C3-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C3-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Separation Roller parts counter: Deck

Separation Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of sheets
0
Feed Roller parts counter: Deck
Feed Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of sheets
0
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-250
C4-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C4-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
SORT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
FIN-STPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Sort path parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of sheets
0
Stapler parts counter: Fin-A1/C1
Stapler Unit
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of times
0
8-250

SDL-STPL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
FN-BFFRL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Saddle Stapler parts counter: Fin-C1

Saddle Stapler Unit
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of times
0
Buffer Roller parts counter: Fin-C1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Inlet Sttc Chg Elim prts cntr: Fin-A1/C1
Inlet Static Charge Eliminator
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Swng Guide Inside Sttc Chg Elim: Fin-A1
Swing Guide Inside Static Charge Eliminator
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-251
BACK-ROL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DL-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
OFST-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
RET-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Return Roller parts counter: Fin-A1

Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Stack Wall Sttc Elim prts cntr:Fin-A1/C1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of sheets
0
Offset Roller parts counter: Fin-A1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
Number of sheets
0
Return Roller parts counter: Fin-C1
Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-251
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR

SWG-STC
Lv.1 Details
Swng Guide Inside Sttc Chg Elim: Fin-C1

Swing Guide Inside Static Charge Eliminator
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
PD-PU-RL
Pullout Roller parts counter: Deck
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
Number of sheets
Default value
0
8-252
T-CNTR
COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
BLACK
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
T-8-79
T-8-78
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR
8-252
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR
V-CNTR
V2-CNTR
COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-253
COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR
Video count total counter

To display distribution of total video count for each color.
Small size: 1, Large size: 1
When checking distribution of video count
Video count Y counter
To display distribution of yellow video count.
Video count M counter
To display distribution of magenta video count.
Video count C counter
To display distribution of cyan video count.
Video count Bk counter
To display distribution of black video count.
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
T-8-80
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR
Video count total counter

To display distribution of total video count for each color.
Video count Y counter
To display distribution of yellow video count.
Video count M counter
To display distribution of magenta video count.
Video count C counter
To display distribution of cyan video count.
Video count Bk counter
To display distribution of black video count.
T-8-81
8-253
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
8-254
LF
COPIER > COUNTER > LF
Y-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
M-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
C-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
K-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of Drum Unit (Y) life

To display how much the Drum Unit (Y) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%.
When checking the life of Drum Unit
0 to 999
%
Display of Drum Unit (M) life
To display how much the Drum Unit (M) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
0 to 999
%
Display of Drum Unit (C) life
To display how much the Drum Unit (C) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
0 to 999
%
Display of Drum Unit (Bk) life
To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
0 to 999
%
T-8-82
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
8-254
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST
FEEDER
ADJUST
FEEDER > ADJUST
DISPLAY
DOCST
Lv.1 Details
FEEDER > DISPLAY

FEEDSIZE
Lv.1 Details
TRY-WIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
8-255
Dspl of original size detected by DADF

To display the original size detected by DADF.
Distance of Original Width Detect Slider
To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders.
At original size detection error
0 to approx. 2970
mm
T-8-83
Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front

To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF
scanning.
Execute when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge
of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm. (The image moves in the
direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use case
- When installing DADF
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1 mm
0
Default value
LA-SPEED
Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: front
To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction
Lv.1 Details
for DADF scanning.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in
vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the
image is reduced.)
Use case
press OK key.
-30 to 30
Unit
0.10%
Default value
0
DOCST2
Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: back
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF
scanning.
Execute when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge
of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm. (The image moves in the
direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1 mm
Default value
0
8-255
8-256
FEEDER > ADJUST
FEEDER > ADJUST
LA-SPD2
Lv.1 Details
Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: back

To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction
for DADF scanning.
vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the
image is reduced.)
Use case
press OK key.
-200 to 200
Unit
0.01%
Default value
0
ADJMSCN1
Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: front
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio
in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
horizontal scanning direction.
Use case
When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image
magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
0.10%
Default value
0
ADJMSCN2
Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: back
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio
in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
horizontal scanning direction.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
0.10%
Default value
0
ADJSSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: front

To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio
in vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
vertical scanning direction.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
0.10%
Default value
0
ADJSSCN2
Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: back
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio
in vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
vertical scanning direction.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
0.10%
Default value
0
T-8-84
8-256
Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FEEDER > FUNCTION

FEED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
FEEDER > FUNCTION

MTR-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-A4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-A5R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-LTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-LTRR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-257
Specification of DADF Operation Motor

To specify the DADF Motor to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
At operation check
0 to 2
0: Pickup Motor (M1), 1: Registration Motor (M2), 2: Read Motor (M3)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4
To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1
for the DADF Tray. (A4)
- When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
None
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R
for the DADF Tray. (A5R)
None
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR
for the DADF Tray. (LTR)
None
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR
for the DADF Tray. (LTRR)
None
Specify DADF individual feed mode

To specify the feed mode for DADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
Use case
At operation check
0 to 3
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation
1: Not used
2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
3: Not used

CL-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON

Operation check of DADF Clutch
To start operation check of Pickup Clutch.
At operation check
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically
stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution
Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation
automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not
completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed).
None
FAN-CHK
Specification of DADF Operation Fan
Lv.1 Details
To specify the DADF Fan to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.
At operation check
Use case
0
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON
FAN-ON
Operation check of DADF Fan
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN-CHK.
At operation check
Use case
stops.
2) Press OK key.
Caution
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK
8-257
8-258
FEEDER > FUNCTION

SL-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SL-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
ROLL-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER > FUNCTION
Specification of DADF Operation Solenoid

To specify the DADF solenoid to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
At operation check
0
FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
Operation check of DADF Solenoid
To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
At operation check
stops.
2) Press OK key.
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
Operation check of Motor
To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
At operation check
stops.
2) Press OK key.
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
Rotation of DADF Rollers
To rotate the DADF Rollers for cleaning.
Clean the roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while it is
rotating.
At roller cleaning
2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
3) Press OK key.
The rollers stop.
None
FEED-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CL-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Operation check of DADF individual feed

To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
At operation check
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK
Specification of operation Clutch
To specify the clutch to operate.
0 to 1
0:Pickup clutch(ADF),
1:Registration clutch(ADF)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-ON
T-8-85
8-258
Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER
SORTER > ADJUST

STP-R2
Lv.1 Details
ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
PNCH-HLE
Lv.1 Details
8-259
Adj of punch hole pstn from paper edge

To adjust the length from the paper edge to the punch hole.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 1 mm.
Upon users request

Use case
press OK key.
-4 to 2
Unit
mm
Default value
0
STP-F1
Adj A4 front stpl pstn (45 deg): Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the one front staple position on the A4 size paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the
rear side by 0.49mm.
Use case
When the A4 paper front staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-6 to 6
Unit
mm
0
Default value
STP-F2
Adj LTR front stpl pstn (45 deg): Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the one front staple position on the LTR size paper.
Use case
When the LTR paper front staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-6 to 6
Unit
mm
Default value
0
STP-R1
Adj A4 rear staple pstn (45 deg): Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4 size paper.
Use case
When the A4 paper rear staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-6 to 6
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-2P
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
SDL-STP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SDL-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj LTR rear stpl pstn (45 deg): Fin-C1

To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTR size paper.
When the LTR paper rear staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj front/rear 2-staple position: Fin-A1
To adjust the front/rear 2-staple position on Finisher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
When the front/rear 2-staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-25 to 25
mm
Adj Saddle staple position: Fin-C1
To adjust the staple position at the time of saddle stitching.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves
downward by 0.5 mm.
When the fold position and the staple position are misaligned at the
time of saddle stitching
press OK key.
-3 to 3
mm
0
Adj Saddle alignment position: Fin-C1
To adjust the shift position of the Alignment Plate at the time of
saddle stitching.
As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment position moves
toward the center of the paper by 0.1mm.
When an alignment failure occurs at the time of saddle stitching
0 to 1
mm
0
8-259
8-260
SORTER > ADJUST

ST-ALG1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ST-ALG2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-F3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-F4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj Stacker A4 size align pstn: Fin-C1

To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment
Plate is increased by 0.42mm.
When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper
press OK key.
-10 to 10
mm
0
Adj Stacker LTR size align pstn: Fin-C1
To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment
Plate is increased by 0.42mm.
When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper
press OK key.
-10 to 10
mm
0
Adj A4R frt stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-C1
To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on A4R size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj LTRR frt stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-C1
To adjust the one front staple position on the LTRR size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on LTRR size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
STP-R3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-R4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SW-UP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PUN-V-RG
PRCS-RET
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj A4R rear stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-C1

To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on A4R size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj LTRRL rear stpl pstn(<45 deg):Fin-C1
To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTRR size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on LTRR size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj of Swing Roller falling pstn: Fin-C1
To adjust the Swing Roller fall position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the Swing Roller fall position
moves downward by 0.2mm.
When paper fails to be transported to the Processing Tray and
misalignment occurs
press OK key.
-17 to 33
mm
0
[Not used]
Adj Process Tray return amount: Fin-C1
To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the pull-back amount is decreased
by 1.4mm.
When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray
0 to 5
mm
0
8-260
8-261
SORTER > ADJUST

UP-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DW-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THC-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THC-PUSH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Setting of upward curl prev mode: Fin-C1

Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs.
When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray,
and paper leaning due to the curl occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting downward curl prev mode: Fin-C1
Set 1 when downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the
Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs.
When downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting heavy ppr curl prev mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered.
When 1 is set, the amount of Stack Tray descension for stack
delivery increases. The paper surface detection is performed for
every sheet, not for every 5 sheets.
When upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting heavy ppr out prev mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of
heavy paper delivery.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray moves down temporarily before the
heavy paper is delivered to the Processing Tray if the leading sheet
is heavy paper.
When the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy
paper delivery
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
OFST-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THN-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
STP-P-CH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TRY-NIS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TRY-SU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set poor offset stack prev mode:Fin-C1

Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset
mode.
When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed in the small size
offset mode.
When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset
mode
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set poor thin ppr stack prev mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
When 1 is set, the stacking condition of thin paper improves.
When thin paper is not appropriately stacked
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set stpl stack displace prev mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery
mode.
When 1 is set, paper stack alignment operation is executed twice
immediately before stapling.
When the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set tray switch noise reduct mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise operation becomes slow.
When the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set tray switching speedup mode: Fin-C1
Set 1 when the Stack Tray switching time is long.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise speed becomes fast.
When the Stack Tray switching time is long
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-261
8-262
SORTER > ADJUST

FIN-NIS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
1SHT-SHF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDL-SWCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDL-ALM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SFT-AMT1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Set tray drive noise reduct mode: Fin-C1

Set 1 when the Finisher operation noise is loud.
When 1 is set, the initial Finisher operation is minimized.
When the Finisher operation noise is loud
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set 1-sheet Offset+Collate: Fin-C1
Set 1 when enabling Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document.
When enabling Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Sddl stack capacity switch mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching.
When 1 is set, the stacking capacity increases over the upper limit.
When increasing the stacking capacity for perfect binding
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set sddl full stack alarm mode: Fin-C1
Set 1 when disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching.
When disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
0
Adj Shift Roller front shft amnt: Fin-A1
To adjust the front shift amount of the Shift Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the Shift Roller moves to the pushon direction by 0.1mm.
When the front shift amount of paper is not appropriate
press OK key.
-50 to 50
mm
0
SFT-AMT2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-NTN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
INSTP-F1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
INSTP-R1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj Shift Roller rear shft amnt: Fin-A1

To adjust the rear shift amount of the Shift Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the Shift Roller moves to the pushon direction by 0.1mm.
When the rear shift amount of paper is not appropriate
press OK key.
-50 to 50
mm
0
Adjustment of A4 staple pitch: Fin-A1
To adjust the staple pitch for 2-point stapling.
As the value is incremented by 1, staple pitch is widened by 0.27mm.
When staple pitch for 2-point stapling is not appropriate
press OK key.
-8 to 8
mm
0
Adj of front staple position: Fin-A1
To adjust the paper pull-in amount of the Gripper at the time of front
1-point stapling.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper pull-in amount is
increased by 0.1mm.
When the paper front staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-50 to 50
mm
0
Adj of rear staple position: Fin-A1
To adjust the paper pull-in amount of the Gripper at the time of rear
1-point stapling.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper pull-in amount is
increased by 0.1mm.
When the paper rear staple position is displaced
press OK key.
-50 to 50
mm
0
8-262
Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION
SORTER > ADJUST

THN-STCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Poor stack prev mode: l-ppr, thin paper

To set poor stack prevention mode for large paper and thin paper.
When large paper and thin paper are not appropriately stacked
Select the item to be highlighted, set the value, and then press OK
key.
Caution
This mode is available only with the External Finisher.
0 to 1
Default value
0
CLCT-SB
Adjusting the switchback amount
Lv.1 Details
Adjust the switchback amount when the paper is delivered to the
processing tray.
When the paper stack fault occurs at the processing tray by influence
Use case
of the curl amount.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
0
Default value
DSTP-F1
Adjusting the front staple position in 2-stapling mode
Lv.1 Details
Adjust the front staple position in the middle 2-stapling mode.
Incrementing the value by 1 shifts the front stapling position to the
paper edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use case
When the middle 2-staple position is displaced between the front and
rear stapling positions.
Adj/set/operate method After inputting value, press the OK key.
0 to 33
0
Default value
8-263
FUNCTION
SORTER > FUNCTION
FIN-CON
Lv.1 Details
Controller PCB RAM clear: Fin-C1

To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the
adjustment contents and counter information.
Caution
OFF/ON.
None
T-8-87
T-8-86
Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION
8-263
Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION
OPTION
8-264
SORTER > OPTION
STCR-DWN
Lv.1 Details
SORTER > OPTION

BLNK-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set fold pstn margin width: Saddle Fin

To set the margin width of fold position on Saddle Finisher.
When changing the margin width of fold position
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Wider
Default value
0
BUFF-SW
ON/OFF of buffer operation: Finisher-C1
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher.
When misalignment occurs, set 1.
When 1 is set, alignment performance is improved, but productivity
decreases.
Use case
When misalignment of paper stack occurs (misalignment of 3 sheets
at the lowest part of the stack in case of the side stitch, and 3 sheets
at the middle of the stack in case of saddle stitch)
Caution
When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity decreases.
0 to 1
0: OFF (Performing buffer operation), 1: ON (Not performing buffer
operation)
Default value
0
PRCS-SP1
Set buffer stack Fd SPD to Process Tray
To set the speed to feed the buffered paper stack to the Process
Lv.1 Details
Tray Stopper in collate/staple mode.
When 1 is set, the feeding speed becomes fast, so misalignment due
to paper return failure is alleviated.
Use case
When misalignment due to paper return failure occurs in collate/
staple mode
0 to 1
0: 600 mm/s, 1: 700 mm/s
Default value
1
Set occasional misalign prev mode: Fin

To set ON/OFF of occasional misalignment prevention mode.
When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx. every 30
sheets for thin/plain paper (105g/m2 and less), set 1.
Use case
When misalignment in feed direction occurs for thin/plain paper
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PRCS-SP3
Set non-buffer stack Fd SPD to Proc Tray
Lv.1 Details
To set the speed to feed the non-buffered paper stack to the Process
Tray Stopper in staple mode for thin/plain paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the feeding speed is decelerated
by 50 mm/sec.
Use case
When misalignment due to too much paper return (buckling on the
trailing edge) occurs in staple mode for thin/plain paper
0 to 8
0: 700 mm/s, 1: 650 mm/s, 2: 600 mm/s, 3: 550 mm/s, 4: 500 mm/s,
5 to 8: 450 mm/s
Default value
0
NSRT-STC
Set poor stack prev mode at non-collate
Lv.1 Details
When the stackability at non-sort delivery is low.
With this setting, the stacking performance at non-sort delivery is
improved.
Use case
When the stackability at non-collating is low
0 to 2
0: Paper is delivered to the Stack Tray in non-sort mode.
1: Deliver 2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray in non-sort
mode.
2: Deliver 1-sided/2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray in
non-sort mode.
Default value
1
8-264
8-265
SORTER > OPTION

THN-TRSW
Lv.1 Details
Set narrow width thin paper delvry dest

When delivering thin paper (63g/m2 and less) which width direction
is 139.6 mm and smaller to the Stacker, delivery stationary jam may
occur.
When 1 is set, thin paper which width direction is 139.6 mm and
smaller is forcibly delivered to the tray of the host machine.
Use case
When delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering narrowwidth thin paper to the First/Second Delivery Tray
0 to 1
0: Destination specified on UI, 1: Tray of the host machine
Default value
0
SWGUP-SW
ON/OFF of the swing unit escape operation
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of the swing unit escape operation for the 1st sheet
of thin paper
Use case
When the dog ear appears on the first sheet in the thin paper feeding
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default value
0
T-8-88
8-265
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
BOARD
BOARD > OPTION

TR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OPTION
BOARD > OPTION
MENU-1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SURF-OFF
Lv.1 Details
8-266
Hide/dis of printer setting menu level 1

To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
UFR board function ON/OFF
To set ON/OFF of the function according to the SURF board
connection status.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
Default value
Hide/dis of toner reduction function

To set whether to display or hide the toner reduction function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
T-8-89
8-266
Installation
to Check this
How
Installation Procedure
to do Before
Things
Installation
to Note Before
Points
Installation
Table of
Combination
Accessory Installation
the Contents
Checking
Unpacking
Procedure
Installation
Installation
Installation > Things to do Before Installation > Selecting an Installing Location
How to Check this Installation Procedure
9-2
Things to do Before Installation
When Using the Parts Included in the Package
Selecting an Installing Location
A symbol is described on the illustration in the case of using the parts included in the package
The installing location needs to meet the following conditions:
of this product.
Thus, it is desirable to go over the planned installing location before bringing the machine to
the user's site.
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for
exclusive use by the machine.
2) Environment of the installation site must be within the range indicated below. Avoid any
Packaged Item
area near the faucet, the water heater, the humidifier, or the refrigerator.
Operation/image assured range: temperature: 15.0 to 30.0 deg C, humidity: 5 to 80%
F-9-1
3) Keep the installation site away from the source of fire, a dusty place, or a place generating
Symbols in the Illustration
ammonia gas. In the case of installing this equipment in a place subject to direct sunlight, it
is recommended to hang curtains over the window.
The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.

Screw
4) Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment
Harness
Connector
comfortable. Room odor can be bothering when running the machine for a long time in a
poorly-ventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running this equipment
does not harm human health..
Tighten
Remove
Connect
Disconnect
Secure
5) The foot of this equipment should be in contact with the floor. This equipment should be
Free
kept on the level.
Claw
Insert
Remove
Push
Plug in
Turn on
Checking instruction
Check
Visual Check
Sound Check
F-9-2
9-2
6) The machine must be away from the wall by 100mm or more to secure an enough space
to perform machine operation.
9-3
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 + External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B2 + Booklet Finisher-J1
+ Buffer Pass Unit-G1 + Paper Deck Unit-B2
4 (100 mm) or more
46 1/4 (1,174 mm)

42 1/8 (1,071 mm)
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
81 1/4 (2,062 mm)

4 5/8 (118 mm)
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
46 1/4 (1,174 mm)
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
4 (100 mm) ro more
85 7/8 (2,180 mm)
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
F-9-5
7) Be sure to install this equipment in a well-ventilated place. Do not place this equipment
near the air vent in the room.
F-9-3
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 + Inner Finisher-E1 + Paper Deck Unit-B2
4 (100 mm) or more
60 1/4 (1,529 mm)

50 5/8 (1,284 mm)
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
46 1/4 (1,174 mm)
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
F-9-4
9-3
Installation > Combination Table of Accessory Installation > Combination of the Options installing to the Right Side of the Host Machine
9-4
Points to Note Before Installation
Combination Table of Accessory Installation
Take note of the following points when installing this equipment.

1) Moving this equipment from a low-temperature place to a warm plate can generate
condensation, resulting in image fault. Thus, when unpacking this equipment, leave it for 2
hours or more so that the equipment becomes comfortable with the room temperature.
(Condensation: formation of liquid drops from water vapor on metal surface, and usually
occurs when bringing a metal object from a low-temperature place to a warm place due to
rapidly-cooled surrounding moisture vapor.)
2) The host machine weighs maximum 134kg. It is recommended to lift it with 4 people or
more. However, if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales company, follow
Combination of the Options installing to the Right Side

of the Host Machine
NOTE:
The following table shows the combination of accessories that are set at the right side of
the host machine.
When setting the accessories indicated in the table, refer to the table below and check the
combination before the setup.
it for operation.
Also, make sure to lift the machine with keeping it level at operation.
Because the gravity center is in the rear, lift with care.
Utility Tray
Voice Guidance
Kit
Voice Operation
Kit
Card Reader
yes: Available
Utility Tray
Voice Guidance Kit
Voice Operation Kit
Card Reader
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no: Unavailable
T-9-1
9-4
Installation > Combination Table of Accessory Installation > Combination of the Options installing to the Right Side of the Host Machine
Installation > Checking the Contents
Checking the Contents

[1] Drum Unit (Bk) X 1
9-5
[13] ADF Cable Seal X 1
[2] Drum Unit (Color) X 3
DADF model only
[3] Reversal Trail-edge

Guide X 1
[16] Hinge Label

[4]
Right Lower Sub

Cover X 1
1
[5] Size Plate X 2
DADF model only

Refer to Chart
[6] Light Front Cover X 1
[19] Cleaning Procedure

Label
[7] Light Grip Cover X 1
[8] Left Grip Cover X 2
[9]
DADF model only

Refer to Chart
Waste Toner
Container X 1
[14] Face Seal X 1

DADF model only
[17] Cleaning Position

Label
DADF model only
Refer to Chart
[15] Stamp Cartridge X 1

DADF model only
[18] Copy Prohibition Label

DADF model only
Refer to Chart
[20] Hinge Caution Label

DADF model only
Refer to Chart
F-9-7
Label name
[10] Service Book
Case X 1
[11]
Power Cable X 1
[12]
4 Environment
Heater Cover X 1
[16] Hinge Label
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5240 / C5235
(DADF model only)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5255 / C5250
(DADF model only)
3 pc
6 pc
[17] Cleaning Position Label
1 sheet with 6 languages
[18] Copy Prohibition Label
3 pc
3 pc
[19] Cleaning Procedure Label

[20] Hinge Caution Label
F-9-6
9-5
9-6
*1 Use only in the case that the cassette pedestal is not installed.
*2 Two pieces of it are contained in the package for Europe.
*3 The connector has a different shape depending on locations. Other than USA
Use the correct power code to mach the location/area of installation. Make sure not to
leave unused power code at the site.
*4 Included in the package in Asia general, Korea, and Taiwan regions
NOTE:
The Touch Pen is attached with the Control Panel.

Remove all the parts in the cassette.
Only for AUS, the Toner Container is installed on the host machine.
9-6
9-7
<CD/Guides>
Check the contents against the following
North America
EUR
AUS
SPL / Taiwan
Korea
China
e-Manual
Setup Guide
Basic Operation Guide
Before Using This Machine
UFR 2 User Software
PCL, PS standard only
PCL User Software
PCL standard only
PS User Software
PS standard only
Printer model only
Duplex Color Image Reader

Unit-E1 standard/
standard
PANTONE Manual CD
Main Unit Warranty
Blue Angel Notice
Drum Unit Warranty
AMS KIT Software / Manual CD
AMS Introduction Booklet
Chinese Certificate
Service Log Book
HDD-related Option Integration Installation Procedure
Chinese Warranty Sheet
iW MC CD
iW EMC CD
T-9-2
T-8-2
9-7
Installation > Unpacking
9-8
Unpacking
1) Unpack the host machine.
NOTE:
When installing the cassette pedestal, be sure to place the host machine on the cassette
pedestal. (See the Installation Procedure of the cassette pedestal)
2) Hold the 4 grips on the left or right to lift the host machine up, and then put down the
Grip
machine from the skid.

CAUTION:
The host machine weighs maximum 134kg. It is recommended to lift it with 4 people
or more. However, if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales
company, follow it for operation. Also, make sure to lift the machine with keeping it
level at operation.
Because the gravity center is in the rear, lift with care.
Grip
F-9-8
9-8
9-9
Model with DADF
3) Remove all the tapes attached to the host machine.

CAUTION:
Model without DADF
Be sure to remove the tapes on the Cassette Unit and Reader Unit in later step.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the tapes on the Cassette Unit in later step.
F-9-10
F-9-9
NOTE:
When setting up for the copier model, refer to the "Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1,
Color Image Reader Unit-F1/F2 installation procedure".
When setting up for the printer model, refer to the "Printer Cover - C2" stated in this
procedure.
9-9
4) Remove the tapes on the exterior of the Reader Unit.
9-10
7) Pull out the Cassettes 1 and 2, and remove the tapes from them.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to remove the Scanner System Fixation Screw until installation of the
scanner is completed.
8) Open the Front Cover and the Right Lower Cover.
Scanner System Fixation Screw
F-9-13
9) Peel off the Protection Paper.

F-9-11
5) Open the DADF and remove the cushioning material.

Cushioning Material
Protection Paper
F-9-14
F-9-12
6) Close the DADF.
9-10
9
10)
Insert the protrusion in 1 place. While pushing down [A] claw, insert the claw in 2
places, and install the Right Front Cover 2.
9-11
12)
Install the 2 Left Handle Covers.
1 protrusion each
1 claw each
x2
F-9-15
11)
F-9-17
Insert the protrusion in 1 place. While pushing down [A] claw, insert the claw in 3
places, and install the Right Rear Cover 3.
x3
[A]
F-9-16
9-11
Installation > Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit
9-12
Installing the Drum Unit
Installing the Scanner

2 screws (to loosen)
DADF model only
1) Remove the 2 Scanner System Fixation Screws on the left side of the Reader Assembly.
2) Affix the below seal.
1 ADF Cable Seal
1 Face Seal
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a safe place to use for moving
the machine.
screw
F-9-19
x2
2) Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is positioned in the direction of the arrow
and if not, turn it and adjust the position.
ADF Cable Seal
Face Seal
F-9-18
direction
of the arrow
ITB Sub Pressure

Release Lever
F-9-20
9-12
3) Turn the ITB Release Lever in the direction of the arrow until the protrusion is aligned with
9-13
the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure applied on the ITB.
x2
ITB Pressure Release Lever

F-9-21
F-9-22
9-13
5) Hold the Developing Assembly with one hand. With the other hand, lift the dummy Drum up
9-14
CAUTION: Points to Note when Removing the Dummy Drum
vertically and slowly to remove it. (If the dummy Drum is removed, the seal can be removed
When removing the Dummy Drum, be sure to lift it slowly and vertically.
simultaneously.)
If lifting it in an oblique direction, the Seal on the Developing Assembly is stressed, and
may cause tear of the seal.
CAUTION:
If the Developing Seal is torn, remove the torn seal by pulling the end of it in the
direction of the arrow. At that time, be careful not to leave the torn seal in the Developing
Assembly.
If it is pulled obliquely upward, the seal may tear.

Perform the removal procedure for each color.
Dummy Drum
F-9-24
F-9-23
Rear Side
Seal
Seal
Front Side
F-9-25
9-14
6) Hold down the top surface of each Developing Assembly after removing Dummy Drums.
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the upper side of each Developing Assembly when removing the seal.
Otherwise the cover will be off from its position.
9-15
CAUTION: Points to Note at Drum Installation

Be sure not to rotate the Drum counterclockwise while taking it out from the
Container Box, removing the Drum Cover and installing to the main body. The
Scoop-up Sheet may be flipped, causing toner scattering.
Be sure not to reinstall the removed Drum Cover; otherwise, the Scoop-up Sheet
may be flipped, causing toner scattering.
F-9-27
Drum Cover
F-9-26
CAUTION:
Be sure to pay attention to the below in doing the next procedure.
Do not touch the Drum area.
Be careful not to hit the cover against the Drum area.
Do not make the Drum area disposed of light for 5 minutes or more.
NOTE:
Step 7) to 8) is to install the Drum Unit of each color.
F-9-28
9-15
CAUTION:
7) Unpack the Drum Unit, and remove the cover from the Drum Unit..
Only drum for Bk (blue color) is specified the color. Drums for the 3 colors (green ones),
are not specified the color (Y, M, C).
CAUTION:
The joint between the Drum Unit and the cover might be stiff.
Proceed with extra care to avoid hitting the Drum area or dropping the Drum Unit when
removing the cover from the Drum Unit.
Drum Cover
9-16
Drum for Color (Green)
Drum for Bk (Blue)
Drum Unit
x2
Position of Drum for Bk
Claws
F-9-29
Position of Drum for Color

F-9-30
9-16
NOTE:
Hold the handles at right and left of the Drum Unit.
9-17
8) Fit the guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit.
Drum Unit Guide
Grip
Process Unit Guide

F-9-31
CAUTION:
If pushing it in the angle, the shutter may breaks. Thus make sure to install it from just
above.
Drum Unit Guide
Process Unit Guide
F-9-33
F-9-32
9-17
9) Check that the 8 LED light-receiving areas of the Drum Unit are not off from the base.
9-18
10) Put the Process Unit back to the host machine, and secure with the 2 screws.
CAUTION:
Check that there is no gap between [A] the host machine and the Process Unit, and
then secure with the screw.
[A]
F-9-34
[A]
F-9-35
9-18
CAUTION:
9-19
11) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, and then fit the
After closing the Process Unit, hold the edge of each Drum Unit from above as
described below.
projection to the triangle mark on the plate to apply pressure.
If the Drum Unit is not secured, it may cause the image failure.
CAUTION:
When pressuring the ITB Pressure Release Lever, be sure that the Right Lower Cover
is opened first before pressuring.
F-9-36
F-9-37
12) Install the ITB Cover, and tighten the 2 screws (which have been loosened).
13) Release the Waste Toner Lock Lever.
F-9-38
9-19
Installation > Installation Procedure > Fixing the Machine in Place
9-20
Fixing the Machine in Place
14) Set the Waste Toner Container, and then put the Lever back.
<In the case that the pedestal is installed>

1) Move the main body to the installation position, and secure it in place with the 4 adjusters.
NOTE:
Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant.
F-9-39
15) Close the Right Lower Cover, the Right Upper Cover, and the Front Cover.
F-9-40
Installation > Installation Procedure > Fixing the Machine in Place
9-20
Installation > Installation Procedure > Setting the Environment Heater Switch
Setting the Environment Heater Switch
9-21
1Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
In case that the setting environment is high humidity environment (*), turn on the
Environment Heater Switch.
When removing the cover, do not insert a screwdriver in the oval hole.
When the temperature and humidity of the installation environment are high, image
smear is likely to occur.
* This is the case that the value of the absolute water volume in the machine is about
12g or more.
Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > ABS-HUM
In case the Environment Heater Switch Cover is included in the package, turn the
Environment Heater Switch ON and then install the Environment Heater Switch Cover.
F-9-41
Installation > Installation Procedure > Setting the Environment Heater Switch
9-21
Installation > Installation Procedure > Turning the Main Power ON / Setting the Toner Container
9-22
Turning the Main Power ON / Setting the Toner

Container
2) Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch.
NOTE:
Only for AUS and CHINA, the Toner Container is installed on the host machine.
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
2) Remove the protection sheet on the control panel.
3) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
F-9-42
NOTE:
When turning ON the main power, drum initialization and developing assembly
initialization are automatically executed.
In case of the host machine with the Toner Container, toner fill is executed in a row.
Even turning OFF the main power during drum initialization, developing assembly
initialization and toner fill, they will be re-executed when turning ON the power again.
3) Install the Environment Heater Switch Cover.
4) After activation, follow the instruction in the Control Panel, and press the shut down key in
the Control Panel.
6) Enter the following Service Mode, make sure that the setting value is "1".
COPIER (Level 1) > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
7) Set the value of the following Service Mode.
COPIER (Level 1) > OPTION > CUSTOM > SCANTYPE
Setting Value "0" Color Image Reader Unit-F1/F2
Setting Value "1" Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1
F-9-43
8) Exit the Service Mode.
9-22
NOTE:
In case of the host machine with the Toner Container, once the machine goes to standby
state, drum initialization, developing assembly initialization and toner refill are completed.
In case of the host machine without the Toner Container, execute the following
procedures.
9-23
NOTE:
Step 11) to 13) is to install the Toner Container of each color.
11) Hold the Toner Container as the figure below, and shake it approximately 10 times.
9) Open the Toner Cover.
F-9-46
12) Remove the Protection Cap of the Toner Container while rotating it to the direction of the
arrow.
F-9-44
10) Add check marks to each color displayed on the operation screen, and press [Remove
Toner Cartridges] to open the Toner Replacement Cover.
F-9-47
F-9-45
9-23
Installation > Installation Procedure > Setting for K Paper (China only)
13) Insert the Toner Container all the way in, and close the Toner Exchange Cover.
9-24
Turning OFF the Main Power Switch

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then
Setting for K Paper (China only)

Make the following settings for the use of K paper.
1) Enter the service mode (level 2).
2) Change from '0' to '1' in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW.
3) Enter the service mode (level 1).
4) Change from '4' to '0' in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODEL-SZ.
F-9-48
14) Close the Toner Cover.

NOTE:
Toner refill will be executed.

Once the host machine goes to standby state, drum initialization, developing assembly
initialization and toner refill are completed.
Installation > Installation Procedure > Setting for K Paper (China only)
9-24
Installation > Installation Procedure > Cassette Setting
Cassette Setting
9-25
4) Set papers.
1) Press the Cassette Release Button, and pull out the Cassette 1 and 2 toward the front.
5) Open the cover from which the Size Plate is pushed in.
Paper
Cover
Button
F-9-51
F-9-49
2) Hold the Side Guide Plate Lever, and adjust it to the predefined size. At that time, move
6) Cut 2 places of the Size Plate with nippers.
the Side Guide Plate by referring the size index (label) of the sheet size to be set, and fit it
Cut
to the slot.
3) Hold the Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever, and adjust it to the predefined size. At that time,
move the Trail Edge Guide Plate by referring the size index (label) of the sheet size be set,
and fit it to the slot.
Side Guide Plate
Rear Edge Guide Plate Lever
Side Guide Plate Lever
F-9-52
Rear Edge Guide Plate

F-9-50
Installation > Installation Procedure > Cassette Setting
9-25
Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking after the Installation
7) Set the Size Plate in accordance with the size being set. (Lump the Size Plates not in use
together and store them at the rear.)
9-26
Checking after the Installation

1) In Service Mode, check the result of Drum Unit initialization.
Make sure that the value of the installed color is [0 to 2 ].
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > THCK-Y
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > THCK-M
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > THCK-C
NOTE:
If an error code [E061-xxxx] is displayed on the screen or the value is not appropriate,
1. Turn OFF the power, refit the Drum Unit and turn On the power again.
2. If the above work does not solve the problem, execute initialization of the Drum Unit
for each color in Service Mode.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETY
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETM
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETC
2) Check the result of initialization of developing toner ratio in Service Mode.
F-9-53
Check that each value is within the range of 32 to 68, and then write down the value on the
8) Close the cover from which the Size Plate is pushed in, and install the cassette.
service label at the rear side of the Front Cover.
9) Set the other cassette in the same way.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-Y
10) If the cassette pedestal is installed, do the same for the cassette of the cassette pedestal
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-M
as well.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJYST > DENS > CONT-C
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJYST > DENS > CONT-K
NOTE:
Paper size settings are automatically recognized.
3) Check the Developing Patch initialization.

Check that each value is within the range of 340 to 640, and then write down the value on
the service label at the rear side of the Front Cover.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-Y
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-M
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-C
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-K
Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking after the Installation
9-26
Installation > Installation Procedure > Auto Adjust Gradation > In case of Heavy3
NOTE:
Setting the DADF before executing Auto Adjust Gradation.
Refer to the " After installation setting" in the "the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1,
Color Image Reader Unit-F1/F2 installation procedure".
9-27
<In the case of imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5255i/C5250/C5250i>
In case of Plain Paper

1) Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the host machine.
2) Load A3, A4, 11x17 or LTR paper to the cassette. (Refer to the cassette setting.)
3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation] > [Full Adjust].
Execute auto gradation adjustment the used paper type as needed.

However, when using 2 or more types of paper, it is necessary to execute all the modes
corresponding to the types of paper.
4) Select the pickup source of a test print and press [OK].

5) Follow the below UI and perform the operation.
In case of Heavy1/Heavy2
CAUTION:
When using paper type to which auto gradation adjustment is not executed, image
failure or damage on the host machine may occur.

2) Load the heavy paper to the cassette.
Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy1/Heavy2] > [Full Adjust].
<In the case of imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240/C5240i/C5235/C5235i>

In case of Plain Paper
In case of Heavy3

2) Load A3, A4, 11x17 or LTR paper to the cassette. (Refer to the cassette setting.)
Adjust Gradation] > [Full Adjust].
1) Load the heavy paper to the Multi-purpose Tray.

Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy3] > [Full Adjust].
In case of Heavy
2) Load the heavy paper to the cassette.
Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy] > [Full Adjust].
Installation > Installation Procedure > Auto Adjust Gradation > In case of Heavy3
9-27
Installation > Installation Procedure > Adjusting Image Position > Margin Adjustment (1st side; Mechanical Adjsutment)
Adjusting Image Position
9-28
4) Loosen the 3 fixing screws.
NOTE:
The second side of the 2-sided copy mentioned later means the second side in the
image formation order.
With this equipment, the second side in the image formation order at the time of 2-sided
copy/print is equivalent to the first side of the original.
Margin Adjustment (1st side; Mechanical Adjsutment)

1) Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2, and check that the left edge margin is 2.5+/1.5mm.
Feeding direction
of paper
L1
image
F-9-54
<In Case of Nonstandard>

NOTE:
Adjsutment method is same for both the Cassette 1 and 2.
F-9-56
2) Pull out the cassette.

3) Check the 2 scale positions on the adjusting plates.
F-9-55
9-28
9-29
5) Move the adjusting plates back and forth by referring the scale checked in the step 3). As
moving the adjusting plate toward the rear by 1 scale, the left edge margin becomes 1mm
smaller.
NOTE:
When the cassette positions are uneven due to the mechanical adjustment, adjust them
by loosening the screw at left side.
NOTE:
When moving the scale, be sure that the amount of the value to be moved are the same
for the 2 points.
F-9-58
8) Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2, and check that the left edge margin is 2.5+/1.5mm.
F-9-57
6) Tighten the fixing screw.

7) Return the cassette to its original position.]
9-29
Installation > Installation Procedure > Adjusting Image Position > Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
9-30
Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (1st side;
1) Make 2-sided copy from cassette 1, and check that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 2.0mm.
Feeding direction
of paper
mechanical adjustment)
1) Place paper on the Multi Purpose Tray. See the label on manual feed area to place paper.
2) Make copy from the Multi Purpose Tray, and check that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm.
image
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
L1
image
F-9-59
2) If the left margin is out of the specification, change the adjustment value for the left margin
F-9-60
on the 2nd side in cassettte 1.

Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1RE; 1 increment of
the value reduces the left margin by 0.1mm
3) As for the adjustment value for side registration on the 2nd side in cassette 2, enter the
same value as the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side in cassette 1.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
4) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
5) Make 2-sided copy from cassette 2, and check that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 2.0mm.
<In the case that the left margin is out of specification>

3) Remove paper on the Multi Purpose Tray.
4) Open the Multi Purpose Tray in the condition where the Multi Purpose Tray Sub Cover is
opened.
6) If the margin is out of the specification, change the adjustment value for the left margin on
the 2nd side in cassette 2.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE; 1 increment of
the value reduces the left margin by 0.1mm.
7) Write down the new adjustment value on the service label.
ADJ-C1RE
ADJ-C2RE
8) Exit from Service Mode.
F-9-61
9-30
Installation > Installation Procedure > Adjusting Image Position > Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
Installation > Installation Procedure > Adjusting Image Position > Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-31
Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (2nd side)
5) Loosen the fixing screw for the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover.
1) Make 2-sided copy from the manual feed tray, and check that the left margin on the 2nd
side is 2.5 -/+ 2.0mm.
2) If the left margin is out of the specification, change the adjustment value for the left margin
Screw
on the 2nd side from the Multi Purpose Tray.

Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MFRE ; 1 increment of
the value reduces the left margin by 0.1mm.
ADJ-MFRE
F-9-62
6) Move the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover back and forth according to the value confirmed
in step 2). Moving the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover to the rear of this equipment
increases the left margin.
Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)

1) Make copy from cassettte 1, and check that the lead-edge margin is L1 = 4.0 +1.5/-1.0
mm. If the lead-edge margin is out of the specification, go through the following steps to
make adjustment.
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
image
F-9-64
2) Select the following in Service Mode (Level 1) : COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ >
REGIST
3) Change the setting value to make adjustment (1 increment of the setting value reduces the
lead-edge margin by 0.1mm)
F-9-63
7) Tighten the fixing screw for the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover.
8) Place paper on the Multi Purpose Tray.
REGIST
9) Make copy from the Multi Purpose Tray, and check that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm.
Installation > Installation Procedure > Adjusting Image Position > Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-31
Installation > Installation Procedure > Installing Other Parts
9-32
Installing Other Parts
Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

1) Make 2-sided copy from cassette 1, and check that the lead-edge margin on the 2nd side is L1 = 4.0
+1.5/-1.0 mm. If the lead-edge margin is out of the specification, go through the following steps to
make adjustment.
<Service Book Holder>

1) Remove the double-stick tape detachment paper on the rib area of the Service Book
Holder, and attach the Service Book Holder to the Pedestal Bottom Plate.
L1
CAUTION: Do not attach the Service Book Case to the following location:
Feeding direction
of paper
Inside the machine (inner side of the front cover)

Anywhere that blocks the louver area
image
Anywhere that blocks the grip area

F-9-65
2) Select the following in Service Mode (Level 1) : COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGDUP1
NOTE:
In the case of machine confifuration without the cassette pedestal, attach the Service
Book Case to the Left Cover of this main unit.
3) Change the setting value to make adjustment (1 increment of the setting value reduces the
lead-edge margin by 0.1mm)
REG-DUP1
F-9-66
9-32
9-33
<Right Lower Sub Cover 1>

3) Open the Stamp Cover.
1) Install the Right Lower Sub Cover 1.
(Perform this step in the case that the cassette pedestal is not installed)
2 claws
F-9-69
F-9-67
4) Using tweezers, install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up.
<Stamp Cartridge>
[In the case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1]
1) Open the DADF.
2) Pull the lever at upper area of the DADF, and open the cover of the DADF reading area.
F-9-70
5) Close the Stamp Cover.

6) Close the cover of the DADF reading area.
7) Close the DADF.
F-9-68
9-33
9-34
[In the case of Color Image Reader Unit-F1]
< Affixing the Label (DADF model only) >
1) Open the Feed Cover and the Separation Guide of the DADF.
1) Affix the labels according to the location after removing the existing ones.
Hinge Label
Cleaning Position Label
Copy Prohibition Label
Cleaning Procedure Label (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250)
Hinge Caution Label (only for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240/C5235)
Cleaning Procedure Labe
(Only for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250)
Feed Cover
Hinge Caution Label

Separation Guide
Copy Prohibition
Label
F-9-71
2) Using tweezers, install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up.
Cleaning
position Label
Hinge Label
F-9-72
3) Close the Separation Guide and the Feed Cover of the DADF.
Hinge Label
F-9-73
9-34
Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking Network Connection > Checking Network Connection
9-35
Checking Network Connection
<Reversal Trail-edge Guide>
Overview
1) Install the Reversal Trail-edge Guide to the delivery assembly.

2 claws
If the user network environment is TCP/IP, use Ping function to check that the network setting
is properly executed.
If the user network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, skip this procedure.
Reversal Trail-edge Guide
x2
Checking Network Connection

CAUTION:
Use the network cable of rank 5e or higher. In addition, use of shield type (STP cable)
is recommended.
When non-shield type (UTP cable) is used, the surrounding electronic equipments may
be interfered via the network cable.
F-9-74
1) Turn OFF the main power switch.

2) Connect the network cable to the host machine and turn ON the main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that the installation of the host
machine is complete, and ask for network connection of the host machine.
NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator.
Factory default password is as follows.
System administration division ID: 7654321

System administration password: 7654321
CAUTION:
Following setting needs to be ON to perform network setting:
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Confirm Network Connection
Set. Changes]
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [Use IPv4]

Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking Network Connection > Checking Network Connection
9-35
Installation > Installation Procedure > Troubleshooting of Network > Checking Network Setting of the Host Machine
9-36
Troubleshooting of Network
Ping Operation Procedure

1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command].
2) Enter IP address with numeric keypad on the control panel and press "Start" key.
"Response from the host" is displayed if Ping operation is successful. "No response from
the host" is displayed if Ping operation fails.
Checking Connection of the Network Cable

Check that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port.
Ping Operation Procedure

Ask the network administrator at the user's site to note the IP address of the PC that is
Checking with Remote Host Address
connected to the network.
You can check whether the network is connected or not by using remote host address to
execute Ping.
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal that is connected to/works with TCP/IP
network environment, which connects to this host machine.
1) Inform the system administrator to execute checking of network connection using Ping.
Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command], and enter the IP address of PC with the numeric keypad, and
then press "Execute key.
If the display shows "Response from the host", the network connection is properly functioning.
If the display shows "No response from the host", go to the next step for another checking.
2) Check the remote host address with the system administrator.

3) Enter the remote host address to PING.
"Response from the host": The machine is properly connected to the network.
"No response from the host": Execute the following troubleshooting because the
machine is not connected to the network.
NOTE:
Checking of IP address of PC is available by the procedure below:
On Windows PC, go through the following: Start > Program > Accessory > Command
Prompt, and enter ipconfig and press the Enter key. IP address information will be
displayed.
Checking Network Setting of the Host Machine

Check if the IP address specified on the host machine is correct. Select the following: [Settings/
Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [IP Address
Settings], and note the IP address in the IP Address field. Select the following: [Settings/
Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [PING
Command], and enter the IP address. If the display shows "Response from the host", the IP
address specified on the host machine is correct. If the display shows "No response from the
host", go to the next step for another checking.
NOTE:
When entering an address by manual operation, set the Subnet Mask according to the
instructions of the user administrator.
Installation > Installation Procedure > Troubleshooting of Network > Checking Network Setting of the Host Machine
9-36
Installation > Installation Procedure > Troubleshooting of Network > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
9-37
Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

Check with the loopback address:
Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command], and enter the IP address "127.0.0.1" with the numeric keypad
and press the Execute key.
If the display shows "Response from the host", the network of the main controller is properly
functioning.
If the display shows "No response from the host", the network function of the main controller
is faulty.
Replace with a main controller that works properly, and the check connection.
Installation > Installation Procedure > Troubleshooting of Network > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
9-37
Installation > Platen Cover Type S > Installation Outline Drawing
Platen Cover Type S
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Check that the main power switch is OFF.

[1] Copyboard Cover Unitx1
9-38

2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned
[2] Reader Controller Cover

X1
off, then disconnect the power plug.
[3] Face Seal X 6
Installation Outline Drawing
[4] ADF Cable Seal X 1
[5] Screw
(Binding Round End; M4x8)
X2
F-9-75
Copyboard Cover Unit

Reader Controller Cover
Face Seal
ADF Cable Seal
Screw (Binding Round
When installing to iR-ADV

C5255/C5250 (Duplex Color
Image Reader Unit)
When installing to iR-ADV

C5240/C5235 (Color Image
Reader Unit)
Used
Used
Used
Use 6 seals
Used
Used
Not used
Use 4 seals
Used
Used
F-9-76
End; M4x8)
T-9-3
Installation > Platen Cover Type S > Installation Outline Drawing
9-38
Installation > Platen Cover Type S > Installation Procedure > When installing to iR-ADV C5255/C5250 (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit)
9-39
When installing to iR-ADV C5255/C5250 (Duplex Color Image
3) Disconnect the connector and the 2 connectors of the Flat Cables from the Reader
Controller PCB.
Reader Unit)
x3
1) Open the 2 Hinge Covers, and remove the 2 Hinge Open/Close Guide Plates. (The
removed Hinge Open/Close Guide Plates and the screws will not be used.)
Flat Cable
4 Screws (The removed Screws will not be used.)

Hinge Cover
x4
Connector
F-9-79
Hinge Open/Close
Guide Plate
4) Open the DADF.
Hinge Open/Close
Guide Plate
5) Remove the DADF.

F-9-77
4 Screws (The removed Screws will not be used.)
2) Remove the Reader Controller Cover. (The removed Reader Controller Cover will not be
x4
used.)
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 7.)
x2
F-9-80
F-9-78
9-39
9-40
6) Affix the ADF Cable Seal to the Reader Controller Cover included in the package.
8) Remove the 2 Stepped Screws. (The removed Stepped Screws will not be used.)
9) Remove the 2 Face Seals. (The removed Face Seals will not be used.)
Face Seal
Face Seal
x2
F-9-81
F-9-83
7) Install the Reader Controller Cover. (The 2 screws removed in step 2)

10)
Tighten the 2 screws (Binding Round End; M4x8).
11)
Affix the 6 Face Seals.

Face Seal
x2
Face Seal
Face Seal
Face Seal
x2
F-1-72
F-9-82
F-9-84
9-40
9
12)
Install the Copyboard Cover Unit.
9-41
14)
Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet.
F-9-87
F-9-85
13)
15)
Remove the White Plate.
Close the Copyboard Cover, and then open it again.
F-9-88
F-9-86
9-41
9
16)
9-42
Press the White Plate upward as shown in the figure below.
17)
With the Copyboard Cover closed, check that the White Plate is not placed on the
Index Sheet as shown in the figures.

CAUTION:
If the White Plate is pressed downward, it is placed on the Index Sheet, so be sure to
press it upward.
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the White Plate and the Index Sheet. As a guide,
it should be 0.3 mm or less.
Copyboard Cover
Index Sheet
White Board
Reader Unit
Copyboard Cover
White Board
Index Sheet
Reader Unit
F-9-89
Copyboard Cover
Index Sheet
White Board
Reader Unit
Copyboard Cover
Index Sheet
White Board
Reader Unit
F-9-90
18)
Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
19)
Turn ON the main power switch.
9-42
Installation > Platen Cover Type S > Installation Procedure > When installing to iR-ADV C5240/C5235 (Color Image Reader Unit)
9-43
When installing to iR-ADV C5240/C5235 (Color Image Reader

Unit)
4) Open the DADF.

5) Remove the DADF.
2 Screws (The removed Screw will not be used.)
1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover.
x2
x2
F-9-93
F-9-91
6) Affix the ADF Cable Seal to the Reader Controller Cover removed in step 1.
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors.
3) Disconnect the Grounding Wire.
1 Screw (The removed Screw will not be used.)
1 Wire Saddle
x2
F-9-94
F-9-92
9-43
9-44
7) Install the Reader Controller Cover removed in step 1. (2 screws)
12)
Install the Copyboard Cover Unit.
8) Remove the 2 Stepped Screws. (The removed Stepped Screws will not be used.)
9) Remove the 2 Face Seals. (The removed Face Seals will not be used.)
Face Seal
Face Seal
x2
F-9-97
13)
Remove the White Plate.
F-9-95
10)
Tighten the 2 screws (Binding Round End; M4x8).
11)
Affix the 4 Face Seals.

Face Seal
Face Seal
Face Seal
x2
F-9-98
F-9-96
9-44
9
14)
9-45
Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet.
16)
Press the White Plate upward as shown in the figure below.
CAUTION:
If the White Plate is pressed downward, it is placed on the Index Sheet, so be sure to
press it upward.
F-9-99
15)
Close the Copyboard Cover, and then open it again.
F-9-101
F-9-100
9-45
9
17)
9-46
With the Copyboard Cover closed, check that the White Plate is not placed on the
Index Sheet as shown in the figures.

CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the White Plate and the Index Sheet. As a guide,
it should be 0.3 mm or less.
Copyboard Cover
Index Sheet
White Board
Reader Unit
Copyboard Cover
Index Sheet
White Board
Reader Unit
Copyboard Cover
White Board
Index Sheet
Reader Unit
Copyboard Cover
Index Sheet
White Board
Reader Unit
F-9-102
18)
19)
9-46
Installation > Printer Cover-C2 > Checking the Contents
Printer Cover-C2
9-47
[13] Screw
(Binding; M4x8) X 15
[14] Edge Saddle X 2
[15] Reader Joint (Left)

X1
[16] DP Cable Guide

X1
[17] Reader Joint (Right)

X2
[18] Reader Damper X 2
[19] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 5
[20] Wire Saddle X 6

[1] Printer Cover Unit
X1
[4] Top Right Cover X 1
[7] Reader Fixing Hooks B

X2
[2] Printer Model

Front Cover X 1
[5] Top Left Cover X 1
[8] Fixing Hook C X 1
[3] Top Front Cover X 1
[6] Reader Fixing Hook A

X1
[9] Rubber Cap X 8
F-9-104
[10] Stepped Screw (M4)

X1
[11] Screw
(Flat Head; M4x6) X 2
[12] Screw
(RS Tightening; M3x8.5)
X2
F-9-103
Installation > Printer Cover-C2 > Checking the Contents
9-47
Installation > Printer Cover-C2 > Removing the Color Image Reader Unit
Points to Note before Installation
9-48
Removing the Color Image Reader Unit
CAUTION: In the case of installing the Printer Cover by removing the Color Image
Reader Unit
After installation of the Printer Cover, be sure to change the setting of the following
service mode to "0" before turning OFF the power of the host machine. Otherwise, an
error may occur when turning ON the power.
NOTE:
Implement this process when replacing the Color Image Reader with the Printer Cover.
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (The Right Upper Cover opens simultaneously.)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
Points to Note at Installation

The Top Front Cover, the Left Top Cover and the Right Top Cover are secured to the Printer
Cover Unit with tapes.
Turning Off the Host Machine

Check that the main power is OFF.
1) Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
F-9-106
off before disconnecting the outlet.

2) Open the Right Rear Cover Unit1.
3) Remove the Right Rear Cover Unit 1.

1 Screw (RS tight; M4)
2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-107
F-9-105
9-48
4) Remove the Reader Power Cable.
9-49
6) Remove the Reader Communication Cable.
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-110
Connectors
1 Screw
F-9-108
1 Hook
Hook
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
5 Claws
Rubber Caps
x2
Claws
Left Rear
Sub Cover
x5
F-1-101
F-9-111

Rubber Caps
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the Right Upper Cover open.
F-9-109
9-49
9) Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and open DADF.
11)
9-50
Remove the Reader Right Cover.
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
3 Hooks
Hook
x2
F-9-112
10)
Rubber Cap
Remove the Reader Left Cover.
2 Rubber Caps
F-9-114
2 Screws
12)
3 Hooks
Remove the Reader Front Cover.
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
x2
2 Protrusions
Hook
1 Hook
x2
Protrusion
Protrusion
Rubber
Cap
Rubber Cap
Hook
Rubber
Cap
F-9-113
Rubber Cap
F-9-115
9-50
9
13)
Install the 2 Fixation Screws for the Scanner.
15)
9-51
Free the USB cable from the cable guide and close DADF.
2 Screws
3 Wire Saddles
x2
x3
x2
F-9-116
14)
Free the harness from the cable guide.
F-9-118
2 Wire Saddles
16)
x2
Remove the 2 screws securing the front side of the Reader Unit.
x2
F-9-117
F-9-119
9-51
9
17)
Remove 1 screw each from 2 positions on the Reader Mounting Plate on the right
19)
9-52
Remove the Reader Unit from the machine by 2 or more people.
side of the Reader Unit.
x2
F-9-122
F-9-120
20)
18)
Close the Right Upper Cover.
Remove the 4 screws securing the left side of the Reader Unit.
x4
F-9-121
9-52
Installation > Printer Cover-C2 > Installation Procedure
9-53
NOTE:
When removing the Color Image Reader and installing the Printer Cover, start the work
from step 4 of [Installation Procedure].
1 Screw
1 Hook
Hook
Left Rear Sub Cover
1) Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow.
F-9-125
4) Open the Front Cover, and remove the Left Upper Cover.
F-9-123
5 Rubber Caps
5 Screws
1 Claw
2 Rubber Caps
1 Protrusion
2 Screws
Protrusion Claw
5 Claws
Rubber Cap
x5
x2
x5
Rubber Cap
Claw
Rubber Cap
Rubber Cap
F-9-126
F-9-124
9-53
9-54
5) Remove the joint (left).
8) Remove the Harness Guide.
2 Screws (Binding)
1 Harness
6) Remove the Reader Rest Plate.
1 USB Cable
1 Screw (RS Tightening)
2 Screws
x2
x3
F-9-127
7) Remove the 2 Reader Mounting Plates.
F-9-129
9) Install the Reader Joint (Left).
1 Screw each
3 Bosses
x2
x3
Boss
F-9-128
F-9-130
9-54
9
10)
Install the 2 Reader Joints (Right) by fitting them to the L-mark side.
13)
9-55
Remove the Top Rear Cover of the Printer Cover Unit.
1 Bosses each
2 Screws (Binding; M4x8) each
5 Hooks
11)
Affix the Reader Damper only on the rear side of the Reader Joint (Right).
NOTE:
Be sure to align it with the marking lines.
x4
Boss
Hook
Boss
x2
Reader
Damper
F-9-133
14)
Remove the Top Cover of the Printer Cover Unit.

F-9-131
12)
3 Hooks
Affix the Reader Damper to the Hinge Plate on the rear left side of the machine.
NOTE:
Be sure to align it with the marking lines.
Hook
x2
Marking Line
F-9-134
F-9-132
9-55
9
15)
Install the 2 Edge Saddles to the Reader Frame, and the 6 Wire Saddles to the X
marks.
17)
9-56
Secure the front side of the Printer Cover Unit.
1 Boss
18)
Secure the Left side of the Printer Cover Unit.
1 Stepped Screw (M4)
x3
F-9-135
16)
Boss
Place the Printer Cover Unit by aligning with the 2 Positioning Pins of the Reader
Joint (Right).
F-9-137
F-9-136
9-56
9
19)
Install the 2 Reader Fixing Hooks B.
21)
9-57
Fix the harness on the Edge Saddle and the 5 Wire Saddles installed in step 15.
2 Bosses
NOTE:
Do not pass it through the Wire Saddle [A] and Edge Saddle [B].
2 Screws (Flat-head Screw; M4)

20)
Install the Reader Fixing Hooks A and C.
NOTE:
Push-on the Reader Fixation Hook A up and install.
[A]
[B]
x6
3 Bosses
2 Screw (Binding; M4x8)
x2
Reader Fixing
Hook A
Boss
Fixing Hook C
x2
Reader Fixing Hooks B
F-9-139
Boss
Boss
F-9-138
9-57
NOTE:
When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously, be sure to route the harness as
shown in the figure.
Do not use 2 Wire Saddles [A].
23)
9-58
Put the USB Cable through the DP Harness Guide.
2 Bosses
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Wire Saddle
[A]
x6
x2
Boss
F-9-140
F-9-142
22)
NOTE:
When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously, be sure to route the USB cable as
shown in the figure.
Install the DP Cable Guide.
2 Bosses
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)
Boss
x3
F-9-141
F-9-143
9-58
9
24)
9-59
NOTE:
When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously, work from step 9 of [USB Device
Port-E1/E2/ Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > [Installation Procedure] > [Installing the
USB Device Port] > [In case of Printer Cover Unit].
Install the Top Cover.
3 Hooks
2 Screws (The screw removed in step 14)
2 Rubber Caps
Rubber Cap
Hook
26)
Rubber Cap
Move the Control Panel Base Cover in the direction of the arrow.
1 Screw
x2
27)
Hook
Install the Top Front Cover.
4 Hooks
2 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8.5)
28)
Return the Control Panel Base Cover to its original position.
1 Screw
Hook
F-9-144
25)
x2
Install the Top Rear Cover.
5 Hooks
2 Screws (The screw removed in step 13)
2 Rubber Caps
x2
Hook
Rubber Cap
F-9-145
F-9-146
9-59
9
29)
31)
Return the Control Panel.
5 Hooks
Install the Left Top Cover.
32)
Return the covers to their original positions.
Left Upper Cover
2 Rubber Caps
Front Cover (to be closed)
9-60
Left Rear Sub Cover

Left Rear Cover
Hook
x2
Rubber Cap
F-9-147
30)
Install the Right Top Cover.
5 Hooks
2 Rubber Caps
Hook
x2
Rubber Cap
F-9-148
9-60
Installation > Reader Heater Unit-J1 > Installation Procedure
Reader Heater Unit-J1
9-61

[1] Reader Heater X 2
[2] Cable Clamp X 4
F-9-150
[3] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 2
1) Open the DADF or Copyboard Cover.
2) Remove the Reader right retainer cover.
2 Screws
x2
F-9-149

F-9-151
9-61
3) Remove the copy board glass.
9-62
4) Pull the rear side of the Drive Belt in the direction of the arrow to move the Scanner Box to
the center.
CAUTION:
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to get your fingers touched with the
glass surface or the backside of the white plate.In case the glass is soiled, clean it with
lint-free paper.
F-9-154
5) Install the 2 Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure.
F-9-152
F-9-155
F-9-153
9-62
9-63
6) Install the reader heater.
8) Install the reader heater.
1 Screw (Binding;M4x6)
1 Screw (Binding;M4x6)
1 Connector
1 Connector
2 Cable Clamps
2 Cable Clamps
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness because it may interfere with moving
of the Scanner Box if it is not connected properly.
Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness because it may interfere with moving
of the Scanner Box if it is not connected properly.
x2
x2
F-9-158
F-9-156
9) Install the removed cover.
7) Install the 2 Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure.
copy board glass

Reader right retainer cover (2 Screws)
DADF or Copyboard Cover
F-9-157
9-63
9
10)
9-64
Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover, and check that the Environment
Heater Switch is ON. When it is OFF, turn it ON.

CAUTION:
When removing the cover, do not insert a screwdriver in the oval hole.
F-9-159
11)
Install the Environment Heater Switch Cover.
9-64
Installation > Cassette Heater Unit-37 > Installation Outline Drawing

Checking the Contents (ASIA only)

[1] Cassette Heater Unit X 1
9-65

[2] Heater Connector Cover X 1
[3] Wire Saddle X 1
[4] Screw
( Sems Round End; M3x6) X 1
F-9-161
[5] Screw (P Tight; M3x8) X 1
F-9-160
Installation > Cassette Heater Unit-37 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-65
Installation > Cassette Heater Unit-37 > Installation Procedure
9-66
2) Remove the Heater Connector Cover with a flat-blade screwdriver.
NOTE:
The installation procedure of this product is not changed either in the host machine t or
the cassette pedestal.
1 Claw
2 Protrusions
Claw
1) Press the Cassette Release Button to remove the Cassette.

(Host Machine: Cassettes 1 and 2, Cassette pedestal: Cassette 3 and 4)
Protrusion
Heater Connector Cover
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
F-9-163
Cassette Release
Button
3) Fit the 3 claws of the Cassette Heater Unit into the holes on the Base Plate.
CAUTION:
Cassette Release
Button
Be sure that the claws are fit into the holes of the Base Plate properly.
F-9-162
Cassette Heater Unit

Cassette Heater Unit
Base Plate
Base Plate
F-9-164
Installation > Cassette Heater Unit-37 > Installation Procedure
9-66
Installation > Cassette Heater Unit-37 > Checking After the Installation
4) Tighten the removed screw (W sems round end; M3x6) with the stubby driver to connect
the connector.
(The figure below shows an example of the Cassette Pedestal. Follow the same step as for
the host machine.)
9-67
Checking After the Installation

CAUTION:
When removing the cover, be sure not to insert a screwdriver in the elongate hole.
Connector
1) Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover.
F-9-165
5) Install the heater Connector Cover.
F-9-166
2) Check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON.
6) Install the removed Cassettes.
3) Turn ON, if it was OFF.
F-9-167
4) Install the Environment Heater Switch Cover.
9-67
9-68
5) Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON.
6) Turn ON, if it was OFF.
F-9-168
9-68
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure
Utility Tray-A2

[1] Utility Tray Unit X 1
1) Loosen the 2 screws, and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow
until it stops.
[3] Screw
(TP; M4x8 Black) X 10
[2] Wire Saddle X 5
Use when installing

the USB Keyboard
[4] Keyboard Table Plate

X1
9-69
Use 7 of them
[5] Screw (TP ; M4x14) X 4
[6] Screw (TP ; M4x10) X 2
Utility Tray Mounting Plate

F-9-171
2) While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.
F-9-169
CAUTION:
Be sure not to pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much.
[A]
F-9-172
F-9-170
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure
9-69
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When installing the Keyboard
3) Remove the 5 Face Seals. (Removed Face Seal will not be used.)
9-70
5) Install the Utility Tray.

2 Screws (TP; M4x8 Black)
Face Seal
2 Screws (Tighten the screws loosened in step 1.)
x2
Tighten
Tighten
F-9-173
F-9-175
4) Install the Mounting Utility Tray Plate.

5 screws (TP; M4x8 Black)
When installing the Keyboard

x5
1) Remove the 2 cap covers and install the 5 wire saddles.

Wire Saddle
F-9-174
Cap Cover
F-9-176
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When installing the Keyboard
9-70
Installation > Key Switch Unit-A2 > Installation Procedure
Key Switch Unit-A2
Checking the Content

[1] Key Switch Unit X 1
9-71
[2] Control Key X 1
[3] Screw (Binding; M46)

X1
F-9-177
F-9-179

2) Open the Right Rear Cover 1.

1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4)
2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-180
F-9-178
9-71
9-72
2 Rubber caps
1 Screw
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
Claw
x5
F-9-183
F-9-181
7) Remove the connector of the Cassette Pedestal.(If the Pedestal is not installed, this
procedure is not needed.)
6 Harness Guides
5 Connectors
2 Rubber caps
2 Screws
Connector
1 Claw
x6
x2
x5
Guide
Claw
F-9-184
F-9-182
9-72
9-73
2 Rubber caps
3 Claws
2 Screws
2 Claws
2 Hooks
x3
Claw
x2
Claw
x2
Claw
Claw
Hook
F-9-186
Hook
10)
Remove the Right Rear Cover 2.
2 Screws
x2
F-9-185
F-9-187
9-73
9
11)
Remove the Key Switch Bracket.
13)
2 Screws
9-74
Install the Key Switch Bracket assembled in the previous procedure.
2 Screws (use the screw removed in step 11)

14)
x2
Connect the connector of the host machine with the connector of Key Switch Unit.
x2
F-9-188
F-9-190
12)
Install the Key Switch Unit to the Key Switch Bracket.
15)
Cut the [A] part of the removed Right Rear Cover 2 in step 10) with nipper, etc.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove adequately so that there is no burr.
[A]
F-9-189
F-9-191
9-74
9
16)
Installation > Key Switch Unit-A2 > Checking after installation
9-75
Reinstall the removed covers and the connectors.
Right Rear Cover 2 (2 Screws)

Right Rear Cover 3
Rear Lower Cover (2 Screws, 2 Claws)
Cconnector of the Cassette Pedestal
Connector Cover (1 Screw)
Rear Cover (2 Screws, 2 Claws)
Left Rear Cover (2 Screws, 2 Claws)
Right Rear Cover 1 (3 Screws)
Right Lower Cover
Right Upper Cover
Checking after installation

3) Set the following service mode (level 1) value to 1.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > KEY
5) Make sure that [Set the control key] is displayed.
6) Insert the Control key into the Key Switch Unit and make sure that the machine is ready for
copy.
Installation > Key Switch Unit-A2 > Checking after installation
9-75
Installation > Voice Operation Kit C2 > Checking the Contents
Voice Operation Kit C2
[13] Cable Face Seal X 1
9-76
[14] Card Spacer X 1

[1] Speaker Unit X 1
[2] Voice Guidance Board
Unit X 1
[3] DVI Cable X 1
F-9-193
<CD/Guide>
Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide
[4] Ring Core X 2
[5] Ring Core X 1
Voice Operation Kit Users Guide
[6] Cord Guide X 7
Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide

Voice Guidance Guide CD
Voice Operation Kit Manual CD
FCC/IC Instruction Sheet
[7] Wire Saddle X 3
Use 2 of them
[10] Screw (Binding; M3x14)

X1

X2

X2
Use 1 of them
[11] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2
[12] Support Plate X 1
F-9-192
Installation > Voice Operation Kit C2 > Checking the Contents
9-76
Installation > Voice Operation Kit C2 > Installation Procedure
9-77
CAUTION:
The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment.

When installing the equipment, see the 'Combination Table of Accessory Installation'.

F-9-195

1 Screw (RS Tight; M4)
2 Screws (TP; M3)

Claw in 1 place
x3
Claw
F-9-196
F-9-194
9-77
4) If reader is installed, remove the Reader Power Cable.
9-78
6) Remove the 2 screws, and open the grip in 2 places.
2 Connectors
2 wire Saddle
x2
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Grips
Cable Guide
F-9-199
7) Hold the grip in 2 places, remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed
Wire Saddles
harness.
Connectors
F-9-197
5) Remove the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.

Control Panel Communication Cable
USB Cable
x2
F-9-200
F-9-198
9-78
8) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Do not
10)
9-79
Install the Main Controller PCB 1 in the Host Machine.
use the removed Voice Operation Board Support Plate.)

CAUTION:
2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 9))
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops, tilt the grip and install
the 2 screws.
Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously.
x2
Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.
x2
F-9-201
Grips
9) Install the Voice Operation Board Unit in the Main Controller Roller PCB 1.
1 Connector
F-9-203
2 screws (2 Screws that removed in step 8))

2 Screws (TP; M36)
NOTE:
Make sure that the connector is installed properly.
x4
Connector
F-9-202
9-79
9
11)
Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.
12)
If reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable.
14)
9-80
Cut the [A] part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper, etc.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at [A] part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on [B] part.
[A]
x2
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
[A]
Connectors
13)
F-9-206
F-9-204
15)
Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1.
1 Screw
Install the Right Rear Cover 1. (3 Screws)
NOTE:
Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1.
Claw in 2 places
x2
Claw
16)
Close the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover.
F-9-205
9-80
9
17)
Remove the Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover. (Do not use the removed
Cover Seal.)
19)
9-81
Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).
1 Screw (Binding; M314)

x2
Face Seal
F-9-207
M3x14
18)
M4x14
Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit.
F-9-209
2 screws (removed screw will be used in step 20))

20)
x2
Install the Speaker Unit (Upper).
2 screws (screws that removed in step 18))

Speaker Unit (Lower)
x2
F-9-208
F-9-210
9-81
9
21)
Peel off the Face Seal, and install the 2 Wire Saddles. (Do not use the removed
23)
9-82
Connect both sides of the DVI Cable respectively.
Cover Seal.
Face Seal
Wire Saddles
F-9-213
F-9-211
22)
24)
Pass the DVI Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1, and close the cover.
Install the Ring Core to both sides of the DVI Cable, and remove the cap. (Do not use
the removed cap.
Ring Core
DVI Cable
Cap
F-9-214
F-9-212
9-82
9
25)
Installation > Voice Operation Kit C2 > Operation Check > To stop the use
9-83
Setting Check
Fix the DVI Cable to the 2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
When changing the settings upon users request, it is required to log in as a system
manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.
3) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON].
4) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice
Navigation at Startup] and make sure that is [Select Mode at Startup] set.
make sure that [Tune Microphone] is displayed.
F-9-215
NOTE: When using in combination with the Copy Card Reader
Secure the Card Reader External Relay Harness in place together with the DVI Cable
using the Wire Saddle [A] included in the package of Voice Operation Kit.
Even when used in combination with the Card Reader, the routing of the cable is same.
Operation Check
When using
1) Press Reset Key and Voice Recognition Button for 3 secs or more.
2) In the operation screen [Voice Navigation], select one of the following: [Manual+Vocal
Mode/Vocal Mode/Manual Mode], and press OK.
3) The display in Panel Screen, if the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, Voice
Guidance Kit is available.
[A]
NOTE:
If [Manual Mode] is selected in [Voice Navigation], nothing is going to happen even if
Voice Recognition Button is pressed.
If Voice Guidance Kit doesnt properly operate, check the below.
F-9-216
Enter Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION, and check whether languages to
be used for TTS-JA/TTS-EN/TTS-IT/TTS-FR/TTS-DE are properly installed.
Enter Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION, and check whether ASR-JA/ASREN is properly installed.
To stop the use

1) Press the Reset Key for 3 secs or more.
Installation > Voice Operation Kit C2 > Operation Check > To stop the use
9-83
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Checking the Contents
Voice Guidance Kit-F2
[13] Support Plate X 1
9-84
[14] Cable Face Seal X 1

[1] Speaker Unit (Upper)
X1
[2] Speaker Unit (Lower)

X1
[3] Voice Guidance Board

Unit X 1
F-9-218
<CD/GUIDES>
Voice Guidance kit Users Guide
[4] Speaker Cable X 1
[5] Cord Guide X 7
Voice Guidance Guide CD
[6] Ring Core X 2
FCC/IC Instruction Sheet
Use 3 of them
[7] Screw
[8] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 1
[10] Screw
[11] Screw
[12] Card Spacer X 1
Use 1 of them
F-9-217
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Checking the Contents
9-84
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure
9-85
CAUTION:
The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment.


F-9-220

1 Screw (RS Tight; M4)

2 Screws (TP; M3)
Claw in 1 place
x3
Claw
F-9-221
F-9-219
9-85
4) If reader is installed, remove the Reader Power Cable.
9-86
6) Remove the 2 screws, and open the grip in 2 places.
2 Connectors
2 wire Saddle
x2
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Grips
Cable Guide
F-9-224
7) Hold the grip in 2 places, remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed
Wire Saddles
harness.
Connectors
F-9-222
5) Remove the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.

USB Cable
x2
F-9-225
F-9-223
9-86
8) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Do not
10)
9-87
Install the Main Controller PCB 1 in the Host Machine.
use the removed Voice Operation Board Support Plate.)

CAUTION:
2 Screws (Do not use the removed 2 Screws.)
the 2 screws.
x2
x2
F-9-226
Grips
9) Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit in the Main Controller PCB 1.
1 Connector
F-9-228
4 Screws (TP; M36)

NOTE:
Make sure that the connector is installed properly.
x4
Connector
F-9-227
9-87
9
11)
Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.
12)
If reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable.
14)
9-88
Cut the [A] part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper, etc.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
[A]
x2
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
[A]
Connectors
13)
F-9-231
F-9-229
15)
Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1.
1 Screw
NOTE:
Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1.
Claw in 2 places
x2
Claw
16)
Close the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover.
F-9-230
9-88
9
17)
Remove the Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover. (Do not use the removed
Cover Seal.)
19)
9-89
Install the Speaker Unit (Upper).
1 Screw (Bind; M4x6)
Face Seal
F-9-232
18)
Install the Speaker Unit (lower).
F-9-234
20)
Install the Ring Core to both sides of the Speaker Cable.
x2
50mm
F-9-235
M3x16
M4x16
F-9-233
9-89
9
21)
9-90
NOTE: When using in combination with the Copy Card Reader
Remove the cover of the 3 Cord Guides.
Affix the 2 Cord Guides [A] as shown in the figure, and use the Wire Saddle [B] included
in the Card Reader Attachment.
Even when used in combination with the Card Reader, the routing of the cable is same.
[A]
F-8-238
F-9-236
22)
[B]
Peel off the paper liner, and affix them in 3 places in the Cord Guide as shown in the
figure.
NOTE:
Do not affix the Cord Guide onto the Face Seals [A].
F-9-238
[A]
23)
Connect both sides of the Speaker Cable respectively.
x2
F-9-237
F-9-239
9-90
9
24)
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check > To stop the use
Pass the Speaker Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1, and close the
cover.
9-91
Checking after installation

NOTE:
make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON].
make sure that [Voice Guide from Speakers] is displayed.
F-9-240
25)
Pass the Speaker Cable to Cord Guide, and install the 3 Cord Guide covers.
Operation Check
During use
1) Press reset key 3 secs or more.
2) Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel.
3) If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, Voice Guidance Kit is available.
If Voice Guidance Kit doesnt properly operate, check the below.
Enter Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION, and check whether languages to
be used for TTS-JA/TTS-EN/TTS-IT/TTS-FR/TTS-DE are properly installed.
F-9-241
To stop the use

1) Press the Reset Key for 3 secs or more.
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check > To stop the use
9-91
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Card Reader Attachment-B3
Copy Card Reader-F1
9-92
Card Reader Attachment-B3
[1] Card Reader Mounting

Plate (front) Unit X 1

Plate (rear) Unit X 1

Plate (lower) Unit X 1
[4] Card ReaderRelay

Unit X 1
[5] Connector Cover X 1
[6] Card Reader External

Relay Harness X 1
[7] Cord Guide X 2
[8] PCB Spacer X 1
[9] Wire Saddle X 1
[11] Screw
(TP; M3x12) X 2
[12] Screw
(TP; M4x12) X 2
To install the Copy Card Reader-F1, the Card Reader Mounting Kit-B3 is required.
The following options cannot be used in combination with each other.
Copy Control Interface Kit

Copy Card Reader-F1
[1] Card Reader Unit X 1
[2] Screw
(RS tight; M4x10) X 1
[3] Toothed washer X 1
F-9-242
Use 4 of them
[13] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 4
F-9-243
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Card Reader Attachment-B3
9-92
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure
9-93

CAUTION:
After installing the Copy Card Reader-F1, input the card number to be used in service
mode (level 1) on this equipment: [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [CARD];
otherwise the card cannot be recognized even though it is inserted.

F-9-245
F-9-244
9-93
2) Open the Right Rear Cover Unit1.
9-94
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
3) Remove the Right Rear Cover Unit 1.

2 Screws (TP; M3)
USB Cable
x2
1 Claw
x3
F-9-248
Claw
F-9-246
6) Remove the 2 screws and open the 2 grips.

4) When the Reader is installed, remove the Reader Power Cable.
2 Connectors
x2
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
Grips
F-9-249
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-247
9-94
7) Hold the 2 grips and remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed
harness.
9-95
9) Remove the screw and rinstall the PCB Spacer.(Removed screw is used in the procedure
12))
F-9-250
F-9-252
8) Remove the 2 screws and the upper screw of Blanking Cover from the Main Controller
PCB 1.(Removed screw is used in the procedure 10))
10)
Install the Card Reader Relay Unit.
3 Screws (screws removed in step 8))

1 Connector
x3
x3

F-9-251
F-9-253
9-95
9
11)
Install the connector of Card Reader External Relay Harness.
13)
9-96
Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine.
CAUTION:
the 2 screws.
x2
F-9-254
12)
Grips
Install the Connector Cover.
1 screw (screw removed in step 9))
F-9-256
CAUTION:
Install it in the position where the tie-wrap of Card Reader External Relay Harness is
inside the Connector Cover..
F-9-255
9-96
14)
Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
15)
When the Reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable..
16)
9-97
Pass the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Right Rear Cover 1 and
install it.
1 Screws (RS tight; M4)
NOTE:
1 Claw
1 Wire Saddle
x3
x2
x2
2 Screws (TP; M3)
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Wire Saddle
Reader Power Cable

Connectors
F-9-258
F-9-257
17)
Close the Right Rear Cover 1, Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover.
9-97
9
18)
Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the
cable by putting it through the groove shown in the figure below.
21)
9-98
Install the Card Reader Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate (front) Unit.
1 Toothed Washer
1 Screws
1 Screw (RS tight; M4x10)
19)
1 Wire saddle
Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit.
Lower Cover
Wire Saddle
Toothed Washer
Groove
F-9-261
F-9-259
22)
20)
Remove the Jumper from the connector of Card Reader Unit. (Removed Jumper will
not be used.)
Remove the Rubber Cap and Screw. (Removed Rubber Cap and Screw will not be
used.)
23)
Remove the Face Seal. (Removed Face Seal will not be used.)
Face Seal
Rubber Cap
F-9-262
F-9-260
9-98
9
24)
Install the Card Reader Installation Plate (rear) to the host machine.
26)
2 Screws (TP; M3x12)
9-99
Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate (front) Unit to the Card Reader Mounting
Plate (rear).
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
CAUTION:
Do not pinch the harness.
x2
x4
F-9-263
25)
Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of Card Reader
Unit.
1 Connector
F-9-265
1 Edge Saddle
CAUTION:
27)
Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle.
Remove the 2 covers of Cord Guide.
Connector
Edge
Saddle
F-9-266
F-9-264
9-99
9
28)
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
Remove the backing paper of Cord Guide and put it in the 2 places indicated in the
figure.
29)
32)
33)
9-100
Remove the face seal, and install the wire saddle.
Setting After Installation

1) Check that the following service mode value is set to "0".
Service Mode (level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE
Wire saddle
NOTE:
The number of card (number of department) can be changed if a request arises from a
user. Make this setting before the step 3).
Change the setting value in service mode (level 2) > [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] >
[CARD-RNG].
To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
Cord Guide
F-9-267
30)
Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the 2 places of Cord Guide and
install the cover.

31)
Fix the Card Reader External Relay Harness with the Wire Saddle.
NOTE:
Even when used in combination with following options, the routing of the cable is same.
Voice Guidance Kit
2) Enter the following Service Mode (level 1).

3) Select: [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [CARD] and enter the card number to be
used (1 to 2001).
Input the minimum card number to be used by a user.
1000 cards from the inputted number can be used.
4) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
5) Insert the card with the registered card No. and make sure that it is in standby.
NOTE:
After setting, if a request arises from a user and changing the number of card (number
of department), make a following setting. In that case, the current counter information
by department will be reset.
Execute in service mode (level 1) > [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [CLEAR] > [CARD].
Specify the value in service mode (level 2) > [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] >
[CARD-RNG].
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
F-9-268
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-100
Installation > Copy Tray-J1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Copy Tray-J1
9-101

[1] Copy Tray x 1
F-9-270
F-9-269

Installation > Copy Tray-J1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-101
Installation > Copy Tray-J1 > Setting after installation
Installation procedure
9-102
1) Remove the Right Delivery Frame Cover with flat-blade screwdriver.

2 Claws
Setting after installation
Claw
x2
1) Enter Service Mode (level 1).

2) Select: [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [ACC] > [OUT-TRAY] and register 1.
4) Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Common] > [Paper Output Settings]
and check that [Delivery Tray Settings] menu is added.
5) Select either tray B or C to copy, and perform test copy.
6) Check that the paper is output in the Copy Tray.
7) Reset the tray in accordance with the users request.
F-9-271
2) Install the Copy Tray.

2 Claws
F-9-272
Installation > Copy Tray-J1 > Setting after installation
9-102
Installation > Inner 2-way Tray-F1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Inner 2-way Tray-F1
Turning Off the Main Power Switch


[1] Inner 2way Tray X 1
9-103
[2] Insert pin X 1

[4] Second Delivery Full

Detection Lever X 1
F-9-273
F-9-274
Installation > Inner 2-way Tray-F1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-103
Installation > Inner 2-way Tray-F1 > Installation Procedure
9-104
3) Insert the Inner 2way Tray to 2 slots of the Delivery Assembly, and hook it to the slot of
1) Remove the Inner 2way Tray Support from the host machine using flat-blade screwdriver.
1 Claw
the Inner 2way Tray Support.

NOTE:
Insert the Inner 2way Tray to the slot of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the
Second Tray Support so that boss is inserted to the Inner Rear Cover 1.
2) Turn over the Inner 2way Tray Support and install to the host machine.
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
CAUTION:
Check that the Inner 2way Tray Unit is inserted to the Inner 2way Tray Support.
F-9-276
F-9-275
Installation > Inner 2-way Tray-F1 > Installation Procedure
9-104
Installation > Inner 2-way Tray-F1 > Setting after installation
4) Insert the insert pin into the hole of the In Tray, and fix to the Inner 2way Tray Support.
9-105
Setting after installation

1) Enter Service Mode (level 1).
2) [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [ACC] > [IN-TRAY], and set 1
4) [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Common] > [Paper Output Settings] > [Output
Tray Settings], and check that menu is added.
5) Select copy to the Tray B, and perform test copy.
6) Check that a copy is delivered to the Inner 2way Tray.
7) Set the tray in accordance with users request.
F-9-277
Installation > Inner 2-way Tray-F1 > Setting after installation
9-105
9
Additional Memory Type D (512MB)
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Outline Drawing
9-106


[1] Expansion RAM x 1
F-9-278
Pre-Check
1) Check the memory capacity.
Service Mode (level 1) > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
2) Exit the service mode.
F-9-279
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Outline Drawing
9-106
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure
9-107

1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
hook
5 Claws
Rubber Caps
x2
Claws
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
Rubber Caps
F-9-282
F-9-280
4) If FAX is installed,disconnect the FAX cable.
2) If the Reader is installed, remove the Reader Communication Cable.
F-9-283
F-9-281
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure
9-107
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Checking after Installation
9-108
7) Install the Main Controller PCB 2.
2 Screws
CAUTION:
Lift the grip and insert the Main Controller PCB 2. When it touches the end, tilt the
grip and install it with 2 screws.
x2

Grip
x2
F-9-284
6) Install the Expansion RAM.

Grip
F-9-286
8) Install the removed cover and the cable.

Connect the FAX cable (If the FAX is installed.)
Left Rear Sub Cover (2 Screws)
Reader Communication Cable (if the Reader is installed).
Left Reader Cover (2 Screws, 2 Rubber Caps)
F-9-285
10)
Checking after Installation

1) After adding the Expansion RAM, check that the memory capacity is increased.
Service mode (level 1) > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
2) Exit the service mode.
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Checking after Installation
9-108
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1
9-109

To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", it is necessary to install the license
which comes with the product.
Be sure to ask users to install the license after the installation.
CAUTION:
An error occurs when the license is installed before installing the Image Analysis Board,
so make sure to install the license after installing the Image Analysis Board.

[1] Image Data Analyzer
Board x 1
[2] PCB Spacer x 4
[4] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 4

x1
Use 2 of them
[3] Image Data Analyzer

Board Support Plate x 1
F-9-288
F-9-287
<CD/Guides>
License Access Number Certificate
Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP CD
FCC/IC sheet (only for USA/Europe)
Notice for Delivered Installation sheet
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-109
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure
9-110

1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
Hook
5 Claws
Rubber Caps
x2
Claws
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
Rubber Caps
F-9-291
F-9-289
4) If FAX is installed,disconnect the FAX cable.
2) In the reader is installed, disconnect the Reader Communication Cable.
F-9-292
F-9-290
9-110
9-111
7) Install the 2 PCB Spacers.
2 Screws
x2
Grip
F-9-293
6) Remove the 4 Screws.
F-9-295
3 Screws (TP; M3) (Removed 2 screws will be used in step 8). Another screw will not be
used.)
1 Screw (with Washer) (Removed screw is no longer used.)
8) Install the Image Data Analyzer Board Support Plate.

W sems
2 Screws (TP; M3) (screw removed in step 6)

x4
Binding
x3
F-9-294
F-9-296
9-111
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation
9) Install the Image Data Analyzer Board.
11)
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
Connect the FAX cable.(If the FAX is installed.)
9-112
Install the removed cover and the cable.
Install the Left Rear Sub Cover. (1 Screw)

Install the Reader Communication Cable (if the Reader is installed).
Install the Left Reader Cover. (2 Screws, 2 Rubber Caps)
x4
3) Ask users to install license.
5) Press the counter check key on the control panel.
F-9-297
6) Press "Check Device Configuration" key.

7) Check that "Image Data Analyzer Board" is displayed in option field.
10)
Install the Main Controller PCB 2.
CAUTION:
Lift the grip and insert the Main Controller PCB 2. When it touches the end, tilt the grip
and install it with 2 screws.
x2
Grip
F-9-298
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-112
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1

[1] CC-VI Cable X 1
9-113
[2] D-SUB Support Plate
X1
[3] Washer (large) X 2
The following options cannot be used in combination with each other.

Copy Control Interface Kit
Copy Card Reader
[4] Hexagonal Screw (Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2
Do not use a Nut
Serial Intreface Kit-K1

[1] Serial RS Conversion
Board X 1
[2] IA Harness Protection

Sheet X 1
[5] IA Harness Protection
Sheet X 1
[3] RS Conversion
Cable X 1
F-9-300
[4] Hexagonal Screw X 2
[5] Washer X 2
[6] PCB Spacer X 1

F-9-299
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-113
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Preparation
9-114

1 Screw (RS tightening; M4)
2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-301
F-9-303
4) When the Reader is equipped, remove the Reader Power Supply Cable.
Preparation
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-302
F-9-304
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Preparation
9-114
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1
9-115
5) Disconnect the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.

7) Hold the 2 Grips. While avoiding the removed harness, remove the Main Controller PCB 1.
USB Cable
x2
F-9-307
Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1
F-9-305
1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Removed Face Cover is not
6) Remove the 2 screws and open the Grips in 2 areas.
used.)
2 Screws (Removed screws are not used.)
x2
x2
Grips
F-9-306
F-9-308
9-115
9-116
2) Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1.
4) Connect the RS Conversion Cable to the Serial RS Conversion Board.
Affixing Side
F-9-311
F-9-309
3) Remove the 1 screw and install the PCB Spacer. (Removed screw is used in the procedure
5))
5) Install the Serial RS Conversion Board.

1 Screw (which was removed in the procedure 3))
2 Washers
2 Hexagonal Screws
1 Connector
x3
F-9-310
F-9-312
9-116
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
9-117
Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
3) Put the CC-VI cable through the D-SUB Support Plate.
1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Removed Face Cover is not
Inside
used.)
2 Screws (Removed screws are not used.)
x2
D-SUB Support Plate

CC-VI Cable
F-9-315
4) Secure the CC-VI cable to the Main Controller PCB 1.

2 Hexagonal Screws
2 Washers (small)
2 Washers (large)
1 Connector
F-9-313
CC-VI Cable
2) Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1.
Affixing Side
Washers (large)
Washers (Small)
Hexagonal Screw
x2
F-9-316
F-9-314
9-117
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Procedure after Work
Procedure after Work
9-118
2) Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
3) When the Reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable.
1) Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine.
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Lift the grip and insert the Main Controller PCB 1 and then, after it stops, tilt the grip
and install it with 2 screws.

x2
[A]
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Grips
Connectors
F-9-317
F-9-318
4) Install the Right Rear Cover 1 (3 Screws).

6) Close the Right Upper Cover.
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Procedure after Work
9-118
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1
9-119
Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this
Checking Bundled Components
product is sold, the following name may be registered instead.

F246338
[3]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[14]

[13]
2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then
[12]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[2]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[8]
F-9-319
[1]
Heater unit
1 pc.
[2]
AC input connector
1 pc.
[3]
Relay harness
1 pc.
[4]
AC Cable
1 pc.
[5]
Screw (w/ washer; M4x8)
2 pcs.
[6]
Cable protection bushing
1 pc.
[7]
Power supply label
2 pcs. (*Only 1 pc. is used)
[8]
Wire saddle (white)
3 pcs. (*Only 2 pcs. are used)
[9]
Plug cover
1 pc.
[10]
Screw (Binding; M4x4)
1 pc.
[11]
Wire saddle (black)
5 pcs.
[12]
AC output connector
1 pc.
[13]
Screw (Binding; M4x6)
1 pc.
[14]
Toothed washer
1 pc.
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-119
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure
9-120
3) Detach the right cover of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow shown.
1) Release the interface cable from the wire saddle, and then disconnect the paper deck
3 Screws
connector from the host machine.
x3
F-9-322
4) Detach the rear cover of the paper deck.

F-9-320
2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the
paper deck to open the compartment.
6 Screws (M4x8: 4 pcs., M3x8: 2 pcs.)

NOTE:
When the rear cover is removed, loosen the screw shown by an arrow in the figure,
if it is difficult to remove the rear cover because of contacting to the left rear cover.
x6
F-9-321
F-9-323
9-120
5) Detach the front upper cover.
9-121
7) Attach the supplied cable protection bushing to the hole on the top panel of the paper deck.
3 Screws
1 Connector
x3
x1
F-9-326
8) Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck, and then take the connector
F-9-324
6) Detach the top cover.
out of the hole on the top plate.
9) Insert the 2 hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and
2 Screws
then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck.
1 Screw (w/washer; M4x8)
x2
x2
x1
F-9-325
F-9-327
9-121
10) Attach the heater connector to the panel mount.
9-122
12) Install the supplied AC input connector in order of [A] -> [B].
[A]
[B]
x1
F-9-328
F-9-330
11) Remove the blindfold plate from the power cord mount of the paper deck.
13) Attach the 5 wire saddles (black) to the rear side panel of the paper deck as shown.
1 Screw
NOTE:
Removed screw and blindfold cover are no longer reused.
x5
x1
F-9-331
F-9-329
9-122
14) Put the relay harness in the 5 wire saddles (black), and then attach the connector.
9-123
16) Reattach the external covers of the paper deck in the following sequence:
[1] Top cover (2 screws; M4x8)
NOTE:
2 snap-bands (A) equipped with the relay harness are not used.
[2] Right cover (3 screws; M4x8)

[3] Rear cover (4 screws; M4x8 and 2 screws; M3x8)
[4] Front upper cover (1 connector and 2 screws; M4X8)
17) Manually slide the paper deck to the left to place it aside of the host machine
18) Attach reusable band, and then connect the connector of the paper deck to the back of
x5
the host machine.
A
F-9-332
15) Put the relay harness in the 2 wire saddles on the power cord mount, and then connect
the connector.
F-9-334
x2
F-9-333
9-123
19) Stick the power supply label to the rear panel of the paper deck.
9-124
21) Attach two wire saddles (white) to the rear panel of the host machine, and then connect
the AC cable connector to the power cord mount of the heater.
Route the AC cable as shown, and then connect the other connector (plug) to the
receptacle on the rear panel of the host machine.
F-9-335
20) Remove 1 screw (bind head;M4x4) to detach the plate.
x1
F-9-337
F-9-336
9-124
9-125
22) Fix the supplied plug cover at rear side of the host machine with 1 screw (bind
head;M4x4) removed at the step 20.
x1
F-9-338
To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors, explain to the

user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be
placed in the hatched area.
[1]: Host machine [2]: Paper deck [A]: Front
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-9-339
9-125
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Installation Outline Drawing
USB Device Port-E1/E2
9-126

When installing the Inner Finisher or the Buffer Path simultaneously, be sure to install this
equipment first.
If the Inner Finisher or the Buffer Path is installed, this equipment cannot be installed
unless it is removed. For details of installation procedure, refer to the Service Manual.
Installation procedures for the Device Port-E1 and Device Port-E2 are similar.
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may differ from the actual things, the
procedure is the same.
F-9-340

Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-126
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E1] > [In case of Printer Cover Unit]
Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E1]

[In case of Printer Cover Unit]
[1] DP Fireproof Sheet X 1
[4] DP Sheet
(for Europe) X 1
[7] Screw
(TP Round End; M36) X 10
Use 8 of them
[2] Cusion X 2
[5] DP Board X 1
[8] Screw
(Bind; M46) X 9
9-127
[13] DP Lower Cover Unit

X1
[14] DP Mounting Plate W

X1
[15] DP Shield Plate X 2
[16] Paper Feed Sheet W

X1
[17] DP USB Cable X 1
[18] Paper Feed Sheet P

X1
[19] DP Mounting Plate P

X1
[20] USB Cable X 1
[3] DP Sheet
(for Japan) X 1
[6] Screw
(RS tight; M38.5) X 1
[9] DP Bottom Cover X 1
Use 6 of them
F-9-342
<CD/Guides>
FCC/IC instruction sheet
[10] DP Support Plate X 1
[11] DP Mounting
Reinforcing Plate X 1
[12] DP Upper Cover Unit

X1
F-9-341
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E1] > [In case of Printer Cover Unit]
9-127
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E1] > [In case of DADF]
[In case of DADF]

[4] DP Sheet
(for Europe) X 1
[7] Screw
[2] Cusion X 2
[5] DP Board X 1
[8] Screw
(Bind; M46) X 9
9-128

X1

X1

X1

X1

X1
[20] USB Cable X 1
[3] DP Sheet
(for Japan) X 1
[6] Screw
F-9-344
[11] DP Mounting

X1
<CD/Guides>
F-9-343
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E1] > [In case of DADF]
9-128
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E2 > [In case of Printer Cover Unit]
Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E2

[4] DP Sheet
(for Europe) X 1
[7] Screw
Use 8 of them
[2] Cusion X 2
[5] DP Board X 1
[8] Screw
(Bind; M46) X 9
9-129

X1

X1

X1

X1

X1
[20] USB Cable X 1
[21] DP Mounting Plate B

X1
[23] DP Cable Guide Unit

X1
[3] DP Sheet
(for Japan) X 1
[6] Screw
Use 6 of them
[11] DP Mounting

X1
F-9-346
<CD/Guides>
F-9-345
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E2 > [In case of Printer Cover Unit]
9-129
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E2 > [In case of DADF]
[In case of DADF]

[4] DP Sheet
(for Europe) X 1
[7] Screw
[2] Cusion X 2
[5] DP Board X 1
[8] Screw
(Bind; M46) X 9
[11] DP Mounting
9-130

X1

X1

X1

X1

X1
[20] USB Cable X 1
[21] DP Mounting Plate B

X1
[23] DP Cable Guide Unit

X1
[3] DP Sheet
(for Japan) X 1
[6] Screw

X1
F-9-348
F-9-347
<CD/Guides>
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Checking the Contents [USB Device Port-E2 > [In case of DADF]
9-130
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > [In case of Printer Cover Unit]
Checking the Contents [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2]

[1] Multimedia
Card Slot X 1
[2] Card Slot X 1
9-131
Installing the USB Device Port
[3] Card Slot X 1

1) Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow.
[4] USB Cable X 1
[6] Multimedia Label X 1
[7] Slot Holder X 1

F-9-350
2) Remove the Top Right Cover.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
5 Hooks
Hook
F-9-349
<CD/Guides>
x2
Rubber Cap
F-9-351
9-131
3) Remove the Top Left Cover.
5) Remove the Top Rear Cover.
2 Rubber Caps
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
2 Screws
5 Hooks
5 Hooks
Hook
9-132
Hook
x2
x2
Rubber Cap
Rubber Cap
F-9-352
F-9-354
4) Move the Control Panel Base Cover, and remove the Top Front Cover.
6) Remove the Top Cover.
1 Screw (TP) on the Control Panel Base Cover
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws (RS Tightening)
2 Screws
4 Hook
3 Hooks
Rubber Cap
Hook
Hook
Rubber Cap
Hook
x2
x2
F-9-353
F-9-355
9-132
7) Disconnect the USB Cable, and route it as shown in the figure.
8) Route the harness as shown in the figure and pass through to the front.
2 Screws (The removed screws will not be used.)
2 Edge Saddles
1 Wire Saddles
6 Wire Saddles
9-133
DP Cable Guide
x5
x2
x4
F-9-357
F-9-356
9-133
9) Connect the DP USB Cable.
10)
2 Bosses
1 Boss
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3x8.5)
9-134
Install the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate.
DP Cable Guide
3 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
Secure the 2 USB Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
Boss
F-9-359
F-1-344
Boss
11)
Remove the sheet on the Printer Front Cover.
12)
Cut off the Face Cover.
[A]
x3
F-9-360
F-9-358
9-134
9
13)
Instal the Top Cover.
18)
3 Hooks
Install the DP Support Plate and the DP Mounting Plate P to the DP Lower Cover
Unit.
2 Screws
2 Bosses each
2 Rubber Caps
14)
9-135
Install the Top Rear Cover.
5 Hooks
2 Screws
2 Rubber Caps
15)
Install the Top Front Cover and return the Control Panel Cover to its original position.
4 Hook
Boss
2 Screws (RS Tightening)

1 Screw (TP) on the Control Panel Base Cover
DP Mounting
Plate P
Boss
16)
17)
Install the Top Left Cover and Top Right Cover.
5 Hooks each
x4
2 Rubber Caps each
DP Support Plate
F-9-361
9-135
9
19)
Install the DP Board.
20)
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)
9-136
Insert the DP Support Plate to the Control Panel Unit, and install the DP Lower
Cover Unit using a stubby screwdriver.

2 Bosses
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
NOTE:
Be sure to tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3x6) on the DP Support Plate first.
x3
F-9-362
Boss Hole
Boss
x4
F-9-363
9-136
9
21)
9-137
CAUTION:
Put and connect the harness through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit.
Be careful not to trap the harness with the USB Cable with the Plate.
1 Wire Saddle (upper side)

1 Connector
NOTE:
Be sure not to pass the harness through the Wire Saddle on the lower side.
F-9-365
F-9-364
22)
Put and connect the 2 USB Cables through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit.
1 Wire Saddle (lower side)

1 USB Cable with the Plate
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
1 USB Cable
NOTE:
Be sure not to pass the cables through the Wire Saddle on the upper side.
Be sure to connect the USB Cable with the Plate first.
Be sure to USB Cable the other connector next to the USB Cable with the Plate.
F-9-366
9-137
9
23)
Peel the release paper for the Paper Feed Sheet P to [A] area and affix to the DP
Bottom Cover as shown in the figure.
24)
9-138
Check the position to install the DP Bottom Cover and wipe the affixing surface of the
Paper Feed Sheet P with alcohol.
NOTE:
When affixing it, be sure to align it with the marking lines, and push the [B] part against
the [C] part.
Be sure that the Paper Feed Sheet P is on the DP Bottom Cover.
Release Paper
F-9-369
25)
Insert the protrusion of the DP Bottom Cover and attach the DP Bottom Cover while
remove the remaining release paper from Paper Feed Sheet P.
Paper Feed Sheet P
4 Claws
[A]
CAUTION:
F-9-367
Be sure that the [A] part is inserted into the Control Panel Unit.
[C]
Be careful not to trap cables with the [B] part. Be careful not to trap the harness and
the USB Cable with the DP Lower Cover and the DP Bottom Cover.
Make sure that the Paper Feed Sheet P does not peel off.
[B]
Marking Line
F-9-368
9-138
9-139
NOTE:
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 simultaneously, be sure to refer to

"Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2, step 3" before installing the DP Upper Cover.
The Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 cannot be used in combination with the Card Reader
(sales company's option).
26)
Remove the Transparent Cover.
1 Claw
2 Hooks
Transparent Cover
x4
Protrusion
Claw
Hook
Claw
Claw
Claw
[A]
F-9-371
Paper Feed Sheet P
[B]
[A]
F-9-370
9-139
9
27)
Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow.
28)
9-140
Install the following parts.
1 Protrusion
2 Hooks
CAUTION:
2 Claws
Be sure to place the DP Fireproof Sheet by aligning the 3 ribs and pushing the sheet
against the rib [A] without removing the release sheet of it.
Turn over the DP Sheet (for Europe) with the plain side up, and install it while folding
the bar code part.
Claw
Be sure to keep the DP Sheet (for Japan) because it is used when installing the
Card Reader.
Claw
x2
Rib[A]
Protrusion
Hook
F-9-372
NOTE:
Rib
When installing the Card Reader (sales company's option) simultaneously, be sure to
refer to "Installing the Card Reader, step 2" after installing the DP Upper Cover.
F-9-373
1 DP Fireproof Sheet
2 Cushions
1 DP Sheet
1 Transparent Cover (2 hooks and 1 claw)
9-140
9
Hook
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > [In case of DADF]
Transparent Cover
Claw
9-141
[In case of DADF]

1) Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow, and open the DADF.
DP Sheet
Cusion
DP Fireproof Sheet
F-9-374
29)
Remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover.
F-9-375
2) Remove the Reader Front Cover.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
2 Protrusions
1 Hook
Protrusion
x2
Protrusion
Rubber Cap
Hook
Rubber Cap
F-9-376
9-141
3) Remove the Face Sheet. (The removed Face Sheet will not be used.)
9-142
5) Disconnect the USB Cable and route it as shown in the figure.

2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in later step.)
3 Wire Saddles
DP Cable Guide
x2
F-9-377
4) Route the harness as shown in the figure.

2 Wire Saddles
x3
x2
F-9-379
F-9-378
9-142
9-143
6) Connect the DP USB Cable.
7) Install the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate.
2 Bosses
1 Boss
2 Screws (The screws removed in previous step.)
5 Wire Saddles
DP Cable Guide
Boss
x5
x2
Boss
F-9-382
F-9-380
8) Install the 2 Shield Plates.

1 Protrusion each
NOTE:
Make sure that cables are inside the DP Harness Guide.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) each

Protrusion
x4
F-9-381
F-9-383
9-143
9-144
9) Install the Reader Front Cover, and close the DADF.

1 Hook
2 Protrusions
2 Screws
2 Rubber Caps
Protrusion
x2
Boss
Rubber Cap
DP Mounting
Plate W
Boss
x4
Rubber Cap
Protrusion
Hook
DP Support Plate
F-9-384
10)
Install the DP Support Plate and the DP Mounting Plate W to the DP Lower Cover
Unit.
F-9-385
11)
Install the DP PCB.
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)
2 Bosses each
x3
F-9-386
9-144
9
12)
Insert the DP Support Plate to the Control Panel Unit, and install the DP Lower
Cover Unit using a stubby screwdriver.
13)
9-145
Put and connect the harness through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit.
1 Wire Saddle (upper side)
2 Bosses
1 Connector
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)

NOTE:
Be sure not to pass the harness through the Wire Saddle on the lower side.

NOTE:
Be sure to tighten the 2 screws (TP; M3x6) on the DP Support Plate first.
Boss Hole
Boss
F-9-388
14)
Put and connect the 2 USB Cables through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit.
1 Wire Saddle (lower side)

1 USB Cable with the Plate
x5
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

1 USB Cable
NOTE:
Be sure not to pass the cables through the Wire Saddle on the upper side.
Be sure to connect the USB Cable with the Plate first.
Be sure to USB Cable the other connector next to the USB Cable with the Plate.
F-9-387
9-145
CAUTION:
15)
Be careful not to trap the harness with the USB Cable with the Plate.
9-146
Remove the release paper (small) on the Paper Feed Sheet W, and affix it to the DP
Bottom Cover.
NOTE:
When affixing it, be sure to align it with the marking lines, and push the [A] part against
the [B] part.
Release Paper
(Small)
Release Paper
(Large)
F-9-389
Paper Feed Sheet W

F-9-391
[B]
[A]
F-9-390
Marking Line
F-9-392
9-146
9
16)
9-147
Check the position to install the DP Bottom Cover and wipe the affixing surface of
the Paper Feed Sheet W with alcohol.
x4
F-9-393
17)
Fit the protrusion on the DP Bottom Cover into the hole, and install the DP Bottom
Protrusion
Claw
Claw
Cover while removing the release paper (large) of the Paper Feed Sheet W.
4 Claws
Claw
CAUTION:
[A]
Be sure that the [A] part is inserted into the Control Panel Unit.
Be careful not to trap cables with the [B] part. Be careful not to trap the harness and
the USB Cable with the DP Lower Cover and the DP Bottom Cover.
Make sure that the Paper Feed Sheet W does not peel off.
[A]
Paper Feed Sheet W
[B]
F-9-394
9-147
9
18)
20)
9-148
Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow.
1 Protrusion
2 Hooks
2 Claws
NOTE:
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 simultaneously, be sure to refer to

"Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2, step 3" before installing the DP Upper Cover.
Claw
Claw
x2
19)
Remove the Transparent Cover.
1 Claw
2 Hooks
Protrusion
Transparent Cover
Hook
F-9-396
Hook
Claw
F-9-395
9-148
9-149
NOTE:
When installing the Card Reader (sales company's option) simultaneously, be sure to
refer to "Installing the Card Reader, step 2" after installing the DP Upper Cover.
2 Cushions
1 DP Sheet
1 Transparent Cover (2 hooks and 1 claw)
Hook
Transparent Cover
Claw
21)
Install the following parts.

DP Sheet
CAUTION:
Cusion
Be sure to place the DP Fireproof Sheet by aligning the 3 ribs and pushing the sheet
against the rib [A] without removing the release sheet of it.
Turn over the DP Sheet (for Europe) with the plain side up, and install it while folding
the bar code part.
DP Fireproof Sheet
Be sure to keep the DP Sheet (for Japan) because it is used when installing the
Card Reader.
F-9-398
22)
Rib[A]
Remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover.
Rib
F-9-397
9-149
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > [In case of DADF] > Installing the Card Reader
Installing the Card Reader
9-150
2) Install the Card Reader and place the cable as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Although the shape of the Card Reader may differ, the procedure is the same.
NOTE:
Work the cable to make sure that the Transparent Cover fits securely in step 3.
NOTE:
This step is not necessary when installing simultaneously with the USB Device Port.
1) Remove the following parts.
1 Transparent Cover (1 claw and 2 hooks)
1 DP Sheet
2 Cushions
Hook
Transparent Cover
F-9-400
Claw
DP Sheet
Cusion
DP Fireproof Sheet
F-9-399
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > [In case of DADF] > Installing the Card Reader
9-150
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > [In case of DADF] > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
3) Place the Card Reader, and install the DP Sheet (for Europe) and the Transparent Cover.
2 Hooks
9-151
Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2

NOTE:
1 Claw
NOTE:
Insert the DP Sheet (for Europe) to the [A] area with the illustration side facing up and
bending the bar code area.
Be sure that the Transparent Cover is installed properly.
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer, the USB Device Port must be installed
beforehand.
The Multimedia Reader/Writer cannot be used in combination with the Card Reader (sales
company's option).
1) Remove the following parts.

1 Transparent Cover (1 claw and 2 hooks)
Hook
1 DP Sheet
Transparent Cover
2 Cushions
Hook
Claw
Transparent Cover
Claw
DP Sheet
DP Sheet
Cusion
DP Fireproof Sheet
F-9-401
F-9-402
4) When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously, remove the Protection Sheet on the
Transparent Cover.
9-151
2) Remove the DP Upper Cover.
4) Install Multimedia Card Slot and Slot Holder together.
2 Claws
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Protrusion
9-152
Slot Holder
2 Hooks
Claw
x2
Claw
x4
Multimedia Card Slot

Protrusion
F-9-405
Hook
5) Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow.
F-9-403
2 Hooks
NOTE:
When installing simultaneously with the Device Port, start the procedure from step 3.
1 Protrusion
2 Claws
Claw
x2
3) Remove the Card Slot (closed) from the DP Upper Cover and attach the Card Slot.
Claw
Protrusion
Hook
F-9-406
F-9-404
9-152
6) Connect the USB Cable.
9-153
8) Affix the Multimedia Label to the back side of the DP Sheet (for Europe) as shown in the
figure.
x2
F-9-407
F-9-409
7) Remove the release sheet of the DP Fireproof Sheet, and affix the sheet by aligning the 3
ribs and pushing it against the rib [A].
9) Install the DP Sheet (for Europe) and the Transparent Cover.

2 Hooks
1 Claw
Rib[A]
Hook
Transparent Cover
Claw
x2
DP Sheet
Rib
F-9-408
F-9-410
10)
When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously, remove the Protection Sheet on
the Transparent Cover.
11)
12)
9-153
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Writing Check
Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2]
9-154
4) Make the following selection:[Scan and Store] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media (A:)]
NOTE:
To the Multimedia Reader/Writer, Memory Media of the SC Card, Memory Stick, and CF
Card can be connected. With one of the 3 types of Memory Media, perform the oepration
check 1 through 3.
Writing Check
1) Select "1" for the following service mode (Level 2).(Default value "0")
CPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > UI-MEM
3) Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader/Writer. (Check that the Mount
Mark is indicated in the bottom right.)
F-9-412
5) Set originals to DADF (or Copyboard), and press the [Scan] button. Then, press the Start
button on the Control Panel.
F-9-411
F-9-413
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Writing Check
9-154
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Reading Check
6) After the completion of original reading, check that the data is stored in the media. After
that, press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.
9-155
Reading Check
7) Make the following selection from Main Menu: [Access Stored Files] > [Memory Media] >
[Memory Media(A:)]
F-9-414
F-9-415
8) Select the files stored in step 4) and 5), and then press the [Print] button.
F-9-416
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Reading Check
9-155
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Memory Media Removal
9) Press the [Start Printing] button, and print the file. Then check that the file is printed
correctly.
9-156
Memory Media Removal

11)
Press the [Mount Mark ] in the bottom right.Then, select the memory media to be
removed, and press the [Remove] button.
F-9-417
10)
F-9-419
12)
Press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.
Press the [OK] button. Then, check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom
right on the Main Menu screen.
F-9-418
F-9-420
Installation > USB Device Port-E1/E2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Memory Media Removal
9-156
Installation > Relocating the Machine
9-157
Relocating the Machine

If you need to relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation, be sure to perform the following work in advance:
If you want to move the machine intact with its cassette pedestal, be sure not to use the machine's grips; otherwise,
the machine will come off the cassette pedestal as when it is moved over a step. Be sure to lift the cassette pedestal.
1) Turn OFF the main power supply of the main

body.
2) Unplug the power plug of the main body.
3) In the case that the Cassette Pedestal is
installed, lift it off from the floor by turning the 4
adjusters on it with a screwdriver.
4) When moving the machine, be sure to push the position indicated in the figure.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to push the upper
side of the machine strongly from
the front side, otherwise it can
fall over. (Especially in the case
of the carpet floor.)
Front
Front
F-9-421
5) Remove the rubber cap and screw.

6) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw that has been set aside from the time of installation.
x2
7) Put paper on the copyboard glass.

8) Remove the Toner Container, Drum Unit, and
Developing Assembly.
9) In the case that the floor surface is either warped
or uneven, execute the ITB equilibrium position
detection.
9-1) Check that the main body is in standby state.
9-2) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection
Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITBINIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2
to 3 minutes.
x2
F-9-422
Installation > Relocating the Machine
9-157
Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-158
Combination of HDD Options
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
HDD When installing the HDD options (5 products indicated below), refer to the pages
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
indicated in the following table.
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
2.5inch/1TB HDD-H1
considerations.
Removable HDD Kit-AC1
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
HDD Mirroring Kit-D2
reference.
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1/C7

[List of Data to be Deleted]
Data to be Deleted
Availability of
Backup
Information registered in the Address Book

Settings made from the Settings/Registration screen
Forwarding Settings
License files for MEAP applications
MEAP applications
Data saved using MEAP applications
Favorite Settings registered in the Copy and Mail Box functions
Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box
Scan modes registered in the Send Function
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send
mode)
Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image
MEAP SMS (Service Management Service) password (the password will
return to its default password if it was changed)
Job logs
User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication
user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
Registration information for the Network Place
Key Pair and Server Certificate
Log information for the IP address/MAC address restriction settings
Password that is protected by TPM
Encryption key that is protected by TPM
Information for Web browser settings
Quick Menu Information
User Information of the Advanced Box
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes *3
No
No
CAUTION:
When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.
Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination

Title.
Combination of Product
TYPE-1 Option HDD (1TB)

TYPE-2 Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit
TYPE-3 Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD
Kit
TYPE-4 Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB)
+ HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit
TYPE-5 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring
Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit
TYPE-6 Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit
TYPE-7 Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit
TYPE-8 Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB)
+ Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring
Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit
TYPE-9 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable
HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD
Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
TYPE-10 Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit +
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
TYPE-11 Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD
Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit
Reference Pages
Remarks
p. 9-163 to p. 9-166
p. 9-167 to p. 9-179
p. 9-180 to p. 9-192
p. 9-193 to p. 9-208 TYPE-4 to 7 correspond
to "CASE-1" or "CASE-8"
described in "HDD Data
p. 9-209 to p. 9-225 Encryption & Mirroring
Kit-C Series Installation
Procedure" included in
p. 9-226 to p. 9-237
HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit.
p. 9-238 to p. 9-252
p. 9-253 to p. 9-274
TYPE-8 to 11 correspond
to "CASE-2" or "CASE-8"
described in "HDD Data
p. 9-275 to p. 9-294 Encryption & Mirroring
Kit-C Series Installation
Procedure" included in
p. 9-295 to p. 9-313
HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit.
p. 9-314 to p. 9-333
T-9-4
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-5
*1 Can only be backed up using the Remote UI.

*2 Depending on the MEAP application.
*3 Only the following items are backed up.
Mail Box Settings (mail box names, passwords, and auto erase times)
Files in Mail Box
Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-158
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings
9-159
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)
Files in Advanced Box

Forms registered for the Superimpose Image
*4 You may not be able to back up, depending on the type of the password.
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the HDD Data Encryption &
*5 Only the stored Favorite Settings can be backed up.
Mirroring Kit-C Series has been installed.

These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be performed by the
[List of Data that can be backed up]
system administrator.
Data that can be backed up

Address Book
Settings/Registration settings
Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address
List, Favorite Settings)
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Favorite Settings for Web browser
License files for MEAP applications

Data saved by MEAP applications
Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box

SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) user authentication
information
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table T-1-2/T-1-4 (Data to be
Reference
See the "e-Manual > Remote UI".
backed up) in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings

Following data can be batch exported.
Address Book
Settings/Registration settings
See the e-Manual > Web Access.
(You can select this if web browser (Option) is
installed.)
For information on downloading license files, see
the "e-Manual > MEAP".
Data saved by MEAP applications may be
able to be backed up, depending on the MEAP
application.
See the documentation included with the MEAP
application.
See the e-Manual > Remote UI "Setting the
Backup Location for Stored Data ".
Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings)

Printer Settings
Paper Information
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
see the "e-Manual > MEAPI".

T-9-6
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].

2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export ALL] > [Export].
CAUTION: Work to Perform After Installing the Kit

When you start using this product, passwords set for Mail Boxes, Confidential Fax
Inboxes, and the Memory RX Inbox are erased. Set these passwords again.
If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again
using SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine. For more
information on using SMS, see the e-Manual > MEAP.
3) Select items to export.

CAUTION:
When exporting only specific items, this may cause setting information relating to
multiple items to lose its relations and cause setting details to be switched. In this case,
export all related items simultaneously.
4) Enter the password into [Encryption Password] and click on [Start Exporting].
5) Click [Check Status].
6) Check the batch export result.
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings
9-159
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
Backup of MEAP Application
9-160
11) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
the invalid license file.
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of

Disabled License Files and Uninstallation
1) Select the URL given below and access SMS.
a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which
application. After you download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes]
in a confirmation window for license deletion.
12) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
there are several applications, repeat the procedures 1) to 7).
13) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H

(Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below.
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sms/

The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sso/

2) Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO-H.
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].

3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Check the status of MEAP Application is [Stop],
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click
[Save].
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document

data
5) Click on the name of applications to disable.

6) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable].
7) Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for disabling the license.
8) Return to the MEAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application
names.
9) Click [License Management] on the Application/License Information page.
10) Click [Download].
CAUTION: Backup of "Advanced Box"

When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD. Depending on the system
version of the machine, both backup and restoration might not be performed.
9-160
9-161
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
[Backup method of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
Backup to SMB server
2) Select 'All' or 'Changes' for the backup method.
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
3) Click [Execute].
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
CAUTION:
Backup to USB HDD

Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
which saved data is backed up.
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up

If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
9-161
Installation > Installation Outline Drawing
9-162
HDD
Mirroring Board
or Encryption Board
F-9-423
Installation > Installation Outline Drawing
9-162
Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure
[TYPE-1]
Option HDD (1TB)
1) Assemble the option HDD (1TB).

[1] HDD Support Pate X 1
9-163
[2] HDD X 1
1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper X 4
4 Dust-prevention Dumpers
4 Spacers
4 Screws (W sems; M3x14)
NOTE:
When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD.
HDD
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
HDD Support Plate
[6] Screw (TP;M3x6) X 2
Anti-vibration Damper
F-9-425
[7] Gasket X 1
Option HDD
HDD Support Plate
x4
F-9-424
<CD/Guides>
Spacer
Notice for FCC/IC
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-426

9-163
CAUTION:
9-164
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of
connector.
Label
F-9-429
[A]
Connector
F-9-427
4) Open the HDD Lid behind the Right Rear Cover 1.

1 Screw
2) Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below.

CAUTION:
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD
surface.
HDD
Connector side
F-9-430
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-428
9-164
5) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.
9-165
7) Rmove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below.

2 Screws
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-431
6) Put the Signal Cable and the Power Cable aside so that thay are not pinched between the
Controller Box and the HDD Unit.
F-9-433
8) Remove the HDD (160GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit. (Removed
HDD (160GB) will not be used.)
2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 9).)
x2
F-9-432
F-9-434
9-165
Installation > [TYPE-1] > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation
9-166
1. Requirements
1) PC
9) Install the Option HDD (1TB).
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2 Screws (The screw removed in step 8).)
2) Cross Ethernet Cable

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
CAUTION:
1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
Be sure to prevent the gasket from coming off when installing.
2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Ethernet cable.

3) Turn on the PC.
4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).
x2
3. Selecting the System Software

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.
3) Click Register Firmware.
4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
4. Downloading the System Software
F-9-435
1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.
2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters
download mode.
10)
Install the HDD Unit to the host machine. (2 Screws)
11)
Install the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Option HDD.
12)
Close the HDD Lid. (1 Screw)
13)
Close the Right Rear Cover 1.
14)
Close the Right Lower Cover.
15)
Close the Right Upper Cover.
3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start".

4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.
5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.
6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is
automatically restarted.
7) Terminate the SST.
8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.
16)
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation
Installing the System Software Using the SST

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product.
When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
auto gradation adjustment.
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
machine may start up properly after installation of this product.
Details follow.
9-166
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
[TYPE-2]
[13] Signal Cable

(660mm ; Red) X 1
Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit
FK2-8432 or A: Cont-Sig
[14] IV Cable X 1
FK2-8453 or
A: HDD-Pow1, A: HDD-Sig1
9-167
[15] Power Cable
(650mm) X 1
FK2-8464 or A: Cont-Pow

[1] Hinge Shaft Stopper
X2
[2] HDD Handle X 2
Use 1 of them
[3] HDD Connector Plate

X2
Use 1 of them
[16] HDD Drawer Unit x 1
[17] Screw (R round head

TP; M3x6) X 9
[18] Screw
(P Tight; M3x8) X 4
Use 6 of them
[4] HDD Cover X 2
[5] HDD Blanking Plate X 1
Use 2 of them
[6] HDD Door Guide X 1
Use 1 of them
[19] R-HDD Label X 1
[7] HDD Lock Plate

X1
[8] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

X2
[9] HDD Lid Retainer X 1
F-9-437

[10] Shutdown Caution
Label X 1
[11] Connector Fixing

Block X 2
Use 1 of them
[12] Conversion
Connector X 2
Use 1 of them
F-9-436
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-167
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously.)
9-168

2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-438
F-9-440
2 Rubber caps
2 Screws
2 Screws (TP; M3)
5 Claws
1 Claw
x2
x3
claw
x5
Claw
F-9-439
F-9-441
9-168
6) When the Reader is installed, remove the Reader Communication Cable.
9-169

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x2
claw
F-9-442
F-9-444
1 Screw
1 Hhook
9) Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness.
2 Screws
Hook
x2
Harness
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-443
F-9-445
9-169
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been installed, remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
11)
9-170
Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the Fan Cable.
x3
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Harness
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
F-9-446
x4
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
10)
Remove the Controller Cover.
Fan Cable
11 Screws (loosen)
Power Cable
F-9-448
F-9-447
9-170
9
12)
Open the HDD Lid.
14)
1 Scrwe (Removed screw will not be used.)
9-171
Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below.
2 Screws (Removed screw will not be used.)
x2
F-9-451
F-9-449
13)
15)
2 Eege saddles
Remove the fixed HDD from the removed HDD Unit. (Removed plate and screw will
not be used.)
5 Wire saddles
2 Screws
2 Connectors
NOTE:
Removed Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used.
x2
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
F-9-452
Wire
Saddle
F-9-450
9-171
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD
Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD
9-172
HDD
x4
1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the installed HDD (160GB) removed
HDD Connector Plate
in "Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable" step 15.)
4 Screws
x4
HDD Support Plate
F-9-455
HDD
CAUTION:
HDD Support Plate
F-9-453

Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw
hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
2) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (HDD and
screw are the ones removed in step 1).)
4 Screws
Screw hole
NOTE:
When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD
Connector Plate and HDD.
Label
HDD
Connector
HDD Support Plate
Screw hole
F-9-456
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-454
9-172
3) Install the Conversion Connector.
x2
CAUTION:
9-173
Boss
Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of
HDD.
Hole
F-9-459
5) Install the HDD Cover.

1 Claw
1 Screw (TP round end; M3x6)
F-9-457
CAUTION:
4) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install
it.
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP
screw.
2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-460
F-9-458
9-173
6) Install the HDD Handle.
9) Install the HDD Door Guide.
2 Screws (TP round end; M3x6)
2 Claws
9-174
CAUTION:
screw.
x2
Claw
x2
F-9-463
F-9-461
CAUTION:
7) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-464
F-9-462
9-174
9
10)
Install the HDD Lock Plate.
11)
2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts
9-175
Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer.
2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers

CAUTION:
screw.
Hinge Shaft Stoppers
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
Boss
Hole
HDD Lock Plate

F-9-465
F-9-466
9-175
9
12)
Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 18)
14)
Remove the Drawer Cable.
x2
x2
F-9-469
F-9-467
13)
9-176
Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,
remove the lower Drawer Cable (Slot.2).
15)
Install the IV Cable.
2 Screws (screw removed in step 14))
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 17.)
x2
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
F-9-470
Screw
F-9-468
9-176
9
16)
Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.
18)
2 Screws
9-177
Fix the cable of the Drawer Unit.
3 Wire saddles
2 Springs
NOTE:
2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 14).)
x2
Close the [A] part of unused wire saddle and edge saddle.
Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used.
Fix the unused Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the wire saddle.
IV Cable
x3
Wire saddles
Washer
[A]
Spring
Screw
F-9-471
[A]
17)
Install the HDD Drawer Unit.
F-9-473
2 Screws (Use the screw removed in step 13))
x2
F-9-472
9-177
9
19)
21)
1 Edge Saddle
9-178
Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot.1 (left side).
3 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
CAUTION:
1 Cable Retainer
screw.
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
x2
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Connector
Power Cable
F-9-474
20)
Install the Conroller Cover. (11 Screws)
F-9-475
22)
Install the HDD to Slot.2 (right side).
F-9-476
9-178
9
23)
Close the HDD Lid.
24)
Restore the Controller Box. (2 Screws or 3 Screws)
25)
27)
Affix the Shutdowm Warning Label in the appropriate language on the Right Rear
9-179
If Reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable.
NOTE:
Cover 1.
x2
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-477
26)
F-9-478
Rear Cover (2 Screws, 2 Rubber Caps)

Left Rear Sub Cover (1 Screw)
Reader Communication Cable (when reader is installed)
28)
29)
Close the Right Rear Cover 1, Right Lower Cover, and Right Upper Cover.
30)
Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine.
Left Rear Cover (2 Screws, 2 Rubber Caps)
9-179
Installation > [TYPE-3] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
[TYPE-3]
9-180
Removable HDD Kit
Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

X2
[2] HDD Handle X 2
[4] HDD Cover X 2
[7] HDD Lock Plate

X1

X2

Label X 1

Block X 2
[12] Conversion
Connector X 2
Use 1 of them

X2
Use 1 of them
Option HDD (1TB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
Use 1 of them
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[7] Gasket X 1
Use 1 of them
Use 1 of them
F-9-479
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
F-9-480
9-180
9
[13] Signal Cable
(660mm ; Red) X 1
[14] IV Cable X 1
FK2-8453 or
9-181
[15] Power Cable

(650mm) X 1

TP; M3x6) X 9
[18] Screw
(P Tight; M3x8) X 4
Use 6 of them
Use 2 of them
F-9-482

2 screws (TP; M3)
1 claw
F-9-481
x3

Claw
F-9-483
9-181
9-182
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-486
Connectors
F-9-484
1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
Hook
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-487
F-9-485
9-182
9-183
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-490
F-9-488
10)
2 Screws
11 Screws (loosen)
x2
Harness
F-9-489
F-9-491
9-183
9
11)
12)
9-184
Open the HDD Lid.

CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-493
Signal Cable
13)
2 Eege saddles
Fan Cable
5 Wire saddles
Power Cable
2 Connectors
F-9-492
NOTE:
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-494
9-184
9
14)
Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Kit
Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below. (Removed HDD unit
will not be used.)
9-185
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-497
F-9-495
Installing the Removable HDD Kit

2) Install the HDD Lock Plate.
2 Claws
x2
Claw
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock Plate

F-9-498
F-9-496
9-185
3) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer.
9-186
5) Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up, remove the
lower Drawer Cable (Slot.2).

2 Screws
CAUTION:
2 Springs
screw.
2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 8).)
x2
Boss
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Hole
Spring
Screw
F-9-501
6) Remove the Drawer Cable.

F-9-499
4) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
x2
x2
F-9-502
F-9-500
9-186
9-187
9) Install the HDD Drawer Unit.
7) Install the IV Cable.
2 Screws (Use the screw removed in step 4))
2 Screws (screw removed in step 6))
x2
x2
F-9-503
10)
8) Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.
Fix the cable of the Drawer Unit.
3 Wire Saddles
2 Screws
2 Springs
NOTE:
Close the [A] part of unused wire saddle and edge saddle.
Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used.
Fix the unused Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the wire saddle.
2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 5).)
x2
F-9-505
IV Cable
x3
Wire saddles
Washer
[A]
Spring
Screw
F-9-504
[A]
F-9-506
9-187
9
11)
Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD
9-188
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD)
2 Connectors
1 HDD Support Plate (enclosed with option HDD)
1 Cable Retainer
1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with removable HDD Kit)

4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers (enclosed with option HDD)
Cable Retainer
4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD)
Edge Saddle
4 Screws (W sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD)
x2
NOTE:
x4
Wire Saddle

HDD
HDD Support Plate
Signal Cable
Connector
Power Cable
F-9-507
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-508
12)
Install the Conroller Cover. (11 Screws)

Option HDD
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-509
9-188
CAUTION:
9-189

CAUTION:
HDD.
Screw hole
Connector
Label
Screw hole
F-9-510
F-9-512

CAUTION:
surface.
Gasket
Screw hole
Connector side
HDD
F-9-511
9-189
it.
9-190

1 Claw
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the
Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-513
F-9-515
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-514
F-9-516
9-190
10)
9-191
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-519
F-9-517
9) Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot.1 (left side).
11)
Close the HDD Lid.
12)
Restore the Controller Box. (2 Screws or 3 Screws)
13)
2 screws (TP round end; M3x6)

CAUTION:
screw.
Cover 1.
x2
F-9-520
F-9-518
9-191
9-192
1. Requirements
14)
1) PC


15)
3) Turn on the PC.
NOTE:

x2
5) Click REGISTER.
[A]
6) Click OK.
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles

[B]
download mode.
Reader Power Cable

Connectors

F-9-521

16)
17)
18)




Details follow.
9-192
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (160GB)
[TYPE-4]
9-193

Option HDD (160GB)
Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB)

+ HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring

Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been
opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is
not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that
the user has done so intentionally.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-522
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
9-193
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
[16] LED Board (large) X 1
9-194
[17] LED Label (Small) X 1
[18] LED Label (large) X 1
[19] HDD Connection Plate

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
[22] Wire saddle (Small) X 5
[23] Wire saddle (large) X 1
[24] Wire saddle (Middle)

X1
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
FM4-0839 or A: LED-Sig
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
FK2-8438 or A: HDD-Sig2
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

(550mm (Light blue); 5 pin) X 1
FM4-0842 or A: STS-Sig
[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
FK2-8463 or A: HDD-Pow2
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
Use 2 of them
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-524
[13] STS Cable

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit >

[14] Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board X 1
[15] LED Board (Small) X 1

FK2-7400 or A: LED
Mirroring Kit User Document

Notice for FCC/IC
< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit >

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1 User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Notice
F-9-523
Noticd for FCC/IC
9-194
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power
9-195
Assembling the Option HDD
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.
Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001
(procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning
ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.
When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in
which no Encryption Board is installed.
1) Assemble the option HDD.

1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Spacers
NOTE:
1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP
HDD
HDD Support Plate

F-9-525
Option HDD
HDD Support Plate
x4
Spacer
F-9-526
F-8-607
9-195
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Removing and Installing the HDD Unit
9-196
Removing and Installing the HDD Unit
CAUTION:
connector.
Label
F-9-529
[A]
Connector
F-9-527

2 Screws (TP; M3)

1 Claw
CAUTION:
surface.
x3
HDD
Connector side
Claw
F-9-530
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-528
9-196
9-197
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-533
Connectors
F-9-531
1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
hook
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-534
F-9-532
9-197
9-198
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-537
F-9-535
10)
11 Screws (loosen)

2 Screws
x2
Harness
F-9-538
F-9-536
9-198
9
11)
12)
9-199
Open the HDD Lid.

CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-540
Signal Cable
13)
Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable. (Removed cables will not be used.)
2 Eege Saddles
Fan Cable
5 Wire Saddles
Power Cable
2 Connectors
F-9-539
NOTE:
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-541
9-199
9
14)
16)
2 Screws
Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit.
4 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit)
x4
x2
F-9-542
15)
9-200
Install the assembled Option HDD to the removed HDD Unit.
F-9-544
17)
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-543
9-200
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the LED Board
Installing the LED Board
9-201
3) Connect the LED Cable (1200 mm; 7-pin) (FM4-0839 or A: LED-Sig).

7 Wire Saddles
1) Install the LED Board (small).
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Be sure to tuck the [A] area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running
through the [A] area. This is to prevent the [A] area of the LED cable from being
slacked off when closing the Controller Box.
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
[A]
F-9-545
2) Install the 2 wire saddles and the edge saddle.

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-547
Edge Saddle
F-9-546
9-201
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board
9-202
2) Connect the cables to the PCB on the backside.
1) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board so that "CHA" and "CHB" are placed in the direction
of the HDD slot.
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
CAUTION:
Be sure that the direction of installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board is
opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong
direction, the cables do not reach the board.
Signal Cable (450mm (Red)): FK2-8435 or A: Cont-Sig

Power Cable (430mm): FK2-8463 or A: Cont-Pow
STS Cable (550mm (Light blue); 5 Pin): FM4-0842 or A: STS-Sig
3) Fix the cables.
3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
x4
Edge Saddle
x3
CHB
x4
CHA
Wire Saddles
Power Cable
Direction of the HDD Slot

Signal Cable
F-9-548
STS Cable
F-9-549
4) Install the Controller Cover. (11 Screws)
9-202
5) Connect the cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
9-203
6) Install the Ring Core to the Power Supply Cable as shown in the figure.
7) Fix the cables.
3 Wire Saddles
LED Cable (1200 mm; 7-pin): FM4-0839 or A: LED-Sig

NOTE:
Be sure to close the unused 2 wire saddles [A] and edge saddle.

CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected.
Therefore, when installing the cables, be sure that they are connected properly.
x4
Wire Saddle
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle [A]

F-9-551
F-9-550
9-203
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure.
9-204
9) Connect the Signal Cable (80 mm; Red) (FK2-8436 or A: HDD-Sig1) and the Power Cable
(80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to the first HDD (Slot 1).
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board are shown below.
CAUTION:
Connect Slot 1 to "CHA". (Originally installed HDD)
Install the cables to correct positions.
Connect Slot 2 to "CHB". (New HDD)

Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
x2
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
Signal Cable
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
CH A
Power Cable
F-9-552
F-9-554
(80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHA on the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
10)
Connect the Signal Cable (80 mm; Blue) (FK2-8438 or A: HDD-Sig2) and the Power
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHB on the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
x2
x2
Signal Ccable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-553
F-9-555
9-204
9
11)
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to the second HDD (Slot 2).
9-205
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the tags on the Power Supply Cable in the position where it is
beyond the wire saddle toward the HDD side.
If returning the Controller Box while placing the cables and tags toward the PCB side,
they may interfere the fan on the host machine.
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
x2
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Tag
F-9-558
F-9-556
12)
Fix the cables with the wire saddle.
13)
14)
Place the Controller Box to the original position. (2 Screws or 3 Screws)
15)

Wire Saddle
F-9-557
9-205
9
16)
18)
NOTE:
x2
x2
9-206
Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
[A]
Right Rear Cover 1
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
F-9-560
Reader Power Cable

Connectors
F-9-559
17)
19)
20)
9-206
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only

when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-207
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version
information of the security chip.
Details follow.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD

Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

3) Turn on the PC.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained.

The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is
operating correctly.

5) Click REGISTER.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
<Confirming the Security Mark>
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
download mode.
9-207
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
Setting the Mirroring

1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine.
2) Make a setting of mirroring.
Specify 1 under Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
5) Make sure that the LED blinks.
HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
9-208
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of

the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit)
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
CAUTION:
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild
process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.),
reexecute the process with the following procedure.
Completion of the Installation Work:
1) Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.

2) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set 0.
3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host
machine.
4) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set "1".
machine.
request <servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in
the consideration.
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when

installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-208
Installation > [TYPE-5] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)
[TYPE-5]
9-209
2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Option HDD (1TB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-561
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
9-209
9-210

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10

X1
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
Use 2 of them
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-563
[13] STS Cable



FK2-7400 or A: LED
HDD Mirroring Kit-D1 User Documentation

Notice for FCC/IC
China RoHS Notice 3

F-9-562

Noticd for FCC/IC
9-210
9-211
Assembling the Option HDD
CAUTION:

1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Spacers
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate

F-9-564
Option HDD
HDD Support Plate
x4
Spacer
F-9-565
9-211
CAUTION:
9-212

CAUTION:
connector.
surface.
Label
HDD
Connector side
[A]
Connector
F-9-566
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-567
3) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way.
9-212
9-213
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-568
Connectors
F-9-570

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws (TP; M3)
2 Screws
1 Claw
5 Claws
x3
x2
claw
x5
Claw
F-9-569
F-9-571
9-213
9-214

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x2
claw
F-9-572
F-9-574
1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Screws
hook
x2
Harness
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-573
F-9-575
9-214
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.
11)
9-215
CAUTION:
x3
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Harness
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
F-9-576
x4
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
10)
Fan Cable
11 Screws (loosen)
Power Cable
F-9-578
F-9-577
9-215
9
12)
Open the HDD Lid.
14)
1 Screw (Removed screw will not be used.)
9-216
2 Screws
x2
F-9-581
F-9-579
13)
15)
2 Edge Saddles
Remove the HDD (160GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit.
(Removed HDD (160GB) will not be used.)
5 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
NOTE:
x2
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
F-9-582
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-580
9-216
9
16)
Install the Option HDD (1TB).
18)
9-217
Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD
Encryption Kit.
4 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or or HDD Encryption Kit)
CAUTION:
x4
x2
F-9-585
F-9-583
17)
19)
Install the other Option HDD (1TB).
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with option HDD)

CAUTION:
x2
F-9-584
9-217
9-218

7 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-586

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-588
Edge Saddle
F-9-587
9-218
9-219
1) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board so that "CHA" and "CHB" are placed in the
direction of the HDD slot.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
3) Fix the cables.
CAUTION:
opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong
direction, the cables do not reach the board.
3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x3
x4
x4
Wire Saddles
Power Cable
CHB
CHA
Signal Cable
F-9-589
STS Cable
F-9-590
9-219
5) Connect the cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
9-220
7) Fix the cables.
3 Wire Saddles

NOTE:

CAUTION:
x4
Wire Saddle
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle [A]

F-9-592
F-9-591
9-220
CAUTION:
9-221
CAUTION:

Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
x2
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
Signal Cable
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
CH A
Power Cable
F-9-593
F-9-595
(80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHA on the Mirroring Board or Encryption
10)
Board.
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHB on the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
x2
x2
Signal Ccable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-594
F-9-596
9-221
9
11)
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to the second HDD (Slot 2).
9-222
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
x2
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Tag
F-9-599
F-9-597
12)
13)
14)
15)

Wire Saddle
F-9-598
9-222
9
16)
18)
NOTE:
x2
x2
9-223
LED Label
[A]
Right Rear Cover 1
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
F-9-601
Reader Power Cable

Connectors
F-9-600
17)
19)
20)
9-223

9-224

Details follow.

1. Requirements
1) PC
CAUTION:


3) Turn on the PC.


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

download mode.
9-224

9-225

Mirroring Kit)
following:
CAUTION:

machine.
machine.
the consideration.

9-225
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
[TYPE-6]
9-226

Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] LED Cable

(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
not torn.
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[10] Signal Cable

(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[13] STS Cable
[14] Encryption Board X 1
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1

FK2-7400 or A: LED
F-9-602
9-226
9
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
9-227
FK2-78324 or A: LED
CAUTION:

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
Use 6 of them

Use 2 of them

X1

[25] Ring Core X 1
Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
F-9-603
<CD/Guides>
Noticd for FCC/IC
F-9-604
9-227
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
2 Screws (TP; M3)
5 Claws
9-228
1 Claw
x2
x3
claw
x5
Claw
F-9-605
F-9-607
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-608
Connectors
F-9-606
9-228
1 Screw
2 Screws
9-229
1 Hook
hook
x2
Harness
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-611
F-9-609
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-612
F-9-610
9-229
9
10)
12)
11 Screws (loosen)
Open the HDD Lid.
F-9-613
11)
F-9-615
13)
2 Edge Saddles
CAUTION:
5 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
1 Eedge Saddle
NOTE:
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
9-230
x2
Wire Saddle
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Signal Cable
Edge Saddl
Fan Cable
Signal
Cable
Power Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-614
F-9-616
9-230
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installing the LED Board
9-231

7 wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-617

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-619
Edge Saddle
F-9-618
9-231
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installing the LED Board > Installing the Encryption Board
Installing the Encryption Board
9-232
1) Install the Encryption Board so that "CHA" and "CHB" are placed in the direction of the HDD slot.
4 screws (TP; M3x6)

CAUTION:
Be sure that the direction of installing the Encryption Board is opposite to the case when
the Removable HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong direction, the cables do not
reach the board.
3) Fix the cables.

3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
x4
Edge Saddle
x3
x4
CHB
CHA
Wire Saddles
Power Cable
Signal Cable
F-9-620
STS Cable
F-9-621
9-232
5) Connect the cables to the Encryption Board.
9-233
7) Fix the cables.
3 Wire Saddles

NOTE:

CAUTION:
x4
Wire Saddle
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle [A]

F-9-623
F-9-622
9-233
CAUTION:
9-234
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown
below.
CAUTION:
Keep Slot 2 in the condition where no HDD is installed, and only connect the cables.
Connect Slot 1 to "CHA".

Connect Slot 2 to "CHB".
Slot.2 (Blank)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
x2
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
Signal Cable
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
CH B
CH A
Power Cable
F-9-624
F-9-626
(80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHA on the Encryption Board.
10)
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHB on the Encryption Board.
x2
x2
Signal Ccable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-625
F-9-627
9-234
9
11)
Place the Signal Cable (80 mm; Blue) (FK2-8438 or A: HDD-Sig2) and the Power
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to the empty space of the second HDD (Slot
2).
9-235
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Tag
F-9-628
12)
F-9-630
Wire Saddle
13)
14)
15)

F-9-629
9-235
9
16)
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installing the System Software Using the SST
NOTE:
19)
20)
9-236

x2
x2
[A]
Details follow.
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
1. Requirements
1) PC
[B]
Reader Power Cable

Connectors
F-9-631
3) Turn on the PC.

17)
18)

LED Label
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
Right Rear Cover 1
F-9-632
9-236
9-237

download mode.
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the

Work

following:
Checking the Security Version

CAUTION:
Checking the Security Mark

9-237
[TYPE-7]
9-238

Option HDD (1TB)
Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-633
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
9-238
9-239

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1
Use 6 of them
Use 2 of them

X1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-635
[13] STS Cable

<CD/Guides>

FK2-7400 or A: LED

Noticd for FCC/IC
F-9-634
9-239
9-240
CAUTION:

1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Spacers
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate

F-9-636
Option HDD
HDD Support Plate
x4
Spacer
F-9-637
9-240
9-241
CAUTION:
connector.
Label
F-9-640
[A]
Connector
F-9-638


2 Screws (TP; M3)
CAUTION:
surface.
1 Claw
x3
HDD
Connector side
Claw
F-9-641
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-639
9-241
9-242
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-644
Connectors
F-9-642
1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
hook
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-645
F-9-643
9-242
9-243
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-648
F-9-646
10)
11 Screws (loosen)

2 Screws
x2
Harness
F-9-649
F-9-647
9-243
9
11)
12)
9-244
Open the HDD Lid.

CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-651
Signal Cable
13)
2 Edge Saddles
5 Wire Saddles
Fan Cable
2 Connectors
Power Cable
F-9-650
NOTE:
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-652
9-244
9
14)
16)
2 Screws
9-245
Install the Option HDD (1TB).

CAUTION:
x2
x2
F-9-653
15)
Remove the HDD (160GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit.
F-9-655
(Removed HDD (160GB) will not be used.)

17)
x2
F-9-654
9-245
9-246

7 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-656

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-658
Edge Saddle
F-9-657
9-246
9-247
1) Install the Encryption Board so that "CHA" and "CHB" are placed in the direction of the
HDD slot.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
3) Fix the cables.
CAUTION:
the Removable HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong direction, the cables do not
reach the board.
3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x3
x4
x4
Wire Saddles
CHB
CHA
Power Cable
Signal Cable
F-9-659
STS Cable
F-9-660
4) Install the Controller Cover.
9-247
5) Connect the cables to the Encryption Board.
9-248
7) Fix the cables.
3 Wire Saddles

NOTE:

CAUTION:
x4
Wire Saddle
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle [A]

F-9-662
F-9-661
9-248
CAUTION:
9-249
below.
CAUTION:

Slot.2 (Blank)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
x2
Signal Cable(Blue)
Signal Cable
Power Cable
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
CH A
Power Cable
F-9-663
F-9-665
10)
(80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHA on the Encryption Board.
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to CHB on the Encryption Board.
x2
x2
Signal Ccable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-664
F-9-666
9-249
9
11)
Place the Signal Cable (80 mm; Blue) (FK2-8438 or A: HDD-Sig2) and the Power
Cable (80 mm) (FK2-8461 or A: HDD-Pow1/2) to the empty space of the second HDD (Slot
2).
9-250
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Tag
F-9-667
12)
F-9-669
Wire Saddle
13)
14)
15)

F-9-668
9-250
9
16)
NOTE:
19)
20)
9-251

x2
x2
[A]
Details follow.
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
1. Requirements
1) PC
[B]
Reader Power Cable

Connectors
F-9-670
3) Turn on the PC.

17)

18)

LED Label
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
Right Rear Cover 1
F-9-671
9-251
9-252

download mode.

Work

following:

CAUTION:

9-252
[TYPE-8]
9-253

Option HDD (160GB)
Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4

not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-672
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
9-253
Removable HDD Kit

X2
[13] Signal Cable

(660mm ; Red) X 1
[2] HDD Handle X 2

X2

[4] HDD Cover X 2
9-254
[14] IV Cable X 1
FK2-8453 or

TP; M3x6) X 9
[15] Power Cable

(650mm) X 1
[18] Screw
(P Tight; M3x8) X 4
Use 7 of them

[7] HDD Lock Plate
X1

X2
F-9-674

Label X 1

Block X 2
[12] Conversion
Connector X 2
F-9-673
9-254
Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
9-255

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
Use 6 of them
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
Use 4 of them
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1

X1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-676
[13] STS Cable



FK2-7400 or A: LED

Notice for FCC/IC
China RoHS Notice 3

F-9-675

Noticd for FCC/IC
Installation > [TYPE-8] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
9-255
9-256
CAUTION:


F-9-677

2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-678
9-256
9-257
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-681
Connectors
F-9-679

1 Screw
1 Hook

2 Rubber Caps
Hook
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-682
F-9-680
9-257
9-258
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-685
F-9-683
10)
11 Screws (loosen)
2 Screws
x2

Harness
F-9-684
F-9-686
9-258
9
11)
Remove the Power Cable.
12)
9-259
Open the HDD Lid.

CAUTION:
Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable.
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-688
Signal Cable
13)
2 Edge Saddles
5 Wire Saddles
Fan Cable
1 Connectors
Power Cable
F-9-687
NOTE:
Removed Power Cable will not be used.
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-689
9-259
9
14)
9-260

2 Claws
x2
x2
Claw
F-9-690
15)
Remove the HDD (160GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit. (The
removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used. The HDD (160GB) installed
as standard will be used in "Disassembling/Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed
F-9-692
from the Host Machine (First HDD)" step1).)

CAUTION:
2 Screws
x2
F-9-691
F-9-693
9-260
9-261
2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5)
x2

HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock Plate
F-9-696
F-9-694
2 Screws (Use the screw removed in step 4)
CAUTION:
screw.
Boss
x2
Hole
F-9-697
F-9-695
9-261
Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling/Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)
9-262
Disassembling/Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed

from the Host Machine (First HDD)
2) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (Use the
HDD and screws removed in previous step.)
4 Screws
1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the HDD (160GB) removed in
"Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable" step 15.)
4 Screws
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
x4
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-699
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-698
HDD
x4
HDD Connector Plate
HDD Support Plate

F-9-700
9-262
9-263
CAUTION:
it.
CAUTION:
Screw hole
Label
Connector
Screw hole
F-9-701
F-9-703
x2
CAUTION:
Boss
HDD.
Hole
F-9-704
F-9-702
9-263
9-264
1 Claw
CAUTION:
screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-707
F-9-705
9) Install the originally installed HDD to Slot.1 (left side).

CAUTION:
screw.
x2
F-9-708
F-9-706
9-264
Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)
9-265
CAUTION:
1) Purchase option HDD and assemble the second HDD.
1 Option HDD

Screw hole

NOTE:
HDD
Connector
Label
HDD Support Plate

Screw hole
F-9-711
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-709
CAUTION:
surface.
Option HDD
Gasket
HDD Connector Plate
x4
Screw hole
HDD Support Plate
Connector side
Spacer
F-9-710
HDD
F-9-712
9-265
x2
CAUTION:
9-266
Boss
HDD.
Hole
F-9-715

1 Claw
F-9-713
it.
CAUTION:
screw.
CAUTION:
F-9-716
F-9-714
9-266
9-267
9) Install the HDD to Slot.2 (right side).

CAUTION:
screw.

x2
F-9-719
10)
Close the Edge Saddle, and close the HDD Cap.
F-9-717
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-718
9-267
9-268

7 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-720

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-722
Edge Saddle
F-9-721
9-268
9-269
direction of the DC Controller PCB.
Power Cable (650 mm): FK2-8464 or A: Cont-Pow (Included in the Removable HDD Kit)
STS Cable (550 mm (Light blue); 5-pin): FM4-0842 or A: STS-Sig (Included in the HDD
Mirroring Kit or Encryption Kit)
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
3) Fix the cables.
CAUTION:
3 Wire Saddles
opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong direction,
the cables do not reach the board.
Cable Retainer
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
CHA
x4
CHB
Direction of the DC Controller PCB
Wire Saddle
Power Cable
F-9-723
STS Cable
F-9-724
9-269
6) Install the 2 wire saddles.
9-270
8) Fix the cables.

7 Wire Saddles
2 Edge Saddles
x9
F-9-725
Wire
Saddle
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
Edge Saddle Wire Saddle
7) Connect the cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

Signal Cable (existing cable)
Power Sable (650mm): FK2-8464 or A: Cont-Pow (Included in the Removable HDD Kit)
CAUTION:
F-9-727
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-726
9-270
CAUTION:
When fixing the cables with wire saddles, be sure to take up slack of them at [A] part,
and slack off them at [B] part.
9-271
9) Connect the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
If slacking off the cables at [A] part, they may interefer the fan on the host machine
when returing the Controller Box.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Red)
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
from rear side
[A]
[B]
F-9-730
Wire Saddles
F-9-728
CAUTION:
10)
11)
Cover 1. (included in the Removable HDD Kit).
Signal Cable(Blue)
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Power Cable
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (HDD1)
CH A
F-9-731
CH B
F-9-729
9-271
9
12)
15)
9-272

LED Label

13)
NOTE:
Right Rear Cover 1
F-9-733
x2
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
16)
17)
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-732
14)
9-272
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only

when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-273

Details follow.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC


3) Turn on the PC.



5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
download mode.
9-273

9-274

Mirroring Kit)
following:
CAUTION:

machine.
machine.
the consideration.
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when

installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-274
[TYPE-9]
9-275

Option HDD (1TB)
2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4

not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-734
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
9-275
Removable HDD Kit

X2
[13] Signal Cable

(660mm ; Red) X 1
[2] HDD Handle X 2

X2

[4] HDD Cover X 2
9-276
[14] IV Cable X 1
FK2-8453 or

TP; M3x6) X 9
[15] Power Cable

(650mm) X 1
[18] Screw
(P Tight; M3x8) X 4
Use 7 of them

[7] HDD Lock Plate
X1

X2
F-9-736

Label X 1

Block X 2
[12] Conversion
Connector X 2
F-9-735
9-276
9-277

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
Use 6 of them
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
Use 4 of them
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1

X1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-738
[13] STS Cable



FK2-7400 or A: LED

Notice for FCC/IC
China RoHS Notice 3

F-9-737

Noticd for FCC/IC
9-277
9-278
CAUTION:


F-9-739

2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-740
9-278
9-279
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-743
Connectors
F-9-741

1 Screw
1 Hook

2 Rubber Caps
Hook
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-744
F-9-742
9-279
9-280
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-747
F-9-745
10)
11 Screws (loosen)
2 Screws
x2

Harness
F-9-746
F-9-748
9-280
9
11)
12)
9-281
Open the HDD Lid.

CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer

Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-750
Signal Cable
13)
2 Edge Saddles
5 Wire Saddles
Fan Cable
1 Connector
Power Cable
F-9-749
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-751
9-281
9
14)
Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below.(Removed HDD unit
will not be used.)
9-282

2 Claws
x2
x2
Claw
F-9-752
F-9-753
CAUTION:
F-9-754
9-282
9-283

CAUTION:
screw.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
Boss
Hole
HDD Lock Plate

F-9-755
F-9-756
9-283
Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)
9-284
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)
2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5)
1) Purchase option HDD and assemble the first HDD.

1 Option HDD
x2

NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-757

HDD Connector Plate

F-9-759
x2
Option HDD
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-758
F-9-760
9-284
CAUTION:
9-285

CAUTION:
HDD.
Screw hole
Connector
Label
Screw hole
F-9-761
F-9-763

CAUTION:
surface.
Gasket
Screw hole
Connector side
HDD
F-9-762
9-285
it.
9-286

1 Claw
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
F-9-764
F-9-766
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-765
9-286
9-287
9) Install the originally installed HDD to Slot.1 (left side).

CAUTION:
screw.
x2
F-9-769
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

1) Assemble the second option HDD with same steps of Step 1) to Step 6) from the
"Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)".
F-9-767
HDD No.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-768
F-9-770
9-287
9-288
4) Install the HDD to Slot.2 (right side).

2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x2
F-9-771
5) Close the Edge Saddle, and close the HDD Lid.
F-9-772

Wire Saddles
Edge Saddle
F-9-773
9-288
9-289

7 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
direction of the DC Controller PCB.
1 Cable Guide
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Connector
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong direction,
the cables do not reach the board.
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
x4
CHA
[A]
CHB
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-775
F-9-774
9-289
9-290
Mirroring Kit or Encryption Kit)
3) Fix the cables.
3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
F-9-777
x4
7) Connect the cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

Wire Saddle

Power Cable
STS Cable
CAUTION:
F-9-776

LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-778
9-290
9-291
CAUTION:
8) Fix the cables.
7 Wire Saddles
2 Edge Saddles
x9
Wire
Saddle
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
[A]

[B]
Wire Saddles
F-9-780
CAUTION:
F-9-779

Signal Cable(Blue)
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Power Cable
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (HDD1)
CH A
CH B
F-9-781
9-291
9) Connect the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
12)
9-292

x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Red)
13)
Signal Cable(Blue)
NOTE:
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-782
x2
10)
x2
11)
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable

Connectors
F-9-784
14)
F-9-783
9-292
Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-293

15)

LED Label
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
download mode.
Right Rear Cover 1

F-9-785

16)
17)

Details follow.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
3) Turn on the PC.
Installation > [TYPE-9] > Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-293

9-294

Mirroring Kit)
following:



CAUTION:

machine.
machine.
the consideration.
9-294
[TYPE-10]

Label X 1

Block X 2
[13] Signal Cable

(660mm ; Red) X 1
[12] Conversion
Connector X 2
Use 1 of them
Use 1 of them
[14] IV Cable X 1
FK2-8453 or
[15] Power Cable

(650mm) X 1
Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

9-295
not torn.

TP; M3x6) X 9
Use 6 of them
Removable HDD Kit

X2
[4] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them
[2] HDD Handle X 2
[18] Screw
(P Tight; M3x8) X 4
Use 2 of them

X2
Use 1 of them
Use 1 of them
[5] HDD Blanking Plate

X1
F-9-787
[7] HDD Lock Plate X 1

X2
F-9-786
9-295
9-296

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
Use 6 of them
Use 4 of them
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1

X1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-789
[13] STS Cable


FK2-7400 or A: LED
<CD/Guides>
Noticd for FCC/IC
F-9-788
9-296
9-297
CAUTION:


F-9-790
2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-791
9-297
9-298
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-794
Connectors
F-9-792
1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
hook
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-795
F-9-793
9-298
9-299
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-798
F-9-796
10)
11 Screws (loosen)

2 Screws
x2
Harness
F-9-799
F-9-797
9-299
9
11)
12)
9-300
Open the HDD Lid.
1 Screw (Removed screw will not be used.)
CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-801
Signal Cable
13)
2 Edge Saddles
Fan Cable
5 Wire Saddles
Power Cable
1 Connector
F-9-800
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-802
9-300
9
14)
9-301

2 Claws
x2
x2
Claw
F-9-803
15)
Remove the HDD (160GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit. (The
removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used. The HDD (160GB) installed
as standard will be used in Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD step1).)
F-9-805
2 Screws
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-804
F-9-806
9-301
9-302

CAUTION:
screw.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
Boss
Hole
HDD Lock Plate

F-9-807
F-9-808
9-302
9-303
Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD
1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the installed HDD (160GB) removed
in "Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable" step 15.)
4 Screws
x2
NOTE:
HDD
F-9-809
HDD Support Plate
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-811

x4
x2
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-812
F-9-810
9-303
2) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (HDD and
screw are the ones removed in step 1).)
4 Screws
9-304

CAUTION:
HDD.
HDD
x4
HDD Connector Plate
HDD Support Plate

F-9-813
F-9-815
CAUTION:
Screw hole
Label
Connector
Screw hole
F-9-814
9-304
it.
9-305
CAUTION:
screw.
CAUTION:
F-9-818
F-9-816

CAUTION:
x2
Boss
screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-817

1 Claw
F-9-819
9-305
10)
9-306
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-822
F-9-820
11)
Close the Edge Saddle, and close the HDD Lid

2 Screws (TP round end; M3X6)
x2
F-9-821
9-306
9-307

7 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Be sure to tuck the [A] area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through
the [A] area. This is to prevent the [A] area of the LED cable from being slacked off
when closing the Controller Box.
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-823

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-825
Edge Saddle
F-9-824
9-307
Installation > [TYPE-10] > Installing the Encryption Board
9-308
1) Install the Encryption Board so that "CHA" and "CHB" are placed in the direction of the DC
Controller PCB.
Encryption Kit)
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
3) Fix the cables.

3 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
the fixed HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong direction, the cables do not reach
the board.
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
x4
CHA
CHB
Wire Saddle
Power Cable
STS Cable
F-9-827
F-9-826
9-308
9-309
8) Fix the cables.

7 Wire Saddles
2 Eedge Saddles
x9
F-9-828
Wire
Saddle
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
7) Connect the cable to the Encryption Board.

CAUTION:
F-9-830
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-829
9-309
9-310
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
below.
Power Cable
Signal Cable(Blue)
Slot.2 (HDD1)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (Blank)
[A]
CH A
[B]
CH B
Wire Saddles
F-9-831
Signal Cable(Red)
F-9-832
9) Connect the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Encryption Board.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Blue)
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-833
9-310
9
10)
9-311
x2
11)
[A]
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-835
14)
15)
F-9-834
12)
LED Label

13)

Right Rear Cover 1
NOTE:
F-9-836
16)
17)
9-311
Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking after Installation
9-312
Details follow.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC


3) Turn on the PC.


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

download mode.
9-312
9-313

Work
following:

9-313
[TYPE-11]
9-314
Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Option HDD (1TB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-837
<CD/Guides>
Notice for FCC/IC
9-314
Removable HDD Kit

X2
[13] Signal Cable

(660mm ; Red) X 1
[2] HDD Handle X 2
Use 1 of them

X2
[14] IV Cable X 1
FK2-8453 or
[15] Power Cable

(650mm) X 1
Use 1 of them

[4] HDD Cover X 2
9-315

TP; M3x6) X 9
Use 6 of them
[18] Screw
(P Tight; M3x8) X 4
Use 2 of them
Use 1 of them

[7] HDD Lock Plate
X1

X2
F-9-839

Label X 1

Block X 2
Use 1 of them
[12] Conversion
Connector X 2
Use 1 of them
F-9-838
9-315
9-316

X1
[20] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 10
FK2-78324 or A: LED
[1] LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin) X 1
[4] Signal Cable

(80mm; Blue) X 1
[7] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[2] STS Cable

[5] Power Cable

(80mm) X 2
[8] Power Cable

(430mm) X 1
[3] Signal Cable

(80mm; Red) X 1
[6] Signal Cable

(450mm; Red) X 1
Use 6 of them
Use 4 of them
[9] Signal Cable

(340mm (Red); ) X 1

X1
[25] Ring Core X 1

[10] Signal Cable
(370mm (Blue); ) X 1
[11] Power Cable

(320mm) X 1
[12] LED Cable

(290mm; 7 pin) X 1
F-9-841
[13] STS Cable


FK2-7400 or A: LED
<CD/Guides>
Noticd for FCC/IC
F-9-840
9-316
9-317
CAUTION:


F-9-842

2 Screws (TP; M3)
1 Claw
x3
Claw
F-9-843
9-317
9-318
2 Connectors
2 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Guide
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
F-9-846
Connectors
F-9-844
1 Screw
1 Hook
2 Rubber Caps
hook
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
claw
x5
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-847
F-9-845
9-318
9-319
NOTE:
with the FAX Unit.

2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
Harness
claw
F-9-850
F-9-848
10)
11 Screws (loosen)

2 Screws
x2
Harness
F-9-851
F-9-849
9-319
9
11)
12)
9-320
Open the HDD Lid.

CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
3 Wire Saddles
1 Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
x4
Wire Saddle
F-9-853
Signal Cable
13)
2 Edge Saddles
5 Wire Saddles
Fan Cable
1 Connector
Power Cable
F-9-852
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-854
9-320
9
14)
Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the Removable HDD Kit
Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below. (Removed HDD unit
will not be used.)
9-321

2 Claws
x2
x2
Claw
F-9-855
F-9-856
CAUTION:
F-9-857
9-321
9-322

CAUTION:
screw.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
Boss
Hole
HDD Lock Plate

F-9-858
F-9-859
9-322
Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the Removable HDD Kit > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD
9-323
2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5.)
1) Purchase option HDD and assemble the second HDD.

1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD)
x2

NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-860

HDD Connector Plate

F-9-862
x2
Option HDD
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-861
F-9-863
9-323
CAUTION:
9-324

CAUTION:
HDD.
Screw hole
Connector
Label
Screw hole
F-9-864
F-9-866

CAUTION:
surface.
Gasket
Screw hole
Connector side
HDD
F-9-865
9-324
it.
9-325

1 Claw
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
F-9-867
F-9-869
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-868
9-325
2 screws (TP round end; M3X6)
9-326
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
screw.
x2
x2
F-9-870
F-9-872
10)
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-873
F-9-871
11)
Close the Edge Saddle, and close the HDD Lid.
9-326
Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the Removable HDD Kit > Installing the LED Board
9-327

7 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Cable Guide
1 Connector
CAUTION:
x2
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
x8
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-874

Wire Saddles
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-876
Edge Saddle
F-9-875
Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the Removable HDD Kit > Installing the LED Board
9-327
Installation > [TYPE-11] > Installing the Removable HDD Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-328
1) Install the Encryption Board so that "CHA" and "CHB" are placed in the direction of the DC
Controller PCB.
Encryption Kit)
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
3) Fix the cables.

3 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
the fixed HDD is installed. If it is installed in a wrong direction, the cables do not reach
the board.
1 Edge Saddle
Cable Retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
CHA
x4
CHB
Wire Saddle
Power Cable
STS Cable
F-9-878
F-9-877
9-328
9-329
8) Fix the cables.

7 Wire Saddles
2 Edge Saddles
x9
F-9-879
Wire
Saddle
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
7) Connect the cable to the Encryption Board.

Signal cable (existing cable)
CAUTION:
F-9-881
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-880
9-329
9-330
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
below.
Power Cable
Signal Cable(Blue)
Slot.2 (HDD1)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (Blank)
[A]
CH A
[B]
Wire Saddles
CH B
F-9-882
Signal Cable(Red)
F-9-883
9) Connect the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Encryption Board.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Blue)
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-884
9-330
9
10)
x2
11)
9-331
[A]
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-886
F-9-885
12)
14)
15)
LED Label

13)
Right Rear Cover 1
NOTE:
F-9-887
16)
17)
9-331
9-332
Details follow.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC


3) Turn on the PC.


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

download mode.
9-332
9-333

Work
following:

9-333
Appendix
Tools
Service
Timing Chart
General
Circuit Diagram
General
Signal Input/Output List
Circuit Diagram
General
of User Mode
List
Data
Backup
of HDD partition
Detail
counter
Soft
specifications
Removal
Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools
II
Service Tools
Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
Tool No.
Ctgr
Digital multimeter
Tool name
FY9-2002
Door Switch
TKN-0093
Tester extension pin
FY9-3038
Tester extension pin

(L-shaped)
FY9-3039
Appearance
Remarks
Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks.
Use for electrical checks.
II
Tool No.
Ctgr
CA-7 test Sheet
Tool name
FY9-9323
Used for adjusting/checking images.
Loupe
CK-0056
Used for checking images.
Cleaning tool
To clean the feed guide- This is not a service tool.- 1 of this are
enclosed at shipment of the host machine.
Tospearl 240
FY9-6007-000
ITB Cleaning Blade Lubricant.
Reference: Category
Appearance
III
Remarks
T-10-1
A: Must be kept by each service engineer.

B: Must be kept by each group of about five engineers.
C: Must be kept by each warkshop
III
Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils
IV
Solvents and Oils

Item
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Cleaning; e.g.,
glass, plastic, rubber; external covers.
Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Surface activating
Water
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally.
Substitute:
IPA(isopropy alcohol)
Heat-resisting grease
Lubrication; e.g., fixing drive areas.
Mineral oil-family lithium soap

Molybdenum disulfide
MOLYKOTE G-8022
Tool No: FY9-6026
Mineral oil (paraffin-family)
SUPER LUBE GREASE

Tool No: FY9-6005
Lubricating oil
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., drive areas, friction areas.
Silicone oil
FLOIL G-5000H GREASE

Tool No: FY9-6022
Lubricating oil
(EM-50L)
Lubrication; e.g., gears.
Special oil
Special solid lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Tool No: HY9-0007
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., scanner rail.
SHC oil
FLOIL G337
Tool No: FY9-6029
Conducting grease
Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer outer roller, drum heater sliding
area.
Fluorine poly wthyl

Polytetra fluorune ethylene
Tool No: FY9-6008
Conducting grease
Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer inner roller
poly--olefin
Tool No: FY9-6006

T-10-2
Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils
IV
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints full color
General Timing Chart

A4 single-sided 2 prints full color
Imaging ready timing
Start key ON
Printer unit
PSTBY
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Drum motor (Y)

Drum motor (M)
Drum motor (C)
Drum motor (Bk)
Pre-exposure LED(Y)
Pre-exposure LED(M)
Pre-exposure LED(C)
Pre-exposure LED(Bk)
Primary charging AC bias(Y)
Primary charging AC bias(M)
Primary charging AC bias(C)
Primary charging AC bias(Bk)
Primary charging DC bias(Y)
Primary charging DC bias(M)
Primary charging DC bias(C)
Primary charging DC bias(Bk)
Reference signal
PVREQ signal
Laser(Y)
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints full color
General Timing Chart
Laser(M)
Laser(C)
Laser(Bk)
Y1
Y2
M1
M2
C1
C2
Bk1
Bk2
Developing AC bias(Y)
Developing AC bias(M)
Developing AC bias(C)
Developing AC bias(Bk)
Developing DC bias(Y)
Developing DC bias(M)
Developing DC bias(C)
Developing DC bias(Bk)
Developing motor(Y)
Developing motor(M)
Developing motor(C)
Developing motor(Bk)
Primary transfer bias(Y)
Primary transfer bias(M)
Primary transfer bias(C)
Primary transfer bias(Bk)
Scanner motor(YM),(CBk)

Registration motor
Registration sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing motor
Fixing heater
F-10-1
VI
A4 single-sided 2 prints Bk color
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Drum motor (Bk)

Pre-exposure LED(Bk)
Primary charging AC bias(Bk)
Image formation system
Primary charging DC bias(Bk)

Reference signal
PVREQ signal
Laser(Bk)
Developing AC bias(Bk)
Developing DC bias(Bk)
Developing motor(Bk)
Primary transfer bias(Bk)
Scanner motor(Bk)
Pickup/feed system

Registration motor
Registration sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing system
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints Bk color
PSTBY
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints Bk color
Imaging ready timing
Start key ON
Printer unit
Fixing motor
Fixing heater
F-10-2
VI
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram Signal Input/Output List
General Circuit Diagram Signal Input/Output List

Jack. No.
J2001
J432
J104
J106
Abbreviated Signal Name

ZEROX_IN
RELAY2_ON
RELAY1_ON
HEAT2_ON
HEAT1_ON
VINJDG2
VINJDG1
FSR_CRNT_S
CST_HEAT_OFF
DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF
SHUTOFF
RMT_SYS
SEESAW
P CRG FAN ON
P CRG FAN LOCK
DCP FAN ON
DCP FAN LOCK
I2CSDA
I2C SCL
TEMP1
PEDE READY
PEDE RESET
PEDE CST2M CLK
PEDE CST1M CLK
PEDE EX CLK
PEDE EX S2M
PEDE EX M2S
PEDE DETECT
KYUSHI READY
CPU RESET
KYUSHI EX CLK
KYUSHI EX S2M
KYUSHI EX M2S
Jack. No.
J107
Signal Name
ZEROX IN
Relay ON 2
Relay ON 1
Heater ON 2
Heater ON 1
cassette Heater OFF

Drum and Reader Heater OFF
Shut off
Remote system
Main switch
Process cartridge fan (rear) ON
Process cartridge fan (rear) Lock
Power supply cooling fan ON
Power supply cooling fan Lock
Environment sensor 1 temperature
Pedestal ready
Pedestal reset
Cassette 3 pickup motor clock
Pedestal high speed CLK
Pedestal serial slave
Pedestal serial master
Pedestal connect
Cassette feed driver PCB ready
CPU reset
Cassette feed driver PCB high speed clock
Cassette feed driver PCB serial master
Cassette feed driver PCB serial slave
J109
J110

HANSO READY
CPU RESET
HANSO2 EX CLK
HANSO2 EX S2M
HANSO2 EX M2S
HANSO1 EX CLK
HANSO1 EX S2M
HANSO1 EX M2S
CPU RESET
ITB YORIM CLK
RIKANM CLK
DRUM READY
DRUM HOB CLKDRUM HOB CLK+
DRUM HOB M2S+
DRUM HOB M2SDRUM HOB S2MDRUM HOB S2M+
HV CHG AC PWM C
HV CHG DC PWM C
HV DEV AC RMT C
HV DEV DC PWM C
HV CHG AC PWM M
HV CHG DC PWM M
HV DEV AC RMT M
HV DEV DC PWM M
HV CHG AC PWM Y
HV CHG DC PWM Y
HV DEV AC RMT Y
HV DEV DC PWM Y
HV1 ANALOG2
HV1 ANALOG1
HVSEL HV1 MUX2
HVSEL HV1 MUX1
HVSEL HV1 MUX0
HV DEV AC PWM M1
HV DEV AC PWM P1
HV CHG AC CLK1
HV DEV AC CLK1
HV DEV AC CLK2
VII
Signal Name
Pickup feed driver PCB ready
CPU reset
Pickup feed driver PCB high speed clock 2
Pickup feed driver PCB serial slave 2
Pickup feed driver PCB serial master 2
Pickup feed driver PCB high speed clock 1
Pickup feed driver PCB serial slave 1
Pickup feed driver PCB serial master 1
CPU reset
ITB displacement control motor clock
Primary transfer separation motor clock
Drum driver PCB ready
Drum driver PCB clock(Differential -)
Drum driver PCB clock(Differential +)
Drum driver PCB master (Differential +)
Drum driver PCB master (Differential -)
Drum driver PCB slave (Differential -)
Drum driver PCB slave (Differential +)
Primary Charging AC (C) PWM
Primary Charging DC (C) PWM
Developing AC (C) remote
Developing DC (C) remote
Primary Charging AC (M) PWM
Primary Charging DC (M) PWM
Developing AC (M) remote
Developing DC (M) remote
Primary Charging AC (Y) PWM
Primary Charging DC (Y) PWM
Developing AC (Y) remote
Developing DC (Y) remote
HVT 1 PCB analog 2
HVT 1 PCB analog 1
HVT 1 PCB MUX 2
HVT 1 PCB MUX 1
HVT 1 PCB MUX 0
Developing AC PWM
Developing AC PWM
Primary
Developing AC clock 1
VII
Jack. No.
J111
J102
J103

HV CHG AC CLK2
HV CHG AC PWM K
HV CHG DC PWM K
HV DEV AC RMT K
HV DEV AC PWM M2
HV DEV AC PWM P2
HV DEV AC CLK3
HV DEV AC CLK4
HV DEV DC PWM K
HV TR1 PWM K
HV TR1 PWM Y
HV TR1 PWM M
HV TR1 PWM C
HV2 ANALOG2
HV2 ANALOG1
HVSEL HV2 MUX2
HVSEL HV2 MUX1
HVSEL HV2 MUX0
ECO DOUT
ECO DIN
ECO SCK
ECO CS
ECO POW
HANSO CNNT0
DOOR OPEN
PATCH CTRL
TNR CTRL K
TNR CTRL C
TNR CTRL M
TNR CTRL Y
PCH P
PCH S
REG R
REG F
TNR ANLG K
TNR ANLG C
TNR ANLG M
TNR ANLG Y
MULTI SIZE
OHP ANALOG
Signal Name
Primary Charging AC (Bk) clock 2
Primary Charging AC (Bk) PWM
Primary Charging DC (Bk) PWM
Developing AC (Bk) Remote
Developing AC PWM
Developing AC PWM
Developing DC (bk) PWM
Primary transfer (Bk) PWM
Primary transfer (Y) PWM
Primary transfer (M) PWM
Primary transfer (C) PWM
HVT 2 PCB analog 2
HVT 2 PCB analog 1
HVT 2 PCB MUX 2
HVT 2 PCB MUX 1
HVT 2 PCB MUX 0
ECO-ID degital OUT
ECO-ID degital IN
ECO-ID 1
ECO-ID 2
ECO-ID 3
Pickup feed driver PCB connect
Door open
Patch control
Bk toner control
C toner control
M toner control
Y toner control
Patch sensor reflection
Patch sensor diffused reflection
Registration sensor (rear)
Registration sensor (front)
Bk toner analog
C toner analog
M toner analog
Y toner analog
Multi-purpose size sensor
Transparency sensor analog
Jack. No.
J112
J123
J124
J125

(+)12V IL HV
HV3 DC CS
HV3 DC VS
HV TR2 REV PWM
HV TR2 CV PWM
THRM CNNT
MAIN THRM
SUB THRM1
SUB THRM2
SUB THRM3
SEESAW
LOOP1 SNS
LOOP2 SNS
FUSER ENT SNS
FUSERM BRAKE
FUSERM ON
FUSERM LOCK
FUSERM GAIN
FUSERM CLK
FUSERM DIR
WASTE TNR FG
SHUT SL PWM
EX PAPER FAN PWM
PRE EXP LED K PWM
PRE EXP LED C PWM
PRE EXP LED M PWM
PRE EXP LED Y PWM
CST1M CLK
CST2M CLK
FUEXM CLK
DUPM CLK
SHUTM CLK
MULTIM CLK
REGIM CLK
LS SHUTM CLK
HANSO CNNT1
VIII
Signal Name
12V Interlock for HVT PCB
HVT 3 PCB DC 1
HVT 3 PCB DC 2
Secondary transfer PWM 1
Secondary transfer PWM 2
Thermistor connect
Main thermistor 1
Main thermistor 2
Sub thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 2
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing motor BRAKE
Fixing motor ON
Fixing motor LOCK
Fixing motor GAIN
Fixing motor CLOCK
Fixing motor DIR
Recycle toner stirring motor FG
Registration shutter solenoid PWM
Delivery fan 1 PWM
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
C pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
M pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
Y pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
Fixing delivery motor clock
Duplex feed motor clock
Shutter motor clock
Multi-purpose motor clock
Registration motor clock
Laser shutter motor clock
Pickup feed driver PCB connect
VIII
Jack. No.
J126
J127
J132
J138

BUF CHOUHI CLK
BUF CHOUHI TXEND
BUF CHOUHI TXD
BUF CHOUHI RXLOAD
BUF CHOUHI RXD
BUF CHOUHI ENB
UART TXD
UART RXD
FIN DL MODE
FIN RESET
FIN DL EN
Z3 DETECT
DECK CHOUHI CLK
DECK CHOUHI TXEND
DECK CHOUHI TXD
DECK CHOUHI RXLOAD
DECK CHOUHI RXD
DECK CHOUHI ENB
UART TXD
UART RXD
FIN CNNT
FIN DL MODE
FIN RESET
FIN DL EN
KEY
EX12M OUT A
EX12M OUT A*
EX12M OUT B*
EX12M OUT B
TURNM OUT A
TURNM OUT A*
TURNM OUT B*
TURNM OUT B
EX3M OUT A
EX3M OUT A*
EX3M OUT B*
EX3M OUT B
Signal Name
Buffer pass serial clock
Buffer pass serial TXEND
Buffer pass serial TXD
Buffer pass serial RXLOAD
Buffer pass serial RXD
Buffer pass serial ENB
Inner finisher serial TXD
Inner finisher serial RXD
Finisher download mode
Finisher reset
Inner finisher download end
Inner finisher detect
Deck serial clock
Deck serial TXEND
Deck serial TXD
Deck serial RXLOAD
Deck serial RXD
Deck serial ENB
Finisher serial TXD
Finisher serial RXD
Finisher connect
Finisher download mode
Finisher reset
Finisher download end
Key switch
First & Second delivery motor A
First & Second delivery motor A*
First & Second delivery motor B*
First & Second delivery motor B
Reverse roller motor A
Reverse roller motor A*
Reverse roller motor B*
Reverse roller motor B
Third delivery motor A
Third delivery motor A*
Third delivery motor B*
Third delivery motor B
Jack. No.
J204
J205
J207

EX PAPER FAN2 ON
EX PAPER FAN2 LOCK
2 3EX DOOR SNS
EX1 SNS
EX TRAY1 GULL
FUEXM A
FUEXM A*
FUEXM B*
FUEXM B
WASTE BOX SET SNS
WASTE TNR DET SNS
WASTE TNR LED ON
WASTE TNRM FG
WASTE TNRM ON
PRE EXP LED K
PRE EXP LED C
PRE EXP LED M
PRE EXP LED Y
PCRG NEW DET Y
TNR CTRL Y
TNR ANLG Y
PCRG NEW M
TNR CTRL M
TNR ANLG M
PCRG NEW C
TNR CTRL C
TNR ANLG C
PCRG NEW BK
TNR CTRL K
TNR ANLG K
REG F S
REGI F LEDON
REGI F GAIN1
REGI F GAIN0
REG R S
REGI R LEDON
REGI R GAIN1
REGI R GAIN0
PATCH LEDON
AD P
AD S
PATCH CTRL
IX
Signal Name
Delivery fan 2 ON
Delivery fan 2 LOCK
Fixing delivery motor A
Fixing delivery motor A*
Fixing delivery motor B*
Fixing delivery motor B
Recycle toner box detect
Recycle toner sensor detect
Recycle toner sensor LED ON
Recycle toner stirring motor FG
Recycle toner stirring motor ON
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
C pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
M pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
Y pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
ATR sensor (Y) control
ATR sensor (Y) analog
ATR sensor (M) control
ATR sensor (M) analog
ATR sensor (C) control
ATR sensor (C) analog
ATR sensor (Bk) control
ATR sensor (Bk) analog
Registration sensor (front)
Patch sensor (front) LED ON
Patch sensor (front) gain 1
Patch sensor (front) gain 2
Registration sensor (rear)
Patch sensor (rear) LED ON
Patch sensor (rear) gain 1
Patch sensor (rear) gain 2
Patch sensor (center) LED ON
AD reflection
AD diffused reflection
Patch sensor (center) control
IX
Jack. No.
J210
J212
J213
J214

EX TRAY2 FULL
TURN SNS
EX2 SNS
FLAP1 SL
FLAP2 SL
FLAP3 SL
EX3 SNS
DUP ENT SNS
FEED DOOR SNS
MULTI PAPER SNS
MULTI SIZE ANALOG
DUP SNS
MULTI CL ON
MULTIM OUT A
MULTIM OUT A*
MULTIM OUT B*
MULTIM OUT B
MULTI AUTO SL
REGIM A
REGIM A*
REGIM B
REGIM B*
DUPM A
DUPM A*
DUPM B
DUPM B*
FUSER EX A FAN ON
FUSER EX A FAN LOCK
FUSER EX B FAN ON
FUSER EX B FAN LOCK
R DOOR SNS
LS SHUTM A
LS SHUTM A*
LS SHUTM B
LS SHUTM B*
PCRG FAN F ON
PCRG FAN F LOCK
LS SHUTM HP SNS1
Signal Name
Reverse sensor
Second delivery sensor ON
First delivery flapper solenoid ON
Second delivery flapper solenoid ON
Third delivery flapper solenoid ON
Duplex inlet sensor
Multi-purpose paper sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Multi-purpose pickup clutch ON
Multi-purpose motor A
Multi-purpose motor A*
Multi-purpose motor B*
Multi-purpose motor B
Registration motor A
Registration motor A*
Registration motor B
Registration motor B*
Duplex feed motor A
Duplex feed motor A*
Duplex feed motor B
Duplex feed motor B*
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 ON
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 LOCK
Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 ON
Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 LOCK
Right door sensor
Laser shutter motor A
Laser shutter motor A*
Laser shutter motor B
Laser shutter motor B*
Process cartridge fan (front) ON
Process cartridge fan (front) LOCK
Jack. No.
J215
J216
J217
J218

CST1M A
CST1M A*
CST1M B
CST1M B*
CST2M A
CST2M A*
CST2M B
CST2M B*
INNER EX SNS
FUSER KAIJYO SNS
FM SHUT POS SNS
FMSHUT HP SNS
REG SHT SL PWM
OHP LED ON
OHP ANALOG
KYUSHI V PASS SNS
REGIMAE SNS
F DOOR SNS
MULTI SFTER SNS
FM SHUT A
FM SHUT A*
FM SHUT B
FM SHUT B*
EX PAPER FAN1 PWM
COOL F FAN ON
COOL F FAN LOCK
COOL R FAN ON
COOL R FAN LOCK
2ND TR EX FAN ON
2ND TR EX FAN LOCK
Signal Name
Cassette 1 pickup motor A
Cassette 1 pickup motor A*
Cassette 1 pickup motor B
Cassette 1 pickup motor B*
Cassette 2 pickup motor A
Cassette 2 pickup motor A*
Cassette 2 pickup motor B
Cassette 2 pickup motor B*
Shutter position sensor
Shutter HP sensor
Registration shutter solenoid PWM
Transparency sensor LED ON
Transparency sensor analog
Registration sensor
Front door sensor
Shutter motor A
Shutter motor A*
Shutter motor B
Shutter motor B*
Delivery fan 1 PWM
Fixing cooling fan (front) ON
Fixing cooling fan (front) Lock
Fixing cooling fan (rear) ON
Fixing cooling fan (rear) Lock
Secondary transfer exhaust fan ON
Secondary transfer exhaust fan Lock
Jack. No.
J234
J235
J237
J303

CST1 SIZE 0
CST1 SIZE 1
CST1 SIZE 2
CST1 SIZE 3
CST1 SIZE 4
CST1 SIZE 5
CST1 SIZE 6
CST1 SIZE 7
CST2 SIZE 0
CST2 SIZE 1
CST2 SIZE 2
CST2 SIZE 3
CST2 SIZE 4
CST2 SIZE 5
CST2 SIZE 6
CST2 SIZE 7
CST1 PAPER SNS
CST1 LEVEL A SNS
CST1 LEVEL B SNS
CST1 RETRY SNS
CST1 PICKUP SL
CST2 PAPER SNS
CST2 LEVEL A SNS
CST2 LEVEL B SNS
CST2 RETRY SNS
CST2 PICKUP SL
ITB STR HP SNS
ITB YORI SNS1
ITB YORI SNS2
ITB YORI SNS3
ITB YORI SNS4
1TR OFF POSI SNS
1TR ON POSI SNS
TNR CL ON Y
TNR CL ON M
TNR CL ON C
TNR CL ON K
Signal Name
Cassette 1 size switch A_0
Cassette 1 size switch B_4
ITB steering sensor
Primary transfer detachment sensor 1
Primary transfer detachment sensor 2
Toner supply clutch (Y) ON
Toner supply clutch (M) ON
Toner supply clutch (C) ON
Toner supply clutch (Bk) ON
Jack. No.
J304
J305
J306
J307

*ITB MTR BRK
ITB MTR ON
ITB MTR LOCK
ITB MTR GAIN
ITB MTR CLK
ITB MTR FG
YORI A
YORI*A
YORI B
YORI*B
1tr A
1tr*A
1tr B
1tr*B
*DEV MTR DEC K
*DEV MTR ACC K
DEV MTR FG K
*DEV MTR DEC C
*DEV MTR ACC C
DEV MTR FG C
*DEV MTR DEC M
*DEV MTR ACC M
DEV MTR FG M
*DEV MTR DEC Y
*DEV MTR ACC Y
DEV MTR FG Y
DRM ENC K2
DRM ENC K1
DRM ENC C2
DRM ENC C1
DRM ENC M2
DRM ENC M1
DRM ENC Y2
DRM ENC Y1
DRM MTR DIR Y
DRM MTR ON Y
DRM MTR BRK Y
DRM MTR FG Y
DRM MTR PWM Y
XI
Signal Name
ITB motor Break
ITB motor ON
ITB motor Lock
ITB motor Gain
ITB motor Clock
ITB motor FG
ITB displacement control motor A
ITB displacement control motor A*
ITB displacement control motor B
ITB displacement control motor B*
Primary transfer separation motor A
Primary transfer separation motor A*
Primary transfer separation motor B
Primary transfer separation motor B*
Developing motor (Bk) Deceleration
Developing motor (Bk) Accelerationration
Developing motor (Bk) FG
Developing motor (C) Deceleration
Developing motor (C) Acceleration
Developing motor (C) FG
Developing motor (M) Deceleration
Developing motor (M) Acceleration
Developing motor (M) FG
Developing motor (Y) Deceleration
Developing motor (Y) Acceleration
Developing motor (Y) FG
Bk drum rotation sensor 2
Bk drum rotation sensor 1
C drum rotation sensor 2
C drum rotation sensor 1
M drum rotation sensor 2
M drum rotation sensor 1
Y drum rotation sensor 2
Y drum rotation sensor 1
Drum Motor (Y) DIR
Drum Motor (Y) ON
Drum Motor (Y) BREAK
Drum Motor (Y) FG
Drum Motor (Y) PWM
XI
Jack. No.
J308
J309
J310
J312

DRM MTR DIR K
DRM MTR ON K
DRM MTR BRK K
DRM MTR FG K
DRM MTR PWM K
DRM MTR DIR C
DRM MTR ON C
DRM MTR BRK C
DRM MTR FG C
DRM MTR PWM C
DRM MTR DIR M
DRM MTR ON M
DRM MTR BRK M
DRM MTR FG M
DRM MTR PWM M
TNR FRONT DOOR
TNR DOOR K
TNR DOOR C
TNR DOOR M
TNR DOOR Y
TNR SNS Y
TNR COUNT Y
TNR BTL OPEN Y
TNR BTL OPEN HP Y
TNR SNS M
TNR COUNT M
TNR BTL OPEN M
TNR BTL OPEN HP M
TNR SNS C
TNR COUNT C
TNR BTL OPEN C
TNR BTL OPEN HP C
TNR SNS K
TNR COUNT K
TNR BTL OPEN K
TNR BTL OPEN HP K
BTL MTR ROT Y CW
BTL MTR OPEN Y CCW
BTL MTR ROT M CW
BTL MTR OPEN M CCW
BTL MTR ROT C CW
BTL MTR OPEN C CCW
BTL MTR ROT K CW
BTL MTR OPEN K CCW
XII
Signal Name
Drum Motor (Bk) DIR
Drum Motor (Bk) ON
Drum Motor (Bk) BREAK
Drum Motor (Bk) FG
Drum Motor (Bk) PWM
Drum Motor (C) DIR
Drum Motor (C) ON
Drum Motor (C) BREAK
Drum Motor (C) FG
Drum Motor (C) PWM
Drum Motor (M) DIR
Drum Motor (M) ON
Drum Motor (M) BREAK
Drum Motor (M) FG
Drum Motor (M) PWM
Piezo sensor (Y)
Piezo sensor (M)
Piezo sensor (C)
Piezo sensor (Bk)
Toner container motor (Y) Clockwise
Toner container motor (Y) Counter Clockwise
Toner container motor (M) Clockwise
Toner container motor (M) Counter Clockwise
Toner container motor (C) Clockwise
Toner container motor (C) Counter Clockwise
Toner container motor (Bk) Clockwise
Toner container motor (Bk) Counter Clockwise
T-10-3
XII
XIII
H1
2
1
2
1
TP
J5007M
TP1
J5012L
MT1
FT13
W W
5
1
J5010F
SOLD5
J5005F
1
FT6
Temperature fuse
1
FT8
FT7
UL11023 AWG16
J5039
BK
FT14
J5007F
J681
MT7
MT5
Environment switch
1
N (W)
J5014L
FT2
FT5
N (W)
H (BK)
FT1
J5013D
1
1
J5012D
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
J5010M
J5005M
J5087M
J5006M
J5006F
W W
SW5
N (W)
N (W)
J5087F
H (BK)
SOLD6
J833
FT31
N.C .
N.C .
J866
MT2
GND
FT33
FT10
FT35
FT12
Drum heater (Bk)
All-night power PCB

J5013L
Cassette heater
H2
SW2
FT9
UN9
100V
15A
FT11
H4
W
W
SW1
Fixing heater
J5014D
MT6
H (BK)
H (BK)
10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/16)
General Circuit Diagram (1/16)
J1009
J1005
J1002
J1011
J1003
N (W)
N (W)
2
H (BK)
H (BK)
N.C .
N.C .
J1007
FT32
N.C .
1
J1001
N.C .
FT36
FT34
AC interlock switch
J1006
UN6
AC driver PCB
J1004
J2003
J2001
J2002
J1010
J1008
J1012
GN D
TEST_RL_3.3V_POW ER1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
17
10
18
19
20
21
22
23
+3.3VR(TEST_GND)
16
GN D
15
14
13
TEST_RL_ON_24V_POWER
12
UN5
J426
J411
GN D
BL
GND
BL
BL
BL
OR
OR
OR
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
24V R
GND
BL
10
2
1
(J102)
J1102
Deck Heater
UN10
10
J2012M
J5001F
1
11
12
UN11
J5077F
J835
J5008M
J834
J5008F
12V OR
GN D
24V R
BL
J5002DH
MT3
GND
J2012F
12V
12V
GN D
N.C .
AC sub driver PCB
J1022
6
J2020
UN7
12V
GN D
RMT_12V
GN D
10
GN D
GN D
24V
24V
24V
GN D
RMT_24V
J1021
Option Cassette
Relay PCB
B
1
J5002D
J412
J1020
RMT_SYS
21
11
3.3VR
22
10
RMT_QUIC K
23
J431
SEESA
W
GN D
3.3VR
SEESA
W
GN D
SHUTOFF
RMT_SYS
GN D
DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF*
VO L_S
CST_HEAT_OFF
CRNT_S
VINJDG 1
FSR_C RNT_S
3.3V
GN D
VINJDG 2
HEAT1_ON
HEAT2_ON
RELAY1_ON
RELAY2_ON
12V
GN D
ZEROX_IN
23CSR-8PK(N)
1
J1101
(J101)
5
6
J5077M
General Circuit Diagram
10
P.1
F-10-3
XIII
XIV
10
UN2
UN1
Pickup feed driver PCB
DC controller PCB
J211
1
J129
2
Controller
UN16
UN17
UN18
UN8
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
J301
J808
2
UN4
Drum driver PCB
10
11
J650
J302
1
J651
J652
J662
2
BL
BL
BL
+24V
GND
OR
GND
OR
BL
GND
12V
BL
GND
J425
12V
24V_IL
BL
J424
GND
J5043F
R
1
24V_IL
10
J5043M
GND
24V_IL
BL
BL
GND
GND
GND
J421
24V
BL
BL
GND
UL1007 #20
OR
BL
12V
24V_IL
OR
12V
GND
OR
12V
BL
OR
12V
BL
PK
BL
+24V
3.3R
BL
GND
GND
OR
R
+24V_IL
J422
J423
GND
BL
GND
BL
OR
R
+12V
BL
GND
GND
OR
24V
+12V_IL
BL
GND
12V
R
24V_IL
24V_IL
GND
J451
FAX
UN5
Relay PCB
J700
2
GND
DCP_FAN_LOCK
GND
GND
24V
DCP_FAN_ON
GND
J432
P_CRG_FAN_ON
24V
P_CRG_FAN_LOCK
12V
GND
12V
GND
24V
GND
BL
GND
GND
BL
+3.3R
+3.3R
PK
J427
J428
J413
PK
C
J5082DH
J5081F
J5080M
1
J5080F
J5082D
2
1
J5082L
J5081M
1
2
MT21
J701DH
1
J803F
J691
J801
J805
J804
J802
To P.4
Finisher C1
J6124L
Cassette Pedistal AD1
Finisher A1
UI
J6122LH
1
J701L
J6122L
USB
1 2 3
All-night power PCB
UN9
J701D
J6122D
J6124LH
F-4
J6124D
SP1
1 2 3
Speaker
FM4
Option
Process
cartridge fan
(rear)
FM3
Power supply
cooling fan
10
P.2
F-10-4
XIV
10
15
14
13
SOLD11
9
12
1
1
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_M
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_M
29
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_M
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_Y
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_Y
10
28
27
4
26
SOLD12
5
25
6
6
24
7
7
23
8
8
22
4
3
9
21
10
SOLD13
20
11
2
12
13
19
12
18
1
13
14
17
14
16
15
17
15
16
17
18
15
16
14
16
17
8
13
15
14
CN6
SOLD14
19
18
12
13
1
19
11
20
12
2
10
11
3
21
10
20
21
22
22
8
5
23
7
24
SOLD15
7
7
6
25
8
5
26
9
4
27
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
28
2
J653
3
11
29
2
1
13
12
11
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
J654
8
HVT 1 PCB
UN16
6
7
6
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
10
11
12
13
15
14
13
12
14
15
16
17
11
18
19
10
9
20
J655
21
22
6
5
4
3
23
24
25
J656
HVT 2 PCB
UN17
J5044L
J5044LH
Environment
sensor 2
UN50
4
3
2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J5076LH
J810
1
7
2
6
3
5
4
4
5
J5066LH
J111
3
6
2
J5066L
1
2
3
4
5
J5066D
J107
6
7
15
8
9
14
13
10
12
4
5
6
7
11
12
11
10
7
8
13
8
9
10
14
15
16
7
6
F
UN4
F
Drum driver PCB

J313
10
J109
17
18
19
20
J3002D
3
2
Cassette Pedistal AD1
SOLD16
GND
DRUM_HOB_S2M-
DRUM_HOB_S2M+
GND
DRUM_HOB_M2S-
DRUM_HOB_M2S+
GND
DRUM_HOB_CLK-
25
+5V
16
GND
15
PEDE_DETECT
14
PEDE_EX_M2S
13
PEDE_EX_S2M
12
GND
GND
11
PEDE_EX_CLK
10
GND
PEDE_CST1M_CLK
GND
PEDE_CST2M_CLK
10
GND
11
DRUM_HOB_CLK+
J311
PEDE_RESET*
GND
DRUM_READY
RIKANM_CLK
ITB_YORIM_CLK
GND
CPU_RESET
GND
GND
+3.3V
+5V
10
GND
11
GND
HANSO1_EX_M2S
12
+3.3V
HANSO1_EX_S2M
HNASO1_EX_CLK
GND
J201
GND
15
HANSO2_EX_M2S
PEDE_READY
14
HANSO2_EX_S2M
TEMP1
13
HANSO2_EX_CLK
UN2
I2C_SCL
12
13
GND
GND
UN3
3.3V
11
GND
J106
HANSO_READY
J231
CPU_RESET
GND
GND
+24V
10
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
I2C_SDA
+5V
KYUSHI_EX_M2S
HVSEL_HV2_MUX0
GND
HVSEL_HV2_MUX1
HV2_ANALOG1
J110
1
HVSEL_HV2_MUX2
27
GND
26
+12_IL_HV
25
GND
HV2_ANALOG2
24
10
HV_TR1_PWM_Y
23
11
HV_TR1_PWM_M
22
12
HV_TR1_PWM_C
21
13
HV_TR1_PWM_K
J122
14
GND
20
15
GND
19
HV_DEV_AC_CLK4
18
HV_DEV_AC_CLK3
UN5
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_K
17
GND
KYUSHI_EX_S2M
CPU_RESET
KYUSHI_EX_CLK
KYUSHI_READY
ITB_HP_SNS
GND
10
GND
11
RELAY2_ON
RELAY1_ON
12
ZEROX_IN
HEAT2_ON
16
HEAT1_ON
15
GND
14
3.3V
13
VINJDG
J402
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_P2
12
13
FSR_CRNT_S
Relay PCB
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_M2
11
CRNT_S
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_K
10
14
GND
15
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_K
16
120V_DET
17
VOL_S
E
DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF
18
GND
19
HV_CHG_AC_CLK2
20
GND
21
CST_HEAT_OFF
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_K
GND
GND
GND
PCRG_FAN_LOCK*
SIG_RMT_24VDCP
PCRG_FAN_12V
SHUKUTAI_MODE
PCRG_FAN_24V
15
DCP_FAN_LOCK*
14
HV_DEV_AC_CLK2
13
HV_DEV_AC_CLK1
12
22
HV_CHG_AC_CLK1
11
23
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_P1
10
24
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_M1
25
GND
J121
26
HVSEL_HV1_MUX0
27
GND
HVSEL_HV1_MUX1
J401
HVSEL_HV1_MUX2
GND
DCP_FAN_12V
DCP_FAN_24V
HV1_ANALOG1
GND
HV1_ANALOG2
GND
GND
RMT_CONT
+12V_IL_HV
SEESAW
SHUTOFF
GND
10
GND
RMT_RCON
RMT_ENG
11
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_Y
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_M
RMT_SYS
12
GND
13
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_Y
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_C
RMT_RESERVE
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_C
GND
14
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_C
15
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_C
GND
10
GND
+3.3R
R_PW_MONI*
XV
UN1
D
DC controller PCB
J104
21
J5076D
7
1
J5076L
J3002DH
J1300
Environment
sensor 1
UN22
CN5
P.3
F-10-5
XV
11
11
9
10
3
9
4
8
5
7
6
6
7
5
8
M21
4
9
Fixing motor
3
10
2
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
EX3M_OUT_A
EX3M_OUT_B
13
12
2
11
3
4
10
9
First & Second

delivery motor
8
6
7
7
6
8
5
9
4
10
3
11
2
12
J5045LH
J6142
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
M
M
M
M23
M24
M25
Reverse roller
motor
J6141
J138
13
J5042L
J5042D
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J5031D
SOLD8
J132
SOLD9
17
18
19
20
21
1
2
1
2
3
9
8
J6084
J6140
7
6
5
4
J125
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
EHO-ID
J5031L
GND
12
FIN_DL_EN
11
FIN_RESET
10
FIN_DL_MODE
FIN_CNNT
SOLD4
2
SW3
J102
J5042DH
J5053F
J5053M
J2111M
J2111F
DC interlock
switch 1
SOLD3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
13
14
15
16
17
18
SOLD2
2
J127
19
4
23
3
22
1
2
21
5
20
19
7
18
3
4
5
6
17
9
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
7
8
9
10
11
13
12
14
11
15
10
16
12
13
14
15
17
8
18
16
17
18
3
2
Buffer pass
19
5
20
21
J809
Finisher C1
J803M
To P.2
B-8
MT24
J815
Finisher A1
J813
3
5
22
2
19
20
21
22
23
3
2
1
J816H
J816
J5037LH
J5037L
23
J5071L
J5071D
J5071DH
J126
Third delivery
motor
GND
Z3_DETECT
1
10
FIN_DL_EN
11
FIN_RESET
GND
1
2
GND
2
3
FIN_DL_MODE
3
10
4
GND
4
9
5
UART_RXD
5
8
6
BUF_CHOUHI_ENB
6
7
7
GND
7
6
BUF_CHOUHI_RXD
8
5
8
UART_TXD
9
4
9
BUF_CHOUHI_RXLOAD
10
3
10
BUF_CHOUHI_TXD
J5037D
2
11
GND
1
12
BUF_CHOUHI_CLK
BUF_CHOUHI_TXEND
13
GND
GND
J203
12V
E
J809B_[0:8]
24V
J809B
GND
GND
GND
GND
UART_TXD
DECK_CHOUHI_ENB
UART_RXD
DECK_CHOUHI_RXD
J813H
DECK_CHOUHI_TXD
DECK_CHOUHI_TXEND
DECK_CHOUHI_RXLOAD
GND
DECK_CHOUHI_CLK
GND
LS_SHUTM_CLK
REGIM_CLK
HANSO_CNNT1
MULTIM_CLK
10
GND
11
+12V
12
+12V_IL
SHUTM_CLK
DUPM_CLK
GND
FUEXM_CLK
GND
CST2M_CLK
PRE_EXP_LED_Y_PWM
CST1M_CLK
PRE_EXP_LED_M_PWM
PRE_EXP_LED_C_PWM
25
PRE_EXP_LED_K_PWM
24
EX_PAPER_FAN_PWM
23
13
GND
22
14
ECO_POW
21
15
GND
20
16
ECO_CS
19
17
ECO_DIN
18
18
ECO_SCK
17
19
ECO_DOUT
J103
20
N.C.
16
21
N.C.
15
KEY
14
N.C.
13
SHUT_SL_PWM
GND
3.3V
WASTE_TNR_FG
GND
EX3M_OUT_B*
GND
GND
10
3.3V
11
EX3M_OUT_A*
12
12
TURNM_OUT_B
11
+5V
10
GND
13
TURNM_OUT_B*
J124
14
TURNM_OUT_A*
OHP_ANALOG
MULTI_SIZE
TNR_ANLG_Y
REG_R
TNR_ANLG_M
PCH_S
TNR_ANLG_C
PCH_P
REG_F
GND
TNR_ANLG_K
TNR_CTRL_Y
GND
TNR_CTRL_M
15
TURNM_OUT_A
11
FUSERM_DIR
TNR_CTRL_C
16
EX12M_OUT_B
10
FUSERM_CLK
TNR_CTRL_K
17
EX12M_OUT_B*
FUSERM_GAIN
PATCH_CTRL
18
EX12M_OUT_A*
FUSERM_LOCK
GND
19
EX12M_OUT_A
FUSERM_ON
GND
6
*FUSERM_BRAKE
20
4
21
11
22
3
23
J809A_[0:7]
J5045D
24
2.5K Paperdeck
1
DOOR_OPEN
J809A
GND
UN2
7
HANSO_CNNT0

8
10
3
+5V
J5045L
2
+24V_IL
J202
25
C
1
+24V_IL
10
XVI
DC controller PCB
UN1
J136
2
J822
J5031DH
DC interlock
switch 2
SW4
SOLD1
P.4
F-10-6
XVI
XVII
10
F
UN1
DC controller PCB
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
GND
+5V_LS
+1.5V
+3.3V_YukkyIO
GND
CK_GBD
GND
CK_EHOB_CLK-
CK_EHOB_CLK+
CK_EHOB_M2S-
CK_EHOB_S2M-
CK_EHOB_M2S+
K_BD-
K_BD+
CK_EHOB_S2M+
GND
GND
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
N.C.
21
20
19
K_LDD_P
18
16
17
K_LDD_N*
15
K_LDC_P
13
14
K_LDC_N*
12
K_LDB_P
10
11
K_LDB_N*
9
K_LDA_P
7
K_LDA_N*
5
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
CK_24V
C_LDD_P
C_LDD_N*
C_LDC_P
C_LDC_N*
C_LDB_P
C_LDB_N*
C_LDA_P
C_LDA_N*
M_LDD_P
M_LDD_N*
M_LDC_P
M_LDC_N*
M_LDB_P
M_LDB_N*
M_LDA_P
13
Y_LDD_P
Y_LDD_N*
Y_LDC_P
Y_LDC_N*
Y_LDB_P
Y_LDB_N*
Y_LDA_P
Y_LDA_N*
M_LDA_N*
12
11
10
GND
3
+1.5V
+5V_LS
J875_BUS[0:51]
+3.3U_YukkyIO
GND
GND
RESET*
YM_GBD
10
YM_EHOB_CLK-
11
YM_EHOB_CLK+
12
YM_EHOB_M2S-
13
YM_EHOB_S2M-
14
YM_EHOB_M2S+
15
M_BD+
M_BD-
16
YM_EHOB_S2M+
GND
J119
J114
17
GND
18
RESET*
J118
19
YM_24V
J823D
J825D
1
J825L
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
21
20
19
18
17
20
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J823LH
J823L
J825LH
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
J863_BUS[0:21]
J854_BUS[0:21]
J853_BUS[0:21]
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
J864_BUS[0:21]
C
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J853
17
UN13
UN14
( J205)
M32
Image skew
correction
motor (M)
M31
J862B
(J202)
J871
10
J872
( J204)
M29
11
10
UN15
M33
J6167
J6166
M34
( J205)
Image skew Image skew

correction
correction
motor (Bk)
motor (C)
Image skew Scanner motor

correction
(YM)
motor (Y)
J6165
J6161
10
J6160
J6159
J862A
J851B
(J202)
3
12
(J102)
(J103)
13
J860A
14
J860WH
J860A_BUS[1:17]
[17:1]
J860B_BUS[1:17]
[17:1]
J868
( J204)
J852A
J852WH
J867
10
(J103)
[17:1]
J851A_BUS[1:17]
15
J860B
J852B
[17:1]
J851B_BUS[1:17]
16
J862
J864
(J201)
(J101)
(J101)
UN12
J861 (J203)
J854
(J102)
J863
(J201)
J830 (J203)
J851A
M30
Scanner motor
(CBk)
P.5
F-10-7
XVII
XVIII
M1
M4
Drum motor (Y)
M3
Drum motor (Bk)
J6010
M2
Drum motor (C)
M
9
9
J6009
M8
Drum motor (M)
J6014
M7
J6016
J6011
J6012
6
6
M5
M6
10
J6013
J6015
15
+24V_IL
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
TNR_CL_ON_C
13
DEV_MTR_FG_Y
12
+24V
11
+24V
10
TNR_CL_ON_M
GND
*DEV_MTR_ACC_Y
*DEV_MTR_DEC_Y
+24V_IL
DEV_MTR_FG_M
GND
*DEV_MTR_ACC_M
*DEV_MTR_DEC_M
+24V_IL
27
DEV_MTR_FG_C
26
GND
25
*DEV_MTR_ACC_C
24
*DEV_MTR_DEC_C
23
+24V_IL
22
DEV_MTR_FG_K
21
*DEV_MTR_ACC_K
20
*DEV_MTR_DEC_K
19
J308
J307
GND
18
+24V_IL
17
GND
16
DRM_MTR_PWM_M
15
+5V
14
GND
13
DRM_MTR_ON_M
12
DRM_MTR_FG_M
11
DRM_MTR_BRK_M
DRM_MTR_DIR_M
10
+24V_IL
GND
+5V
GND
DRM_MTR_PWM_C
DRM_MTR_ON_C
DRM_MTR_FG_C
DRM_MTR_BRK_C
+24V_IL
DRM_MTR_DIR_C
GND
DRM_MTR_PWM_K
+5V
+24V_IL
GND
GND
DRM_MTR_ON_K
+5V
DRM_MTR_FG_K
GND
DRM_MTR_BRK_K
DRM_MTR_PWM_Y
DRM_MTR_DIR_K
DRM_MTR_ON_Y
DRM_MTR_FG_Y
DRM_MTR_BRK_Y
DRM_MTR_DIR_Y
J305
UN4
Drum driver PCB
J303
(CSR)
22
23
24
GND
DRM_ENC_Y1
+3.3V
25
+24V
21
TNR_CL_ON_Y
20
+24V
19
GND
18
+3.3V
17
DRM_ENC_Y2
16
GND
15
+3.3V
14
DRM_ENC_M1
13
+3.3V
12
GND
11
DRM_ENC_M2
GND
10
GND
+3.3V
DRM_ENC_C1
+3.3V
DRM_ENC_C2
GND
GND
+3.3V
DRM_ENC_K1
+3.3V
11CSR-8PK(N)
1
10
11
TNR_CL_ON_K
J306
DRM_ENC_K2
END26
END25
J6005D
J6006D
J6005DH
2
1
J6006L
J6005L
CL2
J6018
J6020
J6021
J6022
J6023
UN38
UN37
UN36
Bk drum rotation
C drum rotation
detection sensor 1 detection sensor 2
UN35
UN34
UN33
J6007DH
J6007L
CL3
J6008DH
J6008L
CL
CL4
2
1
1
2
B
1
CL
CL5
Toner supply clutch (M) Toner supply clutch (C) Toner supply clutch (Bk)
J6024
3
3
Bk drum rotation
detection sensor 2
10
J6019
CL

J6017
CL
J6008D
J6007D
J6006DH
UN32
UN31
C drum rotation
M drum rotation
M drum rotation
Y drum rotation
Y drum rotation
detection sensor 1 detection sensor 2 detection sensor 1 detection sensor 2 detection sensor 1
P.6
F-10-8
XVIII
XIX
10
UN4
Drum driver PCB
25
26
+5V
24
27
28
29
GND
23
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_K
22
TNR_SNS_K
21
TNR_COUNT_K
20
TNR_BTL_OPEN_K
19
+5V_PIEZO_CK
18
+5V
17
GND
16
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_C
15
TNR_SNS_C
14
TNR_BTL_OPEN_C
13
+5V_PIEZO_CK
TNR_SNS_M
12
TNR_COUNT_C
11
+5V
10
GND
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_M
TNR_BTL_OPEN_M
+5V_PIEZO_YM
TNR_COUNT_M
+5V
GND
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_Y
TNR_SNS_Y
TNR_COUNT_Y
TNR_BTL_OPEN_Y
J310
+5V_PIEZO_YM
J5015D
J5018D
J5015LH
J5021D
J5018LH
J5021LH
J5018L
J5015L
J5024D
7
J5024L
J5022DH
J5016DH
J5024LH
J5021L
J5025DH
J5019DH
7
J5016D
J5016L
J5019D
J5019L
J5022D
J5022L
J5025D
J5025L
C
J5017
7
J5020
7
UN39
12
11
10
12
J659
11
10
UN41
J5035
J5023
UN40

J658
J660
12
11
10
UN42
J661
12
11
10
B
J6033
J6035
J6034
1
2
3
3
2
PS1
TS1
Piezo sensor (Y)
J6154
1
Toner supply
sensor (Y)
2
3
3
2
2
3
PS9
3
2
J6038
1
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (Y)
J6037
1
PS5
Toner cap
position
sensor (Y)
10
J6036
1
2
3
3
2
PS2
TS2
Piezo sensor (M)
J6151
1
Toner supply
sensor (M)
2
3
3
2
J6039
1
2
3
PS10
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (M)
PS6
Toner cap
position
sensor (M)
J6040
1
J6041
1
2
3
TS3
3
2
PS3
Toner supply
Piezo sensor (C) sensor (C)
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
PS11
Toner cap
position
sensor (C)
J6043
J6042
J6152
1
3
2
PS7
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (C)
J6044
1
2
3
TS4
Piezo sensor (Bk)
3
2
J6153
1
PS4
Toner supply
sensor (Bk)
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
PS12
Toner cap
position
sensor (Bk)
3
2
PS8
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (Bk)
P.7
F-10-9
XIX
XX
10
F
UN4
Drum driver PCB
10
11
12
13
14
15
+5V
+5V
GND
TNR_DOOR_Y
+5V
GND
BTL_MTR_ROT_K_CW
BTL_MTR_OPEN_K_CCW
TNR_DOOR_M
BTL_MTR_ROT_C_CW
BTL_MTR_OPEN_C_CCW
+5V
GND
TNR_DOOR_C
+5V
GND
TNR_DOOR_K
GND
17
J309
BTL_MTR_OPEN_M_CCW
16
BTL_MTR_ROT_Y_CW
15
BTL_MTR_ROT_M_CW
14
BTL_MTR_OPEN_Y_CCW
13
N.C.
12
1tr B
ITB_MTR_FG
11
1tr*B
ITB_MTR_CLK
10
1tr A
ITB_MTR_GAIN
1tr*A
YORI B
YORI*B
YORI A
YORI*A
ITB_MTR_LOCK
GND
ITB_MTR_ON
J312
2
+24V_IL
TNR_FRONT_DOOR
J304
*ITB_MTR_BRK
E
J5079D
J5078D
19
18
17
3
16
4
15
5
14
6
13
7
12
8
11
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
J5079LH
J5078LH
J5079L
J5078L
15
14
13
12
11
10
J5029D
J5027D
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J5029LH
J5027LH
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
14
15
J5029L
J5027L
J5070D
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
J1184D
J5070DH
J1181D
J1184DH
J1184L
J5070L
J1181DH
J1181L
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
J5030D
J5030LH
J5030L
C
J5
J3
M10
J1180DH
J6004DH
J6025
J6003D
J6003LH
ITB motor
M14
J1182L
J1182D
J6004L
J2
M12
Toner container
motor (Bk)
J1182DH
J6004D
1
4
J6003L
1
M13
4
1
J1180L
Toner container
motor (M)
J1180D
J4
J6046
2
M15
Primary transfer
separation motor
M9
M11
J6048
J6052
J6053
PS17
J6050
Toner container
outer cover
sensor (Y)
PS16
Toner container
inner cover
sensor (Bk)
PS15
PS14
PS13
Toner container Toner container Toner container

inner cover
inner cover
inner cover
sensor (C)
sensor (M)
sensor (Y)
10
P.8
F-10-10
XX
XXI
10
F
UN2
J217
+5V
19
20
21
+5V
18
GND
17
DUP_ENT_SNS
16
GND
15
EX3_SNS
14
+24V
13
FLAP3_SL
12
+24V
11
FLAP2_SL
10
+5V
+24V
FLAP1_SL
+5V
GND
EX2_SNS
+5V
GND
GND
TURN_SNS
17
EX_TRAY2_FULL
16
+5V
15
+5V
14
GND
13
MULTI_AFTER_SNS
12
+5V
11
GND
10
F_DOOR_SNS
GND
+5V
GND
REGIMAE_SNS
KYUSHI_V_PASS_SNS
GND
+24V_IL
OHP_ANALOG
J210
3
OHP_LED_ON
REG_SHUT_SL_PWM
J5032D
J5055D
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
17
J5055LH
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
11
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J5032DH
21
J5032L
J5055L
J5106D
7
J5106L
J5097D
J5058DH
J5056DH
J5106LH
J5056D
J5056L
J5041D
J5041LH
J5114D
J5114LH
2
3
J5057D
J5057LH
J5114L
J5041L
J5058D
J5097L
1
J5058L
J5083D
J5057L
4
5
2
J6064D
J6092
J6064L
J6094
J6093
3
J6095
1
2
SL
SL1
Registration
shutter solenoid
UN51
Transparency sensor
UN53
Vertical path
sensor
PS33
J5108LH
J6065L
1
2
J6074D
J6073DH
1
J6073L
1
2
J6074DH
J6074L
J6089
J6090
J6075
J6076
J6096
PS18
Registration
sensor
J6073D
J6065DH
SL
1
J5083L
1
5
J6065D
J5108L
J5038DH
J6064DH
J5108D
J5097LH
PS45
Front door sensor
Second delivery
tray full sensor
PS39
Reverse
sensor
PS42
Second delivery
sensor
SL5
First delivery
flapper
solenoid
SL
SL
SL6
SL7
Second delivery
flapper
solenoid
Third delivery
flapper
solenoid
PS43
Third delivery
sensor
PS40
Duplex inlet
sensor
10
P.9
F-10-11
XXI
XXII
UN2
10

J212
15
16
17
18
19
FUEXM_B
14
FUEXM_B*
13
+5V
12
FUEXM_A
11
FUEXM_A*
YOBI
10
+5V
YOBI
GND
GND
YOBI
+5V
GND
EX1_SNS
EX_TRAY1_FULL
2_3EX_DOOR_SNS
+5V
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
LOOP2_SNS
J123
GND
DC controller PCB
GND
EX_PAPER_FAN2_ON
UN1
EX_PAPER_FAN2_LOCK
15
FUSER_ENT_SNS
14
LOOP1_SNS
13
+5V
12
GND
11
DUP_SNS
10
+5V
MULTI_SIZE_ANALOG
GND
+5V
GND
MULTI_PAPER_SNS
+5V
GND
MULTI_LAST_SNS
GND
+3.3V
J204
1
FEED_DOOR_SNS
J5003D
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J5003LH
1
J5028D
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
J5003L
J5028DH
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
13
12
14
11
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J5028L
J6062D
J6088
J6070
J6091
J5109D
J5110D
3
J5110LH
J6062DH
1
1
J5099D
J6062L
J5054L
J5099L
PS41
1 2 3
J5068L
J5109LH
FM9
Delivery fan 2
J5109L
First delivery
sensor
J5110L
J5068DH
J5054D
J5068D
J5054DH
J5099DH
9
PS44
First delivery
tray full sensor
J6099
4
4
J6058
J6080D
3
2
2
PS21
J6080L
M22
Fixing delivery motor
J6080LH
J5100
3
PS19
PS47
Right lower
door sensor
Multi-purpose
paper sensor
UN52
Multi-purpose
size sensor
10
J6077
J6081
J6171
3
J6085
J6086
J6087
PS38
PS35
PS36
Duplex paper
sensor
Fixing arch
sensor 1
Fixing arch
sensor 2
PS34
Fixing inlet
sensor
P.10
F-10-12
XXII
XXIII
UN2
16
17
18
19
3.3V
15
20
21
+3.3R
14
SEESAW
13
GND
12
SUB_THRM3
11
GND
10
SUB_THRM2
GND
SUB_THRM1
MAIN_THRM
GND
GND
THRM_CNNT
GND
GND
HV3_DC_VS
13
HV3_DC_CS
12
GND
11
+5V
10
+5V
GND
FM_SHUT_HP_SNS
+5V
GND
FM_SHUT_POS_SNS
+5V
+12V_IL_HV
J112
4
GND
FUSER_KAIJYO_SNS
GND
DC controller PCB
J216
1
UN1
J657
UN18
J5026D
HVT3 PCB
13
12
11
10
7
7
6
8
5
9
4
10
3
11
2
12
1
13
J5026DH
J5026L
J5036D
25
24
23
22
21
20
HV_TR2_CV_PWM
HV_TR2_REV_PWM
10
INNER_EX_SNS
19
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
13
12
14
11
15
10
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J5036LH
J5061DH
J5036L
J5075D
23
1
J5075L
22
21
20
4
19
5
18
6
17
7
16
8
15
9
14
10
13
11
12
12
11
13
10
14
9
15
8
16
7
17
6
18
5
19
4
20
3
21
2
22
1
23
J5075LH
J5061D
J5012DB_[0:12]
J5012DA
J5061L
10
11
12
10
11
12
J5012DA_[0:12]
J5012DB
J5012DWH
J5012LA
FT3
J5012LB
FT4
12
11
10
12
11
10
J5012LB_[0:12]
J5012LA_[0:12]
SW1
J5012LWH
J5060D
6
J42D
J5060DH
J42DH
10
J6101
J6104
2
1
1
Inner delivery
sensor
10
PS30
Fixing pressure
sensor
PS32
Shutter
position
sensor
10
J42L
J6103
J6102
PS37
J5060L
PS31
TH1
Shutter
HP sensor
Main thermistor
P.11
F-10-13
XXIII
XXIV
M28
Process cartridge
fan (front)
2
4
3
3
J6123LH
3
J6060D
CL1
J6123D
3
3
J6060DH
2
2
M
2
J6082
J6083
1 2 3
M16
M17
Cassette 1 pickup
motor
PS20
Cassette 2 pickup
motor
M
1 2 3
J6072L
2
2
FM2
Fixing heat
exhaust fan 2
J6158
J6157
J6155
J6156
Right door sensor
J6072D
J6072DH
J6056L
J6056DH
J6056D
CL
J6097
Fixing heat
exhaust fan 1
Duplex feed
motor
Registration motor
SL
FM1
M20
M19
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid
Multi-purpose
M18
pickup clutch Multi-purpose motor
J6123L
J6060L
4
2
1 2 3
SL4
PS29
M
3
FM10
Laser shutter motor
10
J6066L
J6057L
J6067L
J6067DH
J6066DH
J6057DH
J6066D
J6067D
J5004
J6057D
J5049LH
J5049L
1
11
J5049D
10
10
J5086LH
11
J5086L
22
23
24
25
CST2M_B*
21
CST2M_B
20
CST1M_B*
19
CST2M_A*
18
CST1M_B
17
CST2M_A
16
CST1M_A*
15
CST1M_A
14
GND
13
+5V
12
R_DOOR_SNS
11
GND
10
FUSER_EX_B_FA N _O N
FUSER_EX_B_FAN_LOCK
FUSER_EX_A_FAN_LOCK
FUSER_EX_A_FAN_ON
GND
DUPM_B*
DUPM_B
DUPM_A*
DUPM_A
REGIM_B*
11
REGIM_B
10
MULTI_AUTO_SL
REGIM_A*
+5V
+24V_IL
LS_SHUTM_HP_SNS1
REGIM_A
GND
MULTIM_OUT_B
PCRG_FAN_F_LOCK
MULTIM_OUT_B*
GND
MULTIM_OUT_A*
PCRG_FAN_F_ON
+24V_IL
LS_SHUTM_B*
MULTIM_OUT_A
LS_SHUTM_B
J214
MULTI_CL_ON
LS_SHUTM_A*
LS_SHUTM_A
J5086D
J215
J213
UN2
Pickup feeding driver PCB
J207
10
11
12
13
COOL_R_FAN_LOCK
2ND_TR_EX_FAN_ON
14
15
2N D _TR_EX_FA N _LO C K
GND
GND
COOL_R_FAN_ON
COOL_F_FAN_LOCK
GND
COOL_F_FAN_ON
EX_PAPER_FAN1_PWM
24V
GND
19
FM_SHUTM_B*
+5V
18
FM_SHUTM_B
17
FM_SHUTM_A*
16
FM_SHUTM_A
15
GND
14
PATCH_CTRL
13
AD_S
REGI_R_GAIN0
12
AD_P
11
PATCH_LEDON
10
GND
REGI_R_GAIN1
+5V
REGI_R_LEDON
REGI_F_GAIN0
GND
REG_R_S
REGI_F_GAIN1
+5V
REG_F_S
J218
2
REGI_F_LEDON
J5048D
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
J5048L
19
J5034D
J5048LH
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
J5034LH
J5034L
J5046D
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
J5046DH
19
J5046L
J6061D
J6059D
J6059DH
2
1
3
1
J6059L
J6068D
J6061DH
2
2
2
2
J6071D
J6069DH
J6068L
J6061L
J6069D
J6068DH
3
1
2
2
J6069L
1 2 3
1 2 3
J6071DH
J6071L
1 2 3
M
6
J6106
J6107
J6108
M27
Shutter motor
UN47
Patch sensor
(front)
10
UN48
Patch sensor
(rear)
FM7
FM5
Delivery fan 1
Fixing cooling
fan (front)
UN49
FM6
Fixing cooling
fan (rear)
FM8
Secondary transfer
exhaust fan
Patch sensor
(center)
P.12
F-10-14
XXIV
XXV
PIN1
GND
SIN-21T-1.8S
MT18
UN2
J5096L
J205
J905
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
+24V_IL
31
TNR_DET_K
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
J5051L
24V_IL
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
1
4
SOLD20
TNR_SNS_CNT_Y
+24V_IL
TNR_DET_Y
3
2
GND
J601LH
GND
J900
MT31
TS5
ATR sensor
(Y)
SOLD21
1
1
11
10
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
J6150
2
J6111D
+24V
UN20
WTNR_MTR_GND
WTNR_MTR_ON
WTNR_MTR_FG
CNNT
(CZ)
+24V
+24V
CNNT
+24V
CNNT
CNNT
WTNR_DET_LEDON
WTNR_DET
P5V
J6149
Recycle toner sensor PCB
J6148
Y pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
UN21
J6147
M pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
UN25
GND
PEXP_LEDON_Y
WTNR_BOX_DET
J6110
CNNT
C pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
UN23
J6115
J602
J6111DH
J601
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+12V
PEXP_LEDON_M
PEXP_LEDON_BK
GND
J6117
CNNT
PEXP_LEDON_C
J603
3
PEXP_LEDON_M
15
14
13
12
11
10
J600
GND
PEXP_LEDON_Y
UN27
J755LB_[0:15]
PEXP_LEDON_C
J6119
CNNT
J604
J755LA_[0:16]
J755LA
J755L
Bk pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
2
2
PEXP_LEDON_K
UN29
J755LB
Drum
J6121
CNNT
J606
J755DA
J755D
New/old
detection
fuse (Y)
Developing
assembly(Y)
J755DA_[0:16]
J755DB
UN56
PIN6
Developing assembly
J755DB_[0:15]
New/old
detection
fuse (M)
Developing
assembly(M)
UN43
MT32
UN57
PIN5
J6114
J5093LH
New/old
detection
fuse (C)
UN44
ATR sensor
(M)
MT28
J5093L
J5093D
J902
J601L
TS6
J6116
GND
J5094LH
PCRG_NEW_Y
TNR_SNS_CNT_Y
TNR_DET_Y
PCRG_NEW_M
21
22
23
24
25
GND
1
26
GND
2
27
TNR_DET_M
3
28
29
30
TNR_SNS_CNT_M
J5051DH
31
TNR_DET_M
+24V_IL
UN58
PIN4
MT27
J5094D
TNR_SNS_CNT_M

Developing
assembly(C)
MT30
J5094L
J903
5
PCRG_NEW_C
J5051D
TNR_SNS_CNT_C
TNR_DET_C
10
PCRG_NEW_BK
11
10
TNR_SNS_CNT_BK
12
11
TNR_DET_BK
13
12
14
13
J5050LH
14
J5050L
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
SOLD19
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
UN19
14
13
12
11
10
ATR sensor
(C)
J6118
UN45
TS7
15
24V_IL
16
15
16
GND
J5095LH
10
11
10
12
11
13
12
14
13
15
14
16
15
17
16
18
17
19
MT29
20
21
22
23
24
GND
New/old
detection
fuse (Bk)
Developing
assembly(Bk)
MT26
24V_IL
GND
TNR_CTRL_K
TNR_ANLG_K
TNR_CTRL_C
TNR_ANLG_C
PCRG_NEW_BK
TNR_CTRL_M
TNR_ANLG_M
PCRG_NEW_C
TNR_CTRL_Y
TNR_ANLG_Y
GND
PCRG_NEW_M
PCRG_NEW_DET_Y
GND
24V_IL
PRE_EXP_LED_Y
PRE_EXP_LED_K
PRE_EXP_LED_C
PRE_EXP_LED_M
GND
GND
+12V
WASTE_TNRM_FG
WASTE_TNRM_ON
5V
WASTE_TNR_LED_ON
WASTE_TNR_DET_SNS
WASTE_BOX_SET_SNS
25
TNR_DET_C
26
27
+24V_IL
3
J601D
GND
TNR_SNS_CNT_C
28
J901
J6120
J5095D
J904
UN59

PIN3
J5095L
29
UN46
SOLD18
J5096LH
J5050D
30
GND
E
31
TS8
ATR sensor
(Bk)
GND
GND
MT25
J5096D
TNR_SNS_CNT_K
10
17
J605
UN24
Y pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
UN26
M pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
UN28
C pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
UN30
Bk pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
J6111L
M26
Recycle toner stirring motor
10
P.13
F-10-15
XXV
XXVI
SW7
SW6
Cassette 1 size
switch (B)
SW9
Cassette 1 size
switch (A)
J6125
J6126
SW8
Cassette 2 size
switch (B)
10
Cassette 2 size
switch (A)
J6127
J6128
J5073L
J5074L
J5074LH
11
J5074D
10
10
11
10
11
11
10
J5073LH
J5073D
16
17
GND
15
GND
14
CST2_SIZE_0
13
CST2_SIZE_1
12
CST2_SIZE_2
11
CST2_SIZE_3
10
GND
CST2_SIZE_4
CST2_SIZE_5
CST2_SIZE_6
CST2_SIZE_7
GND
CST1_SIZE_2
CST1_SIZE_0
CST1_SIZE_3
CST1_SIZE_1
GND
CST1_SIZE_4
CST1_SIZE_6
CST1_SIZE_5
CST1_SIZE_7
18
19
20
21
J234
UN3

J235
20
21
22
23
24
25
+5V
19
GND
18
+5V
17
GND
16
+5V
15
GND
14
1TR_ON_POSI_SNS
13
+5V
12
GND
11
1TR_OFF_POSI_SNS
10
+5V
GND
ITB_YORI_SNS4
+5V
GND
ITB_YORI_SNS3
+5V
+5V
GND
ITB_YORI_SNS2
GND
29
ITB_YORI_SNS1
28
GND
27
GND
+5V
26
+24V
25
CST2_PICKUP_SL
24
CST2_RETRY_SNS
23
+5V
22
GND
21
GND
20
CST2_LEVEL_B_SNS
19
+5V
18
+5V
16
CST2_LEVEL_A_SNS
17
GND
15
GND
14
CST2_PAPER_SNS
13
+5V
12
+24V
11
CST1_PICKUP_SL
10
+5V
CST1_RETRY_SNS
GND
GND
CST1_LEVEL_B_SNS
+5V
+5V
CST1_LEVEL_A_SNS
GND
GND
J237
ITB_STR_HP_SNS
CST1_PAPER_SNS
J5011D
25
J5040D
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
J6131
J6133D
J6132
10
PS51
PS52
Cassette 1
paper level
sensor B
24
23
22
21
12
2
1
J6134
J6133DH
J6133L
J6135
J6136
PS55
Cassette 1
pre-registration
sensor
SL2
Cassette 1
pickup solenoid
J6138D
J6137
SL
Cassette 1
paper level
sensor A
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
12
13
14
20
19
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
13
11
15
12
14
11
10
10
10
16
11
15
11
J5065L
PS49
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J5052DH
25
J5052L
J5065LH
14
J6026
Cassette 1
paper sensor
18
J5062DH
J5064L
19
J5052D
J5065D
14
J6130
20
J5062D
J5064D
J6129
21
J5040L
25
22
J5011LH
1
J5064LH
23
J5040DH
J5011L
1
24
J6138DH
J6138L
J6027
12
J5062L
J6029
J6028
J6030
PS24
ITB steering
sensor
PS25
PS26
ITB
ITB
displacement displacement
sensor 1
sensor 2
PS27
PS50
PS53
Cassette 2
paper level
sensor A
PS54
PS56
PS28
ITB
ITB
displacement displacement
sensor 3
sensor 4
SL
Cassette 2
paper sensor
J6031
3
SL3
PS22
J6032
3
PS23
Primary
Primary
transfer
transfer
detachment detachment
sensor 1
sensor 2
Cassette 2
Cassette 2
Cassette 2
paper level pre-registration pickup solenoid
sensor B
sensor
P.14
F-10-16
XXVI
XXVII
10
TEN_KEY
E
2
TTP
(J3002)
J8302
1
J3001
10
10
11
12
13
D
9
J8308
12
11
10
J8309
( J1008)
( J1009)
1
J8006
J8202
7
10
(J2002)
(J1006)
4
4
HUB
19
19
18
18
16
16
17
17
15
15
14
14
9
8
6
SUBKEY UNIT
5
4
J8007
J1
(J1007)
(J1003)
CPU
J4001
12
11
10
J8003
11
12
10
13
13
LCD
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
J9001
J811
J4002
1
16
17
(J5001)
Inverter PCB
2
1
(J1002)
VOLUME_KEY
GND
J8002
12V
Relay Board
GND
CN1M
10
P.15
F-10-17
XXVII
XXVIII
G4FAX board-G1
10
UI
Invertor
(Option C)
(CMJ only)
Coinvender
Copy card
reader
(option B)
or
IPSEC
(Option)
YONRIZER
(PCI-Bridge)
(option)
or
(no use)
J5006
J2014
J5010
J5013
J5005
CC-VI
USB-FLASH
PCI-ex I/F
USB(H)
SC kit(TBD)
J5003
USB(D)
USB
Ethernet
J2045
J2041
KEY
Device
Port Hub
(option)
FM13
Controller
fan 3
or
SATAFLASH
E
Large
Capacity
HDD
(option)
RSConv
Touch
Panel
CPU
(USA only)
W-LAN
(Option A)
LCD
(option A)
CCM10/3S
E
J2043
J5000
J5004
Serial I/F
ISOLDE-A(IA-L)
J5001
J2031
J2032
J5019
J5012
or
FM11
J105
J107
HDD
mirroring
(option A)
SATA
J109
J111
FM12
Controller fan 2
DC controller PCB
POSTPONE I/F
TPM
(dealer only)
KEY
J6172
HDD cooling fan
DDR2
DIMM0
ECO-ID
UN1
J102
J6173D
DDR2
DIMM1
(option)
Controller fan 1
IRIGOLETTO-A
FM14
LED
(option)
J103
HDD 1
(option)
HDD 1
J108
SATA
HDD 0
(standerd)
J104
J110
J6174DH
J14
CARMEN-A(CL4)
J1xxx
J1000
J16
J18
J17
J11
J13
DDR2
DIMM
DDR2
DIMM
J12
J1010
J3003
image PRESS A
or
12V
3.3R
Debug SRAM
MINERVA
(MDS)
FRAM
Counter
DDR2
DIMM
GIOVANNI-A
(GU-short)
EFI
controller
(option)
ORFO-A
(00)
(option)
(debug only)
R-CON
EMU
(EFI F-Link)
Super G3FAX board-AE1
Connection Exsample
EFI I/F
12V
Cable
(option A)
Cardedge
Board to
Board
(option B)
1
2
EFI controller
(embedded)
AC
or
EFI controller
(server)
AC
Ethernet
Ethernet
12V
10
P.16
F-10-18
XXVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
XXIX
List of User Mode

Environment Settings
Paper Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Paper Settings
A5R/STMTR Original Selection
B5/EXEC Original Selection
Specify Multi-Purpose Tray Envelope Type

Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Register Custom Size
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Thin, Plain*, Heavy, Recycled, Color, Pre-punched, Transparency, Tracing, Labels, Tab, Bond, Washi, Envelope, Postcard
A5R,STMTR*
B5,EXEC*
Details/Edit
Name, Category, Basis Weight, Type, Finish, Creep
(Displacement) Correction Adjustment, Color
Duplicate, Delete
On,Off*
On,Off*
S1 - S5
Register/Edit, Delete, Register Name
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
T-10-4
Display Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Default Screen at Startup
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy, Scan and Send, Send & Fax, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox,
Secured Print, Web Browser, Workflow Composer, Remote Scanner, Print Server, Scan Lock Analyzer, Tutorial
Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off*
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel) Default Status Type: Copy/Print*, Send, Receive, Store, Consumables
Status/Log: Job Status*, Log
Details:
Copy/Print & Job Status > Print, Copy
Send & Job Status > Send, Fax
Receive & Job Status > Fax, Forward
Copy/Print & Log > Copy, Printer, Local Print, RX Print, Print Report
Send & Log > Send, Fax
Receive & Log > Fax, Forward
Copy Screen Display Settings
Regular Copy*, Express Copy
Display Fax Function
On*, Off
Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function: On*, Off
Store Location Display Settings
Mail Box: On*, Off
Advanced Box/Network: On*, Off
Memory Media: On, Off*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
XXIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
Item
Setting Description
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off

Language/Keyboard Switch
Display Remaining Paper Message
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Display Original Scanning Cleaning
Area*1
Select Paper Screen Priority
mm/Inch Entry Switch
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Display Remaining Toner Error Message
Clear Remaining Toner Error
XXX
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
On, Off*
Language, Keyboard Layout
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
Simple*, Detailed
mm, inch*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Delete
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
T-10-5
Timer/Energy Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Adjust Time
Date/Time Settings
Time Format
Auto Reset Time
Function After Auto Reset
Auto Sleep Time
Restrict Auto Sleep Time
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Weekly Timer Settings
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Setting Description
00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments (00: 00*)
Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)
Time Zone: GMT -12: 00 to GMT +12: 00 (GMT -05:00*)
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off*
Start Date (Month, Day, Time) (April, 1st, Sunday, 2:00)*
End Date (Month, Day, Time) (October, Final, Sunday, 2:00)*
24 Hour, 12 Hour*
0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments (2minutes*)
Initial Function*, Selected Function
5*, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min.,
2, 3, 4 hours
On, Off*
Low*, High
Sunday to Saturday, 00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments
00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-6
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
XXX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXI
Network
If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the
machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.
In the NetWare or AppleTalk network, the TCP/IP protocol must be used to specify the settings with software other than the control panel of the machine. The setting items are shown below.
Some items can be set using the Remote UI. Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI.
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
User Data List
Confirm Network Connection Set.
Changes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
IP Address Settings
PING Command
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Stateless Address Settings
Manual Address Settings
Setting Description
Can be set in
Remote UI
Plint List
On, Off*
Yes
On*, Off
IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Subnet Mask:0.0.0.0*
Gateway Address:0.0.0.0*
DHCP:On, Off*
RARP:On, Off*
BOOTP:On, Off*
IP Adress:0.0.0.0*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On, Off*
Use Stateless Address:On*, Off
Use Manual Address:On, Off*
Manual Address:IPv6 Address(39characters maximum)
Prefix Length:0 to 128(64*)
Default Router Address(39 characters maximum)
On, Off*
IPv6 Address:(39characters maximum)
48 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use DHCPv6
PING Command
Host Name
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address Settings
IPv4
Primary DNS Server:IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Secondary DNS Server:IP Address:0.0.0.0*
IPv6
Primary DNS Server:IPv6 Address
Secondary DNS Server:IPv6 Address
DNS Host/Domain Name Settings
IPv4
Host Name:47 characters maximum
Domain Name:47 characters maximum
IPv6
Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4:On, Off*
Host Name:47 characters maximum
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXI
Item
IPv4
IPv6
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution
WINS Server Address
Node Type
Scope ID
LPD Print Settings
LPD Print Settings
LPD Banner Page*1
RAW Print Settings
RAW Print Settings
Bidirectional
Communication
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP
Polling Interval
NTP Server Address
Check NTP Server
FTP Print Settings
Use FTP Print
User
Password
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD Print
Use WSD Browsing
Use Multicast Discovery
Use FTP PASV Mode
Use FTP PASV Mode
BMLinkS Settings
Use BMLinkS
Discovery Sending Interval
Location Information
IPP Print Settings
IPP Print Settings
Use SSL
Use Authentication
User
Password
Multicast Discovery Settings
Setting Description
XXXII
Can be set in
Remote UI
DNS Dynamic Update:On, Off*

DNS Dynamic Update:On, Off*
Register Stateless Address:On, Off*
Register Manual Address:On, Off*
Register Stateless Address:On, Off:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Auto Set, display only
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
On, Off*
Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours)(24hours*)
IP address or host name
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
User name for FTP server login (24 characters maximum) (guest*)
Password for FTP server login (24 characters maximum) (7654321*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
On, Off*
30 mins*, 1, 3, 6, 12, 24 hrs
Country / Region
Company/Org. Name, Dept. Name, Bldg. Name, Floor No., Block Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On* Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for FTP server login (24 characters maximum) (guest*)
Password for FTP server login (24 characters maximum) (7654321*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXII
XXXIII
Item
Response
Scope name
Use HTTP
Use Web DAV Server
SSL Settings
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Display Use Location
Proxy Settings
Use proxy
Server Address
Port Number
Use Proxy within the Same
Domain
Set Authentication
Use Proxy Auth.
User Name
Password
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IPSec Settings
Use IPSec
Receive Non-policy Packets
Edit
Delete
Policy On, Off
Register
Policy Name
Register: Selector
Settings
IKE Settings
IPSec Network
Settings
NetWare Settings
Can be set in
Remote UI
Setting Description
On* Off
Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery
(32 characters maximum)
On* Off
On, Off*
Functions using SSL encrypted communications
Yes
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Cert Thumbprint/
Certificate
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Yes
On, Off*
IP address or FQDN(128 characters maximum)
1to 65535(80*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local Address:
All IP Addresses*/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings
Remort Address:
All IP Addresses*,All IPv4Address,All IPv6Address,IPv4Manual Settings,IPv6 Manual Settings
Port: Specify by Port Number*/Specify by Service Name
IKE mode : Main*/Aggressive
Authentication Method : Pre-Shared Key Method*/Digital sig. Method
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Validity : Time(1to65535minuites)(480minuites*)
Validity : Size(1to65535 MB)(65535 MB*)
PFS : On, Off*
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Connect. Mode : Transport, display only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXIII
XXXIV
Item
Use NetWare
Frame Type
IPX External Network Number
Node Number
Print Service
Packet Signature
Bindery Pserver Settings
Print Server Name
File Server Name
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
Rprinter Settings
Print ServerName
File ServerName
Printer Number
NDS PServer Settings
Print ServerName
Tree Name
Context
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
NPrinter Settings
Print ServerName
Tree Name
Context
Printer Number
AppleTalkSettings
Use Apple Talk
Phase
Service Name
Zone
Print Mode
SMB Server Settings
Use SMB Server
Can be set in
Remote UI
Setting Description
On, Off*
Auto Detect*/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/Ethernet SNAP
Bindery PServer,R Printer,NDS Pserver*,Nprinter
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
0to15(0*)
1to15seconds(5sedonds*)
0to255(0*)
1to20KB(20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/Minimize form changes within
print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0to15(0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
0to254(0*)
1to255seconds(5seconds*)
0to255(0*)
3to20KB(20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/Minimize form changes within
print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0to254(0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Phase 2(fixing)
Both*, Spool, Direct
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXIV
XXXV
Item
ServerName
Workgroup
Comment
LM Announce
SMB Printer Settings
Use SMB Print
Printer Name
SMB Auth. Settings
Use SMB Authentication
Authentication Type
SNMP Settings
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host
Use SNMPv1
Dedicated Community Settings
Dedicated Community
MIB Access Permission
Community Name1Settings
Community Name1
Community Name
Community Name2 Settings
Community Name2
Community Name
Use SNMPv3
User Settings
User On, Off
Register
Details/Edit
Delete
Context Settings
Register
Edit
Delete
Use Spool Function
Use Spool Function
Startup Settings
Startup Settings
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect
Communication Mode
Can be set in
Remote UI
Setting Description
15 characters maximum(Canon+represents the
last six digits of a MAC address)
15 characters maximum(WORKGROUP*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
13 characters maximum(PRINTER)
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
NTLMv1*,NTLMv2*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
Read/write, Read Only
On*, Off
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name(32 characters maximum)(public*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name(32 characters maximum)(public2*)
On, Off*
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/Encryption Password
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/Encryption Password
Context Name(32 characters maximum)
Context Name(32 characters maximum)
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
30 to 300 seconds (30*)
Yes
On*, Off
Half Duplex*/Full Duplex
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXV
XXXVI
Item
Ethernet Type
MAC Address
IEEE802.1X Settings
Use IEEE802.1X
User
Password
TLS Settings
Use TLS
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
TTLS Settings
Use TTL
TTLS Settings
PEAP Settings
Use PEAP
Same User Name as Login
Name
User Name
Password
Firewall Settings
IPv4 Address Filter
Send Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
Receive Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
IPv6 Address Filter
Send Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6Address
RecieveFilter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6Address
MACAddressFilter
Send Filter
Can be set in
Remote UI
Setting Description
10 Base-T*,100 Base-TX,1000 Base-T
Display only
Yes
-
On, Off*
Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication
Password of the user to be authenticated with
IEEE802.1X authentication
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Cert.Thumbprint/

Certificate
Displays what the key pair is being used for.
Yes
On, Off*
MSCHAPv2*,PAP
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
XXXVII
Item
Can be set in
Remote UI
Setting Description
Use Filter
Default Policy
MACAddress
RecieveFilter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MACAddress
IP Address Block Log
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Time, Category, IP Address, Result
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-7
External Interface
* Default Settings
Item
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
USB Settings
Use USB Device
Use USB Host
Use MEAP Driver for USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-8
Accessibility
* Default Settings
Item
Key Repetition Settings
Reversed Display (Color)
Setting Description
Standard*, Slightly Slow, Slow
On, Off*
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
T-10-9
XXXVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
XXXVIII
Adjust Image Quality
* Default Setting
Item
Correct Density
Correct Shading
Correct Color Mismatch
Full Color Printing Vividness Settings
Fine Adjust Zoom
Color Balance
Fine Adjust Density
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Quick Adjust: Press [Start]
Full Adjust: Automatic after the machine prints and scans four sets of test pages
Copy/Scan and Store (Mail Box), Black Send/Scan and Store (other than Mail Box), Color Send/Scan and Store (Other
Than Mail Box)Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels(5levels*)
Shading Correction: Visual Correction, Shading Correction: Print Server Correction
Press [Start]
Standard, Level 1, Level 2
X:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 %(0.1 % increments)(0%*)
Y:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 %(0.1 % increments)(0%*)
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
-8 to +8 (0*)
High (Dark Area), Medium. Low (Light Area)
-8 to +8 (0*)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-10
Adjust Action
* Default Setting
Item
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Change Fold/Stitch Position*
Adjust Fold Position*
Setting Description
Press [Start]
305x457mm / A3, 11x17 / B4, LGL / A4R, LTRR
-2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments(0mm)
305x457mm / A3, 11x17 / B4, LGL / A4R, LTRR
-2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments(0mm)
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
T-10-11
Maintenance
* Default Setting
Item
Clean Inside Main Unit
Clean Feeder*1
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method*1
Setting Description
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Press [Done]
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
T-10-12
XXXVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
XXXIX
Function Settings
Common
* Default Settings
*2 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
*3 Indicates items that cannot be used with the default setting. Also, the Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES is necessary. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Item
Paper Feed Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Multi-Purpose Tray
Other
Copy
Feed Method Switch
Suspended Job Timeout On,
Setting Description
Copy, Printer, Access Stored File, Receive/Fax, Other
On, Off*
On*, Off
Consider Paper Type : On*, Off
Speed Priority*, Print Side Priority
On, Off*
0 - 999 mins (5*)
Paper Output Settings

Output Tray Settings*1
If the Inner 2 Way Tray-F1 Is Attached
Tray A
Copy*, Mail Box*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
If the Inner 2 Way Tray-F1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
Tray A
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray C
Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
If the Inner Finisher-A1 and Inner Finisher Additional Tray- A1 Are Attached
Tray A
Tray B
If the Inner Finisher-A1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
Tray A
Tray B
If the Inner Finisher-A1, Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
Tray A
Tray B
Tray C
If the Staple Finisher-C1 or Booklet Finisher-C1, Buffer Pass Unit-G1, and External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 Are Attached
Tray A
Tray B
Tray C
Tray Home Position
Tray A*,Tray B,Off
Offset Jobs*1
On*, Off
Job Separator Between Jobs
On, Off* Change: Paper Drawer
Job Separator Between Copies
On, Off* Change: Paper Drawer , Copies: 1 - 9999
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
Yes
Yes
No
XXXIX
Item
Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray
Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output
Print Settings
Print Priority
Copy
Printer
Access Stored File, Receive, Fax, Other
Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to Black
Local Print Default Settings
Select Paper
No. of Prints
Finishing
If No Finisher Is Attached or Only the Inner
2 Way Tray- F1 is Attached
If the Inner Finisher-A1 Is Attached
If the Inner Finisher-A1 and Inner Finisher
Additional Tray- A1 Are Attached
If the Staple Finisher-C1 or Booklet
Finisher-C1, and Buffer Pass Unit-G1 Are
Attached
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
On*, Off
On, Off*
No
Yes
1*,2,3
1,2*,3
1,2,3*
Text Priority*, Photo Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
All Paper Sources, Auto*

1 to 9,999 sets(1set*)
No
No
No
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Rotate Collate,Group (Same Pages), Rotate Group
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group(Same Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner)
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group(Same Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner)
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group

(Same Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top
Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double:
Left, Right)
If the Staple Finisher-C1 or Booklet
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group
Finisher-C1, Buffer Pass Unit-G1, and
(Same Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 Are Attached Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double:
Left, Right), Hole Punch
2-Sided Printing
On, Off*
Book Type, Calendar Type
On, Off*
Delete File After Printing
On, Off*
Merge and Print
Output Report Default Settings
On, Off*
2-Sided Printing
Register, Delete, Check Print, Details
Register Form
Superimpose Image Quality Priority
Auto*, Original Priority, Form Priority
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark
Register,Edit, Delete
On, Off*
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings
Number Option ON
ID/User Name
On, Off*
Date
On, Off*
Text
On, Off*
Align Left*, Align Center, Align Right
Alignment Settings
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock*1
Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
Copy
Do Not Set*, Forced Secure Watermark, Forced Document Scan Lock
Mail Box
XL
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XL
Item
Printer
Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
Adjust Background/Character Contrast
Standard Value Settings
Relative Contrast
Standard Contrast
Latent Area Density:
Adjust TL Code
Dot Size
Dot Density
Relative Contrast
Sample Print
Standard Value Settings
Initialize
Scan Settings
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray*1
Feeder Jam Recovery Method*1
Scanner Noise Settings*1
Streak Prevention
Black Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority
LTRR/STMT Original Detection
Remote Scan Data Compression Ratio
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Auto Online
Auto Online
Generate File
High Compression Image Quality Level
Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode
Image Level in Text Mode
OCR (Text Searchable)Settings
Smart Scan
Num. of Char. for File Name Setting
Trace & Smooth Settings
Outline Graphics
Graphics Recognition Level
Background Image Level
OOXML Settings
Color Image Recognition Leve
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
Do Not Set*, Printer Driver Secure Watermark, Printer Driver Document Scan Lock
Black, Cyan, Magenta, Print Settings, Test Print
7 to +7 (Black : -1, Cyan : 0,Magenta : 1)
1 to 64 (Black : 8, Cyan : 12, Magenta : 12)
1 to 36 (Black : 5, Cyan : 7, Magenta : 7)
Magenta, Black*
1 to 7
(imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045 Series > Black: 4*, Magenta: 4*)
Standard*, Rough
-7 to +7
1 to 64
-
XLI
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
When Start is pressed*, When Performing from Panel

From 1st Page*, From Stopped Original
Fast*, Quiet
On*, Off
Speed Priority*, Image Quality Priority
Distinguish Manually, Use LTRR*, Use STMT
High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data Size Priority, Normal, Image Quality Priority

Yes
Yes
On*, Off
1 to 24*
Yes
Yes
On, Off
Normal, Moderate, High
Yes
Yes
Yes
Do Not Recognize,Normal, High
Yes
XLI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy
Item
Color Image Line Width Recognition
Background Image Level
Specify Minimum PDF Version
Format PDF to PDF/A
Optimize PDF for Web
Time Stamp Settings*1
Basic Settings
Server IP Address
Deleting License File
Password for License File
Restrictions
Enter Password to Send
Password
Rights Management Server Settings*3
Server URL
User Name
Password
Use Password for Each User
Document Scan Lock Operational Settings
Use Document Scan Lock/Embedded Info.
Use Document Scan Lock
Multiple Embedded Information Action
Restrict Options
XLII
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
On, Off
Do Not Specify*, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7
On, Off
On, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Max 128 characters

4 to 20 alphanumeric characters
No
No
No
On, Off*
Max 32 characters
No
No
Max 128 characters

Max 128 characters
Max 24 characters
On, Off*
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
Continue Job, Cancel Job*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-13
Copy
* Default Settings
Item
Register [Options] Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Set Express Copy Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Register/Edit, Delete (M1 to M9), Check Content

Register, Initialize
No
No
Finishing*, Unassigned
2-Sided*, Unassigned
Density* Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
Unassigned*
No
No
No
No
No
Unassigned*
Unassigned*
Unassigned*
Unassigned*
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy
XLII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 6
Auto Collate
Auto Orientation
Select Color Settings for Copy
Use Auto(Color/Black)
Use Full Color
XLIII
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Unassigned*
Unassigned*
On* Off
On* Off
No
No
Yes
Yes
On* Off
On* Off
Yes
Yes
T-10-14
Printer
* Default Settings
Item
Print Report
PCL
Configuration Page
Font List
PS
Configuration Page
Font List
RGB Test Page
CMY Test Page
RGB Color Chart
CMYK Color Chart
Printer Settings
Restricting Printer Jobs
PDL Selection (Plug-nplay)*1
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Print
Print
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Print
Print
Print
Print
Print
Print
Custom Settings, Utility
On, Off*
UFR II,PCL5e, PCL5c, PCL6, PS3, FAX
T-10-15
Send
* Default Setting
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*5 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
Item
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Setting Description
Print
Print
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
XLIII
Item
Register Favorite Settings Edit Favorite Settings
Show Comment
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings
Change Default Screen
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
TX Report
Report with TX Image
Report with Color TX Image
Communication Activity Report
Auto Print (100 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
TX Terminal ID
Delete Failed TX Jobs

Retry Times
Data Compression Ratio
YCbCr TX Gamma Value
Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending
Limit New Destinations
Fax
E-mail
I-Fax
File
Always Add Device Signature to Send*1
Restrict File Formats
E-mail/Ifax Settings
Register Unit Name
SMTP Receive
POP
SMTP Server
E-mail Address
POP Server
POP Address
POP Password
POP Interval
POP AUTH Method
XLIV
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Register/Edit, Delete (M1 to M18), Check Content
On, Off*
On*, Off
Standard*, Address Book, One-touch, Favorite Settings
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
2-Sided*, No Settings
Different Size Originals*, No Settings
For Error Only*,On, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59(00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Print*, Do Not Print
Printing Position: Inside, Outside*
Display Destination Unit Name: On*, Off
Telephone # Mark*1: Fax*, TEL
On*, Off
0 to 5times(3times*)
Compact, Normal*, Low Ratio
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On*, Off
On* Off
Server name or IP Address(48characters maximum)
Server name or IP Address(48characters maximum)
0* to 99(If the interval is set to 0, the incoming e-mail is not checked automatically.)
Standard*/APOP/POP AUTH
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XLIV
Item
POP Authentication before Sending
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)
User
Password
Allow SSL(POP)
Allow SSL(SMTP Send)
Display Auth. Screen When Send
Allow SSL(SMTP Receive)
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Default Subject
Use SMTP Authentication for Each User
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply
Set Authorized User Destination to Sender
Allow Sending to Unregistered Destinations
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Use Send via Server
Allow MDN Not via Server
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Restrict TX Destination Domains
Permitted Domains
Autocomplete for Entering E-mail Addresses
Fax Settings
Default Screen
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Register Sender Name (TTI)
Off-Hook Alarm
ECM TX
Set Pause Time
Auto Redial
Redial Times
Redial Interval
Redial When TX Error
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Fax TX Report
Report with TX Image
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print (40 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Setting Description
XLV
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for SMTP authentication(64 characters maximum)
Password for SMTP authentication(32 characters maximum)
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Always SSL,On, Off*
0=(Off)/1 to 99 MB(3MB*)
40 characters maximum(Attached Image*)
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
1 to 99hours(24hours*)
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete
On*, Off
Yes
No
Yes
Standard*, Address Book

No
No
Density*, No Settings
Original Type*, No Settings
2-Sided Original*, No Settings
Different Size Originals*, No Settings
01 to 99 : Register/Edit, Delete
On*, Off
On*, Off
1 to 15seconds(2seconds*)
On, Off
1 to 15times(2times*)
2 to 99minutes(2minutes*)
Error and 1st page*, All pages, Off
On*, Off
For Error Only*,On, Off
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
XLV
Item
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
Set Line
Register User Telephone No.
Register Unit Name
Select Line Type
Line (2 to 8)
Select TX Line
TX Start Speed
FIS Switch
PIN Code Access
Line1
Line2*8
Line3*9
Line4*9
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers
Allow Fax Driver TX
Remote Fax TX Settings
Remote Fax Server Address
TX Timeout
Select TX Line
Select Priority Line
Remote Fax Settings
Use Remote Fax
Setting Description
XLVI
Device Information
Delivery Available
00 : 00 to 23 : 59(00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
20 digits maximum
Pulse, Tone*
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 2
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are
installed:
Line 2, Line 3, Line 4
If the Super G3 FAX Board is installed:
Line 1: Priority TX, Prohibit TX*
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are
installed:
33600 bps*,14400 bps,9600 bps,7200 bps,4800 bps,2400 bps
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Host name or the IP address (48 characters maximum)

1 to 99hours(24hours*)
1 to 4Line(1*)
Auto*, Line1,Line2*10,Line3*10,Line4*10
No
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-16
XLVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
XLVII
Receive/Forward
* Default Setting
*7 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
Receive Type, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List, E-Mail Priority
Item
Output Report
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Print on Both Side
Select Drawer
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
SwitchD
Reduce Fax RX Size
2 On 1 Log
Received Page Footer
YCbCr RX Gamma Value
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors
Forwarding Settings
Receive Tray Settings
Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Set/Register Confidential Fax Inboxes
Register Box Name:
PIN
URL Send Settings
Initialize
Memory RX Inbox PIN
Use Fax Memory Lock*1
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
Divided Data RX Timeout
Always Send Notice for RX Errors
Fax Settings*1
ECM RX
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Print
Print
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On
Reduction Mode: Auto*, Fixed
Reduction %: 75 to 97% (90%*)
Reduction Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Always Print, Store/Print, Off*
Receive Type, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings), Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail
Priority, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*11
00 to 49
Seven digits maximum
Seven digit number
On, Off*
On, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
0 to 99 hours(24hours*)
*On, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*On, Off
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
XLVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
XLVIII
Item
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Select RX Mode
Auto RX*, Fax/Tel Auto Switch

Fax/Tel Auto Switch
Ring Start Time: 0 to 30 sec (8 sec*)
Ring Time: 15 to 300 sec (17 sec*)
F/T Switch Action: End, Receive*
Outgoing Message: On, Off*
On, Off*
On
Remote RX ID: 00 to 99 (25*)
On, Off*
On
F/T Ring Time: 1 to 99 sec (15 sec*)
For Error Only,On, Off*
On*, Off
33600 bps*,14400 bps,9600 bps,7200 bps,4800 bps,2400 bps
20 digits maximum
Remote RX
RX Manual/Auto Switch
Fax RX Report
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
Receive Start Speed
Receive Password
Set Number Display
Line1*1
Line2*1
Line3*1
Line4*1
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
T-10-17
Store/Access Files
* Default Setting
Item
Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings
Settings of Access Stored File
Mail Box Settings
Mail Box Settings
Mail Box No.
Register Box Name
PIN
Time Until Document Auto Delete
URL Send Settings
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Initialize
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Register/Edit, Delete (Up to 9 Set Keys), Check Content

No
No
Register/Edit, Delete (Up to 9 Set Keys), Check Content

No
No
00 to 99
Seven digits
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3*, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days
On, Off*
-
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
XLVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Encrypted Secure Print
Item
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Time Until Document Auto Delete
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Box Security Settings
Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/Restrict Access
Disp. Print When Storing form Printer Driver
Open to Public
Allow to Create Personal Space
WebDAV Server Settings
Authentication Type
Use SSL
Delete All Personal Spaces
Initialize Shared Space
Prohibit Writing from External
Authentication Management
File Formats Allowed for Storing
Network Settings
Network Place Settings
Protocol for External Reference
SMB
WebDAB
Memory Media Settings
Use Scan/Print Function
Use Scan Function
Use Print Function
Setting Description
XLIX
Device Information
Delivery Available
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3*, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days

On, Off*
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
By SMB, By WebDAV, Off*

On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Basic,Off*
On, Off*
Delete
Initialize
On*, Off
On, Off*
Printable Formats Only, Common Office Formats, All
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register, Details, Delete
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
No
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
T-10-18
Encrypted Secure Print

* Default Setting
Item
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs*1
Setting Description
On, Off*
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
T-10-19
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Encrypted Secure Print
XLIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
Set Destination
Set Destination
* Default Setting
Item
Address List
Register Address List Name
Register One-touch
Change Default Display of Address Book
Address Book PIN
Manage Address Book Access Number
Require Password for Exporting Address Book
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Acquire Remote Address Book
Acquire Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Communication Timeout
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Make Remote Address Book Open
Make Remote Address Book Open
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Address Book 1 to 10, One-touch

Print List: Print
Register New Dest., Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name
Register Name
Register/Edit, Delete
Local*, LDAP Server, Remote
Seven digit number
On, Off*
On*, Off
Receive Type, Validate/Invalidate, Register, Details/Edit,
Delete, Forward w/o Conditions, Print List, E-Mail Priority
On* Off
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
IP Address or Host Name (128 characters maximum)
15 to 120seconds (30seconds*)
On*, Off
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
No
Yes
T-10-20
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
LI
Management Settings
User Management
* Default Settings
Item
Setting Description
System Manager Information Settings

System Manager ID
System PIN
System Manager
E-Mail Address
Seven digit number maximum (7654321*)

Seven digit number maximum (7654321*)
Contact Information
Comment
Register PIN
Page Totals
Allow Printer Jobs With Unknown IDs
Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs
Allow Black Copy/ Mail Box Print Jobs
Allow Black Printer Jobs
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions
Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-21
Device Management
* Default Settings
Item
Device Information Settings
Device Name
Location
Set Auto Delivery

Settings/Registration Value
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Delete, Print List

Auto Search/Register
List
Select All
Search Depth (Router): 1 to 8
Display Host Name: On, Off
Start Auto Search
Everyday, Specify Days, Off*
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include,Exclude
LI
Item
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Workflow Composer
Manual Delivery
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Workflow Composer
Restrictions for Receiving Device Info.
Restore Data
Receive Restriction for Each Function
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Workflow Composer
Communication Log
Limited Functions Mode

Limit Functions When Security Key is Off*
Confirm Device Signature Certificate
Check User Signature Certificate
Generate Key
Generate Network Communication Key
Key Name
Signature Algorithm
Key Algorithm
Key Length(bit)
Start Date of Validity
End Date of Validity
Setting Description
LII
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include,Exclude
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Settings/Registration Value,Dept. ID,Address Book,Printer Settings,Paper Information
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Details, Print List, Report Settings
Report Settings
Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off
Specify Print Time: On, Off*
00: 00* to 23:59
Separate Report Type: On, Off*
On, Off*
Partial Functions*, All Functions
Certificate Details: Certificate
Certificate Details: Certificate
No
Yes
No
No
SHA1*, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512
RSA,Display only
512*,1024, 2048, 4096
Month, Date, Year (2000/01/01~2037/12/31)
Month, Date, Year (2000/01/01~2037/12/31)
No
No
No
No
No
No
LII
Item
Setting Description
Country/Region
Country/Region name and code (2 characters maximum)
State
City
Organization
Organization Unit
Common Name
IP address or FQDN (41 characters maximum)
Generate/Update Device Signature Key
Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for this Machine Editing Key Pairs and Server Certificates Confirming a Key Pair and Device Certificate
Certificate Details
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue
Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/
Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Delete
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Certificate Settings: Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for Users*
Certificate Details
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/
Issuer/Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Delete
Certificate Settings: CA Certificate List
Certificate Details
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/
Issuer/Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Delete
Certificate Settings:Register Key and Certificate
Register
Key Name (24 characters maximum)
Password (24 characters maximum)
Delete
Certificate Settings:Register CA Certificate
Register
Delete
Display Asterisks For Confidential Info.
On*, Off
On*, Off
Display Status Before Authentication
On*, Off
Display Log
On
Obtain Job Log From Management Software: Permit,
Do Not Allow*
Audit Log Retrieval
On, Off*
On, Off*
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2
LIII
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-22
LIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LIV
License/Other
* Default Settings
Item
Register License
MEAP Settings
Print System Information
Use SSL
Remote UI
Use SSL
Use Reference Print
Delete Message Board Contents
Remote Operation Settings
Register/Update Software
Install Applications/Options
Software Management Settings
Select Log Display
Test Communication
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
No
Print
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Clear
On, Off*
On: Password (Max 8 characters)
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
License Access Number (4 degits at a time.)
No
Display Update Logs, Display System Logs

-
No
No
No
T-10-23
Data Management
* Default Settings
Item
HDD Data Complete Deletion*
Timing of Deletion
Deletion Mode
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
During Job*, After Job
Overwrite Once With 0 (Null) Data*, Overwrite 1 Time With Random Data, Overwrite 3 Times With Random
Data,DOD Standard
License cannot be reused
Backup TPM Key, Restore TPM Key
No
No
No
No
T-10-24
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LIV
LV
Data
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
Replace Replace Replace DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize
the HDD / the Main the Main roller PCB Cont- the TPM All Data/
All format PCB 1 PCB 2
roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Settings/Registration : Function Settings

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Yes/ Method
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > No
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Forwarding Settings
HDD/
Clear
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Preferences
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
*2
Yes
*3
Adjustment/
Maintenance
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Function Settings
SRAM
(MCON2/
DCON)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
*4
Clear
*5
Yes
*6
Set Destination
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Management Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*7
Printer Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Set Paper Information
HDD
Clear
Clear
Backup by Service
Service function
Address List
Settings / Registration
Appendix > Backup Data
Backup Data
Location
to be
stored
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes/No
Method
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
No
Yes
*1
USB
memory
No
Yes
*1
USB
memory
Yes
Yes
*1
Yes
Yes
*1
SST,
PC
Download Menu
(HDD/USB)
PC
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
PC
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Yes
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
No
No
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*8
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*9
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Default Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
*10
*11
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Shortcut settings for

Options
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
*10
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Previous Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
*10
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Button Size information HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
*12
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Wallpaper Setting
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Yes
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Restrict Quick Menu
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Yes
*1
*12
Yes
*1
*12
Yes
*1
*12
SST
(Meapback)
Button information in
Quick Menu
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Setting items for Quick Menu
Yes
Yes
Setting items for Main Menu
LV
LVI
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
CLEAR
CLEAR
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
Yes
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes/No
Method
Location
to be
stored
Yes
*1
USB memory
Yes
Yes
*1
USB memory
Yes
Yes
*1
USB memory
Yes
Yes
*1
USB memory
Button settings in Main HDD

Menu
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Button settings on the

top of the screen
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Wallpaper Setting for

Main Menu
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Other settings for Main HDD

Menu
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
User Box specification HDD

settings (Register Box
Name, Password, Time
until Document Auto
Erase, Print uponstoring
from the printer driver)
Clear
Clear
Yes
*13
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
Yes
*1
USB memory
Image data of User Box, HDD

Confidential Fax Box,
and System Box Image
Data
Clear
Clear
*29
Yes
*13
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
Yes
*1
USB memory
Data File of Advanced

Box
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*14
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
*15
Yes
USB memory
Advanced box account HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*16
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
*17
SST
(Meapback),
USB memory
PC
Network place setting

information
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
No
Yes
*1
USB memory
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
*13
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
No
No
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
*18
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
SST,
PC
Download Menu
(HDD/USB)
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
License files for MEAP HDD

applications
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Data
Box settings
Advanced box settings
Box settings
Image forms stored in
the Form Composition
mode
PC
Web browser settings

Web Access setting
information
MEAP settings
MEAP application
LVI
LVII
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
CLEAR
CLEAR
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
Yes/No
Method
Location
to be
stored
HDD
User authentication
information registered
in the Local Device
Authentication user
authentication system of
SSO-H (Single Sign-On
H)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SSO-H
PC
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Data saved using MEAP HDD

applications
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*19
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
SMS (Service
Management Service)
password of MEAP
Clear
Clear
*20
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Unsent documents
(documents waiting
to be sent with the
Delayed Send mode)
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2)
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
Job logs
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
HDD
Key Pair and Server
Certificate in Certificate
Settings in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional
Functions screen)
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
HDD
(SRAM
(MCON2))
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
HDD
Universal data settings

setting values
Clear
No
No
No
PC
SST,
Download Menu
(HDD/USB)
-
Key information to be
used for encryption
when TPM is OFF
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2) *21
Clear
*22
Clear
Clear *22
Clear
*22
No
*23
No
No
Key and settings

information to be used
for encryption when
TPM is ON
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2) *24
HDD
TPM
Board
Clear
*25
Clear
Clear
*26
Clear *25
Clear
*25
Yes
*27
Settings/
USB
Registration memory
Management
Settings >
Data
Managemnet
> TPM Settings
No
No
Service mode setting

values (MN-CON)
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Yes
Yes
HDD/
SST,
Download Menu USB
(HDD/USB)
*29

values (DC-CON)
SRAM
(DC-CON)
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
COPIER>
OPTION>
USER>
SMD-EXPT >
ON Only
*28
PC
Yes
Yes
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
DSRAMBUP
PS font
Service Mode
HDD
LVII
Data
LVIII
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function

roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
CLEAR
CLEAR
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
Yes/No

values (R-CON)
EEPROM (R-CON)
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes
Yes
Audit Log
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
Clear
Method
Location
to be
stored
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
RSRAMBUP
SST
(Meapback)
HDD
PC
T-10-25
*1
If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).
*2
The following items are Deleted.

Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Envelope Drawer
Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Paper Selection
Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
*3
An exclusion item:
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > [Adjust Time]/[Date/Time Settings]
*4

Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Feed Method Switch
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Scanner Noise Settings
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Timing to Raise Feeder Tray
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Streak Prevention
*5
*6
The following data are impossible of backup

Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Register Form
Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
*7
The following data are impossible of backup

Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals
*8
Backup is available only "Favorite Settings" in "Scan to Send"
*9
:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine
starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.
*10
*11
If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory except a history, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).
*12
*13
Login System Administrator and do backup.
*14
IIt is possible only when logging in as an administrator user.

When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.
*15
When the optional high-capacity HDD is installed, backup can be done only to USB-HDD.
*16
When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.
*17
*18
Only "favorites of web browser" can be backed improves when You perform individual export of RUI.
*19
Only when MEAP applications have a backup function
LVIII
Data
*20
Since the password is TPM-encrypted and saved, password backed up after all data/settings have been initialized cannot be restored. When all data/settings have been initialized, initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization.
[Reference] Since TPM encryption key is updated when all data/settings are initialized, the password which was backed up cannot be read.
*21
If the backup key information in the HDD is missing, it is automatically recovered from the key in the SRAM (MCON2).
*22
If the key information in the SRAM (MCON2) is missing, it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD.
*21,22
When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time, the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed.
*23
No means is available to back up externally.
*24
An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is ON. After all data/settings are initialized after restart, select "ON" for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting.
*25
If the TPM key information in the SRAM of the HDD or the Main Controller PCB 2 becomes missing, the key information in the SRAM is automatically recovered from the backup of the common key in the HDD. Then the internal state of TPM setting changes to "ON". Note that the TPM setting needs
to be manually changed to "ON" since "OFF" is displayed for UI.
*26
TPM settings becomes "OFF" when all data/settings are initialized.
*27
Backup only against TPM PCB failure is possible. In addition, restoration cannot be done to other machines whose TPM setting is set to "ON".
*28
Backup is possible in SramImg, DSRAMBUP, RSRAMBUP.

When You set it in COPIER>OPTION>USER>SMD-EXPT>ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI.
There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode.
HDD and USB memory can back up Service Mode Settings by backup button.
The contents of Settings/Registration become the object of the collective backup.
The exclusion item refers to "a list of DCM backup exclusion items".
*29
Because clearing MN-CONT changes the memory reception setting to "OFF", the image data saved in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically printed after restart. After a print, it is deleted from a system box.
LIX
T-10-26
DCM backup exclusion items

Preferences
Paper Settings
Display Settings

Register Envelope Drawer
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Erasing the Remaining Toner Error Message
Timer/Energy Settings
Current Time Adjustment
Network
Output Report
TCP/IP Settings
IPSec settings
IEEE802.1X Settings
Accessibility
Adjustment/
Maintenance
Adjust Image Quality

Adjust Action
Function Settings
Maintenance
Common
Printer
Send
Receive/Forward
Store/Access Files
Set Destination
Address Lists
Auto Serarch when using
LDAP Server
Firewall Settings
Voice Navigation Settings
Custom Type > Details/Edit > Change
IP Address Settings (IPv4) > PING Command

IP Address Settings (IPv6) > PING Command
IPP Print Settings
SSL Settings
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IP Address Block Log

Tune Microphone

Conect Shading
Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Change Fold/Stitch Position
Paper Feed Settings
Print Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off

Local Print Default Settings
Form for Superimpose Image
Secure Watermark Settings > Adust Background/Character Contrast
Output Report

Fax User Data List
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
Output Report
Common Settings
Mail Box Settings
Network Settings
Forwarding Settings
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Delete All Personal Spaces
LIX
LX
Management
Settings
User Management
Device Management
Restrict Receiving Device Information
License/Other
Data Management
Limit Function when Security key is off

Register License
MEAP Settings
Back Up
Restore
Back Up/Restore Log
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Page Totals
Print List
Manual Delivery
Resor Data
Communication Log
Register Destination > Auto Serch/Registor
DCM backup exclusion items
Print System Information

Remote UI On/Off
Delete Massage Board Contents
T-10-27
LX
LXI
CHK-TYPE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CHK-TYPE
Group
Partition name
Four same time
FSTDEV
IMG-MNG
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
APL_GEN
TMP_GEN
TMP_FAX
TMP_PSS
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
APL_MEAP
APL_SEND
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
One
Three same time
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Description
HDD Format
Using SST or USB memory
HD-CLEAR
Image data storage area (Box etc)
Management data of image
Image data storage area (for Job archive system)
Thumbnail
Storage area of universal data (Note: For details, see the following list.)
Storage area of universal data (temporary file)
FAX (temporary file)
PSS (temporary file)
PDL-related file storage area (font, registration form, color correction information file for ICCProfile-PDL function)
Firmware storage area (Bootable/MEAP/key/certificate/PDF dictionary/RUI contents/voice dictionary (ICC profile. PS test data.))
MEAP
Address book, Setting for Forwarding
MEAP stored data
System log storage area
Advanced Box area
Area for distribution server
Appendix > Detail of HDD partition
Appendix > Detail of HDD partition
Detail of HDD partition
enable
Entering SST menu or USB menu

Select "ALL"
All partition format same time.
Select "BOOTDEV"
Only BOOTDEV is erased.
enable
enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
T-10-28
Selecting "CHK-TYPE1" means selecting four partitions.

APL_GEN Details of universal data
Category
Settings / Registration
Setting items for each menu in

Main Menu
Data
Preferences
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information Settings
Favorite Settings
Default Settings
Shortcut settings for Options
Previous Settings
Category
Setting for Advance Box
Setting for Web Access
Setting for Universal Data
Data
User information of Advanced Box
Registration information of Network Place
Web Access Setting information
Unsent document (which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission)
Job log information
Key and server certificate which are registered in Management Settings>Device
Settings>Certificate Setting
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values
PS font
T-10-29
LXI
Appendix > Soft counter specifications > Soft counter specifications
Soft counter specifications
No.
Soft counter specifications

The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows:
No.
000 to 099
100 to 199
200 to 299
300 to 399
400 to 499
500 to 599
600 to 699
700 to 799
800 to 899
900 to 999
Counter Details
Remote copy
Total
Copy
Print
Copy and print
Scan
Box
Reception print
Report print
Transmission
T-10-30
Meanings of symbols in tables

L: Large size (larger than B4 size)
S: Small size (smaller than B4 size)
S: Small size (smaller than B4 size)
It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4_L_CNT) so that
the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.
Copy: Local copy + remote copy
Copy A: Local copy + remote copy + box print
Print: PDL print + report print + box print
Print A: PDL print + report print
Scan: Black and white scan + color scan
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
071
072
073
074
081
082
083
084
101
102
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
LXII
Counter Details
Remote copy (full color 1)
Remote copy (full color 2)
Remote copy (mono color 1)
Remote copy (mono color 2)
Remote copy (black and white 1)
Remote copy (black and white 2)
Remote copy (full color / large)
Remote copy (full color / small)
Remote copy (mono color / large)
Remote copy (mono color / small)
Remote copy (black and white / large)
Remote copy(black and white / small)
Remote copy (full color + mono color / large)
Remote copy(full color + mono color / small)
Remote copy (full color + mono color 2)
Remote copy(full color + mono color 1)
Remote copy (full color / large / double sided)
Remote copy (full color / small / double sided)
Remote copy (mono color / large / double sided)
Remote copy (mono color / small / double sided)
Remote copy (black and white / large / double sided)
Remote copy (black and white / small / double sided)
Toner bottle black
Toner bottle yellow
Toner bottle magenta
Toner bottle cyan
Toner bottle black + Remove the toner bottle black
Toner bottle yellow + Remove the toner bottle yellow
Toner bottle magenta + Remove the toner bottle magenta
Toner bottle cyan + Remove the toner bottle cyan
Total 1
Total 2
Total(large)
Total (small)
Total (full color2)
Total (full color2)
Total (black and white 1)
Total (black and white 2)
Total (mono color /large)
Total (mono color /small)
Total (black and white /large)
Total (black and white /small)
Total 1(double sided)
Total 2(double sided)
large (double sided)
LXII
No.
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
Counter Details
small (double sided)
Total (mono color 1)
Total (mono color 2)
Total (full color /large )
Total (full color /small)
Total (full color +mono color /large )
Total (full color +mono color /small)
Total (full color +mono color 2)
Total (full color +mono color 1)
Total A1
Total A2
Total A (large)
Total A (small)
Total A (full color 1)
Total A (full color 2)
Total A (black and white 1)
Total A (black and white 2)
Total A (mono color /large)
Total A (mono color /small)
Total A (black and white /large)
Total A (black and white /small)
Total A 1(double sided)
Total A 2(double sided)
large A (double sided)
small A (double sided)
Total A (mono color 1)
Total A (mono color 2)
Total A (full color /large )
Total A (full color /small)
Total A (full color +mono color /large )
Total A (full color +mono color /small)
Total A (full color +mono color 2)
Total A (full color +mono color 1)
Total B1
Total B2
Total B (large)
Total B (small)
Total B (full color 1)
Total B (full color 2)
Total B (black and white 1)
Total B (black and white 2)
Total B (mono color /large)
Total B (mono color /small)
Total B (black and white /large)
Total B (black and white /small)
No.
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
LXIII
Counter Details
Total B1 (double sided)
Total B2 (double sided)
largeB (double sided)
smallB (double sided)
Total B (mono color 1)
Total B (mono color 2)
Total B (full color /large )
Total B (full color /small)
Total B (full color +mono color /large )
Total B (full color +mono color /small)
Total B (full color +mono color 2)
Total B (full color +mono color 1)
Copy (Total 1)
Copy (Total 2)
Copy (large)
Copy (small)
Copy A (Total 1)
Copy A (Total 2)
Copy A (large)
Copy A (small)
Local copy (Total 1)
Local copy (Total 2)
Local copy (large)
Local copy (small)
Copy (full color 1)
Copy (full color 2)
Copy (mono color 1)
Copy (mono color 2)
Copy (black and white 1)
Copy (black and white 2)
Copy (full color /large)
Copy (full color /small)
Copy (mono color /large)
Copy (mono color /small)
Copy (black and white /large)
Copy (black and white /small)
Copy (full color +mono color /large)
Copy (full color +mono color /small)
Copy (full color +mono color /2)
Copy (full color +mono color /1)
Copy (full color /large/double sided )
Copy (full color /small/double sided )
Copy (mono color /large/double sided )
Copy (mono color /small/double sided )
Copy (black and white /large/double sided )
LXIII
No.
238
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
Counter Details
Copy (black and white /small/double sided )
Copy A (full color 1)
Copy A (full color 2)
Copy A (mono color 1)
Copy A (mono color 2)
Copy A (black and white 1)
Copy A (black and white 2)
Copy A (full color /large)
Copy A (full color /small)
Copy A (mono color /large)
Copy A (mono color /small)
Copy A (black and white /large)
Copy A (black and white /small)
Copy A (full color +mono color /large)
Copy A (full color +mono color /small)
Copy A (full color +mono color 2)
Copy A (full color +mono color 1)
Copy A (full color /large/double sided )
Copy A (full color /small/double sided )
Copy A (mono color /large/double sided )
Copy A (mono color /small/double sided )
Copy A (black and white /large/double sided )
Copy A (black and white /small/double sided )
Local copy (full color 1)
Local copy (full color 2)
Local copy (mono color 1)
Local copy (mono color 2)
Local copy (black and white 1)
Local copy (black and white 2)
Local copy (full color /large)
Local copy (full color /small)
Local copy (mono color /large)
Local copy (mono color /small)
Local copy (black and white /large)
Local copy (black and white /small)
Local copy (full color +mono color /large)
Local copy (full color +mono color /small)
Local copy (full color +mono color 2)
Local copy (full color +mono color 1)
Local copy (full color /large/double sided )
Local copy (full color /small/double sided )
Local copy (mono color /large/double sided )
Local copy (mono color /small/double sided )
Local copy (black and white /large/double sided )
Local copy (black and white /small/double sided )
No.
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
LXIV
Counter Details
Print (Total 1)
Print (Total 2)
Print (large )
Print (small)
Print A(Total 1)
Print A(Total 2)
Print A(large )
Print A(small)
Print (full color 1)
Print (full color 2)
Print (mono color 1)
Print (mono color 2)
Print (black and white 1)
Print (black and white 2)
Print (full color /large )
Print (full color /small)
Print (mono color /large )
Print (mono color /small)
Print (black and white /large )
Print (black and white /small)
Print (full color +mono color /large )
Print (full color +mono color /small)
Print (full color +mono color /2)
Print (full color +mono color /1)
Print (full color /large /double sided)
Print (full color /small/double sided)
Print (mono color /large /double sided)
Print (mono color /small/double sided)
Print (black and white /large /double sided)
Print (black and white /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (Total 1)
PDLPrint (Total 2)
PDLPrint (large )
PDLPrint (small)
PDLPrint (full color 1)
PDLPrint (full color 2)
PDLPrint (mono color 1)
PDLPrint (mono color 2)
PDLPrint (black and white 1)
PDLPrint (black and white 2)
PDLPrint (full color /large )
PDLPrint (full color /small)
PDLPrint (mono color /large )
PDLPrint (mono color /small)
PDLPrint (black and white /large )
LXIV
No.
346
351
352
353
354
355
356
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
601
602
603
604
Counter Details
PDLPrint (black and white /small)
PDLPrint (full color /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (full color /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (mono color /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (mono color /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (black and white /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (black and white /small/double sided)
Copy + print (full color /large)
Copy + print (full color /small)
Copy + print (black and white/large)
Copy + print (black and white/small)
Copy + print (black and white2)
Copy + print (black and white1)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /large)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /small)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /2)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /1)
Copy + print (large)
Copy + print (small)
Copy + print (2)
Copy + print (1)
Copy + print (mono color /large)
Copy + print (mono color /small)
Copy + print (full color /large/double sided)
Copy + print (full color /small/double sided)
Copy + print (mono color /large/double sided)
Copy + print (mono color /small/double sided)
Copy + print (black and white/large/double sided)
Copy + print (black and white/small/double sided
Scan (Total 1)
Scan (Total 2)
Scan (large)
Scan (small )
Black and white Scan (Total 1)
Black and white Scan (Total 2)
Black and white Scan (large)
Black and white Scan (small )
Color scan (Total 1)
Color scan (Total 2)
Color scan (large)
Color scan (small )
Box print (Total 1)
Box print (Total 2)
Box print (large)
Box print (small)
No.
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
631
632
633
634
635
636
639
640
641
642
645
646
651
652
655
656
701
702
703
704
705
706
709
LXV
Counter Details
Box print (full color 1)
Box print (full color 2)
Box print (mono color 1)
Box print (mono color 2)
Box print (black and white 1)
Box print (black and white 2)
Box print (full color /large)
Box print (full color /small)
Box print (mono color /large)
Box print (mono color /small)
Box print (black and white /large)
Box print (black and white /small)
Box print (full color +mono color /large)
Box print (full color +mono color /small)
Box print (full color +mono color 2)
Box print (full color +mono color 1)
Box print (full color /large/double sided )
Box print (full color /small/double sided )
Box print (mono color /large/double sided )
Box print (mono color /small/double sided )
Box print (black and white /large/double sided )
Box print (black and white /small/double sided )
memory media print (Total 1)
memory media print (Total 2)
memory media print(large)
memory media print(small)
memory media print (full color 1)
memory media print (full color 2)
memory media print(black and white 1)
memory media print(black and white 2)
memory media print(full color/large)
memory media print(full color/small)
memory media print(mono color /large)
memory media print(mono color /small)
memory media print(full color /large/double sided)
memory media print(full color /small/double sided)
memory media print(black and white /large/double sided)
memory media print(black and white /small/double sided)
Reception print (Total 1)
Reception print (Total 2)
Reception print(large)
Reception print(small)
Reception print (full color 1)
Reception print (full color 2)
Reception print(black and white 1)
LXV
No.
710
711
712
715
716
721
722
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
Counter Details
Reception print(black and white 2)
Reception print(full color/large)
Reception print(full color/small)
Reception print(mono color /large)
Reception print(mono color /small)
Reception print(full color /large/double sided)
Reception print(full color /small/double sided)
Reception print(black and white /large/double sided)
Reception print(black and white /small/double sided)
Advanced Box Print (Total 1)
Advanced Box Print (Total 2)
Advanced Box Print(large)
Advanced Box Print(small)
Advanced Box Print (full color 1)
Advanced Box Print (full color 2)
Advanced Box Print(black and white 1)
Advanced Box Print(black and white 2)
Advanced Box Print(full color/large)
Advanced Box Print(full color/small)
Advanced Box Print(mono color /large)
Advanced Box Print(mono color /small)
Advanced Box Print(full color /large/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(full color /small/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Network Print(Total 1)
Network Print(Total 2)
Network Print(large)
Network Print(small)
Network Print(full color 1)
Network Print(full color 2)
Network Print(black and white 1)
Network Print(black and white 2)
Network Print(full color/large)
Network Print(full color/small)
Network Print(mono color /large)
Network Print(black and white/small)
Network Print(full color /large/double sided)
Network Print(full color /small/double sided)
Network Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Network Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Mobile Print(Total 1)
Mobile Print(Total 2)
Mobile Print(large)
Mobile Print(small)
No.
Counter Details
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
801
802
803
804
805
806
809
810
811
812
815
816
821
822
825
826
915
916
917
918
921
922
929
930
937
938
939
940
945
946
959
960
961
Mobile Print(full color 1)

Mobile Print(full color 2)
Mobile Print(black and white 1)
Mobile Print(black and white 2)
Mobile Print(full color/large)
Mobile Print(full color/small)
Mobile Print(black and white /large)
Mobile Print(black and white/small)
Mobile Print(full color /large/double sided)
Mobile Print(full color /small/double sided)
Mobile Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Mobile Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Report print (Total 1)
Report print (Total 2)
Report print (large )
Report print (small )
Report print (full color 1)
Report print (full color 2)
Report print (black and white 1)
Report print (black and white 2)
Report print (full color /large )
Report print (full color /small )
Report print (black and white /large )
Report print (black and white /small )
Report print (full color /large /double sided )
Report print (full color /small /double sided )
Report print (black and white /large /double sided )
Report print (black and white /small /double sided )
Transmission scan total 2(color )
Transmission scan total 2(black and white)
Box scan (color )
Box scan (black and white)
Remote scan (color )
Remote scan (black and white)
Transmission scan / E-mail (color )
Transmission scan / E-mail (black and white)
Media Scan (Color)
Media Scan (black and white)
Application Scan(Total 1)
LXVI
LXVI
No.
962
963
964
965
LXVII
Counter Details
Application Black and white Scan(Total 1)
Application Color Scan(Total 1)
SuperBoxLocal Scan (Color)
SuperBoxLocal Scan(Black and white)
T-10-31
LXVII
Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure
LXVIII
Removal
Work Procedure
If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if
Removal
Overview
User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users
can recognize.
By using the copy, print, or send function, there is also information left on the HDD of
necessary.
User data delete procedure

Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize
Select a deletion mode
If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used,
select the default "Once with 0 (Null) Data".
MFPs that is generally not recognizable but can be recovered as documents. (Refer to the
illustration on the next page.)
For security, the user mode is provided to delete data on SRAM and perform overwrite
deletion to render user data on HDD unrecoverable.
User data delete

To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize
All Data/Settings in user mode. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns user mode
setting values to their factory defaults.
Usually, one overwrite is enough. Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases
the time required for the deletion operation.
Note:
When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are
initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced. If MEAP application may be
used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP application and
uninstall it in advance.
Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
F-10-19
Deletion of Service Mode Settings

The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the
service mode setting values should be changed back to the default values before removing
the machine.
Note:
When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the
SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 are deleted. For the items to be deleted, refer to the
backup list.
Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings
to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal operation the next time, the operation performed at
installation is necessary.
Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
LXVIII
LXIX
Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values

Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT
F-10-20
Note:
When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for
the user data, initialize all the data.
LXIX

Canon IR ADV C5255 ServiceManual E R11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon IR ADV C5255 ServiceManual E R11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rev. 1.

imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 Series

inconsistent with local law.

of the individual companies.

edition of this manual.

consent of Canon Inc.

CANON INC. 2012

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Remove the claw.

Insert the claw.

Check the noise.

Use the bundled part.

Disconnect the connector.

Push the part.

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

Connect the connector.

Plug the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire

Set the cable/wire to the

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

Service Information bulletins.

About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-4

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-5

Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2

Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2

Controller System -------------------------------------------------------------2-5

Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-31

Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-44

Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-81

Pickup Feed System-------------------------------------------------------- 2-93

Product feature---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5

External View------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9

External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 2-109

Various Controls------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-109

Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-134

Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-203

Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-203

4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of Cover-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2

Main Controller--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-63

Removing the HDD----------------------------------------------------------------4-63

Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 4-78

Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 4-86

Removing the Toner Filter-------------------------------------------------------4-86

Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit--------------------------------------4-92

Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-149

Removing the Fixing Assembly----------------------------------------------- 4-149

Pickup Feed System------------------------------------------------------ 4-157

Cleaning the Registration Roller--------------------------------------------- 4-158

Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board ---- 4-187

The kind of data to handle----------------------------------------------------- 4-187

DC controller PCB------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4

Image Formation System----------------------------------------------------5-5

Pickup Feed System----------------------------------------------------------5-8

Geometric Characteristics Adjustment---------------------------------------- 5-8

Initial check items list-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2

Troubleshooting items list--------------------------------------------------------- 6-7

Version upgrade-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-17

Controller Self Diagnosis------------------------------------------------- 6-102

Controller Self Diagnosis------------------------------------------------------- 6-102

Scope of Application------------------------------------------------------------ 6-113

Jam Code---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-94